ROSENTHAL’S 

CONNON-SENSE  METHOD 

OF 

PRAaiCAL  LINGUISTRY 

THE 

Spanish  Language 

BY 

DR.  RICHARD  S.  ROSENTHAL 

Author  of  the  Meisterschaft  System,  etc.,  etc. 

Haulenbeek  Corrected  Edition 
Revised  1917 

IN  TEN  PARTS 


NEW  YORK  : : LONDON 
The  International  College  of  Languages 


COPYRIGHT,  1905, 

BY 

THE  INTERNATIONAL  COLLEGE  OF  LANGUAGES. 


Entered  at 

aTATlONKRS'  HALL,  LONDON,  ENO. 


RV;y 

r.  I 


1 1 1:1; /-C  í 

oi  m 


V 

I 

V 

Or 

> 

N 


H 


FRENCH,  GERMAN. 
SPANISHorITALIAN 


^ To  S P K A K it,  to  under- 
stand it,  to  read  it,  to  write  it, 
there  is  but  one  best  way. 

You  must  hear  it  SPOKEN 
correctly,  over  and  over,  till 
your  EAR  knows  it. 

^ You  must  see  it  printed  cor- 
rectly till  your  eye  knows  it. 

^ You  must  T A ly  K it  and 
write  it. 

q All  this  can  be  done  best  by 
the 

Language-Phone  Method 

In  connection  with  Dr.  Rosenthal’s  Common 
Sense  Method  of  Practical  Linguistry 

^ With  this  method  you  buy  a native  professor  outright.  You  own  him 
He  SPEAKS  as  you  choose,  slowly  or  quickly ; when  you  choose,  night 
or  day ; for  a few  minutes  or  hours  at  a time. 

^ Any  one  can  learn  a foreign  language  whoHEARS  it  SPOKEN often 
enough ; and  by  this  method  you  can  HEAR  it  as  often  as  you  like. 
The  method  has  been  recommended  by  well-known  members  of  the 
faculties  of  the  following  universities  and  colleges:  Yale,  Celumbia» 
Fordham,  Brown,  Harvard,  Pennsylvania,  Boston,  Princeton,  Cornell, 
Syracuse,  Manhattan,  Johns  Hopkins,  Virginia,  Colorado,  Michigan, 
Chicago,  Minnesota,  De  La  Salle,  St.  Josephs,  St.  Francis  Xavier, 

We  ask  you  to  investip^ate  this  marvelous  system^  and  read  what  its 
users  say.  Mail  Inquiry  Coupon  and  it  will  bring  you  booklet^ 
explanatory  literature  and  facsimile  letters  from  men  who  know. 


O 

Si 


Please  mail  to  me  full  particulars  concerning  the  Language- 
Phone  Method  for  Acquiring  French,  German,  Spanish  or  Italian. 

NAME  

POST  OFFICE 

STATE 


the:  la.ngua.ge  phone  method 

223  Hess  Building,  554  Fourth  Avenue,  New  York 


985158 


https://archive.org/details/rosenthalscommon110rose 


’ j 


Teachers^  students,  and  book-reviewers  are  requested  to 
carefully  read  the  ^^Explanation  of  RosenthaFs  Common- 
Sense  Method  of  Practical  Linguistry  ” before  taking  up  the 
system  itself 


;:C''  hi- 


Explanation  of  Rosendial^s  G>mmon-Sense 
Method  of  Practical  Linguistry. 

Some  years  ago,  in  an  address  delivered  by  an  author- 
ity before  the  students  of  one  of  our  prominent  univer- 
sities, the  futility  of  the  plan  of  language  teaching  pursued 
in  our  colleges  was  pointedly  set  forth. 

In  a very  clear,  conclusive,  and  elaborate  argument  he 
showed  that  the  study  of  Latin  and  Greek,  as  taught,  was 
practically  worthless ; that  few  of  our  students  could  read 
the  ancient  classics  with  ease  and  enjoyment,  and  that  not 
even  the  teachers  themselves  were  able  to  use  these 
tongues  colloquially. 

He  closed  his  speech  with  an  eloquent  appeal  to  the 
college  authorities  that  greater  attention  should  hence- 
forth be  paid  to  the  study  of  modern  languages,  and 
many  of  our  leading  universities  have  since  then  en- 
deavored to  act  upon  his  advice. 

But  were  his  suggestions  carried  out  in  the  right 
spirit  by  any  of  our  schools?  Have  the  results  been 
reached  which  he  foretold  and  expected?  Can  our  pres- 
ent college  graduates  express  themselves  with  fluency 
and  correctness  in  French,  German,  Spanish  or  Italian? 
Or,  isn’t  it  rather  a fact  that,  despite  all  efforts,  the 
modern  tongues  have  remained  just  as  lifeless  to  our 
students  as  the  so-called  dead  languages? 

In  our  times,  when  international  intercourse  is  con- 
stantly increasing,  when  steam  and  electricity  are 
uniting  the  whole  world  into  one  great  brotherhood, 
when  the  deep  thoughts  of  philosophy  and  the  marvel- 
ous discoveries  of  science  are  no  longer  confined  to  any 


6 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


one  tongue,  but  are  almost  simultaneously  expressed  and 
carried  out  by  all  the  great  civilized  nations, 

THE  PRACTICAL  MASTERY  OF  MODERN  LANGUAGES 

has  become  an  absolute  necessity. 

It  is  no  longer  sufficient  to  teach  the  pupils  the 
intricacies  of  the  German  declensions  or  the  grammatical 
technicalities  of  the  French  language — the  present  civiU 
ization  demands  higher  and  more  practical  results. 

LINGUISTRY  MUST  BE  TAUGHT  IN  PLACE  OF  PHILOLOGY. 

Our  students  must  not  only  know  the  grammatical 
peculiarities  of  French  and  German,  but  must  be  able 
to  use  foreign  languages  just  as  readily  and  correctly  as 
their  own;  they  must  not  only  be  acquainted  with  the 
classical  mas  ter- works  of  France  or  Germany,  but  must 
speak  and  understand  the  practical  every-day  language 
of  common  life. 

Everybody  knows  how  languages  are  taught  in  our 
seminaries,  schools  and  universities. 

For  four,  five,  frequently  seven  years  our  young  men 
and  women  study  various  text-books,  manuals  and  gram- 
mars. They  learn  to  parse,  to  analyze,  to  decline  and 
conjugate;  they  can  repeat  whole  pages  of  grammatical 
rules  and  foreign  words  by  heart;  they  are  capable  of 
taking  a piece  of  classical  French  or  German  and  render- 
ing it  into  smooth  English ; they  frequently  know  the 
grammars  of  these  tongues  better  even  than  the  natives 
themselves,  and  yet  on 

GOING  ABROAD  ' 

they  are  unable  to  ask  for  the  common  necessities  of  life 
in  idiomatic  French  or  German,  nor  do  they  understand 
the  polite  utterances  of  even  a waiter  or  a chamber- 
maid. 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


7 


LANGUAGE  AND  GRAMMAR 

are  in  no  sense  synonymous,  though  our  prevailing 
school  methods  might  lead  us  to  suppose  so. 

Grammar  is  the  science  of  language,  and  while  nec- 
essary and  desirable  is  by  no  means  so  important  as  the 
ability  of  speaking  the  language  itself. 

Can  any  one  doubt  this? 

Look  around  at  the  majority  of  people  you  meet. 
Listen  to  their  speech  and  examine  it.  Do  they  know 
the  rules  of  English  grammar?  Do  not  the  children  of 
educated  persons  express  themselves  correctly  without 
ever  having  studied  a single  line  of  grammatical  defi- 
nitions? Must  not  every  one — cultivated  or  unrefined 
— speak  and  understand  English  first,  before  .he  can 
take  up  the  grammatical  study  of  his  mother- tongue? 
Isn’t  it  true  that  if  grammar  were  a necessary  element 
of  speech  nine-tenths  of  the  American  nation  would 
surely  be  dumb? 

Examine  now  in  the  light  of  these  suggestions  any  of 
our  school  methods,  and  it  will  at  once  be  apparent  why 
I enter  a solemn  protest  against  them. 

They  are  one  and  all 

ANALYTICAL  SYSTEMS. 

They  give  a multiplicity  of  rules  and  exceptions  which 
the  student  cannot  possibly  remember  when  trying  to 
speak  in  a foreign  language ; they  teach  theory  of  speech 
instead  of  practising  it ; they  tear  apart  instead  of  build- 
ing up;  in  a word,  they  educate  philologists  and  gram- 
marians and  never  try  to  impart  practical  linguistry. 

THE  STUDY  OF  GRAMMAR  IS  INDISPENSABLE, 

‘n^ut  it  must  be  taught,”  as  the  great  Erasmus  long  ago 


8 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


advised,  the  proper  time  and  kept  within  proper 
limits/’ 

Colloquial  mastery  must  precede  it.  Grammar  will 
then  no  longer  confuse,  but  assist  the  pupil;  it  will  cease 
to  be  a drudgery  and  hindrance  and  will  become  a plain 
and  simple  explanation  of  forms  and  idioms  already 
mastered;  it  will  no  longer  be  an  uncertain  foundation, 
but  will  adorn,  complete  and  cap  the  edifice  which  has 
been  reared  by  practical  linguistic  exercises. 

This  is 

THE  TRUE  OFFICE  OF  GRAMMAR 

and  in  this  sense  it  is  taught  throughout  my  method. 

I have  in  my  possession  a letter  from  the  celebrated 
explorer  of  Greek  antiquities, 

THE  LATE  DR.  HEINRICH  SCHLIEMANN, 

whom  I had  the  privilege  of  knowing  intimately,  and 
whose  opinion  as  to  the  merits  of  any  language  system 
is  of  unquestionable  value,  he  having  been  one  of  the 
most  distinguished  linguists  of  his  day. 

‘'Your  method,”  he  writes,  “is  the  only  correct  one, 
because  it  is  a scientific  adaptation  of 
nature’s  own  way, 

by  which  all  persons,  whether  children  or  adults,  edu- 
cated or  otherwise,  rapidly  and  correctly  acquire  the 
language  which  they  constantly  hear  and  which  they  are 
instinctively  impelled  to  imitate  when  resident  in  a 
foreign  country.” 

In  this  cosmopolitan  land  of  ours  every  intelligent 
observer  must  have  noticed  the  ease  and  rapidity  with 
which  foreigners  master  our  mother-tongue. 

They  have  neither  books,  teachers,  nor  interpreters; 
they  may  be  Russians,  Germans,  Frenchmen,  Spaniards, 
or  Swedes ; they  generally  understand  nothing  about  the 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


9 


principles  of  grammar ; they  may  be  too  young  or  unedu- 
cated even  to  read  or  write  their  own  language;  yet, 
despite  all,  they  invariably,  within  a few  months,  master 
sufficient  English  not  only  to  make  themselves  understood, 
but  to  speak  grammatically  and  correctly,  provided  they 
have  mixed  with  the  cultured  classes  of  society,  and,  of 
course,  they  speak  faultily  and  badly,  if  they  have  had  the 
misfortune  of  associating  with  uneducated  people. 

From  these  facts  it  is  obvious  that  some  system  must 
exist  which  we  intuitively  follow  when  we  reside  abroad, 
and  which  always  and  under  all  circumstances  leads  to 
complete  control  of  a foreign  tongue. 

The  first  question  before  us  therefore  is : 

WHAT  IS  THIS  SYSTEM  WHICH  WE  INSTINCTIVELY  FOL- 
LOW WHEN  RESIDING  IN  A FOREIGN  COUNTRY? 

If  you  lived,  for  instance,  in  Paris,  or  Berlin,  or  the 
city  of  Mexico,  or  had  gone,  like  Stanley,  to  darkest 
Africa,  or,  like  those  poor  sailors  of  the 
the  wilds  of  Siberia,  in  acquiring  a foreign  language  you 
would  invariably  pass  through  the  following  stages  of 
experience : 

At  first,  the  mind  is  confused  by  the  mutiplicity  of 
foreign  sounds  heard.  We  try  to  fathom  the  ideas  which 
are  expressed  in  the  unknown  tongue ; failing  to  do  so  we 
naturally  get  bewildered. 

This  state  of  mental  ccmfusion — which,  by  the  way, 
is  exceedingly  disagreeable — is  generally  passed  in  about 
three  or  four  weeks. 

The  ear,  by  that  time,  has  grown  accustomed  to  some 
of  these  sounds,  and  quite  instinctively  we  begin  to  im- 
itate that  PHRASE  which  we  have  heard  most  frequently 


10 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


pronounced  by  the  persons  surrounding  us,  and  which, 
at  the  same  time,  is  most  necessary  to  our  wants. 

Now,  which  is  our  greatest  necessity?  Which  of  the 
various  needs  to  which  humanity  is  subject  is  of  para- 
mount importaííice  to  young  and  old  alike? 

It  is  nourishment,  food,  eating  and  drinking. 

Consequently  the  first  sentence  which  is  usually  mas- 
tered is  a phrase  like  this : ''Please  give  me  something  to 
eat,'^  or  "Please  bring  me  the  bill  of  fare,''  or  "Pray  give 
me  a steak  and  some  potatoes." 

Not  a very  intellectual  phrase,  but  a sentence  abso- 
lutely necessary  to  every  one;  and,  let  me  observe  that 
nature,  through  the  mastery  of  this  first  simple  phrase, 
has  pointed  out 

THE  TRUE  AND  ONLY  WAY 

in  which  alone  languages  can  be  learned. 

It  is  through  sentences,  and  never  through  single, 
isolated  words.  Disconnected  words  are  never  language. 

Nature  teaches  phrases ; grammarians  and  books, 
blind  to  the  instructions  which  nature  has  placed  so 
plainly  before  them,  give  words,  and  most  absurdly  of 
all,  isolated  nouns,  which — as  experience  teaches — are 
not  by  any  means  the  most  important  branch  of  the 
language.  The  verbs  are  the  soul  and  backbone  of  all 
speech,  and  it  is  by  and  through  the  proper  study  of 
verbs  that  mastery  of  a language  can  alone  be  reached. 

But  to  return  to  our  sentence : "Please  bring  me  the 
bill  of  fare." 

Not  knowing  any  other  expressions,  we  naturally 
cling  to  these  words  and  use  them  again  and  again  for 
our  various  necessities. 

For  instance,  when  you  want  some  matches,  or  an 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


11 


umbrella,  or  some  towels,  instead  of  saying  to  the  at- 
tendant, ''Please  bring  me  the  bill  of  fare/'  you  will 
point  to  the  object  and  address  him  thus:  "Please  bring 
me 

Consider  here  the  simplicity  of  nature’s  mode  of 
teaching.  By  mastering  this  first  little  phrase  nature 
has  furnished  you  a "sentence-mould"  by  the  use  of 
which  thousands  of  correct  and  absolutely  necessary  sen- 
tences may  be  composed,  as  is  plainly  seen  by  the  phrase 
given. 

The  attendant,  understanding  your  abbreviated  phrase 

and  gesture,  "Please  bring  me will  give 

you  the  words,  "some  matches,"  "an  umbrella,"  or  "some 
towels,"  in  Spanish,  Chinese,  or  Teloogoo,  wherever  you 
may  happen  to  reside;  you  repeat  these  new  words  a 
number  of  times  until  by  repetition  and  reiteration  they 
come  quite  naturally  to  you.  In  this  way  we  go  on  from 
day  to  day,  in  fact  from  hour  to  hour,  until  finally,  at 
the  end  of  a few  months,  we  are  capable  of  expressing 
ourselves  quite  readily  and  fluently. 

This  is  the  process  by  which  sounds  become  language 
This  is  the  mode  in  which  any  language  is  mastered 
when  we  reside  abroad.  This  is  the  way  in  which  our 
missionaries,  for  instance,  when  they  go  to  countries  of 
whose  language  no  civilized  man  has  the  faintest  idea, 
and  of  whose  grammar  everybody  is  ignorant;  this,  I 
say,  is  the  way  in  which  our  missionaries,  in  one  year’s 
stay,  master  a language  so  fully  that  they  not  only  can 
preach  the  Gospel  therein,  but  abstract  from  a hitherto 
unknown  tongue  a scientific  theory  or  grammar. 

They  have  not  studied  a single  book,  have  never  seen 
a written  sentence,  have  never  learned  a grammatical 


12 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


rule  of  this  unknown,  uncivilized  tongue;  and  why  in- 
deed should  they? 

No  one  will  ever  learn  a language  by  studying 
isolated  words,  disconnected  expressions,  and  abstract 
rules. 

"‘A  man  is  not  a carpenter  and  cannot  pass  himself 
off  for  one,'’  says  a celebrated  French  writer,  '‘simply 
because  he  has  just  purchased  a complete  outfit  of  car- 
penter's tools.  The  mere  acquisition  of  the  tools  has 
not  advanced  him  a single  step  in  his  art." 

So  also  it  is  with  the  student  who  has  mastered  only 
the  grammatical  technicalities  and  isolated  words  of  a 
language. 

But  the  way  I have  endeavored  to  describe,  is 
nature's  own  mode 

of  acquiring  a foreign  language,  and  presents  a rational» 
simple,  and  in  fact  the  only  true  system.  This  is 

PRACTICAL  LINGUISTRY, 

and  my  method  follows  it  as  closely  as  possible. 

But  in  following  nature  my  method  does  not  copy  or 
repeat  nature,  otherwise  it  would  no  longer  be  a method. 

A true  linguistic  method  is  essentially  a systematic 
art.  Now,  art  can  never  in  itself  be  natural.  It  is 
inspired  by  nature,  but  it  exists  only  in  so  far  as  it 
does  better  than  nature.  To  become  art,  nature  must 
be  recast  in  the  mould  of  a human  concept.  To  become 
a method,  it  must  be  scientifically  adapted  to  the  require- 
ments of  students  who  wish  to  master  a foreign  tongue 
while  remaining  in  their  own  country.  It  must  in  no 
case  be  a "natural"  method,  but  must  follow  and  sys- 
tematize nature.  It  must  produce  the  same  results  which 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


13 


nature  does,  but  in  a much  shorter  time  and  by  the  sim- 
plest and  yet  most  systematic  means. 

“Steam,”  says  Frangois  Gouin,  “is  a natural  force, 
but  the  railway  train  set  in  motion  by  man  is  not  a 
natural  fact ; it  is  a thing  which  is  not  in  nature  and  far 
superior  to  that  which  would  be  realized  by  Nature  if 
left  to  herself.”  . 

The  same  is  the  case  with  a good  language  method. 
The  system  that  cannot  compete  with  nature  both  in 
quantity  and  quality  of  its  products,  would  indeed  be  de- 
fective. Its  results  must  be  superior  to  those  of  nature, 
and  its  means  systematic,  simple,  scientific  and  both 
psychologically  and  philologically  true. 

In  1872  I was  appointed  General  Interpreter  of  New 
York.  To  my  horror,  I very  soon  found  that  though  I 
understood  the  grammars  of  about  twenty  languages 
and  could  read  and  translate  them  without  difficulty,  I 
was  nevertheless  incapable  of  carrying  on  an  hour’s  con- 
versation in  any  of  them. 

Colloquial  mastery  of  numerous  tongues  was  an  abso- 
lute necessity  to  me,  and  by  degrees  I began  to  develop 
a system  of  study  for  myself,  and  became  a linguist. 

The  first  results  of  my  investigations  were  contained 
in  my  Meisterschaft,  i,  e..  Mastery  System. 

Despite  its  phenomenal  success  no  one  can  be  more 
conscious  of  its  glaring  faults,  imperfections  and  crudi- 
ties than  I am.  It  was  the  work  of  an  immature  man 
who  had  not  investigated  his  subject  sufficiently,  and  it 
should  be  judged  as  such. 

Science  is  ever  progressive  and  must  be  so  from  its 
very  nature. 

“The  wisdom  of  the  ancients,”  says  Prof.  Henry 
Drummond,  ^where  is  it  T It  is  wholly  gone.  A school- 


14 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


boy  to-day  knows  more  than  Sir  Isaac  Newton  knew. 
His  knowledge  has  vanished  away.  You  put  yesterday’s 
■newspaper  in  the  fire.  Its  knowledge  has  vanished  away. 
You  buy  the  old  editions  of  the  great  encyclopedias  for  a 
few  cents.  Their  knowledge  has  vanished  away.  The 
science  and  philosophy  of  this  day  will  soon  be  old.  But 
yesterday  in  the  University  of  Edinburgh,  the  great  fig- 
ure in  the  faculty  was  Sir  James  Simpson,  the  discoverer 
of  chloroform.  The  other  day  his  successor  and  nephew, 
Professor  Simpson,  was  asked  by  the  Librarian  of  the 
University  to  go  to  the  Library  and  pick  out  the  books 
on  his  subject  that  were  no  longer  needed.  And  his 
reply  to  the  Librarian  was  this:  ‘Take  away  every  text^ 
book  that  is  more  than  ten  years  old,  and  put  it  down  in 
the  cellar/  Sir  James  Simpson  was  a great  authority 
only  a few  years  ago.  Men  came  from  all  parts  of  the 
earth  to  consult  him,  almost  the  whole  teaching  of 
that  time  is  consigned  by  the  science  of  to-day  to  ob- 
livion, and  in  every  branch  of  science  it  is  the  same.” 

The  old  has  to  give  way  to  the  new.  The  greater 
knowledge  of  to-day  supersedes  the  imperfect  works  of 
the  past.  Science  is  an  eternal  fire  to  which  each  thinker 
can  contribute  but  a small  brand. 

After  twenty  years  of  practical  experience  as  a teacher, 
and  aided  by  the  investigations  of  many  minds,  I have 
at  last  completed  a work  which  not  only  contains  a 
full  presentation  of  my  views  in  regard  to  rational  lin- 
guistry,  but  gives  such  practical  idiomatic  exercises,  vo- 
cabularies, and  conversations  as  will  make  the  book  what 
it  is  intended  to  be,  viz. : 

A VADE-MECUM  TO  ALL  LANGUAGE  STUDENTS. 

In  the  foregoing  pages  I have  endeavored  to  explain 


The  Rosenthal  Method, 


15 


Nature’s  way  for  the  acquisition  of  foreign  languages. 
Let  us  see  how 

THE  ROSENTHAL  METHOD  OF  PRACTICAL  LINGUISTRY 
follows  it : 

In  the  first  place  I divide  the  whole  language,  which 
is  infinite,  and  which  no  one,  not  even  a Shakespeare,  has 
ever  mastered  in  its  entirety,  into 

THE  LANGUAGE  OF  LITERATURE  AND  THE  LANGUAGE  OP 
EVERY  DAY  LIFE. 

A very  simple  and  rational  division,  and  yet,  despite 
its  evident  simplicity,  the  idea  has  never  been  acted  upon. 

What  part  of  English  is  used  by  the  generality  of 
people?  The  language  of  literature  or  the  expressions 
of  common  life  ? What  do  our  children  speak  when  they 
enter  school  and  receive  their  first  lessons  in  spelling 
and  reading?  The  language  of  every  day  life. 

They  understand,  and  must  be  able  to  understand 
and  follow  their  teachers,  before  they  can  proceed  to  the 
study  of  English  grammar.  They  must  know  common, 
every  day  English  before  they  can  appreciate  and  com- 
prehend the  beauties  of  Milton’s,  Shakespeare’s  and  Ten- 
nyson’s works. 

Consequently  I hold  that  in  studying  foreign  tongues 
we  must  first  acquire  a working  knowledge  of  practical 
every  day  French,  German,  Spanish  and  Italian  before  we 
can  enter  upon  the  study  of  classical  literature. 

Is  this  the  way  in  which  languages  are  taught  in  our 
schools  and  universities?  Decidedly  not!  How  do  our 
professors  instruct? 

After  the  students  have  stumbled  through  about  fifty 
pages  of  German  declensions  and  eii^hty  more  of  regu- 
lar and  irregular  conjugations,  the  teachers  suddenly  an- 


16 


The  Rosenthal  Method* 


notince  that  ‘'the  class  is  now  far  enough  advanced  to 
commence  the  study  of  Schiller's  Tell  or  Goethe's  Faust.” 

Goethe's  Faust,  indeed ! What  utter  absurdity ! We 
might  just  as  well  put  Hamlet  or  Paradise  Lost  in  our 
children's  hands  as  to  expect  mere  tyros  in  German  to 
appreciate  the  beautiful  style  and  deep  thoughts  of  Goethe 
or  Schiller. 

The  study  of  literature  can  be  pursued  only  after  the 
language  of  practical  life  has  been  acquired. 

This  is  the  first  point  to  be  insisted  upon. 

But  here  we  meet  immediately  with  a new  and  very 
great  difficulty. 

What  is  the  language  of  practical  life,  which  every 
child  speaks  and  understands?  Does  it  refer  to  exter- 
nal facts  only?  Or  is  it  not  rather  true  that  in  each  lan- 
guage there  are  two  languages,  one  referring  to  external 
objects  and  the  other  to  internal  sentiments  and  refiec- 
tions  ? 

Man  is  not  merely  an  animal.  He  does  not  only  per- 
ceive the  phenomena  of  the  external  world — as  all  ani- 
mals do  to  a higher  or  lesser  degree,  but  he  is  a think- 
ing, reasoning  being.  He  judges,  he  weighs,  he  receives 
this  and  rejects  that;  he  enjoys  certain  things  while 
others  pain  him;  he  believes  this  and  doubts  that;  he 
reasons  from  effect  to  cause;  he  ha^— to  use  the  biblical 
expression — eaten  the  fruit  of  the  tree  of  knowledge  and 
distinguishes  between  good  and  evil. 

Hence  we  have  an  objective  and  subjective  language. 

In  actual  life  these  two  cross  each  other  constantly 
and  are  so  closely  and  finely  interwoven  that  they  form 
so  to  say,  the  warp  and  the  woof  of  the  whole  texture. 

A true  language  method  must  therefore  deal  with 
these  two  brandies  from  the  very  start.  Mere  object- 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


17 


teaching — as  some  books  advocate — is  consequently 
wrong,  because  it  is  one-sided.  Side  by  side  these  two 
languages  must  progress,  working  into  one  grand  har- 
monious whole.  Only  thus  can  a real  method  be  devel- 
oped. 

Secondly : I divide  the  words  of  the  language  into  the 
necessary  and  unnecessary  on$s. 

This  is  a simple  and  common-sense  division. 

The  necessary  words,  the  expressions  which  all  men 
use  and  understand,  must  be  mastered  first,  before  more 
unusual  ones  are  taken  into  consideration. 

The  question  presents  itself  at  once: 

WHAT  WORDS  ARE  NECESSARY? 

Let  me  illustrate  my  meaning. 

Take,  for  instance,  the  three  words,  money,  fan  and 
chisel;  how  do  they  compare  with  each  other  ? 

The  word  money  is  so  important  that  no  one  can  get 
on  without  the  use — and  I might  add — the  substance  of 
it.  Everybody  has  to  employ  it  and  every  one  must  con- 
sequently know  it.  It  is  plainly  a necessary  word. 

Fan — our  second  example — ^belongs  to  a different  class 
of  expressions.  Though  no  doubt  necessary,  the  word,  as 
well  as  the  object  itself,  is  by  no  means  so  imperatively 
needful  as  money;  it  therefore  belongs  to  another  class, 
that  is  to  say,  two  words  which,  though  they  ought  to  be 
learned,  may  be  learned  later. 

Now,  take  our  third  example,  the  word  chisel.  A 
lady  might  live  for  twenty  years  in  France  without  hav- 
ing any  use  for  this  word,  while  to  a carpenter  it  would 
be  absolutely  necessary. 

The  word,  therefore — as  far  as  the  generality  of  stu- 


18  The  Rosenthal  Method. 

dents  is  concerned — ^belongs  to  the  class  of  unnecessary 
expressions. 

Now,  put  these  few  simple  remarks  to  the  test.  Take 
any  of 

OUR  TEXT-BOOKS,  GRAMMARS,  MANUALS,  OR  VOCABU- 
LARIES, 

and  what  do  we  find? 

In  the  first  place,  mere  grammatical  rules  and  tech- 
nicalities which,  though  very  important  in  themselves, 
teach  nothing  but  the  theory  or  science  of  language,  in- 
stead of  giving  us  LANGUAGE  ITSELF. 

Then  glance  at  the  vocabularies.  Do  they  teach  the 
necessary  expressions  of  common  life?  Or  doesn't  it 
rather  seem  as  if  the  author  had  drawn  the  words  at 
random  out  of  the  dictionary  more  with  the  view  of  giv- 
ing every  word  some  chance  of  representation  than  to 
teach  those  expressions  which  we  actually  need  and  must 
know? 

And  finally  look  at  the  examples!  Who  does  not 
know  how  the  majority  of  grammars  fill  page  after  page 
with  the  most  useless,  and  frequently  the  most  absurdly 
ridiculous  sentences  ? 

Imagine  plodding  through  pages  like  the  following, 
and  I wish  to  remark  that  I quote  verbatim  from  a widely- 
used  French  grammar: 

''I  have  a rose.  He  has  a book.  You  have  a stick. 
My  brother  has  a pen.  His  sister  has  an  apple/^  and  so 
forth,  through  fifty  pages. 

Think  of  learning  French  from  a so-called  ‘^Conver- 
sation Grammar"  published  a few  years  ago  in  New 
York,  and  from  which  I quote  the  first  four  ^^con- 
versations^^  only:  ‘'Where  are  the  monks?  They  are  in 
the  refectory.  Who  killed  the  elephant?  It  zvas  the  gro^ 


The  Rosenthal  Method.  19 

cer.  Where  is  the  bird?  It  is  sitting  on  the  blacksmith^ s 
shop?' 

Would  any  one  believe  that  such  stuflf  could  find  a 
publisher,  or  that  a book  like  this  would  be  used  in  any 
school  ? 

Or  let  us  examine  a German  grammar,  the  work  of  a 
well-known  teacher,  used  in  almost  every  High  School 
in  the  land.  I open  it  at  random,  and  here  is  the  state- 
ment I find: 

^^The  Italian  shoemaker  has  purchased  an  Egyptian 
antelope  from  the  Andalusian  merchant?' 

A truly  startling  sentence  condensing  the  splendors  of 
three  nationalities  in  one  grand  luminous  thought. 

I scarcely  venture  to  make  another  quotation  after  this 
sublime  effort  of  word  painting,  but  the  fourth  author, 
whose  works  I have  before  me,  has  composed  some 
phrases  worthy  to  be  preserved  as  curiosities!  Think 
of  studying  sentences  like  these : 

*'Has  the  baker  our  breads  No,  but  he  has  our  Une 
asses.  Has  he  our  nails  and  hammers?  No,  but  he  has 
our  good  loaves.  Hcrue  you  seen  the  red  cozv  of  the  sick 
general's  wife?  No,  I have  not  seen  the  red  cow  of  the  sick 
general's  wife,  but  I have  seen  the  ñerce  dog  of  your 
mother-in-law." 

Can  any  one  read  such  barren  nonsense  without  a 
smile?  Are  such  phrases  ever  used  by  rational  people? 
Is  this  the  language  of  practical  life? 

I readily  admit  that  all  school  methods  do  not  sin  as 
grievously  as  the  books  from  which  I quote,  but  they  are 
all  miore  or  less  tainted  with  the  same  defect,  and  ''not  one 
of  them,"  as  Macaulay  once  remarked,  "teaches  actual, 
living  speech." 

And  yet  actual,  living  speech  is  exactly  what  must  be 


20 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


taught.  What  .else  do  common-sense  people  wish  to 
acquire  ? 

Throughout  my  books  I have  endeavored  to  give 
nothing  but  useful  and  practical  phrases,  sentences 
which  we  are  in  the  habit  of  using  in  the  common  trans* 
actions  of  life,  expressions  which  every  one  must  em- 
ploy, be  he  merchant,  scholar,  physician,  lawyer  or 
tourist. 

It  is,  of  course,  self  evident  that  only 

A LIMITED  VOCABULARY 

can  be  employed  by  the  generality  of  mankind,  and  the 
question  arises  at  once : 

HOW  MANY  WORDS  ARE  NECESSARY  FOR  CONVERSATION  OH 
ALL  GENERAL  TOPICS? 

No  one  uses  the  450,000  words  which  we  find  in  the 
last  edition  of  the  Standard  Dictionary,  or  Century,  or 
Webster.  No  one  knows  them.  Open  your  dictionaries 
and  you  will  find  at  least  five  words  on  every  page  which 
you  either  do  not  know  at  all,  or,  at  any  rate,  so  im- 
perfectly that  their  meanings  have  to  be  explained  to 
you. 

Shakespeare,  the  greatest  mind  the  world  ever  pro- 
duced, had  only  12,000  words  at  his  command.  Milton 
ranks  next  to  him  with  about  11,000,  while  Carlyle,  de- 
spite his  drastic  style  and  numerous  original  word  for- 
mations, uses  but  9,000  words  in  all  his  works. 

THE  EXTENT  OF  OUR  EVERY  DAY  VOCABULARY 
is,  comparatively  speaking,  exceedingly  small.  I^epsius, 
the  famous  Egyptologist,  limits  the  number  of  words 
necessary  for  conversation  on  all  general  subjects  to 
600.  Prendergast  estimates  that  only  300  words  are 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


21 


used  by  the  generality  of  mankind,  and  Bayard  Taylor 
concludes  that  1,500  words  are  needed  for  practical  puj- 
poses. 

My  own  estimate  is  considerably  higher.  I base  it  on 
the  fluency  of  speech  attained  by  the  average  educated 
man,  and  feel  sure  that  at  least  4,000  words  are  employed 
in  the  common  transactions  of  life. 

Even  this  number  appears  at  first  glance  utterly  in- 
sufficient. If  you  were  to  count  the  single  words  thus  far 
used  in  my  introductory  remarks,  their  number  would  be 
far  in  excess  of  my  above  calculation.  But  you  must  con- 
sider how  frequently  the  same  words  occur  and  reoccur  ; 
that  with  40  words,  for  instance,  we  are  able  to  form 
1,024,000  sentences  of  20  words  each ; then  try  to  calculate 
how  many  phrases  could  be  constructed  with  4,000  words, 
and  you  will  surely  be  convinced  that  with  such  a vocabu- 
lary, properly  selected,  you  would  be  equipped  for  any 
and  all  transactions  of  life. 

‘‘Figures  cannot  lie,’’  says  the  proverb.  Nothing, 
however,  is  more  elastic  than  figures.  Just  listen  to  con- 
gressmen of  different  parties,  and  you  will  soon  find  that 
from  the  same  statistical  figures  diametrically  opposite 
results  can  be  proved.  Nothing  is  so  deceptive  as  fig- 
ures, and  those  given  by  me  are  no  exception ; in  fact, 
they  are  misleading,  for,  while  arithmetically  it  is  per- 
fectly correct,  that  with  40  words  we  can  form  1,024,000 
sentences  of  20  words  each,  in  practice  we  would  have 
to  strike  out  at  least  nine-tenths  of  these  phrases.  The 
words  would  appear  so  unnaturally  arranged  that  no  one 
could  use  them. 

But  this  apparent  drawback  does  not  affect  the  gen- 
eral result  of  my  estimate  in  the  slightest  degree.  One- 
tenth  of  the  enormous  number  of  sentences  which  can  be 


22 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


constructed  from  4,000  words  is  sufficient,  and  more  than 
sufficient,  for  any  man.  They  would  supply  him  with  a 
quantity  of  expressions  needed  in  all  walks  of  life.  They 
would  equip  you  for  all  practical  purposes,  whether  you 
stay  at  home  or  travel,  buy  or  sell,  in  pleading  or  preach- 
ing, in  places  of  amusement  or  worship,  in  the  halts  of 
Congress  or  common  every  day  transactions. 

The  proper  selection  of  the  vocabulary  of  prac- 
tical LIFE  IS  THE  FIRST  DISTINGUISHING  FEATURE  OF  MY 
METHOD,  and  while  Nature  never  fails  in  providing  a per- 
son with  words  best  adapted  for  his  own  necessities,  it  has 
taken  the  investigations  of  many  minds  to  determine  the 
limits  and  extent  of  speech  for  a scientific  system  of  lin- 
guistry. 

Highly  important,  however,  as  this  part  of  my  work 
is,  it  is  a mere  detail  of  my  whole  plan,  for  it  must  not  be 
overlooked  that 

DISCONNECTED,  ISOLATED  WORDS  ARE  NOT  LANGUAGE. 

A person  might  learn  a whole  dictionary  by  heart  and 
yet  would  not  be  able  to  speak. 

As  long  as  a child  can  use  single  words  only,  he  can 
not  carry  on  a conversation.  He  may  be  capable  of  say- 
ing drink,  milk,  walk,  candy,  out,  garden,  tired,  bed,  etc., 
thus  making  his  wants  and  desires  known,  but  he  is  still 
utterly  unable  to  sustain  a connected  conversation. 

Now,  why  is  this? 

There  exist  in  every  language  certain  substrata  of 
speech,  certain  formulae  of  expression  containing  its 
life  and  character,  which  can  never  be  translated  literally 
from  one  language  into  another,  which  cannot  be  parsed 
or  analyzed,  and  which  in  themselves  are  absolutely  sense- 
less and  absurd. 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


23 


Let  me  illixstrate  my  meaning. 

The  first  question  which  we  ask  each  other,  and  we 
ask  it  many  times  a day,  is  an  utter  absurdity, 
*'How  do  you  dot'  Parse  this  if  you  can.  Do  what? 
What  are  we  supposed  to  be  doing  that  we  should  anx- 
iously inquire  of  each  other  how  we  do  it? 

Now,  if  we  were  to  take  this  phrase,  the  meaning  of 
which  is  perfectly  clear  to  all  of  us,  and  translate  it 
literally  into  French  or  German,  we  would  render  our- 
selves just  as  ridiculous  as  a Frenchman  would,  who, 
instead  of  saying:  ''How  is  your  grandmother?''  would 
gravely  inquire : "How  carries  herself  Madam  your 
grandmother?  Comment  se  porte  madame  votre  grand- 
^mére?"  Or,  as  a German  would,  who,  instead  of  stating: 

am  very  sorry  you  have  a headache,"  would  literally 
say:  "It  does  to  me  great  pain  that  you  headache  have. 
'Es  thut  mir  sehr  leid,  doss  Sie  Kopfweh  haben,"  Or,  as 
a Spaniard  would,  who,  instead  of  asking:  "How  old  is 
your  brother?"  would  put  his  question  thus  from  his  na- 
tional standpoint : "How  many  years  possesses  his  brother 
cf  your  worship?  ¿Cuántos  años  tiene  su  hermano  de 

y?" 

Now,  what  is  the  inference?  To  my  mind  it  is  per- 
fectly clear  and  obvious. 

I hold  that  instead  of  beginning  our  studies  with  those 
little  bits  of  baby  sentences,  which  no  common-sense  per- 
son was  ever  known  to  use,  and  with  which  all  books 
and  teachers  commence  their  instructions,  like : ‘T  have, 
I have  not.  I have  the  hat.  I have  not  the  hat.  I have 
the  hat  of  my  father.  I have  the  hat  of  my  mother.  I 
have  the  hat  of  the  good  aunt  of  the  wicked  undertaker,’* 
and  so  on  through  the  whole  relationship;  I hold  that 
instead  of  beginning  with  these  simple  phrases  which  no 


24 


The  Rosenthal  Method, 


one  can  ever  put  to  practical  use,  we  ought  to  commence 
with  complex,  long,  flowing,  connected,  rational  sentences, 
such  as  we  are  in  the  habit  of  employing  in  practical  life. 
Instead  of  teaching  phrases  whose  constructions  are  the 
same  as  those  of  our  own  native  tongue,  we  ought  on  the 
contrary,  to  commence  with  idiomatic  sentences,  whose 
formations  are  utterly  foreign  to  our  mode  of  speaking, 
thereby  dis-accustoming  our  minds  from  thinking  in  Eng- 
lish, and  becoming  familiarized  with  the  foreign  ways 
of  expression  and  thought. 

For  this,  after  all,  is  the  great  difficulty;  this  is  the 
'^punctum  saliens’’  of  the  whole  problem.  We  must  learn 


TO  THINK  IN  THE  FOREIGN  LANGUAGE  ITSELF. 

We  must  no  longer  think  about  our  French  or  about 
our  German,  Spanish  or  Italian,  but  in  the  language  itself. 
No  one  can  speak  a foreign  tongue  who  does  not  think 
in  it 

This  is  so  old  established  a maxim  that  no  one  can 
doubt  it,  but  while  unquestionably  true,  the  difficulty  of 
thinking  in  a foreign  language  seems  at  first  glance  so 
insurmountable  that  most  of  our  teachers  have  hopelessly 
given  up  the  task,  convinced  that  it  is  impossible. 

Can  it  be  accomplished  ? 

Is  it  -possible  to  learn  to  think  in  a foreign  tongue 
without  residing  in  the  country  itself,  where  one,  so  to 
say,  lives  in  the  very  atmosphere  of  these  sounds  and 
modes  of  expression? 

Can  this  be  effected  here,  in  this  land  of  ours? 

Of  course,  when  we  reside  abroad,  it  is  easily  under* 
stood  how  we  acquire  the  power  of  thinking  in  a foreign 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


25 


language.  There  we  are  surrounded  by  Frenchmen, 
Spaniards,  Italians  or  Germans ; we  hear  nothing  but  the 
foreign  vernacular,  and  being  continually  obliged  to 
make  use  of  these  strange  sounds,  we  imperceptibly  get 
so  accustomed  to  them  that  finally  they  come  just  as  read- 
ily and  unconsciously  to  our  tongues  as  the  sounds  of 
our  own  native  language.  The  words  become,  in  fact, 
so  fully  our  mental  and  bodily  property,  that,  as  the 
French  say,  “we  possess  them”  and  think  in  them. 

But  how  can  we  hope  to  effect  the  same  results  here, 
in  the  United  States,  where  we  cannot  always  associate 
with  foreigners,  where  we  speak  nothing  but  English 
and  think  in  English  solely,  where  other  cares,  duties 
and  avocations  continually  crowd  in  upon  us,  and  where 
the  little  French,  German,  Spanish  or  Italian  learned  to- 
day is  almost  wiped  out  and  forgotten  by  to-morrow? 
How  can  we  with  all  these  drawbacks  and  disadvantages 
learn  to  think  in  a foreign  tongue? 

Various  replies  have  been  given  to  this  question,  and 
the  most  plausible  answer  has  been  furnished  by  the 
teachers  of  the  objective,  or  so-called  “natural”  methods. 

“Learn  a foreign  language  as  a child  learns  his  own,” 
say  these  gentlemen. 

* But  reasonable  as  this  proposition  sounds,  it  is  never- 
theless based  on  a grave  and  erroneous  misconception. 

“Learn  a foreign  language  as  a child  learns  his  own.^* 
How  does  a child  learn  it? 

I shall  have  occasion  to  speak  of  this  interesting  psy- 
chological process  later;  just  now  I desire  to  call  your 
attention  only  to  the  following  facts : 

Every  parent  can  tell  you  that  long  before  a child  can 
talk  he  understands  what  is  said  to  him.  The  sounds 
he  has  so  frequently  heard  sugg-est  ideas  to  him  and  he 


26 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


naturally  associates  them  with  certain  objects,  facts,  ac- 
tions, commands,  etc.  During  two  long  yeafs  he  hears 
and  listens  before  he  constructs  a single  phrase;  he  is  in 
possession  of  both  the  sound  and  its  corresponding  idea 
long  before  attempting  to  produce  it  himself. 

Is  that  the  student's  case  when  trying  to  master  a for- 
eign tongue?  Do  the  strange  sounds  we  hear  in  French, 
German,  Spanish  or  Italian  suggest  any  meaning  to  us? 
Do  we  associate  them  with  certain  facts,  objects  or  ideas? 
Certainly  not! 

‘"But,"  reply  these  gentlemen  in  answer  to  this,  ''you 
do  not  understand  our  system  perfectly.  Ours  is  the  ob- 
ject method.  We  point  to  certain  objects  surrounding 
us,  and  by  uttering  little  phrases  referring  to  them  and 
repeating  them  hundreds  of  times  in  the  foreign  lan- 
guage, the  pupils  are  enabled  not  only  to  understand  what 
we  say,  but  to  think  at  once  in  French,  as  we  speak  noth- 
ing but  French  during  our  lessons." 

But  how  can  you  think  in  French  if  you  don't  know 
any  French? 

I grant  that  you  may  understand  the  meaning  of  cer- 
tain phrases  by  pointing  to  certain  objects.  But  how 
about  things  which  you  cannot  point  out?  How  about 
abstract  thoughts?  How  about  past  or  future  actions? 
How  about  idiomatic  expressions?  How  can  they  be 
explained  or  mastered  when  you  confine  yourself  to  a 
language  which  the  student  does  not  understand,  instead 
of  giving  him  a clear  explanation  in  his  own  tongue? 
Why  substitute  the  imperfect  language  of  gestures  and 
signs  when  a perfect  medium  of  communication  between 
teacher  and  student  exists? 

‘'Every  one,  at  times,"  says  Prof.  Maltus  Ouestell 
Holyoake  in  a very  able  article  on  "A  Cosmopolitan 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


27 


Language/^  ‘'has  doubtless  had  recourse  to  the  univer- 
sal languag-e  of  gesticulation,  signs  and  sounds.  In  every 
clime  and  age  there  has  always  been  an  international 
language  of  this  kind.  There  is  an  amusing  anecdote 
which  illustrates  this.  An  English  traveler,  being  desir- 
ous of  knowing  the  nature  of  the  meat  on  his  plate  at 
some  remote  Chinese  entertainment,  turned  to  the  native 
waiter  behind  him  and,  pointing  to  the  dish  with  an  in- 
quiring look,  said:  'Quack?  quack?’  The  Chinaman  at 
once  replied  with  a natural  imitation  of  the  canine : 'Bow ! 
wow!’  Thus  the  two  parties  were  mutually  intelligible, 
though  they  did  not  understand  one  word  of  each  other’s 
language.” 

Gesticulations  and  signs  in  a case  of  this  kind  are  not 
only  appropriate,  but  necessary.  As  a method  of  teaching 
a language,  however,  they  are  but  an  awkward  and  un- 
satisfactory substitute. 

Consider,  moreover,  how  many  years  must  of  neces- 
sity elapse  before  a child  can  attain  practical  mastery  of 
his  mother  tongue. 

Can  any  adult  devote  the  same  length  of  time  to  the 
study  of  foreign  languages? 

Is  it  not  also  true  that  the  adult’s  state  of  mind  is 
vitally  different  from  that  of  a child  ? 

No  adult  can  study  as  a child  learns.  The  child  in 
mastering  his  own  tongue  reaches  not  only  the  power  of 
expression,  but  the  ability  of  thinking.  From  the  per- 
ception of  external  facts  he  proceeds  to  mental  concep- 
tions. Each  new  word  is  a new  discovery  to  him;  each 
sound  reveals  to  him  a new  world.  Language  is  the 
basis  of  his  whole  mental  development,  it  underlies  the 
acquisition  of  all  knowledge. 

The  adult,  on  the  other  hand,  has  passed  all  these 


28 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


preliminary  stages;  he  has  attained  all  this.  His  intel- 
lect has  been  developed  and  trained.  His  mind  is  no 
longer  a ‘‘tabula  rasa/’  and  his  memory  is  not  nearly 
so  fresh  and  retentive  as  that  of  an  untutored  infant. 
He  can  already  express  his  thoughts  in  one  language, 
and  in  studying  other  tongues  he  aims  solely  at  the 
acquisition  of 

A NEW  VEHICLE  OF  SOUNDS 

which  shall  enable  him  to  convey  the  same  thoughts 
which  he  is  in  the  habit  of  uttering  to  his  own  country 
people,  to  natives  of  other  climes  and  nationalities. 

Herein  lies  the  vital  difference  between  the  so-called 
natural  methods  (of  which  Gouin,  Henness  and  Sauveur 
are  the  main  representatives)  and  my  own. 

Their  views  and  arguments — ingenious  though  they 
may  be — are  based,  as  I think  I have  shown,  on  a grave 
misconception.  We  cannot  learn  foreign  tongues  as  a 
child  learns  his  own,  but  must  acquire  them  as  foreigners 
master  our  language  when  they  come  to  the  United 
States. 

For,  when  we  learn  a foreign  language,  we  know  one 
tongue  already,  our  own  native  language.  Whether  we 
are  seven,  seventeen,  or  seventy  years  old,  is  immaterial. 
The  fact  remains  the  same;  we  speak  and  can  use  one 
language.  All  we  want,  therefore,  is  the  mastery  of  an 
additional  tongue,  a new  medium  of  sounds  for  express- 
ing our  thoughts. 

The  distinction  is  obvious,  and  the  difference  between 
the  two  methods  vital. 

But  all  this  is  no  answer  to  our  previous  question: 
HOW  CAN  WE  LEARN  TO  THINK  IN  A FOREIGN  LANGUAGE? 

Of  recent  years  great  progress  has  been  made  in  the 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


29 


study  of  psychological  problems.  Inspired  and  guided 
by  the  teachings  of  Schopenhauer  and  Hartmann  a new 
school  of  thinkers  has  arisen,  and  a strikingly  original 
system  of  philosophy  has  been  developed  in  Germany, 
France  and  England. 

The  first  results  of  these  deeply  interesting  investiga- 
tions were  embodied  in  Hartmann’s  ‘'Philosophic  des 
Unbewussten,”  the  Philosophy  of  the  Unconscious,  or, 
as  Professor  Carpenter  more  aptly  calls  it,  “The  Philoso- 
phy of  Unconscious  Cerebration.’’  The  work  is  of  stand- 
ard value  and  has  been  translated  into  English. 

Without  entering  into  details,  which  in  an  essay  of 
this  kind  would  oe  out  of  place,  I will  only  state  the 
central  idea  of  the  system. 

It  is  this : No  action  can  be  done  well  which  is  not 
done  unconsciously. 

Mark  the  principle!  Any  action  which  is  to  be  done 
well,  must  be  done  unconsciously,  and  not  consciously. 

This  sounds  like  a paradox,  but  is  nevertheless  abso- 
lutely true. 

Take  walking,  one  of  out  simplest  actions,  as  an  in- 
stance. How  is  it  accomplished?  Consciously  or  un- 
consciously? Are  we  conscious  of  the  active  exercise 
of  our  nerves  and  muscles  while  we  are  walking?  Do 
we  realize  that  our  mind  superintends  the  effort  and  that 
our  will-power  through  the  nerves  sets  the  various  nec- 
essary muscles  in  motion?  Do  we  walk  consciously  or 
unconsciously  ? 

How,  on  the  other  hand,  does  a child  learn  to  walk? 
In  the  most  painful  and  self-conscious  manner.  For 
months  he  watches  and  observes  how  his  parents  and' 
brothers  move  around.  His  innate,  imitative  faculties 
lead  him  to  copy  their  actions  He  first  learns  to  creep, 


30 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


in  an  awkward  and  self-conscions  manner ; then  he  begins 
to  stand,  and  finally  he  toddles  from  chair  to  chair.  He 
now  walks,  badly  as  yet,  because  he  does  it  consciously, 
but  by  and  by  rapidly  and  well,  because  by  repeated  exer- 
cises the  play  of  the  muscles  has  become  second  nature 
to  him.  At  last  he  can  run.  The  whole  circle  has  now 
been  accomplished.  He  stands;  he  walks;  he  runs.  He 
does  it  well,  because  he  does  it  unconsciously. 

How  do  we  learn  to  read  ? In  the  most  laborious  and 
self-conscious  manner.  Months  elapse  before  a child 
knows  his  letters;  years  must  pass  before  be  can  spelL 
Finally  he  reads,  badly  at  first,  because  he  is  still  con- 
scious of  all  his  actions.  At  last  he  does  it  so  well  that 
his  eyes  unconsciously  glide  over  the  pages.  And  then 
what  happens?  Why,  frequently  we  sit  down  with  the 
most  interesting  novel  of  the  season.  We  read  it  rapidly, 
excitedly.  Suddenly  our  mind  is  taken  up  with  some 
other  subject.  A great  care  may  be  upon  us;  a new  line 
of  thought,  foreign  to  the  matter  we  are  reading  about, 
has  somehow  been  suggested  to  us.  Still  we  read  on, 
mechanically  perusing  page  after  page.  Finally  we  stop ; 
we  look  at  our  book;  we  turn  back  ten,  twenty,  thirty 
pages,  and  exclaim  in  startled  tones:  ‘‘Bless  me!  Here 
I have  been  reading  for  the  last  half  hour  without  the 
faintest  idea  as  to  what  it  is !” 

Have  we  read  consciously  or  unconsciously? 

Nothing  can  be  done  well,  unless  we  do  it  uncon- 
sciously. We  cannot  even  breathe  naturally  unless  we 
do  so  without  being  self-conscious  of  the  act. 

Do  you  doubt  this?  Ask  any  one  who  has  been  un- 
fortunate enough  to  have  his  lungs  examined  by  a phy- 
sician. What  is  his  experience?  After  pounding  your 
back  and  chest  in  various  spots  and  listening  to  your 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


31 


breathing,  the  medical  expert  finally  places  his  stetho- 
scope on  your  chest  and  says;  '‘Now  breathe  just  as 
naturally  as  you  can/' 

Breathe  as  naturally  as  you  can!  The  moment  you 
try  to  do  so  you  become  self-conscious  and  your  breath- 
ing grows  at  once  unnatural  and  labored. 

We  cannot  even  look  natural  unless  we  are  uncon- 
scious of  our  outward  appearance. 

What  renders  the  dressed-up  maid  so  absurd  and 
ridiculous  ? She  is  conscious  of  her  fine  clothes,  and  the 
same  girl  who  seemed  pretty  in  her  simple  calico  gown, 
becomes  a guy  in  her  finery.  Why?  Because  she  is 
self-conscious  and  consequently  awkward. 

Or  let  me  give  you  another  instance. 

You  go  to  a photographer  to  have  your  picture  taken. 
After  placing  you  in  a chair  and  posing  you  to  his  liking, 
the  artist  puts  that  modern  instrument  of  torture,  the  so- 
called  head-rest,  behind  your  ears  and  cheerfully  says: 
^'Now  look  here,  right  here,  if  you  please.  At  this  bird- 
cage, pray.  That's  very  nice!  Now,  just  for  one  mo- 
ment, please  sit  quiet.  Steady  now,  and  just  look  as  nat- 
á^ral  as  you  can !" 

Look  just  as  natural  as  you  can!  The  moment  you 
try  to  appear  so  you  become  self-conscious.  Either  a 
most  idiotic  grin  spreads  over  your  countenance,  or  such 
a woe-begone,  melancholy  expression  settles  down  upon 
your  features,  that  your  best  friends  cannot  recognize 
the  picture  when  it  gets  home.  You  were  self-conscious 
and  hence  the  consequences. 

And  yet,  when  you  go  back  to  the  photographer  and 
complain  to  him,  he  will  reply  with  calm  superiority: 
*‘Why,  Madam,  this  is  an  exact  likeness  of  you.  That 


32 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


is  just  the  way  you  looked.  My  machine  is  true  and 
cannot  lie/’ 

And  it  did  not  lie ; the  picture  is  true.  It  is  an  abso- 
lutely perfect  likeness  of  the  idiot  you  looked,  when  self- 
conscious  of  your  outward  appearance. 

Nothing  can  be  done  well,  unless  it  is  done  uncon- 
sciously. 

This  is  especially  noticeable  in  speaking.  No  one 
realizes  that  any  mental  activity  of  thought  is  going  on 
in  his  brains  while  he  is  talking,  and  yet  there  is  and 
must  be  such  action  of  the  mind,  although  he  is  entirely 
unconscious  of  it. 

Now  try  a simple  experiment.  Watch  yourself  and 
see  if  you  can  find  out  whether  you  are  thinking  while 
you  make  some  commonplace  remarks,  and  you  will  soon 
discover  that  you  can  neither  think  nor  talk.  You  have 
grown  self-conscious,  and  neither  the  brain  nor  the  tongue 
can  act  when  that  is  the  case. 

By  constant  use  and  application  the  words  of  our  own 
language  become,  as  a matter  of  course,  flesh  and  blood 
to  us.  We  think  in  them ; in  fact,  we  cannot  think  with- 
out them,  and,  while  we  talk,  our  mind — unconscious  to 
ourselves — thinks  the  very  thoughts  we  utter.  It  guides 
and  superintends  all  our  efforts  and  is  in  constant  activ- 
ity, though  we  are  unconscious  of  it. 

I have  shown  before  how  a child  listens  and  hears 
for  two  long  years  before  attempting  to  construct  a 
single  phrase.  He  is  in  possession  of  both  the  sound  and 
its  corresponding  meaning  long  before  he  ventures  to 
produce  it  himself. 

Thus  each  infant  passes  his  first  two  years;  another 
year  must  elapse  before  he  can  talk  and  converse. 

How  does  he  reach  it?  How  does  it  happen  that 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


33 


bright  and  stupid  children  alike  can  prattle  intelligently 
when  but  three  years  old?  Why  is  this  a universal  fact, 
true  without  exception  among  civilized  and  uncivilized 
nations  alike,  among  the  poor  as  well  as  the  wealthy  ? Can 
this  problem  be  solved,  and  if  so,  would  not  its  solution 
furnish  us  with  the  key  to  a rational  and  true  method? 
For  Nature's  teaching  is  true  and  must  be  true ; the  uni- 
versal results  prove  this. 

What  happens  in  this  short  space  of  time  that  changes 
the  lisping  infant  into  an  intelligently  speaking  being? 

For  years  I tried  in  vain  to  fathom  Nature’s  secret. 
I watched  my  children’s  mental  and  bodily  development, 
but  though  I made  many  valuable  observations  I was 
for  a long  time  on  a wrong  track.  I counted  the  words 
they  could  utter  and  gathered  a vocabulary  instead  of  dis- 
covering Nature’s  method  of  teaching. 

Suddenly  the  whole  truth  dawned  upon  me. 

A carpenter  was  employed  in  my  house  mending  a 
damaged  ceiling  which  a fire  had  destroyed.  My  young- 
est boy  was  eagerly  watching  him.  Every  slight  act,  the 
use  of  every  instrument,  had  to  be  explained  to  him. 

‘‘What  has  he  in  his  hand,  papa  ?”  the  little  one  would 
ask.  “That  is  a saw,  my  boy.”  “What  does  he  do  with 
it?”  “He  saws  the  beams  to  their  proper  length.” 

While  the  man  was  busy  sawing  the  boy  watched  and 
watched,  never  uttering  a word. 

The  man  raised  the  beam  and  put  it  in  its  proper 
spot,  using  the  hammer  and  driving  in  the  nails. 

“And  what  is  he  doing  now  ?”  “He  drives  in  the  nails 
with  his  hammer,  and  the  nails  keep  the  beam  in  its 
proper  place.”  And  again  the  boy  watched  and  stayed 
there  and  asked  his  questions  and  listened  to  my  explana^ 
tions  for  over  two  hours. 


S4 


The  Rosenthal  Method, 


What  happened  then?  For  more  than  an  hour  the 
little  fellow  was  quiet.  He  evidently  was  thinking  of 
all  he  had  seen.  Then  he  began  to  play.  He  got  a little 
hammer,  some  nails,  a ruler,  and  some  wood.  He  played 
carpenter  and  he  played  aloud. 

‘T  am  the  carpenter,’’  he  began.  ‘'Where  is  my  saw?’^ 
“Here  is  my  saw,”  and  he  grasped  the  ruler.  “Now  I 
must  saw  this  beam,”  and  he  made  believe  that  he  was 
sawing  with  the  ruler. 

“Now  I must  put  the  beam  in  its  place.  Here  is  my 
hammer,  and  here  are  the  nails.  Now  I must  drive  them 
in  and  keep  the  beam  in  its  proper  place.” 

And  he  suited  his  action  to  the  words  and  went  on 
playing  and  chattering.  And  day  after  day,  until  some 
new  occurrence  attracted  his  attention,  he  would  play 
carpenter,  always  proceeding  in  exactly  the  same  man- 
ner  as  the  real  carpenter  had  done,  and  always  using 
the  same  or  nearly  the  same  expressions  he  had  heard. 

This  simple  observation  showed  me  Nature’s  whole 
process. 

The  child  observes  the  various  actions  of  his  elders. 

From  perception  of  external  facts  he  proceeds  after  a 
sort  of  “mental  incubation”  to  an  imitation  of  all  he 
has  seen  and  heard.  He  repeats  the  acts  and  corre- 
sponding sentences  over  and  over  during  his  childish 
play,  and  in  one  year  he  has  learned  to  talk.  He  has 
learned  to  express  in  living  sounds  all  his  perceptions  of 
external  facts  and  his  various  mental  conceptions  cxf 
them. 

He  has  acquired  a language. 

He  knows  nothing  about  grammar,  and  yet  the  child 
of  cultured  parents  uses  correct  expressions.  He  has 
never  seen  a printed  word,  nevertheless  his  pronuncia- 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


ÓÓ- 


tion  is  perfect.  He  has  never  read  a single  book,  but 
his  speech  is  fluent  and  idiomatic.  By  Nature^s  method 
he  has  accomplished  what  no  college  graduate  attains: 
he  has  gained  colloquial  mastery  of  a tongue. 

How  has  he  reached  it  ? How  has  he  learned  his  lan- 
guage ? What  is  the  meaning  of  this  phrase,  ‘‘to  lean? 
a language’’? 

^ It  means  to  translate  our  own  individuality  into  com- 
jprehensible  sounds.  It  does  not  mean  to  study  gram- 
matical peculiarities.  It  is  not  to  be  attained  by  the 
[ Study  and  translation  of  the  classic  works  of  literature. 
It  is  vain  to  attempt  it  by  any  school  system.  It  must 
be  accomplished  by  a sort  of  mental  reconstruction  and 
visualization — if  such  word  is  permissible — of  our  whole 
¡ outer  and  inner  life.  We  must  live  over  again  the  vari- 
ous incidents  and  sentiments  of  our  life  and  must  learn 
jto  express  them  in  a foreign  tongue.  Life’s  various 
I scenes  have  to  be  represented  anew  in  strange  sounds 
which  constantly  repeated  will  soon  become  second 
nature  to  us.  “Repetitio  est  mater  studiorum.”  Again 
and  again  we  have  to  hear  and  repeat  these  sounds; 

I again  and  again  we  must  apply  them  until,  at  last,  they 
become  just  as  familiar  to  us  as  the  sounds  of  our  native 
tongue. 

¡ There  will  then  no  longer  be  any  talk  of  translation 
from  one  language  into  the  other.  The  words  will  have 
become  so  thoroughly  impressed  upon  the  nerves  of  our 
memory  that  they  come  just  as  easily,  readily,  and  un-* 
consciously  to  our  lips  as  the  sounds  of  our  mother 
tongue. 

Remember  that  we  possess  but  one  intelligence,  and 
our  thoughts  must  ever  be  the  same  whether  we  express, 
them  in  English,  Spanish,  French,  German  or  Italian. 


36 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


Language  appeals,  therefore — at  first  at  least — solely 
to  the  ear,  tongue  and  memory,  but  though  our  intellect 
superintends  and  guides  the  whole  initiatory  process,  it 
does  not  and  cannot  come  into  real  action  until  the  for- 
eign sounds  come  just  as  unconsciously  to  our  tongue  as 
the  sounds  of  our  native  language. 

The  eloquence  of  a Gladstone,  the  brilliancy  of  a 
Blaine,  the  depth  of  a Pasteur,  the  poetic  fancy  of  a 
Tennyson,  the  learning  of  a Virchow,  would  all  be  use- 
less and  of  no  avail  among  a nation  whose  language 
they  have  not  mastered.  A child  or  a waiter  speaking 
the  tongue  would  have  the  advantage  of  the  greatest 
intellect  unversed  in  that  language. 

Remember  also  that  the  ear  is  the  natural  organ  of 
language.  To  substitute  for  it  the  eye — ^as  is  done  in 
all  schools — is  to  commit  a blunder  so  vital  that  the 
greatest  philologist  is  unable  to  accomplish  in  ten  years 
what  a humble,  illiterate  child  attains  in  six  months.  To 
learn  from  a dumb  book  leaves  the  student  just  as 
speechless  as  the  source  from  whence  his  knowledge 
proceeds.  If  you  want  to  learn  to  swim,  plunge  in  the 
water  and  strike  out  boldly.  If  you  desire  to  learn  to 
speak,  listen  to  foreign  speech  and  imitate  what  you  have 
heard  until  by  habit  it  becomes  second  nature  to  you. 

This  is  the  method  of  Nature,  and  this  is  the  method  I 
teach. 

Since.  1873  I have  instructed  thousands  of  adult  stu- 
dents in  this  manner.  The  results  have  invariably  been 
satisfactory  to  pupils  as  well  as  to  myself.  Numerous 
other  teachers  who  have  used  my  method  have  had  the 
same  experience.  I therefore  liave  no  doubt  as  to  the 
soundness  of  my  system. 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


37 


All  my  sentences  are  practical  phrases,  based  on  the 
actual  occurrences  of  practical  every  day  life. 

Other  authors,  like  Frangois  Gouin,  whom  I consider 
the  greatest  teacher  of  the  so-called  '‘Natural  Method,’* 
make  the  same  claim.  I leave  the  student  to  judge  whose 
system  is  more  practical,  his  or  mine. 

Here  is  Gouin’s  first  lesson : 

THE  WELL. 


THE  MAID  GOES  TO  DRAW  WATER  AT  THE  WEIX. 

The  maid  takes  the  bucket,  takes 

The  maid  goes  out  of  the  house,  goes  out 

The  maid  bends  her  steps  towards  the  well,  bends  her  steps 
The  maid  draws  near  to  the  well,  draws  near 

The  maid  gets  to  the  well,  gets  to 

The  maid  stops  at  the  well,  stops  at 

and  sets  down  the  bucket  on  the  brink  of  the  well,  sets  down 
The  maid  leans  over  the  well,  leans 

She  stretches  out  her  arm,  stretches  out 

She  catches  hold  of  the  chain,  catches  hold 

DRAWS 
OPENS 
PLACES 
CLOSES 
PUTS 
PUSHES 


She  draws  this  chain  toward  her, 

She  opens  the  hook, 
places  the  handle  of  the  bucket  in 
the  hook,  and  closes  this  hook. 

She  puts  one  hand  to  the  crank, 
and  with  the  other  pushes  the  bucket  into  the  mouth 
of  the  well. 

The  bucket  swings  to  and  fro  over  the  depths,  the  swings 
chain  rattles,  rattles 

and  makes  the  depths  resound,  makes  resouni 

It  would  be  unfair  to  judge  a whole  system  by  one  les* 
son.  I shall  therefore  quote  Gouin’s  fourteenth  chapter: 


THE  STOVE. 

THE  girl  chops  SOME  WOOD. 

The  girl  goes  and  seeks  a piece  of  wood,  goes  and  seeks 

She  takes  a hatchet,  takes 


38 


The  Rosenthal  Method» 


She  draws  near  to  the  block. 

She  places  the  wood  on  the  block. 

She  raises  the  hatchet, 

She  brings  down  the  hatchet, 

The  blade  strikes  against  the  wood. 

The  blade  penetrates  the  wood, 

The  blade  cleaves  the  wood, 

The  pieces  fall  right  and  left. 

The  girl  picks  up  one  of  the  pieces, 
places  it  upon  the  block, 
raises  her  hatchet, 
brings  down  her  hatchet, 
and  chops  the  piece  of  wood. 

She  chops  another  piece,  and  then  another. 
She  chops  up  all  the  wood. 

She  puts  down  her  hatchet, 
gathers  up  the  pieces  into  her  apron, 
takes  one  or  two  logs  and  some  shavings, 
and  carries  them  to  the  stove. 


DRAWS  NEAR 
PLACES 
RAISES 

BRINGS  DOWN  i 
STRIKES 
PENETRATES 
CLEAVES 
FALL 
PICKS  UP 
PLACES 
RAISES 
BRINGS  DOWN 
CHOPS 
CHOPS 
CHOPS 
PUTS  DOWN 
GATHERS  UP 
TAKES 
CARRIES 


Without  pronouncing  an  opinion  upon  Mn  Gouin’s 
method,  I simply  desire  to  draw  the  reader's  attention 
to  it,  leaving  a comparison  between  the  two  systems  to 
him.  It  will  be  seen  from  the  following  pages  that  my 
method  does  not  begin  with  the  pump,  or  well,  or  wood- 
shed, or  stove,  but  with  such  events  of  every  day  life 
as  concern  and  interest  the  adult  student.  After  a fev/ 
necessary  and  merely  preliminary  exercises  we  com- 
mence with  phrases  which  refer  to  the  speaking  and 
understanding  of  a language,  expressions  which  are  of 
absolute  necessity  in  our  intercourse  with  foreigners.  I 
shall  quote  but  a few  of  them  from  the  first  part : 

I speak  French.  I do  not  speak  it.  I speak  it  but 
brokenly.  Are  you  speaking  to  me?  Do  you  understand 
me?  Don’t  you  understand  me  when  I speak  German 
to  you?  I understand  yon  when  you  speak  slowly  and 


The  Rosenthal  Method, 


39 


distinctly,  but  cannot  follow  you  when  you  speak  rapidly, 
etc.,  etc. 

We  continue  our  studies  by  entering  a store  to  make 
some  purchases.  The  next  lesson  transfers  us  to  the 
railway;  we  take  tickets,  check  the  baggage,  arrive  at 
the  station,  take  a cab  and  drive  to  the  hotel,  we  enter 
it,  select  rooms,  give  some  necessary  orders  to  the  waiter, 
sit  down  to'  our  meal  and  finally  retire. 

Surely  these  are  actual  scenes  of  practical  every  day 
life;  these  are  occurrences  with  wihich  any  adult  is 
familiar. 

After  these  lessons  have  been  thoroughly  mastered, 
we  proceed  to  conversational  exercises.  English  is  now 
discarded  and  the  foreign  tongue  alone  is  used. 

No  new  words  or  constructions  are  introduced. 
Every  sentence  is  based  on  the  previous  exercises. 
Each  phrase,  therefore,  presents  facts  and  conceptions 
just  as  clearly  to  the  students  as  the  English  equivalents, 
and  translation  becomes  unnecessary.  Our  own  life  is 
thus  lived  over  again  in  the  sounds  of  the  foreign  lan- 
guage. Our  individuality  is  reconstructed  in  French, 
German,  Spanish  or  Italian. 

In  this  way  the  foreign  language  becomes  in  reality 

tongue’’  to  the  learner.  Its  study  is  now  no  longer 
a laborious  translation,  dependent  on  a clumsy  calcula- 
tion which  of  the  numerous  grammatical  rules  is  to  be 
used  in  a given  case.  The  words  cease  to  be  meaning-* 
less,  printed,  dumb  signs,  and  are  at  once  associated 
with  actual,  living  facts.  The  student  now  no  longer 
hesitates  and  weighs,  but  expresses  his  own  ideas  just  as 
readily  in  the  foreign  tongue  as  his  own.  He  thinks 
and  lives  in  French,  German,  Spanish  or  Italian.  The 


40 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


language  has  become  flesh  and  blood  to  him.  He  '^pos- 
sesses it/’  as  the  French  say,  it  is  his  own. 

In  another  chapter  some  useful  directions  for  private 
Study  are  given.  They  are  based  on  practical  experi- 
ence a^id  ought  to  be  followed  by  teachers  and  students. 

RICHARD  S.  ROSENTHAL. 


The  Spanish  Language, 


41 


DIRECTIONS  FOR  PRIVATE  STUDY. 

The  ear  is  the  natural  organ,  the  first  organ,  the  most 
immediate  organ  of  language. 

The  ear,  therefore,  must  be  addressed  first  and  princi- 
pally. The  student  must  have  the  accent  and  intonation 
of  a phrase  in  his  ear,  before  the  tongue  is  able  to  re- 
produce it. 

The  spoken  word  must  precede  the  word  as  spelled  or 
written.  The  foreign  sounds  must  be  heard  before  the 
pupil  can  pronounce  them. 

Pronunciation  marks  are  of  limited  value.  They  refer 
solely  to  the  eye. 

The  ear,  as  stated  above,  is  the  natural  organ  of  sound, 
and  it  is  the  ear,  therefore,  which  must  familiarize  itself 
with  the  foreign  intonation  and  pronunciation  before  the 
tongue  can  imitate  them. 

In  fact,  complete  mastery  of  a foreign  tongue  can  be 
attained  only  by  training  the  eye,  ear,  tongue  and  mem- 
ory at  one  and  the  same  time : the  ear  by  giving  the  sound 
and  intonation  of  every  word  and  phrase ; the  eye  by  see- 
ing the  spelling;  the  tongue  by  imitating  and  uttering  ihe 
words  heard,  and  the  memory  by  such  continuous  repeti- 
tion of  the  foreign  sounds  that  they  will  become  second 
nature  to  the  student,  so  that  he  no  longer  thinks  about 
them,  but  in  them. 

This  great  result,  so  long  aimed  at  has  now  been 
reached,  and  The  International  College  of  Languages  is 
now,  by  its  Pronouncing  Records  and  Talking  Machine, 
in  a position  to  place  the  living  voice  of  the  most  cultured 
native  teachers  at  any  pupil’s  command,  without  losing 
one  atom  of  their  pure  accents  and  clear  enunciation. 

The  enormous  advantages  of  this  new  method  of  teach- 
ing are  so  self-evident  that  we  only  state  facts  in  saying 


42 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


that  every  one  can  henceforth  learn  to  actually  speak  and 
understand  foreign  languages,  and  that  the  oldest  and 
dullest  students  can  succeed  just  as  well  as  talented  and 
youthful  people. 

Study  has  ceased  to  be  laborious  drudgery  and  weari- 
some work,  and  has  been  changed  to  enjoyment  and 
pleasure ; and  a ''royal  road  to  learning,’'  which  heretofore 
was  considered  an  absolute  impossibility,  is  now  pre- 
sented for  the  first  time  in  the  history  of  education,  and 
has  become  an  actual  fact. 

There  is  an  inestimable  advantage  in  having  a highly 
educated  French,  German,  Spanish  or  Italian  professor 
always  at  your  service,  or  whenever  it  suits  you  to  study. 
By  merely  turning  the  lever  of  the  machine  you  summon 
this  marvelous  educational  aid  at  any  moment,  and  can 
take  your  lessons  at  home  at  your  convenience. 

After  the  sentence  has  been  pronounced  several  times 
by  The  Teaching  Records,  the  student  must  pronounce  it 
with  the  machine,  word  by  word  first  and  then  the  whole 
phrase  in  connection. 

The  student  should  always  practice  aloud.  The  ear 
and  tongue  must  be  exercised  at  the  same  time.  While 
practising  the  pronunciation  the  student,  who  has,  of 
course,  read  the  English  equivalent,  knows  the  general 
meaning  of  the  phrase,  and  by  the  time  that  he  can  pro- 
nounce the  sentence  smoothly  and  correctly,  the  words 
will  have  become  associated  with  the  meaning. 

This  does  away  with  literal  translation. 

The  pupil  must  not  attempt  to  memorize  the  main  sen- 
tence. By  frequently  hearing  and  pronouncing  it 
aloud,  the  words  will  unconsciously  impress  themselves 
so  indelibly  upon  his  memory  that  in  a few  days  they  will 
become  flesh  and  blood  to  him  and  can  never  be  for» 
gotten. 


The  Spanish  Language, 


43 


After  the  pronunciation  of  the  main  sentence  has  been 
mastered  the  pupils  will  proceed  in  a similar  manner  with 
the  variations  given  in  the  exercises. 

All  study — whether  private  or  in  classes — must  be  car- 
ried on  aloud. 

This  rule  is  all-important  and  must  never  be  neglected. 

Study  should  never  exceed  fifteen  to  twenty  minutes; 
the  mind  must  always  be  fresh  for  it.  As  soon  as  the 
slightest  fatigue  shows  itself  the  study  must  be  inter- 
rupted, whether  the  pupil  knows  his  lesson  or  not. 

After  mastering  the  foreign  sounds  by  pronouncing 
them  with  the  machine,  take  up  the  study  of  the  books  by 
themselves,  i.  e.,  without  the  talking  machine. 

First  read  the  foreign  exercises  aloud;  then  turn  the 
book  over,  look  only  at  the  English  words  and  without 
trying  to  translate,  give  the  foreign  equivalent  as  smooth- 
ly and  naturally  as  possible. 

Never  trust  to  the  memory.  If  a word  has  escaped 
you  do  not  think  about  it,  but  prompt  your  memory  by 
reading  the  foreign  sentence  once  more. 

These  short  exercises  should  be  repeated  at  least 
three  or  four  times  a day. 

In  a few  days  the  phrases  will  become  second  nature 
to  the  learner.  He  will  no  longer  think  about  them  but 
in  them.  He  will  begin  to  think  in  the  foreign  language 
itself,  and  will  now  be  able  to  form  thousands  of  new 
phrases  by  inserting  a new  noun  here,  a verb  there,  an 
adverb  in  another  place,  and  so  on. 

The  stud}^  of  grammar  is  carried  on  in  connection  with 
each  sentence.  The  foot-notes,  which  contain  the  gram- 
matical peculiarities,  must  therefore  be  carefully  studied. 

A full  grammatical  outline  is  found  in  Part  X of  the 
Rosenthal  Method. 


The  Spanish  Language. 


CONTENTS. 

Alphabet 

The  Vowels 

Diphthongs  and  Triphthongs 

Consonants 

Accent 

Punctuation 

Main  Sentence 

General  Exercises 

To  Speak 

Conjugations 

To  Understand 

In  a Store 

Vocabulary 


45 

46 

47 

50 

SI 

56 

59 

60 

62 

68 

80 

86 

94 

98 


46  The  Rosenthal  Method. 


THE  SPANISH  ALPHABET. 


A, 

a. 

á in  ah. 

N, 

n. 

ain'-a. 

B, 

b. 

bá  in  bale. 

Ñ, 

ñ. 

ain'-yey. 

c, 

c. 

thá  in  thane. 

0, 

0. 

Ó. 

Ch, 

ch. 

cha  in  chase. 

P, 

P- 

pa  in  pale. 

D, 

d. 

da  in  dale. 

Q, 

q- 

coo  in  cool. 

E, 

e. 

a in  ale. 

R, 

r. 

a'-rey. 

F, 

f. 

a'-fey. 

Rr, 

rr. 

a'-rrey. 

G, 

g- 

ha  in  hate. 

s, 

s. 

a'-cey. 

H, 

h. 

a'-tchey. 

T, 

t. 

tá  in  take. 

I, 

i. 

é in  eve. 

Ü, 

u. 

oa  in  ooze. 

J, 

j- 

ho'-ta. 

V, 

V. 

va  in  vale. 

K, 

k. 

kah. 

X, 

X. 

a'-keece. 

L, 

1. 

a'-ley. 

Y, 

y- 

e-gre'-a-ga. 

LI, 

11. 

ail'-yey. 

z, 

z. 

thá'-tá. 

M, 

m. 

a'-mey. 

The  Spanish  Language. 


47 


THE  VOWELS. 


1.  General  Law: — In  Castilian,  the  vowel  sounds  pre- 
dominate over  those  of  the  consonants.  They  are  pro- 
nounced in  a full  and  sonorous  manner,  while  the  con- 
sonants are  frequently  smothered  and  even  suppressed. 

2.  The  vowels  have  but  one  quality  of  sound,'^which 
they  preserve  uniformly.  (Compare  the  observations 
on  e and  o.) 

3.  The  vowels  are  a,  e,  i (y),  o and  u. 

1 4.  They  are  pronounced  as  follows: 

{ A,  a. 

1 A,  a is  pronounced  like  the  English  open  (Italian)  a 
in  father;  marked  a. 

Examples:  más  (más),  more;  andar  (án-dárr'),  to  go; 
hablar  (á-blárr'),  to  speak;  para  (pa'-ra),  for,  in  order  to. 

E,  e. 

E,  e sounds  like  a in  pale;  marked  á. 

1 Examples:  creo  (krá'-o),  I believe;  es  (as),  is;  semana 
I (sá-má'-ná),  week;  veo  (va'-o),  I see;  medico  (má'-dé-kó), 
I physician. 

^ Observation:  Before  a final  n or  r the  Spanish  e sounds 
like  e in  there,  marked  é. 

j Examples:  comer  (ko-mérr'),  to  eat;  placer  (plá-thérr'), 
pleasure;  poner  (po-nérr'),  to  put;  en  (én),  in. 

, Final  e,  though  retaining  its  quality  of  sound,  is  sounded 
I short  like  y in  vanity,  marked  f. 

I Examples:  triste  (tres-ty),  sorry. 

I 


48 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


I,  i (y)  is  sounded  like  e in  eve;  marked  é. 

Examples:  minuto  (m6-noo'-tó),  minute;  frío  (fré'ó), 
cold;  sí  (sé),  yes;  día  (dé'-á),  day;  americano  (á-ma-ré- 
ká'-nó),  American. 

Y,  y standing  alone  or  final,  is  a vowel  and  is  then  a 
mere  substitute  for  the  Spanish  i,  pronoimced  é.  (Com- 
pare remarks  on  y as  a consonant.) 

O,  o. 

O,  o is  sounded  like  o in  note;  marked  5. 

Examples:  otro  (o'-trO),  other;  veo  (va'-ó),  I see;  yo 
(yo),  I;  como  (ko'-mO),  I eat;  libro  (léb'-ró),  book. 

Observation:  Before  a final  n or  r,  the  Spanish  o sounds 
like  o in  gone,  as  error  (airr-rorr'),  error;  nación  (na- 
the'^on'),  nation. 

Ü,  u. 

U,  u is  sounded  like  oo  in  room;  marked  óó. 

Examples:  uno  (óó'-nó),  one;  ultimo  (óbl'-té-m5),  last; 
lunes  (lób'-nes),  Monday;  su  (soo),  his. 


STRONG  AND  WEAK  VOWELS. 


The  five  vowels  are  divided  into 

the  strong  = a,  o,  u,  and 
the  weak  = e and  i 

with  reference  to  the  phonetic  influence  which  they  exert 
on  c,  g,  j and  q. 


The  Spanish  Language. 


49 


Influence  of  the  Vowels  on  c,  g,  j and  q. 


The  phonetic  influence  of  the  vowels  on  c,  g,  j and  q is 
as  follows: 


A. 


I.  C before  a,  o,  u sounds  like  k:  ca,  co,  cu  = ká,  ko,  koo. 

e,  i “ “ th  (in  thin) : ce,  ci  = tha, 

the. 

a,  o,  u “ “ g (in  go) : ga,  go,  gu  = gá, 


2.  C 

3.  G 

4.  G 
5-  Gu 
6.  Qu 


e,  1 


e,  1 


e,  1 


go,  goo. 

“ “ a guttural  ‘h:  ge,  gi  = ‘ha, 

‘he. 

“ “ g (in  go):  gue,  gui  = ga, 

gé. 

“ “ k:  que,  qui  = ka,  ke. 


B. 


When  u has  the  diaeresis  (ü),  and  whenever  it  is  not 
mute,  it  is  pronounced  kw  or  gw,  as  the  case  may  be. 

"We  have,  therefore,  the  following  combinations: 


so 


The  Rosenthal  Method, 


VOWELS. 


1.  Like  k:  ca,  co,  cu  = ká,  ko,  koo. 

2.  Like  th:  ce,  ci  ==  tha,  the. 

3.  Like  gh:  ga,  go,  gu  = ghá,  gho,  ghoo. 

4.  Like  ‘h:  ge,  gi  = ‘ha,  ‘he. 


DIPHTHONGS. 


1.  Like  kw:  cua,  cue,  cui,  cuo  = kwa,  kwa,  kwe,  kwo. 

2.  Like  gw:  gua,  giie,  giii,  guo  = gwa,  gwa,  gwe,  gwo. 

3.  Like  ‘hw:  jua,  jue,  jui,  juo  = ‘hwa,  ‘hwa,  ‘hwe,  ‘hwo. 


DIPHTHONGS  AND  TRIPHTHONGS. 


These  are  vowels  in  juxtaposition,  which  are  pronounced 
in  one  wave  of  sound  forming  but  a single  syllable  with  the 
preceding  consonant  or  by  themselves  (when  standing 
alone). 

They  cannot  be  divided  either  in  printing  or  prosody. 
They  preserve  the  alphabetic  sound  of  each  of  the  vowels 
composing  them,  never  passing  over  into  new  phonetic 
combinations  as  in  French  or  English. 


The  Spanish  Language, 


51 


The  complex  sounds  they  produce  are  reckoned  as  one, 
and  the  tonic  accent,  if  it  be  on  that  syllable,  is  distributed 
over  these  vowels,  as  if  they  constituted  a single  long 
vowel.  Hence,  if  one  of  the  vowels  i or  u is  accentuated, 
no  diphthong  or  triphthong  can  be  formed  with  the  other 
vowels. 

True  diphthongs  and  triphthongs  are:  ai,  (ay),  au, 

ei,  (ey),  eu,  ia,  ie,  io,  iu,  oi,  (oy),  ou,  ua,  ue,  ui,  (uy),  uo, 
uai,  (uay),  uei,  (uey). 

Illustrations  of  their  sounds  will  be  found  in  the  figured 
pronunciation-marks. 


CONSONANTS. 


B,  b. 

B and  V have  practically  the  same  sound,  though 
the  Castilians  do  not  give  to  either  of  them  the  full 
English  sound.  As  a general  rule  it  may  be  stated  that 
b before  vowels,  and  especially  in  the  middle  of  a word, 
is  sounded  almost  like  the  English  v. 

Examples:  Abra  (á'-brá),  open;  abogado  (á-vó-gá'-dó), 
lawyer;  escribir  (ás-kré-vér'),  to  write. 

C,  c. 

C,  c before  the  vowels  a,  o,  u,  and  before  consonants 
has  the  sound  of  English  k. 

Examples:  casa  (ká'-sá),  house;  cosa  (ko'-sá),  thing; 
creo  (kra'-ó),  I believe;  clase  (klá'-sy),  class. 

C,  c before  the  vowels  e and  i sounds  like  th  in  thin,  ' 
It  may  be  stated,  however,  that  the  great  majority  of  Mexi- 
cans, Cubans  and  South  Americans  pronounce  it  like  s 
in  sound. 


52 


The  Rosenthal  Method, 


Examples:  conocer  (ko-nó-thérr'),  to  know;  decir 
(dá-ther'),  to  tell;  décimo  (dá'-thé-mó),  the  tenth. 

cc  are  foimd  together  only  before  the  vowels  i and  e 
and  are  pronounced  like  kHh^  as:  lección  (lák-thé'^on'), 
lesson;  acción  (ák-thé'^on'),  action;  acceso,  access. 

Ch,  ch. 

Ch,  ch  has  the  sound  of  our  English  ch  in  church. 

Examples:  mucho  (moó'-chó),  much;  noche  (nó'-ch^^), 
night;  chocolate  (cho-ko-la'-tj?’),  chocolate;  chico  (ché'-kó), 
small. 

D,  d. 

D,  d has  a peculiar  sound  which  ought  to  be  heard 
in  order  to  be  imitated.  It  sounds  similar  to  a soft, 
smothered  th  in  though.  This  is  especially  the  case  at 
the  end  of  words — ^where  the  foreigner  can  scarcely  hear 
it — and  in  the  endings  ado,  edo,  ido,  odo  and  udo. 

Examples:  marido  (má-ré'-do),  husband;  verdad  (vér- 
dád'),  truth;  usted  (óós-tád'),  you. 

F,  f. 

F,  f has  the  sound  of  English  /. 

G, g. 

G,  g has  the  soimd  of  English  g in  go: 

1.  before  other  consonants; 

2.  before  the  vowels  a,  o,  u; 

3.  gu  before  the  vowels  e and  i,  viz.,  gue=ga 
andgui=ghe. 

Examples:  cegando  (sá-goón'-do),  second;  inglés  (en-  ; 
glás'),  English;  lugar  (lóó-gár'),  place;  gorra  (gór'-rá),  , 
cap;  guerra  (gar'-rá),  war;  por  consiguiente  (pór-kón-  j 
sé-ghé''^án'-t}^),  in  consequence.  | 


The  Spanish  Language.  53 

Gua,  guo,  güe,  güi. 

When  combinations  gua  and  guo  are  pronounced 
.gwa  and  gwo. 

When  giie  and  güi  occur,  i.  e.,  when  the  diaeresis  has 
been  placed  over  the  u,  they  are  pronounced  gwa  and 
gwe. 

Examples:  lengua  (lan'-gwa),  language;  agua  (á'-gwá), 
water;  lingüista  (len-gues'-tá),  linguist;  antigüedad  (án- 
té-gwa-dád'),  antiquity. 

G-,  g {guttural). 

G,  g before  the  vowels  e and  i has  a peculiar  guttm*al 
sound,  for  which  we  have  no  exact  equivalent  in  English. 
It  sounds  like  a strongly  aspirated  h and  ought  to  be 
learned  from  a native.  It  resembles  the  guttural  sound  in 
¡Arabic  of  hhá.  (Compare  the  remarks  on  J,  j.) 

Examples:  general  (há-ná-rál'),  general;  género  (ha'« 
na-ro),  gender;  genitivo  (ha-ne-te'-vo),  genitive;  legis« 
latura  (lá-hes-lá-tóo'-rá),  legislature. 

H,  h. 

H,  h is  never  pronounced  and  remains  absolutely 
silent.  (It  is  inappreciably  aspirated  before  ue.) 

J>  j* 

J,  j has  the  same  peculiar  guttural  sound  before  all 
vowels  which  g has  only  before  e and  i.  Many  modem 
writers  have  discarded  the  use  of  g before  e and  i and  usej 
in  its  stead. 

Examples:  hijo  (e'-ho),  son;  hija  (é'-há),  daughter; 
mujer  (móo-hérr'),  woman;  joven  (ho'-vén),  young;  viejo 
(ve"^a'-hó),  old;  jurar  (hób-rárr'),  to  swear. 


54 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


L,  1. 

L,  1 has  the  sound  of  the  English  1. 

LI,  11. 

LI,  11  has  about  the  same  sound  of  ll  in  William,  bil- 
liards, etc. 

Examples:  bolsillo  (ból-sel'-yó),  pocket;  llamo  (lyá'- 
mo),  I call;  calle  (kál'-yé),  street;  llevo  (lya'-vo),  I take. 

M,  m. 

M,  m has  the  sound  of  the  English  m. 

N,  n. 

N,  n has  the  sound  of  the  English  n. 

Ñ,  ñ. 

Ñ,  ñ has  the  sound  of  n^y  as  in  ‘‘slu  yew’’  or  m in 
onion,  and  is  always  written  with  a tilde  (J), 

Examples:  mañana  (mán-yá'-ná),  to-morrow;  niña 
(nén'-yá),  girl;  niño  (nen'-yo),  boy;  enseno  (án-san'-yo), 
I teach. 

P,  p. 

P,  p sounds  like  English  p. 

Q,  q- 

Q,  q is  always  followed  by  u and  sounds  like  the 
English  k. 

Examples:  que  (ká),  which,  what;  pequeño  (pa-kan'- 
yo),  small;  por  qué  (porr-ka'),  why? 

R,  r. 

R,  r has  a sharper  and  more  rolling  sound  than  in 


The  Spanish  Language, 


55 


English,  especially  when  occurring  immediately  before 
or  after  a consonant.  At  the  beginning  of  words,  and  at 
the  end  of  them  it  has  a very  sharp,  prolonged,  rolling 
sound,  and  whenever  the  r is  doubled,  it  should  be  pro- 
nounced very  strongly. 

Examples:  rico  (ré'-kó),  rich;  quiero  (ke^a'-ró),  I 
will;  hablar  (áb-lárr'),  to  speak;  error  (ar-rorr'),  error. 

S)  s. 

S,  s has  the  sharp  sound  of  s in  sound,  some,  seen,  etc. 
(Never  like  s in  transition). 

Examples:  mesa  (ma'-sa),  table;  sus  (soos),  his;  ne- 
cesario (ná-tha-sá'-ré^o),  necessary;  sombrero  (sOm- 
bra'-ro),  hat. 

T,  t. 

T,  t sounds  as  in  English. 

V,  V. 

V,  V has  the  sound  of  the  English  v,  (Compare  re- 
marks on  B,  b). 

X,  X. 

X,  X is  pronounced  like  the  English  x,  i,  e.,  ks,  as: 
Exacto  (ak-sak'-to),  exact. 

Y,  y. 

Y,  y at  the  beginning  of  a word  or  syllable  (standing 
between  vowels)  is  considered  a consonant,  with  the 
phonetic  value  of  y in  year,  enunciated  with  emphasis. 
(Compare  remarks  on  y under  vowels). 

Examples:  yo  (yo),  I;  ya  (ya),  now;  leyes  (la'-yés), 
laws;  reyes  (rá'-yés),  kings. 


56 


The  Rosenthal  Method, 


2/j  z* 

Z,  z is  pronounced  like  the  English  th  in  thin.  This 
letter  only  precedes  the  vowels  a,  o and  u.  Mexicans 
and  South-Americans  generally  pronounce  it  like  a sharp 
hissing  s.  (Compare  remarks  on  c before  e and  i). 

Examples:  mozo  (mó'-thó),  waiter;  almorzar  (ál-morr- 
thárr'),  to  breakfast;  taza  (tá'-thá),  cup;  zapatero  (thá- 
pá-ta'-ró),  shoemaker. 


INTONATION  AND  ACCENT. 


Every  language  has  its  own  peculiar  intonation.  It 
stands,  so  to  say,  in  a certain  key;  is  sung  according  to  a 
certain  melody. 

What  color  is  to  a picture,  intonation  is  to  a language. 

The  peculiarly  sonorous  inflection  of  Spanish  voices 
cannot  be  described;  it  must  be  heard  in  order  to  be 
imitated. 

As  regards  the 


TONIC  ACCENT 


the  following  rules  must  be  observed: — 

I.  Words  ending  in  a vowel  or  a diphthong,  which  is 
always  considered  as  constituting  a single  syllable,  are 
regularly  accentuated  on  the  penultimate  syllable,  i.  e., 
the  syllable  preceding  the  final  one. 

All  exceptions  to  this  rule  are  invariably  iparked  by  a 
written  accent. 


The  Spanish  Language. 


S7 


Examples:  Americano  (á-má-ré-ká'-no),  American; 

I presidente  (pra-se-dan'-t^),  president;  posada  (po-sá'-dá), 

! inn;  iglesia  (é-glá'-sé^á),  church. 

2.  Words  ending  in  a consonant  (not  inflectional) 
have  the  accent  on  the  last  syllable,  unless  otherwise 
graphically  indicated.  (See  exceptions.) 

Examples:  decir  (dá-thérr'),  to  tell;  lugar  (lóó-gárr'), 
place;  español  (as-pán-yól'),  Spanish;  señor  (san-yórr'), 
sir. 


EXCEPTIONS. 


1.  The  inflectional  plural  signs  s and  es  do  not  affect 
j the  original  accent  of  the  singular,  i.  e.,  the  accent  remains 
* where  it  is  in  the  singular. 

Examples:  el  niño  (al  nen'-yo),  the  child;  los  niños 
I (los  nén'-yós),  the  children;  el  sombrero  (al  sOm-bra'- 
ro),  the  hat;  los  sombreros  (los  sóm-brá'-ros),  the  hats; 
la  mujer  (la  moo-har'),  the  woman;  las  mujeres  (las 
mób-há'rés),  the  women;  la  flor  (la  flor),  the  flower;  las 
flores  (las  fló'-rés),  the  flowers;  el  francés  (al  frán-thás'), 
the  Frenchman;  los  franceses  (los  frán-tha'-sés),  the 
Frenchmen. 

2.  In  the  conjugation  of  verbs  the  penultimate  syllable 
gets  the  accent,  unless  otherwise  graphically  indicated  by 
a written  accent. 


Examples: 

hablo 

(á'-bló). 

I speak. 

hablas 

(á'-blás). 

thou  speakest. 

habla 

(á'-blá). 

he  speaks. 

hablamos 

(á-blá'-mos). 

we  speak. 

habláis 

(á-blá'-és). 

you  speak. 

hablan 

(á'-blán), 

they  speak. 

58 


The  Rosenthal  Method, 


3.  Proper  names  ending  in  ez  accentuate  the  penulti- 
mate syllable. 

Examples:  Pérez  (pá'-réth),  López  (lo'-péth),  Fernán-  | 
dez  (far-nán'-déth),  I 


THE  WRITTEN  ACCENT. 


1.  In  all  words  bearing  acute  accent  (')  the  above 
rules  are  superseded  and  the  written  accent  serves  as 
sole  guide  of  pronunciation. 

The  acute  accent  (')  is  the  only  one  used  in  Spanish. 

Examples:  el  décimo  (al  dá'-thé-mó),  the  tenth;  el 
último  (al  ool'-te-mo),  the  last;  médico  (má'-dé-kó), 
physician. 

2.  The  written  accent  is  also  used  to  distinguish  hom- 
onyms, i.  e.,  words  having  the  same  sounds,  but  different 
significations. 

Examples:  si  (sé),  if;  si  (sé),  yes. 

se  (sa),  one’s  self;  sé  (sa),  I know. 

3.  To  distinguish  certain  pronouns,  adverbs,  etc.,  when 
used  in  questions  and  exclamations.  Thus: 

donde  (dón'-dy),  where;  dónde  (don'-dy),  where? 

que  (ka),  which,  that;  qué  (ká),  what? 

cuando  (kwán'-do),  when;  cuándo  (kwán'-do),  when? 
como  (kó'-mo),  as;  cómo  (ko'-mó),  how? 


DIVISION  OF  WORDS  INTO  SYLLABLES. 


I.  A single  consonant  in  the  middle  of  a word  goes 
with  the  following  syllable,  as:  casa  (ká'-sá),  house  = 
ca-sa;  llamo  (lya'-mo),  I call  = lla-mo;  hijo  (é'-ho),  son 
= hi-jo. 


The  Spanish  Language, 


59 


2.  The  letters  ch,  11  and  rr  are  considered  single  con- 
sonants and  can  never  be  divided,  as:  Calle  (kál'-yé), 
street  = ca-lle;  caballo  (ká-vál'-yo),  horse  = ca-ba-llo; 
muchacha  (móó-chá'-chá),  girl  = mu-cha-cha. 

3.  Two  separable  consonants  in  the  middle  of  a word 
are  divided  so  that  the  first  belongs  to  the  previous  and 
the  second  to  the  following  syllable,  as:  Gusto  (góbs'-tó), 
taste  = gus-to;  puerta  (póo-ár'-ta),  door  = pu-er-ta. 

4.  Diphthongs  or  triphthongs  can  not  be  divided,  as: 
Bueno  (bóó^á'-no),  good  = bue-no;  gracioso  (grá- 
the^o'-so),  graceful  = gra-cio-so. 


PUNCTUATION, 


Punctuation  in  Spanish  is  the  same  as  in  English, 
except  in  questions  and  exclamations,  where  the  inverted 
marks  are  placed  at  the  beginning  of  phrases,  in  addition 
to  the  regular  signs  at  the  end  of  such  sentences,  as: 

¿ Qué  dice  usted?  (ka  áé'-thf  óós-tád').  What  do  you 
say? 

¿ Qué  desea  usted?  (ká  da-sá'-á  óós-tád').  What  do 
you  want? 

¡ Cómo  llueve!  (kó-mó  lyóó"^á'-vy).  How  it  rains! 


6o 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


MAIN  SENTENCE. 


What  do  you  want  to  do  this  forenoon?  I should  like 
to  leave  by  the  first  train  for  Mexico,  but  that  is  impossible ; 
for  I expect  a friend  from  Chicago  and  must  stay  in  Vera- 
cruz till  the  steamer  arrives. 


LITERAL  TRANSLATION. 


What  will  you  do  this  morning?  (I)  would  leave 
for  Mexico  by  the  first  train,  but  not  to  me  (it)  is  possible, 
because  (I)  expect  a friend  from  Chicago  and  must  myself 
be  in  Veracruz  until  may  arrive  the  steamer. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  6 note;  oo  room. 


The  Spanish  Language. 


6i 


FRASE  FUNDAMENTAL. 


¿Qué  quiere  usted  hacer  esta  mañana?  Quisiera 
salir  para  Méjico  por  el  primer  tren,  pero  no  me  es 
posible,  porque  espero  a un  amigo  de  Chicago  y debo 
estarme  en  Veracruz  hasta  que  llegue  el  vapor. 


PRONUNCIATION. 


I Ka  ks'~'a'-i^  óós-tad'  á-thérr'  as'-tá  mán-yá'-ná?  Ke- 
se'~'a'-rá  sá-lér'  pá'-rá  Ma'-he-k5  porr  al  pre-mér'  tran, 
pa'-ro  n5  ma  as  p0-s6'-bl^,  porr'-ka  as-pa'-ro  á óón  á- 
mS'-go  da  Chicago  6 da'-vó  ás-tárr'-ma  én  Va'-rá-cróó'th 
ás'-tá  ka  lya'-ghj^  al  vá-porr'. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  5 note;  oo  room. 


Ó2 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


What  do  you  want  to  do  this  forenoon? 

What 

will  you?  (do  you  want  to?  do  you  desire  to?  (Ques- 
tions in  English  are  asked  with  the  auxiliary 
verb  to  do.  We  say:  What  do  you  want  to 
do?  The  Spaniards  say  simply:  What  will  you 
do?  We  say:  Do  you  go?  The  Spaniards  say: 
Go  you?) 

do  (to  do,  to  make) 

this 

morning  (forenoon)? 


VARIATIONS. 


1.  What  do  you  want?  (Literally:  What  will  you)? 

2.  What  do  you  want  to  do?  (Literally:  What  will 

you  do)? 

3.  What  do  you  want  to  do  this  morning?  (Liter- 

ally: What  will  you  do  this  morning)? 

4.  What  do  you  desire  to  do  to-morrow?  (Literally: 

What  will  you  do  to-morrow  (mañana^)? 

^ In  questions  qué  (with  the  acute  accent)  means  what?  Que 
(without  the  accent)  means  that  or  which,  or  who. 

2 Usted  is  a contraction  of  vuestra  merced  (voo^as'trá  mar-thad'), 
your  Honor,  your  Lordship.  This  form  is  always  written  in  an 
abbreviated  manner,  viz.,  V.  (sometimes  Vd.).  It  is  always  used 
for  you  when  one  person  is  addressed,  except  in  cases  where  famil- 
iarity exists  when  tú  (too),  ihou^  is  used.  JJsted,  however,  is  the 
only  form  taught  in  this  system. 

The  plural  ustedes,  written  Vds.,  is  employed  when  several 
persons  are  addressed.  This  form  is  an  abbreviation  of 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


The  Spanish  Language. 


63 


¿Qué  quiere  usted  hacer  esta  mañana? 

ká  óos-tád'  á-thérr'  as'-tá  mán-yá'-ná. 

Qué^  (ka) 

quiere  V.^  (ké"^á'-ry  oós-tád') 


hacer  (á-thérr') 
esta  (ás'-tá) 
mañana  (mán-yá'-ná)? 


VARIATIONS. 


1.  ¿ Qué  quiere  V.?  (oós-tád'). 

2.  ¿ Qué  quiere  V.  hacer?  (oós-tád'). 

3.  ¿ Qué  quiere  V.  hacer  esta  mañana?  (oós-tád'). 

4.  ¿ Qué  quiere  V.  hacer  mañana^?  (óós-tád'). 


vuestras  mercedes  (voó'^as'-trás  márr-thá'-das),  your  Lordships. 
It  is  generally  written  V.  V. 

Naturally  V.  requires  the  verb  in  the  third  person  singular, 
and  V.  V.,  the  third  person  plural.  Compare  the  conjugation  and 
remarks  on  page  65. 

3 Mañana  means  mornings  when  used  as  a noun ; la  mañana, 
the  morning.  When  used  as  an  adverb,  mañana  signifies  to-morrow. 


á far;  a pale;  S eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


^4 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


5.  Will  you  do  it?  (Literally:  It  (loO  will  you  do? 
Or:  Will  you  do  it  (hacerlo^)  ? 

6.  Do  you  want  to  do  it  to-morrow?  (Literally:  It 
will  you  do  to-morrow?  Or:  Will  you  do  it  (hacerlo) 
to-morrow)  ? 

7.  Do  you  wish  to  do  it  to-day?  (Literally:  It  will 
you  do  to-day  (hoy)?  Or:  Will  you  do  it  to-day 
(hoy)? 

I want. 


you  want.^ 
he  wants, 
we  want, 
you  want.2 
they  want. 


iThe  conjunctive  personal  pronouns  me,  him,  her,  it,  us,  you, 
them  are  placed  before  the  verb  in  Spanish,  except  in  affirmative 
imperative  sentences,  or  if  the  verb  stands  in  the  infinitive  or  present 
participle. 

In  the  latter  three  cases  the  pronouns  are  placed  after  the  verb 
and  merged  into  one  word  with  it. 

The  pupil  should  commit  these  pronouns  to  memory:— 


me,  me  (to  me). 

(te),  (thee,  to  thee), 
se,  to  you,  or  to  him. 
le,  him  (to  him), 
la,  her 
lo,  it. 

We  say  in  English:  Will  you 


nos,  us  (to  us). 

(os),  (ye,  to  ye), 
se,  to  you,  or  to  them, 
les,  them  (to  them), 
las,  them  (fern.), 
los,  them  (mase.). 

do  it?  In  Spanish:  It  will  you 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  0 note;  oo  room. 


The  Spanish  Language.  65 

5.  ¿ Lo^  quiere  V.  hacer?  (lo  oos-tád').  ¿ Quiere  V. 
hacerlo?^  (óós-tad'  á-thérr'-lo). 

6.  ¿Lo  quiere  V.  hacer  mañana?  (óós-tad').  ¿ Quiere 
V.  hacerlo  mañana?  (óos-tád'  á-thérr'-lo). 

7.  ¿Lo  quiere  V.  hacer  hoy?  (óos-tád'  ó"^é').  ¿ Quiere 
V.  hacerlo  hoy?  (óós-tád'  o'^e'). 


Yo  quiero 
V.  quiere^ 
él  quiere 

nosotros  queremos 
V.  V.  quieren^ 
ellos  quieren 


do?  ¿Lo  quiere  V.  hacer?  Or:  Will  you  do  it?  ¿Quiere  V. 
hacerlo?  (In  the  latter  case  we  add  lo  directly  to  the  infinitive 
hacer  and  write  the  two  forms  in  one  word.) 

For  further  rules  see  Page  72,  and  Part  X. 

2 In  giving  the  conjugations  the  plan  of  Professor  Cándido  Rosi 
has  been  followed.  The  pronouns  tú,  tJiou^  and  vosotros,  ye^  are 
used  only  among  relatives  and  intimate  friends  (also  in  scripture 
and  poetry). 

Mr.  Rosi's  plan  simplifies  not  only  the  conjugations,  but  pre- 
vents the  confusion  which  must  necessarily  arise  in  pupils’  minds 
when  told  that  you  governs  the  third  person  in  Spanish. 

With  the  exception  of  usted  and  ustedes  the  pronouns  are  usually 
omitted  in  the  conjugations,  unless  required  on  account  of  ambiguity 
or  emphasis.  In  questions,  however,  they  must  always  be  used. 

The  personal  pronouns  yo,  él,  ella,  nosotros,  ellos  and  ellas 
are  given  here  for  the  purpose  of  making  the  pupil  familiar  with 
them. 


(yo  ke^á'-ró). 

(óos-tád'  ke"^á'-rj^). 

(ál  ke'^á'-r}^). 
(nó-so'-trós  ká-rá'-mós) 
(óos-tá'-dás  ké'^á'-rén). 
(ál'-yos  ké"^á'-rén). 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  0 note;  00  room. 


66 


T'he  Rosenthal  Method. 


8.  I do  not  want  to  do  it  this  afternoon.  (Literally^ 
Nofi-  (I)  want^  to  do  it  this  (esta^)  afternoon. 
Or:  Not  it  (I)  want  to  do  this  afternoon). 

9.  Why  do  you  not  want  to  do  it  to-day?  (Liter- 
ally: Why  (por  qué^)  not  will  you  do  it  to-day? 
Or:  Why  not  it  will  you  do  to-day)  ? 

10.  When  do  you  want  to  do  it?  (Literally:  When 
(cuándo)  will  you  do  it?  Or:  When  it  will  you 
do)? 

11.  Can  you  do  it  this  afternoon?  (Literally:  It  can 
you  (puede  V.)  do  this  afternoon?  Or:  Can  you 
do  it  this  afternoon)? 

12.  No,  I can  not  do  it  this  afternoon.  (Literally: 
No  (no^),  not  (I)  can  (puedo)  do  it  this  after- 
noon. Or:  No,  not  it  (I)  can  (puedo)  do  this  after- 
noon). I can. 

you  can. 
he  can. 
we  can. 
you  can. 
they  can. 

13.  Can  you  do  it  to-morrow?  Yes,  I can  do  it  to- 
morrow. (Literally:  Can  you  do  it  (hacerlo)  to- 
morrow? Yes  (si),  (I)  can  do  it  to-morrow.  Or: 
It  can  you  do  to-morrow?  Yes,  it  (I)  can  do 
to-morrow). 

^ The  negation  no,  not,  must  always  be  placed  before  the  verb. 
In  English  we  use  the  auxiliary  verb  to  do  for  negative  statements. 
We  say:  I do  not  want  to  do  it.  In  Spanish  we  express  this  by: 
Not  I want  to  do  it,  no  quiero  hacerlo.  We  say:  Don’t  you  speak 
English?  In  Spanish:  Not  speak  you  English?  ¿No  habla  V. 
inglés  ? 

2 Instead  of  quiero  the  synonymous  verb  deseo  (da-sa'-O),  I want^ 
1 wishf  I desire^  is  frequently  used. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


The  Spanish  Language,  67 

8.  No^  quiero^  hacerlo  esta^  tarde,  (no  ke"^á'-ró 
ás'-tá  tárr'-dy). 

No  lo  quiero  hacer  esta  tarde. 

9.  I Por  qué^  no  quiere  V.  hacerlo  hoy?  (óos-tád'). 

¿ Por  qué  no  lo  quiere  V.  hacer  hoy? 


10.  ¿ Cuándo  quiere  V.  hacerlo?  (kwán'-do  óós-tád'). 

I Cuándo  lo  quiere  V.  hacer? 

11.  ¿ Lo  puede  V.  hacer  esta  tarde?  (ló  poó'^á'-djf 
óos-tad'). 

i Puede  V.  hacerlo  esta  tarde? 

12.  No;^  no  puedo  hacerlo  esta  tarde,  (poó^á'-do). 

No;  no  lo  puedo  hacer  esta  tarde. 


Yo  puedo 
V.  puede 
él  puede 

nosotros  podemos 
V.  V.  pueden 
ellos  pueden 


(yo  póo^a'“do). 

(óós-tad'  póo"^a'-d^). 

(al  póó'^á'-dy). 
(no-so'-tros  pó-da'-mós). 
(óos-tá'-dás  póo'^á'-dyn). 
(ál'-yós  póo'^a'-dyn). 


13.  I Puede  V.  hacerlo  mañana?  Sí;  puedo  hacerlo 
mañana.  (póo"^a'-d^  óos-tád' — sé). 

¿ Lo  puede  V.  hacer  mañana?  Sí;  lo  puedo  hacer 
mañana. 


3 Tarde,  afternoon,  is  feminine,  consequently  esta  must  be  em- 
ployed. The  masculine  form  is  este.  Compare  Part  X. 

4 See  remarks  on  the  use  of  the  written  accent  in  questions  and 
exclamations,  page  58.  Study  also  remarks  on  punctuation,  page 
59,  which  explain  the  use  of  the  inverted  interrogation  marks  at 
the  beginning  of  phrases. 

® No  pieans  no  as  well  as  not. 


á far;  á pale;  e eve;  é there;  5 note;  00  room. 


68 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


To  speak. 


14.  Do  you  speak  Spanish?  (Literally:  Speak  you 
(habla  V.)  Spanish  (español)  ? 

1 5.  I speak  it  slightly.  (Literally:  It  (I)  speak  (hablo) 
a (un)  little  (poco). 

16.  Do  you  speak  it  well?  (Literally:  It  speak  you 
well  (bien)  ? 

17.  No,  sir,  I do  not  speak  it  very  well.  (Literally: 
No,  sir  (señor),  not  it  (I)  speak  very  (muy)  well). 

I speak, 
you  speak, 
he  speaks, 
she  speaks, 
we  speak, 
you  speak, 
they  speak  (mase.) 
they  speak  (fern.) 

18.  Can  you  express  yourself  in  Spanish?  (Literally: 

Can  you  express  yourself  (expresarse)  in  (en)  Span- 
ish? Or:  Can  you  give  yourself  (darse)  to  under- 

stand (a  entender)  in  Spanish)  ? 


1 Adjectives  referring  to  nationality  are  written  with  small  letters, 
as:  español,  Spanish;  francés,  French;  aleman,  German. 

2 Compare  the  remarks  on  verbs  of  the  first  conjugation,  page  80. 

^ This  phrase  might  be  translated:  Can  you  make  yourself 

understood  in  Spanish? 

The  two  Spanish  phrases  given  above  mean  exactly  the  same 
thing.  Synonymous  expressions  are  frequently  introduced  in 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  5 note;  ob  room. 


The  Spanish  Language, 
Hablar  (á-blárr). 


69 


14.  I Habla  V.  español?^  (áb'-lá  óos-tád'  ás-pán-yol'). 

15.  Lo  hablo  un  poco,  (lo  áb'4o  oon  po'-ko). 

16.  ¿Lo  habla  V bien?  (lo  áb'-lá  óos-tád'  be'^án'). 

17.  No  señor;  no  lo  hablo  muy  bien,  (nó  sán-yorr', 
no  lo  áb'-ló  móo'-e  bé'^án'). 


yo  hablí>2 
V.  habla 
él  habla 
ella  habla 
nosotros  hdhlamos 
V.  V.  hsblan 
ellos  habla;^ 
ellas  hablan 


(yo  áb'-lo). 

(óos-tád'  áb'-lá). 

(ál  áb'-lá). 

(ál'-yá  áb'-lá) . 
(nó-só'-trós  áb-lá'-mós). 
(óos-tá'-dás  áb'-lán). 
(ál'-yós  áb'-lán). 

(ál'-yás  áb'-lán). 


18.  ¿ Puede  V.  expresarse  en  español?  (áks-prá-sárr'- 
sá). 

¿ Puede  V.  darse  a entender^  en  español?  (dárr'- 
sá  á án-tán-dérr'  án  ás-pán-yól'). 

order  to  accustom  the  student  to  a variety  of  diction.  The  most 
common-place  statement  may  be  rendered  in  various  ways,  and  it 
has  been  my  aim  to  give  all  the  synonyms  which  are  generally  used. 

The  most  polite  way  for:  What  do  you  want?  is  not:  ¿Qué 
quiere  V.  ? or:  ¿ Qué  desea  V.  ? A polite  Spaniard  would  not  use 
these  forms  at  all  when  addressing  a lady  or  gentleman,  but  would 
say:  ¿Qué  se  le  ofrece  a V.? 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


70 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


19.  I speak  it  sufficiently  to  make  myself  understood. 
(Literally:  It  (I)  speak  sufficiently  (bastante)  in 
order  to  (para)  give  myself  (darme)  to  under- 
stand). 

20.  I can  not  express  myself  very  well  in  Spanish,  but 
I speak  it  sufficiently  to  get  along.  (Literally: 
Not  (I)  can  express  myself  very  well  in  Spanish, 
but  (pero)  it  (I)  speak  sufficiently  in  order  to  give 
myself  to  understand). 

21.  Does  this  gentleman  speak  Spanish?  (Literally: 
Speaks  this  gentleman  (este  caballero)  the  (el) 
Spanish)  ? 

22.  Yes,  he  speaks  it  fluently.  (Literally:  Yes  (si), 
it  (he)  speaks  with  ease. 

23.  Is  he  a Spaniard?  (Literally:  Is  he  (es  él)  Span- 
ish)? 

24.  Yes,  sir,  he  is  a Spaniard.  (Literally:  Yes,  sir, 
(he)  is  Spanish). 

I am. 
you  are. 
he  is. 
she  is. 
we  are. 
you  are. 

they  are  (mase.) 
they  are  (fern.) 


1 The  personal  pronoun  must  be  used  in  questions. 

2 We  say  in  English:  Are  you  a Spaniard?  In  Spanish  this  is 


á far;  a pale;  0 eve;  é there;  ó note;  00  room. 


The  Spanish  Language, 


71 


19.  Lo  hablo  bastante  para  darme  a entender,  (lo 
áb'-ló  bás-tán'-ty  pá'-rá  dárr'-ma  á án-tan-dérr'). 


20.  No  puedo  expresarme  muy  bien  en  español,  pero 
lo  hablo  bastante  para  darme  a entender  or:  para 
darme  a comprender,  (kóm-pran-dérr'). 

21.  ¿Habla  este  caballero  el  español?  (ás'-tj^  ká-vál- 
ya'-ro) . 


22.  Sí,  lo  habla  con  facilidad. 

23.  ¿Es  éh  español (as  ál  ás-pán-yól'). 


24.  Sí  señor;  es  español.^ 

Yo  soy 
V.  es 
él  es 
ella  es 

nosotros  somos 
V.  V.  son 
ellos  son 
ellas  son 


(sé  san-yorr'). 

(yo  so^é). 

(óós-tad'  as). 

(ál  ás). 

(ál'-yá  ás). 
(nó-só'-tros  so'mós). 
(óós-tá'-dás  son), 
(ál'-yos  son). 

(ál'-yás  son). 


expressed  by:  Are  you  Spanish?  ¿ Es  V.  español?  This  gentleman 
is  a Frenchmany  este  señor  es  francés. 


á far;  á pale;  S eve;  é there;  ó note;  00  room. 


72 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


25.  And  you,  sir,  are  you  an  American  or  a Spaniard? 
(Literally:  And  (y)  you,  sir,  are  you  American 
(americano)  or  (o)  (Spanish)? 

26.  Why  do  you  ask  that?  (Literally:  Why  me  it®  ask 
you  (pregunta  V.)  ? 

27.  I put  this  question,  because  you  speak  English  so 
well.  (Literally:  You  (se^)  it  I ask,  because  (por- 
que) speak  you  the  English  very  weU). 


1 Caballero  means  literally  knight,  but  is  used  in  the  same  way 
as  señor. 

2 Porque  (written  without  accent)  means  because;  por  qué,  two 
words  and  the  latter  with  an  accent,  means  why. 

3 We  have  seen  that  the  conjunctive  pronouns  are  placed  before 
the  verb.  (Compare  note  page  64.) 

When  a verb  governs  two  conjunctive  pronouns,  the  dative 
must  precede  the  accusative  (with  the  exception  of  the  reflexive 
pronoun  se,  which  always  stands  first,  and  which  is  fully  explained 
in  the  next  note). 

As:  Why  do  you  ask  me?  (Literally:  Why  to  me  it  ask  you)? 
— ¿ Por  qué  me  lo  pregunta  V.? 

Will  you  give  it  to  me?  (Literally:  To  me  it  will  give  you)? — 
I Me  lo  dará  V.  ? 

^ The  use  of  le  and  se — both  meaning  you  in  the  dative  and 
accusative  singular — presents  great  difficulty  to  foreigners.  The 
explanation  will,  of  necessity,  be  somewhat  long,  but  should,  on 
account  of  its  importance,  be  studied  with  great  care. 

a.  Usted  is  inflected  like  any  noun,  viz.: 


SINGULAR. 


PLURAL. 


Nom.  usted,  you. 
Gen.  de  usted,  of  you. 
Dat.  a usted,  to  you. 
Acc.  (a)  usted,  you. 


ustedes,  you. 
de  ustedes,  of  you. 
a ustedes,  to  you. 
(a)  ustedes,  you. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  5 note;  00  room. 


The  Spanish  Language, 


73 


25.  ¿Y  V.,  caballero/  es  V.  americano  o español? 
(é  óós-tád'  ká-vál-ya'-ro  as  óós-tád'  á-má-re-ká'-no 
ó ás-pán-yol'). 

26.  ¿ Por  qué^  me  lo^  pregunta  V.?  (pOr-ká'  ma  lo  prá- 
goón'-tá  óós-tad') . 

27.  Se  lo^  pregunto,  porque^  habla  V.  el  inglés  muy 
bien,  (sa  lo  pra-góon'-to  p5r'-k^  áb'-lá  óós-tád' 
ál  en-glás'  móo'-é  be"^án'). 


h.  In  the  accusative,  which  is  the  case  for  the  direct  object,  an 
a is  placed  before  usted  and  ustedes. 

The  reason  for  this  is  that  active  verbs  require  a before  the  object, 
when  a person,  as:  I see  this  man ^ veo  a este  hombre. — Do  you  not 
know  this  lady? — ¿ No  conoce  V.  a esta  señora? — I ask  you^  pregunto 
a V. — I hear  you,  oigo  a V. 

c.  For  the  dative  and  accusative  of  usted  Spaniards  very  fre- 
quently use  le  (dative  and  accusative,  masculine)  or  la  (accusative, 
feminine)  in  the  singular,  and  les  (dative,  masculine)  and  los,  las 
(accusative,  masculine  and  feminine)  in  the  plural. 

This  is  often  done  to  avoid  repetition,  but  its  use  is  almost  uni- 
versal. 

Thus  we  say: 


Oigo  a V.,  mas  no  le  veo. 
Vengo  a ver  a V.  y a decirle. 
Le  digo. 

Les  digo. 


I hear  you,  hut  I do  not  see  you, 
I came  to  see  you  and  to  tell  you, 
I tell  you  (singular). 

I tell  you  (plural). 


d.  The  Spaniards  never  say  le  lo,  le  la,  etc.,  when  two  conjunc- 
tive pronouns  occur,  but  invariably  change  it  for  euphony’s  sake 
into  se  lo,  se  la,  se  los,  se  las,  etc. 

Thus  in  the  above  phrase: 

Se  lo  pregunto,  I ask  it  of  you. 

For  full  rules  and  tables  see  Part  X. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  0 note;  00  room. 


74 


The  Rosenthal  Method, 


28.  I am  a Spaniard,  but  my  mother  was  an  English- 

woman, and  I speak  both  Spanish  and  English 
fluently.  (Literally:  I am  Spanish,  but  (pero) 

my  mother  (mi  madre)  was  (era)  English  and  I 
speak  easily  both  languages  (ambos  idiomas),  the 
English  and  the  Spanish). 

29.  Is  Spanish  a difficult  language?  (Literally:  Is 
difficult  (difícil)  the  language  (el  idioma)  Span- 
ish2)? 

30.  I was  bom  in  Madrid  and  Spanish  is  my  mother- 
tongue.  (Literally:  (I)  was  bom  (nací)  in  Madrid, 
and  the  Spanish  is  my  mother-tongue. 

31.  Is  the  Spanish  pronunciation  very  difficult?  (Lit- 
erally: Is  very  difficult  the  pronunciation  Span- 
ish (la  pronunciación  española)  ? 

32.  The  Spanish  pronunciation  is  not  very  difficult,  on 
the  contrary,  it  is  very  easy.  (Literally:  The  pro- 
nunciation Spanish  not  is  very  difficult,  on  the  con- 
trary (al  contrario)  (it)  is  very  easy  (fácil). 


1 Adjectives  agree  in  gender  and  number  with  the  noun  they 
qualify,  as:  el  libro  nuevo  (mase,  singular),  the  new  hook;  libros 
nuevos  (mase,  plural),  new  hooks;  una  easa  nueva  (fern,  singular), 
a new  house;  casas  nuevas  (fern,  plural),  new  houses. 

The  feminine  of  adjectives  is  generally  formed  by  changing  the 
final  o of  the  masculine  form  into  a,  as:  bueno,  buena,  good;  malo, 
mala,  had. 

Adjectives  referring  to  nationality  and  ending  in  a consonant, 
add  a for  the  feminine,  as:  inglés,  inglesa,  English;  francés,  francesa, 
French;  alemán,  alemana,  German;  español,  española,  Spanish. 

Adjectives  not  referring  to  nationality  and  ending  in  any  other 
letter  remain  unchanged  in  the  feminine,  as: 


á far;  a pale;  é eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


The  Spanish  Language, 


75 


28.  Soy  español,  pero  mi  madre  era  inglesa^  y yo  hablo 
fácilmente  ambos  idiomas,  el  inglés  y el  español, 
(pa'-ro  me  mád'-ry  a'-rá  én-glá'-sá  ám'-bos). 

29.  ¿Es  difícil  el  idioma  españoP?  (de-fé'-thel  ál 
é-dé"^ó'-má). 

30.  Nací  en  Madrid,  y el  español  es  mi  lengua  materna 
(ná-thé'  én  mád-réd'  me). 

31.  ¿Es  muy  difícil  la  pronunciación  española?  (la 
pró-nóón-the'^á-thé'^on'  as-pán-yo'-lá) . 

32.  La  pronunciación  española  no  es  muy  difícil;  al 
contrario,  es  muy  fácil,  (ál  k5n-trá'-ré"^ó  fá'- 
thel). 


un  hombre  cortés,  a polite  man. 

una  mujer  cortés,  a polite  woman. 

el  trabajo  es  difícil,  the  work  is  difficult. 

la  cosa  es  difícil,  the  matter  is  difficult. 

2 The  adjective  stands  generally  after  the  noun  qualified,  as: 
una  mujer  hermosa,  a beautiful  woman  (literally:  a woman  beauti- 
ful); una  pintura  española,  a Spanish  picture;  una  madre  amada, 
a beloved  mother. 

There  are,  however,  many  cases  where  the  adjectives  are  placed 
before  the  nouns.  No  satisfactory  rule  can  be  given;  it  is  almost 
entirely  a matter  of  style. 

Adjectives  denoting  nationality y color  and  shape  are  placed  after 
the  noun. 

For  full  rules  see  Part  X. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  ó note;  00  room. 


76 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


33.  It  is  very  difficult  for  me  to  pronounce  Spanish 
phrases  correctly.  (Literally:  To  me  (it)  is  very 
difficult  to  pronounce  (pronunciar)  correctly  (corr- 
ectamente) phrases  Spanish  (frases  españolas^). 

34.  I think  the  Spanish  pronunciation  very  difficult. 

(Literally:  (I)  believe  (creo)  that  (que)  the  pro- 

nunciation Spanish  is  very  difficult). 

35.  On  the  contrary,  the  English  pronunciation  is 
much  more  difficult  than  ours.  (Literally:  On 
the  contrary,  the  pronunciation  English  (inglesa) 
is  much  (mucho)  more  (más)  difficult  than  the 
ours  (la  nuestra). 

36.  English  is  my  mother-tongue.  (Literally:  The 

English  is  my  mother-tongue). 


1 The  Spanish  declension  is  very  simple: 

There  are  two  articles:  the  definite  el,  the^  for  the  masculine, 
la,  they  for  the  feminine  form,  and  the  indefinite  un,  a,  an  (mascu- 
line), una,  a,  an  (feminine). 


DECLENSION  OF  THE  ARTICLES. 


SINGULAR.  PLURAL. 

Nom.  el  los 

Gen.  del  de  los 

Dat.  al  a los 

Acc.  el  los 


Masculine. 


Feminine. 


Feminine. 

SINGULAR.  PLURAL. 

la  las,  the. 

de  la  de  las,  of  the,  or  from  the. 

a la  a las  to  the,  or  at  the. 

la  las,  the. 

Masculine. 


una,  a. 

de  una,  of  a,  or  from  a. 
a una,  to,  or  at  a. 
una,  a. 


Nom.  un. 
Gen.  de  un. 
Dat.  a un. 
Acc.  un. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  0 note;  00  room. 


The  Spanish  Language, 


77 


33.  Me  es  muy  difícil  pronunciar  correctamente  frases 
españolas.^  (pro-nóon-the'^árr'  korr-rák-tá-mán'-t;J^ 
frá'-sas ' ás-pán-yo'-lás). 

34.  Creo  que  la  pronunciación  española  es  muy  difícil, 
(krá'-o  ká). 

35.  Al  contrario,  la  pronunciación  inglesa  es  mucho 
más  difícil  que  la  nuestra,  (ál  kón-trá'-re'^ó  én- 
gla'-sá  as  móó'-chó  más  dé-fe'-thel  ká  la  nóo'^és'- 
trá). 

36.  El  inglés  es  mi^  lengua  materna. 


Spanish  nouns  have  two  genders^ — masctdine  and  feminine. 

The  gender  of  a noun  may  be  determined  partly  by  its  significa- 
tion, and  partly  by  its  ending. 

Nouns  ending  in  o are  generally  masculine,  and  those  ending  in 
a feminine  (except  those  which  designate  males). 

Nouns  ending  in  an  unaccented  vowel  form  their  plural  by  adding 


s,  as: 


el  padre,  the  father. 

la  madre,  the  mother. 


los  padres,  the  fathers. 

las  madres,  the  mothers. 


Nouns  ending  in  a consonant  or  in  an  accented  vowel  (except  e) 


add  es  in  the  plural,  as: 


el  general,  the  general.  los  generales,  the  generals. 

la  mujer,  the  woman.  las  mujeres,  the  women. 


For  full  rules  see  Part  X. 
2 See  note  page  78. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


78 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


37.  Were  you  born  in  New  York?  No,  sir,  I was 
bom  in  Chicago.  (Literally:  Were  bom  (nació) 
you  in  New  York  (Nueva  York)  ? No,  sir,  (I)  was 
bom  (nací)  in  Chicago). 

38.  The  Spanish  pronunciation  is  much  easier  than 

yours.  We  have  definite  mies  for  the  pronun- 
ciation. (Literally:  The  pronunciation  Spanish 

is  much  more  easy  than  the  of  yours  (la  de  ustedes). 
We  have  (tenemos)  rules  fixed  (reglas  fijas)  for 
(para)  the  pronunciation). 

affirmatively: 

I have, 
you  have, 
he  has. 
she  has. 
we  have, 
you  have, 
they  have  (mase.) 
they  have  .(fern.) . 

interrogatively: 

Have  I? 

have  you? 

has  he? 

has  she? 

have  we? 

have  you? 

have  they?  (mase.). 

have  they?  (fern.). 

^ The  conjunctive  possessive  adjectives  should  be  committed  to 
memory.  They  are: 

SINGULAR.  PLURAL. 

my^  mi.  mis. 

{thy),  (tu).  (tus). 


á far;  a pale;  6 eve;  é there;  O note;  00  room. 


The  Spanish  Language, 


79 


37.  I Nació  V.  en  Nueva  York?  No  señor,  nací  en 
Chicago,  (ná-thé'^o' — ^nóoa-vá — ^ná-thé') . 

38.  La  pronunciación  española  es  mucho  más  fácil 
que  la  de  ustedes.  Tenemos  reglas  ñjas  para  la 
pronunciación,  (ta-na'-mos  rag'-lás  fe'-hás  pá'- 
rá  la  pr5-nó^n-the"^á-thé"^ón'). 


AFIRMATIVO  (á-fer-má-te'vo) . 


INTERRO  CATIVO : (én-térr-r5-gá-té'-vo) . 


¿ Tengo  yo? 

I tiene  V.  ? 

I tiene  él? 

I tiene  ella? 

I tenemos  nosotros? 
I tienen  ustedes? 

I tienen  ellos? 

¿ tienen  ellas? 


Yo  tengo 
V.  tiene 
él  tiene 
ella  tiene 
nosotros  tenemos 
ustedes  tienen 
ellos  tienen 
ellas  tienen 


(yó  tán'-go). 

(óos-tad'  te'^a'-njr). 

(ál  te^a'-n;^). 

(al'-yá  te'^a'-n;$^). 
(nó-so'-tros  tá-ná'-mós) 
(óos-ta'-dás  te"^a'-nén) 
(al'-yós  té^á'-nen). 
(ál'-yás  te'^a'-nén). 


hiSy  her^  its,  your 
our, 


su. 

nuestro,  nuestra, 
vuestro,  vuestra, 
su. 


sus. 

nuestros,  nuestras, 
vuestros,  vuestras, 
sus. 


{your), 
their,  your, 


For  full  rules  see 


Part  X. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  0 note;  00  room. 


So 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


CONJUGATION  OF  THE  PRESENT  TENSE. 
FIRST  CONJUGATION. 

To  Speak.i 


affirmatively: 

I speak, 
you  speak, 
he  speaks, 
she  speaks, 
we  speak, 
you  speak, 
they  speak  (mase.), 
they  speak  (fern.). 

To 

affirmatively: 

I wish, 
you  wish, 
he  wishes, 
she  wishes, 
we  wish, 
you  wish, 
they  wish  (mase.), 
they  wish  (fern.). 


interrogatively: 
Do  I speak? 
do  you  speak? 
does  he  speak? 
does  she  speak? 
do  we  speak? 
do  you  speak? 
do  they  speak  (mase.)  ? 
do  they  speak  (fern.)  ? 

I. 

INTERROGATIVELY : 

Do  I wish? 
do  you  wish? 
does  he  wish? 
does  she  wish? 
do  we  wish? 
do  you  wish? 
do  they  wish  (mase.)  ? 
do  they  wish  (fern.)  ? 


^ There  are  three  conjugations  in  Spanish. 

The  verbs  of  the  first  conjugation  end  in  ar  in  the  infinitive, 
as:  hablar,  to  speak;  desear,  to  wish;  pronunciar,  to  pronounce; 
llamar,  to  call. 

The  infinitive  is  the  ground  form  of  the  verb  on  which  its  conju- 
gation depends.  Ar  is  called  the  ending.  By  striking  off  this  ar  we 
find  the  root  or  stem  of  the  verb. 

Thus  hahl  is  the  stem  of  the  verb  hablar;  dese  the  stem  of  desear; 
pronuncia  the  stem  of  pronunciar;  //am,  the  stem  of  llamar. 

The  stem  remains  unaltered  in  all  regular  verbs. 

To  the  stem  various  terminations  are  added  by  which  persons, 
tenses  and  moods  are  distinguished,  and  which  are  common  to  all 
regular  verbs  of  the  same  conjugation. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  0 note;  óó  room. 


The  Spanish  Language, 


8i 


CONJUGATION  OF  THE  PRESENT  TENSE. 
FIRST  CONJUGATION. 

Habl-ar.i 

afirmativo:  interrogativo  : 


Yo  habl-í?. 

¿ Hablo  yo? 

V.  habl-o. 

¿ hablo  V.? 

él  habl-a. 

¿ hablo  él? 

ella  habl-a. 

¿ hablo  ella? 

nosotros  h.3b\-amos. 

¿ hablomo^  nosotros? 

V.  V.  habl-a». 

¿hablan  V.  V.? 

ellos  habl-a;^. 

¿ hablo^  ellos? 

ellas  hahl-an. 

¿ hablan  ellas? 

Dese-ar.i 

AFIRMATIVO 

INTERROGATIVO 

Yo  dese-0. 

¿ Deseo  yo? 

V.  dese-a. 

¿ desea  V? 

él  dese-a. 

¿ deseo  él? 

ella  dese-a. 

¿ deseo  ella? 

nosotros  dese-amos 

¿ deseamos  nosotros? 

V.  V.  dese-aii. 

¿ deseo;^  V.  V.  ? 

ellos  dese-a/í. 

¿ deseo;^  ellos? 

ellas  dese-a;^. 

¿ deseos  ellas? 

For  days  of  the  week  and  months 

of  the  year,  see  pages  236-237. 

In  the  present  tense  of  the  first 

conjugation  the  following  ter- 

minations  are  added: 

yo  O. 

nosotros  amos. 

V.  a. 

V.  V.  an. 

él  a. 

ellos  an. 

ella  a. 

ellas  an. 

The  accompanying  pronouns — with  the  exception  of  usted  and 
ustedes — are  generally  omitted. 

In  questions^  in  cases  of  doubtful  meaning  and  when  specially 
emphasized  the  pronouns  must  always  be  expressed  as:  ¿Pago  yo 
o paga  él?  Do  I pay  or  he?  El  estudia  y ella  escribe,  he  studies 
and  she  writes. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  oo  room. 


82 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


CONJUGATION  OF  THE  PRESENT  TENSE. 
SECOND  CONJUGATION.! 

To  Sell.! 


affirmatively: 
I sell, 
you  sell, 
he  sells, 
we  sell, 
you  sell, 
they  sell. 


interrogatively: 
Do  I sell? 
do  you  sell? 
does  he  sell? 
do  we  sell? 
do  you  sell? 
do  they  sell? 


THIRD  CONJUGATION.^ 
To  Receive.2 


affirmatively: 
I receive, 
you  receive, 
he  receives, 
we  receive, 
you  receive, 
they  receive. 


INTERROGATIVELY 

Do  I receive? 
do  you  receive? 
does  he  receive? 
do  we  receive? 
do  you  receive? 
do  they  receive? 


1 Verbs  of  the  second  conjugation  end  in  er  in  the  infinitive. 

It  will  be  observed  that  the  endings  of  the  present  tense  of  the 
first  conjugation  preserve  the  a of  the  infinitive;  in  fact  a is  the 
characteristic  vowel  of  all  verbs  of  the  first  conjugation. 

In  the  second  conjugation  it  is  e. 

2 Verbs  of  the  third  conjugation  end  in  ir  in  the  infinitive. 

The  endings  of  the  present  tense  are  the  same  as  those  of  the 

second  conjugation,  with  the  exception  of  the  first  person  plural, 
which  ends  in  irnos. 

There  are,  therefore,  the  following  endings  for  the  indicative  of 
the  present  tense  in  the  three  conjugations: 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  oo  room. 


The  Spanish  Language, 


83 


CONJUGATION  OF  THE  PRESENT  TENSE. 
SECOND  CONJUGATION.! 

Vend-er.! 


afirmativo: 

Yo  vend“í7. 

V.  vend-e. 
él  vend-e. 

nosotros  Yená-emos, 
V.  V.  vend-e;^. 
ellos  vend-ew. 


interrogativo: 

I Vendí?  yo? 

¿ vende  V.  ? 

¿ vende  él? 

I vendemos  nosotros? 
¿ venden  V.  V.  ? 

¿ venden  ellos? 


THIRD  CONJUGATION.^ 
Recib-ir.2 


afirmativo: 

Yo  recib-e. 

V.  recib-e. 
él  recib-e. 

nosotros  reáb-imos. 
V.  V.  redb-ew. 
ellos  recib-e;^. 


interrogativo: 

¿ Recibe  yo? 

¿ recibe  V.  ? 

¿ recibe  él? 

¿ recibimos  nosotros? 
¿ reciben  V.  V.  ? 

¿ recibe;^  ellos? 


Present  Tense. 


I. 

2. 

3- 

0. 

0. 

0. 

a. 

e. 

amos. 

e 

emos. 

e. 

irnos. 

an. 

en. 

en. 

an. 

en. 

en. 

By  comparing  this  table  carefully  and  conjugating  the  various 
verbs  occurring  in  our  phrases,  the  pupils  will  soon  master  the 
Spanish  conjugations. 

The  irregular  verbs  will  be  taken  up  seriatim. 

For  full  tables  see  Part  X. 


á far;  á pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


84 


T'he  Rosenthal  Method, 


1.  Will  you  please  pronounce  this  word  for  me?  (Liter- 
ally: Have  you  the  kindness  (¿Tiene  V.  la  bondad) 
of  ^ to  pronounce  me  this  word  (esta  palabra)  ? 

I do  (make), 
you  do  (make), 
he  does  (makes), 
we  do  (make), 
you  do  (make), 
they  do  (make). 

2.  Would  you  please  pronounce  it  once  more?  (Liter- 
ally: Me  would  you  do  (haria^)  the  favor  of  to  return 
(volver^)  to  (a)  pronounce  her^)7 

3.  How  is  this  word  pronoimced?  (Literally:  How 
(cómo)  itself  (se^)  pronotmces  this  word)? 

4.  I cannot  pronounce  this  word.  Would  you  be  kind 
enough  to  pronounce  it  once  more  ? (Literally : 
Not  can  I pronounce  this  word.  Woiild  you  be  so 
amiable  of  to  return  to  pronounce  her)  ? 

5.  Do  you  know  how  this  word  is  pronounced?  (Liter- 
ally: Know  you  (sabe  V.®)  how  itself  pronounces 
this  word)? 

I know.  we  know, 

you  know.  you  know, 

he  knows.  they  know. 


1 After  such  expressions  as:  you  have  the  kindness  to  do 

it?'^  where  we  could  say  in  English:  ''Will  you  have  the  kindness  of 
doing  it”  de  must  be  used  before  the  infinitive. 

2 Hacer,  to  do^  to  make,  belongs  to  the  irregular  Verbs.  The 
indicative  of  the  present  tense  is  conjugated  on  the  next  page  (the 
first  person  singular  alone  being  irregular). 

3 Volver  means  literally,  to  return.  The  above  phrase  is,  of 
course,  idiomatic. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  5 note;  00  room. 


The  Spanish  Language. 


8S 


I. 


2. 


3- 

4- 
5* 


I Tiene  V.  la  bondad  de^  pronunciarme  esta  palabra? 
(té-á-ná  óos-tád'  la  bón'dád'  da  pro-noon-the^^árr' 


— ^my  ás'-ta  pá-lá'-brá). 
yo  hago 
V.  hace 
él  hace 

nosotros  hacemos 
V.  V.  hacen 
ellos  hacen 

I Me  haría^  V.  el  favor  de 


(á'-gó). 

(á'-thy). 

(á'-thy). 
(á-tha'-mos). 
(á'-thén). 

(á'-thén). 
volver^  a pronunciarla^? 


(vól-vérr'  á pro-noón-thé^árr' — la). 

¿ Cómo  se^  pronuncia  esta  palabra?  (kó'-mo  sá  pro- 
nóon'-the'^á). 

No  puedo  pronunciar  esta  palabra.  ¿ Sería  V.  tan 
amable  de  volver  a pronunciarla? 

¿ Sabe  V.®  cómo  se  pronuncia  esta  palabra?  (sá'-bj^). 
Yo  sé  (sa). 

V.  sabe  (sá'-b;$^). 

él  sabe  (sá'-b^). 

nosotros  sabemos  (sá-ba'-mós). 

V.  V.  saben  (sá'-bén). 

ellos  saben  (sá'-bén). 


^ La  must  be  used  here,  because  it  refers  to  palabra,  which  is 
feminine. 

5 Active  verbs  are  often  used  passively  with  the  pronoun  se  in 
the  third  person  singular  or  plural,  as: 

El  idioma  español  se  habla  en  The  Spanish  language  is  spoken 
la  América  central.  in  Central  America. 

No  se  puede  ver  nada.  Nothing  can  he  seen. 

® Saber,  to  know^  is  an  irregular  verb.  The  indicative  of  the 
present  tense  is  conjugated  as  above  (the  first  person  singular 
alone  being  irregular). 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  0 note;  oo  room. 


86 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


6.  Yes,  now  I know  how  it  is  pronounced.  (Liter- 
ally: Yes,  now  ( = already,  ya)  (I)  know  (sé)  how 
itself  (it)  pronounces). 

7.  Do  you  understand  Spanish?  (Literally:  Under- 
stand you  (comprende  V.)  the  Spanish)  ? 

8.  I imderstand  it  very  slightly.  (Literally:  It  (I) 
understand  very  little). 

9.  Can  you  understand  me  when  I speak  Spanish? 
(Literally:  Me  understand  you  when  (I)  speak  in 
Spanish)  ? 

10.  I can  understand  you  when  you  speak  slowly  and 
distinctly.  (Literally:  You  (le^)  understand  (I) 
(to)  you  (a  V^)  when  (you)  speak  slowly  (des- 
pacio) and  distinctly  (claro). 

11.  Do  you  not  imderstand  me  when  I speak  rapidly? 
(Literally:  Not  me  understand  you  when  (I)  speak 
quickly  (aprisa,  or  pronto)  ? 

12.  No,  sir,  I cannot  understand  you  when  you  speak 
so  fast.  (Literally:  No,  sir,  not  you  (I)  understand 
when  (you)  speak  so  (tan)  fast). 

13.  Will  you  please  speak  slowly  and  distinctly?  I 
am  an  Englishman  and  cannot  understand  you 
when  you  speak  so  rapidly.  (Literally:  Will  you 
do  me  the  favor  of  to  speak  slowly  and  distinctly? 
(I)  am  English  and  not  you  (I)  understand  when 
(you)  speak  so  fast). 

1 Le  comprado  a V.,  I understand  you.  The  Spanish  language 
has  many  pleonastic  expressions.  Le,  it  must  be  remembered, 
can  mean  either  him  or  you.  Consequently,  in  order  to  make  it 
clearly  understood  that  you  is  meant  and  not  him,  a V.  is  added. 
Wherever  such  a misunderstanding  could  not  arise,  a V.  may  be 
left  out. 

There  are  therefore  three  ways  to  express  the  phrase:  I under- 
stand you. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  ó note;  00  room. 


The  Spanish  Language, 


87 


6.  Si;  ya  sé  como  se  pronuncia,  (sé  ya  sa). 

7.  ¿ Comprende  V.  el  español?  (kOm-prán'-dy). 

8.  Lo  comprendo  muy  poco,  (móó'-é  pó'-kó). 

9.  ¿ Me  comprende  V.  cuando  hablo  en  español? 

10.  Le  comprendo  a V.^  cuando  habla^  despacio  y 
claro.  (dás-pá'-the"^o  é klá'-ro). 

11.  ¿No  me  comprende  V.  cuando  hablo  aprisa  {or: 
cuando  hablo  pronto)?  (á-pré'-sá  prón'-to). 

12.  No,  señor;  no  le  comprendo  a V.  cuando  habla  tan 
aprisa,  (tan  á-pré'-sá) . 

13.  ¿ Quiere  V.  hacerme  el  favor  de  hablar  despacio  y 
claro?  Soy  inglés  y no  le  comprendo  cuando  habla 
tan  aprisa. 


a.  Comprendo  a V.,  (a  has  to  be  used  before  the  personal  object); 
h.  Le  comprendo; 
c.  Le  comprendo  a V. 

2 Usted  is  left  out  here,  because  the  meaning  of  the  phrase  is 
clear  without  it.  In  cases  where  any  doubt  might  arise,  usted 
must  be  used. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


88 


The  Rosenthal  Method, 


14.  Will  you  please  repeat  this  phrase?  I cannot  un- 
derstand you  when  you  speak  so  fast.  (Liter- 
ally: Will  you  do  me  the  favor  of  to  repeat  (repetir) 
this  phrase?  Not  you  (I)  understand  (to)  you 
when  (you)  speak  so  fast). 

15.  Do  you  understand  me  now?  (Literally:  Me  un- 
derstand you  now  (ahora)  ? 

16.  Yes,  now  I understand  you  perfectly.  (Literally: 
Yes,  now  you  (I)  understand  perfectly  (perfecta- 
mente). 

17.  What  do  you  say?  (Literally:  What  say  you  (dice 

V.')? 

I say. 
you  say. 
he  says, 
we  say. 
you  say. 
they  say. 

18.  What  does  he  say?  (Literally:  What  says  he)? 

19.  What  does  this  man  say?  (Literally:  What  says 
this  man  (este  hombre)  ? 


^ Decir,  to  say^  to  tell,  is  an  irregular  verb.  The  indicative  of 
the  present  tense  is  conjugated  on  page  89. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  0 note;  00  room. 


The  Spanish  Language. 


89 


14.  ¿ Qiiiere  V.  hacerme  el  favor  de  repetir  esta  frase? 
No  le  comprendo  a V.  cuando  habla  tan  aprisa, 
(rá-pá-tér'). 

15.  I Me  comprende  V.  ahora?  (á-o'-rá). 

16.  Sí;  ahora  le  entiendo  perfectamente,  (pér-fak-tá- 


mán'-t^). 


17.  ¿ Qué  dice  V.^?  (ka  dé'-th;5^  oos-tad'). 


Yo  digo, 
V.  dice, 
él  dice. 


(de'-go). 

(dé'-th^). 

(dé'-th^). 


nosotros  decimos, 
V.  V.  dicen, 
ellos  dicen. 


(da-the'-mós). 


(de'-thén). 

(de'-thén). 


18.  ¿ Qué  dice  él? 


19.  ¿ Qué  dice  este  hombre  (ás'-tf  om'-br;$^)* 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  ó note;  o&  room. 


90 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


20.  Do  you  understand  what  this  man  says?  (Liter- 
ally: Understand  you  (entiende  Y})  that  which 
(lo  que^)  says  this  man)  ? 

I understand, 
you  understand, 
he  understands, 
we  understand, 
you  understand, 
they  understand. 

21.  No,  I do  not  understand  him.  (Literally:  No,  not 
him  (I)  imderstand). 

22.  Do  you  understand  every  thing  I say?  (Liter- 
ally: Understand  you  all  (todo)  which  I say)? 

23.  Yes,  I can  understand  every  thing  you  say,  if 
you  speak  slowly  and  distinctly.  (Literally:  Yes, 
(I)  understand  all  which  you  say  if  (si^)  (you) 
speak  slowly  and  distinctly). 

24.  I do  not  understand  this  word;  please  repeat  it 
once  more.  (Literally:  Not  (I)  understand  this 
word;  please  (sirvase^)  to  fepeat  (repetir)  her). 

25.  Do  you  imderstand  it  now?  Yes,  now  I understand 

it.  (Literally:  Her  understand  you  now?  Yes, 

now  her  (I)  understand). 


^ Entender,  to  understand^  is  synonymous  with  comprender. 
Entender  is  slightly  irregular.  The  e of  the  second  syllable  ten  is 
changed  into  ie  in  the  whole  of  the  singular  and  in  the  third  person 
plural  of  the  present  tense.  A number  of  other  verbs  have  similar 
irregularity.  Compare  Part  X. 

2 Which  (the  relative  pronoun)  can  never  be  omitted,  as  is  fre- 
quently done  in  English.  It  must  be  expressed  by  lo  que,  that, 
which,  what,  when  it  relates  to  an  idea,  not  a word.  All  that  (com- 
pare phrase  22)  is  expressed  by  todo  lo  que. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


The  Spanish  Language. 


91 


20.  I Entiende  V.^  lo  que^  dice  este  hombre?  (an- 
ie^an'-df  óós-tad'  ló  ka  dé'-th^  as'-ty  óm'-br;$^). 


21.  No;  no  le  entiendo.  (an-te"^an'-do). 

22.  ¿ Entiende  V.  todo  lo  que  digo?  (tó'-dó  ló  ka  dé'- 
gó). 

23.  Sí;  entiendo  todo  lo  que  V.  dice,  si^  habla  despa- 
cio y claro. 

24.  No  entiendo  esta  palabra;  sírvase^  repetirla,  (sér'- 
vá'S^  ra-pa-tér'-lá) . 

25.  ¿La  entiende  V.  ahora?  Sí;  ya  la  entiendo. 


3 Si  (without  the  acute  accent)  means  if,  whether;  si  (with  the 
acute  accent)  means  yes.  Both  words  sound  alike. 

^ Sírvase,  or  sírvase  V.  means  pray,  please.  It  really  is  the  im- 
perative mood  of  the  irregular  verb  servir,  to  serve,  to  wait  upon. 

Sírvase,  me  hace  V.  el  favor,  quiere  V.  tener  la  bondad — are  all 
phrases  which  practically  mean  the  same  thing. 

For  the  conjugation  of  servir  see  Part  X. 


Yo  entiendo, 
V.  entiende, 
él  entiende, 


(án-té"^án'-dó). 
(an-té^án'-d}^) . 
(án-té"^án'-d^). 


nosotros  entendemos. 
V.  V.  entienden, 
ellos  entienden. 


(an-tén-da'-mós) . 
(án-te"^án'-dén) . 
(án-té'^an'-dén) . 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


Q2  The  Rosenthal  Method, 

26.  What  does  this  word  mean?  (Literally:  What  will 
say  (decir)  this  word)  ? 

27.  What  is  the  meaning  of  this  word  in  English? 
(Literally:  What  will  say  this  word  in  English)? 

28.  What  does  this  mean?  (Literally:  What  will  say? 
Or:  What  means  (significa)  ? 

29.  Will  you  please  repeat  that  once  more.  I do  not 
understand  what  that  means.  (Literally:  Will  you 
do  me  the  favor  of  return  to  repeat  it.  Not  (I) 
understand  which  (it)  will  say). 

30.  Will  you  please  explain  this  word?  (Literally: 
Pray  to  explain  (explicar)  this  word). 

31.  Will  you  please  explain  this  word  once  more  to 
me?  (Literally:  Me  do  you  the  favor  of  return  to 
explain  me  this  word)  ? 

32.  Do  you  know  what  this  word  means  in  English? 
(Literally:  Know  you  which  will  say  in  English 
this  word)  ? 

33.  Yes,  now  I know  the  meaning  of  this  word.  (Liter- 
ally: Yes,  now  (I)  know  what  signifies  this  word). 

34.  Would  you  please  explain  this  Spanish  phrase  to 
me;  I do  not  know  what  it  signifies.  (Literally: 
Would  you  have  the  kindness  of  to  explain  me  this 
phrase  Spanish;  not  (I)  know  what  (it)  will  say). 

35.  Do  you  understand  the  meaning  of  this  phrase 
now?  (Literally:  Understand  you  now  what  sig- 
nifies this  phrase)  ? 

36.  Yes,  now  I know  what  this  phrase  means  and  can 
say  it  in  Spanish  and  English.  (Literally:  Yes, 
now  (I)  know  what  signifies  this  phrase  and  can 
say  her  in  Spanish  and  in  English). 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  0 note;  00  room. 


The  Spanish  Language,  93 

26.  I Qué  quiere  decir  esta  palabra?  (dá-thér'). 

27.  ¿ Qué  quiere  decir  esta  palabra  en  inglés? 

28.  ¿ Qué  quiere  decir? 

¿ Qué  significa?  (ség-né-fé'-ká). 

29.  I Quiere  V.  hacerme  el  favor  de  volver  a repetirla? 
No  entiendo  lo  que  quiere  decir. 

30.  Sírvase  explicar  esta  palabra,  (áks-plé-karr'). 

31.  ¿ Me  hace  V.  el  favor  de  volver  a explicarme  esta 
palabra? 

32.  I Sabe  V.  lo  que  quiere  decir  en  inglés  esta  pala- 
bra? 

33.  Sí,  ahora  sé  lo  que  significa  esta  palabra. 

34.  I Tendría  V.  la  bondad  de  explicarme  esta  frase 
española?  No  sé  lo  que  quiere  decir. 

35.  I Entiende  V.  ahora  lo  que  significa  esta  frase? 
(seg-né-fé'-ká). 

36.  Sí,  ahora  sé  lo  que  significa  esta  frase  y puedo  de- 
cirla en  español  y en  inglés. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


94 


The  Rosenthal  Method, 


37.  It  is  very  hard  for  me  to  pronounce  all  these 
phrases.  I think  the  Spanish  pronunciation  is  very 
difficult.  (Literally:  Me  (it)  is  very  difficult  to 
pronounce  all  these  phrases.  I think  that  the  pro- 
nunciation Spanish  is  very  difficult). 

38.  On  the  contrary,  the  Spanish  pronunciation  is  very 
easy.  Spanish  words  are  pronounced  in  accordance 
with  definite  rules.  (Literally:  On  the  contrary, 
the  pronunciation  Spanish  is  very  easy.  The  words 
Spanish  themselves  (se)  pronounce  according  to 
(según)  rules  definite  (reglas  definidas). 


In  a Store. 

1.  What  do  you  want  to  do  in  this  store?  I want  to 
buy  something.  (Literally:  What  will  you  do  in 
(en)  this  store  (esta  tienda)?  (I)  want  to  buy 
(comprar)  something  (algo). 

2.  What  do  you  want  to  buy?  I wish  to  purchase  a 
hat.  (Literally:  What  will  you  buy?  (I)  will  buy 
a hat  (un  sombrero). 

3.  Please  accompany  me.  I want  to  buy  a hat  and  I 
do  not  speak  Spanish  well  enough.  (Literally: 
Please  (sírvase  V.)  to  accompany  me  (acompa- 
ñarme). (I)  want  to  buy  a hat  and  not  (I)  speak 
sufficiently  (bastante)  well  the  Spanish). 

4.  Good  day,  sir.  My  friend  wants  to  buy  a hat. 

(Literally:  Good  day  (buenos  dias^.  My  friend 

(mi  amigo)  wishes  to  purchase  a hat) . 

5.  Do  you  wish  a silk  hat  or  another  kind?  (Liter- 
ally: Will  you  a hat  of  silk  (seda)  or  of  other 
class)  ? 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


The  Spanish  Language, 


95 


37.  Me  es  muy  difícil  pronunciar  todas  estas  frases. 
Creo  que  la  pronunciación  española  es  muy  difí- 
cil. (to'-dás). 

38.  Al  contrario;  la  pronunciación  española  es  muy 
fácil.  Las  palabras  españolas  se  pronuncian  según 
reglas  deñnidas.  (sá-góon'  rág'-lás  da-fé-né'-dás) . 


En  Una  Tienda. 

én  óó'-ná  te"^én'-dá. 


1.  I Qué  quiere  V.  hacer  en  esta  tienda?  Quiero 
comprar  algo,  (kom-prárr'  ál'-go). 

2.  ¿ Qué  quiere  V.  comprar?  Quiero  comprar  un 
sombrero,  (sóm-brá'-ró) . 

3.  Sírvase  V.  acompañarme.  Quiero  comprar  un  som- 
brero y no  hablo  bastante  bien  el  español,  (á-kom- 
pán-yárr'-my  bás-tán'-t}^) . 

4.  Buenos  días.^  Mi  amigo  desea  comprar  un  som- 
brero. (boó"^á'-nos  dé'-ás  mé  á-me'-go  da-sá'-á). 

5.  ¿ Quiere  V.  un  sombrero  de  copa  o de  otra  clase? 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


96 


The  Rosenthal  Method, 


6.  I want  a felt  hat.  (Literally:  (I)  want  one  of 

felt) . 

7.  Try  on  this  one.  (Literally:  Try  yourself  (prué- 
bese V.)  this  (este). 

8.  It  is  too^  small  for  me.  (Literally:  Me  (to  me) 
remains  (queda)  very  (muy^)  small  (chico). 

9.  I also  want  to  get  a pair  of  gloves.  (Literally: 
Also  (también)  (I)  want  a pair  of  gloves  (un  par 
de  guantes). 

10.  What  kind  of  gloves  do  you  wear?  Kid  gloves. 
(Literally:  Of  what  kind  (clase)  them  want  you? 
Of  kid  (cabritilla). 

11.  And  what  number  do  you  wear?  Number  six. 
(Literally:  Of  what  size  (tamaño)  ? {Or:  Of  what 
number  (número)?  Of  the  number  six  (seis). 

^ The  Spaniards  never  say  ‘‘Good  Morning,”  but  always  buenos 
días,  good  day.  Good  afternoon  or  good  evening^  buenas  tardes. 
Buenas  noches,  good  night.  All  these  forms  are  used  only  in  the 
plural, 

2 This  is  the  imperative  of  the  (slightly)  irregular  verb  probar, 
to  prove.  Probar  belongs  to  a class  of  verbs  which  change  the 
stem-vowel  o into  ue  throughout  the  singular  and  in  the  third 
person  plural  of  the  present  indicative  and  subjunctive,  and  in  the 
same  persons  in  the  imperative.  The  conjugation  of  the  present 


indicative  is  therefore: 

Yo  pruebo. 

I prove. 

V.  prueba. 

you  prove. 

él  prueba. 

he  proves. 

nosotros  probamos. 

we  prove. 

V.  V.  prueban. 

you  prove. 

ellos  prueban. 

they  prove. 

3 The  English  one  in  this  and  similar  connections  can  not  be 
translated. 

4 There  are  two  verbs  in  Spanish  for  our  verb  to  he^  viz.,  ser  and 
estar,  the  use  of  which  offers  peculiar  difficulty  to  English-speaking 
persons. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  ó note;  60  room. 


The  Spanish  Language. 


97 


6.  Quiero  xino  de  fieltro, 

7.  Pruébese  Y?  este.^  (próó-á'-vá-sj^  ás'-t^^). 

8.  Me  queda^  muy  chico.  (Or:  Me  está^  muy  chico), 
(ás-tá'  ché'-kó). 

9.  También  quiero  un  par  guantes.  (tám-bé"^én' 
<5on  párr  dé  gwán'-tés). 

10.  ¿De  qué  clase  los  quiere  V.?  De  cabritilla,  (klá'- 
sy  ká-bre-tél'-yá). 

11.  ¿ De  qué  tamaño?  (Or:  De  qué  número)?  Del 
número  seis,  (tá-mán'-yó  nóó'-ma-ro  sa'-es). 


Ser — of  which  thus  far  the  student  has  learned  the  indicative 
present — must  be  used,  when  the  attribute  is  permanent^  inherent 
or  essential y as: 

I Es  V.  francés?  Are  you  a Frenchman? 

Yo  soy  médico.  I am  a physician. 

La  puerta  es  alta.  The  door  is  high. 

All  these  are  inherent  or  permanent  attributes:  consequently 
ser  must  be  used. 

Estar  must  be  used,  when  the  attribute  is  temporary  or  acci- 
dental y as: 

Estoy  bueno,  I am  well. 

La  puerta  está  cerrada,  The  door  is  locked. 

The  attributes  here  are  temporary,  consequently  estar  is  used. 
For  conjugation  of  estar  see  Part  X. 

See  Part  X for  full  particulars,  rules  and  conjugations. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  0 note;  00  room. 


q8 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


VOCABULARIO, 

£1  Idioma;  Los  Idiomas, 

LA  PRONUNCIACIÓN. 

Tiene  V.  buena  pronuncia- 
ción. 

Su  pronunciación  es  muy 
mala. 

El  acento  (á-thén'-to). 

Los  acentos  (á-thén'-tOs). 

No  acentúa  V.  bien  esta 
sílaba  (sé'-lá-bá). 

Acentúe  V.  bien  esta  sílaba. 

Pronunciar. 

Pronuncia  V.  bien. 

Pronuncia  V.  mal. 

No  pronuncia  V.  bien  esta 
palabra. 

Pronuncia  V.  mal  esta  pa- 
labra. 

Corregir  (korr-rá-^hér') 

La  equivocación  (á-ké-vo- 
ká-the'^on'). 

Las  equivocaciones  (a-ké- 
v5-ká-the^o'-nés) . 

Hágame  V.  el  favor  de  corr- 
egirme cuando  me  equi- 
voque^ en  la  pronuncia- 
ción. (a-ké-vo'-ká) . 


VOCABULARY, 

The  Language ; Lan- 
guages. 

THE  PRONUNCIATION. 

You  have  a good  promm- 
ciation. 

His  pronunciation  is  very 
bad. 

The  accent. 

The  accents. 

You  do  not  put  the  right 
accent  on  this  syllable. 

Put  the  right  accent  on 
this  syllable. 

To  pronoimce. 

You  pronounce  well. 

You  pronounce  badly. 

You  do  not  pronounce  this 
word  correctly. 

You  pronoimce  this  word 
incorrectly. 

To  correct. 

The  mistake. 

The  mistakes. 

Please  correct  me  when  I 
make  mistakes  in  the 
pronunciation. 


^ This  is  the  present  tense  of  the  subjunctive  mood.  Its  use 
will  be  fully  explained  in  a later  lesson. 


fifllitiiirv'trJMiWíií; 


n'^íí, 


Y I,  i:  /. 


■■•W.  ; ■ ^ . 

^í  íé  / 


yf"; 


,■■  "f'pf, 

■ ■ ■VH'.T,. 


^ ' ■ . ■' .:  , , , ■-  - •'.■ 


LIBRARY 
■ THE 


COMMON-SENSE  METHOD 

OF 

PRSCTICSL  LINGUISTRY 

THE 

Spanish  Language 

BY 

DR.  RICHARD  S.  ROSENTHAL 

Author  of  the  Meisterschaft  System,  etc.,  etc. 

Haulenbeek  Corrected  Edition 
Revised  1917 

IN  TEN  PARTS 


tSTEW  YORK  : : LONDON 
The  International  College  of  Languages 


COPYRIGHT,  1905, 

BY 

THE  international  COLLEGE  OF  LANGUAGES. 
Entered  at 

Stationers’  Hall.  London,  Eng. 


The  Spanish  Language, 


99 


ml 

/]/',  1- 


CONTENTS. 

Cardinal  Numbers loo 

In  a Store — Continued 102 

Future  Tense 108 

Arrival,  Hotel,  Rooms no 

A Journey 124 

Vocabulary 130 


lOO 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


CARDINAL  NUMBERS.» 


Uno,  una, 

óo'-nó  (na). 

I 

Dos, 

dos. 

2 

Tres, 

trés. 

3 

Cuatro, 

kwá'-tro. 

4 

Cinco, 

thén'-ko. 

5 

Seis, 

sa'-es. 

6 

Siete, 

sé'^á'-t^. 

7 

Ocho, 

ó'-cho. 

8 

Nueve, 

nóó'^a'-vj^, 

9 

Diez, 

dé'-ath. 

10 

Once, 

on'-th^. 

II 

Doce, 

dó'-th^. 

12 

Trece, 

tra'-th^. 

13 

Catorce, 

ka-tor'-thj?-. 

14 

Quince, 

kén'-th^^. 

15 

Diez  y seis,^ 

dé'-áth  é sá'-6s, 

16 

Diez  y siete. 

17 

Diez  y ocho. 

18 

Diez  y nueve, 

19 

Veinte, 

vá-én'-t^^, 

20 

Veintiuno, 

21 

Veintidós, 

22 

Veintitrés, 

23 

Veinticuatro, 

24 

Veinticinco, 

25 

Veintiséis, 

26 

Veintisiete, 

27 

Veintiocho, 

28 

Veintinueve, 

29 

See  fcK>tnotes  on  page  102. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  0 note;  65  room. 


The  Spanish  Language,  loi 

CARDINAL  NUMBERS— Continued. 


Treinta, 

trá-én'-tá. 

30 

Cuarenta, 

kwá-rén'-tá. 

40 

Cincuenta, 

thhn-kwén'-tá. 

SO 

Sesenta, 

sa-sén'-tá. 

60 

Setenta, 

sá-tén'-tá 

70 

Ochenta, 

o-chén'-tá. 

80 

Noventa, 

nó-vén'-tá. 

90 

Ciento,^ 

the'^én'-tO, 

100 

Ciento  uno, 

lOI 

Ciento  dos, 

102 

Ciento  tres. 

103 

Ciento  cuatro. 

104 

Ciento  cinco,  etc.. 

IOS 

Doscientos, 

dós-thé^én'-tos. 

200 

Trescientos, 

tras-the'^én'-tos. 

300 

Cuatrocientos, 

400 

Quinientos, 

ke-nh'^én'-tos. 

500 

Seiscientos, 

600 

Setecientos, 

sá-ta-the'^én'-tOs, 

700 

Ochocientos, 

800 

Novecientos, 

n5-va-the'^én'-tós. 

900 

Mü," 

mél. 

1,000 

Diez  mil. 

10,000 

Cien  mil. 

thé'^én'  mhl. 

100,000 

Doscientos  mil. 

200,000 

Quinientos  mil. 

500,000 

Un  millón. 

óon  mel-yón'. 

1,000,000 

Dos  millones. 

dos  mOl-yo'-nés, 

2,000,000 

Tres  millones. 

3,000,000 

See  footnotes  on  page  102. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  0 note;  oh  room. 


102 


The  Rosenthal  Method, 


12.  Do  these  gloves  fit?  Yes,  these  gloves  fit  me  very 
well.  (Literally:  To  you  serve  (sirven)  to  you 
these?  Yes,  me  (they)  serve  very  well). 

13.  And  how  does  this  hat  fit?  It  fits  very  well. 

(Literally:  And  how  (qué  tal)  you  serves  this 

hat?  Well,  very  well). 

I serve, 
you  serve, 
he  serves, 
we  serve, 
you  serve, 
they  serve. 

14.  Please  show  me  some  other  gloves;  these  do  not  fit 
well.  (Literally:  Pray  to  show  me  (enseñarme) 
other  (otros)  gloves;  these  not  me  serve). 

15.  How  much  is  this  hat?  This  hat  costs  ten  dollars. 
(Literally:  How  much  is  worth  (vale)  this  hat? 
This  is  worth  ten  dollars  (pesos). 


^ The  numerals  are  most  important  and  ought  to  be  mastered 
at  once.  They  are  rather  difficult,  but  the  pupil  must  learn  them 
so  thoroughly  that  he  can  give  any  number  at  once. and  without 
hesitation. 

2 Observe  that  lé,  17,  18  and  19  are  also  rendered  dieciseis, 
diecisiete,  dieciocho  and  diecinueve. 

3 Ciento  is  changed  into  cien  when  standing  before  any  noun 
or  adjective  (masculine  as  well  as  feminine)  as:  cien  hombres,  one 
hundred  men;  cien  mujeres,  one  hundred  women. 

^ Eleven  hundred,  twelve  hundred,  etc.,  can  not  be  given  as  in 
English,  but  must  be  rendered  by  mil,  as:  mil  ochocientos,  1800. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  0 note;  00  room. 


The  Spanish  Language,  103 

12.  ¿Le  sirven^  a V.  estos?  Sí,  me  sirven  muy  bien, 
(sér'-vén). 


13.  ¿Y  qué  taP  le  sirve  este  sombrero?  Bien,  muy 
bien. 


Yo  sirvo 
V.  sirve 
él  sirve 

nosotros  servimos 
V.  V.  sirven 
ellos  sirven 


(yo  sér'-vó). 

(óós-tad'  ser'-vj^). 

(al  sér'-v}^). 

(nó-so'-trós  sar-vé'-mós). 
(óos-ta'-das  sér'-vén). 
(ál'-yos  sér'-vén). 


14.  Sírvase  enseñarme  otros  guantes;  estos  no  me  sir- 
ven. (én-sén-yárr'-m^  ot'-rós  gwán'-tés). 

15.  ¿ Cuánto  vale^  este  sombrero?  Este  vale  diez  pe- 
sos.^ (dé'-ath  pá'-sos). 


^ Servir,  as  stated  before,  is  an  irregular  verb  of  which  the  in- 
dicative present  is  given  above. 

2 How  ? is  very  frequently  expressed  by  qué  tal.  In  this  con- 
nection its  use  is  strictly  idiomatic. 

2 Valer,  to  he  worth,  is  an  irregular  verb.  The  indicative  present 
is  conjugated: 


Yo  valgo, 

V.  vale, 
él  vale, 

nosostros  valemos, 
V.  V.  valen, 
ellos  valen. 


/ am  worth, 
you  are  worth, 
he  (it)  is  worth, 
we  are  worth, 
you  are  worth, 
they  are  worth. 


^ Peso  in  South  and  Central  America.  Duro  in  Spain. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


104 


The  Rosenthal  Method, 


1 6.  And  what  is  the  price  of  these  gloves?  Two  dol- 
lars. (Literally : And  how  much  are  worth  (valen) 
these  gloves?  Two  dollars). 

17.  That  is  very  dear.  (Literally:  That  is  too  much 

(demasiado)  {Or:  They  are  (están)  very  dear 

(muy  caros). 

I am. 
you  are. 
he  is. 
we  are. 
you  are. 
they  are. 

18.  Oh!  no,  sir,  that  is  very  cheap.  (Literally:  Oh! 
no,  sir,  (they)  are  very  cheap  (baratos). 

19.  Do  you  want  to  pay  for  these  gloves  now?  (Liter- 
ally: Desire  you  to  pay  (pagar)  now  for  these 
gloves)  ? 

20.  Yes,  I want  to  pay  for  them  now.  Here  is  your 
money.  Many  thanks.  (Literally:  Yes,  (I)  will 
pay  them  now.  Here  have  you  the  money  (el  di- 
nero). Many  thanks  (muchas  gracias),  or:  A 
thousand  thanks  (mil  gracias). 

21.  Do  you  wish  to  pay  for  this  hat  now?  (Literally: 
Desire  you  to  pay  now  for  this  hat)  ? 

22.  No,  please  send  this  hat  and  your  bill  to  my  hotel; 
I will  pay  for  it  there.  (Literally:  No,  pray  to 
send  (mandar)  to  the  hotel  (al  hotel)  this  hat  with 
(con)  the  bill  (la  cuenta).  It  (I)  shall  pay  (pagaré^ 
there  (aUi). 

23.  I have  not  money  enough  with  me.  (Literally: 
Not  (I)  have  here  sufficient  (bastante)  money). 

^ For  information  of  the  future  tense  and  for  rules  as  to  its  use 
see  Part  X. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


The  Spanish  Language, 

1 6.  ¿ Y cuánto  valen  estos  guantes?  Dos  pesos. 


105 


1 7 .  Eso  es  demasiado.  (dá-má-sé"^á'-do) . 

Están  muy  caros.  (és-tán'  ká'-rós). 


Yo  estoy 
V.  está 
él  está 

nosotros  estamos 
V,  V.  están 
ellos  están 


(yo  és-tó''^e). 

(óós-tad'  és-tá'). 

(ál  és-tá'). 

(nó-so'-tros  és-tá'-mOs). 
(oos-tá'-dás  és-tán'). 
(ál'-yós  és-tán'). 


18.  O no,  señor,  están  muy  baratos,  (bá-rá'-tós). 

O no,  señor,  son  muy  baratos. 

19.  ¿ Desea  V.  pagar  ahora  por  estos  guantes? 

20.  Sí,  quiero  pagarlos  ahora.  Aquí  tiene  V.  el  di- 
nero. Muchas  gracias.  Mil  gracias,  (á-ké'  dé- 
ná'-rO  móó'-chás  grá'-thé"^ás  mél  grá'-thé'^ás). 

21.  I Desea  V.  pagar  ahora  por  este  sombrero? 

22.  No,  sírvase  V.  mandar  al  hotel  este  sombrero  con 
la  cuenta.  Lo  pagaré^  allí,  (mán-dárr'  ál  ó-tél' 
kon  lá  kwán'-tá  pá-gá-rá'  ál-yé')-. 

23.  No  tengo  aquí  bastante  dinero. 


á far;  á pale;  e eve;  é there;  ó note;  00  room. 


io6 


The  Rosenthal  Method, 


24.  Have  you  any  money  with  you?  (Literally: 
Carry  you  (trae  V.)  any  (algún)  money  in  the  pocket 
(el  bolsillo)? 

I carry. 

you  carry. 

he  carries. 

we  carry. 

you  carry. 

they  carry. 

25.  How  much  money  have  you  with  you?  (Liter- 
ally: How  much  money  have  you?  Or:  How 

much  money  carry  you)  ? 

26.  Have  you  much  money  with  you?  (Literally: 
Carry  you  much  money  in  the  pocket  or  purse)? 

27.  I have  very  little  with  me.  (Literally:  I carry 
very  little). 

28.  I have  not  much  money  with  me.  Send  this  hat 
to  my  hotel;  I will  pay  for  it  there.  (Literally: 
Not  (I)  carry  much  money  in  the  pocket.  Send 
(mande;  envie)  to  the  hotel  this  hat.  It  (I)  shall 
pay  (pagaré)  there). 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  5 note;  oó  room. 


The  Spanish  Language.  107 

24.  I Trae  V.  algún  dinero  en  el  bolsillo?  (trá'-;$^  obs- 
tad' ál-góon'  de-na'-ró  én  al  ból-sél'-yó). 


Yo  traigo 

(yo  trá'^^e-go). 

V.  trae 

(óós-tád'  trá'-;^). 

él  trae 

(al  trá'-;>^). 

nosotros  traemos 

(no-so'-tros  trá-á'mós). 

V.  V.  traen 

(oós-ta'-das  trá'-én). 

ellos  traen 

(ál'-yós  trá'-én). 

25.  ¿ Cuánto  dinero  tiene  V.  ? 

¿ Cuánto  dinero  trae  V.  ? 

26.  ¿ Trae  V.  mucho  dinero  en  el  bolsillo? 

27.  Traigo  muy  poco. 

28.  No  traigo  mucho  dinero  en  el  bolsillo.  Mande  (or: 
envie)  al  hotel  este  sombrero.  Lo  pagaré  allí. 


á far;  a pale;  5 eve;  é there;  0 note;  óó  room. 


io8 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


CONJUGATION  OF  THE  FUTURE  TENSE. 
FIRST  CONJUGATION.! 


I shall  speak. 

I shall  pay. 

you  will  speak. 

you  will  pay. 

he  will  speak. 

he  will  pay. 

we  shall  speak. 

we  shall  pay. 

you  will  speak. 

you  will  pay. 

they  will  speak. 

they  will  pay. 

SECOND  CONJUGATION.! 

I shall  sell. 

I shall  dine. 

you  will  seU. 

you  will  dine. 

he  wül  sell. 

he  will  dine. 

we  shall  sell. 

we  shall  dine. 

you  will  sell. 

you  will  dine. 

they  will  sell. 

they  will  dine. 

THIRD  CONJUGATION.! 

I shall  live. 

I shall  receive. 

you  wiU  live. 

you  will  receive. 

he  will  live. 

he  will  receive. 

we  shall  live. 

we  shall  receive. 

you  will  live. 

you  will  receive. 

they  will  live. 

they  will  receive. 

^ The  future  tense  of  all  regular  verbs  is  formed  by  adding  the 
following  endings  to  their  stem: 


I. 

2. 

3. 

aré. 

eré. 

— — iré. 

ará: 

erá. 

irá. 

ará. 

erá. 

irá. 

aremos. 

eremos. 

iremos. 

arán. 

erán. 

irán. 

arán. 

erán. 

irán. 

It  will  be  seen  that  a is  the  characteristic  vowel  of  verbs  of  the 
first  conjugation,  e of  the  second,  i of  the  third. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  oo  room. 


The  Spanish  Language, 


109 


CONJUGACIÓN  DEL  TIEMPO  FUTURO. 
PRIMERA  CONJUGACIÓN.! 


Yo  pagaré. 

V.  pagará, 
él  pagará. 

nosotros  pagaremos. 
V.  V.  pagarán, 
ellos  pagarán. 


SEGUNDA  CONJUGACIÓN.! 


Yo  hablaré. 

V.  hablará, 
él  hablará, 
nosotros  hablaremos. 
V.  V.  hablarán, 
ellos  hablarán. 

Yo  venderé. 

V.  venderá, 
él  venderá, 
nosotros  venderemos. 
V.  V.  venderán, 
ellos  venderán. 


Yo  comeré. 

V.  comerá, 
él  comerá. 

nosotros  comeremos. 
V.  V.  comerán, 
ellos  comerán. 


TERCERA  CONJUGACION.! 


Yo  viviré. 

V.  vivirá, 
él  vivirá. 

nosotros  viviremos. 
V.  V.  vivirán, 
ellos  vivirán. 


Yo  recibiré. 

V.  recibirá, 
él  recibirá. 

nosotros  recibiremos. 
V.  V.  recibirán, 
ellos  recibirán. 


Form  and  conjugate  the  future  tense  of  the  following  verbs: 
comprar,  to  buy;  tomar,  to  take;  representar,  to  repres-mt;  volver, 
to  return;  entender,  to  understand;  perder,  to  lose;  sentir,  to  feel; 
preferir,  to  prefer. 

The  future  must  be  used  in  Spanish  for  the  English  ‘T  will”  or 
“I  shall”  when  futurity  is  expressed,  that  is  to  say,  whenever 
will”  can  not  be  changed  to  ‘T  want  to,  I wish,  I desire,”  the  future 
tense  must  be  used  as: 

When  will  you  do  it?  ( = When  do  you  want  to  do  it)  ? ¿ Cuándo 
quiere  V.  hacerlo? 

But:  We  will  consider  it.  Lo  consideraremos. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


no 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


Arrival. — ^Hotel. — Rooms. 


1.  What  do  you  want  to  do  when  we  get  there?  (Liter- 
ally: What  desire  you  to  do  on  arriving  (al  llegar)? 

2.  I am  very  tired.  I would  like  to  go  at  once  to  a 

good  hotel.  (Literally:  (I)  am  (estoy^)  very  tired 

(cansado).  I would  like  (quisiera)  to  go  (ir)  im- 
mediately (inmediatamente)  to  a good  hotel). 


I should  like, 
you  would  like, 
he  would  like, 
we  should  like, 
you  would  like, 
they  would  like. 


3.  To  which  hotel  do  you  want  to  go?  To  the  ^‘Hotel 
of  England.”  (Literally:  To  which  hotel  will  you 
go?  To  the  “Hotel  of  England”  (Inglaterra). 

4.  Are  you  going  to  walk?  No,  I am  going  to  take  a 

cab.  (Literally:  Go  you  (va  V.)  afoot  (a  pie)? 

No,  (I)  go  (voy)  to  take  (tomar)  a coach  (un  coche). 


I am  going 
you  are  going, 
he  is  going, 
we  are  going, 
you  are  going, 
they  are  going. 


or:  I go. 

“ you  go. 

“ he  goes. 

“ we  go. 

“ you  go. 

“ they  go. 


^Why  must  estoy  be  used  here?  Compare  page  97,  note  4. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  ó note;  00  room. 


The  Spanish  Language, 


III 


La  Llegada. — El  Hotel. — Cuartos. 

la  lyá-gá'>dá — al  5-tel' — ^kwar'-tos. 


1.  I Qué  desea  V.  hacer  al  llegar?  (ál  lya-gárr'). 

2.  Estoy^  muy  cansado.  Quisiera  ir  inmediatamente  a 
un  buen  hotel,  (kán-sa'-dó  ke-sg'^á'-rá  ér  én-ma- 
dé^á-tá-mén'-t;$^  bóó"*^án'). 


Yo  quisiera. 

(yó  ké-sé^a'-rá). 

V.  quisiera. 

él  quisiera. 

nosotros  quisiéramos 

(ke-sé"^a'rá-mós) . 

V.  V.  quisieran. 

(ke-se'^á'rán). 

ellos  quisieran. 

¿A  qué  hotel  quiere  V. 

ir?  Al  Hotel  de  Ingla- 

terra,  (én-glá-térr'-rá). 

j 

¿Va  V.  a pie?  No,  voy 

a tomar  un  coche,  (vá  á 

pe"^a'  vo'^^e  to'már  oon  ko'-chj?"). 

Yo  voy 

(vs'^e). 

V.  va 

(va). 

él  va. 

nosotros  vamos 

(vá'-mOs). 

V.  V.  van 

(van). 

ellos  van. 

á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  ó note;  oo  room. 


II2 


The  Rosenthal  Method, 


5.  I am  very  tired.  I cannot  walk  to  the  hotel.  I 
am  going  to  take  a cab.  (Literally:  (I)  am  very 
tired.  Not  (I)  can  walk  (caminar^)  to  (hasta)  the 
hotel.  (I)  go  to  take  a cab). 

6.  Are  you  going  to  walk  to  your  hotel  or  will  you 
take  a cab?  (Literally:  Go  you  afoot  to  the  hotel 
or  will  you  take  a cab)  ? 

7.  I am  not  tired,  I am  going  to  walk.  (Literally: 
Not  (I)  am  tired,  (I)  go  to  walk). 

8.  Have  you  any  baggage?  (Literally:  Have  you 

baggage  (equipaje)? 

9.  Have  you  much  baggage? 

10.  How  much  baggage  have  you? 

11.  I have  very  little  baggage.  I am  going  to  take 

the  street-car.  (Literally:  (I)  have  very  little 

baggage.  (I)  go  to  take  the  street-car  (el  tranvía). 

12.  I have  a great  deal  of  baggage.  I cannot  walk  to 
my  hotel.  I am  going  to  take  a cab.  (Literally: 
(I)  have  much  baggage.  Not  (I)  can  walk  to  the 
hotel.  (I)  go  to  take  a cab). 

13.  Driver,  to  the  '‘Hotel  of  England!^’  (Literally: 
Driver,  (cochero)  to  the  Hotel  of  England  (Hotel 
de  Inglaterra). 

^ Caminar,  to  walk,  is  synonymous  with  ir  a pie.  As  stated  be- 
fore, S3mon5nTious  expressions  have  frequently  been  introduced 
into  the  exercises  for  the  purpose  of  accustoming  the  student  to 
diversity  of  expression. 

2 Hasta  means  to  = as  far  as;  it  also  means  till^  until.  In  the 
latter  case  it  denotes  timef  in  the  former  place ^ as: 
hasta  mañana,  till  to-morrow. 

hasta  la  vista,  au  revoir  (auf  Wiedersehen)  i.e,,  till  we 

meet  again. 

voy  hasta  Madrid,  I go  as  far  as  Madrid, 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  ó note;  00  room. 


The  Spanish  Language. 


113 

5.  Estoy  muy  cansado.  No  puedo  caminar^  hasta^ 
el  hotel.  Voy  a tomar  un  coche,  (ká-mé-nárr' 
ás'-tá). 

6.  ¿ Va  V.  a pie  hasta  el  hotel  o quiere  V.  tomar  un 
coche? 

7.  No  estoy  cansado;  voy  a caminar. 

8.  ¿ Tiene  V.  equipaje^?  (a-ke-pá'-‘hj^). 

9.  ¿ Tiene  V.  mucho  equipaje? 

10.  ¿ Cuánto  equipaje  tiene  V.? 

11.  Tengo  muy  poco  equipaje.  Voy  a tomar  el  tran- 
vía.*^  (trán-vé'-á). 

12.  Tengo  mucho  equipaje.  No  puedo  caminar  hasta 
el  hotel.  Voy  a tomar  un  coche. 

13.  Cochero,  al  ‘‘Hotel  de  Inglaterra.’’  (ko-chá'-ro) . 


^ Any  in  this  and  similar  connections  need  not  be  rendered. 

♦ This  word  is,  of  course,  of  English  origin.  Street-cars  in  England 
are  called  “tramways,*’  and  as  most  street-car  lines  in  Spain,  Mexico 
and  South  America  were  built  by  English  capital  and  engineers, 
the  English  expressions  were  adopted. 


á far;  a pale;  6 eve;  é there;  ó note;  00  room. 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


114 

14.  Good  day,  sir;  can  you  give  me  a good  room? 

(Literally:  Good  day,  me  can  you  give  a good 

room  (un  buen^  cuarto)  ? 

15.  Can  you  give  me  a good  room  on  the  first  fioor? 
(Literally:  Can  you  give  me  a good  room  in  the 
first  floor  (el  primer  piso^)  ? 

16.  I am  very  tired  and  wish  to  go  to  bed  at  once. 

(Literally:  (I)  am  very  tired  and  wish  (deseo) 

to  retire  myself  (acostarme^)  at  once  (inmediata- 
mente or  luego). 

17.  Please  give  me  a good  room  on  the  first  floor.  (Lit- 
erally: Pray  to  give  me  a good  room  in  the  first 
floor). 

18.  Please  show  me  a good  room  on  the  second  floor. 
(Literally:  Pray  to  show  me  (enseñarme)  a good 
room  on  the  second  (segundo)  floor). 


1 The  following  adjectives  drop  the  final  0 before  a masculine 
noun  in  the  singular:  bueno,  good;  malo,  bad;  alguno,  anyone, 
someone,  somebody;  ninguno,  no  one,  nobody,  not  any  one;  uno, 
a,  an,  one;  primero,  first;  tercero,  third;  postrero,  last,  as: 

Buen  amo,  good  master.  Un  hábil  médico,  a skillful  physician. 

el  primer  hombre,  the  first  man.  ningún  cuarto,  no  room.  , 

But  if  they  stand  after  the  noun  the  0 is  preserved,  as: 

Un  hombre  malo,  a had  man.  El  libro  tercero,  the  third  hook. 

The  o is  also  preserved  whenever  the  noun  referring  to  the  ad- 
jective Is  not  expressed,  as: 

Es  bueno,  he  is  good. 

Uno  de  estos  señores,  one  of  these  gentlemen. 

2 El  primer  piso  in  Spanish  hotels  and  houses  corresponds  to 
our  second  floor;  the  second  to  our  third  floor,  etc. 

3 This  verb  is  a reflexive  or  pronominal  verb.  Reflexive  verbs 
are  conjugated  with  two  personal  pronouns,  the  first  (expressed 
or  understood)  being  the  subject,  and  the  second  the  object,  as: 
él  se  engaña  or  se  engaña,  he  deceives  himself. 


á far;  á pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


The  Spanish  Language, 


IIS 


14.  Buenos  días,  ¿me  puede  V.  dar  un  buen^  cuarto? 
(óón  bóó^án'  kwár'-tó). 

15.  ¿ Puede  V.  darme  un  buen  cuarto  en  el  primer  pi- 
so^? (pré-mérr'  pe'-so). 

16.  Estoy  muy  cansado  y deseo  acostarme^  inmedia- 
tamente {or  luego),  (á-kos-tár'-m^  én-má-dé^á- 
tá-mén'-ty  loo^a'-go). 

17.  Sírvase  darme  un  buen  cuarto  en  el  primer  piso, 
(pré-mérr'  pé'-so). 

18.  Sírvase  enseñarme  un  buen  cuarto  en  el  segundo 
piso,  (sa-góón'-dó) . 


Almost  any  verb  may  be  used  reflexively  in  Spanish,  which  fre- 
quently occasions  a modification  of  the  meaning,  as:  dormir,  to 
sleep;  dormirse,  to  go  to  sleep;  ir,  to  go;  irse,  to  go  away. 

The  pronouns  used  in  connection  with  reflexive  verbs  are: 

me,  myself.  nos,  ourselves. 


The  conjugation  presents  no  difficulties. 

Indicative  Present. 


(Yo)  me  equivoco, 

V.  se  equivoca, 

(él)  se  equivoca, 

(nosotros)  nos  equivc  camos, 
V.  V.  se  equivocan, 

(ellos)  se  equivocan. 


I am  mistaken. 


you  are  mistaken, 
he  is  mistaken. 


we  are  mistaken, 
you  are  mistaken, 
they  are  mistaken. 


For  full  rules  and  conjugation  see  Part  X. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


19.  At  what  price  can  you  give  me  this  room?  (Liter- 
ally: For  what  price  (por  qué  precio)  me  give  you 
this  room?  Or:  For  how  much  (por  cuánto)  me 
give  you  this  room)  ? 

I give, 
you  give, 
he  gives, 
we  give, 
you  give, 
they  give. 

20.  What  is  the  price  of  this  room  per  day?  (Liter- 
ally: How  much  is  (es)  this  room  for  (por)  day? 
Or:  What  (cuál)  is  the  price  of  this  room  to  the 
(al)  day)? 

21.  How  much  is  this  room  per  day?  (Literally:  At 
how  much  (a  cuánto)  per  day  is  this  room)  ? 

22.  This  room  is  three  dollars  per  day.  (Literally: 
This  room  is  of  (de^)  to  (a)  three  dollars  (pesos) 
per  day). 

23.  I can  give  you  this  room  very  cheap. 

24.  This  room  is  too  dear.  I do  not  want  to  take  it. 

Please  show  me  another  one.  (Literally:  This 

room  is  very  dear.  Not  it  (I)  will  take  (tomar). 
Please  to  show  me  other  (otro). 


^ Dar  is  an  irregular  verb.  See  Part  X. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  ó note;  00  room. 


T he  Spanish  Language. 


117 


19.  I Por  qué  precio  me  da  V.  este  cuarto? 

¿ Por  cuánto  me  da  V.  este  cuarto?  (pra'-thé"*^ó). 


20.  ¿ Cuánto  es  este  cuarto  por  día?  (de'-á), 

¿ Cuál  es  el  precio  de  este  cuarto  al  dia? 

21.  ¿A  cuánto  por  día  es  este  cuarto? 

22.  Este  cuarto  es  de^  a tres  pesos  por  día. 

23.  Puedo  darle  este  cuarto  muy  barato. 

24.  Este  cuarto  es  muy  caro.  No  lo  quiero  tomar. 
Sírvase  enseñarme  otro. 

2 This  de  is  strictly  idiomatic. 


Yo  doy^ 
V.  da 
él  da 


(dó''^é). 

(dá). 

(dá). 


nosotros  damos  (dá'-mós). 
V.  V.  dan  (dan), 

ellos  dan  (dan). 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  0 note;  óo  room. 


ii8  The  Rosenthal  Method. 

25.  I have  not  another  room  on  this  floor,  but  I can 
give  you  a very  large  and  cheap  room  on  the 
third  story.  (Literally:  Not  (I)  have  no  (nin- 
gún^) other  (otro)  room  in  this  story,  but  (I)  can 
give  you  one  (uno)  very  large  (grande)  and  cheap 
in  the  third  (el  tercero). 

26.  This  room  is  large  and  handsome.  At  what  price 
can  you  give  it  to  me?  (Literally:  This  room  is 
large  and  handsome  (hermoso).  For  how  much 
me  it  give  you)? 

27.  This  room  is  very  cheap.  It  costs  only  two  dol- 
dars  a day.  (Literally:  This  room  is  very  cheap. 
Not  (it)  costs  (cuesta^)  but  (sino)  two  dollars  to 
the  day). 

28.  All  right,  I will  take  it.  Please  send  my  baggage 
up  and  pay  the  cabman.  (Literally:  Very  well, 
it  (I)  take  (tomo^).  Pray  to  make  send  up  (hacer 
subir)  the^  baggage  and  to  pay  to  the  (al)  driver). 


^ No,  not,  stands  always — ^as  we  have  seen  already — before  the 
verb,  as:  no  lo  quiero,  I don't  want  it. 

It  will  furthermore  be  observed  that  the  Spaniards  use  a double 
negative. 

In  English  a double  negative  is  equivalent  to  an  affirmative,  but 
this  is  not  the*  case  in  Spanish,  where  nada,  nothing,  ninguno,  no 
one,  not  any  one,  jamás,  never,  etc.,  are  placed  after  no,  as: 

No  quiero  nada,  I don't  want  anything. 

no  lo  he  visto  jamás,  I have  never  seen  it. 

no  lo  sabe  nadie,  no  one  knows  it. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  ó note;  00  room. 


The  Spanish  Language, 


119 

25.  No  tengo  ningún^  otro  cuarto  en  este  piso,  pero 
puedo  darle  uno  muy  grande  y barato  en  el  ter- 
cero. (nen-góón'  tér-tha'-ro). 


26.  Este  cuarto  es  grande^  y hermoso.  ¿ Por  cuánto 
me  lo  dá  V.? 


27.  Este  cuarto  es  muy  barato.  No  cuesta^  sino  dos 
pesos  al  día. 


28.  Muy  bien,  lo  tomo.^  Sírvase  hacer  subir  eP  equi- 
paje y pagar  al  cochero. 


The  negative  no  is,  however,  omitted  when  the  negative  adjec- 
tives or  adverbs  stand  at  the  beginning  of  the  sentence,  as: 

Nada  quiero,  I don't  want  anything, 

jamás  lo  he  visto,  I have  never  seen  it, 

nadie  lo  sabe,  nobody  knows  it. 

Grande  loses  its  final  syllable  when  standing  before  any  noun 
beginning  with  a consonant,  as;  Una  gran  casa,  a large  house;  un 
gran  peligro,  a great  peril. 

3 Costar,  to  cost,  belongs  to  the  class  of  verbs  whose  stem- vowel 
o is  changed  into  ue  throughout  the  singular  and  in  the  third  per- 
son plural  of  the  present  indicative  and  subjunctive,  and  in  the  same 
persons  in  the  imperative.  See  Part  X. 


á far;  a pale;  6 eve;  é there;  0 note;  6b  room. 


120 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


29.  Do  you  wish  to  dine  now,  sir?  (Literally:  Wish 
you  to  dine  (comer)  now,  sir)? 

30.  No,  thanks,  I am  very  much  fatigued  and  want  to 
retire  at  once.  (Literally:  No,  thanks,  (I)  am  very 
tired  and  wish  to  retire  myself  at  once). 

31.  Do  you  wish  anything  else? — No,  thanks,  I have 
everything  I need.  (Literally:  Wish  you  some- 
thing (algo)  more? — No,  thanks,  (I)  have  all  which 
I need  (necesito). 

32.  I do  not  see  any  matches  in  the  room.  Please 
bring  me  a box  of  matches,  waiter.  (Literally: 
Not  (I)  see  matches  (fósforos)  in  the  room.  Waiter 
(mozo),  bring  me  (tráigame)  a box  (una  caja)  of 
matches). 

33.  Here  are  the  matches,  sir.  Do  you  wish  anything 

else?  (Literally:  Here  (aquí)  are  (están^)  the 

matches.  Want  you  any  (alguna)  other  (otra) 
thing  (cosa)? 

34.  No,  thanks,  nothing  else.  I wish  to  retire  at  once. 
(Literally:  No,  thanks,  nothing  more.  (I)  want  to 
retire  myself  immediately). 

35.  Good  night,  sir,  sleep  well!  (Literally:  Good  night 
(buenas  noches^),  sir.  Or,  May  you  pass  (que 
pase  V.)  good  night  (buena  noche). 


1 The  Present  is  used  very  frequently  in  Spanish,  where  we 
employ  the  Future,  as: 

Voy  al  instante,  I will  go  at  once, 

I Me  hace  V.  el  favor?  Will  you  do  me  the  favor? 

■ 2 The  definite  article  is  frequently  employed  in  Spanish  in  place 
of  our  possessive  pronoun.  This  is  especially  the  case  when  parts 
of  the  body  or  articles  of  dress  are  mentioned,  as: 

I Qué  tiene  V.  en  la  mano?  What  have  you  in  your  hand? 


á far;  a pale;  é eve;  é there;  5 note;  óó  room. 


The  Spanish  Language, 

29.  ¿ Desea  V.  comer  ahora,  caballero? 


121 


30.  No,  gracias.  Estoy  muy  cansado  y deseo  acos- 
tarme inmediatamente. 


31.  I Desea  V.  algo  más? — No  gracias,  tengo  todo  lo 
que  necesito,  (ná-tha-se'-tó). 

32.  No  veo  fósforos  en  el  cuarto.  Mozo,  tráigame  ima 
caja  de  fósforos,  (vá'-o  fos-fo-rós  trá'^é-gá-má 
oó'-ná  ká'-há). 

33.  Aquí  están^  los  fósforos.  ¿Quiere  V,  alguna  otra 
cosa?  (á-ke'  ko'-sa). 

34.  No,  gracias,  nada  más.  Quiero  acostarme  inme- 
diatamente. 


35.  Buenas  noches,^  señor. 

¡Que  pase  V.  buena  noche! 


Me  duele  la  cabeza,  My  head  oches. 

Me  quito  los  zapatos,  I am  taking  off  my  shoes. 

3 Estar  must  always  be  used  when  temporary  existence  in  a 
certain  place  or  locality  is  expressed,  as: 

Yo  estoy  aquí,  I am  here. 

está  en  el  café,  he  is  at  the  Café. 

estaba  a la  puerta,  he  was  at  the  door. 

^Good  nighty  good  day,  etc.,  must  always  be  in  the  plural. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


122 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


I should  like  to  leave  by  the  first  train  for  Mexico,  but 
that  is  impossible. 


I would  like  (I  should  like). 

to  leave 

for' 

Mexico 

by^ 

the 

first 

train, 

but 

not 

to  me 

it  is 

possible. 


^ The  pupil  should  distinguish  well  between  para  and  por. 

Para  means  for^  to^  and  denotes  direction,  destination,  aim  or 
purpose,  as: 

Estudio  para  aprender,  I study  in  order  to  learn. 

Esta  carta  es  para  el  señor  Diaz,  This  letter  is  for  Mr.  Diaz, 

Pienso  partir  para  Italia,  I think  of  starting  for  Italy. 

Por  means  for^  hy^  and  is  used  like  par  in  French,  with  passive 
verbs,  denoting  bodily , not  mental,  actions,  as: 

El  mundo  fué  hecho  por  Dios,  The  world  was  created  by  God. 

Este  cuadro  fué  pintado  por  Murillo, 

This  picture  was  painted  by  Murillo. 

Por  denotes  motive,  aim,  and  is  also  used  in  connection  with 
the  price  of  things,  as: 


á far;  a pale;  6 eve;  é there;  ó note;  oo  room. 


The  Spanish  Language, 


123 


Quisiera  salir  para  Méjico  por  el  primer 

ke-se^á'-rá  sá-ler'  pá'-rá  ma'-^he-kó  por  ál  pre-mér' 
tren,  pero  no  me  es  posible, 
trán,  pa'-ró  no  ma  as  p5-sébl^. 


Quisiera  (ké-se"^a'-rá) 
salir  (sá-lér') 
para^  (pá'-rá) 

Méjico  (má'-‘hé-k5) 
por^  (por) 
el  (ál) 

primer  (pre-mér') 
tren  (trán) 
pero  (pá'-ró) 
no  (no) 
me  (má) 
es  (ás) 

posible  (p5-seb'-l}^). 


Lo  hace  por  temor, 

Lo  hago  por  favorecerle, 

I Por  cuánto  ? 

Daré  la  casa  por  dos  mil  pesos. 

In  other  words: 

Por  signifies: 

Origin^  CausCy  Motion. 

¿ Por  qué  ? Why? 

¿ Por  quién  ? By  whom? 

Voy  a Madrid  por  Paris,  / 
travel  to  Madrid  by  way  of 
Paris. 

Por  la  mañana.  In  the  morning. 


He  does  it  from  fear. 

I do  it  to  favor  him. 

For  how  much?  At  what  price? 
I shall  sell  the  house  for  two 
thousand  dollars. 

Para  signifies: 
Destination y Aimy  Intention. 

I Para  qué  ? For  what  pur- 
pose? 

I Para  quién?  For  whom? 
Quiero  salir  para  Paris,  I want 
to  leave  for  Paris. 

Para  mañana,  TUI  to-morrow. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  ó note;  00  room. 


124 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


A Journey. 

1.  What  do  you  want  to  do  to-morrow  forenoon?  I 
should  like  to  leave  by  the  first  train  for  Madrid. 
(Literally:  What  wish  you  to  do  to-morrow  in 
(por)  the  morning?  (I)  should  wish  (desearía^) 
to  leave  for  Madrid  by  the  first  train). 

2.  Excuse  me,  sir,  I should  like  to  go  to  Madrid. 
Please  tell  me  where  the  depot  is.  (Literally: 
Excuse  you  (dispense  V.)  sir,  (I)  would  wish  to  go 
(ir)  to  (a)  Madrid.  Do  me  the  favor  of  to  tell  me 
(decirme)  where  is  the  station  (estación)  of  the 
railroad  (del  ferrocarril). 

3.  Excuse  me,  where  is  the  Central  Station?  (Liter- 
ally: Excuse  you,  where  is  the  Station  Central 
(Central)  ? 

4.  Pardon  me,  which  is  the  way  to  the  Central  Sta- 
tion? (Literally:  Excuse  you,  through  (por)  where 
one  goes  to  the  Station  Central)? 

^ Desearía  is  the  Conditional  of  desear,  to  wish,  to  desire. 

If,  therefore,  we  take  the  verbs  hablar,  to  speak;  vender,  to 
sell,  and  vivir,  to  live,  as  paradigms,  the  Conditional  is  formed 
thus: 


I. 

2. 

3- 

yo  hablana. 

Yenáería. 

viviría. 

V.  hablaría. 

venderla. 

viviría. 

él  hablana. 

vendería. 

viviría. 

nosotros  hablaríamos. 

venderíamos. 

viviríamos. 

V.  V.  hablarían. 

venderían. 

vivirían. 

ellos  hablarían. 

venderían. 

vivirían. 

It  will  be  apparent  that  a is  the  characteristic  vowel  of  the  first 
conjugation,  e of  the  second  and  i of  the  third.  Of  course,  this 
would  be  rendered:  I should  speaks  you  would  speaks  etc. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


The  Spanish  Language, 


125 


Un  Viaje. 

óon 

1.  ¿ Qué  desea  V.  hacer  mañana  por  la  mañana?  De- 
searía^ salir  para  Madrid  por  el  primer  tren,  (dá- 
sa-á-ré'-á). 

2.  Dispense  V.,  caballero,  desearía  ir^  a Madrid. 
Hágame  el  favor  de  decirme  dónde  está^  la  esta- 
ción^ del  ferrocarril,  (des-pén'-sj^  da-ther'-m^^  dál 
fár'-ro  kárr-rél'). 


3.  Dispense  V.,  ¿ dónde  está  la  estación  central? 
(thén-trál'). 

4.  Dispense  V.,  ¿ por  dónde  se  va  a la  estación  central?  • 


To  the  stem  of  the  regular  verbs  the  following  terminations  are 
added  in 


The  Conditional. 


I. 

2. 

3- 

> 

AX  1a* 

" 6Ixa* 

■ ItIa* 

aria. 

eria. 

iría. 

ana. 

^ 6jT1a* 

■■  UIa* 

arlamos. 

eriamos. 

iríamos. 

■ anan. 

61  IaXI* 

■ man. 

arian. 

erian. 

irían. 

2 Ir,  to  go,  is  generally  followed  by  a. 

3 Estar  is  used  in  reference  to  localities. 

^ The  depot  or  station  is  called  la  estación,  while  el  ferrocarril  or 
el  camino  de  hierro  means  the  railroad. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


126 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


5.  Excuse  me,  which  is  the  Waiting  Room?  (Liter- 
ally: Excuse  you,  which  (cuál)  is  the  parlor  of  wait- 
ing (la  sala  de  espera)? 

6.  I beg  your  pardon;  where  is  the  ticket-office? 

(Literally:  Excuse  you,  where  is  the  office  (el 

despacho)  of  tickets  (de  boletos)? 

7.  I beg  your  pardon;  I would  like  to  go  to  Madrid. 

Where  is  the  ticket  office?  (Literally:  Excuse 

you;  (I)  want  to  go  to  Madrid.  Where  is  the 
office  of  tickets)? 

8.  Pardon  me;  I would  like  to  leave  by  the  express- 
train  for  Madrid.  Could  you  please  tell  me  where 
the  ticket-office  is?  (Literally:  Excuse  you,  (I) 
would  like  to  leave  by  the  train  express  (expreso) 
for  Madrid.  Could  you  (podría  V.)  tell  me  where 
is  the  office  of  tickets)? 

9.  Go  straight  ahead.  (Literally:  Follow  you  (siga 
V.)  straight.  Or:  Through  there  straight). 

10.  The  ticket-office  is  on  the  right  side.  (Literally: 
The  office  of  tickets  is  on  the  right  (a  la  derecha). 

11.  I beg  your  pardon,  could  you  please  tell  me  on 
which  side  the  ticket-office  is?  (Literally:  Excuse 
you,  me  could  you  tell  on  which  side  (a  qué  lado) 
is  the  office  of  tickets)? 

^ Podría  is  the  conditional  of  the  verb  poder,  to  he  able.  The  stu- 
dent has  previously  learned  the  present  tense  puedo.  The  future 
and  conditional  are  conjugated  thus: 


Future. 
yo  podré. 

V.  podrá, 
él  podrá. 

nosotros  podremos. 
V.  V.  podrán, 
ellos  podrán. 


Conditional. 


podría. 

podría. 

podría. 


podríamos. 


podrían. 

podrían. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


The  Spanish  Language,  127 

5.  Dispense  V.,  ¿cuál  es  la  sala  de  espera?  (sá'-lá  da 
as-pa'-rá). 

6.  Dispense  V;,  ¿dónde  está  el  despacho  de  boletos? 
(dés-pá'-cho  da  bó-la'-tos). 


7.  Dispense  V.,  quiero  ir  a Madrid.  ¿ Dónde  está  el 

despacho  de  boletos  {or:  el  despacho  de  papeletas, 
or:  el  despacho  de  billetes),  (pá-pa-la'-tas  bél- 

ya'-tés). 

8.  Dispense  V.,  quisiera  salir  por  el  tren  expreso  para 
Madrid.  ¿ Podría  V.^  decirme  dónde  está  el  des- 
pacho de  billetes?  (áks-pra'-só  p5d-re'-á). 

9.  Siga  V.2  derecho,  (sé'-gá  da-ra'-chó). 

Por  ahí  derecho,  (á-é'). 


10.  El  despacho  de  billetes^  está  a la  derecha,  (dá-rá'- 
chá). 

11.  Dispense  V.,  ¿me  podría  V.  decir  a qué  lado  está 
el  despacho  de  boletos?  (lá'-do). 


2 Siga  V.  is  the  imperative  of  the  irregular  verb  seguir,  to  follow. 
The  indicative  present  is  conjugated  thus: 


Yo  sigo, 

V.  sigue, 
él  sigue, 

nosotros  seguimos, 

V.  V.  siguen, 
ellos  siguen, 

3 A ticket  is  either  un  billete,  un 


I follow, 
you  follow, 
he  follows, 
we  follow, 
you  follow, 
they  follow. 

»,  una  boleta  or  una  papeleta. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  Ó5  room. 


128 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


12.  On  which  side  is  the  ticket-office? — On  the  right. 
On  the  left  (a  la  izqtderda). 

13.  Please  give  me  a ticket  to  Madrid.  (Literally: 
Please  to  give  me  a ticket  for  (para)  Madrid). 

14.  Which  class? — Second,  please.  (Literally:  Of  what 
class  (clase)? — Of  second). 

15.  Please  give  me  a second-class  ticket  to  Burgos.  (Lit- 
erally: Please  to  give  me  a ticket  of  second  for 
Burgos). 

16.  Single  or  retmn?  (Literally:  It  want  you  only 
(solo)  of  going  (de  ida)  or  .of  going  and  returning 
(vuelta)  ? 

17.  Please  give  me  a round-trip  ticket.  (Literally: 
Please  to  give  me  one  of  going  and  returning). 

18.  How  much  is  a ticket  to  Burgos?  (Literally:  How 
much  is  worth  (vale)  the  ticket  for  Burgos)? 

19.  How  much  is  a second  class  ticket  to  Burgos? 
(Literally:  How  much  is  worth  a ticket  of  second 
class  for  Burgos?  Or:  How  much  is  (es)  the  ticket 
of  second  class  for  Burgos)? 

20.  How  much  is  a return-ticket  third  class?  (Liter- 
ally: How  much  is  worth  a ticket  of  going  and  re- 
turning of  third  class  (de  tercera  clase)  ? Or:  How 
much  is  a ticket  of  going  and  returning  in  third 
(en  tercera)  ? 

21.  Ten  dollars,  sir. — Here  you  are. — ^And  here  is  your 
ticket  and  your  change.  (Literally:  Ten  dollars, 
sir. — Here  them  have  you,  and  here  have  you  the 
ticket  and  the  change  (el  cambio). 

22.  Have  you  any  luggage?  Yes,  I have  a trunk. 
(Literally:  Have  you  luggage?  Yes,  (I)  have  a 
trunk  (un  baúl). 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  0 note;  6b  room. 


The  Spanish  Language, 


129 


12.  ¿ A qué  lado  está  el  despacho  de  billetes?  A la 
derecha.  A la  izquierda,  (éth-ké^érr'-dá). 

13.  Sírvase  darme  un  billete  para  Madrid. 

14.  ¿De  qué  clase?  De  segunda. 

15.  Sírvase  darme  im  billete  de  segunda  para  Burgos. 

16.  ¿Lo  quiere  V.  solo  de  ida  o de  ida  y vuelta?  (só'- 
ló  e'-da  é voo'^ál'-tá). 

17.  Sírvase  darme  imo  de  ida  y vuelta. 

18.  ¿ Cuánto  vale  el  billete  para  Burgos? 

19.  ¿ Cuánto  vale  un  billete  de  segunda  clase  para 
Burgos? 

¿ Cuánto  es  el  billete  de  segunda  clase  para  Bur- 
gos? 

20.  ¿ Cuánto  vale  un  billete  de  ida  y vuelta  de  tercera 
clase? 

¿ Cuánto  es  un  billete  de  ida  y vuelta  en  tercera? 
(térr-thá'-rá). 

21.  Diez  duros,  señor.  Aquí  los  tiene  V.  y aquí  tiene 
V.  el  billete  y el  cambio.  (kám'-b6'^ó). 

22.  ¿ Tiene  V.  equipaje?  Sí,  tengo  im  baúl,  (bá-óol'). 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  0 note;  00  room. 


130 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


VOCABULARIO.  VOCABULARY. 

Continued. 

Se  ha  equivocado  V.  (sa  á You  have  made  a mistake, 
a-k  e-v  5-k  a'-d  5 óós- 


tad'). 

¿ Qué  quiere  decir  eso? 

El  sentido  (sén-té'-do). 

Usar,  emplear  (óó-sárr'  am- 
pla-árr'). 

Esta  palabra  no  se  usa  en 
este  sentido. 

¿ Cómo  se  emplea  esta  pa 
labra? 

La  frase;  las  frases. 

La  oración;  las  oraciones. 

Para  Hacer  Compras. 

Quisiera  hacer  unas  com- 
pras. 

I Cuánto  vale  eso? 

I Cuánto  es  esto? 

I Es  eso  lo  más  barato? 

No.  se  lo  puedo  dar  más 
barato. 

La  cuenta  (kwén'^tá). 

El  recibo  (ra-thé'-vó). 

Sírvase  mandar  al  hotel 
estos  efectos  y con 
ellos  la  cuenta  recibi- 
da. 


What  does  that  mean? 

The  sense. 

To  use;  to  employ. 

This  word  is  not  used  in 
this  sense. 

How  is  this  word  used? 

The  phrase;  the  phrases. 

The  sentence;  the  sen- 
tences. 

To  Make  Purchases;  to  do 
some  shopping. 

I would  like  to  do  some 
shopping. 

How  much  does  that  cost? 

What  is  the  price  of  this? 

Is  that  the  cheapest  price? 

I cannot  give  it  to  you  any 
cheaper. 

The  bill. 

The  receipt. 

Please  send  these  goods 
with  a receipted  bill  to 
my  hotel  (please  to 
send  to  the  hotel  these 
goods  and  with  them 
the  bill  receipted). 


ROSENTHAL’S 


LIBRARY 
■ THE 

JNMVERSITY  OF  (LLINOIF 


COMMON-SENSE  METHOD 


PRAaiCAL  LINGUISTRY 


THE 

Spanish  Language 

BY 

DR.  RICHARD  S.  ROSENTHAL 
Author  of  the  Meisterschaft  System,  etc.,  etc. 


Haulenbeek  Corrected  Edition 
Revised  1917 


IN  TEN  PARTS 


NEW  YORK  ; : LONDON 
The  International  College  erf*  Languages 


COPYRIGHT,  1905, 

BY 

THE  INTERNATIONAL  COLLEGE  OF  LANGUAGES. 

Entered  a.t 

Stationers'  Hall,  London,  Eng. 


The  Spanish  Language. 


131 


CONTENTS. 


A Journey 132 

The  Ordinal  Numbers 138 

To  Inquire  One^s  Way 142 

Purchases,  Shopping 146 

Salutations 156 

In  a Café.  (Exercise) 162 


132 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


A Journey. 

Continued. 


23.  I would  like  to  check  my  trunk.  Where  is  the 
baggage  office?  (Literally:  (I)  would  like  to  check 
(facturar)  my  trunk.  Where  is  the  office  of  bag- 
gages (de  equipajes)? 

24.  Could  you  please  inform  me  where  the  baggage- 
office  is?  I would  like  to  check  this  trunk.  (Lit- 
erally: Could  you  tell  me  where  is  the  office  of 
baggages?  (I)  would  like  to  check  this  trunk. 

25.  I will  call  the  porter;  he  will  check  your  trunk  for 

you.  (Literally:  (I)  will  call  to  the  (al)  porter 

(portero);  he  to  you  it  will  check.) 

26.  Porter,  this  gentleman  would  like  to  have  his  trunk 
checked.  (Literally:  Porter,  this  gentleman  would 
like  to  check  his  trunk). 

27.  All  right;  where  are  you  going,  sir?  (Literally: 
(It)  is  very  well.  To  where  go  you,  sir)? 

28.  I am  going  to  Madrid.  (Literally:  (I)  go  to  (para) 
Madrid). 

29.  Have  you  your  ticket?  Certainly;  here  it  is. 
(Literally:  Have  you  already  (ya)  your  ticket?  Of 
course  (por  supuesto).  (I)  have  it  here  (helo  aquí). 

30.  Please  give  it  to  me.  Go  into  the  waiting-room. 
I will  check  your  baggage  and  bring  you  the  check. 
(Literally:  Pray  to  give  me  it.  Pray  to  go  to  the 
room  of  waiting.  I will  check  the  baggage  and 
you  (I)  will  bring  to  you  the  check  (el  recibo). 

^ Of  the  imperative  mood  of  haber,  to  have^  only  one  person  is 
used,  viz.:  hé  (accented  to  distinguish  it  from  he,  I have).  It  is 
used  in  the  sense  of  to  possess ^ to  be  and  to  see.  As: 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  0 note;  00  room. 


The  Spanish  Language, 


133 


Un  Viaje. 


Continuación, 


23.  Quisiera  facturar  mi  baúl.  ¿ Dónde  está  el  des- 
pacho de  equipajes? 

24.  I Podría  V.  decirme  dónde  está  el  despacho  de 
equipajes?  Quisiera  facturar  este  baúl. 

25.  Llamaré  al  portero;  él  se  lo  facturará,  (pór-tá'-ro 
fák-tóó-rá-rá'). 

26.  Portero,  este  caballero  quisiera  facturar  su  baúl. 

27.  Está  muy  bien.  ¿A  dónde  va  V.,  caballero? 

28.  Voy  para  Madrid. 

29.  I Tiene  V.  ya  su  billete?  Por  supuesto.  Hélo 
aquí.  Or:  Aquí  lo  tiene  V.^  (por  sóó-poo^as'-tO 
á'-lo  á-ke'). 

30.  Sírvase  dármelo.  Sírvase  ir  a la  sala  de  espera. 
Yo  facturaré  el  equipaje  y le  traeré  a V.  el  talón, 
(trá-a-ra'  tá-lon). 


heme  aquí,  here  I am. 
For  rules  see  Part  X. 


hé  allí  su  libro,  there  is  your  hook. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  ó note;  00  room. 


134 


The  Rosenthal  Method, 


31.  Here  is  your  check,  sir.  There  is  some  overweight 
to  pay.  (Literally:  Here  have  you  your  check. 
There  is  (hay  que^)  to  pay  overweight  (exceso)  for 
the  baggage). 

32.  Oh!  thanks.  Here  is  the  money  for  the  over- 
weight. And  how  much  do  I owe  you?  (Liter- 
ally: Many  thanks.  Here  have  you  the  money  for 
(para)  the  overweight.  And  how  much  you  owe 
(debo)  (I)  to  you)? 

33.  We  have  no  tariff.  You  may  give  what  you  like. 
(Literally:  Not  have  (we)  tariff  (tarifa).  Give  you 
(dé  V.)  which  you  (it)  may  please  (plazca^). 

^ Haber,  to  have^  is  often  used  impersonally,  t.e.,  in  the  third 
person  singular  (even  when  referring  to  the  plural),  as: 

Hay  un  hombre  a la  puerta.  There  is  a man  at  the  door. 

Hay  dos  hombres  abajo.  There  are  two  men  downstairs. 

When  followed  by  que  and  the  infinitive  of  some  other  verb,  it 
expresses  obligation  or  necessity,  and  is  rendered  by  to  he  necessary ^ 
or  its  equivalents,  as: 

Hoy  hay  mucho  que  hacer.  There  is  a great  deal  to  he  done  to-day, 
I Qué  hay  que  hacer?  What  is  to  he  done? 

Mañana  habrá  mucho  que  hacer.  There  will  he  much  to  he  done 

to-morrow, 

Haber  is  used  to  form  a great  variety  of  idiomatic  expressions; 
they  will  be  taught  seriatim.  For  conjugation  and  full  rules  see 
Part  X. 

2 Dé  V.  is  the  imperative  mood  of  dar,  to  give, 

® Plazca  is  the  subjunctive  mood  of  placer,  to  please. 

Verbs  ending  in  cer  or  cir  preceded  by  a vowels  insert  before  the 
stem  ending  a z whenever  the  stem  meets  an  a or  an  o,  as: 


Indicative  Present. 
Yo  plazco. 

V.  place, 
él  place. 

nosotros  placemos. 
V.  V.  placen, 
ellos  placen. 


Subjunctive. 
que  yo  plazca, 
que  V.  plazca, 
que  él  plazca, 
que  nosotros  plazcamos, 
que  V.  V.  plazcan, 
que  ellos  plazcan. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  0 note;  00  room. 


The  Spanish  Language. 


135 


31.  Aquí  tiene  V.  su  talón.  Hay^  que  pagar  exceso 
por  el  equipaje,  (ak-sá'-só). 

32.  Muchas  gracias.  Aquí  tiene  V.  el  dinero  para  el 
exceso.  ¿ Y cuánto  le  debo  a V.? 

33.  No  tenemos  tarifa.  Dé  V.^  lo  que  le  plazca.®  (tá- 
ré'-fá  dá  pláth'-ká). 


The  terminations  of  the  present  subjunctive  are  exceedingly 
simple. 


Subjunctive  Mood. 


Present. 


I. 

2. 

3- 

e. 

a. 

— — — 0, 

— — Q,, 

--  - 0 

a. 

emos. 

amos. 

amos. 

~~~~~  en. 

dll. 

an. 

■■  ■ ■ en. 

■■  an. 

an. 

If,  therefore,  we  take  the  verbs  hablar,  to  speak;  vender,  to  sell; 
vivir,  to  livOy  as  paradigms,  the  following  is: 

The  Subjunctive  Mood. 

Present. 


I. 

2. 

3- 

Yo  hable. 

venda. 

viva. 

V.  hable. 

venda. 

viva. 

él  hable. 

venda. 

viva. 

nosotros  hablemos. 

vendamos. 

vivawe5. 

V.  V.  hablew. 

vendan. 

vivan. 

ellos  hablen. 

vendan. 

vivan. 

Of  course,  this  form  would  be  rendered:  I may  speak y you  may 
speak y he  may  speak y etc.  {Footnote  continued  on  next  page.) 


á far;  a pale:  e eve;  é there;  0 note;  00  room. 


136  The  Rosenthal  Method. 

I* 

34.  Oh  yes!  That’s  a “tip,”  isn’t  it?  (Literally:  Oh 
yes!  (ya  ya)!  that  (eso)  is  a tip  (una  propina^), 
not  is  (it)  so  (así)? 

35.  Yes,  sir. — Ever  so  much  obliged  to  you!  Americans 
are  always  liberal  and  generous  and  give  good  tips. 
(Literally:  Yes,  sir,  thus  (it)  is. — Thousand  thanks, 
sir.  The  Americans  are  noble  (nobles)  and  gen- 
erous (generosos)  as  (pues)  (they)  give  good  tips 
(buenas  propinas). 

36.  At  what  time  does  this  train  leave?  (Literally: 
At  what  hour  (a  qué  hora)  leaves  this  train)  ? 

37.  This  train  leaves  in  five  minutes.  (Literally: 
This  train  leaves  within  (dentro  de)  five  minutes 
(minutos). 

38.  Is  there  a smoking-car?  (Literally:  Is  there  (hay) 
smoking-car  (vagón  de  fumar)? 

39.  Here  it  is  and  there  is  plenty  of  room  (=  enough* 
seats,  bastantes  asientos). 

40.  Do  you  know  when  this  train  arrives  in  Burgos? 
At  eight  P.M.  Here  is  a time-table  (un  itinerario). 


The  subjunctive  is  rarely  used  in  English  conversation;  in  Span- 
ish the  opposite  is  the  case.  English  speaking  persons  experience, 
therefore,  great  difficulty  in  understanding  this  mood,  for  which 
no  proper  equivalents  exist  in  their  tongue.  One  must  really  be 
* ‘Latin-born”  to  appreciate  and  use  it  properly. 

As  a general  rule,  it  may  be  stated  that  the  subjunctive  mood 
is  used  in  clauses  dependent  on  a verb  expressing  possibility ^ wishj 
doubts  apprehension^  command^  or  broadly  speaking,  emotions  of 
the  mind. 

The  two  clauses  are  connected  by  the  conjunction  que,  as: 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  óo  room. 


The  Spanish  Language, 


137 


34.  Ya  ya;  eso  es  una  propina,^  ¿ no  es  así?  (ya  ya  00'- 
ná  pro-pé'-ná  no  as  á-se')* 

35.  Sí  señor,  así  es. — Mil  gracias,  señor.  Los  ameri- 
canos son  nobles  y generosos  pues  dan  buenas 
propinas,  (nob'-lés  é ‘há-ná-ró'-sos  póó^as'  dan 
bóo"^á'-nás  pró-pé'-nás). 


36.  ¿A  qué  hora  sale  este  tren?  (o'-rá). 

37.  Este  tren  sale  dentro  de  cinco  minutos,  (dén'-tró 
me-nóó'-tós). 


38.  ¿ Hay  vagón  de  fumar?  (fob-márr'). 

39.  Helo  aquí  y hay  bastantes  asientos. 

40.  ¿ Sabe  V.  cuándo  llega  este  tren  a Burgos?  A las 
ocho  de  la  noche.  Aquí  tiene  V.  un  itinerario. 
(é-te-na-rá'-ré"^ó) . 


¿ Qué  quiere  V.  que  yo  haga?  What  do  you  want  me  to  do? 
Quiero  que  V.  escriba  a su  amigo. 

I wish  you  would  write  to  your  friend. 

In  the  above  sentence  the  subjunctive  mood  is  used,  because 
uncertainty  is  implied. 

These  general  hints  must  suffice  for  the  present.  For  full  rules 
see  Part  X. 

1 The  Spaniards — like  all  European  nations — tip  almost  every 
one  who  renders  service.  Every  driver,  waiter  or  servant  expects 
and  gets  a small  ‘‘propina.” 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


138 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


THE  ORDINAL  NUMBERS.^ 


Primero,^  a. 
Segundo,  a. 
Tercero,  a. 

Cuarto,  a. 

Quinto,  a. 

Sexto,  a. 

Séptimo,  a. 
Octavo,  a. 

Nono,  a. 

Noveno,  a. 
Décimo,  a. 
Undécimo,  a. 
Duodécimo,  a. 
Décimo  tercio. 
Décimo  cuarto. 
Décimo  quinto. 
Décimo  sexto. 
Décimo  séptimo. 
Décimo  octavo. 
Décimo  nono 
Vigésimo,  a. 
Vigésimo  primo. 
Vigésimo  segundo. 
Vigésimo  tercio. 
Vigésimo  cuarto. 
Vigésimo  quinto. 
Vigésimo  sexto. 
Vigésimo  séptimo. 


pré-má'-ró,  rá. 

ist. 

sa-góon'-dó,  da. 

2nd. 

térr-tha'-ró,  rá. 

3rd. 

kwár'-tó,  tá. 

4th. 

kén'-tó,  tá. 

Sth. 

sás'-to,  tá. 

6th. 

sáp'-te-mo,  má. 

7th. 

Ok-tá'-vó,  vá. 
n5'-nó,  ná.  1 

8th. 

9th. 

nO-vá'-nO,  ná.  J 

dá'-the-mó,  má. 

loth. 

óón-dá'-the-mó. 

iith. 

dóo  "^o-dá'-thg-mó. 

i2th. 

térr'-the'^ó. 

13th. 
14th. 
15th. 
16th. 
17th. 
1 8th. 
19th. 

vé-‘há'-se-mo,  má. 

i 

20th. 

2ISt. 

22nd. 

23rd. 

24th. 

25th. 

26th. 

27th. 

1 Ordinal  numbers  are  treated  like  adjectives  and  agree  in  gender 
and  number  with  the  noun  to  which  they  refer,  as: 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  ó note;  oo  room. 


The  Spanish  Language,  139 


THE  ORDINAL  NUMBERS.' 


Vigésimo  octavo. 

28th. 

Vigésimo  nono. 

29th. 

Trigésimo,  a. 

tre-‘ha'-sé-mo,  má. 

30th. 

Trigésimo  primo,  etc. 

31st. 

Cuadragésimo,  a. 

kwá-drá-'ha'-sé-mo. 

40th. 

Quincuagésimo,  a. 

kén-kwá-‘ha'-sé-mó. 

50th. 

Sexagésimo,  a. 

sák-sá-‘ha'-sé-mo. 

60th. 

Septuagésimo,  a. 

sép-tóo^á-^ha'-sé-mó, 

70th. 

Octagésimo,  a. 

ók-tá-^ha'-sé-mó. 

80th. 

Nonagésimo,  a. 

no-ná-^há'-sé-mo. 

90th. 

Centésimo,  a. 

thén-tá'-se-mó. 

1 00th. 

Centésimo  primo,  etc. 

lOISt. 

Ducentésimo,  a. 

dóo-thén-tá'-sé-mó. 

200th. 

Trecentésimo,  a. 

trá-thén-ta'-se-mó. 

300th. 

Cuadragentésimo,  a. 

kwá-drá-^hén-ta'“Sé-mó.  400th. 

Quingentésimo,  a. 

ken-‘hén-ta'-sé-mo. 

500th. 

Sescentésimo,  a. 

sás-thén-tá'-sé-m5. 

600th. 

Septegentésimo,  a. 

sáp-té-‘hén-ta'-se-mO. 

700th. 

Octogentésimo,  a. 

ok-to-^hén-ta'-se-mó. 

800th. 

Nonagentésimo,  a. 

nó-ná-^hén-tá'-se-mó. 

900th. 

Milésimo,  a. 

" mé-la'-sé-mo. 

1 000th. 

í Dosmilésimo,  a. 

K 

j doo-mé-la  -sé-mo. 

2000th. 

\ Dumilésimo,  a. 

Diez  milésimo,  a. 

1 0,000th. 

Cien  milésimo,  a. 

100,000  th. 

Millonésimo,  a. 

mél-yO-ná'-sé-mo.  i,ooo,oooth. 

Postrero,  a. 

pos-tra'-ro,  rá. 

the  last. 

Ultimo,  a. 

óol'-te-mó,  má. 

the  last. 

Este  muchacho  es  el  primero,  This  hoy  is  the  first. 

La  Quinta  Avenida,  Fifth  Avenue, 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  0 note;  00  room. 


140  The  Rosenthal  Method. 

CONVERSATIONAL  EXERCISES. 

What  they  are  and  how  they  should  be  studied. 

Having  thoroughly  mastered  the  foregoing  sentences 
the  student  must  now  familiarize  himself  with  the  Con- 
versational Exercises. 

They  consist  of  purely  practical  phrases,  such  as  we 
are  in  the  habit  of  using  -in  common  every  day  life. 
But  as  every  person  employs  of  necessity  his  own  pe- 
culiar mode  of  diction, 

Diversity  of  Expression 

must  be  acquired  from  the  very  start  by  the  student  of 
foreign  tongues. 

The  most  commonplace  thought  can  be  expressed  in 
numerous  ways,  and  throughout  my  books,  and  espe- 
cially in  the  Conversational  Parts,  I have  therefore  given 
a vast  number  of  sentences,  which,  though  worded  dif- 
ferently, are  identical  in  their  meanings. 

The  Advantages  of  this  Plan 

are  self-evident.  The  pupil  is  no  longer  confined  to  a 
single  phrase,  but  becomes  familiar  with  a variety  of 
expressions.  He  does  not  only  learn  one  sentence  by 
which  he  may  state  his  wants,  but  controls  the  whole 


2 Primero,  first,  tercero,  third,  and  postrero,  last  in  order,  drop 
the  final  o in  the  singular  before  a noun,  as: 

El  primer  día,  the  first  day. 

el  tercer  libro,  the  third  hook. 

el  postrer  discípulo,  the  last  pupil. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  oo  room. 


The  Spanish  Language, 


141 

colloquial  vocabulary  on  any  one  subject,  and  is  thus  ena- 
bled to  carry  on  a conversation  with  almost  any  one. 

At  the  same  time 

The  Conversations  are  Graded 

in  such  a manner,  that  only  such  constructions,  idioms, 
moods  and  tenses  are  given  as  have  been  previously 
mastered  by  the  student. 

Mere  questions  and  answers  of  the  guide-book  style 
have — as  far  as  possible — been  avoided.  Later  on,  all 
conversations  are  carried  on  in  Spanish. 

All  phrases  used  are  so  to  say 

Sentence— Moulds. 

They  are  intended  to  teach  the  pupil  to  think  in  Spanish 
and  with  this  end  in  view,  they  must  always  be  studied 
aloud  and  rendered  frequently  in  Spanish  until  the 
pupil  can  utter  them  just  as  smoothly  and  rapidly  in  the 
foreign  language  as  in  his  own. 

Let  it  always  be  remembered  that 

^^Repetitio  est  mater  studiorumJ^ 

Nothing  is  so  essential  in  the  mastery  of  a foreign  tongue 
as  constant  repetition. 

‘Vutta  cavat  lapidem,  non  vi,  sed  saepe  cadendo^ 


Primo  and  tercio  are  used  in  place  of  primero  and  tercero  after 
another  ordinal  number,  as: 

vigésimo  primo,  twenty-first,  trigésimo  tercio,  thirty-third. 
With  the  exception  of  primero,  the  first,  the'  Spaniards  use  the 
cardinal  numbers  for  dates,  as: 

I Qué  día  del  mes  tenemos  hoy?  What  date  is  tq-day? 
Tenemos  el  quince  de  junio.  It  is  the  i^th  of  June, 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  0 note;  00  room. 


142 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


CONVERSATION. 

To  Inquire  One’s  Way. 

1.  Excuse  me,  sir;  could  you  please  tell  me  where 
Alcalá  Street  is?  (Literally:  Excuse  me,  sir;  me 
could  you  tell  where  is  the  Street  of  Alcalá  (la 
calle  de  Alcalá)? 

2.  Will  you  kindly  show  me  the  way  to  St.  Joseph’s 
Street?  (Literally:  Me  do  you  the  favor  of  to 
show  me  (enseñarme),  through  where  lies  (queda) 
the  Street  of  St.  Joseph  (la  calle  de  San  José)? 

3.  I beg  your  pardon,  which  is  the  way  to  St.  Joseph’s 

Street?  (Literally:  Excuse  you,  through  where 

one  goes  to  the  Street  of  St.  Joseph)? 

4.  Pray  is  this  the  way  to  the  Hotel  of  England? 
(Literally:  Excuse  you,  is  through  here  the  Hotel 
of  England)? 

5.  Pardon  me,  how  do  I go  to  the  Royal  Theatre? 

(Literally:  Excuse  you,  through  where  lies  the 

Theatre  Royal  (el  Teatro  Real)? 

6.  Pardon  me,  which  is  the  way  to  the  Variety-Thea- 
tre? (Literally:  Excuse  you,  through  where  is  the 
Theatre  of  Varieties  (el  Teatro  de  Variedades)? 

7.  Would  you  be  kind  enough  to  tell  me  the  way  to 

the  depot?  (Literally:  Would  you  be  so  kind 

(seria  V.  tan  amable)  to  indicate  me  (de  indicar- 
me) through  where  (I)  can  go  to  the  station  of  the 
railroad)  ? 

’ Santo,  Saint,  drops  the  last  syllable  before  proper  names  of 
Saints,  as: 

San  Juan,  St.  John.  San  Pedro,  St.  Peter. 

The  names  of  the  following  Saints  are  exceptions  to  this  rule, 
viz.:  Domingo,  Dominic;  Tomas,  Thomas  and  Tomé  and  Toribio^  sls: 
Santo  Tomas,  St.  Thomas.  Santo  Domingo,  St.  Dominic. 

á far;  á pale;  e eve;  é there;  ó note;  00  room. 


The  Spanish  Language,  143 

CONVERSACIÓN. 

kón-vérr-sá-thé'^on'. 

Para  hacer  preguntas  acerca  del  camino. 

pá'-rá  á-thérr'  pra-góón'-tás  á-thérr'-ká  dél  ká-mé'-nO. 


1.  Dispense  V.  caballero  ¿ me  podría  V.  decir  dónde 
está  la  calle  de  Alcalá?  (kál'-yé  da  ál-ká-lá')* 

2.  ¿ Me  hace  V,  el  favor  de  enseñarme  {or:  de  decir- 
me), por  dónde  queda  la  calle  de  San^  José?  (san 
‘hó-sa). 

3.  Dispense  V.,  ¿ por  dónde  se  va  a la  Calle  de  San 
José? 

4.  Disculpe  V.,  I está  por  aquí  el  Hotel  de  Ingla- 
terra? 

5.  Dispense  V.,  ¿por  dónde  queda  el  Teatro  Real? 
(ta-á'-tr5  rá-ál'). 


6.  Disculpe  V.,  ¿ por  dónde  está  el  Teatro  de  Varieda- 
des? (vá-ré^á-dá'-dás). 

7.  ¿ Seria  V.  tan  amable  de  indicarme  por  dónde  puedo 
ir  a la  estación  del  ferrocarril? 


But  when  speaking  of  the  Island  of  St.  Thomas  we  say  la  isla 
de  san  Tomas. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  0 note;  00  room. 


144 


The  Rosenthal  Method, 


8.  Will  you  please  tell  me  whether  this  street  leads  to 
the  theatre?  (Literally:  Me  do  you  the  favor  of 
to  tell  me  if  I can  go  through  this  street  to  the 
theatre)  ? 

9.  Yes,  go  straight  ahead  till  you  come  to  the  'Tuer- 
ta del  Sol.”  (Literally:  Yes,  sir,  foUow  you  straight 
(derecho)  through  her  (ella)  until  that  (you)  may 
arrive  to  the  (a  la)  Puerto  del  Sol). 

10.  Take  the  second  street  on  the  right  and  go  straight 
ahead  till  you  come  to  a square.  (Literally:  Turn 
you  (doble  V.)  to  the  right  (a  la  derecha)  through 
the  second  street  and  follow  you  straight  on  (dere- 
cho) till  that  (you)  may  arrive  at  a square). 

11.  Go  across  the  bridge,  then  diagonally  across  the 
square.  You  cannot  miss  your  way.  (Literally: 
Pass  you  (pase  V.)  the  bridge  (el  puente)  and  then 
(entonces)  cross  you  (cruce  V.)  the  square.  Not 
can  you  mistake  yourself  (equivocarse)  or  mistake 
the  way  (equivocar  el  camino). 

12.  Is  it  far  from  here?  No,  it  is  not  far  (lejos). 

13.  Shall  I accompany  you?  Yes,  please.  (Literally: 
Want  you  that  you  (I)  may  accompany  (acom- 
pañe)? Me  will  do  you  (hará  V.)  a great  favor). 


^ After  the  following  conjunctions  the  subjunctive  mood  must 
be  used,  when  uncertainty  or  doubt  is  expressed  or  implied: 


a fin  de  que,  in  order  that, 

a menos  que,  unless. 

aunque, 

aun  cuando,  J 

bien  que,  though. 

en  caso  que,  in  case  that. 


lejos  de  que,  far  from. 

por  poco  que,  however  little. 

por  mucho  que,  1 , 

^ , ) however. 

por  mas  que,  j 

para  que,  in  order  that. 

siempre  que,  whenever. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  0 note;  00  room. 


The  Spanish  Language, 


MS 


8.  ¿ Me  hace  V.  el  favor  de  decirme,  si  puedo  ir  por 
esta  calle  al  teatro? 

9.  Sí,  señor,  siga  V.  derecho  por  ella  hasta  que  llegue^ 
a la  Puerta  del  Sol.^  (ás'-tá  ká  lya'ga  póó'^érr'-tá 
dél  sol). 

10.  Doble  V.  a la  derecha^  por  la  segunda  calle  y siga 
V.  derecho  hasta  que  llegue  a una  plaza,  (do'-bl^ 
plá'-thá) . 

11.  Pase  V.  el  puente  y entonces  cruce  V.  la  plaza* 
No  puede  V.  equivocarse  {or:  equivocar  el  camino)* 
(én-tón'-thés  króo'-thy). 

12.  ¿Está  lejos  de  aquí?  No,  no  está  lejos,  (lá'-^hos). 

13.  ¿ Quiere  V.  que  le  acompañe?  Me  hará  V.  un  gran 
favor,  (á-kóm-pán'-yé  ár-rá'). 


con  tal  que,  provided  that.  supuesto  que,  supposing  that, 

hasta  que,  until.  ojalá!  would  to  God! 

2 La  puerta  del  Sol  is  the  name  of  the  most  magnificent  square 
in  Madrid.  Thirteen  different  streets  lead  to  it.  The  principal 
hotels,  stores  and  Cafés  are  located  here,  and  it  may  be  compared 
to  Trafalgar  Square  in  London  or  to  La  Place  de  l’Opéra  in  Paris. 

^ A la  derecha,  to  the  right;  a la  izquierda,  to  the  left. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


146 


The  Rosenthal  Method, 


Purchases.  Shopping, 


1.  What  do  you  want  to  do  this  forenoon? 

2.  I would  like  to  go  out  to  do  some  shopping.  (Lit- 
erally: (I)  wish  to  go  out  in  order  to  (para)  make 
some  purchases  (unas  compras). 

3.  And  where  do  you  want  to  make  your  purchases? 
(Literally:  And  in  where  will  you  make  the  pur- 
chases) ? 

4.  I really  do  not  know.  But  you  have  been  several 

times  in  Madrid.  Can  you  not  tell  me  where  I 
can  get  some  good  gloves?  (Literally:  Truly 

(verdaderamente)  not  it  (I)  know;  you  who 
have  been  (ha  estado)  in  Madrid  several  (varias) 
times  (veces/)  will  you  tell  me  in  where  (I)  can 
purchase  good  gloves)? 


affirmatively: 

I have  been, 
you  have  been, 
he  has  been, 
we  have  been, 
you  have  been, 
they  have  been. 


^With  vez,  time,  turn,  veces,  times,  turns,  the  multiplicative 
numbers  are  formed: 


una  vez,  once, 

dos  veces,  twice. 

tres  veces,  three  times. 

esta  vez,  this  time. 

aquella  vez,  that  time. 

todas  las  veces,  every  time. 
varias  veces,  several  times. 


algunas  veces,  sometimes. 


la  primera  vez,  the  first  time. 
la  última  vez,  the  last  time. 
cada  vez,  each  time. 


muchas  veces,  many  times. 
otra  vez,  another  time. 


a veces,  hy  turns,  sometime. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


The  Spanish  Language,  147 

Para  Hacer  Compras. 

1.  I Qué  quiere  V.  hacer  esta  mañana? 

2.  Deseo  salir  para  hacer  unas  compras,  (óo'-nás 
kóm-prás). 

3.  ¿ Y en  dónde  quiere  V.  hacer  las  compras? 

4.  Verdaderamente  no  lo  sé;  V.  que  ha  estado  en 
Madrid  varias  veces/  ¿ quiere  V.  decirme  en  dónde 
puedo  comprar  buenos  guantes?  (vérr-dá-da-rá- 
mén'-t^  á és-tá'-do  vá'-ré^ás  va'-thés). 

afirmativo: 

Yo  he  estado/  (á  és-tá'-do). 


V.  ha  estado,  (á  ). 

él  ha  estado,  (á 

nosotros  hemos  estado,  (á'-mos  ). 

V.  V.  han  estado,  (án  ). 

ellos  han  estado,  (án  ). 


2 There  are  two  verbs  in  Spanish  for  to  havCy  viz.,  haber  and 
tener. 

The  difference  between  them  is  this: 

Haber  is  used  exclusively  in  the  formation  of  compound  tenses^ 
while  tener  is  used  as  an  active  verb  indicating  possession^  (in  which 
case  to  have  may  generally  be  replaced  by  to  hold  or  to  possess  with- 
out affecting  the  meaning  of  the  sentence). 

Thus: 

He  comprado  unos  guantes, 

I have  bought  some  gloves  (Compound  tense). 
No  tengo  guantes,  I have  no  gloves  {I  do  not  possess  any). 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  0 note;  00  room. 


148 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


interrogatively: 

have  I been? 
have  you  been? 
has  he  been? 
have  we  been? 
have  you  been? 
have  they  been? 

5.  Is  that  all  you  need?  (Literally:  Is  that  (eso)  aU 
which  (you)  need  (necesita)? 

6.  No,  I have  to  buy  some  small  things  for  my  wife. 
(Literally:  No,  (I)  have  also  that^  to  buy  some 
trifles  (algunas  frioleras)  for  my  wife). 

7.  She  needs  hairpins,  a hair-brush,  a tooth-brush,  a 

comb  and  some  other  trifles.  (Literally:  She 

needs  some  hairpins  for  the  hair  (unas  horquillas 
para  el  pelo),  a brush  of  head  (un  cepillo  de  cabeza), 
one  for  teeth  (dientes),  a comb  (un  peine)  and 
other  trifles  (otras  chucherías). 


Both  verbs  have  peculiar  idiomatic  uses.  (See  Part  X.) 

1 The  Past  Participle^  which  is  used  for  the  formation  of  com- 
pound tenses,  ends  in  the  first  conjugation  in  ado,  and  in  the  second 
and  third  conjugation  in  ido. 

If,  therefore,  we  take  hablar,  vender  and  vivir  as  paradigms, 
the  past  participles  are  hablado,  spoken;  vendido,  sold;  vivido, 
lived. 

The  compound  tenses  are:  he  hablado,  I have  spoken;  he  ven- 
dido, I have  sold;  he  vivido,  I have  lived. 

2 Usted  and  ustedes,  like  the  other  pronouns,  used  in  interrogative 

sentences  with  compound  tenses  stand  directly  after  the  participle. 
I Ha  recibido  V.  la  carta?  Have  you  received  the  letter? 

I No  me  ha  entendido  V.? 

Did  you  not  understand  me?  (Have  you  not  understood  me)  ? 


á far;  a pale;  6 eve;  é there;  0 note;  00  roora. 


The  Spanish  Language. 


149 


interrogativo: 

I he  estado  yo?^ 

¿ ha  estado  V.  ? 

I ha  estado  él  ? 

¿ hemos  estado  nosotros? 

I han  estado  V.  V. 

¿ han  estado  ellos? 

5.  ¿Es  eso  todo  lo  que  necesita?  (na-thá-se'-tá). 

6.  No,  tengo^  también  que  comprar  algimas  frioleras 
para  mi  esposa.  (fre-O-lá'-rás) . 

7.  Ella  necesita  unas  horquillas  para  el  pelo,  un  ce- 
pillo de  cabeza,  uno  para  dientes,  un  peine  y otras 
chucherías.  (ór-kél'-yás  thá-pel'-yo  ká-va'-thá 
de'^én'-tés  pa"^é'-n^  chóó-cha-re'-ás). 


¿ Qué  ha  perdido  V.  ? What  have  you  lost? 

I Ha  leído  V.  los  periódicos?  Have  you  read  the  papers? 

3 There  is  no  verb  in  Spanish  corresponding  to  the  English  I must. 
All  expressions  with  “/  musty'"  or  “I  have  to,”  or  ‘T  am  obliged  to” 
are  expressed  by  tener  que  with  the  verb  in  the  infinitive,  as: 
Tengo  que  escribir  cartas,  I have  letters  to  write. 

Tenemos  que  salir.  We  must  go  out. 

¿ Tiene  V.  que  enviar  un  despacho?  Are  you  obliged  to  send  a 

dispatch? 

There  are  a number  of  other  constructions  for  the  English  must, 
to  he  obliged  to,  as  haber  de  or  hay  que,  as: 

He  de  hacer  la  correspondencia,  I have  to  attend  to  the  corre- 

spondence. 

I Qué  hay  que  hacer?  What  is  there  to  be  done? 

Compare  Part  X. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


ISO 


8.  Please  come  along  as  I do  not  know  where  to  get 
all  these  things.  (Literally:  Pray  to  come  (venir) 
with  me  (conmigo^  as  (pues)  not  (I)  know  in  where 
themselves  can  obtain  (conseguir)  all  these  things). 

9.  You  can  get  them  quite  near.  Do  you  want  to  go 

at  once?  (Literally:  You  can  find  them  near 

(cerca  de^)  here.  Will  you  go  at  once)? 

10.  Certainly,  at  once.  My  wife  wishes  to  go  out  and 

needs  these  articles.  (Literally:  Yes,  directly. 

My  wife  wants  to  go  out  and  needs  all  these  things). 

11.  All  right;  directly  opposite  is  a very  good  shop, 
where  you  can  get  everything  you  need.  (Liter- 
ally: (It)  is  well;  here  in  front  (en  frente)  there  is 
a good  store  in  where  can  you  obtain  all  which 
(you)  need). 

12.  Is  that  a cheap  shop? 


^ The  preposition  con,  withy  is  used  in  a peculiar  manner  with 
the  personal  pronouns  mi,  mCy  ti,  theCy  si,  to  hiniy  viz.,  conmigo, 
with  me;  contigo,  with  thee;  consigo,  with  him. 

2 Encontrar,  to  meety  belongs  to  the  same  class  of  irregular  verbs 
which  change  the  o of  the  second  syllable  into  ue  in  the  whole 
of  the  singular  and  third  person  plural  of  the  indicative  and  subjunc- 
tive present,  and  in  the  corresponding  persons  in  the  imperative. 


Present. 


acerca  de,  concerningy  about. 
además  de,  beside. 


3 The  following  prepositions  require  de 


Indicative. 

Yo  encuentro. 

V.  encuentra, 
él  encuentra, 
nosotros  encontramos. 
V.  V.  encuentran, 
ellos  encuentran. 


Subjunctive. 
encuentre, 
encuentre, 
encuentre, 
encontremos, 
encuentren, 
encuentren, 
iré  de  after  them: 
dentro  de,  withiny  tw,  into. 
después  de,  after  {time  or  order). 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  0 note;  00  room. 


The  Spanish  Language, 


151 

8.  Sírvase  V.  venir  conmigo/  pues  no  sé  en  donde 
se  pueden  conseguir  todas  estas  cosas.  (kOn-me'-go 
kOn-sá-ghérr'). 

9.  V.  puede  encontrarlas^  cerca  de®  aquí  ¿ Quiere  V. 
salir  inmediatamente?  (én-kon-trár'lás  thérr-ká'). 

10.  Sí,  inmediatamente.  Mi  señora  quiere  salir  y ne- 
cesita todas  esas  cosas. 

11.  Está  bien;  aquí  en  frente  hay  una  buena  tienda  en 
donde  puede  V.  conseguir  todo  lo  que  necesita. 

12.  ¿Es  una  tienda  barata? 


alrededor  de,  around. 

detras  de, 

behind. 

antes  de,  before  {time 

encima  de 

on,  over. 

or  order). 

fuera  de, 

outside,  beyond. 

cerca  de,  near,  about, 

debajo  de,  under  {place), 

delante  de,  before  {place). 

lejos  de. 

far  from. 

The  simple  prepositions  are: 

a,  at,  to. 

hacia. 

toward. 

ante,  before. 

hasta, 

until. 

bajo,  under. 

mediante, 

by  means  of. 

con,  with. 

menos. 

but,  except. 

contra,  against. 

no  obstante. 

notwithstanding. 

de,  of,  from. 

para. 

for,  to. 

desde,  from. 

por. 

by,  for,  through. 

durante,  during. 

según, 

according  to. 

en,  in,  on,  at. 

sin. 

without. 

entre,  between,  among. 

sobre. 

on,  upon. 

excepto,  except. 

tras. 

behind. 

á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  0 note;  00  room. 


Í52 


The  Rosenthal  Method, 


13.  Oh!  yes,  quite  cheap.  You  know  that  toilet  ar- 

ticles are  much  cheaper  here  than  in  America. 
(Literally:  Yes,  pretty  (bastante)  cheap.  You 

know  very  well  that  all  those  articles  for  toilet 
(tocador)  are  here  much  more  cheap  than  in  Amer- 
ica). 

14.  Here  is  our  shop;  pretty  large,  isn’t  it?  Yes, 
quite  large  and  pretty.  (Literally:  Here  have  you 
the  store;  somewhat  (algo)  large,  not  is  (it)  truth 
(no  es  verdad)?  Yes,  rather  large  and  pretty 
(bonita). 

15.  What  do  you  want  to  buy  first?  Gloves.  . (Liter- 
ally: What  wish  you  to  buy  first?  Gloves). 

16.  I want  two  pairs  of  gloves,  a pair  of  black  ones 
and  a pair  of  brown  ones.  Please  show  me  some 
good  kid  gloves.  (Literally:  (I)  want  two  pairs 
(pares)  of  gloves,  one  (uno)  black  (negro)  and 
other  brown  (oscuro) . Pray  to  show  me  some 
(unos)  gloves  of  kid  good). 

17.  Do  you  want  a light-brown?  (Literally:  Them 
want  you  very  light  (claros)? 

^ The  comparative  is  formed  by  placing  más,  more,  or  menos, 
less,  before  the  adjectives,  as: 

caro,  dear.  más  caro,  dearer.  menos  caro,  less  dear. 

The  superlative  is  formed  either  by  placing  el,  lo,  la,  más  or 
menos  before  the  adjective,  or  by  adding  isimo,  isima  to  the  ad- 
jective whose  last  vowel  is  then  elided,  as: 

caro,  dear;  el  más  caro,  the  dearest. 

^ muy  caro  or  carísimo,  very  dear. 

The  former  is  called  the  relative  superlative^  and  the  latter  the 
absolute  superlative. 

The  comparative  is  usually  followed  by  que,  thaUy  as: 

Es  más  hábil  que  su  hermano,  he  is  more  skillful  than  his  brother, 
él  tiene  más  dinero  que  yo,  he  has  more  money  than  I. 

For  further  rules  see  Part  X. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


The  Spanish  Language. 


153 


13.  Si,  bastante  barata.  V.  sabe  muy  bien  que  todos 
esos  artículos  para  tocador  son  aquí  mucho  más^ 
baratos  que  en  América,  (tó'ká-dorr'). 

14.  Aquí  tiene  V.  la  tienda,  ¿ algo  grande,  no  es  ver- 
dad Sí,  bastante  grande  y bonita,  (vérr-dád' 
bó-né'-tá). 

15*  ¿ Qiié  desea  V.  comprar  primero?  Guantes. 

16.  Quiero  dos  pares  de  guantes,  uno  negro  y otro 
oscuro.^  Sírvase  enseñarme  unos  guantes  de  ca- 
britilla buenos,  (pá'-rés  nag'-ró  ós-koo'-ro  ká-vré- 
tel'-yá). 

17. ^  ¿ Los  quiere  V.  muy  claros?  (klá'-rós). 


2 The  Spanish  mode  of  expression:  “No  es  verdad?”  is  peculiar. 
It  resembles  the  German  “nicht  wahr  ?”,  or  the  French  “n’est-ce  pas?” 

3 The  principal  colors  are: — Los  colores  principales  son: 

Blacky  negro.  Pink.  rosado  or  color 


de  rosa. 


hluOy  azul. 

pale  hlue^  azul  claro. 

dark  hluey  azul  oscuro. 

brown^  castaño. 

crimson^  carmin. 

greeny  verde. 

olive  greeny  verde  olivo. 

orangey  naranja. 


red  y rojo. 

purpUy  púrpura. 

lilaCy  lila. 

violety  violeta. 

yelloWy  amarillo. 

whitCy  blanco. 

flesh-color.  encarnado. 
ultramariney  ultramarino. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


IS4 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


1 8.  Not  too  light;  give  me  a good  medium  color,  if  you 

please.  (Literally:  Not  very  light.  Give  me 

(déme)  a color  (un  color)  which  not  may  be  (sea) 
very  light). 

19.  What  price  do  you  wish  to  pay? — Not  too  dear, 
please.  (Literally:  Of  what  price  them  want  you? 
— Not  very  dear). 

20.  For  four  pesetas  I can  give  you  a very  good  glove. 
(Literally:  For  four  pesetas  to  you  (I)  can  give 
some  very  good). 

21.  How  much  is  that  in  American  money  (en  mone- 
da americana)? 

22.  A peseta  is  20  cents  (centavos).  Five  pesetas  are 
equal  to  a dollar.  (Literally:  One  dollar  has  five 
pesetas). 

23.  Five  pesetas  are  equal  to  a dollar  in  American 
money.  That  is  cheap  for  these  gloves,  isn’t  it? 
(Literally:  Five  pesetas  .are  one  dollar  in  money 
American.  Not  you  seem  (they)  to  you  (le  pare- 
cen a V.)  cheap)? 

24.  Yes,  that’s  very  cheap.  For  a dollar  we  can’t  get 
gloves  like  those  in  the  United  States.  (Literally: 
Yes,  to  me  (they)  seem  very  cheap.  For  a dollar 
not  (we)  have  gloves  like  (como)  those  in  the  States 
United  (los  Estados  Unidos). 

1 The  subjunctive  mood  must  be  employed  here,  as  a wish  and 
consequently  a possibility  is  implied.  The  subjunctive  present  of 
ser,  to  he^  is  conjugated; 

Yo  sea,  I may  he. 

V.  sea,  you  may  he. 


él  sea, 

nosotros  seamos, 
V.  V.  sean, 
ellos  sean, 


he  may  he. 
we  may  he. 
you  may  he. 
they  may  he. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room.. 


The  Spanish  Lcmguage,  155 

18.  No  muy  claros.  Déme  un  color  que  no  sea^  muy 
claro. 

19.  ¿De  qué  precio  los  quiere  V.? — No  muy  caros. 

20.  Por  cuatro  pesetas  le  puedo  dar  unos  muy  buenos, 
(pá'sa'-tás). 

íi.  ¿ Cuánto  es  eso  en  moneda  americana?  (mó-na'- 
dá). 

22.  Una  peseta  es  veinte  centavos.  Un  duro  tiene  cinco 
pesetas,  (thén-tá'-vós) . 

23.  Cinco  pesetas  son  un  duro  en  moneda  americana. 
¿ No  le  parecen^  a V.  baratos?  (pá-rá'-thén). 

24.  Sí,  me  parecen  muy  baratos.  Por  un  duro  no 
tenemos  guantes  como  esos  en  los  Estados  Unidos, 
(és-tá'-dos  óo-né'-dos). 


2 It  seems  to  me,  is  expressed  by  me  parece,  as: 

That  seems  very  dear  to  me,  Me  parece  demasiado  caro. 

It  seems  all  right,  Me  parece  bien. 

In  a similar  way  we  say  for:  Doesn't  it  seem  to  you"  or:  "Don't 

you  think?"  ¿No  le  parece  a V.? 

Don't  you  think  the  weather  is  ¿ No  le  parece  a V.  que  el 

going  to  clear?  tiempo  se  va  a aclarar? 

No,  I don't  think  so.  No,  no  me  parece  así. 

Don't  you  think  it  is  going  to  <i  No  le  parece  a V.  que  va  a 

rain?  Hover? 


á far;  á pale;  e eve;  é there;  0 note;  00  room. 


156  The  Rosenthal  M ethod, 

25.  Will  you  try  on  these  gloves?  (Literally:  Will 
you  try  to  you  them  (probárselos)? 

26.  These  gloves  do  not  fit  me;  they  are  too  tight 
(estrechos); — too  large  (grandes). 

27.  How  much  does  that  amount  to?  (Literally:  How 
much  amounts  to  (importa)  all)? 

28.  That  amounts  to  15  pesetas  in  all.  (Literally: 
All  amounts  to  15  pesetas). 


Salutations. 


1.  Good  morning,  how  are  you?^ 

2.  Thanks,  I am  pretty  well. 

3.  And  how  is  your  wife  (su  señora)? 

4.  My  wife  is  quite  well,  thank  you. 

5.  And  how  are  you,  yourself? — Quite  well,  thanks. 
(Literally:  And  you?  How  so?^  Perfectly  well; 
thanks)  ? 

6.  And  how  is  your  brother?  (Literally:  And  your 
brother,  how  succeeds  or  follows  (sigue^)? 


^ As  estar,  to  he,  is  used  to  describe  the  temporal  or  accidental 
state  of  persons  or  things,  i.e,,  when  a change  is  likely  to  occur 
at  any  time,  it  follows  logically  that  it  must  be  used  to  denote  the 
state  of  health,  as: 

How  are  you?  ¿ Cómo  está  V.  ? 

I  am  well.  Estoy  bien. 

How  is  your  partner?  ¿ Cómo  está  su  socio? 

He  is  better.  Está  mejor. 

This  young  man  is  ill.  Este  joven  está  enfermo. 

2 A strictly  idiomatic  expression,  but  very  generally  used. 

3 Para  servir  a V.,  at  your  service  (literally:  in  order  to  serve 
you),  an  idiomatic  phrase  used  as  an  expression  of  politeness. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


The  Spanish  Language. 


IS7 


25.  ¿Quiere  V.  probárselos?  (pró-bárr'-sá-lOs). 

26.  Estos  guantes  no  me  sirven;  me  quedan  muy  estre- 
chos;— me  están  muy  grandes,  (és-tra'-chos). 

27.  ¿Cuánto  importa  todo?  (ém-pórr'-tá). 

28.  Todo  importa  quince  pesetas. 


1.  Buenos  días,  ¿cómo  está  V.?^ 

¿Qué  tal ?^  (ka  tal). 

2.  Estoy  muy  bien,  gracias. 

3.  ¿Y  cómo  está  su  señora?  (sén-yó'-rá). 

4.  Mi  señora  está  muy  bien,  gracias. 

5.  Y V.,  ¿qué  tal? — Perfectamente  bien;  gracias, 
(also:  Para  servir  a V.,  gracias^). 

6.  Y su  hermano,  ¿ cómo  sigue^?  (sé'-gh}^). 


^ Another  mode  of  expression  used  in  inquiries  in  regard  to  health. 
Seguir  means  literally  to  follow.  It  is  conjugated  thus: 


Saludos. 

sa-lóó'-dos. 


PRESENT. 


Indicative. 

Yo  sigo. 

V.  sigue, 
él  sigue. 

nosotros  seguimos. 
V.  V.  siguen, 
ellos  siguen. 


Subjunctive. 


sigan. 

sigan, 


siga. 

siga. 

siga. 


sigamos. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  ó note;  00  room. 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


158 

7.  I hope  he  has  quite  recovered.  (Literally:  (I) 

hope  (espero)  (he)  may  be  (esté^)  already  (ya) 
well). 

8.  I am  very  well,  thanks,  but  my  poor  brother,  I am 
sorry  to  say,  can  not  yet  go  out.  He  is  still  very 
weak.  (Literally:  I am  very  well,  thanks,  but  my 
poor  (pobre)  brother,  (I)  grieve  (siento^)  to  say, 
not  can  yet  (atm)  go  out.  Still  (todavía)  (he)  is 
very  weak  (débil). 

9.  I am  very  sorry  for  that.  Have  you  a good  physi- 
cian? (Literally:  It  (I)  grieve  much  (mucho^). 

Have  you  a good  physician  (médico)? 


^ The  subjunctive  esté  must  be  employed  here,  as  a wish  and 
possibility  is  implied.  The  subjunctive  of  the  present  tense  of  estar 
is  conjugated: 

Yo  esté, 

V.  esté, 
él  esté, 

nosotros  estemos, 

V.  V.  estén, 
ellos  estén, 

2 Siento  from  sentir,  to  feel  or  to  he  sorry.  I am  very  sorry,  lo 
siento  mucho.  It  is  conjugated  thus  in  the 

PRESENT. 

Indicative.  Subjunctive. 

Yo  siento.  sienta. 

V.  siente.  sienta. 


I may  be. 
you  may  he. 
he  may  he. 
we  may  be. 
you  may  be. 
they  may  be. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  0 note;  00  room. 


The  Spanish  Language. 


1 59 

7.  Espero  esté^  ya  bueno. 


8.  Yo  estoy  muy  bien,  gracias,  pero  mi  pobre  her- 
mano, siento* *  decir,  no  puede  aún  salir.  Todavía 
está  muy  débil.  (pOv'-r^  sé'~'an'-tó  da-thérr'  t5- 
dá-vé'-á  da'-vél). 


9.  Lo  siento  mucho.*  ¿ Tiene  V.  un  buen  médico? 
(ma'-de-ko). 


él  siente. 

nosotros  sentimos. 
V.  V.  sienten, 
ellos  sienten. 


sienta. 

sintamos, 

sientan. 

sientan. 


* The  use  of  the  adverbs  muy  and  mucho  must  be  noted  by  the 
student.  Muy  can  never  qualify  a verb  and  cannot  stand  alone. 
Mucho,  on  the  other  hand,  can  be  used  with  verbs  only  and  stands 
by  itself.  Mucho  is  always  used  in  connection  with  hacer  when 
referring  to  the  weather. 


Hace  mucho  frío, 

Hace  mucho  calor, 

Hace  mucho  sol, 

¿Hace  mucho  frío  hoy?  Sí, 
mucho, 

I Habla  muy  bien  ? Sí,  muy 
bien. 


It  is  very  cold. 

It  is  very  warm 
It  is  very  sunny. 

It  is  very  cold  to-day?  Yes, 
very. 

Does  he  speak  very  well ? Yes, 
very. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  0 note;  00  room. 


i6o 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


10.  Yes,  our  physician  is  very  good,  but  my  brother 
was  (estuvo^)  very  ill  (grave)  and  is,  as  I told  you, 
very  weak  as  yet  (=and  as  you  (I)  told  (dije^)  to 
you  still  (aun)  (he)  is  very  weak). 

11.  But  he  will  surely  soon  get  well.  He  is  quite  young, 

his  constitution  is  good,  and  at  his  age,  health  is 
recovered  easily.  (Literally:  But  soon  (pronto) 

(he)  will  become  (se  pondrá^)  well.  (He)  is  very 
young  (joven),  his  constitution  (su  constitución) 
good  and  at  (a)  his  age  (edad)  (it)  recovers  the 
health  easily  (fácilmente). 

12.  Let  us  hope  so.  (Literally:  God  (Dios)  it  may  will 
(quiera).  Or:  Would  to  God  (ojalá)! 

13.  To-morrow  I will  call  again  on  you.  I must  see 

how  your  brother  is  getting  along.  Meanwhile 
give  him  my  regards.  (Literally:  To-morrow  I 

shall  return  (volveré)  to  (a)  see  you  to  you,  as  (pues) 
I desire  to  know  how  gets  on  (sigue)  your  brother. 
Whilst  so  long  (mientras  tanto)  give  him  you  my 
regards  (mis  recuerdos). 

14.  Goodbye!  (Literally:  Till  the  seen  (hasta  la  vista). 

^ The  Definido  (past  definite  tense)  denotes  what  occurred  on 
a certain  occasion  wholly  past,  whether  it  happened  yesterday, 
a few  weeks  before,  or  ages  ago.  It  is,  therefore,  called  the  his- 
torical tense  and  is  used  especially  in  narration.  Estuve,  I was, 
is  conjugated: 


Yo  estuve. 

I was. 

V.  estuvo, 

you  were. 

él  estuvo. 

he  was. 

nosotros  estuvimos, 

we  were. 

V.  V.  estuvieron. 

you  were. 

ellos  estuvieron. 

they  were. 

Compare  Part  X. 

2 Dije  is  the  definido  of  the  irregular  verb  decir,  to  say,  to  tell. 
It  is  conjugated: 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  0 note;  00  room. 


The  Spanish  Language. 


i6i 


10.  Si,  nuestro  médico  es  muy  bueno,  pero  mi  hermano 
estuvo^  muy  grave,  y como  le  dije^  a V.  atm  está 
muy  débil,  (és-tóo'-vó  grá'-^v^  dé'-^h^^). 

11.  Pero  pronto  se  pondrá^  bueno.  Es  muy  joven,  su 
constitución  buena  y a su  edad  se  recobra  la  salud 
fácilmente.  (pOn-drá'  ‘hó'-vén  kón-sté-tóo-the^on' 
a-dád'). 

12.  ¡Dios  lo  quiera! 


13.  Mañana  volveré  a verle  a V.,  pues  deseo  saber 
como  sigue  su  hermano.  Mientras  tanto  déle  V. 
mis  recuerdos. 

14.  ¡Hasta  la  vista! 


3 Pondrá  is  the  future  of  the  irregular  verb  poner,  to  put^  to  place. 
Ponerse  means  to  become.  The  Future  is  conjugated: 


¡Ojalá! 


nosotros  dijimos, 
V.  V.  dijeron, 
ellos  dijeron, 


Yo  dije, 
V.  dijo, 
él  dijo, 


/ said, 
you  said, 
he  said, 
we  said, 
you  said, 
they  said. 


Yo  pondré, 
V.  pondrá, 
él  pondrá, 


I shall  put. 
you  will  put. 
he  will  put. 
we  shall  put. 
you  will  put., 
they  will  put. 


nosotros  pondremos, 
V.  V.  pondrán, 
ellos  pondrán. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  0 note;  00  room. 


IÓ2 


The  Rosenthal  Method, 


Exercise. 

Translate  this  exercise  into  Spanish  and  send  it  to  our 
Correspondence  Department  for  correction. 

In  a Café. 

Is  this  the  ^^Café  des  Beaux-Arts’’?^ — ^Yes,  sir. — K. 
friend  of  mine^  made^  an  appointment^  with  me  to  meet® 
him  here,  in  the  billiard-room.® — Please  pass  through 
this^  room  and  go®  through  the  door®  on  the  left. — Hallo! 
Here  I am!^® — ^What  do  you  think^^  of  this  café? — ^As 
far  as  I have  seen  it,^^  it  seems  very  fine  to  me. — Come^® 
with  me;  just  look^^  at  the  handsome  mirrors. — Here 
is^®  the  reading-room;  the  best  papers  of  the  world  are 
here  on  file.^® — Is  it  well  patronized — Yes,  sir;  this  is 
not  only  a café,  but  a place  for  general  amusement.^® 
The  most  refined  people  of  the  city  frequent  it;^®  literary 
men,  artists  and  the  best  pianists  come  here.^ — Some 
one  is  now  taking  a seat  at  the  piano.^^ — That  is  Mr. 
Fernandez.  Listen  how^  well  he  interprets  German 
music. — ^Are  you  fond  of  German  music  — ^Very,  but 
I prefer  Italian  music.^ 


^¿El  Café  de  las  Bellas  Artes?  friend  mine.  ^Gave,  dió. 
^ Una  cita.  ® For  to  meet  us  here,  para  encontramos  aquí.  ® La 
sala  de  billares.  ^ Este  salón.  ® Entrar.  ^ La  puerta.  Here  me 
have  you.  l Qué  le  parece  a V.  ? For  which  I have  seen  (visto). 

Venga.  i Mire  qué  hermosos  espejos!  Here  have  you  el  salón 
de  lectura.  Where  are  met  the  best  papel»  (periódicos)  of  all  the 
world  (el  mundo).  Is  (it)  much  frequented  (frecuentado)? 

But  (sino)  a place  (un  lugar)  for  to  pass  good  times  (ratos)  and 
enjoy  one’s  self  (divertirse).  The  most  select  youth  (la  juventud 
mas  escogida)  of  the  city  come  here,  Among  the  which  (entre  los 
cuales)  there  are  literary  men  (literatos),  artistas  y muy  buenos 
pianistas.  At  the  (al)  piano.  “ Hear  you  (oiga  V.)  how  well 
interprets  (interpreta)  the  music  (la  música)  German  (alemana). 
^ ¿ Le  gusta  a V.?  Me  gusta  mucho,  pero  prefiero 


LIBRARY 
■ THE 

UNIVERSiTV  Of  ILLINO!? 

ROSENTHAL’S 

CONHON-SENSE  METHOD 

OF 


PRAaiCAL  LINGUISTRY 


THE 

Spanish  Language 

BV 

DR.  RICHARD  S.  ROSENTHAL 
Author  of  the  Meisterschaft  System,  etc.,  etc 

Haulenbeek  Corrected  Edition 
Revised  1917 


IN  TEN  PARTS 


NEW  YORK  ::  LONDON 
The  International  College  of  Languages 


COPYRIGHT  1905. 

BY 

THE  INTERNATIONAL  COLLEGE  OF  LANGUAGES 

Entered  at 

Sttationers*  Hall,  London,  Eng. 


The  Spanish  Language. 


163 


CONTENTS. 


Conversation 164 

Importance  of  the  Spanish  Language 172 

Use  of  Haber  and  Tener 175 

Seasons.. 182 

Spanish  Characteristics 184 

In  a Café.  (Exercise) 190 

A Bank.  (Exercise) 191 

Vocabulary 192 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


Conversation. 

1.  Do  you  understand  Spanish?  (Literally:  Under- 
stand you  the  Spanish)? 

2.  I can  understand  Spanish  slightly  but  not  very 
well.  (Literally:  It  (I)  understand  a little,  but 
not  very  well). 

3.  Do  you  understand  me  when  I speak  rapidly? 

(Literally:  Me  understand  you  when  (I)  speak 

fast)  ? 

4.  I understand  you  when  you  talk  slowly  and  dis- 
tinctly; but  when  you  commence  to  speak  rapidly 
or,  I ought  to  say,  when  you  talk  naturally,  I can 
scarcely  understand  a word.  (Literally:  You  (I) 
understand  when  speak  you  slowly  and  distinctly, 
but  when  commence  you  (empieza  V.^  to  (a)  speak 
fast,  or  better  (mejor^)  said  (dicho)  when  speak 
you  naturally  not  (I)  understand  scarcely  (casi) 
one  word). 


1 Empezar,  to  begin,  belongs  to  that  large  class  of  irregular  verbs 
which  insert  i before  the  stem- vowel  e — ie  throughout  the  singular 
and  in  the  third  person  plural  of  the  present  indicative  and  the 
subjunctive  and  in  the  same  persons  in  the  imperative. 


* Present. 

Indicative,  Subjunctive, 

Yo  empiezo.  empiece. 

V.  empieza.  empiece, 

él  empieza.  empiece, 

nosotros  empezamos.  empecemos. 

V.  V.  empiezan.  empiecen, 

ellos  empiezan.  empiecen. 

The  subjunctive  is  written  with  a c,  because  all  verbs  ending  in 
zar  change  z into  c before  e. 

2 Verbs  of  motion,  destination,  encouragement,  inclination  or 
habit,  or  reflexive  verbs  strong  moral  decision  or  effort,  require 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  ó note;  00  room. 


The  Spanish  Language. 

Conversación. 


1.  I Entiende  V.  el  español? 

2.  Lo  entiendo  un  poco,  pero  no  muy  bien. 

3.  ¿ Me  entiende  V.  cuando  hablo  aprisa?  (á-pré'-sá). 

4.  Le  entiendo  cuando  habla  V.  despacio  y claro, 
pero  cuando  empieza  V.^  d?  hablar  aprisa,  o mejor^ 
dicho,  cuando  habla  con  naturalidad,  no  entiendo 
casi  una  palabra.  (ém-pé'^a'-thá  ma-^hórr'dé'- 
cho). 


the  preposition  a before  the  infinitive  of  the  verb  they  govern, 
I only  mention  the  following  verbs: 


animar  a, 
aprender  a, 
aspirar  a, 
comenzar  a, 
echar  a, 
empezar  a, 
enseñar  a, 


to  encourage  to. 
to  learn  to. 
to  aspire  to. 

to  begin  to. 

to  teach  to. 


enviar  a, 
habituar  a, 
inclinar  a, 
ir  a, 

ponerse  a, 
tender  a, 
volver  a, 


to  send  to. 
to  accustom  to. 
to  incline  to. 
to  go  to. 
to  begin  to. 
to  aim  to. 
to  return  to^ 
to — again. 


For  full  list  and  examples  see  Part  X. 

^ The  following  adjectives  are  compared  irregularly: 


Grande,  large;  mayor,  larger;  el,  la,  lo  mayor,  the  largest. 

pequeño,  small;  menor,  smaller;  el,  la,  lo  menor,  the  smallest. 

bueno,  good;  mejor,  better;  el,  la,  lo  mejor,  the  best. 

malo,  bad;  peor,  worse;  e.l,  la,  lo  peor,  the  worst. 

Compare  Part  X. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


The  Rosenthal  Method, 


1 66 

5.  That's  a great  pity!  (Literally:  What  pity  (lás- 
tima)! Or:  That  is  a pity)! 

6.  Your  ear  lacks  training.  (Literally:  To  your  ear 
(oido)  you^  (it)  wants  (falta)  practice  (práctica). 

7.  You  ought  to  listen  more  to  Spaniards  when  they 
converse  with  each  other.  (Literally:  Ought  you 
to  listen  (escuchar)  more  to  the  Spaniards  when 
(they)  speak  among  themselves  (entre  sí). 

8.  I have  tried  to  do  that,  but  it  seems  to  me  that 
the  Spanish  people  talk  a great  deal  faster  than 
we.  (Literally:  It  (I)  have  tried  (tratado)  to  (de) 
do,  but  me  (it)  seems  that  the  Spaniards  speak 
much  more  fast  than  we). 


The  following  adverbs  have  also  an  irregular  comparative  and 
superlative: 


bien,  well. 

mejor,  better; 

mal,  badly; 

peor,  worse; 

mucho,  much; 

mas,  more; 

poco,  little; 

menos,  less; 

lo  mejor,  muy  bien. 

besty  very  well. 

lo  peor,  muy  mal. 

' worsty  very  badly. 

lo  más,  muchísimo. 

most. 

lo  menos,  poquísimo. 

least. 

See  Part  X. 

1 Usted  is — as  we  have  noticed  before — ^frequently  used  in  con- 

nection  with  its  substitute  le 

in  the  pleonastic  construction,  when 

joined  to  the  same  verb: 

Le  diré  a V., 

/ shall  tell  you. 

1 qué  le  pasa  a V.  ? 

what  is  the  matter  with  you? 

le  busco  a V.,  I am  looking  for  you. 

I le  he  servido  a V.  a su  gusto  ? have  I served  you  according  to 

your  taste? 

Le  and  se  are  often  used  in  Spanish,  not  only  with  usted,  but 
with  a noun: 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  0 note;  00  room. 


The  Spanish  Language. 


167 

5.  ¡Qué  lástima! 

Eso  es  ima  lástima,  (lás'-té-má). 

6.  A su  oido  de  V.  le^  falta  práctica,  (ó'^é'-dó  fál'- 
tá  prák'-té-ká). 

7.  Debe  V.  escuchar  más  a los  españoles  cuando  ha- 
blan entre  sí.  (és-kóo-chárr'  sé). 


8.  Lo  he  tratado  de^  hacer,  pero  me  parece  que  los 
españoles  hablan  mucho  más  aprisa  que  nosotros. 


A mi  padre  le  pareció  muy  caro.  It  seemed  very  dear  to  my  father. 

A mi  hermana  se  lo  había  dicho.  He  had  told  it  to  my  sister. 

2 The  following  verbs  require  de  before  the  infinitive: 


acabar  de, 

to  have  just. 

acordarse  de, 

to  remember  to. 

alegrarse  de, 

to  be  glad. 

cesar  de. 

to  cease  to. 

dejar  de. 

to  fail  to. 

desistir  de, 

to  cease  from. 

disuadir  de. 

to  dissuade  from. 

encargar  de, 

to  commission  to. 

excusar  de. 

to  excuse  from. 

eximir  de. 

to  free  from. 

haber  de. 

to  have  to. 

ocuparse  de. 

to  busy  one's  self  with. 

olvidarse  de. 

to  forget  to. 

tratar  de. 

to  try  to. 

Ejemplos : 

Acabo  de  llegar. 

I have  just  arrived. 

No  me  acuerdo  de  haberlo  dicho,  I do  not  remember  saying  so. 

Se  me  olvidó  de  decirlo. 

I forgot  to  tell  it. 

No  deja  de  estudiar. 

He  does  not  cease  studying. 

Trataré  de  hacerlo. 

I shall  try  to  do  it. 

á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


The  Rosenthal  Method, 


1 68 

9.  That  only  seems  so  to  you.  In  time  and  by  prac- 
tice your  ear  will  get  accustomed  to  it  and  you 
will  find  it  quite  esay  to.  understand  almost  any 
conversation.  (Literally:  That  you  seems  to  you. 
With  time  and  practice  itself  will  accustom  (se 
acostumbrará)  the  ear  and  then  (ya)  will  see  you 
(verá  V.)  the  easy  which  is  understand  any  (cual- 
quiera) conversation). 

10.  I hope  so.  But  pardon  me,  you  have  just  used  an 

expression  which  is  new  to  me.  What  is  the  literal 
meaning  of:  ^‘Ya  verá  V.’’?  (Literally:  Would 

to  God  (ojalá) ! But  pardon  you,  finish  you  (acaba 
V.)  from  (de)  to  use  (usar)  an  expression  which 
me  is  new.  What  will  say  literally  ^‘Ya  verá  V.”? 

11.  ‘^Ya  verá  means  literally:  ‘^Already  (then) 

will  see  you.’^  Do  you  understand  now  what  ^‘Ya 
verá  means?  (Literally:  ^'Ya  verá  V.’’  will 
say  literally:  ‘^Already  (then)  will  see  you.’^  Un- 
derstand you  already  what  will  say:  ‘‘Ya  verá  V.’O? 

12.  Yes,  now  I understand  it  and  I wish  that  you  would 
always  give  me  literal  translations.  (Literally: 
Yes,  already  it  (I)  understand  and  wish  that  me 
may  give  (dé)  you  always  the  translation  literal 
(la  traducción  literal). 


1 Acostumbrar  means  to  accustom;  acostumbrarse  (reflexive), 
to  get  accustomed  to, 

2 Future  of  ver,  to  see. 

3 Cualquiera,  plural  cualesquiera,  any  {whatever),  is  used  both 
as  an  adjective  or  as  a substantive,  relating  to  persons  or  things. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


The  Spanish  Language,  169 

9.  Eso  le  parece  a V.  Con  tiempo  y práctica  se  acos- 
tumbrará^ el  oido  y ya  verá  V.^  lo  fácil  que  es  en- 
tender cualquiera^  conversación.  (te"^am'-po  á-kos- 
tóom-brá-rá'  vá-rá'  kwál-ke^a'-rá). 


10.  ¡Ojalá!  Pero  dispense  V.,  acaba  V.  de^  usar  una 
expresión  que  me  es  nueva.  ¿ Qué  quiere  decir 
literalmente  ‘^Ya  verá  V.’’? 


II.  “Ya  verá  V.’’  quiere  decir  literalmente:  “Already 
(then)  will  see  you.”  ¿Entiende  V.  ya  lo  que 
quiere  decir:  “Ya  verá  V.”? 


-12.  Sí,  ya  lo  entiendo  y deseo  que  me  dé  V.  siempre 
la  traducción  literal,  (se^am'-pr^  trá-dóók-the^ 
ón'). 


^ Acabar  de  corresponds  to  the  French  venir  de  and  expresses 
our  justy  just  noWy  as: 

Acabo  de  recibir  su  carta,  I have  just  received  your  letter. 

Acabo  de  oir  de  su  llegada,  I have  just  heard  of  his  arrival. 

Acaban  de  dar  las  cuatro.  It  has  just  struck  four  {o'clock). 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  5 note;  00  room. 


170 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


13.  Literal  translations,  my  dear  sir,  are  in  the  major- 
ity of  cases  an  impossibility.  (Literally:  Trans- . 
lations  literal,  friend  mine,  (amigo  mio^),  are  im- 
possible in  many  cases  (en  muchos  casos). 

14.  And  why? 

15.  Because  every  language  possesses  its  own  pecu- 
liarities, its  own  idioms  and  modes  of  expression 
which  can  never  be  translated  literally.  (Liter- 
ally: Because  every  (cada)  language  has  its  pecu- 
liarities (peculiaridades),  its  idioms  (modismos)  and 
forms  (formas)  of  expression  which  never  (nunca) 
themselves  can  translate  (traducir)  literally). 

16.  Are  there  many  idiomatic  expressions  in  Spanish? 

(Literally:  Are  there  (hay)  in  Spanish  many 

idioms)  ? 


^ The  absolute  possessive  adjectives  are: 

Singular.  Plural. 

mío,  mía,  míos,  mías,  my. 

(tuyo,  tuya,  tuyos,  tuyas,  thy). 


nuestro,  nuestra,  nuestros,  nuestras, 

(vuestro,  vuestra,  vuestros,  vuestras. 


suyo,  suya, 


suyos,  suyas, 


his. 

her. 

its, 

your. 

our. 

your), 

their. 


suyo,  suya. 


suyos,  suyas. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


The  Spanish  Language, 


171 


13.  Traducciones  literales,  amigo  mío,^  son  imposi- 
bles en  muchos  casos,  (ém-po-sé'-blés  ká'-sós). 

14.  ¿ Y por  qué? 

1$.  Porque  cada  idioma  tiene  sus  peculiaridades,  sus 
modismos  y formas  de  expresión  que  nunca  se 
pueden  traducir  literalmente.^  (ká'-dá  e-dé"^o'-má 
pá-kóo-lyá-ré-dá'-dés  mo-dés'-mós  éks-pra-se"^ón' 
trá-dóó-thérr'). 

16.  ¿ Hay  en  español  muchos  modismos? 


These  absolute  forms  are  employed  in  direct  address,  but  without 
the  definite  article: 


amigo  mío,  my  friend  {my  dear  friend), 

hijo  mío,  my  son  {my  dear  son), 

muy  señores  míos.  Gentlemen  {Dear  Sirs  [in  letters]). 

Compare  Part  X. 

2 Adverbs  are  formed  from  adjectives  by  adding  mente  to  the 
feminine  form  of  the  adjective,  as: 


Antiguo,  old; 

común,  common; 

fácil,  easy; 

fuerte,  strong; 

franco,  frank; 


Antiguamente,  in  olden  times 
comunmente,  commonly, 
fácilmente,  easily. 

fuertemente,  strongly, 

francamente,  frankly. 


á far;  a pale;  6 eve;  é there;  5 note;  00  room. 


172 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


IMPORTANCE  OF  THE  SPANISH  LANGUAGE. 

17.  The  Spanish  language,  my  dear  sir,  is  one  of  the 
richest  tongues  in  the  world.  Among  modem 
tongues  German  and  Spanish  rank  highest  in  ex- 
pressions and,  as  a matter  of  course,  contain  many 
idioms.  (Literally:  The  language  Spanish,  friend 
mine,  is  one  of  the  richest  (uno  de  los  más  ricos) 
of  the  world  (del  mundo).  Among  (entre^)  the 
tongues  modem  (modernos)  the  German  and  the 
Spanish  are  the  richest  and  for  that  (por  lo  tanto) 
have  many  idioms). 

18.  Would  you  have  the  kindness  to  mention  some  of 
the  most  generally  used  idioms?  I mean  expres- 
sions which  come  up  in  every-day  conversation. 
(Literally:  Would  you  have  the  kindness  (la  bon- 
dad) to  quote  (citar)  some  of  the  idioms  most 
used  (usados)  ? (I)  will  say  those  (los)  which 
themselves  use  in  conversation  daily  (diaria). 

19.  With  pleasure.  You  remember  the  verb,  tener, 
which  we  studied  in  our  first  book?  (Literally: 
With  much  pleasure  (gusto).  Yourself  remember 
you  (se  acuerda  V.)  of  the  verb  ‘Tener’^  which  we 
studied  (estudiamos^)  in  the  first  book)? 

^ Entre,  between ^ among,  belongs  to  the  simple  prepositions  which 
govern  the  accusative.  Compare  Part  X. 

2 The  Definido,  the  use  of  which  has  already  been  explained,  is 
formed  by  adding  the  following  endings  to  the  stem  of  regular  verbs: 


I. 


Definido. 

2 and  3. 


é. 

ó. 

ó. 


amos. 

aron. 

aron. 


irnos. 

ieron. 

ieron. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note; 


00  room. 


The  Spanish  Language,  173 

IMPORTANCIA  DEL  IDIOMA  ESPAÑOL. 

17.  El  idioma  español,  amigo  mío,  es  tmo  de  los  más 
ricos  del  mundo.  Entre^  los  idiomas  modernos 
el  alemán  y el  español  son  los  más  ricos  y por  lo 
tanto  tienen  muchos  modismos. 


18.  ¿ Tendría  V.  la  bondad  de  citar  algunos  de  los  mo- 
dismos más  usados?  Quiero  decir  de  los  que  se 
usan  en  la  conversación  diaria,  (thé-tárr'  óo-sa'- 
dós). 


19.  Con  mucho  gusto.  ¿Se  acuerda  V.  del  verbo 
‘^tener’’  que  estudiamos^  en  el  primer  libro?  (á- 
kwérr'-dá). 


The  regular  verbs  of  the  second  and  third  conjugation  have  the 
same  endings.  If;  therefore,  we  take  hablar,  to  speaks  vender, 
to  sell^  and  vivir,  to  live^  as  paradigms  we  have  the  following  con- 
jugations for  the 


Definido. 


I. 

2. 

3- 

Yo  hablé. 

vendí. 

viví. 

V.  habló. 

vendió. 

vivió. 

él  habló. 

vendió. 

vivió. 

nosotros  hablamos. 

vendimos. 

vivimos. 

V.  V.  hablaron. 

vendieron. 

vivieron. 

ellos  hablaron. 

vendieron. 

vivieron. 

Of  course,  this  would  be  rendered:  I spoke,  you  spoke,  he  spoke, 
we  spoke,  you  spoke,  they  spoke,  etc.,  etc. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


The  Rosenthal  Method, 


174 


20.  Yes,  I remember  it  perfectly,  but  we  only  studied 

the  indicative  present.  (Literally:  Yes,  myself 

(I)  remember  perfectly,  but  not  (we)  studied  ex- 
cept (sino)  the  present  of  the  indicative  (el  presente 
del  indicativo). 

21.  Well,  you  ought  to  study  the  whole  verb,  as  the 
use  of  it  is  very  common  and  presents  many  diffi- 
culties to  English  speaking  persons.  (Literally: 
Well  (pues  bien),  ought  you  to  study  all  the  verb,^ 
as  its  use  is  very  common  (común)  and  presents 
many  difficulties  (muchas  dificultades)  to  the 
English  and  Americans). 

22.  To  begin  with,  we  have  two  verbs  for  ‘^to  have,’’ 
“tener”  and  “haber.”  (Literally:  In  the  first  place, 
(primeramente)  (we)  have  two  verbs  corresponding 
to  “to  have,”  namely  (a  saber^):  tener  and  haber). 


1 Acordarse,  to  remember^  is  a reflexive  verb.  It  belongs  to  that 
numerous  class  of  slightly  irregular  verbs  which  change  the  o of 
the  stem- vowel  into  ue  throughout  the  whole  singular  and  in  the 
second  and  third  person  plural  of  the  present  of  indicative  and 
subjunctive,  and  in  the  same  persons  in  the  imperative  mood: 


2 Todo,  toda,  all,  whole,  every,  when  used  as  an  adjective,  is  fol- 
lowed by  the  definite  article,  as: 


Present. 


Indicative. 

Yo  me  acuerdo. 

V.  se  acuerda, 
él  se  acuerda, 
nosotros  nos  acordamos. 
V.  V.  se  acuerdan, 
ellos  se  acuerdan. 


Subjunctive, 
me  acuerde, 
se  acuerde, 
se  acuerde. 


nos  acordemos. 


se  acuerden, 
se  acuerden. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  ó note;  00  room. 


The  Spanish  Language, 


175 


20.  Si,  me  acuerdo^  perfectamente,  pero  no  estudiamos 
sino  el  presente  del  indicativo,  (se'-nó  én-dé-ká- 
té'-vo). 


21.  Pues  bien,  debe  V.  estudiar  todo  el  verbo,^  pues 
su  uso  es  muy  común  y presenta  muchas  dificul- 
tades a los  ingleses  y americanos,  (ko-móón'  pra- 
sén'-tá  de-fé-kóól-tá'-dés). 

22.  Primeramente,  tenemos  dos  verbos  correspondientes 
a ‘‘to  have,’’  a saber tener  y haber. 


Todo  el  día, 
toda  la  noche, 
todos  los  meses, 
todas  las  mañanas, 
todas  las  tardes, 
todas  las  semanas, 
todos  los  años, 


The  whole  day^  all  day, 

the  whole  nighty  all  night, 

every  month. 

every  morning. 

every  afternoon. 

every  week. 

every  year. 


3 The  infinitive  with  a or  al  (dative)  is  employed  in  place  of  our 
English  sentences  beginning  with  when^  after,  as  or  if. 

Al  salir  de  casa  encontré  mi  when  I left  the  house  I met  my 

agente,  agent. 

al  haber  yo  sabido  que  él  estaba  if  I had  known  he  was  here  I 
aquí  hubiese  venido,  would  have  come. 

al  verle  me  fui,  on  seeing  him  I went  away. 

al  ir  a verle,  le  encontré,  on  going  to  see  him  1 met  him. 


á fár;  a pale;  6 eve;  é there;  0 note;  00  room. 


176 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


23.  I know  that;  that  was  explained  before.  (Liter- 
ally: It  (I)  know). 

24.  Consequently  you  know  that  '‘haber”  is  used 

mainly  for  the  formation  of  compound  tenses,  as 
for  instance:  "I  have  sent  you  a dispatch.”  "I 
have  explained  this  the  last  time.”  "I  have  never 
heard  the  like  of  it.”  (Literally:  Consequently 

(por  consiguiente)  know  you  that  haber  itself  (it) 
uses  only  to  (para)  form  (formar)  the  tenses  com- 
pound (los  tiempos  compuestos);  for  example  (por 
ejemplo):  You  (I)  have  sent  (mandado)  to  you  a 
dispatch  (un  despacho).  You  it  (I)  have  explained 
to  you  the  last  time  (la  última  vez).  Never  (I) 
have  heard  (oido)  such  (tal)  thing). 

25.  Yes,  all  this  is  clear  to  me  and  I also  know  that 
"tener”  is  an  active  verb  and  can  generally  be 
changed  into  "to  possess”  without  affecting  the 
meaning  of  the  sentence.  (Literally:  Yes,  it  (I) 
see  very  clear  and  also  (I)  know  that  tener  is  a 
verb  active  (activo)  that  itself  can  use  for  (por) 
the  verb  to  possess  (poseer)  without  (sin)  to  alter 
(alterar)  in  nothing  the  meaning  (el  significado) 
of  the  sentence  (la  oración). 

26.  I am  glad  that  this  is  clear  to  you.  Have  you 
learned  the  whole  conjugation  of  "tener”?  (Lit- 
erally: Myself  (I)  rejoice  that  it  may  see  (vea^ 
you  so-  clear.  Have  learned  you  already  all  the 
conjugation  (la  conjugación)  of  tener)  ? 


^ The  subjunctive  must  be  used  after  verbs  denoting  joy,  grief, 
vexation,  surprise,  etc.,  as: 


a far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note:  00  room. 


The  Spanish  Language. 

23.  Lo  sé.  Eso  fué  explicado  antes. 


177 


24.  Por  consiguiente  sabe  V.  que  haber  se  usa  solo 
para  formar  los  tiempos  compuestos;  por  ejemplo: 
Le  he  mandado  a V.  un  despacho.  Se  lo  he  ex- 
plicado a V.  la  última  vez.  Nunca  he  oido  tai 
cosa,  (kón-sé-ghé'^én'-t}^  a-‘hémp'-lo) . 


25.  Sí,  lo  veo  muy  claro,  y también  sé  que  ‘^tener’^  es 
im  verbo  activo  que  se  puede  usar  por  el  verbo 
^^poseer’^  sin  alterar  en  nada  el  significado  de  la 
oración,  (ák-té'-vo  po-sa-érr'  ség-ne-fé-ká-do  ó-rá- 
the^ón). 


26.  Me  alegro  que  lo  vea^  V.  tan  claro.  ¿ Ha  apren- 
dido V.  ya  toda  la  conjugación  de  tener?  (kOn- 
‘hóó-gá-the'^On') . 


I am  glad  you  know  it, 

I am  glad  it  rains, 

It  is  too  had  he  will  not  come. 


me  alegro  que  lo  sepa  V. 
me  alegro  que  llueva.  * 
es  una  lástima  que  no  venga. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


178 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


27.  No,  not  yet. 

28.  Well,  you  must  study  it.  You  will  find  it  in  the 
tenth  book  which  contains  the  grammar  of  the 
Spanish  language.  (Literally:  Well  ought  you  to 
study  it.  It  find  you  (encuentra  V.^  in  the  book 
number  (número)  ten  in  which  (en  el  cual)  is  the 
grammar  (la  gramática)  of  the  language  Spanish). 

29.  Study  it  well  and  in  our  next  lesson  I will  teach 
you  the  idioms  of  ^^tener.’’  Good  bye,  now.  (Lit- 
erally: Study  it  you  well  and  in  the  next  lesson 
you  (I)  will  teach  (enseñaré)  to  you  some  idioms  in 
the  which  (en  los  que)  itself  employs  (emplea)  the 
verb  ^^tener.’’  For  now  good  bye  (Adiós). 

30.  Good  bye,  sir.  (Literally:  May  go  you  (vaya 

V.^)  with  God  (con  Dios). 


1 Encontrar,  to  meet^  belongs  to  that  numerous  class  of  slightly 
irregular  verbs  which  change  the  stem- vowel  o into  ue  in  the  whole 
singular,  and  the  second  and  third  person  plural  in  the  present 
indicative  and  subjunctive  and  in  the  same  persons  in  the  im- 
perative. 


Present. 


Indicative. 

Yo  encuentro.’ 

V.  encuentra, 
él  encuentra, 
nosotros  encontramos. 
V.  V.  encuentran, 
ellos  encuentran. 


Subjunctive. 


encuentre. 

encuentre. 

encuentre. 


encontremos, 


encuentren. 

encuentren. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  0 note;  00  room. 


The  Spanish  Language. 


179 


27.  No,  todavía  no. 

28.  Pues  debe  V.  estudiarla.  La  encuentra  V.^  en  el 
libro  número  diez,  en  el  cual  está  la  gramática  del 
idioma  español,  (én-kwén'-trá  nób'-má-ró  grá-má'- 
te-ká). 

29.  Estúdiela  V.  bien  y en  la  próxima  lección  le  en- 
señaré a V.  algunos  modismos  en  los  que  se  emplea 
el  verbo  ^^tener.^’  Por  ahora,  adiós,  (és-tóo'- 
dé"^á-lá  lék-the"^ón'  á-dé^ós'). 


30.  IVaya  V.^  con  Dios!  (vá'-yá). 


2 Vaya  V.  is  the  subjunctive  (or  imperative)  of  the  irregular 
verb  ir.  The  present  tense  is  conjugated: 

Present. 


Indicative. 

Subjunctive. 

Yo  voy. 

vaya. 

V.  va. 

vaya. 

él  va. 

vaya. 

nosotros  vamos. 

vayamos. 

V.  V.  van. 

vayan. 

ellos  van. 

vayan. 

For  full  conjugation  see  Part  X. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  0 note;  00  room. 


i8o 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


HACER  AND  TENER. 


1.  Ah,  good  morning,  my  dear  sir!  I am  delighted 
to  see  you.  How  are  you?  (Literally:  Good  day, 
friend  mine!  How  much  (cuánto)  I rejoice  (me 
alegro)  to  (de)  see  you  to  you.  How  are  you)  ? 

2.  Thanks,  I am  quite  well.  And  how  do  you  feel 
to-day?  (Literally:  Very  well,  thanks.  And  you 
how  (qué  tal)  yourself  feel  (se  siente)  to-day)? 

3.  I am  very  well,  thanlc  you.  This  beautiful  spring 

weather  just  suits  me.  (Literally:  (I)  am  very 

well,  thanks.  This  delicious  (delicioso)  weather 
(tiempo)  of  spring  (primavera)  me  pleases  (gusta) 
much). 

4.  Spring  weather?  Pardon  me  for  repeating  these 
words  after  you,  but  the  expression  is  new  to  me 
and  I don’t  quite  know  what  it  means.  (Liter- 
ally: Weather  of  spring?  Pardon  you  that  (I) 
may  repeat  (repita)  those  words,  but  as  to  me 
(they)  are  unknown  (desconocidas)  not  (I)  know 
what  (they)  will  say). 


1 Sentir,  to  feel,  to  perceive,  is  an  irregular  verb.  The  conjuga- 
tion of  the  present  tense  is: 

Present. 


Indicative. 

Yo  siento,  nosotros  sentimos. 

V.  siente.  V.  V.  sienten, 
él  siente.  ellos  sienten. 
Compare  Part  X. 

2 In  the  same  way  we  say: 

I Le  gusta  a V.  la  lengua  caste- 
llana? 

Sí  señor,  a mi  me  gusta  más  que 
ningún  otro  idioma, 

I Le  gusta  a V.  ? 


Subjunctive. 
sienta,  sintamos, 
sienta,  sientan, 
sienta,  sientan. 


Do  you  like  the  Spanish  lan- 
guage? 

Yes,  sir,  I like  it  better  than 
any  other  language. 

Do  you  like  it? 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  oO  room. 


The  Spanish  Language, 


i8i 


Hacer  y Tener, 


1.  Buenos  días,  amigo  mío.  ¡Cuánto  me  alegro  de 

verle  a V. ! ¿ Cómo  está  V.  ? 

2.  Muy  bien,  gracias.  Y V.,  ¿ qué  tal  se  siente^  hoy? 

3.  Estoy  muy  bien,  gracias.  Este  delicioso  tiempo 
de  primavera  me  gusta^  mucho,  (da-lé-thé^o'- 
sO  pré-má-vá'-rá  góos'-tá). 

4.  ¿ Tiempo  de  primavera? — Dispense  V.  que  repita^ 
esas  palabras,  pero  como  me  son  desconocidas  no 
sé  lo  que  quieren  decir,  (rá-pe'-tá  dés-kO-nO-thé'- 
dás). 


¿ Qué  le  gusta  a V.  más,  paneci-  What  do  you  like  best:  rollSy 
líos,  tostadas  o pan?  toast  or  bread? 

2 Gustar,  to  please,  to  like,  is  nearly  always  used  as  an  impersonal 
verb.  In  Spanish,  therefore,  a person  does  not  like  a thing,  but 
the  thing  is  pleasing  to  the  person.  ¿ Le  gusta  a V.  ? means  liter- 
ally: Does  it  please  you? 

3 Repetir,  to  repeat,  is  an  irregular  verb.  The  conjugation  of  the 
present  tense  is: 


Present. 


Indicative, 

Yo  repito. 

V.  repite, 
él  repite. 

nosotros  repetimos. 
V.  V.  repiten, 
ellos  repiten. 


Subjunctive, 


repitan. 

repitan. 


repitamos. 


repita. 

repita. 

repita. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


i82 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


5.  You  know,  of  course,  that  we  have  four  seasons, 
viz.:  spring,  summer,  autumn  and  winter,  but  I 
suppose  our  Spanish  names  for  them  are  new  to 
you.  (Literally:  Know  you  for  sure  (por  supuesto) 
that  (we)  have  four  seasons  (estaciones),  to  wit 
(a  saber):  The  spring  (la  primavera),  the  summer 
(el  verano),  the  auttunn  (el  otoño)  and  the  winter 
(el  invierno),  but  (I)  suppose  (supongo)  that  their 
names  (nombres)  in  Spanish  you  are  to  you  new). 

6.  Quite  new.  Please  let  me  repeat  them  after  you: 
Spring,  Slimmer,  autumn  and  winter.  (Literally: 
It  (they)  are.  Allow  me  (déjeme)  you  to  repeat 
them  with  you:  the  spring,  the  summer,  the  autumn 
and  the  winter). 

7.  That  was  very  good!  Your  pronunciation  is  ex- 
cellent! (Literally:  Well  said  (dicho^).  Your  pro- 
nunciation is  excellent  (excelente). 

8.  You  flatter  me.  Professor.  You  Spaniards  are  al- 
ways so  complimentary.  (Literally:  Me  flatter 

(lisonjea)  you,  Mr.  Professor  (profesor).  You  the 
Spaniards  are  very  nice  (flnos)  and  very  fond  of 
(amantes  de)  compliments  (cumplimientos). 

1 Suponer,  to  suppose,  is  an  irregular  verb.  The  verb  from  which 
it  is  derived,  is  poner,  to  put,  to  place.  The  present  tense  is  con- 
jugated; Present. 


Indicative.  Subjunctive. 

Yo  pongo.  ponga. 

V.  pone.  ponga, 

él  pone.  ponga, 

nosotros  ponemos.  pongamos. 

V.  V.  ponen.  pongan, 

ellos  ponen.  pongan. 

For  full  conjugation  see  Part  X. 

2 Dicho,  said,  is  the  irregular  past  participle  of  decir,  to  say,  to 
tell.  The  present  tense  is  conjugated: 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


The  Spanish  Language, 


183 


5.  Sabe  V.,  por  supuesto,  que  tenemos  cuatro  esta- 
ciones, a saber:  la  primavera,  el  verano,  el  otoño 
y el  invierno,  pero  supongo^  que  sus  nombres  en 
español  le  son  a V.  nuevos,  (és-tá-the^ó'-nés  va- 
rá'-nO  O-ton'-yó  én-ve^érr'-nO  sóo-pon'-gO). 


6.  Lo  son.  Déjeme  V.  repetirlos  con  V.:  la  prima- 
vera, el  verano,  el  otoño  y el  invierno,  (da'-^ha- 


7.  Bien  dicho.2  Su  pronunciación  es  excelente. 


8.  Me  lisonjea  V.,  señor  profesor.  Vds.  los  españoles 
son  muy  ñnos  y muy  amantes  de  cumplimientos. 
(Ié-s0n-‘há'-á  fe'-nos). 


mt) 


Present. 


\ 


Indicative. 


Subjunctive, 


Yo  digo. 

V.  dice, 
él  dice. 

nosotros  decimos. 
V.  V.  dicen, 
ellos  dicen. 


diga. 

diga. 

diga. 


digan. 

digan. 


digamos. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  0 note;  00  room. 


The  Rosenthal  Method, 


184 

9.  Not  complimentary,  but  polite.  The  Spanish  na- 
tional character  is  so  little  understood  in  this  coun- 
try that  people  generally  assert  that  Spaniards 
possess  the  same  sort  of  politeness  as  the  French. 
But  that  is  a great  mistake!  Spanish  politeness 
is  inborn  and  universal  and  is  found  among  the 
poorest  as  well  as  the  richest.  (Literally:  Not 

flattering  (lisonjeros),  but  polite.  (It)  is  known 
(se  conoce)  so  little  in  this  country  (pais)  the  charac- 
ter (el  carácter)  Spanish  that  always  (it)  is  said 
(se  dice)  that  the  courtesy  of  the  Spaniards  is  like 
that  of  the  French.  Nothing  of  that.  The  cour- 
tesy (la  cortesía)  of  the  Spaniards  is  inborn  and  gen- 
eral, as  (pues)  it  is  found  (se  encuentra)  the  same 
among  the  class  poor  as  among  the  most  high). 

10.  I wish  I could  say  the  same  thing  about  my  coun- 
trymen. I am  afraid  our  manners  must  appear 
rather  rude  to  you.  (Literally:  Would  (ojalá) 

one  could  (se  puediese^)  say  the  same  thing  (otro^ 
tanto)  of  my  countrymen  (paisanos).  I fear  (temo) 
that  our  manners  (nuestros  modales)  must  appear 
(parécerles)  to  you  somewhat  rude  (algo  bruscos). 


1 There  are  three  words  in  Spanish  for  hut,  viz. : Pero,  mas  and 
sino.  Pero  and  mas  are  placed  at  the  beginning  of  adversative 
sentences,  as: 

Quisiera  salir,  pero  no  puedo.  I should  like  to  go  out,  hut  I can 
not.  Sino  can  be  employed  only  when  preceded  by  a negative 
clause  (no  verb  being  expressed  after  hut),  as: 

No  es  bianco,  sino  pardo^  It  is  not  white,  hut  gray. 

No  tengo  hambre,  sino  sed,  I am  not  hungry,  hut  thirsty. 

2 The  subjunctive  mood  must  be  used  here,  as  a desire  is  ex- 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


The  Spanish  Language,  185 

9.  No  lisonjeros,  sino^  politicos.  Se  conoce  tan  poco 
en  este  país  el  carácter  español  que  siempre  se 
dice  que  la  cortesía  de  los  españoles  es  como  la  de 
los  franceses.  Nada  de  eso.  La  cortesía  de  los 
españoles  es  innata  y general,  pues  se  encuentra  lo 
mismo  entre  la  clase  pobre  que  entre  la  más  alta. 
(lé-s5n-‘ha'-ros  pá^^es'  ká-rák-térr'). 

10.  Ojalá  se  pudiese^  decir  otro^  tanto  de  mis  paisanos. 
Temo  que  nuestros  modales  deben  parécerles  a 
Vds.  algo  bruscos,  (pób-de'^a'-sj^  pá'^e-sá'-n5s 
tá'-mO  bróbs'-kos). 


I 


pressed.  Pudiese  is  the  second  form  of  the  subjunctive  of  the 
imperfect  of  the  irregular  verb  poder,  to  be  able.  It  is  conjugated: 


Yo  pudiese, 

V.  pudiese, 
él  pudiese, 

nosotros  pudiésemos, 

V.  V.  pudiesen, 
ellos  pudiesen, 

3 Otro,  otra,  another ^ other 


I might  he  able, 
you  might  he  able, 
he  might  he  able, 
we  might  he  able, 
you  might  he  able, 
they  might  he  able, 

(plural  others)  j is  used  of  persons 


and  things  and  may  be  employed  as  a substantive  or  an  adjective. 
The  indefinite  article  cannot  be  used  with  it,  as  in  English.  The 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


i86 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


II.  Well,  frankly  speaking,  I think  that  Americans  in 
this  respect  might  learn  something  from  us,  while 
we  on  the  other  hand,  might  learn  many  things 
from  you  which  are  much  more  important  than 
politeness.  But  let  us  retiuii  to  our  subject. 
(Literally:  Speaking  (hablando^  with  frankness 

(franqueza)  (I)  believe  (creo)  that  in  general  the 
* people  (el  pueblo)  American  could  (podría)  learn 
a little  from  us  in  this  particular  (este  particular), 
but  also  could  we  learn  from  you  many  things 
still  more  useful  (utiles)  than  the  politeness.  But 
returning  (volviendo)  to  our  conversation). 


definite  article  must  be  employed  whenever  a distinct  person  or 
thing  is  to  be  specified. 

Déme  V.  otro  libro,  Give  me  another  hook.  ^ 


The  following  expressions  with 
Otro  tanto, 

Yo  haría  otro  tanto, 
una  vez  y otra, 
una  y otra  vez, 
el  otro  día, 
al  otro  día, 
otro  día, 

1 Hablando  is  the  Gerund  of  h 
The  Gerund  ends  in 


otro  are  peculiar: 

The  same  thing. 

I would  do  the  same  thing, 
every  other  time, 
repeatedly, 
the  other  day. 
the  next  day. 
another  day. 
iblar,  to  speak. 


I.  2.  3. 

■ ando.  iendo.  iendo. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  0 note;  00  room. 


The  Spanish  Language. 


187 


II.  Hablando^  con  franqueza  creo  que  en  general  el 
pueblo  americano  podría  aprender  un  poco  de  noso- 
tros en  este  particular,  pero  también  podríamos 
nosotros  aprender  de  Vds.  muchas  cosas,  aun  más 
útiles  que  la  urbanidad.  Pero  volviendo  a nuestra 
conversación,  (frán-ka'-thá  ‘há-ná-rál'  pár-té-kóo- 
lárr'  oó'-té-lés  vol-vé'^én'-do). 


We  have,  therefore,  for  our  paradigms:  hablando,  speaking; 
vendiendo,  selling;  viviendo,  living. 

The  Gerund  is  used  in  connection  with  estar,  to  be,  similar  to 
the  progressive  conjugation  in  English,  and  expresses  the  action 
of  the  verb  as  continuing  or  unfinished: 


Estoy  leyendo,  I am  reading. 

estaba  escribiendo,  he  was  writing, 

está  lloviendo,  it  is  raining. 

¿ qué  está  V.  haciendo?  what  are  you  doing? 

The  Gerund  is  frequently  used,  as  in  phrase  ii,  for  the  sake  of 
euphony  or  brevity,  where  we  employ  while,  whilst,  as,  since,  if, 
although,  etc.,  as: 


Deseando  ver  a V.  he  venido 
a Madrid. 

Viendo  que  su  socio  no  venía, 
se  fué. 

For  further  rules  see  Part  X. 


As  I wished  to  see  you  I came  to 
Madrid. 

When  he  saw  that  his  partner  did 
not  come,  he  went  away. 


á far;  a pale;  6 eve;  é there;  0 note;  00  room. 


i88 


The  Rosenthal  Method, 


12.  Now  I have  quite  forgotten  what  we  were  talking 

about.  (Literally:  (I)  have  forgotten  (olvidado) 

what  we  were  speaking  (hablábamos^). 

13.  We  were  talking  about  the  seasons  and  I had  just 

mentioned  their  names  to  you.  Do'  you  remember 
them?  (Literally:  (We)  were  speaking  of  the 

seasons  of  the  year  and  finished  (acababa)  I of  to 
cite  you  to  you  their  names  (sus  nombres).  Re- 
member you  (se  acuerda  V.)  of  them)? 

14.  Oh,  perfectly:  spring,  summer,  autumn  and  winter. 

15.  Very  good!  How  is  the  weather  to-day?  (Liter- 
ally: Very  well.  What  weather  makes  to-day)? 


16.  Pardon  me  for  interrupting  you;  but  why  do  you 
say  “makes”?  (Literally:  Pardon  that  it  (I)  in- 
terrupt (interrumpa^) ; but  why  say  you  “makes”)? 


1 The  Imperfect  adds  the  following  endings  to  the  stem: 


I. 

aba. 

aba. 

aba. 

ábamos. 

aban. 

aban. 


2. 

ía. 

ía. 

ía. 

íamos.' 

ían. 

ían. 


3* 

ía. 

— — ía. 

ía. 

íamos. 

ían. 

ían. 


It  will  be  seen  that  verbs  of  the  second  and  third  conjugations 
add  the  same  endings.  For  our  three  paradigms,  hablar^  vender 
and  vivir y we  have  therefore  the  following  conjugation  in 
The  Imperfect. 


I. 

2. 

3. 

Yo  hablaba. 

vendía. 

vivía. 

V.  hablaba. 

vendía. 

vivía. 

él  hablaba. 

vendía. 

vivía. 

nosotros  hablábamos. 

vendíamos. 

vivíamos. 

V.  V.  hablaban. 

vendían. 

vivían. 

ellos  hablaban. 

vendían. 

vivían. 

á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


The  Spanish  Language.  189 

12.  He  olvidado  lo  que  hablábamos.^  (ól-ve-dá'-dó 
á-blá'-bá-mós). 

13.  Hablábamos  de  las  estaciones  del  año  y acababa 
yo  de  citarle  a V.  sus  nombres.  ¿ Se  acuerda  V. 
de  ellos?  (á-ká-vá'-vá). 

14.  Perfectamente:  la  primavera,  el  verano,  el  otoño, 
y el  invierno. 

15.  Pues  bien.  ¿Qué  tiempo  hace  hoy? 

16.  Dispense  que  lo  interrumpa pero  por  qué  dice  V. 
‘‘hace’’? 


This  in  English  is:  ^T  was  speaking/’  “you  were  speaking,”  “he 
was  speaking,”  etc. 

This  tense  ought  to  be  called  the  descriptive  tense  in  Spanish. 
It  is  used  to  describe  the  qualities  of  persons  or  things  and  the 
state,  disposition  or  place  in  which  they  were,  as: 

Las  muchachas  estaban  vestidas  The  girls  were  dressed  in 
de  bianco,  y tenían  flores  en  white  and  had  flowers  in 

los  cabellos.  their  hair. 

For  full  rules  in  regard  to  the  use  of  the  Imperfect  see  Part  X. 

2 The  Subjunctive  is  employed  after  verbs  expressing  entreaty, 
permission,  command,  etc.,  as  in  phrase  16. 

Permítame  V.  que  le  haga  una  Allow  me  to  ask  you  a ques^ 
pregunta.  tion. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  ó note;  00  room. 


IQO 


The  Rosenthal  Method, 


Exercise. 

Translate  this  exercise  into  Spanish  and  send  it  to 
our  Correspondence  Department  for  correction. 

In  a Café. 

{Continuation). 

But  up  to  this  time  we  have  neglected  to  do  the  prin- 
cipal thing,  and  that  is  to  take  coffee.^* — ^Just  so.^  Let 
us  take  a seat  near  the  window  so  that  we  may  have 
some  fresh  air. — There  is  a little  round  table  with  two 
chairs.^ — ^Waiter,  bring  us  two  cups  of  the  best  Mocha 
coffee.^ — Don’t  you  want  to  smoke,  gentlemen?® — Yes, 
bring  us  two  Havana  cigars.® — Here  they  are,  gentle- 
men; the  match-box  is  right  at  your  side."^ — Now  bring 
us  the  evening  papers. — Here,  gentlemen.  Anything 
else,  gentlemen.® — Nothing  else  at  present. — Here,  pay 
the  cashier  and  keep  the  change.^ — ^Very  much  obliged 
to  you.^® 


1 But  until  (hasta)  now  not  (we)  have  done  (hecho)  the  prin- 
cipal (lo  principal)  which  is  to  take  (tomar)  coffee  (café). — ^ Have 
you  right.  Let  us  go  (vamos)  to  seat  ourselves  (a  sentarnos)  near 
to  (junto  a)  the  window,  in  order  to  be  in  the  fresh  (al  fresco). — 
3 There  is  a little  table  (una  mesita)  round  (redonda)  with  two  chairs 
at  the  (al)  side. — ^ Mozo,  bring  us  two  cups  (tazas)  of  the  best 
coffee  of  Moka. — ^ To  smoke,  fumar. — ® Cigarros  habanos. — 
' ^ At  the  side  of  you  is  the  match-box,  la  fosforera. — * In  what  more 
can  I serve  you  ? — ^ And  take  (tome)  the  change  (el  vuelto)  for 
you. — Many  thanks. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  ó note;  oo  room. 


The  Spanish  Language. 

Exercise. 


191 


Translate  this  exercise  into  Spanish  and  send  it  to 
our  Correspondence  Department  for  correction. 

A Bank.^ 

Is  this  the  Commercial  Bank? — ^Yes,  sir;  what  can  I 
do  for  you?2 — My  . name  is  Charles  T.  Brown.^ — I think 
you  must  have  received  a letter  of  instruction  from 
Chicago  to  pay  me  a draft.^ — Yes,  sir;  we  received  the 
letter  yesterday. — Here  is  the  draft.^ — Please  receipt 
for  it  on  the  back.® — I wish  to  endorse  it  to  a house  in 
Chili.^ — ^All  right,  sir;  we  can  send  it  out  for  you,  if 
you  wish.  We  have  an  agency  at  Santiago.* — But  I 
have  to  forward  this  money  to  Valparaiso.  I suppose 
that  is  all  the  same.^ — 'We  have  an  agency  also  at  Val- 
paraiso.— ^What  is  your  charge?^® — It  will  cost  you 
twelve  dollars. — That  is  very  dear.  I have  another 
bill  of  exchange  here.-^^ — Can  you  cash  it  now  for  me?^^ 
— Certainly,  sir;  do  you  want  bank-notes,  gold  or  silver?^* 


^ Un  banco. — ^ Jn  what  can  I serve  you? — ® Mi  nombre  es  Carlos. — 
^ I believe  that  you  will  have  received  a letter  of  advice  (aviso) 
from  Chicago  in  order  to  pay  me  a draft  (una  libranza). — ^ La 
letra. — ® Put  you  the  receipt  on  the  back  (al  respaldo). — Endo- 
sarla.— ® Is  very  well;  if  you  wish  can  (you)  send  her  through 
agency  our  (por  conducto  nuestro).  Una  agencia. — ^ (It)  is  for 
Valparaíso  that  (I)  need  send  this  money,  but  (I)  suppose  (supongo) 
that  (it)  may  be  the  same. — How  much  me  ask  you  (pide  V.) 
for  the  operation  (por  la  operación)  ? — I have  besides  (además) 
that  to  receive  the  value  (el  valor)  of  this  other  draft. — 
you  give  me  it  now? — Billetes  de  banco,  oro  o plata. 


á far;  a pale;  6 eve;  é there;  ó note;  6b  room. 


192 


The  Rosenthal  Method, 


VOCABULARIO.  VOCABULARY. 

{Continued), 


El  despacho. 

El  cajero  (ká-^ha'-ró). 

El  despacho  del  cajero. 

Pagar  (pá-gárr'). 

¿ Cuánto  importa  eso? 

El  dinero  (dé-ná'-ro). 

El  cambio  (kám'-be^o). 

No  tengo  cambio. 

I Tiene  V.  cambio? 

No  me  dio  V.  todo  el  cam- 
bio (dé-ó'). 

Cambiar  (kám-bé^árr'). 

¿ Puede  V.  cambiar  un  bi- 
llete de  cien  pesos? 

El  billete. 

El  papel  moneda. 

¿ Quiere  V.  oro  o billetes? 

Vender  (vén-dérr). 

El  vendedor  (vén-dá-dorr'). 

¿ A qué  precio  vende  V. 
esto? 

¿ Cuánto  pide  V.  por  esto 
(pe'-d^)? 

¿ Cuánto  cobra  V.  por 
esto? 

Es  demasiado  caro.  No 
lo  quiero  a ese  precio 
(dá-má-sé'^á'-dó) . 


The  office. 

The  cashier. 

The  cashier’s  desk. 

To  pay. 

How  much  does  that 
amount  (come)  to? 

The  money. 

The  change. 

I have  no  change  with  me. 

Have  you  any  change  with 
you? 

You  did  not  give  me  the 
correct  change. 

To  change,  to  exchange. 

Can  you  change  a hundred 
dollar  bill  for  me? 

The  bill. 

The  paper-money. 

Do  you  want  gold  or  paper? 

To  sell. 

The  salesman. 

At  what  price  do  you  sell 
this  ? 

How  much  do  you  charge 
for  this? 

How  much  do  you  ask  for 
this? 

That  is  too  dear;  I don’t 
want  to  take  it  at  that 
price. 


The  Spanish  Language, 


193 


VOCABULARIO. 

La  calidad  (ká-lé-dád'). 

No  me  gusta  esta  calidad 
(góós'-tá). 

I Qué  tal  le  gusta  a V.  ésta? 

Me  gusta  más. 

El  paño  (pán'-yó). 

La  seda  (sa'-dá). 

La  lana  (lá'-ná). 

El  algodón  (ál-gó-dón'). 

El  vestido  (vés-té'-do). 

Los  vestidos  (vés-té'-dós). 

Un  vestido  de  seda. 

Un  vestido  de  lana. 

Un  vestido  de  algodón. 

Usar;  durar  (óo'-sárr  dóó- 
rárr'). 

Estos  géneros  duran  mu- 
cho (^ha'-na-rOs). 

Dura  mucho  este  género. 

Los  negocios  (na-gó'-thé^ 
os). 

La  tienda  (te"^én'-dá). 

La  mercería  (mérr-tha- 
ré'-á) . 

La  tienda  de  ropas. 

El  sombrero. 

El  sombrerero. 

La  modista  (mó-dés'-tá). 

El  taller  de  la  modista 
(tál-yérr'). 


VOCABULARY. 

The  quality. 

I don't  like  this  quality 
(=not  me  pleases  this 
quality). 

How  do  you  like  this  one? 

I like  it  better. 

The  cloth. 

The  silk. 

The  wool. 

Cotton. 

The  dress. 

The  dresses. 

A silk  dress. 

A woolen  dress. 

A cotton  dress. 

To  wear. 


These  goods  wear  very  well. 
The  business. 

The  store.  The  shop. 

The  dry  goods  store:  mer- 
cery. 

The  hat. 

The  hatter. 

The  milliner. 

The  millinery  shop. 


194 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


VOCABULARIO.  VOCABULARY. 


La  librería  (lé-bra-ré'-á). 

El  librero  (lé-brá'-ró). 

El  papel;  los  papeles  (pa- 
pel'). 

La  papelería  (pá-pá-la-ré'- 
á). 

El  zapato  (thá-pá'-to). 

El  zapatero  (thá-pá-ta'-ró). 

La  zapatería  (thá-pá-ta-ré'- 
á). 

El  reloj  (ra'-lo). 

El  relojero  (rá-ló-^há'-ro). 

El  comerciante  (kó-mérr- 
thé^án'-t;J^). 

El  pan. 

El  panadero  (pá-ná-dá-ró). 

La  panadería  (pá-ná-dá- 
ré'-á). 

El  bollo  (ból'-yó). 

El  pastel. 

El  carnicero  (kár-né-thá'- 
ró). 

La  carne. 

La  carnicería-  (kár-né-tha- 
ré'-á). 

El  metro  (má'-tró). 

El  kilo  (ké-ló). 

Una  libra  (lé'-brá). 


The  bookstore. 

The  bookseller. 

The  paper;  the  papers. 

The  stationery  store. 

I 

The  shoe. 

The  shoemaker. 

The  shoestore. 

The  watch. 

The  watchmaker. 

The  merchant. 

The  bread. 

The  baker. 

The  bakery. 

The  roll. 

The  cake. 

The  butcher. 

The  meat. 

The  butcher-shop. 

The  metre. 

The  kilo. 

A pound. 


i 


1 


LIBRARY 
■ THE 


UNIVERSiYY  OF  ILLINOIS 

ROSENTHAL’S 

COMMON-SENSE  METHOD 


OF 

PRAaiCAL  LINGUISTRY 


THE 

Spanish  Language 


BV 

DR.  RICHARD  S.  ROSENTHAL 

Author  of  the  Meisterschaft  System,  etc.,  etc. 

Haulenbeek  Corrected  Editiok 
Revised  1917 

IN  TEN  PARTS 


NEW  YORK  LONDON 
The  Int«national  College  of  Languages 


COPYRIGHT,  1905, 

BY 

THE  INTERNATIONAL  COLLEGE  OF  LANGUAGES 
Entered  at 

Stationers’  Hall,  London,  £ng. 


The  Spanish  Language, 


Mil 

rV-b 


m 


CONTENTS. 


Peculiarities  of  Hacer 196 

South  American  Trade 206 

The  Weather 210 

Peculiarities  of  Tener 21Ó 

Vocabulary 222 


196 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


Hacer  and  Tener. 

17.  Because  ^'hacer’’  is  used  in  reference  to  the  weather. 

(Literally:  Because  for  (para)  to  speak  of  the 

weather  is  used  (se  usa)  the  verb  hacer). 

18.  How  very  peculiar!  And  yet  it  ought  not  to  ap- 

pear so  strange  to  me,  for  the  French  language 
uses  the  same  construction.  (Literally:  How 

strange  (raro).  But  not  me  ought  to  surprise 
(estrañar)  that  as  in  French  is  used  the  same  verb). 

19.  Precisely  so.  Now  in  order  that  you  may  become 

familiar  with  this  verb,  we  will  form  a number  of 
sentences  with  it.  (Literally:  Have  you  right 

(razon^),  and  in  order  to  (para)  accustom  us  to  the 
use  of  this  verb,  let  us  form  (formemos^)  a number 
of  phrases  (unas  cuantas  frases)  with  it). 

20.  May  I ask  you  a question,  professor?  (Literally: 
Me  permit  you  to  make  to  you  a question  (una 
pregunta),  mister  professor)? 

21.  As  many  as  you  like.  (Literally:  Those  (las) 

which  you  may  please  (guste^). 

22.  From  which  language  is  ^^hacer’’  derived?  Is  it 
Arabic?  It  surely  does  not  come  from  the  Latin. 
(Literally:  Of  what  language  is  derived  (se  deriva) 
the  verb  hacer?  Is  (it)  Arabic  (árabe)?  Surely 
(de  seguro)  that  not  (it)  is  from  the  Latin  (latín). 


1 An  idiomatic  expression.  Other  examples  and  complete  rules 
are  to  be  found  in  the  next  lesson. 

2 The  imperative  mood  has,  as  a matter  of  fact,  only  two  forms 
of  its  own,  viz.:  the  second  person  singular  and  plural;  all  the 
others  are  taken  from  the  subjunctive  mood. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  0 note;  ob  room. 


The  Spanish  Language, 

Hacer  y Tener. 


197 


17.  Porque  para  hablar  del  tiempo  se  usa  el  verbo 
‘^hacer/^ 

18.  ¡Qué  raro!  Pero  no  me  debe  estrañar  eso  pues 
en  francés  se  usa  el  mismo  verbo. 


19.  Tiene  V.  razón^  y para  acostumbramos  al  uso  de 
este  verbo  formemos^  unas  cuantas  frases  con  él. 
(rá-thon'  for-má'-mós). 

20.  ¿ Me  deja  V.  hacerle  una  pregunta,  señor  profesor? 

21.  Las  que  V.  guste.^  (góós'-tj^.) 

22.  ¿ De  qué  idioma  se  deriva  el  verbo  ^^hacer’’?  ¿ Es 
árabe?  De  seguro  que  no  es  del  latín,  (da-re'-vá 
á'-rá-vj^  lá-tén'). 


3 The  Subjunctive  is  used  in  relative  sentences  when  the  relative 
refers  to  persons,  objects  or  ideas  which  are  mentioned  in  an  in- 
definite or  uncertain  sense,  as: 

Hay  pocos  que  lo  hagan.  There  are  hut  few  who  do  it. 

Venga  lo  que  viniera.  Come  what  wüll 


á far;  a pale;  6 eve;  é there;  0 note;  00  room. 


198  The  Rosenthal  Method. 

23.  And  why  not  pray?  Just  substitute  an  / for  the 
h and  then  tell  me  what  else  this  word  is  but  Latin. 
(Literally:  And  why  not?  Take  you  off  (quítele 
V.)  the  h (la  h)  and  put  you  to  it  (póngale)  in  its 
place  (su  lugar)  an  / (una  /)  and  tell  me  (dígame) 
then  (después)  what  (it)  can  be  except  (sino)  (it) 
is  Latin). 

24.  Ah  now  I see  its  Latin  origin  but  I will  not  inter- 
rupt you  any  more  as  I am  anxious  to  form  some 
phrases  about  the  weather  so  that  I may  learn  to 
use  that  verb  correctly.  (Literally:  Already  (I) 
see  its  origin  (origen)  Latin,  but  not  (I)  will  inter- 
rupt you  (internimpirle)  more,  as  (I)  wish  to  form 
phrases  about  (a  cerca)  the  weather  in  order  to 
(para)  learn  to  (a)  use  that  verb  correctly). 

Hacer  and  Tener  {Continued). 

I.  Ah,  good  morning,  my  dear  sir.  Delighted  to  see 
you!  How  have  you  been  since  I had  the  pleasure 
of  seeing  you?  The  last  time  you  were  here  you 
were  suffering  from  a headache.  I trust  you  feel 
better  to-day.  (Literally:  Good  days,  friend  mine. 
How  much  myself  (I)  rejoice  to  see  you!  How  so 
goes  since  that  I had  (tuve)  the  pleasure  of  to  see 
you  to  you.  The  last  time  that  you  I saw  (vi)  had 
you  pain  of  the  head  (dolor  de  cabeza).  (I)  hope 
that  yourself  find  you  (se  halle  V.)  better  to-day). 

^ Irregular  imperative  of  poner.  2 Irregular  imperative  of  decir. 

3 Another  mode  of  expression,  similar  to  the  German:  “Wie 

geht  es  Ihnen?”  Thus: 

I Qué  tal  {or  cómo)  le  va  a V.?  How  do  you  do? 

¿ Cómo  le  va  a V.  en  los  negocios  ? How  are  you  getting  on  in 

business? 

I Cómo  va  de  salud?  How  is  your  health? 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


The  Spanish  Language. 


199 


23.  ¿Y  por  qué  no?  Quítele  V.  la  A y póngale^  en  su 
lugar  una  / y dígame^  después  lo  que  puede  ser 
sino  es  latín,  (ké-tá'-l^^  á'-tchey  pón'-gá-l^  loó- 
gárr'  á'-fey  de'-gá-mjr). 

24.  Ya  veo  su  origen  latino  pero  no  quiero  interrum- 
pirle más,  pues  deseo  formar  frases  a cerca  del  tiem- 
po para  aprender  a usar  ese  verbo  correctamente, 
(o-ré-^hén'). 


Hacer  y Tener. 

{Continued). 

I.  Buenos  días,  amigo  mío.  ¡Cuánto  me  alegro  de 
verle!  ¿Qué  tal  va^  desde  que  tuve  el  gusto  de 
verle  a V.?  La  última  vez  que  le  ví^  tenía  V. 
dolor  de  cabeza.  Espero  que  se  halle^  V.  mejor 
hoy.  (tóó'-v^  vé  ál'-yé). 


^ Vi  is  the  Definite  tense  of  the  irregular  verb  ver,  to  see.  It  is 
conjugated: 


Yo  VÍ, 

I saw. 

V.  vió, 

you  saw. 

él  vió, 

he  saw. 

nosotros  vimos, 

we  saw. 

V.  V.  vieron, 

you  saw. 

ellos  vieron. 

they  saw. 

®The  subjunctive  must  be  used  here  because  possibility  's  im- 
plied. 

á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


200 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


I had. 
you  had. 
he  had. 
we  had. 
you  had. 
they  had. 

2.  Thanks,  I am  a great  deal  better;  in  fact,  I am 
quite  well  and  ready  to  go  on  with  our  lesson. 
(Literally:  Thanks,  already  (I)  am  better,  better 
said  well  and  ready  (dispuesto)  to  (a)  continue 
(continuar)  our  lesson). 

3.  I am  very  glad  of  that,  but  please  take  off  your 

overcoat  and  sit  down.  (Literally:  Myself  (I) 

rejoice  much,  but  take  off  (quítese)  the  overcoat 
(el  sobretodo)  and  seat  yourself  (siéntese^). 

4.  Where  shall  I sit,  Professor?  (Literally:  In^  where 
myself  sit  (I),  Mr.  Professor)? 

5.  On  this  chair  please.  And  now  let  us  commence. 
What  were  we  talking  of  the  last  time?  (Liter- 
ally: Seat  yourself  in  this  chair  (esta  silla)  and 
now  let  us  commence  (empezemos) . Of  what 
talked  (we)  the  last  time)  ? 

^ Sentarse,  to  he  seated,  belongs  to  that  numerous  class  of  verbs 
which  are  reflexive  in  Spanish.  In  English  these  are  for  the  most 
part  passive  verbs,  as:  equivocarse,  to  he  mistaken;  engañarse, 
to  he  deceived;  disgustarse,  to  he  displeased,  etc.  Verbs  compounded 
in  English  with  to  get  or  to  become  are  also  used  reflexively  in  Span- 
ish, as:  enfermarse,  to  get  ill  {to  fall  ill);  enriquecerse,  to  become 
rich,  etc. 

Sentar  (and  of  course,  sentarse)  changes  the  stem-vowel  into 
ie  throughout  the  singular  and  the  third  person  plural  of  the  pres- 
ent indicative  and  subjunctive,  and  in  the  same  persons  in  the 
imperative.  Present. 

Indicative.  Yo  me  siento.  Subjunctive,  me  siente. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  ó note;  6b  room. 


The  Spanish  Language. 


201 


Yo  tuve 
V.  tuvo 
él  tuvo 

nosotros  tuvinios 
V.  V.  tuvieron 
ellos  tuvieron. 

2.  Gracias,  ya  estoy  mejor,  mejor  dicho,  bueno  y 
dispuesto  a continuar  nuestra  lección,  (des-póó^ 
és'-tó  kón-té-noó-árr'). 


(too'-v^). 

(tóó'-vó). 

(tóo-vé'-mos). 

(tóo-vé"^á'-rón). 


3.  Me  alegro  mucho,  pero  quítese  el  sobretodo  y 
siéntese.^  (ké'-ta-se  só-bra-to'-do  se^^én'-tá-sé). 


4.  ¿ En  dónde^  me  siento,  señor  profesor? 


5.  Siéntese  en  esta  silla,  y ahora  empezemos.  ¿ De 
qué  hablamos  la  última  vez?  (sel'-yá). 


V.  se  sienta, 
él  se  sienta, 
nosotros  nos  sentamos. 
V.  V.  se  sientan, 
ellos  se  sientan. 


se  siente, 
se  siente, 
nos  sentemos, 
se  sienten, 
se  sienten. 


2 En,  in,  when  placed  before  donde,  where^  means  within^  inside 
of.  When  motion  is  expressed  or  implied  where  should  be  expressed 
by  a donde,  where^  whereto^  whither,  and  de  donde,  wherefrom, 
whence,  as: 


I A dónde  va  V.  ? Where  are  you  going? 

I De  dónde  viene  V.  ? Where  do  you  come  from? 


á far;  a pale;  6 eve;  é there;  0 note;  00  room. 


202 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


6.  You  had  explained  the  use  of  ^^hacer/’  in  reference 
to  the  weather.  (Literally:  Me  had  you  (habia 
V.)  explained  (explicado)  the  use  of  the  verb  ‘ ‘hacer’ ^ 
with  reference  to  the  weather). 

7.  Ah!  yes,  I remember.  And  have  you  learned  the 
conjugation  of  “hacer”  by  heart?  (Literally:  Ah 
yes,  already  myself  (I)  remember.  And  have 
learned  you  by  (de)  memory  (memoria)  the  con- 
jugation (la  conjugación)  of  the  verb  “hacer”)? 

8.  Yes,  sir.  Hacer  is  very  irregular,  but  I think  I 
know  the  whole  conjugation.  (Literally:  Yes,  sir. 
“Hacer”  is  very  irregular,  but  (I)  believe  that  (I) 
know  all  the  conjugation). 

9.  Well,  let  us  see  (veamos)  1 Conjugate  the  indica- 
tive present. 

I make.  we  make, 

you  make.  you  make, 

he  makes.  they  make. 

10.  Very  well.  And  now  the  present  of  the  subjunc- 
tive. 

I may  make, 
you  may  make, 
he  may  make, 
we  may  make, 
you  may  make, 
they  may  make. 

1 The  pupil  should  study  the  whole  conjugation  of  haber  in 
Part  X. 

Modo  Indicativo  del  Verbo  “Haber.” 

{To  have). 

Yo.  Usted.  El.  Nosotros.  Ustedes.  Ellos. 

Presente:  he.  ha.  ha.  hemos.  han.  han. 

Imperfecto:  había,  había,  había,  habíamos,  habían,  habían. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


203 


The  Spanish  Language.'-' 


6.  Me  habia^  V.  explicado  el  uso  del  verbo  ^^hacer’’ 
con  referencia  al  tiempo. 

7.  Ah!  si,  ya  me  acuerdo.  ¿ Y ha  aprendido  V.  de 
memoria  la  conjugación  del  verbo  ^^hacer’’?  (ma- 
mo'-ré  kón-^hóo-gá-the  "^ón') . 

8.  Sí  señor.  Hacer  es  muy  irregular,  pero  creo  que 
sé  toda  la  conjugación,  (ér-ra-góó-lárr'). 


9.  ¡Veamos!  Conjugue  V. 
(kon-‘hóó'-gá). 

Yo  hago 
V.  hace 
él  hace, 
nos.^  hacemos 
V.  V.  hacen 
ellos  hacen. 


. el  indicativo  presente. 

(á'-gó), 

(á'-th;^). 

(á-tha'-mós). 

(á'-thén). 


10.  Bien,  muy  bien. 
Yo  haga 
V.  haga, 
él  haga, 
nos.  hagamos 
V.  V.  hagan 
ellos  hagan. 


el  subjtmctivo  presente, 
(á'-gá). 


(á-gá'-mós). 

(á'-gán). 


Definido:  hube.  hubo.  hubo,  hubimos,  hubieron,  hubieron. 

Futuro:  habré,  habrá,  habrá,  habremos  habrán,  habrán. 

Condicional:  habría,  habría,  habría,  habríamos,  habrían,  habrían. 
Gerundio : habiendo. 

Participio : habido. 

2 In  future  we  shall  abbreviate  nosotros  into  nos. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


204 


The  Rosenthal  Method, 


11.  Excellent!  And  now  the  pa^. 

I made, 
you  made, 
he  made, 
we  made, 
you  made, 
they  made. 

12.  Very  well.  And  now  the  future. 

I shall  make, 
you  will  make, 
he  will  make, 
we  shall  make, 
you  will  make, 
they  will  make. 

13.  Excellent!  And  the  conditional. 

I should  make, 
you  would  make.  - 
he  would  make, 
we  should  make, 
you  would  make, 
they  would  make. 

14.  You  are  indeed  a diligent  student  (el  gran  estu- 
diante) ! Conjugate  now  the  first  form  of  the 
imperfect  of  the  subjunctive. 

I might  make, 
you  might  make, 
he  might  make, 
we  might  make, 
you  might  make, 
they  might  make. 

^ There  is  no  material  difference  between  the  first  and  second 
forms  of  the  imperfect  of  the  subjunctive. 

In  either  form  it  is  employed  after  verbs  in  any  past  tense  in 
the  indicative,  and  after  the  Conditional,  as: 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  0 note;  00  room. 


The  Spanish  Language. 


205 


II.  ¡Bravo!  Y ahora  el  definido,  (dá-fé-né'-dó). 


Yo  hice 

(e'-th^). 

V.  hizo 
él  hizo. 

(é'-thO). 

nos.  hicimos 
V.  V.  hicieron 
ellos  hicieron. 

(é-the'-mos). 
(é-the^  á'-rOn). 

12.  Bien,  muy  bien.  Y ahora  el  futuro,  (foo-too'-ro). 


Yo  haré 

(á-ra'). 

V.  hará 
él  hará. 

(á-rá'). 

nos.  haremos 
V.  V.  harán 
ellos  harán. 

(á-ra'-mós). 

(á-rán'). 

13.  ¡Bravo!  Y el  condicional,  (kón-dé-the^o-nál')* 


Yo  haría 

(á-re'-á). 

V.  haría, 
él  haría, 
nos.  haríamos 
V.  V.  harían 

(á-ré'-á-mós). 

(á-ré'-án). 

ellos  harían  (á-ré'-án). 

14.  ¡Es  Ve  el  gran  estudiante!  Conjugue  V.  el  sub- 
juntivo imperfecto,,  la  primera  forma.^ 

Yo  hiciera  (e-the  ^ á'-rá) . 


V.  hiciera, 
él  hiciera, 
nos.  hiciéramos 
V.  V.  hicieran 
ellos  hicieran. 

(é-the^a'-rá-mós) . 
(é-thé"^  á'-rán). 

Desearía  que  V.  me  hiciera  {pr  I wish  you  would  do  me  that 
hiciese)  ese  favor,  favor. 

Le  mandaron  que  fuese  (or  fuera)  They  ordered  him  to  go  to 
a Veracruz.  Veracruz. 


á far;  a pale;  6 eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


2o6 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


15.  Capital!  And  the  second  form! 

I might  make.  we  might  make, 

you  might  make.  you  might  make, 

he  might  make.  they  might  make. 

16.  Bravo!  I have  no  doubt  that  you  will  soon  mas- 
ter the  intricacies  of  the  Spanish  language.  (Lit- 
erally: Bravo!  Not  have  (I)  doubt  (duda)  that 
very  soon  will  conquer  you  (vencerá  V.)  the  diffi- 
culties of  the  language  Spanish). 

17.  You  can’t  imagine  how  anxious  I am  to  master  it. 
No  other  tongue  is  so  important  for  business-men 
as  the  beautiful  language  of  Cervantes.  (Liter- 
ally: Not  can  you  imagine  yourself  the  much  that 
(I)  wish  to  learn  it.  Not  is  there  (hay)  language 
which  may  be  (sea^)  more  important  (importante) 
for  (para)  the  man  of  business  (el  hombre  de  ne- 
gocios) than  the  beautiful  (hermoso)  language  of 
Cervantes). 

18.  You  are  quite  right.  The  natural  outlet  for  Amer- 
ican trade  is  to  the  South,  and  with  the  exception 
of  Brazil,  where  Portuguese  is  spoken,  Spanish  is 
the  language  of  the  whole  American  Continent, 
south  of  California.  (Literally:  Have  you  much 
right.  The  market  natural  (el  mercado  natural) 
of  this  country  (pais)  is  in  the  South  (el  sur),  and 
with  the  exception  (la  excepción)  of  the  (del)  Brazil 
in  where  is  spoken  the  Portuguese  (portugués),  in 
all  the  Continent  (continente)  American  to  the 
south  of  California  is  spoken  the  Spanish). 


1 The  subjunctive  mood  is  employed  after  impersonal  expres- 
sions, unless  they  denote  positive  certainty: 

Es  estraño  que  V.  no  lo  sepa,  It  is  strange  that  you  do  not  know  it. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


The  Spanish  Language. 
15.  Muy  bien.  Y la  segunda  forma. 


207 


Yo  hiciese 
V.  hiciese, 
él  hiciese. 


(é-the^á'-s^). 


nos.  hiciésemos 
V.  V.  hiciesen 


(é-thé  a'-sá-mos) . 
(e-thé"^a'-sén). 


ellos  hiciesen. 

16.  ¡ Bravo!  No  tengo  duda  que  muy  pronto  vencerá 
V.  todas  las  dificultades  del  idioma  español,  (dóó'- 
da  vén-thá-rá'). 

17.  No  puede  V.  imaginarse  lo  mucho  que  quiero 
aprenderlo.  No  hay  idioma  que  sea^  más  importante 
para  el  hombre  de  negocios  que  el  hermoso  idioma 
de  Cervantes,  (ém-porr-tán'-t^  óm'-bry  ná-gó'- 
thé^  os  thérr-ván'-tés). 

18.  Tiene  V.  mucha  razón.  El  mercado  natural  de 
este  país  está  en  el  sur,  y con  la  excepción  del  Brasil 
en  donde  se  habla  el  portugués,  en  todo  el  conti- 
nente americano  al  sur  de  California  se  habla  el 
español,  (mérr-ká'-dó  ná-tóó-rál'  pórr-tóo-gas'  kOn- 
te-nén'-t}^  sóórr). 


Es  lástima  que  no  venga,  It  is  a pity  that  he  does  not  come. 

Es  necesario  que  lo  haga  V.,  You  must  do  it. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


2o8 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


19.  American  statesmen  and  many  business-people  are 

beginning  to  realize  this  fact,  and  in  order  to  gain 
the  South  American  trade,  we  must  know  the 
Spanish  language  and  understand  the  commercial 
needs  of  the  country.  (Literally:  The  men  of 

state  (de  estado)  of  this  country  and  many  men 
of  business,  begin  to  see  this,  and  in  order  to  (para) 
obtain  (obtener)  the  markets  South  American  (we) 
must  know  (conocer)  the  language  and  the  needs 
commercial  of  those  countries  (las  necesidades  comer- 
ciales). 

20.  No  doubt  about  it!  But  now  let  us  form  some 

idiomatic  phrases  with  ^ ‘hacer. How  would  you 
say:  The  weather  was  very  bad  yesterday?  (Lit- 
erally: Without  (sin)  doubt  whatever  (alguna). 

But  now  let  us  form  some  (algunas)  sentences  idio- 
matic (idiomáticas)  with  the  verb  “hacer. How 
would  say  you  (diría  V.^):  The  weather  was  very 
bad  yesterday)? 

21.  Oh  that  is  easy.  Yesterday  the  weather  was  very 
bad.  (Literally:  Oh,  that  (eso)  is  very  easy. 
Yesterday  (ayer)  (it)  made  very  bad  weather). 

22.  Very  well,  and  now  tell  me  something  about  to- 
day’s weather.  (Literally:  Very  well,  and  now 

tell  me  something  (algo)  of  the  weather  of  (to-day). 


^ There  are  two  verbs  in  Spanish  for  the  English  verb  to  know, 
viz.:  saber  and  conocer.  Conocer  denotes  to  he  acquainted  with, 
to  know  by  sight  or  from  experience;  saber  means  to  know  by 
study,  to  have  a knowledge  of  something, 

2 The  pupil  should  now  study  the  irregular  verb  decir  in  Part 
X.  At  any  rate  he  should  master  the  indicative  mood  as  given 
on  the  next  page. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  0 note;  00  room. 


The  Spanish  Language, 


2og 


19.  Los  hombres  de  estado  de  este  país  y muchos  hom- 
bres de  negocios  empiezan  a ver  esto,  y para  obtener 
los  mercados  sudamericanos  debemos  conocer^  el 
idioma  y las  necesidades  comerciales  de  esos  paises. 
(ém-pe^a'-zán  ná-tha-sé-dá'-dés  kó-mérr-the^á'- 
lés). 

20.  Sin  duda  alguna.  Pero  ahora  formemos  algimas 
oraciones  idiomáticas  con  el  verbo  ‘^hacer.’’  ¿ Cómo 
diría  V.  The  weather  was  very  bad  yesterday? 
(é-dé"T  o-má'-té-kás  de-re' -á). 

21.  Oh,  eso  es  muy  fácil.  Ayer  hizo  muy  mal  tiempo, 
(á-yérr'). 


22.  Muy  bien.  Y ahora  dígame  algo  del  tiempo  de  hoy. 


Modo  Indicativo  del  verbo  “Decir.” 

(To  say^  to  tell). 


Yo. 

Usted. 

El. 

Nosotros. 

Ustedes. 

Ellos. 

Presente: 

digo. 

dice. 

dice. 

decimos. 

dicen. 

dicen. 

Imperfecto: 

decía. 

decía. 

decía. 

decíamos. 

decían. 

decían. 

Definido: 

dije. 

dijo. 

dijo. 

dijimos. 

dijeron. 

dijeron. 

Futuro: 

diré. 

dirá. 

dirá. 

diremos. 

dirán. 

dirán. 

Condicional: 

diría. 

diría. 

diría. 

diríamos. 

dirían. 

dirían. 

Gerundio:  diciendo. 
Participio  pasado:  dicho. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  0 note;  6b  room. 


210 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


23.  Yesterday  the  weather  was  very  bad,  but  to-day 
it  is  very  fine.  It  is  pleasant  and  warm  and  yet 
not  too  warm.  (Literally:  Yesterday  (it)  made 
very  bad  weather,  but  to-day  it  makes  very  good. 
(It)  is  very  pleasant  (agradable),  (it)  makes  warmth 
(calor),  but  not  much). 

24.  Is  it  windy?  (Literally:  Makes  (it)  wind  (viento)  ? 

25.  It  was  quite  windy  last  evening,  but  to-day  there 

is  scarcely  any  breeze.  (Literally:  (It)  made 

much  wind  last  night  (anoche),  but  to-day  not 
makes  scarcely  (casi)  nothing). 

26.  Have  you  read  the  papers?  Do  you  know  what 
the  weather  probabilities  for  to-morrow  are?  (Lit- 
erally: Have  read  you  the  journal  (el  periódico)? 
What  say  (they)  of  the  observatory  (observatorio) 
about  (sobre)  the  weather  for  to-morrow)  ? 

27.  I have  the  paper  here.  Let  me  see;  here  it  is: 
The  probabilities  for  to-morrow  are  that  there 
will  be  strong  westerly  winds  with  showers.  (Lit- 
erally: Here  (I)  carry  (traigo)  the  paper.  Let  me 
(déjeme)  see;  here  (it)  is:  The  probabilities  (las 
probabilidades)  for  to-morrow  are  that  (we)  shall 
have  (tendremos)  strong  winds  from  the  (del) 
west  (oeste)  and  showers  (chubascos). 

1 Anoche  is  rendered  by  last  night;  esta  noche,  by  to-night. 

2 The  student  should  learn  the  whole  conjugation  of  traer,  to 
bring. 

Modo  Indicativo  Del  Verbo  “Traer.” 

{To  bring). 


Yo. 

Usted. 

El. 

Nosotros. 

Ustedes.  Ellos. 

Presente: 

traigo. 

trae. 

trae. 

traemos. 

traen. 

traen. 

Imperfecto: 

traía. 

traía. 

traía. 

traíamos. 

traían. 

traían. 

Definido: 

traje. 

trajo. 

trajo. 

trajimos. 

trajeron,  trajeron. 

Futuro: 

traeré. 

traerá. 

traerá. 

traeremos. 

traerán,  traerán. 

á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


The  Spanish  Language. 


211 


23.  Ayer  hizo  muy  mal  tiempo,  pero  hoy  lo  hace  muy 
bueno.  Está  muy  agradable;  hace  calor,  pero  no 
mucho,  (á-grá-dá'-bl^) . 

24.  I Hace  viento?  (ve'^én'-tó). 

25*  Hizo  mucho  viento  anoche,^  pero  hoy  no  hace  casi 
nada,  (á-nó'-cha  ká'-sé). 

26.  I Ha  leido  V.  el  periódico?  ¿ Qué  dicen  del  ob- 
servatorio sobre  el  tiempo  para  mañana?  (pa- 
ré^ó'-dé-ko  ob-sérr-vá-tó'-ré"^o). 

27.  Aquí  traigo^  el  periódico.  Déjeme  ver;  ¡aquí 
está!  Las  probabilidades  para  mañana  son  que 
tendremos  fuertes  vientos  del  oeste  y chubascos, 
(pro-bá-bé-le-da'-dés  o'^és'-t}^  chóó-bás'-kOs). 


Cond:  traería,  traería,  traería,  traeríamos,  traerían,  traerían. 

Modo  Subjuntivo. 

Pres:  traiga,  traiga,  traiga,  traigamos,  traigan,  traigan. 

Imp:  trajera,  trajera,  trajera,  trajéramos,  trajeran,  trajeran. 

Imp:  trajese,  trajese,  trajese,  trajésemos,  trajesen,  trajesen. 

Fut:  trajere,  trajere,  trajere,  trajéremos,  trajeren,  trajeren. 

Genmdio:  trayendo. 

Participio  pasado:  traido. 


á far;  á pale;  e eve;  é there;  ó note;  00  room. 


212 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


28.  You  translated  that  very  well.  I will  now  give 
you  some  phrases  in  regard  to  the  weather  with 
“hacer.’’  (Literally:  Translated  you  (tradujo  V.) 
that  very  well.  Now  I am  going  (voy)  to  give 
you  to  you  some  phrases  about  the  weather  with 
the  verb  “hacer”). 

29.  What  kind  of  weather  is  it  to-day?  (Literally: 
What  sort  (clase)  of  weather  makes  to-day)? 

30.  Splendid:  the  weather  is  delightful.  (Literally: 

It  makes  a weather  delightful  (delicioso).  The 
weather  is  (está)  most  beautiful  (hermosísimo). 

31.  Open  the  window  and  see  how  the  weather  is. 
(Literally:  Open  you  (abra  V.)  the  window  (la 
ventana)  and  look  (mire)  how  is  the  weather). 

32.  The  sun  is  shining  beautifully,  but  it  is  quite  cold. 
(Literally:  It  makes  a sun  (un  sol)  splendid,  but 
makes  much  cold.) 

33.  It  seems  to  me  that  we  are  going  to  have  bad 
weather;  the  barometer  points  to  rain.  (Liter- 
ally: Me  (it)  seems  that  (we)  go  to  have  bad 
weather;  the  barometer  (el  barómetro)  signal 
(señala)  rain  (lluvia). 

34.  You  are  quite  right;  the  barometer  has  fallen;  I 
am  afraid  it  is  going  to  rain.  (Literally:  Have 
you  right;  the  barometer  has  fallen  (bajado):  (I) 
fear  that  (we)  may  have  water  (agua) 

35.  Excellent!  I see  you  understand  these  idioms 
perfectly. 

^ Tradujo  V.  is  the  Definido  of  the  irregular  verb  traducir,  to 
translate.  The  indicative  is  as  follows: 

Modo  Indicativo  Del  Verbo  “Traducir.” 

{To  translate). 

Yo  Usted.  El.  Nosotros.  Ustedes.  Ellos. 

Fres:  traduzco,  traduce,  traduce,  traducimos,  traducen,  traducen. 
Imp:  traducía.  — ía.  — ía.  — íamos.  — ían.  — ^ían. 

Def:  traduje,  tradujo,  tradujo,  tradujimos,  tradujeron,  tradujeron. 
á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


The  Spanish  Language, 


213 


28.  Tradujo^  V.  eso  muy  bien.  Ahora  voy  a darle  a 
V.  algunas  frases  sobre  el  tiempo  con  el  verbo 
^^hacer.’^  (trá-doó'-'hó) . 

29.  I Qué  clase  de  tiempo  hace  hoy? 

30.  Hace  un  tiempo  delicioso.  El  tiempo  está  her- 
mosísimo. (dá-le-thé'^  o'-só  érr-mo-se'-se-mo). 

31.  Abra  V.  la  ventana  y mire  como  está  el  tiempo, 
(á'-brá  vén-tá'-ná  mé'-ry). 

32.  Hace  un  sol  espléndido,  pero  hace  mucho  frío, 
(és-plén'-de-dó). 

33.  Me  parece  que  vamos  a tener  mal  tiempo;  el  baró- 
metro señala  lluvia.  (sén-yá'4á  lyóó'-ve"^á). 

34.  Tiene  V.  razón;  el  barómetro  ha  bajado;^  temo 
que  tengamos^  agua,  (bá-^há'-do). 

35.  Muy  bien!  Veo  que  entiende  V.  estos  modismos 
perfectamente. 


Futuro: 

Condicional: 

traduc-iré.  — irá.  — irá.  — iremos,  — irán.  — irán, 

traduc-iría.  — iría.  — iría.  — iríamos.  — irían.  — irían. 

2 The  thermometer  has  riseriy  el  termómetro  ha  subido.  The 
thermometer  has  falletiy  el  termómetro  ha  bajado. 

3 After  verbs  of  doubt,  fear  and  apprehension  the  subjunctive 
mood  must  be  used: 

Temo  que  no  vengan  a tiempo,  I am  afraid  they  will  not  arrive 


in  time. 


Dudaba  que  le  hubiesen  hecho 
esa  pregunta. 


I doubted  whether  they  would  have 
asked  him  this  question. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


214 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


36.  Are  these  all  the  idiomatic  expressions  in  which 
^ ‘hacer’’  is  employed?  (Literally:  Are  these  all 
the  idioms  in  the  which  (en  los  que)  is  used  the 
verb  “hacer”)? 

37.  Oh  no,  we  use  the  verb  “hacer”  impersonally  in 
the  third  person  of  the  singular  with  phrases  like 
these:  ^^Two  years  ago,  two  hours  ago,”  etc.  You 
understand  me,  don’t  you?  (Literally:  Oh  no,  (we) 
use  the  verb  hacer”  impersonally  (impersonalmente) 
in  the  third  person  of  the  singular  in  phrases  like 
(como)  the  following  (las  siguientes):  “It  makes 
two  years,  it  makes  two  hours,”  etc.  Me  under- 
stand you,  not  is  truth)  ? 

38.  Perfectly. 

39.  Then  form  a sentence,  please. 

40.  Two  hours  ago  the  weather  was  fine,  but  now  the 
wind  has  changed  and  it  is  quite  disagreeable. 
(Literally:  It  makes  two  hours  (it)  made  good 
weather,  but  now  has  changed  (cambiado)  the 
wind  and  (it)  is  disagreeable  (desagradable). 


1 The  relative  pronoun  que  is  accompanied  by  the  article  el,  la, 
los,  las,  lo,  according  to  gender  and  number  in  the  following  cases: 
a.  When  the  relative  is  accompanied  by  a preposition,  as: 

Me  ha  pagado,  con  lo  que  He  has  paid  me  and  I am  pleased 
estoy  contento,  with  it  {literally:  with  which 

I am  pleased), 

h.  When  the  relative  refers  to  a whole  sentence,  as: 

He  estado  en  el  campo,  lo  que  I have  been  in  the  country  and  it 
me  ha  hecho  bien,  did  me  good  {literally:  which 

has  done  me  good). 

á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  ó note;  00  room. 


The  Spanish  Language, 


2IS 

36.  I Son  estos  todos  los  modismos  en  los  que^  se  usa 
el  verbo  ‘^hacer”? 


37.  Oh  no,  usamos  el  verbo  ^^hacer”  impersonalmente 
en  la  tercera  persona  del  singular  en  frases  como 
las  siguientes:  “Hace  dos  años,  hace  dos  horas,’’ 
etc.  Me  entiende  V.,  ¿no  es  verdad?  (sé-ghé 
^én'-tés). 


38.  Perfectamente. 

39.  Entonces  forme  V.  una  oración,  (o-rá-thé'^ón')- 

40.  Hace  dos  horas  hacía  buen  tiempo,  pero  ahora  ha 
cambiado  el  viento  y está  desagradable,  (kám- 
bé'^á'-dó  dés-á-grá"dá'-bly). 


c.  To  avoid  ambiguity,  i.e.  when  the  relative  is  separated  from 
the  noun  to  which  it  refers,  as: 

Pidió  la  libertad  de  su  hijo,  la  He  asked  for  his  sotí* s liberty  and 
que  consiguió,  obtained  it  {literally:  which 

he  obtained). 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


2i6 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


41.  Very  well.  I see  you  understand  these  idioms 
perfectly  and  now  we  will  go  on  with  ‘‘tener.” 
Have  you  learned  this  verb  by  heart?  (Literally: 
Very  well.  (I)  see  that  understand  you  these 
idioms  perfectly  and  now  let  us  pass  (pasemos) 
to  the  verb  “tener.”  Learned  you  by  memory 
(de  memoria)  this  verb)  ? 

42.  I think  I know  it,  but  I wish  you  wotdd  ask  me 

some  questions.  (Literally:  (I)  believe  that  it 

(I)  know,  but  (I)  wish  that  me  may  make  you 
some  questions). 

43.  Well,  give  me  the  Past  of  the  Indicative  and 
the  Imperfect  of  the  Subjunctive. 


PAST  (Indicative  Mood). 


I had. 
you  had. 
he  had. 
we  had. 
you  had. 
they  had. 


IMPERFECT  (Subjunctive  Mood), 
First  Form. 


I might  have, 
you  might  have, 
he  might  have, 
we  might  have, 
you  might  have, 
they  might  have. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  ó note;  6b  room. 


The  Spanish  Language. 


217 


41.  Muy  bien.  Veo  que  entiende  V.  estos  modismos 
perfectamente,  y ahora  pasemos  al  verbo  “tener/’ 
¿ Aprendió  V.  de  memoria  este  verbo?  (pá-sa'- 
mOs  á-prén-de^ó'  ma-mó'-ré'^á). 

42.  Creo  que  lo  sé;  pero  deseo  que  me  haga  V.  algunas 
preguntas. 

43.  Dígame  el  definido  del  indicativo  y el  imperfecto 
del  subjmitivo. 


DEFINIDO  (Modo  indicativo) 


Yo  tuve 
V.  tuvo 
él  tuvo. 


(too'-va). 

(toó'-v5): 


nos.  tuvimos 
V.  V.  tuvieron 
ellos  tuvieron. 


(too-vé'-mós). 
(too-ve'V' á'-rón) . 


IMPERFECTO  (Modo  subjuntivo) 


Primera  forma. 


Yo  tuviera 
V.  tuviera, 
él  tuviera. 


(too-ve"T"  a'-rá). 


nos.  tuviéramos 
V.  V.  tuvieran 
ellos  tuvieran. 


(tóó-vé^á'rá-mos) . 
(tóo-vé^a'-rán) . 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  0 note;  00  room. 


218 

The  Rosenthal  Method. 

Second  Form. 

43.  Excellent! 

I might  have, 
you  might  have, 
he  might  have, 
we  might  have, 
you  might  have, 
they  might  have. 

And  the  Future! 

I shall  have, 
you  will  have, 
he  will  have, 
we  shall  have, 
you  will  have, 
they  will  have. 

44-  Very  well.  And  the  Conditional. 


45.  Excellent! 

I should  have, 
you  would  have, 
he  would  have, 
we  should  have, 
you  would  have, 
they  would  have. 

And  now  the  Present  Subjunctive! 
I may  have, 
you  may  have, 
he  may  have, 
we  may  have. 

^ you  may  have, 
they  may  have. 

á fax;  a pale;  6 eve;  é there;  o note;  oo  room. 


The  Spanish  Language. 

Segimda  forma. 


219 


Yo  tuviese 
V.  tuviese, 
él  tuviese, 
nos.  tuviésemos 
V.  V.  tuviesen 
ellos  tuviesen. 


(too-ve '^a'-sé). 

(tóó-vé^a'-sá-mos) . 
(toó-ve'^á  sén). 


43.  i Bravo!  Y el  Futuro. 
Yo  tendré 
V.  tendrá 
él  tendrá, 
nos.  -tendremos 
V.  V.  tendrán 
ellos  tendrán. 


(tén-dra'). 

(tén-drá'). 


(tén-dra'-mOs). 

(tén-drán'). 


44.  Muy  bien.  Y el  Condicional. 

Yo  tendría  (tén-dre'-á). 

V.  tendría, 
él  tendría. 

nos.  tendríamos  (tén-dre'-á-mós). 

V.  V.  tendrían  (tén-dre'-án). 

ellos  tendrían. 

45.  ¡ Bravo!  Y ahora  el  presente  del  subjuntivo. 

Yo  tenga  (tén'-gá). 

V. tenga, 
él  tenga. 

nos.  tengamos  (tén-gá'-mós). 

V.  V.  tengan  (tén'-gán). 

ellos  tengan. 


á far;  á pale;  e eve;  é there;  ó note;  00  room. 


220 


The  Rosenthal  Method, 


46.  Very  well  indeed!  Now  let  me  give  you  some 
rules  in  regard  to  the  idiomatic  use  of  ‘^tener/’ 
(Literally:  Well,  very  well.  Now  let  me  give  you 
some  rules  about  (sobre)  the  use  idiomatic  of  the 
verb  tener). 

47.  I have  already  explained  to  you  that  ‘^tener”  in- 
dicates possession.  (Literally:  Already  to  you  (I) 
have  explained  (explicado)  to  you  that  ‘^tener’^ 
indicates  (indica)  possession  (posesión). 

48.  Yes,  I remember  this  rule  perfectly,  but  let  me 
ask  you  a question.  (Literally:  Yes,  myself  (I) 
remember  of  this  rule  perfectly,  but  let  me  make 
you  a question). 

49.  As  many  as  you  like.  (Literally:  The  which  you 
may  like  (quiera^). 

50.  Is  ‘Tener’’  used  in  this  way  in  all  tenses  and  moods? 
(Literally:  Is  used  thus  (así)  the  verb  “tener”  in 
all  its  tenses  and  moods  (modos)? 

51.  Undoubtedly,  throughout  the  whole  conjugation, 
as  for  instance:  I have  had  the  misfortune  of  los- 
ing a great  deal  of  money  by  the  failure  of  the 
Coliunbia  Bank.  (Literally:  Without  doubt  any; 
in  aU  its  conjugation;  for  instance:  (I)  have  had 
the  misfortune  (la  desgracia)  of  to  lose  (perder) 
much  money  in  the  failure  (la  quiebra)  of  the 
Bank  (del  Banco)  of  Columbia  (Colombia). 

^ The  pupil  should  now  master  the  whole  conjugation  of  querer, 
to  be  willing. 

Modo  Indicativo  Del  Verbo  “Querer.” 

{To  he  willing;  to  wish). 


Yo. 

Usted. 

El.  Nosotros.  Ustedes. 

Ellos. 

Pres: 

quiero. 

quiere. 

quiere,  queremos,  quieren. 

quieren. 

Imp: 

quería. 

quería. 

quería,  queríamos,  querían. 

querían. 

Def: 

quise. 

quiso. 

quiso.  quisimos.  quisieron. 

quisieron. 

Fut: 

querré. 

querrá. 

querrá,  querremos,  querrán. 

querrán. 

Cond: 

querría. 

querría. 

querría,  querríamos,  querrían. 

querrían. 

á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  ó note;  00  room. 


The  Spanish  Language. 


221 


46.  Bien,  muy  bien!  Ahora  déjeme  darle  algunas 
reglas  sobre  el  uso  idiomático  del  verbo  ^^tener.’^ 
(óó'-s5  é-de'^ó-má'-té-kó). 

47.  Ya  le  he  explicado  a V.  que  ^^tener”  indica  posesión, 
(én-de'-ká  po-sa-sé^ón'). 

48.  Sí,  me  acuerdo  de  esta  regla  perfectamente,  pero 
déjeme  hacerle  una  pregunta,  (á-kwérr'-do  da'- 
^ha-ma). 

49.  Las  que  V.  quiera.^  (ké^a'-rá). 

50.  I Se  usa  así  el  verbo  ^^tener’’  en  todos  sus  tiempos 
y modos?  (á-sé'). 

51.  Sin  duda  alguna;  .en  toda  su  conjugación,  por 
ejemplo:  He  tenido  la  desgracia  de  perder  mucho 
dinero  en  la  quiebra  del  Banco  de  Colombia,  (dóo'- 
dá  a-^hém'-pl5  dés-grá'-the'^á  pérr-dérr'  ké'^a'- 
brá  kó-lom'-be^á). 


Modo  Subjuntivo. 


Presente : quiera. 


quiera. 

quisiera. 

quisiese. 


quiera. 

quisiera, 

quisiese. 

quisiere. 


Imperfecto:  quisiera. 


Imperfecto:  quisiese. 


Futuro:  quisiere 

queramos. 


quisiere. 

quieran. 

quisieran. 

quisiesen. 

quisieren. 


quieran. 

quisieran. 

quisiesen. 

quisieren. 


quisiéramos. 

quisiésemos. 

quisiéremos. 


Gerundio:  queriendo, 

Participio:  querido. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  5 note;  00  room. 


222 


The  Rosenthal  Method, 


52.  Thanks;  this  makes  everything  clear  and  plain  to 
me.  (Literally:  Thanks;  this  me  it  explains  per- 
fectly). 

53.  Now  please  go  on  and  give  me  the  next  rule  in 
regard  to  the  idiomatic  use  of  ^^tener.’’  (Literally: 
Now  pray  you  to  continue  (continuar)  and  tell 
me  the  other  rule  about  (acerca  del)  use  idiomatic 
of  the  verb  ^'tener’O* 

VOCABULARIO. 

Comidas  y Bebidas. 

(kó-me'-dás  é bá-bé'-das.) 

Comer  (kó-mérr'). 

Beber  (bá-bérr'). 

Cenar  (thá-nárr'). 

El  apetito  (á-pá-té'-tó). 

No  tengo  apetito. 

Tener  hambre  (ám'-bry). 

I Tiene  V.  hambre? 

Sí,  tengo  hambre. 

Tener  sed  (sád). 

¿ Tiene  V.  sed? 

No,  no  tengo  sed. 

El  Almuerzo. 

(ál-móó-érr'-tho) . 

El  desayuno  (dés-á-yoó'-  The  breakfast. 
nO). 

La  merienda  (má-re'T  én'-  The  luncheon, 
da). 


VOCABULARY. 
Eating  and  Drinking. 

To  eat;  to  dine. 

To  drink. 

To  sup. 

The  appetite. 

I have  no  appetite. 

To  be  hungry. 

Are  you  hungry? 

Yes,  I am  hungry. 

To  be  thirsty. 

Are  you  thirsty? 

No,  I am  not  thirsty. 
The  Breakfast. 


^ Almorzar  belongs  to  the  class  of  verbs  which  change  o of  the 
stem-syllable  into  ue  throughout  the  singular  and  third  person 
plural  in  the  present  indicative  and  subjunctive  and  in  the  same 
persons  in  the  imperative. 


The  Spanish  Language. 


223 


52.  Gracias,  esto  me  lo  explica  perfectamente,  (éx- 
ple'-ká). 

53.  Ahora  sírvase  V.  continuar  y decirme  la  otra  regla 
acerca  del  uso  idiomático  del  verbo  ‘^tener.’^  (kon- 
té-nóo-árr'  á-thérr'-ká). 


VOCABULARIO 

El  café  (ká-fá'). 

Una  taza  de  café  (tá'-thá). 

El  té  (tá). 

Una  taza  de  té. 

El  chocolate  (cho-kó-lá'- 

t5^). 

Almorzar  (ál-mórr-thárr'). 

I Qué  almuerza  V.  ? Café, 
té  o chocolate? 

Tomo  café,  pero  mi  señora 
toma  té. 

¡ No  le  gusta  a V.  el  té? 

Prefiero  café  (pra-féT^a'- 
ro). 

Pedir  (pa-dérr'). 

I Pidió  V.? 

; Qué  desea  V.  pedir? 

El  bistek  (bé'-sták). 

Bien  cocido  (ko-the'-do). 

Mozo,  tráigame  un  bistek 
y una  taza  de  café 
(trá'Té-gá-m;^). 

I Lo  quiere  V.  bien  cocido? 


VOCABULARY. 

The  coffee. 

A cup  of  coffee. 

The  tea. 

A cup  of  tea. 

The  chocolate. 

To  breakfast. 

What  do  you  take  for 
breakfast  ? Coffee,  tea 
or  chocolate? 

I drink  coffee,  but  my  wife 
takes  tea. 

Don't  you  like  tea? 

I prefer  coffee. 

To  order. 

Did  you  order? 

What  do  you  wish  to  order? 
The  beefsteak. 

Well  done. 

Waiter,  bring  me  a steak 
and  a cup  of  coffee. 

Do  you  want  it  well  done? 


224 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


VOCABULARIO. 

No,  a la  inglesa.^ 

La  costilla  (kos-tel'-ya). 

La  costilla  de  camero  (kárr- 
na'-ró). 

La  chuleta  de  temerá  (chóo- 
lá'-tá  térr-na'-rá). 

La  costilla  de  puerco  (póó- 
érr'-kó). 

Las  patatas  (pá>tá'-tás). 

Las  papas  (pá'-pás). 

Patatas  fritas  (fre'-tás). 

Tráigame  una  costilla  de 
camero  y patatas  fri- 
tas. 

El  huevo;  los  huevos  (hwá'- 

v5). 

Huevos  pasados  por  agua 
(ág'-wá). 

Huevos  tibios  (té-'bé"^os) 
(Mexican  idiom). 

Revoltillo  de  huevos  (ra- 
vol-tel'-yó). 

Huevos  cocidos  (ko-the'- 
dos). 

Huevos  duros  (dóo'-rós). 

Huevos  fritos  (fré'-tós). 

Huevos  escalfados  (és-kál- 
fá'-dós). 

Huevos  frescos  (frés'-kós). 

Una  tortilla  (tórr-tel'-yá). 

i Cómo  quiere  V.  los  hue- 
vos, tibios  o duros? 


VOCABULARY. 

No,  rare  please. 

The  chop. 

The  mutton-chop. 

The  veal-cutlet. 

The  pork-chop. 

' The  potatoes. 

Fried  potatoes. 

Bring  me  a mutton-chop 
and  fried  potatoes. 

The  egg;  the  eggs. 


‘ Soft  boiled  eggs. 

Scrambled  eggs. 

1 

I Hard  boiled  eggs. 

Fried  eggs. 

Poached  eggs. 

Fresh  eggs. 

An  omelette. 

How  do  you  want  the  eggs, 
soft  boiled  or  hard? 


* Idiomatic  expression. 


The  Spanish  Language. 


225 


VOCABULARIO. 

Cocidos  en  tres  minutos 
(mé-noó'-tos). 

La  sal  (sal). 

La  pimienta  (pé-mé^én'- 
tá). 

El  azúcar  (á-thóo-kárr'). 

La  leche  (la'-cha). 

La  nata  (ná'-tá). 

La  crema  (kra'-ma). 

El  vinagre  (vé-nág'-rá). 

El  aceite  (á-tha^é'-t;^). 

La  mostaza  (mos-tá'-thá). 

El  salero  (sá-lá'-ró). 

El  azucarero  (á-thóó-kárr- 
rá'-ró). 

La  cafetera  (ká-£a-ta'-rá). 

La  tetera  (ta-tá'-rá). 

La  tacita  para  huevos  (tá- 
the'-tá). 

Echar  (a-chárr'). 

Hágame  favor  de  servirme 
otra  taza  de  té. 

Agua  fresca. 

Sírvame  un  vaso  de  agua. 

Agua  fría  (fré'-á). 

Agua  caliente  (ká-le"^én'- 

tj^). 

Agua  tibia  (té'-bé^á). 

Agua  muy  caliente. 

Agua  hirviendo  (érr-vé"^ 
én'-do). 

Agua  mineral  (mg-ná-rál'). 


VOCABULARY. 

Let  them  boil  three  min- 
utes. 

The  salt. 

The  pepper. 

The  sugar. 

The  milk. 

I The  cream. 

The  vinegar. 

The  oil. 

The  mustard. 

The  salt-cellar. 

The  sugar-basin. 

The  coffee-um. 

The  tea-um. 

The  egg-cup. 

To  pour  out. 

Pray  pour  out  another  cup 
of  tea  for  me. 

Fresh  water. 

Pour  me  out  a glass  of 
water. 

Cold  water. 

Warm  water. 

Lukewarm  water. 

Hot  water. 

Boiling  water. 

Mineral  water. 


226 


/ 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


VOCABULARIO. 

Agua  con  hielo  (é'^á'-lo). 

Un  jarro  ('hárr'-ro). 

Los  Platos,  (los  plá'-tos). 

Poner  la  mesa  (má'-sá). 

El  plato  (plá'-tó). 

Limpio  (lém'-pé'^ó). 

Sírvase  poner  platos  lim- 
pios. 

El  plato  hondo  (ón'-do). 

El  plato. 

La  fuente  (foo^én'-t^). 

El  cucharón  (kóó-chárr- 
ron'). 

La  cuchara  (koo^chárr'- 
rá). 

La  cuchara  grande. 

La  cucharita  (kóó-chárr- 
ré'-tá). 

Una  cucharada  (koo-chárr'- 
rá'-dá). 

El  tenedor  (tá-na-dorr'). 

El  cuchillo  (kóó-chel'-yó). 

Déme  un  cuchillo  limpio. 

El  mantel  (mán-téll'). 

La  servilleta  (sérr-vél-yá'- 
tá). 

No  me  trajo  V.  servilleta 
(trá'-^hó). 

El  cubierto  (kóo-vé'^érr'- 
tó). 

Ponga  V.  otro  cubierto 
(pón'-gá)'. 

El  vaso  (vá'-so). 


VOCABULARY. 

Ice-water  (water  with  ice). 
A pitcher. 

The  Dishes. 

To  lay  the  table. 

The  plate. 

Clean. 

Pray,  serve  clean  plates. 

The  soup  plate  (i.e.  the 
plate  deep). 

I The  dish. 

" The  spoon. 

The  large  spoon. 

The  teaspoon. 

A spoon-full. 

The  fork. 

The  knife. 

Give  me  a clean  knife. 

The  table-cloth. 

The  napkin. 

You  did  not  bring  me  a 
napkin. 

The  cover. 

Put  on  another  cover. 

The  glass. 


■ THE 

ü'NÍVERSiTV  OF  ILLINOiF 


ROSENTHAL’S 

COMMON-SENSE  METHOD 

OF 

PRACTICAL  LINGUISTRY 


THE 

Spanish  Language 

BY 

DR.  RICHARD  S.  ROSENTHAL 

Author  of  the  Meisterschaft  System,  etc.,  etc,. 


Haulhnbeek  Corrected  Edition 
Revised  1917 


IN  TEN  PARTS 


NEW  YORK  : : LONDON 
The  International  Ciollege  of  Languages 


COPYRIGHT,  1905, 

BY 

THE  INTERNATIONAL  COLLEGE  OF  LANGUAGES. 
Entered  at 

Stationers^  Hall,  London,  Eng. 


The  Spanish  Language 


227 


ñ n ' 


/f.  ii- 


CONTENTS. 


iRules  about  Tener 228 

Tener  used  idiomatically 230 

Days  of  the  Week 236 

Months  of  the  Year 236 

Idiomatic  expression  for  I must 247 

Vocabulary 252 


228 


The  Rosenthal  Method, 


Tener. 


{Continued), 


1.  With  pleasure.  The  verb  ^^tener’’  is  used  in  the 
sense  of  ^‘to  be^’  in  English,  when  it  expresses  de- 
sire or  sentiment.  (Literally:  With  much  pleasure. 
The  verb  tener  is  used  in  the  sense  (el  sentido)  of 
^^to  be’’  in  English  when  (it)  expresses  desire  (deseo) 
or  sentiment  (sentimiento). 

2.  I regret  to  tell  you  that  I can’t  quite  understand 

what  you  mean  by  this.  Kindly  give  me  some 
illustrations.  (Literally:  (I)  regret  to  tell  you 

that  not  (I)  understand  very  well  what  will  say 
that.  Do  me  the  favor  of  to  put  me  (ponerme) 
some  examples), 

3.  You  are  quite  right.  We  learn  by  practice  and 

through  examples.  (Literally:  Have  you  right. 

With  examples  one  learns  (se  aprende)  practi- 
cally (prácticamente). 

4.  That  is  my  opinion  exactly.  Grammarians  gen- 
erally make  the  mistake  of  being  too  abstract  in 
their  rules.  (Literally:  Thus  it  (I)  believe.  The 
error  of  many  authors  (autores)  is  that  of  to  teach 
(enseñar)  the  theory  (la  teoría)  much  more  than 
the  practice  (la  práctica). 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  ó note;  00  room. 


The  Spanish  Language. 

Tener. 


229 


{Continued). 


I.  Con  mucho  gusto.  El  verbo  ‘^tener’^  se  usa  en  el 
sentido  de  ‘^to  be’’  en  inglés  cuando  expresa  deseo 
o sentimiento,  (sén-te'-dó  sén-te-me^én'-tó). 


2.  Siento  decirle  que  no  entiendo  muy  bien  lo  que 
quiere  decir  eso.  Hágame  el  favor  de  ponerme 
unos  ejemplos,  (á'-gá-má  p5-nérr'-má  á-^hém'-plos). 


3.  Tiene  V.  razón.  Con  ejemplos  se  aprende  práo 
ticamente. 


4,  Así  lo  creo.  El  error  de  muchos  autores  es  el  de 
enseñar  la  teoría  mucho  más  que  la  práctica.  {áT^ 
óó-to'-rés  ta-5-re'-á). 


á far;  a pale;  6 eve;  é there;  5 note;  00  room. 


230 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


5.  In  plain  words  then,  ^‘tener’’^  is  used  in  place  of 

our  English  verb  “to  be”  in  conjunction  with  the 
following  words:  hunger,  thirst,  cold,  warmth, 

sleep,  shame,  right  and  fear.  (Literally:  In  order 
to  speak  clearly,  “tener”  is  used  in  place  of  the 
(en  lugar  del)  verb  English  “to  be”  with  the  fol- 
lowing (siguientes)  words:  hunger  (hambre),  thirst 
(sed),  cold  (frío),  warmth  (calor),  sleep  (sueño), 
shame  (vergüenza),  right  (razón)  and  fear  (miedo). 

6.  Ah,  this  I understand,  but  I am  afraid  it  will  be 
quite  difficult  for  me  to  remember  such  a number 
of  isolated  words.  (Literally:  Already  (I)  under- 
stand this,  but  I fear  (temo)  that  itself  me  is  going 
to  (se  me  va  a)  make  difficult  to  remember  so  many 
(tantas)  words  isolated  (sueltas). 


1 Tener  is  used  idiomatically  with  the  following  words: 


Tengo  hambre, 

I am  hungry 

(Literally:  I have  hunger). 

tengo  sed, 

I am  thirsty 

( 

“ I have  thirst). 

tengo  calor, 

I am  warm 

( 

“ I have  warmth) 

tengo  frío, 

I am  cold 

( 

“ I have  cold). 

tengo  sueño. 

I am  sleepy 

( 

“ I have  sleep). 

tengo  vergüenza. 

I am  ashamed 

( 

“ I have  shame). 

tengo  miedo  de. 

I am  afraid  to 

( 

I have  fear  to). 

tengo  razón. 

I am  right 

( 

“ I have  right). 

no  tengo  razón. 

I am  wrong 

( 

“ I have  not  right). 

tengo  gana  de. 

I have  a mind  to^  I feel  inclined  to. 

1 qué  tiene  V.  ? 

What  is  the  matter  with  you? 

no  tengo  nada. 

nothing  is  the  matter  with  me^ 

tengo  algo. 

something  is  the  matter  with  me^ 

1 tiene  V,  algo? 

is  anything  the  matter  with  you? 

2 This  a somewhat  confusing  construction,  as  the  infinitive 
recordar  is  the  subject  of  the  sentence.  The  usual  rule  is  that 
the  preposition  de  is  used  before  the  infinitive  after  nouns  and 
adjectives  which  govern  the  genitive: 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


The  Spanish  Language. 


231 


5.  Para  hablar  claro:  tener^  se  usa  en  lugar  del  verbo 
ingles  ‘^to  be/^  con  las  siguientes  palabras:  hambre, 
sed,  frío,  calor,  sueño,  vergüenza,  razón  y miedo, 
(se-ghe^én'-tés  fré'-o  swén'-yó  vérr-gwen'-thá  rá- 
thón'  me'^ñ'-dó). 

6.  Ya  entiendo  esto,  pero  temo  que  se  me  va  a hacer 
difícil  recordar^  tantas  palabras  sueltas,  (swél'- 
tas). 


Hágame  V.  el  favor  de  venir 
conmigo. 

No  tengo  el  gusto  de  conocer 
a esa  señora. 

Tiene  vergüenza  de  pedirlo. 

Los  verbos  son  difíciles  de 
aprender. 

Es  digno  de  hablar  con  ella. 

Estoy  deseoso  de  conseguirlo. 


Do  me  the  favor  to  come  with  me. 

I have  not  the  pleasure  of  know^ 
ing  that  lady. 

He  is  ashamed  to  ask  for  it. 
Verbs  are  difficult  to  learn. 

He  is  worthy  to  speak  with  her. 
I am  desirous  to  attain  it. 


All  Adjectives  which  express  worthiness^  unworthiness^  facility^ 
difficulty t fulness,  want,  scarcity,  anxiety,  desire,  exceptions,  moral  or 
physical  qualities,  distance,  certainty  or  uncertainty,  or  danger  govern 
the  preposition  de: 


Fácil  de  hacer. 
Penoso  de  hacer. 
Lleno  de  soberbia. 
Deseoso  de  trabajar. 
Codicioso  de  dinero. 
Gordo  de  talle. 
Blandp  de  corazón. 
Lejano  de  la  ciudad. 
Seguro  de  peligro. 


Easy  to  do. 

Difficult  to  do. 

Full  of  pride. 
Desirous  of  working. 
Eager  for  money. 
Stout  in  body. 

Soft  in  heart. 

Far  from  the  city. 
Sure  of  danger. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  5 note;  00  room. 


232  The  Rosenthal  Method, 

7.  Isolated  words,  my  dear  sir,  are  always  hard  to 
remember.  Disconnected  words — as  I say  in  my 
preface — are  not  language.  A person  might  learn 
the  whole  dictionary  by  heart  and  yet  would  not 
be  able  to  carry  on  a conversation.  Nattire  teaches 
by  sentences,  and  sentences  you  will  have  to  learn. 
(Literally:  Words  isolated,  friend  mine,  are  very 
difficult  to  remember.  Words  without  connection 
according  to  (según)  (I)  say  in  my  preface  (pre- 
facio) not  compose  (componen)  a language.  Can 
one  learn  itself  (aprenderse)  by  memory  the  dic- 
tionary entire  (el  diccionario  entero)  and  not  be 
able  to  sustain  (sostener)  a conversation.  The 
nature  (la  naturaleza)  us  teaches  with  phrases  and 
these  are  which  you  must  (tiene  V.  que)  learn). 

8.  I am  aware  of  that  and  should  feel  obliged  to  you 
if  you  would  form  some  sentences  with  these  words 
for  me.  (Literally:  (I)  am  convinced  (enterado) 
of  that  and  you  (I)  would  thank  (agradecería)  if 
me  would  form  you  (formase  V.)  some  phrases  with 
these  words). 

9.  With  pleasure,  but  in  order  to  derive  the  full  bene- 
fit of  the  examples  which  I am  going  to  give  you, 
you  ought  to  form  a number  of  similar  phrases  at 
home  and  bring  them  to  me  for  correction.  (Lit- 
erally: With  much  pleasure,  but  in  order  to  profit 
(aprovecharse)  of  the  examples  which  (I)  go  to 
give  you,  ought  you  to  make  some  similar  (seme- 
jantes) at  home  (en  casa)  and  bring  me  them  for 
to  (para)  correct  them). 


á far;  a pale;  6 eve;  é there;  ó note;  00  room. 


The  Spanish  Language, 


233 


7.  Palabras  sueltas,  amigo  mío,  son  muy  difíciles  de 
recordar.  Palabras  sin  conexión,  según  digo  en 
mi  prefacio,  no  componen  un  idioma.  Puede  uno 
aprenderse  de  memoria  el  diccionario  entero,  y no 
poder  sostener  una  conversación.  La  naturaleza 
nos  enseña  con  frases  y estas  son  las  que  tiene  V. 
que  aprender,  (ko-nék-the'^on'  sa-goón'  pra-fá'- 
thé'^o  dék-thé^o-ná'-ré"^o  én-ta'-ro  ná-tóó-rá-la'- 
thá  én-sén'-yá). 


8.  Estoy  enterado  de  eso  y le  agradecería  si  me  for- 
mase V.  unas  frases  con  estas  palabras,  (én-ta-rá'- 
do  ág-rá-dá-tha-re'-á  forr-má'-s^). 


9.  Con  mucho  gusto,  pero  para  aprovecharse  de  los 
ejemplos  que  voy  a darle,  debe  V.  hacer  unos  seme- 
jantes en  casa  y traérmelos  para  corregirlos,  (a- 
‘hém'-plos  sa-má-‘hán'-tés  trá-érr'-ma-l5s  korr-ré- 
^herr'-los). 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


234 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


10.  I will  do  so.  I shall  put  the  verbs  of  your  sen- 
tences into  different  tenses  and  persons.  (Liter- 
ally: It  (I)  will  do.  (I)  shall  use  the  verbs  of 
yoiu*  phrases  in  its  tenses  (tiempos)  and  persons 
different  (diferentes). 

11.  Very  well.  Now  let  us  begin.  What  is  the  mat- 
ter with  you?  You  do  not  look  well.  (Literally: 
Very  well.  Now  let  us  begin.  What  have  you? 
Have  you  bad  coimtenance  (mal  semblante). 

12.  Now,  form  a similar  sentence,  but  put  it  into  the 
past  tense.  (Literally:  Now  form  you  a phrase 
similar  (semejante)  but  put  her  in  the  past  (el 
pasado). 

13.  I met  yoirr  cousin  yesterday  and  he  seemed  to 
look  very  ill.  Is  anything  the  matter  with  him? 
(Literally:  (I)  met  yesterday  yom*  cousin  (a  su 
primo)  and  (he)  had  very  bad  coimtenance.  Has 
(he)  any  thing  (algo)? 

14.  Very  well!  Now  please  form  a phrase  with  hambre 
and  sedj  but  don’t  make  it  too  short.  (Literally: 
Bravo!  Now  form  you  a phrase  with  hambre  and 
sed^  but  that  (it)  not  may  be  very  short  (corta). 


^ The  subjunctive  is  used  in  principal  sentences  to  supply  the 
negative  form  of  the  Imperative. 

It  also  supplies  the  affirmative  form  of  the  Imperative  in  the 
first  and  third  person: 

Que  no  escriba  ella,  Let  her  not  write! 

Que  haga  él  eso,  Let  him  do  that. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  0 note;  00  room. 


The  Spanish  Language, 


235 


10.  Lo  haré.  Usaré  los  verbos  de  sus  frases  en  sus 
tiempos  y personas  diferentes,  (pérr-só'-nás  dé-fa- 
rén'-tés). 

11.  Muy  bien.  Ahora  empezemos.  ¿ Qué  tiene  V.? 
Tiene  V.  mal  semblante,  (ém-pa-thá'-mos  sém- 
blán'-ty). 


13.  Ahora  forme  V.  una  frase  semejante,  pero  póngala 
en  el  pasado,  (sá-ma-^hán'-t}^  pon'-gá-lá  pá-sá'- 
dó). 

13.  Encontré  ayer  a su  primo  y tenía  muy  mal  sem- 
blante. ¿ Tiene  algo?  (á-yérr'  pré'-mó  tá-ne'-á). 

14.  Bravo!  Ahora  forme  V.  una  frase  con  hambre 
y sed,  pero  que  no  sea^  muy  corta,  (korr'-tá). 


No  trabajemos  hoy, 
No  se  lo  dé  V., 

No  se  vaya  V., 

Sea  yo! 

Sea  él! 

No  me  lo  diga, 


Don't  let  us  work  to-day. 
Don't  you  give  it  to  him. 
Don't  you  go  away. 

Let  me  he! 

Let  him  he! 

Don't  tell  me. 


á far;  a pale;  & eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


236 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


15.  Since  last  Monday,  when  I took  a violent  cold,  I 

have  lost  all  appetite.  This  morning  I only  took 
a cup  of  coffee.  I could  not  eat  anything  at  break- 
fast. (Literally:  Since  (desde)  the  Monday  (el 

limesO  p3<st  that  (I)  took  (tomé)  a violent  cold 
(un  fuerte  resfriado)  (I)  have  lost  the  appetite  (el 
apetito).  This  morning  only  (I)  took  (tomé)  a 
cup  of  coffee.  Not  (I)  could  (pude)  breakfast 
(almorzar)  nothing). 

16.  Well,  do  you  not  feel  hungry  now?  Would  you 
not  like  to  eat  lunch  with  me?  (Literally:  Well, 
not  have  you  hunger  now?  Not  would  like  you 
to  lunch  (almorzar)  with  me?) 

17.  No,  thank  you  very  much;  I am  not  at  all  hun- 

gry and  could  not  eat  a mouthful.  But  may  I 
trouble  you  for  a glass  of  ice-water?  I feel  very 
thirsty.  (Literally:  No,  thanks;  not  (I)  have 

himger  in  absolute  and  not  (I)  could  eat  a mouth- 
ful (un  bocado).  But  me  do  you  the  favor  of  a 
glass  (un  vaso)  of  water  iced  (agua  helada).  (I) 
have  much  thirst). 

^ Days  of  the  week:  Months  of  the  year: 

Dias  de  la  semana:  Meses  del  año: 


lunes, 

Monday. 

enero. 

January. 

martes, 

Tuesday. 

febrero. 

February. 

miércoles, 

Wednesday. 

marzo. 

March. 

jueves. 

Thursday. 

abril. 

April. 

viernes. 

Friday. 

mayo. 

May. 

sábado, 

Saturday. 

junio. 

June. 

domingo. 

Sunday. 

julio. 

July- 

agosto. 

August. 

septiembre. 

September. 

octubre. 

October. 

noviembre. 

November. 

diciembre, 

December. 

á far;  a pale;  B eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


The  Spanish  Language, 


m 


15.  Desde  el  lunes^  pasado  que  tomé  un  fuerte  res- 
friado he  perdido  el  apetito  {pr  no  tengo  hambre). 
Esta  mañana  solo  tomé  una  taza  de  café.  No 
pude  almorzar  nada,  (lóo'-nés  rés-fre-á'-do  á-pa- 
té'-tO  ál-mórr-thárr'). 


16.  ¿ Bien,  no  tiene  V.  hambre  ahora?  ¿ No  quisiera 
V.  almorzar  conmigo? 

17.  No  gracias;  no  tengo  hambre  en  absoluto  y no 
podría  comer  im  bocado.  Pero  ¿ me  hace  V.  el 
favor  de  un  vaso  de  agua  helada?  Tengo  mucha 
sed.  (bo-ká'-dó  á'-gwá  á-lá'-dá). 


The  days  are  pronounced:  loó'-nés;  márr'-tés;  me'^érr'-ko-lés; 
hwé'-vés;  ve^érr'-nés;  sá'-bá'-do;  do-men'-gó. 

The  article  in  Spanish  takes  the  place  of  our  preposition  on,  as 
el  lunes,  on  Monday;  los  lunes,  on  Mondays;  el  martes,  on  Tues- 
day; los  martes,  on  Tuesdays. 

The  months  are  pronounced:  é-né-ro;  fé-bré-ró;  már-zo;  á-brel; 
má-y5;  hóó-nyO;  hóó-lyó;  á-gós-to;  sé-te'^em'bré;  Ok-tóó-bré; 
nó-ve^em-bré;  de-the"^em-bré. 

The  days  of  the  week  and  months  of  the  year  are  not  written 
with  capitals. 


á far;  á pale;  e eve;  é there;  ó note;  00  room. 


238  The  Rosenthal  Method, 

18.  Now  please  form  some  sentences  with  miedo,  ver- 
güenza and  ganas.  I am  curious  to  see  how  you 
will  get  along  in  these  words.  (Literally:  Now 
pray  you  to  form  some  phrases  with  miedo,  ver- 
güenza and  ganas.  I have  desires  (deseos)  of  to 
see  what  make  you  with  these  words). 

19.  I have  a good  mind  to  take  a journey  into  the  in- 
terior of  Cuba,  but  to  tell  you  the  truth,  I am 
afraid  of  that  bandit  Martinez:  I do  not  wish  to 
die^  yet.  (Literally:  (I)  have  minds  of  to  make 
a journey  through  the  interior  (el  interior)  of  Cuba, 
but  to  tell  (a  decir)  the  truth  (I)  have  fear  to  the 
bandit  {al  bandolero)  Martinez:  not  wish  (I)  to 
die  yet). 

20.  What!  You  are  afraid  of  that  bandit?  You  who 

have  fought  in  the  United  States  army  imder 
General  Grant?  You  ought  to  be  ashamed  of  your- 
self! (Literally:  What!  You  have  you  fear  to 

that  bandit?  You  that  fought  (peleó)  in  the  army 
(ejército)  American  under  (bajo)  the  General  Grant? 
Ought  you  (deberia  V.)  have  shame). 

1 The  pupil  should  study  the  irregular  verb  ver,  to  see. 

Modo  Indicativo. 


Yo. 

Usted. 

Él. 

Nosotros. 

Ustedes. 

Ellos. 

Pres: 

veo. 

ve. 

ve. 

vemos. 

ven. 

ven. 

Imp: 

veía. 

veía. 

veía. 

veíamos. 

veían. 

veían. 

Def: 

vi. 

vió. 

vió. 

vimos. 

vieron. 

vieron. 

Fut: 

veré. 

verá. 

verá. 

veremos. 

verán. 

verán. 

Cond: 

vería. 

vería. 

vería.  veríamos. 
Modo  Subjimtivo. 

verían. 

verían. 

Pres: 

vea. 

vea. 

vea. 

veamos. 

vean. 

vean. 

Imp:i 

viera. 

viera. 

viera. 

viéramos. 

vieran. 

vieran. 

Imp:2 

viese. 

viese. 

viese. 

viésemos. 

viesen. 

viesen. 

Fut: 

viere. 

viere. 

viere. 

viéremos. 

vieren. 

vieren. 

Gerundio:  viendo.  Participio:  visto, 

á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there:  o note;  óó  room. 


The  Spanish  Language. 


239 


18.  Ahora  sírvase  V.  formar  unas  frases  con  miedo, 
vergüenza  y ganas.  Tengo  deseos  de  ver^  lo  que 
hace  V.^  con  estas  palabras,  (dá-sá'-os). 

19.  Tengo  ganas  de  hacer  un  viaje  por  el  interior  de 

Cuba,  pero  a decir  la  verdad,  le  tengo  miedo  al 
bandolero  Martínez:  no  deseo  morir^  todavía, 

(vé-á'-^h}^  en-ta-ré'^orr'  kóo'-bá  bán-do-lá'-ró  márr- 
te'-néth). 

20.  i Cómo!  i Le  tiene  V.  miedo  a ese  bandolero? 
V.  que  peleó  en  el  ejército  americano  bajo  el  gene- 
ral Grant  ? Debería  V.  tener  vergüenza,  (pá- 
lá-o'  a-‘hérr'-thé-to  ‘há-ná-rál'). 


2 The  English  Future  is  frequently  replaced  by  the  Present  in 
Spanish,  especially  after  the  conjunction  si; 

Voy  al  instante.  FU  go  at  once. 

¿ Me  hace  V.  el  favor?  Will  you  do  me  the  favor? 

Si  viene  V.  a mi  casa  saldremos  If  you  will  come  to  my  house  we 

a dar  un  paseo.  will  take  a walk. 

I Tiene  V.  la  bondad?  Will  you  have  the  kindness? 

On  the  other  hand,  the  Future  is  often  used  in  Spanish,  es- 
pecially in  questions,  when  the  speaker  is  convinced  that  his  views 
cannot  be  contradicted: 


Veré  muy  pronto  si  V.  sabe  sus 
. lecciones. 

I Habrá  felicidad  semejante? 
No  habrá  desgracia  como  la 
mía. 

I Será  cierto  lo  que  he  oido? 


I shall  see  very  soon  whether  you 
know  your  lessons. 

Is  there  such  happiness? 

There  is  no  misfortune  like 
mine. 

Is  it  true  what  I have  heard? 


In  the  latter  example  the  Future  is  used,  because  the  speaker 
is  convinced  that  his  statements  do  not  admit  of  contradiction. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  0 note;  do  room. 


240 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


21.  Indeed,  you  are  quite  wrong  to  sneer  at  this  bold 
bandit,  whom  you  call  half-starved.  I am  not  at 
all  ashamed  of  myself,  nor  do  I consider  myself 
a coward.  I would  rather  meet  three  Western 
desperadoes  than  this  Cuban  ^ ^terror’’  of  whom 
every  one  is  afraid.  (Literally:  Well,  not  have 
you  right  in  (en)  to  sneer  (burlarse)  of  that  bold 
(atrevido)  bandit  (bandolero)  whom  (a  quien)  call 
you  a half  dead  of  hunger.  Not  have  (I)  not  even 
(ni)  mite  (pizca)  of  shame  and  not  me  (I)  believe 
a coward  (un  cobarde);  but  better  (I)  would  fight 
with  three  desperadoes  (desesperados)  of  the  West 
(del  oeste),  than  with  that  terror  (terror)  of  Cuba 
whom  (a  quien)  all  the  world  (todo  el  mundo) 
fears). 


3 Study  the  irregular  verb  morir,  to  die. 

Modo  Indicativo. 


Yo. 

Usted.  El.  Nosotros. 

Ustedes. 

Ellos. 

Pres: 

muero. 

muere,  muere,  morimos. 

mueren. 

mueren. 

Imp: 

moría. 

moría,  moría,  moríamos. 

morían. 

morían. 

Def: 

morí. 

murió,  murió,  morimos. 

murieron. 

murieron. 

Fut: 

moriré. 

morirá,  morirá,  moriremos. 

morirán. 

morirán. 

Cond: 

morir-ía. 

— ía.  — ía.  — oíamos. 

Modo  Subjuntivo. 

— ían. 

— ^ían. 

Pres: 

muera. 

muera,  muera,  muramos. 

mueran. 

mueran. 

Imp: 

mur-iera. 

— iera.  — iera.  — iéramos. 

— ^ieran. 

— ieran. 

Imp: 

mur-iese. 

— -iese.  — iese.  — iésemos. 

— iesen. 

— iesen. 

Fut: 

mur-iere. 

— iere.  — iere.  — iéremos. 

— ieren. 

— ieren. 

Gerundio:  muriendo. 

Participio  pasado:  muerto. 

^ We  cannot  say  in  Spanish:  ''I  am  wrongs'  but  must  express 
it  by:  have  not  rights  As  this  mode  of  expression  presents 

difficulties  to  students,  other  examples  will  make  it  clear. 


á far;  a pale;  6 eve;  é there;  o note;  oo  room. 


The  Spanish  Language, 


241 


21.  Pues  no  tiene  V.  razón^  en  burlarse  de  ese  atrevido 
bandolero,  a quien^  llama  V.  un  medio  muerto  de 
hambre.  No  tengo  ni  pizca^  de  vergüenza  y no 
me  creo^  un  cobarde,  pero  mejor  lucharía  con  tres 
desesperados  del  oeste  que  con  ese  terror  de  Cuba 
a quien  todo  el  mundo  teme,  (bóor-lárr'-sé  á-tra> 
vé'-do  ko-várr'-dé  má-‘horr'  dársés-pá-rá'-dós  o'^és'- 
té  térr-rorr'  ké-én'). 


V.  no  tiene  razón, 
Ellos  no  tienen  razón, 
Yo  no  tenía  razón, 
¿No  tengo  yo  razón? 
El  no  tenía  razón. 

El  tenía  razón, 


You  are  wrong. 
They  are  wrong, 
I was  wrong. 
Am  I wrong? 
He  was  wrong. 
He  was  right. 


2 Quien  (sing.),  quienes  (plur.),  who^  whom,  whoever,  whomso- 
ever  is  a relative  pronoun  referring  to  both  genders,  and  is  used 
in  reference  to  persons  only: 


Los  señores  con  quienes  hablé, 
han  partido, 

Las  señoras  a quienes  vimos 
son  inglesas, 


The  gentlemen  with  whom  I 
• talked  have  left. 

The  ladies  whom  we  saw  are 
English. 


3 Ni  pizca,  not  even  a little  hit.  No  tengo  ni  pizca  de  vergüenza, 
I am  not  in  the  least  ashamed  of  myself,  is  an  idiomatic  expression. 

* Creer,  to  believe,  is  regular,  except  that  the  diphthong  ie  and  io 
must  always  be  consonantized.  Thus: 


á far;  á pale;  e eve;  é there;  ó note;  00  room. 


242 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


2 2.  Now,  here  you  have  some  examples  of  the  idiom- 
atic use  of  ‘‘tener.^'  I trust  they  are  quite  clear 
to  you.  (Literally:  Already  see  you  these  ex- 

amples of  the  use  idiomatic  of  ‘ ‘tener. (I)  hope 
that  it  may  see  you  clearly). 

23.  Oh  perfectly  so.  But  tell  me,  are  there  any  other 
expressions  in  which  “tener^^  is  used? 


Indicative  Mode. 

Subjunctive  Mode. 

Presente. 

creo, 

I believe. 

crea. 

I may  believe. 

crees, 

thou  helievest. 

creas, 

thou  mayst  believe. 

cree. 

he  believes. 

crea. 

he  may  believe. 

creemos 

we  believe. 

creamos. 

we  may  believe. 

creéis. 

ye  believe. 

creáis. 

ye  may  believe. 

creen. 

they  believe. 

é 

crean. 

Imperfecto, 

they  may  believe. 

creía, 

I believed. 

creyera. 

I might  believe. 

creías. 

thou  believedst. 

creyeras. 

thou  mightst  believe. 

creía. 

he  believed. 

creyera, 

he  might  believe. 

creíamos. 

we  believed. 

creyéramos. 

we  might  believe. 

creíais. 

ye  believed. 

creyerais, 

ye  might  believe. 

creían. 

they  believed. 

creyeran. 

Definido. 

they  might  believe. 

creí, 

I believed. 

creyese. 

I might  believe. 

creiste, 

thou  believedst. 

creyeses. 

thou  might  believe. 

creyó. 

he  believed. 

creyese. 

he  might  believe. 

creimos. 

we  believed. 

creyésemos. 

we  might  believe. 

creisteis, 

ye  believed. 

creyeseis. 

ye  might  believe. 

creyeron. 

they  believed. 

creyesen. 

Futuro. 

they  might  believe. 

creeré. 

I shall  believe. 

creyere. 

I should  believe. 

creerás. 

thou  wilt  believe. 

creyeres. 

thou  wouldst  believe. 

creerá. 

he  will  believe. 

creyere. 

he  would  believe. 

á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  G note;  00  room. 


The  Spanish  Language, 


243 


22.  Ya  ve  V.  estos  ejemplos  del  uso  idiomático  de  te- 
ner. Espero  que  lo  vea  V,  claro. 

23.  Sí,  perfectamente.  Pero  dígame  V.,  hay^  otras 
expresiones  con  las  que  se  usa  el  verbo  tener? 


creeremos, 

creeréis, 

creerán. 


creería, 

creerías, 

creería, 

creeríamos, 

creeríais, 

creerían. 


we  shall  believe, 
ye  will  believe, 
they  will  believe. 
Condicional, 

I should  believe, 
thou  wouldst  believe, 
he  would  believe, 
we  should  believe, 
ye  would  believe, 
they  would  believe. 


creyéremos,  we  should  believe, 
creyéreis,  ye  would  believe, 

creyeren,  they  would  believe. 

Imperativo, 


cree  (tú), 
crea  (él.), 
crea  V., 
creamos, 
creed. 


believe, 

let  him  believe, 
believe, 
let  us  believe, 
believe  {ye). 


crean  (ellos),  let  them  believe. 


1 The  conjugation  of  “haber’ ^ when  used  impersonally,  is  per- 
fectly regular.  The  present  tense  alone  is  irregular  and  forms  hay, 
there  isy  there  are. 


MODO  INDICATIVO. 

Hay,  there  is  or  there  are. 

Había,  there  was  or  there  were. 
Hubo,  there  was  or  there  were. 
Habrá,  there  will  or  shall  be. 
Habría,  there  should  or  would  be. 


MODO  SUBJUNTIVO. 

Haya,  there  may  be. 

Hubiera,  there  might  be. 
Hubiese,  there  might  be. 

Si  hubiera,  or  si  hubiese,  if 
there  should  be  or  if  there 
were. 


Examples. 


Hay  un  hombre  en  la  calle. 

Hay  dos  mil  personas  el  el  teatro. 

Hubo  una  exposición  universal 
en  Chicago  el  año  1893. 
Habría  baile  esta  noche  si  hu- 
biera (or  hubiese)  dinero 
para  pagar  la  música. 

Hay  is  a contraction  of  ha  witt 
ha-y  there  is,  there  are  (Fr.  il  y a) 


There  is  a man  in  the  street. 

There  are  two  thousand  persons 
in  the  theatre. 

There  was  a universal  exhibition 
in  Chicago  in  the  year  1893. 

There  would  be  a ball  this  eve- 
ning, if  there  were  money 
to  pay  for  the  music, 
the  now  obsolete  y (Lat.  ihi,  y) 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  0 note;  00  room. 


244 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


24.  Oh  yes,  we  employ  it  for  instance  in  regard  to  the 
age  of  persons.  Thus  we  say:  How  old  are  you? 
How  old  may  his  sister  be?  I don’t  know  ex- 
actly how  old  she  is,  but  I think  she  is  twenty- 
one  or  twenty-two.  I did  not  think  she  was  as  old 
as  that.  (Literally:  Yes,  it  we  employ  for  instance 
when  (we)  speak  of  the  age  (la  edad)  of  the  per- 
sons, thus  we  say  (verbigracia):  How  many  years 
have  you?  How  many  years  can  have  his  sister 
(su  hermana)?  Not  (I)  know  exactly  how  many 
years  (she)  has,  but  (I)  believe  that  (she)  has  some 
twenty  and  one  or  twenty  and  two.  Not  (I)  be- 
lieved that  (she)  had  so  many). 

25.  This  mode  of  expression  is  similar  to  the  French 
way.  (Literally:  This  manner  (manera)  of  to  ex- 
press one’s  self  is  similar  to  the  of  the  French). 

26.  Precisely  so.  We  also  use  tener  in  regard  to  de- 
scriptions of  the  size  of  rivers  or  dimensions  gen- 
erally, as  for  example:  This  river  is  eighty  feet 
broad  and  fifty  feet  deep.  (Literally:  Thus  (it) 
is.  Also  (we)  use  the  verb  ‘‘tener”  when  (v\re) 
speak  of  the  size  (del  tamaño)  of  the  rivers  (los 
ríos)  or  dimensions  (dimensiones)  in  general,  for 
example:  this  river  has  eighty  feet  (pies)  of  breadth 
(ancho)  and  fifty  feet  of  depth  (profundidad). 


The  compound  tenses  are  found 
habido  instead  of  hay  habido,  viz.: 
MODO  INDICATIVO. 

Ha  habido,  there  has  been. 

Había  habido,  there  had  been. 

Hubo  habido,  there  had  been. 

Habrá  habido,  there  shall  or  will 
have  been. 


regularly.  The  present  is  ha 

MODO  SUBJUNTIVO. 

Hubiera  habido,  there  might 
have  been. 

Hubiese  habido,  there  might 
have  been. 


á far;  a pale;  6 eve;  é there;  5 note;  00  room. 


The  Spanish  Language, 


245 


24.  Si,  lo  empleamos  por  ejemplo  cuando  hablamos  de 

la  edad  de  las  personas,  verbigracia:  ¿ cuántos 

años  tiene  V.^? 

I Cuántos  años  puede  tener  su  hermana?  No  sé 
exactamente  cuantos  años  tiene,  pero  creo  que 
tiene  unos  veintiuno  o veintidós. 

No  creía  que  tenía  tantos. 

25.  Esta  manera  de  expresarse  es  semejante  a la  de  los 
franceses,  (má-na'-rá  sá-má-‘hán'-t}^  frán-thá'-sés) . 

26.  Así  es.  También  usamos  el  verbo  tener  cuando 
hablamos  del  tamaño  de  los  ríos  o dimensiones  en 
general;  por  ejemplo:  Este  río  tiene  ochenta  pies 
de  ancho  y cincuenta  pies  de  profimdidad.  (ré"-5 
án'-cho  pro-fóbn-dé-dád'). 


Examples. 


Habría  habido,  there  should  or 
would  have  been, 

Haya  habido,  there  may  have 
been. 

Hoy  ha  habido  un  accidente  en 
la  calle. 

Habrá  habido  muchos  cambios. 


(Si)  hubiera,  or  (si)  hubiese 
habido,  (if)  there  had  or 
should  have  been. 


There  has  been  an  accident  in 
the  street  to-day. 

There  will  have  been  many 
changes. 

There  would  have  been  more 
people  in  the  theatre  if  it 
had  not  rained. 

1 Instead  of:  ¿Cuántos  años  tiene  V.?  we  can  also  say:  ¿Qué 
edad  tiene  V.? 


Habría  habido  más  gente  en  el 
teatro  si  no  hubiese  llovido. 


Tengo  treinta  años, 

En  mil  ochocientos  ochenta  y 
ocho  tenía  ventiocho. 

Mi  hermano  tendrá  mañana  diez 
y siete  años. 


I am  thirty  years  old. 

In  1888  I was  twenty-eight. 

My  brother  will  be  seventeen  to- 
morrow. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


246 


The  Rosenthal  Method, 


27.  What  are  the  dimensions  of  this  room? — I think 

it  is  about  twenty-five  feet  long  by  fifteen  wide. 
(Literally:  What  dimensions  (dimensiones)  has 

this  room? — (I)  believe  that  (it)  will  have  some 
twenty-five  feet  of  length  (largo)  by  (por)  fifteen 
of  breadth). 

28.  This  house  is  about  sixty  feet  high,  isn’t  it? — ^At 
least  eighty!  (Literally:  This  house  has  sixty  feet 
of  height  (alto),  not  is  (it)  so? — (It)  has  at  least 
(a  lo  menos)  eighty  feet). 

29.  Do  I find  all  these  idioms  in  the  grammar?  (Lit- 
erally: Are  found  (se  encuentran)  all  these  idioms 
in  the  grammar  (la  gramática)? 

30.  Certainly,  and  you  ought  to  study  them  carefully 
and  practice  them  until  they  become  quite  familiar 
to  you.  (Literally:  Certainly  (ciertamente),  and 
ought  you  to  study  them  with  attention  (atención) 
and  practice  them  (practicarlos)  until  that  (hasta 
que)  may  familiarize  yourself  (se  familiarice)  with 
them). 

31.  Another  peculiarity  of  ^^tener”  we  have  noted  be- 
fore, and  that  is  the  use  of  ^‘tengo  que”  for  the 
English  must.” 

32.  Allow  me  to  interrupt  you  for  a moment.  Is  this 
the  only  mode  of  expression  you  have  for  our  ‘^must”  ? 
(la  única  forma  de  expresión). 


^ Other  peculiarities  in  the  use  of  tener  are  given  in  Part  X. 
Tener  algo  malo  means  to  have  a pain^  a sore  or  an  ache  some- 
where f and  is  used  with  the  definite  article,  as: 

Tengo  la  mano  mala,  I have  a sore  hand. 

Tiene  los  pies  malos,  His  feet  are  sore. 

Tengo  la  rodilla  mala.  I have  a sore  knee. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  0 note;  00  room. 


The  Spanish  Language. 


247 


27.  ¿ Qué  dimensiones  tiene  este  cuarto? — Creo  que 
tendrá  unos  veinticinco  pies  de  largo  por  quince 
de  ancho,  (pé-és') . 

28.  Esta  casa  tiene  sesenta  pies  de  alto,  ¿ no  es  así? — 
Tiene^  a lo  menos  ochenta  pies. 

29.  ¿Se  encuentran  todos  estos  modismos  en  la  gra- 
mática? 

30.  Ciertamente,  y debe  V.  estudiarlos  con  atención  y 
practicarlos  hasta  que  se  familiarice  V.  con  ellos, 
(the^ érr-tá-mén'-ty  fá-me-lé'^á-re'-thy). 


31.  Otra  peculiaridad  del  verbo  “tener’’  hemos  ya 
notado,  y es  el  uso  de  “tengo  que”  por  “/  musV^ 
del  inglés 

32.  Permítame  interrumpirle  un  momento.  ¿ Es  esta 
la  única  forma  de  expresión  que  tienen  Vds.  por 
nuestro  ^^musí ’ ? (oo'-né-ká) . 


The  definite  article  is  also  used 
are  described: 

Ella  tiene  los  ojos  azules, 

Tienen  los  pies  grandes, 

Tiene  la  nariz  grande, 

Tengo  las  manos  y los  pies  fríos, 

¿ Tiene  V.  las  manos  frías? 


when  moral  or  physical  qualities 

She  has  blue  eyes. 

They  have  large  feet. 

He  has  a big  nose. 

My  hands  and  feet  are  cold. 

Are  your  hands  cold? 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  0 note;  00  room. 


248 


The  Rosenthal  Method, 


33.  By  no  means.  We  use  either  tener  que^  haber  de, 
hay  que,  es  necesario,  es  preciso,  es  menester  or  deber, 
The  latter,  however,  can  only  be  used  when  a 
moral  obligation  or  duty  is  expressed.  In  such 
cases  musV^  can  always  be  changed  to  ought 
to,^^  You  understand  me,  don’t  you?  (Una  obli- 
gación moral.  Un  deber). 

34.  Yes,  perfectly,  and  for  this  reason  we  say  in  our 
Main  Sentence:  ^^Debo  estarme  aquí,”  because  a 
duty  is  expressed  and  not  a necessity  (una  necesi- 
dad). 

35.  Precisely  so.  Now  please  form  some  examples 
with  tener  que,  haber  de  and  hay  que, 

36.  Allow  me  to  ask  you  if  there  is  any  difference  be- 
tween these  expressions. 

37.  There  is  no  difference  whatever  between  haber  de 

and  tener  que.  Both  expressions  are  as  synonym- 
ous as:  am  obliged  to  go  to  my  office”  and 

must  go  to  my  office.” 

38.  But  what  about  hay  que?  How  is  this  expression 
used?  (=But  how  is  used  hay  que)} 

39.  Hay  que  signifies  must  in  a general  sense  and  cor- 
responds exactly  to  the  French  il  faut  when  used 
without  a personal  pronoun.  For  instance:  It  will 
be  necessary  to  read  these  books  for  they  are  stand- 
ard works  (=for  (they)  are  of  first  order  (órden). 


1 Compare  our  Main  Sentence  on  page  61.  ¿ Qué  quiere  V.  hacer 

esta  mañana?  Quisiera  salir  para  Méjico  por  el  primer  tren,  pero 
no  me  es  posible,  porque  espero  a un  amigo  de  Chicago  y debo 
estarme  en  Veracruz  hasta  que  llegue  el  vapor. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


The  Spanish  Language, 


249 


33.  Por  supuesto  que  no.  Usamos  tener  que,  haber  de, 
hay  que,  es  necesario,  es  preciso,  es  menester  o el 
verbo  deber.  Este  se  usa  cuando  se  quiere  expresar 
una  obligación  moral  o un  deber.  En  estos  casos 
se  puede  cambiar  el  musV^  por  ‘^7  ought  to.” 
¿ Me  entiende  V.,  no  es  verdad?  (na>tha-sá'-re^o 
prá-th0'-so  má-nés-térr'  mó-rál'). 

34.  Sí,  perfectamente,  y por  esta  razón  decimos  en  la 

frase  primera:  ‘^Debo  estarme  aquí,”  porque  se 

expresa  un  deber  y no  una  necesidad.^  (ná-thá- 
sé-dád'). 

35.  Justamente.  Ahora  sírvase  formar  unos  ejemplos 
con  tener  que,  haber  de  y hay  que. 

36.  Permítame  preguntarle  si  hay  alguna  diferencia 
entre  estas  expresiones. 

37.  No  hay  ninguna  diferencia  entre  haber  de  y tener 
que.  Las  dos  expresiones  son  tan  sinónimas  como: 

am  obliged  to  go  to  my  office”  and  must  go  to 
my  office.”  “Tengo  que  ir  al  despacho”  o “He  de  ir 
al  despacho.” 

38.  ¿ Pero  cómo  se  usa  hay  que? 

39.  Hay  que  significa  must  en  un  sentido  general  y 
corresponde  exactamente  al  il  faut  del  francés, 
cuando  se  usa  sin  pronombre  personal.  Por  ejem- 
plo: Hay  que  leer^  estos  libros  pues  son^  de  primer 
orden,  (ség-né-fé'-ká  él  fo). 


No  actual  necessity  is  expressed  here,  but  a moral  obligation, 
consequently  deber  must  be  used. 

2 See  footnotes,  pp.  250  and  251. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  0 note;  00  room. 


2$0 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


40.  Now  let  me  give  you  some  examples  (put  you 
(ponerle)  some  exámples). 

41.  Pardon  me  if  I ask  you  still  another  question. 

How  are  es  menester^  es  necesario,  es  preciso  used? 
(Literally:  Pardon  you  that  you  (I)  may  make 

other  question.  How  are  used  es  menester,  es 
necesario,  es  preciso)? 


1 Verbs  ending  in  eer  as  creer,  to  believe,  leer,  to  read,  are  irregular 
in  so  far  as  they  change  the  diphthongs  ie  and  io  into  ye  and  yo 
for  euphony’s  sake.  In  all  other  forms  they  are  regular. 

These  irregularities  appear  in  the  Gerundio,  Pasado  Definido, 
and  the  Imperfecto  (ist  and  2nd  form)  of  the  Subjunctive. 

Pasado  Definido.  i.  Imperfecto  subjuntivo. 


Yo  lei. 

I read. 

Yo  leyera. 

I might  read. 

V.  leyó. 

you  read. 

V.  leyera. 

you  might  read. 

él  leyó. 

he  read. 

él  leyera. 

he  might  read. 

nos  leimos. 

we  read. 

nos.  leyéramos. 

we  might  read. 

V.  V.  leyeron. 

you  read. 

V.  V.  leyeran. 

you  might  read. 

ellos  leyeron. 

they  read. 

ellos  leyeran. 

they  might  read. 

2.  Imperfecto  subjimtivo. 


Yo  leyese, 

V.  leyese, 
él  leyese, 
nos  leyésemos, 
V.  V.  leyesen, 
ellos  leyesen-. 


/ might  read, 
you  might  read, 
he  might  read, 
we  might  read, 
you  might  read, 
they  might  read. 


Gerundio:  leyendo,  reading. 

Proveer,  to  provide,  (Participio  provisto),  poseer,  to  possess,  and 
a few  other  verbs  are  conjugated  in  the  same  way. 

2 The  pupil  should  master  the  conjugations  of  ser  and  estar  now. 
Compare  Part  X. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


The  Spanish  Language^ 


251 


40.  Ahora  déjeme  ponerle  unos  ejemplos. 

41.  Dispense  V.  que  le  haga  otra  pregunta.  ¿ Cómo 
se  usan  es  menester,  es  necesario,  es  preciso? 


Ser, 

To  be. 

Modo  Indicativo. 

Pres : soy. 

es.  es. 

somos. 

son. 

son. 

Imp:  era. 

era.  era. 

éramos. 

eran. 

eran. 

Def : fui. 

fué.  fué. 

fuimos. 

fueron. 

fueron. 

Fut:  seré. 

será.  será. 

seremos. 

serán. 

serán. 

Cond:  sería. 

sería.  sería. 

seríamos. 

serían. 

serían. 

Modo  Subjtmtivo. 

Pres:  sea. 

sea.  sea. 

seamos. 

sean. 

sean. 

Imp:^  fuera. 

fuera.  fuera. 

fuéramos. 

fueran. 

fueran. 

Imp  :2  fuese. 

fuese.  fuese. 

fuésemos. 

fuesen. 

fuesen. 

Fut:  fuere. 

fuere.  fuere. 

fuéremos. 

fueren. 

fueren. 

Gerundio: 

siendo 

Participio; 

; sido. 

Estar, 

To  be. 

Modo  indicativo. 


Pres: 

Imp: 

Def: 

Fut: 

Cond: 


estoy,  está.  está.  estamos.  están, 
estaba,  estaba,  estaba,  estábamos,  estaban, 
estuve,  estuvo,  estuvo,  estuvimos,  estuvieron, 
estaré,  estará,  estará,  estaremos,  estarán, 
estaría,  estaría,  estaría,  estaríamos,  estarían. 


están. 

estaban. 

estuvieron. 

estarán. 

estarían. 


Pres: 


Imp:i 


Imp:2 

Fut: 


Modo  subjuntivo. 

esté,  esté,  esté,  estemos, 

estén. 

estuviera,  estuviera,  estuviera,  estuviéramos, 
estuvieran. 

estuviese,  estuviese,  estuviese,  estuviésemos, 
estuviesen. 

estuviere,  estuviere,  estuviere,  estuviéremos, 
estuvieren. 

Genmdio:  estando. 

Participio : estado. 


estén, 

estuvieran, 

estuviesen, 

estuvieren. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  ó note;  00  room. 


252 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


VOCABUI.ARIO. 

Los  Platos. 

El  jarro  para  la  leche 
(‘hárr'-ró  pá'-rá  la  la'- 
chS^). 

El  vaso  para  el  vino  (ve'- 
no). 

Un  vaso  de  vino. 

La  taza  (tá'-thá). 

El  plato  (plá'-tó). 

El  tirabuzón  (té-ra-boó- 
thon'). 

Sirva  V.  el  café. 

Quite  V.  la  mesa  (ké'-t^). 

El  Viaje. 

Hacer  un  viaje. 

Dar  un  viaje. 

¿ Va  V.  a hacer  un  viaje? 

Estoy  para^  salir  para  Eu 
ropa  (á"^oó-ró'-pá). 

Hacer  un  viaje;  partir; 
salir;  ir. 

¿ A dónde  va  V.  ? 

Parto  para  Alemania  (á-la- 
má'-ne'^á).* 

Salir  de  la  ciudad  (the^^oo 
dad'). 

Salgo  de  la  ciudad  ma- 
ñana. 


VOCABULARY. 

The  Dishes. 

The  milk-jug. 

The  wine-glass. 

A glass  of  wine. 

The  cup. 

The  saucer. 

The  corkscrew. 

Serve  the  coffee. 

Take  off  the  things;  clear 
the  table. 

The  Journey;  the  Voyage. 

To  make  a journey. 

To  take  a journey. 

Are  you  going  to  take  a 
journey? 

I am  on  the  point  of  leaving 
for  Europe. 

To  take  a journey;  to  de- 
part; to  leave;  to  go. 

Where  are  you  going? 

I am  leaving  for  Germany. 

To  go  out  of  town. 

I am  going  out  of  town  to- 
morrow. 


1 Estar  para  means  to  he  on  the  point  of. 


The  Spanish  Language, 


253 


I Está  su  esposo  de  V.  fuera 
de  la  ciudad?  (foo'^ 
á'-rá) . 

I Tuvo  V.  buen  viaje? 

¡Adiós;  qué  tenga  V.  feliz 
viaje!  (fa-lethO. 

El  Ferrocarril. 

(ál  férr'-ró-kárr-rel). 

El  paradero  (pá-rá-dé'-ró). 

La  estación  (és-tá-the^ 

5n'). 

I De  cuál  estación  sale  V.? 
(sá'-lf). 

Salgo  de  la  estación  Unión 
(óó-ne^ón'). 

El  Billete. 

El  despacho  de  billetes  (bo- 
letos; boletas;  papele- 
tas). 

I Me  hace  V.  el  favor  de 
decirme,  en  dónde  está 
el  despacho  de  billetes? 

I Dónde  compro  el  billete? 

La  segunda  puerta  a la  de- 
recha (a  la  izquierda). 

De  este  lado  (lá'-do). 

Al  otro  lado. 

En  frente.  Siga  V.  dere- 
cho (sé'-gá). 


Is  your  husband  out  of 
town? 

Did  you  have  a good  jour- 
ney? 

Good-bye.  I hope  you  will 
have  a pleasant  jour- 
ney! 

The  Railroad. 

IThe  depot;  the  station. 
The  terminus. 

From  which  station  are  you 
going? 

I leave  from  the  Union  De- 
pot. 

The  Ticket. 

The  ticket-ofhce. 

The  booking-office. 

Could  you  please  tell  me 
where  the  ticket-office 
is? 

Where  do  I get  my  tickets 
please? 

Second  door  to  the  right 
(to  the  left). 

On  this  side. 

On  the  other  side. 

Right  opposite.  Straight 
before  you  (follow  you 
straight). 


254 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


Sírvase  darme  un  billete 
para  Veracruz. 

Un  billete  de  primera. 

Un  billete  de  segunda. 

Un  billete  de  tercera. 

¿ Desea  V.  un  billete  de  pri- 
mera o de  segimda? 

El  billete  de  vuelta. 

El  billete  de  excursión  (éx- 
kóórr-thé"^ón). 

El  billete  de  ida  y vuelta 
(é'-dá). 

¿ Para  cuánto  tiempo  sirve 
la  boleta  de  retomo 
(ra-torr'-nó). 

Los  billetes  de  ida  y vuelta 
sirven  para  un  mes. 

El  billete  directo  (dé-rék'- 
tó). 

¿ Puede  V.  darme  un  billete 
directo  hasta  Chihua- 
hua (ché-hwá'-hwá)  ? 

¿ Cuánto  vale  un  billete  de 
aquí  a Orizaba  (o-ré- 
thá'-vá)  ? 

El  portero  (porr-ta'-ro). 

El  mozo  (mo'-tho). 

Sírvase  llamar  al  portero 
(lyá-márr'). 

Portero,  sírvase  facturar 
(marcar)  mi  equipaje 
(a-ké-pá'-^hj^). 


Please  give  me  a ticket  to 
Vera  Cmz. 

A first-class  ticket. 

A second-class  ticket. 

A third-class  ticket. 

Do  you  want  a first  or 
second-class  ticket? 

The  return  ticket. 

- The  round-trip  ticket. 

For  how  long  are  retiun- 
tickets  good? 

Return-tickets  are  good  for 
a month. 

The  through-ticket. 

Can  you  give  me  a through 
ticket  to  Chihuahua? 

How  much  is  a ticket  from 
here  to  Orizaba? 

The  porter. 

The  waiter. 

Call  the  porter  please. 

Porter,  please  check  my 
baggage  (my  luggage). 


The  Spanish  Language, 


255 


I Cuánto  equipaje  tiene  V.  ? 

El  baúl;  los  baúles. 

Sírvase  V.  poner  placa  a mi 
baúl  para  Méjico  (plá'- 
ká). 

Sírvase  V.  facturar  mi  baúl 
para  Méjico. 

El  mío  es  un  baúl  de  cuero 
(kwa'-ro). 

Un  baúl  con  cubierta  de 
lona  (koó-ve^érr'-tá). 

Un  baúl  de  cuero  de  suelas 
(swa'-lás). 

Un  baúl  con  cubierta  de 
metal  (ma-tál'). 

Un  baúl  pequeño  (pa-kén'- 
yó). 

Un  baúl  grande. 

Un  baúl  aladrado  (kwá- 
drá'-do) . 

Este  es  mi  baúl. 

I Dónde  se  puso  mi  baúl? 
(póo'-só). 

La  maleta  (mádá'-tá). 

El  saco  de  noche. 

La  sombrerera  (sóm-brá- 
ra'-rá). 

Tenga  V.  cuidado^  con  mi 
sombrerera  (kwé-dá'- 
do). 

La  placa^  (plá'-ká). 

La  contraseña. 

El  talon. ^ 


How  many  pieces  have  you  ? 
The  trunk;  the  trunks. 

^ Please  check  my  trunk 
for  Mexico. 

Mine  is  a leather-trunk. 

A canvas-covered  trunk. 

A sole-leather  trunk. 

A metal-covered  trunk. 

A small  trunk. 

A large  trunk. 

A square  trunk. 

This  is  my  trunk. 

Where  was  my  trunk  put? 

I The  valise. 

The  hat-box. 

Be  careful  with  my  hat- 
box. 

I The  check. 


Tenga  V.  cuidado!  Take  care!  Look  out! 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


256 

Deme  su  billete  y le  traeré 
su  talón  (contraseña) 
inmediatamente  (trá-ñ- 
ra'). 

El  equipaje  libre  (lé'-br^). 

Los  ferrocarriles  mejicanos 
permiten  solamente 
cincuenta  libras  de 
equipaje  libre  (pérr- 
mé'-tén). 

El  peso  (pá'-só). 

El  exceso  de  peso  (ék-sá'- 

só). 

I Tengo  exceso  de  peso? 

Tiene  V.  dos  cientas  libras 
de  exceso. 

No  se  debe  viajar  por  Mé- 
jico con  mucho  equi- 
page; es  demasiado  cos- 
toso (dá-má-sé'^á-dó 
kós-to'-so). 

Mi  equipaje  fué  marcado 
para  Veracruz.  He 
perdido  mi  talón  (pérr- 
dé'-dó). 

El  salón  de  espera. 

(sá-lón'  da  és-pá'-rá). 

Sírvase  decirme  dónde  está 
el  salón  de  espera. 


Please  give  me  your  ticket; 
I’ll  bring  you  your 
check  at  once. 

The  free  baggage. 

Mexican  railroads  allow 
only  fifty  potmds  of 
baggage  free. 

The  weight. 

The  overweight. 

Have  I any  overweight? 

You  have  two  himdred 
pounds  overweight. 

You  ought  not  to  travel 
with  much  baggage  in 
Mexico;  it  is  too  dear. 

My  baggage  was  checked 
for  Vera  Cruz.  I have 
lost  my  check. 

The  Waiting  Room. 

Pray,  where  is  the  waiting- 
room? 


1 Placa  is  the  Mexican  word  for  a railway  baggage  check;  talón 
is  a receipt  for  baggage. 


The  Spanish  Language, 


257 


Se  abren  las  puertas  diez 
minutos  antes  de  la 
salida  del  tren  (sá-lé'- 
dá). 


El  buffet. 

Entrar.  Subir.  Montar. 

El  viajero  (vé'^á-^ha'-ro). 

El  pasajero  (pá-sá-'ha'-ró). 

i Pasageros,  al  tren! 

¡ Listos  (lés'-tós)l 

El  Tren;  los  trenes. 

El  tren  directo  (dé-rék'-to). 

El  tren  expreso  (éks-pra'- 
so). 

El  tren  correo  (kórr-ra'-o). 

El  tren  mixto. 

El  tren  de  carga  (kárr'-gá). 

El  conductor  (kOn-dóok- 
torr'). 

¿ Es  este  el  tren  para  Vera- 
cruz? 

Salir.  Partir.  Ir. 

El  tren  sale  de  aquí  a un 
minuto. 

Sírvase  entrar;  el  tren  va 
a salir. 

¿ Cuántos  trenes  hay  al  día 
para  Veracruz? 

I Qué  tren  es  el  próximo 
para  Méjico? 


The  doors  open  ten  min- 
utes before  the  train 
leaves  (are  opened  the 
doors  ten  minutes  be- 
fore the  departure  of 
the  train). 

The  Buffet. 

To  Get  In. 

The  traveler. 

The  passenger. 

All  aboard. 

The  Train;  the  Trains. 

I The  express-train. 

The  mail  train. 

The  mixed  train. 

The  freight  train. 

The  conductor. 

Is  this  the  Veracruz  train? 

To  leave;  to  start;  to  go. 

The  train  leaves  in  a min- 
ute. 

Pray  get  in;  the  train  is 
going  to  start. 

How  many  trains  a day  are 
there  for  Veracruz? 

What  is  the  next  train  for 
Mexico? 


The  Rosenthal  Method, 


258 

^ I Dónde  está  el  tren  para 
Chihuahua? 

El  carro  de  ferrocarril. 

El  compartimiento  (kom- 
párr-té-mé'^én'-to) . 

¿ Dónde  está  el  comparti- 
miento de  las  señoras? 

El  asiento  (á-sé'^én'-to). 

Sentarse. 

Sentémonos  en  este  com- 
partimiento. 

Tomado;  reservado. 

Libre;  desocupado. 

¿ Está  tomado  este  asien- 
to? No,  está  desocu- 
pado. 

La  esquina  (és-ke'-ná). 

El  asiento  de  esquina. 

Tome  V.  un  asiento  de  es- 
quina. 

Sentarse. 

Cómodo. 

Incómodo. 

¿ Está  V.  cómodo? 

Sí  no  está  V.  cómodo  tome 
V.  este  asiento. 

No  entre  V.  CvSte  comparti- 
miento, es  para  se- 
ñoras. 


Where  is  the  train  for  Chi- 
huahua? 

The  railway  carriage. 

The  compartment. 

Where  is  the  ladies’  com- 
partment ? 

The  seat. 

To  Take  a Seat. 

Let  us  take  a seat  in  this 
compartment. 

Taken;  engaged. 

Vacant,  free,  disengaged. 

Is  this  seat  taken?  No,  it 
is  vacant. 

The  comer. 

The  comer-seat. 

Take  a comer-seat. 

To  be  seated. 

Comfortable. 

Uncomfortable. 

Are  you  comfortable? 

If  you  are  not  comfortable 
take  this  seat. 

Don’t  get  in  here,  this  is  a 
ladies’  compartment. 


LiDHMnr 

THE 

UNiVERSilY  OF  ILLiNO!'' 

ROSENTHAL’S 

COMMON-SENSE  METHOD 

OF 

PRAaiCAL  LINGUISTRY 

THE 

Spanish  Language 

BY 

DR.  RICHARD  S.  ROSENTHAL 
Author  of  the  Meisterschaft  System,  etc.,  etc 

Haulenbeek  Corrected  Edition 
Revised  1917 

IN  TEN  PARTS 


NEW  YORK  : : LONDON 
The  International  College  of  Langus^es 


COPYRIGHT  1905, 

BY 

THE  INTERNATIONAL  COLLEGE  OF  LANGUAGES 

Entered  at 

Stationers'  Hall.  London.  Eng. 


The  Spanish  Language, 


259 


m 


CONTENTS. 


Tener  que,  hay  que 261 

Bank  and  Business  Expressions 268 

Time  of  Day 268 

In  a Store 270 

Main  Sentence 274 

Dates 278 

Boarding  House 284 

Vocabulary 288 


2ÓO  The  Rosenthal  Method. 

To  Be  Obliged,  etc.  Continuation. 

42.  Ah,  I am  glad  you  asked  me  this  question.  I ex- 
plained to  you  before  that  impersonal  verbs  are 
followed  by  the  subjunctive  mood,  unless  cer- 
tainty is  noted.  (Literally;  Ah!  (vaya),  I re- 
joice (me  alegro)  that  me  may  make  you  that 
question.  Already  you  (I)  explained  to  you,  that 
to  the  verbs  impersonal  them  follows  always  the 
mood  subjunctive,  unless  (a  menos  que)  may  be 
denoted  certainty  (certeza). 

43.  And  now  since  you  understand  everything  in  re- 
gard to  the  various  expressions  which  are  em- 
ployed for  the  English  must,  I want  you  to  form 
a number  of  sentences  with  them.  But  employ 
different  tenses  and  persons  if  you  please.  (Lit- 
erally: And  already  that  understand  you  all  the 
expressions  which  are  employed  for  the  must  of 
the  English,  (I)  wish  that  may  form  you  some 
phrases  with  them.  But  have  the  goodness  (la 
bondad)  of  to  employ  different  tenses  and  persons). 

44.  What  shall  they  be  about?  (About  (sobre)  what 
ought  (they)  be)? 

45.  About  anything  you  like,  provided  they  are  prac- 

tical phrases.  Talk  about  business,  for  instance. 
(Literally:  About  any  subject  (cualquier  cosa) 

which  you  may  please,  provided  (con  tal  que) 
(they)  may  be  phrases  practical.  Talk  about 
business  (negocios). 

^ The  Present  of  the  Subjunctive  Mood  is  generally  employed 
when  the  preceding  verb  stands  in  the  Present  or  Future  Indica- 
tive^  or  in  the  Imperative. 

Me  alegro  que  el  tiempo  favo-  I am  glad  the  weather  is  favor- 
rezca  la  fiesta.  able  to  the  festival. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


The  Spanish  Language, 


261 


Tener  Que,  Hay  Que,  etc. 

Continuación, 

42.  Vaya,  me  alegro  que  me  haga  V.^  esa  pregunta. 
Ya  le  expliqué  a V.  que  a los  verbos  impersonales 
les  sigue  siempre  el  Modo  Subjuntivo,  a menos 
que  se  denote  certeza,  (sé'-ghj^  se"^ém'-pr^  thérr- 
ta'-thá). 

43.  Y ya  que  entiende  V.  todas  las  expresiones  que 
se  emplean  por  el  must  del  inglés,  quiero  que  forme 
V.  algunas  frases  con  ellas.  Pero  tenga  la  bondad 
de  emplear  diferentes  tiempos  y personas,  (ém- 
pla'-án). 


44.  ¿ Sobre  qué  deben  ser? 

45.  Sobre  cualquier  cosa  que  V.  guste,^  con  tal  que 
sean  frases  prácticas.  Hable  V.  de  negocios, 
(kwál-ke'^érr'  na-go'-thé^5s). 


Será  preciso  que  se  quede,  It  will  he  necessary  for  him  to 

stay. 

Dígaselo  cuando  le  vea,  Tell  him  so  when  you  see  him, 

2 Cualquier  followed  by  que,  requires  the  verb  in  the  subjunctive 
mood: 


Cualquier  cosa  que  V.  diga,  Whatever  you  may  say. 

Cualquiera  que  V.  guste,  Whatever  you  please. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


2Ó2 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


46.  Shall  I form  single  phrases,  or  would  it  be  better 

to  work  out  a conversation?  (Literally:  Wish 

you  that  (I)  may  form  phrases  isolated  or  would 
(it)  be  better  that  (it)  might  be  a conversation)? 

47.  In  cases  of  this  kind  where  it  is  desirable  to  em- 
ploy practical  sentences,  a conversation  would  not 
be  so  well  adapted  as  disconnected  phrases;  for 
you  wiU  of  course  understand  that  from  isolated 
phrases  we  can  easily  progress  to  an  ordinary  con- 
versation. (Literally:  In  cases  like  this  in  which 
(it)  is  desired  to  use  phrases  practical,  a conver- 
sation not  would  be  as  good  as  (como)  phrases 
isolated:  since  ought  you  to  understand  that  of 
phrases  isolated  can  be  passed  easily  to  a conversa- 
tion ordinary). 

48.  I will  try  to  do  the  best  I can.  Let  me  think  a 

moment  and  then  I will  begin.  (Literally:  (I) 

shall  try  to  (de)  do  what  (I)  may  be  able.  Let 
me  you  think  a moment  and  then  (I)  shall  begin). 


^ The  Imperfect  of  the  Subjunctive  in  either  form  is  employed 
after  verbs  in  any  past  tense  in  the  Indicative  or  in  the  Conditional: 


Le  suplicaron  que  fuera  (o 
fuese)  a su  casa, 

Fué  - preciso  que  lo  hiciera  (o 
hiciese), 

Desearía  que  V.  me  hiciera  ese 
favor, 


They  begged  him  to  go  to  his 
house. 

It  was  necessary  for  him  to  do 
it. 

I wish  you  would  do  me  that 
favor. 


® Pensar,  to  thinks  and  empezar,  to  commence ^ belong  to  the  class 
of  slightly  irregular  verbs  which  change  the  stem-vowel  e into  ie 
throughout  the  singular  and  in  the  third  person  plural  of  the  present 
indicative  and  subjunctive,  and  in  the  same  persons  in  the  im- 
perative. 

Pensar,  pensando,  pensado,  to  think. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


The  Spanish  Language.  263 

46.  Quiere  V.,  que  forme  frases  sueltas  o sería  mejor 
que  fuese^  una  conversación?  (fóó-a'-sá). 


47.  En  casos  como  este  en  que  se  desea  usar  frases 
prácticas,  una  conversación  no  sería  tan  buena 
como  frases  sueltas;  pues  debe  V.  comprender 
que  de  frases  sueltas  puede  pasarse  fácilmente  a 
una  conversación  corriente. 


48.  Trataré  de  hacer  lo  que  pueda.  Déjeme  V.  pen- 
sar^ im  momento  y entonces  empezaré.^ 


Pres.  Ind:  pienso.  piensa.  piensa.  pensamos,  piensan. 

Pres.  Sub:  piense.  piense.  piense.  pensemos,  piensen. 

Imperat:  pensemos,  piensen,  piensen,  pensemos,  piensen. 

Empezar,  empezando,  empezado,  to  begin. 

Pres.  Ind:  empiezo.  empieza.  empieza.  empezamos, 

empiezan.  empiezan. 

Pres.  Sub:  empiece.  empiece.  empiece.  empecemos, 

empiecen.  empiecen. 

Imperat:  empiecen.  empecemos,  empiecen. 

The  use  of  c has  been  explained  before. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


2Ó4 


T'he  Rosenthal  Method, 


49.  Where  are  you  going?  You  seem  to  be  in  a hurry. 
(Literally:  To  where  go  you?  (It)  seems  that  are 
you  of  hurry  (de  pnsa)  ? 

50.  Indeed  I am  in  a hurry.  I must  go  to  the  bank  at 
once.  I have  to  pay  a note  and  have  but  ten 
minutes  left  to  go  there  and  transact  my  business. 
(Pay  a note  (un  pagaré)  and  not  have  but  ten 
minutes  in  order  to  arrive  there  and  make  the 
business). 

51.  Now  form  a few  phrases  in  regard  to  health.  You 
must  employ  our  idioms.  Put  the  phrase  into 
the  past  tense. 

52.  My  wife  was  taken  ill  last  night.  I was  obliged 
to  get  up  at  two  o’clock  and  get  a physician.  This 
morning  she  feels  a little  better,  but  she  will  have 
to  stay  in  bed  for  at  least  a week.  (Literally: 
My  wife  fell  (cayó)  ill  last  night  (anoche).  At 
two  o’clock  (a  las  dos)  I had  to  get  up  (levantarme) 
to  get  (buscar)  the  physician.  Already  (she)  is  a 
little  better,  but  (she)  will  have  to  stay  (estarse) 
in  bed  for  at  least  (por  lo  menos)  a week). 

^ Study  now  the  whole  conjugation  of 

It,  To  go. 

Modo  Indicativo. 


Pres: 

voy. 

va. 

va. 

vamos. 

van. 

van. 

Imp: 

iba. 

iba. 

iba. 

íbamos. 

iban. 

iban. 

Def: 

fui. 

fué. 

fué. 

fuimos. 

fueron. 

fueron. 

Fut: 

iré. 

irá. 

irá. 

iremos. 

irán. 

irán. 

Cond: 

iría. 

- iría. 

iría.  iríamos. 

Modo  Subjuntivo. 

irían. 

irían. 

Pres: 

vaya. 

vaya. 

vaya. 

vayamos. 

vayan. 

vayan. 

Imp:^ 

fuera. 

fuera. 

fuera. 

fuéramos. 

fueran. 

fueran. 

Imp  *.2 

fuese. 

fuese. 

fuese. 

fuésemos. 

fuesen. 

fuesen. 

Fut: 

fuere. 

fuere.  fuere. 
Gerundio: 
Participio : 

fuéremos. 
: yendo. 

: ido. 

fueren. 

fueren. 

á far; 

a pale; 

e eve;  é 

there;  ó note; 

00  room. 

The  Spanish  Language.  265 

49.  ¿A  dónde  va^  V.?  Parece  que  está  V.  de  prisa, 
(pré'-sá). 

50.  Sí,  estoy  de  prisa.  He  de  ir  al  banco  inmediata- 
mente. Tengo  que  pagar  un  pagaré  y no  tengo 
sino  diez  minutos  para  llegar  allí  y hacer  el  nego- 
cio. 

51.  Ahora  forme  V.  unas  frases  sobre  la  salud.  Debe 
V.  emplear  nuestros  modismos.  Ponga  la  frase 
en  el  pasado. 

52.  Mi  esposa  cayó^  enferma  anoche.  A las  dos  tuve 
que  levantarme  a buscar  el  médico.  Ya  está  un  , 
poco  mejor,  pero  tendrá  que  estarse  en  cama  por 
lo  menos  una  semana. 


2 Study  the  whole  conjugation  of  the  irregular  verb. 

Caer,  To  fall. 

Modo  Indicativo. 


Yo. 

Usted. 

Él. 

Nosotros. 

Ustedes. 

Éllos. 

Pres: 

caigo. 

cae. 

cae. 

caemos. 

caen. 

caen. 

Imp: 

caía. 

caía. 

caía. 

caíamos. 

caían. 

caían. 

Def: 

cai. 

cayó. 

cayó. 

caímos. 

cayeron. 

cayeron. 

Fut: 

caeré. 

caerá. 

caerá. 

caeremos. 

caerán. 

caerán. 

Cond: 

caería. 

caería. 

caería,  caeríamos. 

Modo  Subjuntivo. 

caerían. 

caerían. 

Pres: 

caiga. 

caiga. 

caiga. 

caigamos. 

caigan. 

caigan. 

Imp:i 

cayera. 

cayera. 

cayera. 

cayéremos. 

cayeran. 

cayeran. 

Imp:2 

cayese. 

cayese. 

cayese. 

cayésemos. 

cayesen. 

cayesen. 

Fut: 

cayere. 

cayere. 

cayere. 

cayéremos. 

cayeren. 

cayeren. 

Gerundio:  cayendo. 

Participio  pasado:  caído. 

Ya  caigo  en  ello,  now  I see;  now  I understand. — Las  ventanas 
caen  a la  plaza,  the  windows  look  on  {front)  the  square. — Caersele 
a uno  la  cara  de  vergüenza,  to  blush  with  shame. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


266 


The  Rosenthal  Method, 


53.  The  doctor  says  she  must  have  change  of  climate. 
He  wants  her  to  go  to  Mexico  and  pass  the  win- 
ter there.  (Literally:  Says  the  physician  that  (she) 
must  change  of  climate  (de  clima) . He  wants 
that  she  may  go  to  Mexico  in  order  to  pass  there 
the  winter). 

54.  I am  exceedingly  sorry.  Will  you  have  to  go 
with  her? 

55.  I must.  It  will  be  exceedingly  diflScult  for  me  to 
leave  my  business  for  any  length  of  time,  but  my 
wife’s  health  is  the  first  consideration  and  I must 
make  arrangements  to  accompany  her.  (Liter- 
ally: Yes.  Me  (it)  will  be  very  difficult  to  leave 
my  affairs  for  much  time,  but  the  health  of  my 
wife  is  first  (primero)  and  for  that  (por  lo  tanto) 
(I)  ought  to  arrange  (arreglar)  the  affairs  (las 
cosas)  in  order  to  be  able  to  accompany  her). 

56.  Now  form  a few  phrases  in  regard  to  any  subject 
you  like,  but  work  in  sometimes  haber  de  and  some- 
times the  other  expressions  for  must,  which  I have 
taught  you.  (Literally:  Now  form  some  few  (unas 
cuantas)  phrases  about  any  subject  (cualquier 
asunto)  -which  you  please,  but  employ  you  the 
verb  haber  de  and  sometimes  (algunas  veces)  other 
expressions  in  the  which  ought  to  be  used  the  must 
which  you  (I)  have  taught). 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  ó note;  00  room. 


The  Spanish  Language, 


267 


53.  Dice  el  médico  que  tiene  que  cambiár  de  clima. 
El  quiere  que  ella  vaya  a Méjico  para  pasar  allí 
el  invierno,  (klé'-má). 


54.  Lo  siento  mucho.  ¿ Tendrá  V.  que  ir  con  ella? 


55.  Sí.  Me  será  muy  difícil  de  dejar  mis  negocios  por 
mucho  tiempo,  pero  la  salud  de  mi  señora  es  primero 
y por  lo  tanto  debo  arreglar  las  cosas  para  poder 
acompañarla. 


56.  Ahora  forme  unas  cuantas  frases  sobre  cualquier 
asunto  que  V.  guste,  pero  emplee  V.  el  verbo  haber 
de  y algimas  veces  otras  expresiones  en  las  que 
debe  usarse  el  must  que  le  he  enseñado. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  5 note;  ó&  room. 


268 


The  Rosenthal  Method, 


57.  Have  we  to  go  to  the  bank  immediately?  Yes, 
sir,  we  must  go  at  once,  as  the  banks  close  at  three 
o^clock  (a  las  tres^).  I want  to  cash  this  draft. 
I need  some  Mexican  money.  I have  only  Amer- 
ican currency  with  me.  ( = I want  to  make  effect- 
ive (hacer  efectiva)  this  draft  (esta  letra).  I need 
(necesito)  money  Mexican  and  not  have  but  (sino) 
American). 


58.  When  have  I to  send  these  goods? — ^At  once. 

59.  Don’t  you  want  to  send  a dispatch  to  your  agent 
first  (antes)? — ^Yes,  I have  to  send  him  a telegram 
at  once  as  I must  leave  this  evening  (because  I 
need  to  leave  this  evening). 


1 Cerrar,  to  shut,  to  close,  is  regular  except  that  i is  inserted  before 
the  stem-vowel  e=ie  throughout  the  singular  and  in  the  third 
person  plural  of  the  present  indicative  and  subjunctive,  and  in  the 
same  persons  in  the  imperative: 

Yo.  Usted.  Él.  Nosotros.  Ustedes.  Ellos. 

Pres.  Ind:  cierro,  cierra,  cierra,  cerramos,  cierran,  cierran. 

Pres.  Subj : cierre,  cierre,  cierre,  cerremos,  cierren,  cierren. 

^ At,  when  relating  to  time,  is  expressed  by  a. 

The  word  o'clock  is  not  expressed  in  Spanish  when  the  hour  or 
time  of  day  is  indicated.  The  article  la  is  used  before  una  to  ex- 
press one  o'clock,  and  las  before  the  other  hours.  The  word 
hora  being  understood,  the  feminine  article  must  be  used.  Thus  we 
say: 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  0 note;  00  room. 


The  Spanish  Language, 


269 


57.  ¿ Hemos  de  ir  al  banco  inmediatamente? — Sí 
señor;  tenemos  que  ir  en  seguida  porque  los  bancos 
cierran^  a las  tres.^  Quiero  hacer  efectiva  esta 
letra.  Necesito  dinero  mejicano  y no  tengo  sino 
americano,  (sá-ghé'-dá  thé'^érr'-rán  a-fák-té'-va 
ná-thá-se'-tó). 


58.  ¿ Cuándo  he  de  enviar  esos  efectos? — Inmediata- 
mente. 


59.  ¿No  desea  V.  enviar  antes  tm  despacho  a su  agente? 
— Sí,  he  de  enviarle  un  telegrama  al  momento, 
porque  necesito  salir  esta  noche. 


Es  la  una, 

it  is  one  o'clock. 

Son  las  siete, 

it  is  seven  o'clock. 

son  las  dos. 

“ two 

“ ocho. 

“ eight  “ 

“ tres. 

“ three  “ 

“ nueve, 

, “ nine  “ 

“ cuatro. 

“ four  ‘‘ 

**  diez. 

“ ten 

cinco. 

“ five 

“ once. 

“ eleven  “ 

seis. 

“ six  “ 

“ doce. 

“ twelve  ** 

It  is  five  minutes  past  one  is  expressed  by  es  la  una  y cinco  (mi- 
nutos) ; it  is  ten  minutes  past  two^  son  las  dos  y diez ; it  is  a quarter 
past  two,  son  las  dos  y cuarto;  it  is  half  past  two,  son  las  dos  y 
media. — While  thus  far  we  add,  we  now  begin  to  subtract:  it  is 
twenty-five  minutes  to  two,  son  las  dos  menos  veinte  y cinco:  it  is 
a quarter  to  two,  son  las  dos  menos  cuarto,  etc. 

Instead  of  las  doce  (12  o'clock),  the  Spaniards  also  say  es  mediodía 
{it  is  mid-day),  es  medianoche  {it  is  midnight). 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  ó note;  00  room. 


2)0 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


60.  I have  some  shopping  to  do.  Can’t  you  come^ 
with  me? — I am  very  sorry,  but  I have  a great 
deal  to  do.  I am  exceedingly  busy  to-day.  I 
have  so  much  to  do  that  I haven’t  a moment  to 
spare  (=to  lose^).  What  have  you  to  buy? 

61.  I should  like  to  buy  a dress. — My  sister  will  be 
delighted  to  accompany  you  on  your  shopping- 
expedition.  (Literally:  My  sister  will  have  much 
pleasure  in  to  accompany  you  when  (you)  may 
wish  to  do  your  shopping). 

62.  Let  us  enter  here;  this  is  a good  store.  It  is  always 
advisable  to  buy  in  large  establishments  where  all 
goods  are  sold  at  fixed  prices.  (Literally:  Let  us 
go  to  enter  here;  (it)  is  a good  store.  (It)  is  better 
to  buy  always  in  the  stores  larg^  where  is  sold  all 
at  price  fixed). 

63.  Show  me  some  cloth-samples  for  a dress.  Show 
me  the  finest  you  have. — Here  are  some  samples, 
sir.  (Literally:  Show  me  you  samples  (muestras) 
of  cloth  for  to  make  a dress.  Show  me  the  cloth 
most  fine  which  have  you.  Here  have  you  samples 
of  cloth  fine). 

64.  Is  this  the  finest  you  have? 


1 Venir,  to  come. 

Modo  Indicativo. 


Yo. 

Usted. 

El. 

Nosotros. 

Ustedes.  Ellos. 

Pres: 

vengo, 

viene, 

viene. 

venimos. 

vienen,  vienen. 

Imp: 

venía, 

venía, 

venía. 

veníamos. 

venían,  venían. 

Def: 

vine, 

vino. 

vino, 

vinimos, 

vinieron,  vinieron. 

Put: 

vendré. 

vendrá. 

vendrá. 

vendremos, 

vendrán,  vendrán, 

Cond: 

vendría. 

vendría. 

vendría. 

vendríamos,  vendrían,  vendrían, 

Modo  Subjuntivo. 

Pres: 

venga. 

venga. 

venga. 

vengamos, 

vengan,  vengan. 

á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


The  Spanish  Language, 


271 


60.  Tengo  que  hacer  algunas  compras.  ¿ No  puede 
V.  venir^  conmigo? — Lo  siento  mucho,  pero  tengo 
mucho  que  hacer.  Hoy  estoy  muy  ocupado. 
Tengo  tanto  que  hacer  que  no  puedo  perder^  un 
instante. — ¿ Qué  es  lo  que  tiene  V.  que  comprar? 

61.  Quisiera  comprar  un  vestido. — Mi  hermana  tendrá 
mucho  gusto  en  acompañar  a V.,  cuando  desee^ 
hacer  sus  compras. 

62.  Entremos  aquí,  es  una  buena  tienda.  Es  mejor 
comprar  siempre  en  las  tiendas  grandes  donde  se 
vende  todo  a precio  fijo. 

63.  Enséñeme  V.  muestras  de  paño  para  hacer  im 
vestido. — Enséñeme  el  paño  más  fino  que  tiene  V. 
— ^Aquí  tiene  V.  muestras  de  paños  finos. 

64.  i Es  este  el  mas  fino  que  tiene  V.? 


Imp;!  vin-iera.  — ^iera.  — ^iera.  — iéramos.  — ieran.  — ieran. 

Imp;2  vin-iese.  — iese.  — iese.  — iésemos.  — iesen.  — iesen. 

Fut:  vin-iere.  — iere.  — iere.  — iéremos.  — ieren.  — ieren. 

Gerundio:  viniendo. 

Participio  pasado : venido. 

2 Perder,  to  lose,  belongs  to  the  same  class  of  irregular  verbs 
noted  above.  The  conjugation  is  therefore  regular  with  the  fol- 
lowing exceptions: 

Pres.  Ind:  pierdo,  pierde,  pierde,  perdemos,  pierden,  pierden. 
Pres.  Subj : pierda,  pierda,  pierda,  perdamos,  pierdan. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  ó note;  00  room. 


The  Rosenthal  Method, 


272 

65.  Examine  the  texture  of  this  cloth,  if  you  please. 
It  is  impossible  to  find  anything  better;  it  is  very 
soft  (flojo). 

66.  This  cloth  is  very  thin. 

67.  Here  is  another  piece;  this  is  very  strong. 

68.  I don^t  like  this  color;  this  color  is  not  fast  (=will 
pass  soon  (pasará  pronto). 

69.  Excuse  me,  sir,  it  will  wear  very  well  ( =it  will  last 
(durará)  well). 

70.  I depend  on  you.  How  much  do  you  charge  a 
yard?  Five  dollars.  (=Me  I confide  of  you, 
(me  fío  de  V.). 

71.  That  seems  very  dear  to  me;  tell  me  the  lowest 
price,  because  I am  not  fond  of  bargaining  (no  me 
gusta  regatear). 

72.  I never  ask  too  much,  sir;  I have  only  one  price. 

73.  Can  you  let  me  have  it  at  four  dollars? — No,  I 
should  lose  money  by  it.  Ill  give  it  to  you  for 
four  dollars  and  a half;  I cannot  sell  it  any  cheaper. 

74.  Very  well!  Let  us  split  the  difference. — Upon  my 
word  you  are  getting  it  at  cost.  (=To  the  truth 
that  it  may  take  you  at  price  of  cost). 

75.  Don’t  you  need  anything  else? — Nothing  just  now; 
send  me  the  package  C.  O.  D.  Here’s  my  address. 
( ==send  me  you  the  package  with  the  receipt;  here 
have  (you)  the  directions  (las  señas)  of  my  house). 


á far;  a pale;  6 eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


The  Spanish  Language,' 


273 


6$.  Exámine  V.  el  tejido  de  este  paño;  es  imposible 
ver  cosa  mejor;  es  muy  flojo,  (ta-^hé'-dó). 

66.  Este  paño  es  muy  lijero. 

67.  Aquí  hay  otra  pieza;  es  muy  fuerte. 

68.  No  me  gusta  el  color;  este  color  pasará  pronto. 

69.  Perdóneme  V.  señor,  durará  mucho. 

70.  Me  fío  de  V.  ¿A  cómo  quiere  V.  por  la  vara? 
(A  cómo  vende  V.  la  vara)? — ^A  cinco  pesos.  * 

71.  Me  parece  demasiado  caro.  Dígame  V.  el  último 
precio,  porque  no  me  gusta  regatear. 

72.  Caballero,  yo  nunca  pido  más  de  lo  justo;  no  tengo 
más  que  un  precio. 

73.  I Puede  V.  dármelo  a cuatro  pesos? — No  señor, 
perdería.  Se  le  daré  a V.  por  cuatro  pesos  y medio; 
no  le  puedo  vender  por  menos. 

74.  ¡ Muy  bien!  partamos  la  diferencia. — A la  verdad, 
que  lo  lleva  V.  al  precio  de  costo. 

75.  I Nada  más  necesita  V.? — Por  ahora  no;  envíeme 
V.  el  paquete  con  el  recibo;  aquí  tiene  las  señas  de 
mi  casa,  (sén'-yás). 


á far;  a pale;  6 eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


2 74  The  Rosenthal  Method. 

MAIN  SENTENCE. 

Concluded, 

For  I expect  a friend  from  Chicago  and  must  stay  in 
Vera  Cruz  till  the  steamer  arrives. 

For,  because,  as^ 

I expect 

a friend^ 

from 

Chicago 

and  must 

stay 

in 

Vera  Cruz 
tills 

may  arrive 
the  steamer. 


^ Porque  (written  without  accent)  means  because;  por  qué  (two 
words,  the  second  accentuated)  why? 

2 The  preposition  a is  used  before  personal  objects  after  a transi- 
tive verb: 

Conozco  a este  hombre,  I know  this  man. 

Fueron  a llamar  a un  médico,  They  went  to  call  a physician, 

I A quién  busca  V.  ? Whom  are  you  looking  for? 

But  when  the  personal  object  is  preceded  by  a cardinal  num- 
ber a is  omitted: 

He  visto  cuatro  personas,  I saw  four  persons. 

When  the  personal  object  is  indeterminate  or  unknown  a is 
also  left  out: 


á far;  a pale;  B eve;  é there;  0 note;  oo  room. 


275 


The  Spanish  Language, 

FRASE  FUNDAMENTAL. 

Conclusion, 

Porque  espero  a un  amigo  de  Chicago  y debo  estarme 


en  Veracruz  hasta  que  llegue  el  vapor. 

Porque^ 

(porr'-ka). 

espero 

(és-pa'-ró). 

a un  amigo^ 

(á  óon  á-me'-go). 

de 

(da). 

Chicago 

y debo 

(o-da^-bo)  • 

estarme 

(és-tárr'-má). 

en 

(én). 

Veracruz 

(vá-rá-króoth'). 

hasta  que^ 

(ás'-tá  ka). 

llegue 

(lyá'-ga). 

el  vapor. 

(él  vá-porr'). 

Buscx)  una  criada,  I am  looking  for  a servant- girl. 

After  perder,  to  lose,  a is  omitted  in  some  cases: 

He  perdido  mi  padre,  I have  lost  my  father. 

After  querer,  we  use  a in  the  sense  of  to  love,  to  like: 

Quiero  a esta  muchacha,  I like  this  girl.  (/  am  fond  of 

this  girl.) 

Querer,  without  a means  to  want,  to  wish: 

Quiero  un  hombre  honrado  que  / want  an  honest  man  who  speaks 
hable  inglés.  English. 

^ Hasta  que  belongs  to  the  conjunctions  which  govern  the  sub- 
junctive mood.  See  Part  X. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  0 note;  oo  room. 


276 


The  Rosenthal  Method, 


1.  Why  do  you  stay  in  this  town?  The  place  is  not 
very  interesting  and  there  are  but  few  sights  in 
it.  (Literally:  How  is  it  that  you  are  to  be  found 
(se  halla  V.)  in  this  town  (esta  ciudad)?  Very 
little  attractive  (atractiva)  (it)  is  and  not  offers 
(ofrece)  much  that  (que)  to  see). 

2.  If  I were  not  expecting  some  one  from  the  North 
the  attractions  of  this  place  would  not  keep  me 
here  (no  me  detendrían  aquí). 

3.  Whom  do  you  expect,  if  I may  ask?  (Literally: 
Me  allow  you  you  (I)  may  ask  (pregunte)  whom 
(a  quién)  expect)? 

4.  A young  lady  who  will  probably  arrive  by  the  next 
steamer.  (Literally:  To  a young  lady  (una  joven) 
who  probably  will  arrive  in  the  next  steanier). 

5.  A young  lady!  That  is  interesting!  I thought 
you  were  married.  (Literally:  To  a young  lady 
(una  señorita)!  Good  (it)  is!  I that  you  believed 
married  (casado). 

6.  Certainly;  I am  miarried.  The  young  lady  is  re- 
lated to  me;  she  is  my  cousin.  (Literally:  Clear 
is  that  it  (I)  am.  The  young  lady  is  my  relative 
(parienta);  (she)  is  my  cousin  (prima). 


^ We  have  seen  before  that  all  verbs  ending  in  cer  and  cir,  pre- 
ceded by  a wwelf  insert  z before  the  stem-ending  whenever  the 
stem  meets  an  a or  o: 

Ind.  Pres:  parezco  (but  pareces,  parece,  parecemos,  etc.). 

Subj.  Pres:  parezca,  parezca,  parezca,  parezcamos,  parezcáis, 
parezcan. 

Lnperat:  parezca  V.,  parezcamos  (pareced),  parezcan. 

2 Ofrecer  has  the  same  peculiarities  as  parecer.  See  Note  i. 

® The  Imperfect  of  the  subjunctive  is  generally  preceded  by  the 
conjunction  si,  if: 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


The  Spanish  Language, 


277 


1.  I Cómo  es  que  se  halla  V.  en  esta  ciudad?  (¿  Por 
qué  permanece^  {or  continúa)  V.  en  la  ciudad)? 
Bien  poco  atractiva  es  y no  ofrece^  mucho  que  ver. 
(ál'-yá  thé'^óó-dád'  pérr-má-na'-thy  kón-té-nóó'-á 
O-fra'-thy). 

2.  Si  no  esperase^  a alguien  del  norte  las  diversiones 
no  me  detendrían  aquí,  (és-pá-rá'-s^  ál'-ghe"^én 
da-tén-dré'-án) 

3.  ¿ Me  permite  V.  le  pregimte  a quiéa  espera? 

4.  A una  joven  que  probablemente  llegará  en  el  pró- 
ximo vapor,  (^hó'-vén). 

5.  ¡A  una  señorita!  ¡Bueno  está!  Yo  que  le  creía 
casado. 

6.  Claro  está  que  lo  soy.  La  joven  es  mi  parienta;^ 
es  mi  prima,  (pá-re^én'-tá  pré'-má). 


Si  recibiésemos  {or  recibiéra- 
mos) dinero,  saldríamos 
para  la  ciudad, 

Si  yo  estuviera  {or  estuviese) 
bueno,  iría  con  V., 

Tendría  más  dinero,  si  fuese 
más  prudente, 

^ El  pariente,  the  kinsman^  the 
kinswoman,  the  {female)  relative, 
la  prima,  the  cousin  {female). 


If  we  should  receive  money  we 
would  leave  for  town. 

If  I were  in  good  health  I would 
go  with  you. 

He  would  have  more  money  if  he 
were  more  prudent, 

{male)  relative;  la  parienta,  the 
El  primo,  the  cousin  {male); 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  0 note;  00  room. 


278 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


7.  Have  you  been  here  long?  (Literally:  Makes  (it) 
time  that  are  you  here?  Or:  Arrived  you  long 
ago?  (=  makes  (it)  much)? 

8.  I have  been  staying  here  since  the  15th.  (Literally: 
Since  (desde)  the  fifteenth  (el  quince^)  that  I stay 
(me  hallo)  here). 

9.  At  what  hotel  do  you  stop?  (Literally:  In  where 
board  you  (se  hospeda  V.)? 

10.  I am  stopping  at  the  Hotel  de  Madrid,  I am  sorry 
to  say.  (Literally:  I reside  (resido)  in  the  Hotel 
of  Madrid  and  am  sorry  for  it  (lo  siento).  Or: 
My  residence  (residencia)  is  in  the  Hotel  of  Madrid, 
which  not  me  pleases  (place^).  Or:  I am  in  the 
Hotel  of  Madrid  against  my  taste). 


^The  present  tense  is  used  after  hace  in  expressions  referring 
to  time. 


¿Cuánto  tiempo  hace  que  está 
V.  aquí? 

Hace  mucho  tiempo  que  no  le 
veo, 

Hace  tres  años  que  no  nos 
hablamos, 

Hace  dos  semanas  que  llueve. 

Hace  seis  años  que  estoy  aquí, 

2 With  the  exception  of  primero, 
cardinal  numbers  for  dates: 

¿ Qué  día  del  mes  tenemos  hoy?  1 
¿ A cuántos  deb  mes  estamos  r 
hoy?  J 

Tenemos  el  doce  de  junio. 

Estamos  a tres  de  febrero, 


How  long  have  you  been  here? 

It  is  a long  time  since  I saw  him. 

It  is  three  years  since  we  spoke 
to  each  other. 

It  has  been  raining  for  two  weeks. 
I have  been  here  six  years, 
the  first,  the  Spaniards  use  the 

What  date  is  to-day? 

It  is  the  I2th  of  June. 

It  is  the  2)d  of  February. 


3 All  verbs  ending  in  cer  or  cir  preceded  by  a vowel  insert  before 
the  stem-ending  a z as  often  as  the  stem  meets  an  a or  o,  as: 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  0 note;  00  room. 


The  Spanish  Language, 


279 


7.  ¿ Hace^  tiempo  que  está  V.  aquí? 

¿ Llegó  V.  hace  mucho? 

8.  Desde  el  quince^  que  me  hallo  aquí. 


9.  ¿ En  dónde  se  hospeda  V.?  (ós-pa'-dá). 

10.  Resido  en  el  ‘^Hotel  de  Madrid’’  y lo  siento. 

Mi  residencia  es  el  “Hotel  de  Madrid,”  que  no 
me  place.^ 

Estoy  en  el  “Hotel  de  Madrid”  contra  mi  gusto, 
(rá-se'-dó  rá-sé-dén'-the'^á). 


Conocer,  to  know. 
Pres,  ind: 

Pres.  subj: 

Yo, 

conozco. 

conozca. 

Usted, 

conoce. 

conozca. 

Él, 

conoce. 

conozca. 

Nosotros, 

conocemos. 

conozcamos. 

Ustedes, 

conocen. 

conozcan. 

Ellos, 

conocen. 

conozcan. 

Imperativo : 

conozca,  conozcamos,  conozcan, 

Lucir:  To  display,  to  shine. 

Pres.  ind: 

Pres.  subj: 

Yo, 

luzco. 

luzca. 

Usted, 

luce. 

luzca. 

Él, 

luce. 

luzca. 

Nosotros, 

lucimos. 

luzcamos. 

Ustedes, 

lucen. 

luzcan. 

Ellos. 

lucen. 

luzcan. 

Imperativo:  luzca,  luzcamos,  luzcan. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


28o 


The  Rosenthal  Method, 


11.  Do  you  not  like  it?  (Literally:  Then  not  you 

pleases  it  (gusta)  to  you?  Or:  Not  is  (it)  to  your 
liking  (de  wsu  gusto)?  Or:  Not  you  it  pleases 

(place)  to  stay  in  it)? 

12.  The  guide-books  recommend  it  as  one  of  the  best 
hotels  in  Mexico.  (Literally:  The  guide-books  (las 
guías  de  viajeros)  it  recommend  (recomiendan)  as 
one  of  the  best  of  Mexico.  Or:  It  is  said  to  be 
(se  dice  ser)  of  the  best  of  the  country  in  the  guide- 
books. Or:  Say  the  guide-books  that  (it)  is  of  the 
best  of  the  country). 

13.  That  may  be,  but  it  is  conducted  on  the  Spanish, 
or  rather  the  Mexican  plan.  (Literally:  All  shall 
be  able  to  be  (podrá  ser^),  but  its  management 
(su  manejo)  is  in  the  Spanish  style  (a  la  española^), 
or  better  said  in  the  Mexican). 


^ Recomendar,  to  recomniendy  inserts  i before  the  stem- vowel  e 
— ie  throughout  the  singular  and  in  the  third  person  plural  of  the 
indicative  and  subjunctive  present,  and  in  the  same  persons  in  the 
imperative. 


Pres,  ind: 

Pres.  subj: 

Yo. 

recomiendo. 

recomiende. 

Usted. 

recomienda. 

recomiende. 

Él. 

recomienda. 

recomiende. 

Nosotros.  ■ 

recomendamos. 

recomendemos. 

Ustedes. 

recomiendan. 

recomienden. 

Ellos. 

recomiendan. 

recomienden. 

Imperativo:  recomiende,  recomendemos,  recomienden. 

2 May  and  can  may  be  translated  either  by  the  Present  Indica- 
tive or  Subjunctive  of  poder,  to  he  able,  or  by  the  Future:  Puedo 
venir,  I may  come. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  5 note;  6b  room. 


The  Spanish  Language. 


281 


II.  < Pues  no  le  gusta  a V.? 

¿ Qué  no  le  gusta? 

¿ No  es  de  su  gusto? 

¿ No  le  place  estar  en  él? 


12.  Las  guías  de  viajeros  lo  recomiendan^  como  imo  de 
los  mejores  de  Méjico. 

Se  dice  ser  de  los  mejores  del  país  en  las  guías. 
Dicen  las  guías  que  es  de  los  mejores  del  país, 
(ghé'-ás  vé-á-^há'-r5s  ra-kó-mé'^én'-dán  paces'). 

13.  Todo  podrá  ser,^  pero  su  manejo  es  a la  española,^ 
o mejor  dicho  a la  mejicana. 


Deme  V.  el  dinero  para  que  Give  me  the  money  so  that  I 
pueda  pagar  lo  que  debo,  may  pay  what  I owe. 

Todo  podrá  ser,  That  may  that  might  he, 

3 An  adverbial  expression  consisting  of  a feminine  adjective  in 
the  dative  singular,  the  noun  usanza,  usage ^ fashion,  being  under- 
stood: 

a la  francesa,  in  the  French  fashion, 

a la  española,  in  the  Spanish  style, 

a la  mejicana,  in  the  Mexican  style. 

The  same  idea  may  be  expressed  by  al  estilo  or  al  estilo  de: 
al  estilo  francés,  in  the  French  style, 

al  estilo  de  Méjico,  after  the  manner  of  Mexico, 

al  estilo  de  Castilla,  after  the  manner  of  Castile, 

á far;  á pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room> 


282 


The  Rosenthal  Method, 


14.  Everything  is  Mexican  there:  The  cooking,  the 
service,  the  language,  and  though  I liked  it  at  first, 
I am  now  sick  and  tired  of  it.  (Literally:  There 
everything  is  Mexican  fashion  (a  la  mejicana) : 
the  cooking  (la  cocina),  the  service  (la  servidum- 
bre) and  what  is  heard  (se  oye^  and  although 
this  in  the  beginning  (al  principio)  not  me  molested 
(molestaba),  already  me  gives  headache  (jaqueca). 

15.  I am  longing  for  an  American  meal  and  would  give 
anything  for  a good  juicy  American  steak  and  fried 
potatoes.  (Literally:  I long  (ansio)  to  eat  in  otu: 
style  (a  nuestro  modo)  and  would  give — (I)  do  not 
know  how  much! — ^for  a tasteful  (sabroso)  steak 
(bistec)  with  potatoes  fried  (patatas  fritas)  Amer- 
ican fashion). 

16.  You  don’t  like  Mexican  cooking,  do  you?  (Liter- 
ally: Then  not  to  you  pleases  the  kitchen  Mexican)  ? 

17.  I liked  it  at  first,  but  I have  become  tired  of  it. 
(Literally:  Not  me  (it)  seemed  bad  at  first,  but 
already  me  (it)  annoys.  Or:  It  used  (solía)  not 
displease  me,  but  myself  tired  (me  cansé)  of  it). 


lOir,  to  hear,  is  very  irregular.  The  conjugation  is  as  follows: 
Modo  indicativo. 


Yo, 

Usted, 

EL 

Pres: 

oigo. 

oye. 

oye. 

Imp: 

oía, 

oía. 

oía. 

Def: 

oí, 

oyó. 

oyó. 

Fut: 

oiré. 

oirá. 

oirá. 

Cond: 

oiría. 

oiría. 

oiría, 

á far; 

a pale; 

e eve; 

Nosotros, 

Ustedes, 

Ellos, 

oímos. 

oyen. 

oyen. 

oíamos. 

oían. 

oían. 

oímos. 

oyeron. 

oyeron. 

oiremos, 

oirán. 

oirán. 

oiríamos, 

oirían. 

oirían. 

there;  o note;  00  room. 


The  Spanish  Language, 


283 


14.  Allí  todo  es  a la  mejicana:  la  cocina,  la  servi- 
dumbre y lo  que  se  oye,^  y aunque  esto,  al  principio 
no  me  molestaba  ya  me  da  jaqueca.^  (ko-thé'-ná 
sérr-vé-dóóm'-br}^  O'-yé  ^há-ka'-ká.) 


15.  Ansio  comer  a nuestro  modo  y daría — I no  sé  cuanto! 
— por  tm  sabroso  bistec  con  patatas  fritas  a la 
americana,  (án-se'-o  bé'-sták  fré'-tás). 


16.  I Pues  no  le  gusta  la  cocina  mejicana? 


17.  No  me  parecía  mal  primero  pero  ya  me  fastidia. 
Solía  no  disgustarme,  pero  me  cansé  de  ella. 


Modo  subjimtivo. 


Pres: 

oiga, 

oiga. 

oiga. 

oigamos. 

oigan. 

oigan. 

Imp:^ 

oyera, 

oyera. 

oyera. 

oyéramos, 

oyeran. 

oyeran, 

Imp:2 

oyese. 

oyese. 

oyese. 

oyésemos, 

oyesen. 

oyesen, 

Fut: 

oyere. 

oyere. 

oyere. 

oyéremos. 

oyeren, 

oyeren, 

Gerundio:  oyendo. 

Participio:  oído. 

2 Jaqueca  (see  sentence  14)  means  literally  headache. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  0 note;  6b  room. 


284 


The  Rosenthal  Method, 


18.  Everything  is  full  of  pepper.  (Literally:  It  (they) 
fill  (Henan)  all  with  so  much  red  pepper  (ají).  Or: 
Nothing  (they)  make  without  much  red  pepper 
(ají). 

19.  Everything  is  full  of  pepper,  oil  and  condiments. 
(Literally:  The  pepper,  the  oil  (el  aceite)  and  the 
spices  (las  especias)  are  used  too  much  in  all.) 

20.  My  stomach  can  not  stand  these  dishes.  (Literally: 
My  stomach  (estómago)  not  sustains  (aguanta) 
these  dishes  (platos).  Or:  There  is  no  stomach 
(no  hay  estómago)  that  endures  (resista)  these 
dishes  (guisos). 

21.  I have  made  up  my  mind  to  leave  my  hotel  and 

go  to  some  Yankee  or  English  boarding-house. 
(Literally : (I)  have  resolved  (resuelto^  to  go 

away  (irme)  from  the  hotel  and  pass  to  a boarding- 
house (casa  de  huéspedes)  Yankee  or  English. 
Or:  (I)  determined  (determiné)  to  transport  myself 
(trasladarme)  to  a house  Yankee  or  English). 


1 Resolver,  to  resolve,  is  conjugated  like  volver,  to  return.  It 
changes  the  stem-vowel  o into  ue  throughout  the  singular  and 
third  person  plural  of  the  indicative  and  subjunctive  present,  and 
in  the  same  persons  in  the  imperative. 


Yo, 


Pres.  Ind: 

resuelvo. 


Pres.  Subj: 
resuelva. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


The  Spanish  Language, 


285 


18.  Lo  Henan  todo  con  tanto  ají.  (lyá'-nán). 
Nada  hacen  sin  mucho  ají. 


19.  El  ají,  el  aceite  y las  especias  se  usan  demasiado 
en  todo. 


20.  Mi  estómago  no  aguanta  estos  platos. 

No  hay  estómago  que  resista  estos  guisos,  (á- 
gwán'-tá  ghé'-sós). 


21.  He  resuelto^  irme  del  hotel  y pasar  a una  casa  de 
huéspedes  yanqui  o inglesa. 

Determiné  trasladarme  a una  casa  yankee  o inglesa, 
(rá-swél'-tó  hwás'-pa-dés). 


Usted. 

ÉL 

Nosotros. 

Ustedes. 

Ellos, 


resuelve. 

resuelve. 

resolvemos, 

resuelven. 

resuelven. 


resuelva. 

resuelva. 

resolvamos. 

resuelvan. 

resuelvan. 


Imperativo:  resuelva,  resolvamos,  resuelvan. 


All  other  forms  are  regular,  except  the  Participle  resuelto,  re- 
solved. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  ó note;  00  room. 


286 


The  Rosenthal  Method, 


22.  That  will  scarcely  be  worth  while  as  the  steamer, 
I suppose,  will  arrive  soon.  (Literally:  Not  will 
be  worth  (valdrá)  the  trouble  (la  pena)  already  be- 
cause (pues)  not  will  delay  (tardará)  in  arriving 
(en  llegar)  the  steamer). 

23.  It  was  due  here  yesterday,  but  at  this  season  of 

the  year,  when  there  are  so  many  hurricanes  in 
the  Gulf  of  Mexico,  one  can  never  tell  what  may 
happen.  The  steamer  may  come  in  to-day,  or  it 
may  not  be  here  for  a week.  It  all  depends  on 
the  weather.  (Literally:  It  was  expected  (se 

esperaba)  yesterday,  but  in  this  season  (está  época) 
of  the  year  that  so  many  hurricanes  (tantas  bo- 
rrascas) occur  (ocurren)  in  the  Gulf  (el  Golfo),  who 
can  say  what  is  going  to  happen  (pasar)  ? Perhaps 
(tal  vez)  it  may  arrive  to-day  or  perhaps  within 
one  week.  We  are  (estamos)  at  mercy  (a  merced) 
of  the  weather). 

24.  What  do  the  agents  say?  (Literally:  What  say 
the  consignees  (los  consignatarios)?  Or:  What  is 
the  opinion  (el  parecer)  of  the  agents)? 


Valer,  to  he  worth,  is  but  slightly  irregular. 

Modo  indicativo. 


Pres. . 

Imp: 

Yo. 

valgo, 

valía. 

Usted. 

vale. 

valía. 

Él. 

vale. 

valía. 

Nosotros. 

valemos. 

valíamos. 

Ustedes. 

valen. 

valían. 

Ellos. 

valen. 

valían. 

Def: 

Fut: 

Cond: 

valí, 

valdré, 

valdría. 

valió. 

valdrá. 

valdría. 

valió. 

valdrá. 

valdría. 

valimos,  valdremos,  valdríamos, 
valieron,  valdrán,  valdrían, 
valieron,  valdrán,  valdrían. 


á far;  a pale;  6 eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


The  Spanish  Language,  287 

22.  No  valdrá^  la  pena  ya  pues  no  tardará  en  llegar  el 
vapor. 


23.  Se  esperaba  ayer,  pero  en  esta  época  del  año 
que  tantas  borrascas  ocurren  en  el  Golfo,  ¿ quién 
puede  decir  lo  que  va  a pasar?  Tal  vez  llegue 
hoy  o quizá  dentro  de  una  semana.  Estamos  a 
merced  del  tiempo.  (a'-p5-ká  borr-rás'-kás  lyá'- 
ge  mérr-thad'). 


24.  I Qué  dicen  los  consignatarios? 

I Y los  consignatarios  qué  creen? 

I Cuál  es  el  parecer  de  los  consignatarios? 
(kon-seg-ná-tá'-re^ós) . 


Modo  subjuntivo. 


Pres: 

I.  Imp: 

2.  Imp: 

Fut: 

Yo. 

valga, 

val  - iera. 

val  - iese. 

v^  - iere, 

Usted, 

valga. 

iera. 

iese, 

iere, 

Él. 

valga. 

iera. 

iese. 

iere. 

Nosotros. 

valgamos, 

iéramos. 

iésemos. 

iéremos, 

Ustedes. 

valgan, 

ieran. 

iesen. 

ieren. 

Ellos. 

valgan. 

ieran. 

iesen, 

ieren. 

Gerundio:  valiendo, 
Participio  pasado : valido. 


á far;  a pale;  S eve;  é there;  0 note;  00  room. 


288 


The  Rosenthal  Method, 


VOCABULARIO. 

El  Ferrocarril. 

Vamos  al  carro  de  fumar 
(fóó-márr'). 

Prohibir  (pro-e-vérr'). 

No  se  permite  fumar  en 
este  compartimiento 
(pérr-me'-ty). 

Este  no  es  un  carro  de 
fumar. 

Fumar. 

El  humo  (oo'-mó). 

Abrir  (áb-rerr'). 

Cerrar  (thérr-rárr'). 

Sírvase  abrir  la  ventana. 

Abra  V.  la  puerta. 

Sírvase  cerrar  la  ventana. 

La  corriente  de  aire  (korr- 
re^én'-ty  da  á'^é-re). 

Hay  aquí  una  corriente  de 
aire. 

¿ Siente  V.  la  corriente  de 
aire  cuando  abro  la 
ventana? 

No,  señor,  el  comparti- 
miento está  sofocante. 

El  polvo. 

Hace  mucho  polvo. 

Entra  mucho  polvo ; sírvase 
cerrar  la  ventana. 

¿ Qué  estación  es  esa? 

¿ Cómo  se  llama^  esta  esta- 
ción (lyá'-má). 


VOCABULARY. 

The  Railroad. 

Let  us  go  to  the  smoker. 

To  forbid. 

No  smoking  in  this  com- 
partment. 

No  smoking  allowed  in 
this  compartment. 
This  is  not  a smoking  car. 

To  smoke. 

The  smoke. 

To  open. 

To  close. 

Please  open  the  window. 
Open  the  door  please. 

Pray  shut  the  window. 

The  draught  (the  current 
of  air). 

There  is  a draught  here. 

Do  you  feel  the  draught 
when  I open  the  win- 
dow? 

Not  at  all;  it  is  close  in 
this  compartment. 

The  dust 

It  is  very  dusty. 

It  is  very  dusty  here;  please 
put  the  window  down. 
What  station  is  that? 

What  is  the  name  of  this 
station? 


1 ¿ Cómo  se  llama  V.  ? What  is  your  name?  Me  llamo  Fernandez. 
My  name  is  Fernandez. 


The  Spanish  Language. 


I Cómo  se  llama  la  próxi- 
ma estación? 

Parar. 

(pár-rárr'). 

¿ Cuánto  tiempo  pára  aquí 
el  tren? 

Conductor,  ¿ cuándo  para- 
mos para  almorzar? 

¿ Cuánto  tiempo  paramos 
aquí? 

¡ Tampico ! Cinco  minutos 
de  parada  (pá-rá'-dá). 
Cambiar  de  carros. 

I Tengo  que  cambiar  de^ 
carros? 

Déjeme  ver  su  billete. 

No,  no  tiene  V.  que  cam- 
biar; este  tren  va  hasta 
Méjico. 

I Mudamos  de  carros  aquí? 
(móó-dá'-mós). 

I Dónde  mudamos  de  tren? 

Tiene  V.  que  cambiar  de 
carros  en  Aguasca- 
lientes. 

I Conecta  este  tren  en  Ori- 
zaba? 

I A dónde  va  V.  ? A Mé- 
jico. 

Tiene  V.  que  esperar  cua- 
tro horas  en  Orizaba 
por  el  tren  de  Méjico. 


289 

What  is  the  name  of  the 
next  station? 

To  Stop. 

How  long  does  this  train 
stop  here? 

When  do  we  stop  for  break- 
fast, conductor? 

How  long  do  we  stop  here? 

Tampico!  We  stop  here 
five  minutes. 

To  Change  Cars. 

Have  I to  change  cars? 

Let  me  see  your  ticket. 

No,  you  don’t  change;  this 
train  goes  through 
to  Mexico. 

Do  we  change  cars  here? 

Where  do  we  change  trains? 

You’ll  have  to  change  cars 
at  Aguas  Calientes. 

Does  this  train  connect  in 
Orizaba? 

Where  are  you  going?  To 
Mexico. 

You’ll  have  to  wait  four 
hours  in  Orizaba  for 
the  Mexico  train. 


This  de  after  cambiar  or  mudar  is  strictly  idiomatic. 


290 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


Este  tren  no  conecta. 

Debió  V.  haber  cambiado 
de  tren  en  Aguascali- 
entes;  hubiera  V.  he- 
cho conexión  con  el 
otro  tren  (ko-nek-the'^ 
on'). 

El  carro  de  dormir. 

El  carro  de  dormitorio 
(dorr-me-to'-rg'^ó) . 

¿ Hay  un  carro  de  dormir 
en  el  tren  que  va  a 
Orizaba? 

I Cuál  es  el  costo  en  el 
carro  de  dormir? 

Deseo  encontrar  el  carro  de 
dormir. 

La  Frontera. 

(la  frón-ta'-rá). 

La  aduana  (á-doo^^á'-ná). 

I Dónde  está  la  aduana? 

El  oficial  de  aduana  (ó-fé- 
the^ál'). 

¿ Es  V.  oficial  de  la 
aduana? 

Ya  estamos  en  la  frontera. 
Aquí  viene  el  oficial 
de  la  aduana  mejicana. 

I Tiene  V.  algo  que  pague^ 
derechos  ? 


This  train  does  not  connect. 

You  ought  to  have  changed 
in  Aguas  Calientes;  you 
would  have  made  con- 
nections there. 

I The  sleeping-car. 

Is  there  a sleeping-car  on 
the  train  which  goes  to 
Orizaba? 

What  is  the  charge  on  the 
sleeping-car? 

I wish  to  find  the  sleeping- 
car. 

The  Frontier. 

The  custom-house. 

Where  is  the  custom-house? 

The  custom-house  ofl&cer. 

Are  you  a custom-house 
officer? 

Here  we  are  at  the  fron- 
tier. Here  comes  the 
Mexican  custom-offi- 
cer. 

Have  you  anything  dutia- 
ble with  you? 


^ The  u is  added  to  preserve  the  hard  sound  of  g before  e.  The 
verb  is  pagar. 


/ 


LIBRARY 
■ THE 

UNIVERSITY  or  ILLINOIS 


ROSENTHAL’S 


COMMON-SENSE  METHOD 

OF 

PRACTICAL  LINGUISTRY 

THE 

Spanish  Language 

BV 

DR.  RICHARD  S.  ROSENTHAL 
Author  of  the  Meisterschaft  System,  etc.,  etc 

Haulenbeek  Corrected  Edition 
Revised  1917 

IN  TEN  PARTS 


NEW  YORK  ::  LONDON 
The  International  College  of  Languages 


COPYRIGHT  1905. 

BY 

THE  INTERNATIONAL  COLLEGE  OF  LANGUAGES 

Entered  at 

Stationers*  Hall.  London,  £nc. 


The  Spanish  Language, 


MU 


2gi 


CONTENTS. 


Theatre,  Concert 292 

Main  Sentence  302 

The  weather 306 

Health 316 

Vocabulary 320 


2Q2 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


Theatre. — Concert. 

25.  They  think  it  will  be  here  in  a day  or  two,  al- 
though of  course,  they  do  not  know  any  more 
than  I do.  (Literally : That  not  it  will  fail  (faltará) 
within  one  or  two  days,  {Or:  That  not  it  will 
make  itself  expect  more  than  two  days),  though 
(aunque)  the  agents  nothing  know). 

26.  Well,  you  must  have  patience.  (Literally:  Then 
well,  resign  yourself  (resígnese  V.). 

27.  It  is  all  very  fine  to  say  that!  Patience?  Why, 

I am  as  patient  as  a lamb!  (Literally:  That  is 

very  easy  to  say  (de  decir).  To  resign  one’s  self! 
{Or:  To  have  calm  (tener  calma)!  To  me  with 
those  things  (con  esas). 

28.  Vera  Cruz  is  such  a tiresome  place  that  I do  not 
know  how  to  kill  time.  (Literally:  What  is  that 
Vera  Cruz  is  place  so  heavy  (pesado)  that  not  (I) 
know  how  to  kill  (matar)  the  time.  {Or:  The 
hours  are  difficult  to  pass  in  place  so  disagreeable 
as  Veracruz). 

29.  What?  Are  you  so  bored?  Why  do  you  not  go 
to  theatres  or  shows?  (Literally:  And  what? 
Not  know  you  what  to  do  with  yourself  (hacerse)  ? 
Then  go  to  the  theatre  or  to  the  shows  (los  títeres). 


1 The  verbs  hacer,  to  make^  to  do^  and  mandar,  to  send^  to  order, 
followed  by  another  verb  in  the  Infinitive,  have  the  meaning  of  the 


English  verbs  to  cause,  to  let  or 
Hago  hacer  un  vestido, 

Mando  lavar  mi  ropa, 

Haga  V.  enviar  este  libro  a la 
librería. 

¿ En  dónde  piensa  él  hacerse  la 
ropa? 


have: — 

I am  having  a dress  made. 

I have  my  clothes  washed. 

Have  this  book  sent  to  the  book- 
store. 

Where  does  he  intend  to  have  his 
clothes  made? 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


The  Spanish  Language, 


293 


Teatro. — Concierto. 

25.  Que  no  faltará  dentro  de  uno  o dos  días,  {or:  Que 
no  se  hará^  esperar  más  de  dos  días),  aunque  los 
consignatarios  nada  saben. 

26.  Pues  bien,  resígnese  V.  (rá-ség'-ná-sá). 

27.  ¡ Eso  es  muy  fácil  de  decir resignarse!  (Or:  ¡ Tener 
calma)  1^  ¡ A mí  con  esas!^ 

28.  Lo  que  es  que  Veracruz  es  lugar  tan  pesado,  que 
no  sé  como  matar  el  tiempo. 

Las  horas  son  difíciles  de  pasar  en  lugar  tan  de- 
sagradable como  Veracruz. 

29.  ¿Y  qué?  ¿ No  sabe  V.  que  hacerse?  Pues  vá- 
ya V.  al  teatro  o a los  títeres,  (te-tá-rés). 


2 This  might  be  rendered: 
Bonito  es  el  consejo, 

Poco  cuesta  aconsejarlo, 
Fácil  es  la  reflexión, 

¡ Qué  sencillo  lo  ve  V.  I 


The  advice  is  good. 

Advice  is  cheap  {=  costs  little). 
Meditation  is  easy. 

How  simply  you  view  itl 


Literal  translations  from  one  language  into  another  are  almost 
impossible. 


Other  equivalents  for  this  phrase  would  be: 


I No  encendersele  a uno  la 
sangre! 

¡No  apurarse! 

2 This  could  be  rendered: 

i Sepa  que  tengo  más  calma 
que  Job! 

¡Yo  que  soy  el  padre  de  la 
filosofía ! 

¿ A quién  pedir  calma,  a Job? 


Not  to  set  one's  blood  on  fire! 

Not  to  get  impatient! 

Know  that  I possess  more  pa- 
tience than  Job! 

I who  am  the  father  {the  very  em- 
bodiment) of  philosophy! 
Whom  do  you  ask  to  be  patient^ 
Job? 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


294 


The  Rosenthal  Method, 


30.  I am  passionately  fond  of  going  to  the  theatre, 
but  am  afraid  I shoiildn^t  understand  any  thing. 
(Literally:  I am  dying  (me  muero)  to  go  (por 
ir)  to  the  theatre,  but  fear  (I)  not  understand  a 
little  bit  (pizca). 

31.  Otherwise  I should  have  gone  long  ago  and  wit- 
nessed some  of  the  pieces  played  here  but  I felt 
sure  that  I would  not  be  capable  to  understand 
your  witticisms  and  jokes.  (Literally:  If  (it)  were 
not  (fuera)  for  that  I would  already  have  gone  to 
see  various  pieces  of  those  which  (they)  give;  but 
not  me  (I)  feel  capable  (capaz)  to  thoroughly  under- 
stand (de  caer  en  la  cuenta  de)  your  fun  and  jokes 
(bromas). 


32.  I am  afraid  not.  Witticisms  are  always  hard  to 
understand  and  foreigners  experience  difficulties 
in  appreciating  native  fun  and  jokes.  (Literally: 
So  me  it  seems.  The  jests  (las  agudezas  or  los 
chistes)  are  always  hard  to  (de)  understand  and 
the  foreigners  understand  with  difficulty  the 
sallies  (las  salidas)  and  ideas  (ocurrencias)  of  the 
people  of  the  country). 


33.  But  why  do  you  not  attend  concerts?  (Liter- 
ally: Then  (entonces)  why  not  go  you  to  the 
concerts)  ? 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  0 note;  00  room. 


The  Spanish  Language, 


295 


30.  Me  mttero  por  ir  al  teatro,  pero  temo  no  entender 
pizca,  (moo'^a'-ró  péth'-ká). 


31.  Si  no  fuera  por  eso,  hubiese  ya  ido  a ver  varias 
piezas  de  las  que  dan;  pero,  no  me  siento  capaz 
de  caer  en  la  cuenta  de  los  chistes  y bromas  de 
Vds.  (pé'^á'-thás  ká-páth'  ka-érr'  bro-más). 


32.  Así  me  lo  parece.  Las  agudezas  {or  los  chistes) 
son  siempre  difíciles  de  entender,  y los  extran- 
jeros comprenden  con  dificultad  las  salidas  y ocu- 
rrencias de  las  gentes  del  país,  (á-góó-dá'-thás 
ches'-tés  ex-trán-^há'-rós). 


33.  Entonces  ¿ por  qué  no  va  V.  a los  conciertos? 
(kón-the^érr'-tós) . 


á far;  a pale;  5 eve;  é there;  ó note;  óó  room. 


296  The  Rosenthal  Method. 

34.  I am  passionately  fond  of  music  and  in  Chicago 
' I used  to  attend  the  Symphony-Concerts  every 

Saturday.  (Literally:  So  much  me  pleases  the 
music  (la  música)  that  in  Chicago  not  (I)  fail 
(falto)  never  at  the  Hall  Philharmonic  (al  Salon 
Filarmónico  or  al  Casino  Musical)  where  there 
is  concert  the  Saturdays  (los  sábados). 

35.  Very  well,  then  accompany  me  this  evening.  You 
will  hear  some  of  our  best  melodies  performed  by 
our  most  famous  Band.  (Literally:  Is  well,  then 
accompany  me  you'^this  night.  Will  hear  you  the 
best  melodies  (melodías)  played  by  (ejecutadas 
por)  the  most  select  of  our  bands). 

36.  The  Mexicans  are  a very  musical  people,  are  they 
not?  (Literally:  The  Mexicans  are  people  (gente) 
of  talent  (talento)  for  the  music,  not  is  (it)  so)? 


1 Some  personal  verbs  are  used  impersonally,  i.  e.  in  the  third 
person  singular.  The  most  important  ones  are: 

Bastar,  To  suffice ^ to  he  sufficient. 

Basta  que  V.  se  empeñe,  It  is  sufficient  that  you  persist 

in  it. 

Su  palabra  basta,  Your  word  is  enough. 

Basta  que  V.  lo  diga,  It  is  sufficient  that  you  say  so. 

Convenir,  To  agree ^ to  suit. 

Conviene  hacer  esto,  It  is  expedient  to  do  it. 

Me  conviene,  * It  suits  me. 

Gustar,  To  please. 

Me  gusta  comer  a la  una,  I like  to  dine  at  one. 

El  estudio  de  idiomas  me  gusta,  I like  to  study  languages. 

Disgustar,  To  displease. 

Me  disgusta  oir  tal  cosa,  I dislike  to  hear  such  a thing. 

Su  conversación  disgusta.  His  conversation  is  unpleasant. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


The  Spanish  Language. 


297 


34.  Tanto  me  place^  la  música  que  en  Chicago  no 
falto  nunca  al  Salon  Filarmónico  donde  hay  con- 
cierto los  sábados,  (fe-lárr-mo'-né-kó). 

35.  Está  bien,  pues  acompáñeme  V.  esta  noche.  Escu- 
chará V.  las  mejores  melodías  ejecutadas  por  la 
más  selecta  de  nuestras  bandas,  (és-koo-chá'-rá 
noo-és'-trás  ban'-dás). 

36.  i Los  Mejicanos  son  gente  de  talento  para  la  mú- 
sica, no  es  así?  (‘hén'-té). 


Fastidiar,  To  annoy,  to  he  tiresome. 


Fastidia  quedarse  en  casa, 
Me  fastidia  guardar  la  cama, 

Tanta  lluvia  fastidia. 


It  is  tiresome  to  stay  at  home. 

It  is  annoying  that  I have  to  stay 
abed. 

So  much  rain  is  annoying. 


Importar,  To 

Importa  decírselo, 

No  importa. 

No  me  importa, 

Placer, 

Me  place  oirlo, 
i Plegue  a Dios! 


of  importance. 

It  is  important  to  tell  him  so. 
Never  mind. 

I don't  care. 

9 please. 

It  pleases  me  to  hear  it. 

May  it  please  God! 


Valer,  To  he  worth,  to  he  better. 

Más  vale  tarde  que  nunca.  Better  late  than  never. 

El  trabajo  vale  más  que  la  Work  is  better  than  idleness. 

ociosidad. 


á far;  a pale;  é eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


298 


The  Rosenthal  Method, 


37.  Indeed  they  are.  Every  one,  rich  or  poor,  is  fond 
of  music.  They  are  natural  musicians.  Many 
persons  who  understand  nothing  of  music,  who 
do  not  even  know  one  note  from  another  are  able 
to  play  a piece  of  music  correctly  after  hearing  it  a 
few  times.  (Literally:  (They)  have  fame  (fama) 
of  it  (ello).  All  from  the  most  rich  (pudiente)  to 
the  most  needy  (menesteroso)  have  taste  for  (por) 
the  music.  (They)  are  musicians  bom  (innatos). 
Many  who  not  understand  nothing  of  music,  that 
not  know  even  the  notes,  can  play  (tocar)  a piece 
(una  pieza)  admirably  (admirablemente)  after 
(después  de)  to  hear  her  some  times). 

38.  Wonderful!  I have  often  heard  this,  but  I never 
believed  it.  (Literally:  Wonderful  (cáspita)l  (I) 
have  heard  say  it,  but  never  it  could  believe). 

39.  It  is  an  absolute  fact  which  is  tme  not  only  of  the 
inhabitants  of  Mexico,  but  of  the  natives  of  South 
America  also.  (Literally:  Well  (it)  is  thus,  and 
not  only  is  (it)  tmth  of  the  natives  (los  naturales) 
of  Mexico,  but  of  the  South  America  (Sur- América). 

40.  And  do  they  perform  well? 


1 The  Infinitive  stands  after  all  prepositions: 

Despues  de  oir  a ámbas  partes,  After  hearing  both  parties  one  is 
es  como  se  puede  juzgar,  able  to  judge. 

Para  aprender  algo  es  preciso  In  order  to  learn  anything  one 
estudiar.  must  study. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  0 note;  00  room. 


The  Spanish  Language, 


299 


37.  Tienen  fama  de  ello.  Todos,  desde  el  más  pudiente 
hasta  el  más  menesteroso,  tienen  gusto  por  la 
música.  Son  músicos  innatos.  Muchos  que  no 
entienden  nada  de  música,  que  no  conocen  ni  aún 
las  notas  pueden  tocar  una  pieza  admirablemente 
después  de  oirla^  algunas  veces.  (póo-dé'T  én'-té 
má-nas-tá-ro'-so  ne). 


38.  ¡ Cáspita!  He  oido  decirlo,  pero  jamás  lo  pude 
creer. 


39.  Pues  es  así,  y no  solo  es  verdad  de  los  naturales 
de  Méjico,  sino  de  los  de  Sur-América.  (ná-toó- 
rá'dés). 


40.  ¿ Ejecutan  bien  ? (a-‘ha-koo'-tán). 


Sin  preguntar  no  se  puede 
saber, 

Para  levantarse  temprano  es 
necesario  acostarse  tem- 
prano. 


Without  asking  one  cannot  ob- 
tain knowledge. 

In  order  to  get  up  early  one  must 
retire  early. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


300 


The  Rosenthal  Method, 


41.  Some  of  our  bands  are  equal,  if  not  superior  to 
those  of  the  United  States  or  Germany.  They 
play  all  music  with  great  fire  and  expression  and 
give  characteristic  coloring  not  only  to  our  national 
melodies,  but  to  the  compositions  of  Verdi,  Mas- 
cagni and  even  of  Wagner.  (Literally:  Some  of  our 
orchestras  (nuestras  orquestas)  equal  (igualan)  or 
surpass  (superan)  to  the  of  the  States  United  or 
Germany  (Alemania).  (They)  perform  (ejecutan) 
all  the  pieces  with  much  passion  (mucha  pasión) 
and  force  (fuerza)  and  know  to  give  especial 
interpretation  (especial  interpretación)  not  only 
to  our  songs  local  (canciones  locales)  but  also  to 
the  compositions  (las  composiciones)  of  the  masters 
(los  maestros)  Verdi,  Mascagni  and  as  far  as  (hasta) 
to  the  of  Wagner). 


42.  Well,  I shall  be  delighted  to  accompany  you  this 
evening.  I hope  they  will  have  an  interesting  pro- 
gram. (Literally:  Go  then;  (I)  me  animate  (me 
animo)  to  go  with  you  this  night.  Would  (ojalá) 
(they)  may  have  good  repertory). 


^ Nouns  ending  in  cion  or  tion  are  of  the  feminine  gender,  as  la 
cuestión,  the  question:  la  meditación,  the  meditation. 

The  words  are  the  same  in  both  languages,  except  that  in  Spanish 
the  t of  the  termination  tion  is  changed  into  c wherever  it  has  the 
sound  of  sh  in  English. 

Compare  Part  X. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


The  Spanish  Language, 


301 


41.  Algunas  de  nuestras  orquestas  igualan  o superan 
a las  de  los  Estados  Unidos  o Alemania.  Ejecutan 
todas  las  piezas  con  mucha  pasión^  y fuerza  y 
saben  dar  especial  interpretación  no  sólo  a nues- 
tras canciones  locales,  sino  también  a las  composi- 
ciones de  los  maestros  Verdi,  Mascagni,  y hasta 
a las  de  Wagner,  (ór-kés'-tás  é-gwá'-lan). 


42.  Vaya  pues;  me  animo  a ir  con  V.  esta  noche. 
Ojalá  tengan  buen  repertorio,  (rá-pér-tor'-yó). 


Nouns  ending  in  Spanish  in  tad  or  dad — terminations  which 
correspond  to  the  English  ty  or  the  Latin  tas, — are  of  the  feminine 
gender,  as  humanidad,  humanity;  puridad,  purity;  adversidad, 
adversity. 

General  rule  for  Latin  scholars:  Nouns  derived  from  the  Latin 
preserve  their  genders  in  Spanish,  with  this  exception,  that  neuter 
nouns  in  Latin  become  masculine  in  Spanish. 


á far;  a pale;  e eye;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


302 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


MAIN  SENTENCE 

You  ought  not  to  have  gone  out  without  your  over- 
shoes in  this  changeable  weather.  In  consequence  of 
your  carelessness  you  have  caught  a bad  cold  and  you 
will  be  obliged  to  keep  your  room  for  some  time  before 
you  will  be  able  to  continue  your  journey. 

Literal  Translation. 

Not  ought  you  to  have  gone  out  without  yoiu*  shoes 
of  rubber  making  a weather  so  changeable.  Owing  to 
your  carelessness  3^ou  has  seized  a tremendous  cold  which 
you  will  oblige  to  keep  bed  for  some  time  before  that 
(you)  may  be  able  to  continue  your  journey. 


á far;  a pale;  6 eve;  é there;  ó note,  ot)  room. 


The  Spanish  Language. 


303 


FRASE  FUNDAMENTAL. 

No  debió  Vd.  haber  salido  sin  sus  zapatos  de  goma 
haciendo  un  tiempo  tan  variable.  Debido  a su  descuido 
le  ha  pillado  un  tremendo  resfriado  que  le  obligará  a guardar 
cama  por  algún  tiempo  antes  que  pueda  continuar  su 
viaje. 

Pronunciation. 

No  da-bé^ó'  óos-tád'  á-bérr'  sá-lé'-do  sen  sóos  thá- 
pá-tos  dé  gó'-má  á-the^én'-do  óón  te^ém'-po  tan 
vá-re^á'-bl;^.  Da-bé'-dó  á sóo  dés-kwé'-dó  la  á pél- 
yá'-dó  óón  trá-mén'-dó  rés-fré"^á'-dó  ka  la  ob-lé-gá-rá'  á 
gwárr-dárr'  ká'-má  porr  al-góón'  té'^ém'-pó  án'-tés  ká 
póó"^á'“da  kón-té-nóó-árr'  sóó  ve'^á'-‘hj^. 


1 The  study  of  this  sentence  will  enable  the  student  to  master 
some  difficult  idiomatic  constructions  in  regard  to  the  use  of  the 
Subjunctive  Mood,  the  omission  of  que  before  the  Subjunctive, 
the  Infinitive,  Prepositions,  etc.  The  pupil  will  also  observe  that 
this  phrase  will  lead  to  a new  series  of  important  conversational 
themes. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


304  The  Rosenthal  Method, 

You  ought  not  to  have  gone  out  without  your  over- 
shoes in  this  changeable  weather. 

Not  ought  you 

to  have  gone  out 

without 

your  overshoes 

making 

a weather 

so 

changeable. 


^ Study  the  whole  conjugation  of  the  irregular  verb. 

Salir,  To  go  out. 

Modo  indicativo. 


Yo, 

Usted, 

El, 

Nosotros, 

Ustedes, 

Ellos, 

Pres: 

salgo, 

sale. 

sale. 

salimos. 

salen. 

salen, 

Imp: 

salía. 

salía. 

salía. 

salíamos. 

salían. 

salían. 

Def: 

salí. 

salió. 

salió. 

salimos. 

salieron. 

salieron. 

Fut: 

saldré. 

saldrá. 

saldrá. 

saldremos. 

saldrán. 

saldrán. 

Cond: 

saldría. 

saldría. 

saldría,  saldríamos. 

Modo  subjuntivo. 

saldrían, 

saldrían. 

Pres: 

salga. 

salga. 

salga. 

salgamos. 

salgan, 

salgan. 

Imp:^ 

saliera. 

saliera. 

saliera. 

saliéramos. 

salieran. 

salieran. 

Imp:2 

saliese. 

saliese. 

saliese. 

saliésemos. 

saliesen. 

saliesen. 

Fut: 

saliere. 

saliere. 

saliere. 

saliéremos. 

salieren. 

salieren. 

Gerundio:  saliendo. 
Participio:  salido. 


2 The  Gerund  is  invariable  in  gender  and  number,  and  is  used  to 
denote  a continuation  of  the  action  or  state: 


Andan  entrando  y saliendo, 
Canta  bailando. 

Los  dejé  durmiendo, 

El  lo  dijo  riendo, 

Habla  durmiendo. 


They  continue  coming  and  going. 
He  sings  while  dancing, 

I left  them  sleeping. 

He  said  so  laughing. 

He  talks  in  his  sleep  {whilst 
sleeping). 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


The  Spanish  Language, 


3^5 


No  debió  V.  haber  salido  sin  sus  zapatos 

no  da-bé"^ó'  óós-tad'  á-bérr'  sá-lé'-do  sen  sóós  thá-pá-tós 
de  goma  haciendo  un  tiempo  tan  variable, 

dé  gO'-má  á-the^én'-dó  oón  té'^ém'-po  tan  vá-ré'^á'-bljr. 
No  debió  V.  (no  dá-bé^ó'  óbs-tád') 
haber  salido^  (á-bérr'  sá-le'-dó) 
sin  (sen) 

sus  zapatos  de  goma 
haciendo^  (á-thé'^én'-dó) 
un  tiempo  (óón  te"^ém'-po) 
tan  (tan) 

variable  (vá-re^á'-bl^^). 


The  Gerund  is,  therefore,  frequently  used  for  the  sake  of  brevity 
or  euphony  where  we  in  English  employ  while^  whilst^  aSy  since, 
although,  if  or  hy\ 


One  learns  by  teaching, 

A cough  is  cured  by  perspiring. 
Since  it  is  so,  I don't  want  to  do  it. 
If  I give  him  permission  he  will 
go  out. 

When  he  saw  his  brother  was  not 
coming  he  went  away. 

As  he  has  a sore  foot  he  cannot 
get  up. 


Enseñando  se  aprende. 

La  tos  se  cura  sudando. 

Siendo  así  no  quiero  hacerlo. 

Dándole  yo  licencia,  saldrá. 

Viendo  que  su  hermano  no 
venía,  se  fué. 

Teniendo  malo  el  pie  no  puede 
levantarse. 

The  Gerund  is  used  in  connection  with  the  verb  estar,  similar 
to  the  progressive  conjugation  in  English,  to  express  the  action 
of  the  verb  as  unfinished  and  continuing* 

I De  qué  está  V.  hablando?  Of  what  are  you  speaking? 

I Qué  está  V.  haciendo?  What  are  you  doing? 

Estoy  escribiendo  una  carta,  I am  writing  a letter. 

He  estado  leyendo  todo  el  día,  I have  been  reading  all  day  long. 
The  verb  estar  cannot  be  used  with  the  Gerund  of  ser,  to  be; 
ir,  and  venir,  to  come.  Thus  we  must  say: 

Voy,  I am  going.  Viene,  He  is  coming,  etc. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  oo  room. 


The  Rosenthal  Method, 


306 


1.  Why  did  you  go  out  in  this  changeable  weather 
without  your  overshoes?  You  ought  not  to  have 
done  that.  (Literally:  Why  went  out  you  without 
your  shoes  of  rubber  with  a weather  so  changeable? 
Not  ought  you  to  have  done  such  (tal). 

2.  I surely  would  not  have  done  so  if  I had  not  thought 
the  weather  would  clear.  (Literally:  The  truth 
that  not  it  (I)  would  have  done  in  not  to  believe 
(a  no  creer)  that  the  weather  was  going  to  clear 
(aclarar). 

3.  How  could  you  have  supposed  such  a thing?  The 
weather  has  been  bad  for  some  days.  (Literally: 
How  coiild  you  imagine  it  (figurárselo^)  ? It 
makes  much  that  we  have  bad  weather). 


^ Many  verbs  are  reflexive  in  Spanish  which  are  not  so  in  English, 
as: 

Alegrarse,  to  rejoice,  equivocarse,  to  he  mistaken. 

figurarse,  to  imagine.  engañarse,  to  he  deceived. 

disgustarse,  to  he  displeased.  burlarse,  to  laugh  at. 

It  must  also  be  observed  that  permanently  reflexive  verbs,  may 
be  conjugated  impersonally  with  se  (the  dative  of  the  pronoun 
serving  to  distinguish  the  person)  as: 

Personal  Inflection.  Impersonal  Inflection, 

me  figuro,  se  me  figura,  I imagine. 

(te  figuraos),  (se  te  figura),  {thou  imaginest). 

se  figura,  se  le  figura,  he  imagines. 

V.  se  figura,  se  le  figura  a V.,  you  imagine. 

nos  figuramos,  * se  nos  figura,  we  imagine. 

(os  figuráis),  (se  os  figura),  {ye  imagine). 

se  figuran,  se  les  figura,  they  imagine. 

V.  V.  se  figuran,  se  les  figura  a Vds.,  you  imagine. 

The  pupil  ought  also  to  remember  that  almost  all  passive  verbs 
in  English  and  all  verbs  compounded  with  to  get  ov  to  become,  are 
reflexive  in  Spanish.  The  following  examples  will  make  this  clear: 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  0 note;  00  room. 


The  Spanish  Language, 


307 


I.  ¿ Por  qué  salió  V.  sin  sus  zapatos  de  goma  con  un 
tiempo  tan  variable  ? No  debió  V.  haber  hecho  tal. 


2.  La  verdad  que  no  lo  hubiese  hecho  a no  creer  que 
el  tiempo  iba  a aclarar.  (óó-be"^é'-s^  é'-bá). 


3.  ¿ Cómo  pudo  V.  figurárselo  Hace  mucho  que 
tenemos  mal  tiempo,  (fe-góó-rárr'-sa-ló). 


Llamarse,  to  he  called. 

I Cómo  se  llama  V.?  What  is  your  name? 

Me  llamo  José.  My  name  is  Joseph. 

Equivocarse,  to  he  mistaken. 

V.  se  equivoca,  You  are  mistaken. 

Sentarse,  to  he  seated. 

Siéntese  V.  señor,  Sit  down^  sir. 

Levantarse,  to  get  up,  to  arise. 

I A qué  hora  se  levanta  V.?  At  what  time  do  you  get  up? 

Me  levanto  a las  cinco,  I rise  at  five  o'clock. 

Acostarse,  to  retire,  to  go  to  hed. 

I Está  V.  acostándose?  Are  you  getting  into  hed? 

No  estoy  acostándome  todavía,  I am  not  getting  into  hed  yet,  hut 
pero  me  acostaré  pronto,  I shall  do  so  soon. 

Enfadarse,  to  get  angry. 

No  se  enfade  V.,  Don't  get  angry. 

Calentarse,  to  get  warm. 

Caliéntese  V.,  Get  warm. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


3o8 


The  Rosenthal  Method, 


4.  Yes,  for  this  season  of  the  year  it  was  bad  enough, 
nevertheless  I thought  it  would  clear.  (Literally: 
Thus  (it)  is,  for  the  season  (la  estación)  in  which 
we  are  (it)  has  been  very  bad,  this  notwithstanding 
(esto  no  obstante)  believed  (I)  that  (it)  would  clear 
(despejaría). 

5.  An  erroneous  supposition,  my  dear  sir.  You  don’t 

know  our  climate  yet.  (Literally:  Thought  you 

badly,  my  dear  sir  (señor  mío).  Well  it  is  seen 
that  still  not  are  you  familiar  (familiarizado)  with 
our  climate  (nuestro  clima). 

6.  I always  understood  that  the  Mexican  climate  was 
good,  and  according  to  the  weather-reports  I sup- 
posed that  it  surely  was  going  to  clear.  (Literally: 
(I)  had  (tenia^)  understood  that  the  climate  of 
Mexico  not  was  bad  and  according  to  (según)  the 
reports  (los  avisos)  to  be  hoped  (it)  ought  (meaning 
really:  It  was  to  be  hoped)  that  (it)  would  clear 
(aclarase). 

7.  According  to  the  weather-reports?  Do  you  belong 
to  the  few  who  believe  in  them?  (Literally:  The 
reports  meteorological  (meteorológicos)  ? Belong  you 
(pertenece  V.)  to  the  few  which  trust  (se  fian)  of 
them? 


Enfermarse,  to  get  sick. 


El  se  enfermó  al  salir  del  tea- 
tro, 


He  became  sick  when  leaving  the 
theatre. 


Irse,  to  go  away. 


Váyase  V., 
Me  voy, 


Go  away. 

I am  going  away. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


The  Spanish  Language, 


309 


4.  Así  es,  para  la  estación  en  que  estamos  ha  sido  bien 
malo,  esto  no  obstante  creí  que  despejaría,  (sé'- 
dó  kra-é'  dés-pa-^há-ré'-á). 


5.  Pensó  V.  mal,  señor  mío.  Bien  se  ve  que  aún  no 
está  V.  familiarizado  con  nuestro  clima,  (fá-me- 
lé'^á-re-thá'-dó  klé'-má). 


6.  Tenía^  entendido  que  el  clima  de  Méjico  no  era 
malo  y según  los  avisos  esperarse  debía  que  acla- 
rase. (kle'-má  á-vé'-sós). 


7.  ¿ Los  pronósticos  meteorológicos  ? ¿ Pertenece  V. 

a los  pocos  que  se  fían  de  ellos?  (pró-nos'-té-kos 
ma-ta-ó-ró-lo'-he-kós  fe'-án). 


Acordarse,  to  remember. 

Me  acordaré  siempre  de  eso,  I shall  always  remember  it. 

Pasearse,  to  go  for  a walk  (a  promenade). 

¿Quiere  V.  pasearse  conmigo?  Will  you  take  a walk  with  me? 

No  tengo  tiempo  de  pasearme,  I have  no  time  for  promenades. 

^ Strictly  idiomatic  and  frequently  used. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


310 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


8.  As  a general  thing,  I am  not  so  credulous,  and  I 

only  regret  to  have  placed  my  confidence  in  weather 
forecasts.  (Literally:  Generally  (por  lo  general) 

not  (I)  am  credulous  (crédulo)  and  regret  to  have 
me  confided  now  of  prognostics). 

9.  Yes,  you  ought  not  to  have  done  that.  You  have 

been  imposed  upon.  (Literally:  Clearly  never 

ought  you  to  have  it  done.  You  have  taken  (se- 
ha  llevado  V.)  disappointment  (chasco). 

10.  Most  likely  we  shall  have  to  stay  in  all  the  after- 
noon. Just  look  how  it  rains.  (Literally:  The 
probable  will  be  that  (we)  may  have  to  remain 
here  all  the  afternoon.  See  you  that  rain  (esa 
lluvia). 

11.  Yes,  it  is  really  pouring.  It  is  useless  to  think 
about  going  out  in  this  fearful  weather.  A great 
pity,  isn’t  it?  (Literally:  Yes,  torrent-like  (to- 
rrencial). Folly  (tontería)  to  think  in  to  go  out 
with  such  storm  (borrasca).  Pity,  not  is  (it)  thus)? 

12.  Yes,  it  is  too  bad.  But  what  about  a drive? 
(=  and  in  carriage)? 

13.  Be  advised  by  me.  Don’t  venture  out  in  this  hor- 

rid weather.  Just  see  how  it  lightens!  (Liter- 
ally: Follow  you  my  advice  (mi  consejo).  Not 

venture  out  (se  aventure)  with  the  tempest  (la 
tormenta).  What  flashes  of  lightning  (qué  de 
relámpagos)  1 


1 To  advise  is  generally  rendered  by  aconsejar,  as: 

I Qué  me  aconseja  V.  hacer?  What  would  you  advise  me  to  do? 

¿ Que  lugares  me  aconseja  V.  What  places  would  you  advise 

visitar?  me  to  visit? 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


The  Spanish  Language, 


311 

8.  Por  lo  general  no  soy  crédulo  y siento  haberme  fiado 
ahora  de  pronósticos,  (^há-ná-rál') 


9.  ¡ Claro  ! jamás  debía  V.  haberlo  hecho.  Se  ha 
llevado  V.  chasco,  (^há-más'  lya-vá'-do  chás'>kó). 

10.  Lo  probable  será  que  tengamos  que  permanecer 
aquí  toda  la  tarde.  Vea  V.  esa  lluvia,  (pérr-má- 
na-thérr'  vá'-á  lyób'-vé"^á). 

11.  Sí,  torrencial.  Tontería  pensar  en  salir  con  tal 
borrasca.  Lástima,  ¿ no  es  así?  (torr-rén'the'^ál' 
tOn-tá-re'-á  lás'-té-má). 


12.  De  veras.  Pero,  ¿ y en  coche? 

13.  Siga  V.  mi  consejo.^  No  se  aventure  con  la  tor- 
menta. ¡ Qué  de  relámpagos  ! (sé'-gá  kon-sa'- 
hó  ra-lam'-pá-gós). 


¿Quién  le  ha  aconsejado  a V. 
esto? 

Si  yo  estuviera  en  su  lugar,  pro- 
cedería según  su  consejo. 
Yo  estoy  seguro  que  lo  sentirá 
V.  si  no  sigue  su  consejo. 


Who  has  given  you  this  advice? 

If  I were  in  your  place  I should 
act  upon  his  advice. 

I am  sure  you  will  be  sorry  if  you 
act  against  his  advice. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


312 


The  Rosenthal  Method, 


14.  And  now  it  is  commencing  to  thunder.  Goodness! 
what  a clap  of  thunder;  that  must  have  struck 
near  by.  (Literally:  Now  commence  the  thunder- 
claps (los  truenos).  Goodness  (canastos),  what 
noise  (estruendo) ! Must  have  struck  (caído)  near 
here  (por  aquí). 

15.  But  what  is  that?  A carriage  in  this  storm  at  our 
door?  (Literally:  What  was  (that)?  There  stops 
(se  detiene)  here  a carriage  with  that  storm)  ? 

16.  If  I am  not  greatly  mistaken  it  is  yoiu:  compatriot 
(supaisano). 

17.  What  can  bring  him  here  in  this  fearful  weather? 
(Literally:  What  him  brings  here  with  this  weather 
so  terrible)  ? 

18.  There  he  is!  ( = There  (he)  comes). 


19.  But,  my  dear  Lewis,  what  brings  you  here  in  this 
horrible  weather?  And  oh,  you  are  wet  to  the 
skin!  (Literally:  Say,  Lewis  (Luis)  dear,  what 
deuce  (qué  diantre)  you  brings  with  this  bad 
weather?  And  are  you  made  a sop). 

20.  I only  went  across  the  street  to  get  a cab  and  got 
wet  to  the  skin.  (Literally:  Well  only  (I)  crossed 
(atravesé)  the  street  in  order  to  take  the  cab 
(coche)  and  became  wet  (empapé). 


1 A few  sentences  may  give  more  clearness  in  regard  to  the  use 


of  this  verb: 

Si  no  me  equivoco,  creo  que 
tengo  el  honor  de  dirijirme 
al  señor  Sir  vent, 

El  se  equivocó  al  hacer  esta 
declaración. 


If  I am  not  mistaken,  I think 
I have  the  honor  of  addressing 
Mr.  Sirvent. 

He  was  greatly  mistaken  when  he 
made  this  statement. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


The  Spanish  Language, 


313 


14.  Ahora  empiezan  los  truenos.  ¡Canastos,  qué  es- 
truendo! Debe  haber  caído  por  aquí. 

15.  I Qué  fué?  ¿ Se  detiene  aquí  un  carruaje  con  esa 
tormenta? 

16.  Si  no  me  equivoco^  es  su  paisano,  (á-ké-vo'-ko). 


17.  ¿ Qué  le  trae  aquí  con  este  tiempo  tan  terrible? 


18.  Allí  viene. 

19.  Diga,  Luis  querido,  ¿ qué  diantre  le  trae  con  este 
mal  tiempo?  Y está  V.  hecho  una  sopa,  (lóó'-es 
ka-re'-dó  dé^án'-trá  so-pá). 


20.  Pues  solo  atravesé  la  calle  para  tomar  el  coche 
y me  empapé. 


¿No  está  V.  equivocado? 

Esta  es  una  equivocación, 

Hay  una  gran  equivocación  en 
esta  cuenta, 

Dispénseme;  V.  ha  cometido 
una  equivocación ; permí- 
tame V.  corregirla. 


Are  you  not  mistaken? 

This  is  a mistake. 

There  is  a great  mistake  in  this 
hill. 

Pardon  we,  you  have  made  a 
mistake.  Allow  me  to  cor- 
rect it. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


The  Rosenthal  Method, 


314 

21.  Change  your  clothes  or  you  will  catch  your  death 
of  cold.  (Literally:  Change  (múdese)  the  cloth- 
ing (la  ropa)  if  not  go  you  to  take  a cold). 

22.  Lie  down  on  my  bed  and  hang  your  clothes. 

(Literally:  Retire  (acuéstese)  in  my  bed  and 

hang  up  (cuelgue)  your  things  (su  vestido). 

23.  But  I was  to  bring  you  an  invitation.  Our  friend 
sends  his  regards  to  you  and.  . . . 

24.  Pardon  me  for  interrupting  you,  but  your  health 

is  of  supreme  importance.  (Literally:  Permit 

(that  I)  you  interrupt,  but  your  health  is  first  of 
nothing). 

25.  Just  as  you  like.  But  I really  do  not  catch  cold 

as  easily  as  you  imagine.  (Literally:  As  you 

may  say.  Despite  of  which  (a  pesar  de  que)  not 
(I)  take  cold  (me  resfrío)  so  easily  as  you  yourself 
imagine). 

26.  Here  is  everything  you  need.  Fortunately  we  are 
of  the  same  size  and  everything  will  fit  you  splen- 
didly. (Literally:  Here  is  whatever  (cuanto)  you 
makes  need  (falta).  Thanks  that  (a  que)  (we)  are 
of  equal  stature  (igual  estatiura)  all  you  wül  fit 
(sentará)  well). 

^ The  conjugation  of  acostar  has  been  given  before.  Always 
remember  that  when  a verb  has  ue  in  the  stem-syllable  the  Infin- 
itive must  have  an  o in  place  of  it.  Colgar  has  the  same  irregu- 
larities; the  euphonic  changes  of  g have  been  explained  before. 
Compare  Part  X. 

2 There  are  numerous  ways  of  expressing  this  phrase: 

Muchos  recados  en  su  casa  de  My  regards  at  home. 

Vd., 

Dígale  mil  cosas  de  mi  parte,  Give  my  regards  to  her. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


The  Spanish  Language, 


315 

21.  Múdese  la  ropa,  si  no  va  V.  a tomar  un  resfriado. 

22.  Acuéstese^  en  mi  cama  y cuelgue^  su  vestido,  (á* 
kwés'-tá-sa  kwél'-ga). 

23.  Le  traía  una  invitación.  El  amigo  envia  saludos^ 
y.  . . . (en-vé-tá-thé^ón'). 

24.  Permita  le  interrumpa  pero  su  salud  es  primero 
que  nada. 

25.  Como  V.  diga.  A pesar  de  que  no  me  resfrío  tan 
fácilmente  como  usted  se  imagina. 

26.  Aquí  está  cuanto  le  hace  falta.  Gracias  a que  so- 
mos de  igual  estatura  todo  le  sentará  bien,  (é- 
gwál'  és-tá-too'-rá). 


Póngame  a los  pies  de  su  señora 
de  Vd., 

Presente  V.  mis  respetos  a su 
madre, 

Muchas  memorias  de  mi  parte 
a su  hermana, 

Memorias  a todos  en  casa, 
Muchas  expresiones  al  Sr 
Gómez, 

Recuérdeme  bondadosamente  a 
su  esposa, 

Gracias,  las  apreciará  mucho, 
Gracias,  las  estimará  mucho, 
Gracias,  quedará  V.  servido. 


Please  give  my  kindest  regards  to 
your  wife. 

Present  my  respects  to  your 
mother. 

Give  my  regards  to  your  sister. 

Remember  me  to  all  at  home. 

My  regards  to  Mr.  Gomez. 

Remember  me  kindly  to  your 
wife. 

Thanks  (=  she  will  appreciate 
them  greatly). 

Thanks  (=  she  will  esteem  them 
greatly). 

Thanks  ( = you  will  remain 
served). 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


3i6  The  Rosenthal  Method, 

27.  Take  off  all  your  damp  clothes  and  put  on  'mine 

at  once.  (Literally:  Take  off  yourself  (quítese), 

your  clothes  (ropa)  wet  (mojada)  and  put  on  your- 
self (póngase)  immediately  the  mine). 

28.  As  soon  as  you  are  dressed  I will  ring  for  the  servant. 
He  shall  see  that  your  clothes  are  dried.  (Literally: 
As  soon  as  (tan  luego)  (you)  may  be  ready  (listo) 
(I)  shall  call  the  servant.  He  will  make  (that)  may 
gets  dry  (se  seque)  the  yours  (la  suya). 

In  consequence  of  your  carelessness  you  have  contracted 
a bad  cold. 

Owing  to 
your  carelessness 
you  has  seized 
a fearful  cold. 

1.  What  is  the  subject  of  to-day’s  lesson?  (Liter- 
ally: Of  what  treats  (trata)  the  lesson  of  to-day)? 

2.  In  to-day’s  lesson  we  will  talk  about  diseases  and 

health,  a most  important  theme.  (Literally:  We 

shall  occupy  ourselves  (nos  ocuparemos)  of  the 
health  and  of  the  disease  (la  enfermedad),  subject 
highly  important  (asunto  capital). 

3.  And  the  consideration  of  this  theme  will  probably 
lead  to  many  new  expressions?  (Literally:  And 
the  study  of  this  theme  us  will  lead  to  the  many 
expressions  new)  ? 


1 From  secar,  to  dry.  The  euphonic  changes  have  been  explained 
before.  It  will  be  observed  that  que  is  frequently  omitted  before 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


The  Spanish  Language,  317 

27.  Quítese  su  ropa  mojada  y póngase  inmediatamente 
la  mía. 


28.  Tan  luego  esté  listo  llamaré  al  criado.  El  hará 
se  seque^  la  suya. 


Debido  a su  descuido  le  ha  pillado  un 

dá-bé'-dó  á soó  dés-kwe'-dó  la  á pel-yá'-do  óón 

tremendo  resfriado, 
tra-mén'-do  rés-fré^á'-dó. 

Debido  a (dá-be'-do  á) 
su  descuido  (soo  dés-kwe'-dó). 
le  ha  pillado  (la  á pel-yá'-dó) 

un  tremendo  resfriado  (óon  tra-mén'-dó  rés-fre"^á'- 
dó). 


I.  ¿De  qué  trata  la  lección  de  hoy?  (lék-the^on'). 


2.  Nos  ocuparemos  de  la  salud  y de  la  enfermedad, 
asunto  capital. 


3.  ¿Y  el  estudio  de  ese  tema  nos  conducirá  al  de 
muchas  expresiones  nuevas? 


the  Subjunctive  Mood.  This  often  happens  in  every  day  con- 
versation and  the  pupil  ought  to  accustom  himself  to  it. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


The  Rosenthal  Method, 


3i3 

4.  Without  doubt.  Now  let  us  see.  How  are  you 
to-day?  You  look  somewhat  fatigued  and  ill. 
(Literally:  Clear  it  is.  Let  us  go  to  see  then. 
How  are  you  to-day?  Have  you  face  (cara)  of 
to  be  dejected  (abatido)  and  even  (hasta)  ill). 

5.  I do  not  feel  well.  I think  I took  cold  last  night 
on  leaving  the  theatre.  (Literally:  Not  I feel 
(me  siento)  well.  I fear  to  have  caught  (haber 
agarrado)  a cold  last  night  at  the  departure  (a  la 
salida)  from  the  theatre). 

6.  I am  exceedingly  sorry  to  hear  that.  Did  you  not 
v/ear  your  overshoes?  (Literally:  Much  me  troubles 
(apena) . Had  you  put  on  the  shoes  of  rubber)  ? 

7.  In  going  to  the  theatre  the  idea  of  an  umbrella  or 
overshoes  never  occurred  to  me.  (Literally:  In 
going  (al  ir)  to  the  theatre  not  me  occurred  to  take 
neither  umbrella  nor  shoes  of  rubber?  {Or:  Who 
could  have  thought  in  to  take  neither  (ni)  umbrella 
or  (o)  shoes  of  rubber)? 

8.  You  have  a bad  cough.  You  really  seem  to  have 
a wretched  cold.  (Literally:  Your  cough  (su  tos) 
not  me  pleases.  It  seems  that  it  seized  (agarró) 
to  you  in  truth  (de  veras). 


^ Parecer  has  many  idiomatic  meanings, 
will  help  to  explain  them: 


É1  parece  un  perfecto  caballero, 
y más  que  eso,  lo  es, 

Él  pareció  muy  incomodado  a 
su  demanda. 

No  me  parece  que  iré  a verle 
esta  mañana, 

¿Qué  le  parece  a V.  esta  ac- 
triz? 


The  following  phrases 

He  seems  a perfect  gentleman^ 
and  what  is  more^  he  is  one. 

He  seemed  greatly  annoyed  at 
your  request. 

I don't  think  I shall  call  on  him 
this  morning. 

What  do  you  think  of  this  ac- 
tress? 


á far;  á pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


The  Spanish  Language, 


319 

4.  Claro  está.  Vamos  a ver  pues.  ¿ Qué  tal  está  V. 
hoy?  Tiene  V.  cara  de  estar  abatido  y hasta  en- 
fermo. (á-bá-te'-dó) . 

5.  No  me  siento  bien.  Temo  haber  agarrado  un  res- 
friado anoche  a la  salida  del  teatro. 

6.  Mucho  me  apena.  ¿ Tenía  V.  puestos  los  zapatos 
de  goma?  (á-pá'-ná). 

7.  Al  ir  al  teatro  no  se  me  ocurrió  llevar  ni  paraguas 
ni  zapatos  de  goma.  {Or:  Quién  hubiera  pensado 
en  llevar  ni  paraguas  o zapatos  de  goma)  ? 

8.  Su  tos  no  me  place.  Parece^  que  lo  agarró  a V.  de 
veras,  (á-gárr-ró'  va'-rás). 


¿ No  le  parece  a V.  muy  linda 
esa  dama? 

Este  retrato  no  se  parece  a Vd., 

¿No  cree  Vd.  que  esta  fotografía 
se  parece  mucho  a ella? 

Parece  un  aleman  (un  meji- 
cano), 

i Se  parece  a él ! 

¡ Se  parece  a ella ! 

i Que  mal  parecía  su  madre 
anoche ! 

¡ Que  bien  parecía  el  señor  Bar- 
bozo  cuando  llegó  de  Bue- 
nos Aires! 


DonH  you  think  that  lady  is  very 
pretty? 

This  picture  does  not  resemble  you 
{does  not  look  like  you). 

Don't  you  think  this  photograph 
is  very  much  like  her? 

He  looks  like  a German  {a  Mex- 
ican). 

That's  just  like  him! 

That's  just  like  her! 

How  ill  your  mother  looked  last 
night! 

How  well  Mr.  Barbozo  was  look- 
ing when  he  arrived  from 
Buenos  Aires! 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  0 note;  00  room. 


320 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


VOCABULARIO. 

I Sobre  qué  artículos  hay 
que  pagar  derechos? 

Solamente  en  los  puros 
(póó'-ros). 

No  traigo  ni  puros,  ni  ci- 
garros. 

Sírvase  abrir  el  baúl. 

¿ Qué  hay  en  este  baúl? 

No  hay  sino  ropa  de  uso. 

Llegar. 

La  llegada  (lyá-gá'-dá). 

¿ Cuándo  llega  este  tren  a 
Méjico? 

Este  tren  viene  atrasado 
hora  y media  (á-trá- 
sá'-dó  o'-rá  ma'-de^ 
á). 

¿ A qué  hora  llegaremos? 

¿ Encontraremos  coches  en 
la  estación? 

Por  supuesto.  El  policía 
le  dara  a V.  un  billete 
con  el  número  de  su 
coche  (po-lé-thé'-á) . 

¿ Cuál  es  el  precio  del  ca- 
rruaje hasta  el  hotel 
de  Inglaterra?  (kárr- 
roó-á'-^h;^). 

¿ En  dónde  recojo  mi  equi- 
paje? 


VOCABULARY. 

On  which  articles  do  you 
have  to  pay  duty? 

On  cigars  only. 

I carry  neither  cigars,  nor 
cigarettes. 

Pray  open  your  trunk. 

What  does  this  trunk  con- 
tain? 

Nothing  but  wearing  ap- 
parel. 

To  Arrive. 

The  arrival. 

When  is  this  train  due  in 
Mexico? 

The  train  is  an  hour  and 
30  minutes  late. 

At  what  o’clock  shall  we 
arrive? 

Shall  we  find  cabs  at  the 
station? 

Most  certainly.  The  police- 
man will  hand  you  a 
check  with  the  number 
of  your  cab. 

What  is  the  cab  fare  to 
the  Hotel  of  England? 

Where  do  I get  my  bag- 
gage? 


The  Spanish  Language, 


321 


VOCABULARIO. 

No  tiene  V.  necesidad  de 
molestarse  (na-tha-sé- 
dád'). 

Déle  V.  la  contraseña  al 
portero. 

Él  traerá  el  equipaje  al 
coche. 

Cochero,  al  hotel  de  Ma- 
drid. 

Ande  pronto;  tengo  ham- 
bre y estoy  cansado. 


El  Hotel;  la  posada; 
cuartos;  muebles. 

Un  hotel  de  primera  clase. 

Un  hotel  de  segunda  clase. 

¿ Puede  V.  dirigirme  a un 
buen  hotel  ? (dé-re- 
‘hérr'-me). 

¿ Puede  V.  dirigirme  a un 
hotel  donde  se  hable 
inglés? 

Le  recomiendo  a V.  este 
hotel. 

La  casa  de  huéspedes 
(ób  ^as-pá'-dés) . 

I Recibe  V.  huéspedes? 

El  casero  (ká-sá'-ró). 

La  casera. 

El  portero. 

El  mozo. 


VOCABULARY. 

You  don^t  need  to  trouble 
yourself. 

Just  give  your  check  to 
the  porter. 

He  will  bring  the  baggage 
directly  to  your  cab. 

Cabman,  to  the  Hotel  of 
Madrid. 

Drive  quickly;  I am  hun- 
gry and  tired. 


Hotel;  Inn;  Rooms; 

Furniture. 

A first  class  hotel. 

A second  class  hotel. 

Can  you  direct  me  to  a 
good  hotel? 

Can  you  direct  me  to  a 
hotel  where  English 
is  spoken? 

I can  recommend  this  hotel. 

The  boarding-house  (=  the 
house  of  guests). 

Do  you  take  boarders? 

The  landlord. 

The  landlady. 

The  porter. 

The  waiter. 


322 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


VOCABULARIO. 

La  sirvienta  (sérr-vé'^én'- 
tá). 

La  criada  (kré-á'-dá). 

El  criado. 

El  limpiabotas. 

El  portero. 

Limpiar  (lém-pé^árr'). 

Sírvase  limpiar  mi  cuarto 
inmediatamente. 

Sírvase  hacer  la  cama. 

Sírvase  acepillar  mi  ropa, 
(á-tha-pel-yárr') . 

Límpieme  las  botas  (lem'- 
pé^a-mé). 

Acepillar  (á-tha-pél-yárr') . 

Sírvase  acepillarme. 

I Ha  acepillado  V.  mi  ro- 
pa? 

El  ascensor  (ás-thén-sorr'). 


El  cuarto. 

Este  cuarto  es  demasiado 
grande. 

Este  cuarto  es  demasiado 
pequeño  (pá-kén'-yo). 

Este  cuarto  es  caliente  (frío). 

Este  cuarto  es  oscuro  (hú- 
medo) (óó'-má-do). 

Este  cuarto  es  demasiado 
alto. 


VOCABULARY. 

The  chamber-maid. 

The  man-servant;  boots, 
porter. 

To  clean. 

Please  clean  my  room  at 
once. 

Pray  make  my  bed. 

Please  brush  my  clothes. 

Shine  (polish)  my  boots. 

To  brush  off. 

Pray  brush  me  off. 

Have  you  brushed  my 
clothes? 

The  elevator. 


The  Room. 

This  room  is  too  large. 

This  room  is  too  small. 

This  room  is  hot  (cold). 
This  room  is  dark  (damp). 

This  room  is  too  high 
up. 


I 


ROSENTHAL’S 

COMMON-SENSE  METHOD 


PRACTICAL  LINQUISTRY 

THE 

Spanish  Language 

BY 

DR.  RICHARD  S.  ROSENTHAL 

Author  of  the  Meisterschaft  System,  etc.,  etc. 


Haulenbeek  Corrected  Edition 
Revised  1917 


IN  TEN  PARTS 


NEW  YORK  : : LONDON 
The  International  College  of  Languages 


COPYRIGHT,  1905, 

BY 

THE  INTERNATIONAL  COLLEGE  OF  LANGUAGES. 
Entered  at 

Stationers^  Hall,  London,  Eng. 


The  Spanish  Language. 


323 


({12^ 

/in 


CONTENTS. 

Health,  cont 324 

With  a physician 338 

Anecdotes 358 

Proverbs,  Fables,  etc., 361 

Vocabulary 371 


324 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


9.  Yes,  I caught  a miserable  cold. 

10.  I trust  it  is  nothing  more  than  a cold.  Be  sure 
to  be  careful  and  dress  warm,  for  a cold  becomes 
easily  serious  here.  (Literally:  Let  us  hope  (ojalá) 
it  may  not  be  more  than  a cold.  Not  neglect  you 
to  protect  yourself  well;  observe  (mire)  that  here 
they  happen  to  become  (suelen)  complicated  the 
colds). 

11.  Quite  true  and  I’ll  take  better  care  of  myself  in 
future.  My  throat  pains  me.  (Literally:  So  it 
is  and  not  me  I shall  neglect  (me  descuidaré)  more. 
Me  pains  the  throat  (la  garganta). 

12.  If  I were  in  your  place,  I would  consult  a phy- 
sician. You  are  quite  hoarse.  (Literally:  In  your 
place  (lugar),  I would  call  a physician.  Are  you 
very  hoarse  (ronco). 

13.  Being  hoarse  does  not  trouble  me  much,  for  I 
easily  get  in  that  condition.  But  the  pains  in  my 
throat  make  me  uneasy.  (Literally:  The  hoarse- 
ness (la  ronquera)  seizes  me  (me  da)  rapidly,  but 
not  me  troubles  (molesta).  The  pain  (el  dolor)  of 
throat  me  disquiets  (inquieta). 


^ Soler  is  a defective  verb.  In  general  only  the  following  tenses 
and  persons  are  used: 

Suelo,  I am  accustomed  to;  sueles,  suele,  solemos,  soléis,  suelen. 

Solía,  I was  accustomed  to;  solías,  solía,  solíamos,  solíais,  solían. 
Its  other  tenses  are  but  rarely  used;  the  first  Imperfect  of  the 
subjunctive  and  the  conditional  are  never  employed. 

2 Doler  belongs  to  that  numerous  class  of  slightly  irregular  verbs 
which  change  the  stem-vowel  o into  ue  throughout  the  singular 
and  in  the  third  person  plural  of  the  present  indicative  and  sub- 
junctive, and  in  the  same  persons  in  the  imperative. 

Doler,  doliendo,  dolido,  to  pain. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


The  Spanish  Language. 


32s 


9.  He  agarrado  un  fuerte  resfriado. 

10.  Ojalá  no  sea  más  que  un  resfriado.  No  descuide 
V.  abrigarse  bien,  mire  que  aquí  suelen^  complicarse 
los  resfriados. 

11.  Así  es  y no  me  descuidaré  más.  Me  duele^  la  gar- 
ganta. (dwa'-ly). 


12.  En  su  lugar yo  llamaría  a un  médico.  Está  V. 
muy  ronco. 

13.  La  ronquera  me  dá  pronto,  pero  no  me  molesta. 
El  dolor  de  garganta  me  inquieta.  (rón-ka'-rá 
én-ke^á'-tá). 


Pres.  Ind:  duelo,  dueles,  duele,  dolemos,  doléis,  duelen. 

Pres.  Subj:  duela,  duelas,  duela,  dolamos,  doláis,  duelan. 

Imperat:  duele,  duela,  dolamos,  doled,  duelan. 

Regular:  dolía,  dolí,  doliera,  doliese,  doliere,  doleré,  dolería. 

^ A few  sentences  may  facilitate  the  mastery  of  this  construc- 
tion. 


¿Qué  haría  V.  si  se  encontrase 
en  mi  lugar  ? 

¿ Lo  haría  V.  o no  ? 

Si  me  encontrase  en  su  lugar  no 
lo  haría. 

Si  yo  estuviera  en  su  lugar,  pro- 
cedería de  acuerdo  con  su 
consejo. 


What  would  you  do  if  you  were 
in  my  place? 

Would  you  do  it  or  not? 

If  I were  in  your  place  I would 
not  do  it. 

If  I were  in  your  place  I should 
act  upon  his  advice. 


á far:  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


326  The  Rosenthal  Method, 

■ 14.  I am  afraid  I have  made  you  nervous,  but  that 
was  not  my  intention.  My  sole  object  was  to 
warn  you  not  to  neglect  your  cold.  (Literally: 
I fear  to  have  you  alarmed  (alarmado)  against 
(contra)  my  will  (voluntad) ; my  only  object  was 
to  forewarn  vou  (prevenirle). 


1 5.  Oh  no,  I do  not  get  nervous  as  easily  as  that.  Never- 
theless I shall  do  as  you  say  and  consult  a physician. 
(Literally:  Why,  man!  (cá  hombre),  I don’t  get 
frightened  (no  me  asusto)  so,  so  (así,  así).  Never- 
theless (sin  embargo)  I shall  follow  your  advice  and 
shall  call  to  a doctor). 


16.  What  are  you?  Do  you  belong  to  the  old  school 
or  the  new?  (Literally:  You,  what  are  (you)? 
of  the  old  (de  la  antigua)  or  of  the  new  school 
(nueva  escuela). 


17.  You  mean  am  I an  allopath  or  homeopath?  (Liter- 
ally: If  (I)  am  allopath  (alópata)  or  (u)  homeopath 
(homeópata)  ? 


18.  That  is  what  I wanted  to  know,  for  we  have  some 
excellent  physicians  of  both  schools.  (Literally: 
That  same,  for  (pues)  there  are  good  physicians  of 
one  and  other  school). 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


The  Spanish  Language, 


327 


X4.  Temo  haberle  alarmado  contra  mi  volimtad;  mi 
único  objeto  era  prevenirle,  (á-lár-má-dó  ób-'há'- 
to). 


15.  i Cá,  hombre!  no  me  asusto  así,  así.  Sin  embargo 
seguiré  su  consejo  y llamaré  a un  doctor  or:  consul- 
taré con  un  médico.  (sa-ghe-raO . 


16.  Vd.,  ¿ qué  es?  ¿ de  la  antigua  o de  la  nueva  escuela? 


17.  ¿Si  soy  alópata  u^  homeópata?  (á-ló-pá-tá  00  ó- 
má-ó-pá-tá). 


18.  Eso  mismo,  pues  hay  buenos  médicos  de  una  y 
otra  escuela. 


1 O,  or  is  changed  into  u before  words  beginning  with  0 or  ho,  as: 
Uno  u otro,  One  or  the  other. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


328 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


19.  In  Chicago  I generally  take  homeopathic  rem- 
edies but  I made  the  acquaintance  of  Dr.  Reyes 
here  and  have  great  confidence  in  him.  (Liter- 
ally: In  Chicago  (I)  choose  (opto  por)  the  home- 
opathy (la  homeopatía),  but  in  this  (town)  I made 
friendship  (amistad)  with  the  Doctor  Reyes  and 
place  all  my  confidence  (mi  confianza)  in  him). 

20.  The  gentleman  is  an  allopath  and  has  an  exten- 
sive practice  among  Americans.  He  comes  from 
Chicago,  if  I am  not  mistaken.  (Literally:  That 
gentleman  is  allopath  and  possesses  numerous 
clientele  (numerosa  clientela)  among  the  Ameri- 
cans. If  not  I am  mistaken,  (he)  is  from  Chicago). 

21.  Yes,  his  brother  is  one  of  the  first  lawyers  in  our 

Western  metropolis.  (Literally:  Exactly  (justo); 

his  brother  is  one  of  the  lawyers  (abogados)  most 
popular  (populares)  of  that  metropolis  (aquella 
metrópoli). 

22.  And  the  gentleman,  who,  during  that  bad  weather, 

sent  you  an  invitation  to  dinner,  is  also  a lawyer, 
is  he  not?  (Literally:  Not  is  also  lawyer  the 

gentleman  that  you  invited  to  dine  when  it  made 
such  bad  weather)  ? 

23.  Yes,  he  is  also  a lawyer.  He  promised  to  call  for 

me.  He  was  to  be  here  at  eleven  sharp.  He  is 
generally  very  punctual  and  wiU  be  here  soon. 
(Literaliy:  Oh  yes,  the  gentleman  also  is  lawyer. 

He  promised  to  come  for  me  (venir  a buscarme). 
He  was  to  come  (pasar)  at  the  eleven  precisely  (en 
punto)  and  not  will  delay  (tardará)  because  he  is 
very  punctual  (puntual). 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


The  Spanish  Language, 


329 


19.  En  Chicago  opto  por  la  homeopatía,  pero  en  esta 
hice  amistad  con  el  Doctor  Reyes  y pongo  toda  mi 
confianza  en  él.  (o-ma-ó-pá-té'-á  é'-thy  ra'-yés 
kón-fe-án'-thá). 

20.  Ese  caballero  es  alópata  y tiene  numerosa  clien- 
tela entre  los  americanos.  Si  no  me  equivoco,  es 
de  Chicago,  (nóó-má-ró'-sa  klé-án-ta'-lá) . 

21.  Justo,  su  hermano  es  uno  de  los  abogados  más 
populares  de  aquella  metrópoli,  (^hóós'-tó  po-pob- 
lá'-rés  á-kél'-yá  má-tró'-pó-lé) . 

22.  ¿No  es  también  abogado  eb  señor  que  lo  invitó 
a comer  cuando  hacía  tan  mal  tiempo?  (á-the'-á). 


23.  Oh  sí,  el  señor  también  es  abogado.  Me  prometió 
venir  a buscarme.  Debía  pasar  a las  once  en  punto, 
y no  tardará  porque  él  es  muy  puntual. 


1 The  Spaniards  use  instead  of  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Don  (mase.),  and 
Doña  (fern.),  before  Christian  names,  and  el  Señor  and  la  Señora 
before  family  names: 


El  Señor  Hernández, 
La  Señora  Monsanto, 
Don  Juan, 

Doña  María, 

El  Sr.  D.  Carlos  Rosa, 


Mr.  Hernandez. 
Mrs.  Monsanto. 
Mr.  John. 

Mrs.  Mary. 

Mr.  Charles  Ross. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  ó note;  00  room. 


'330  The  Rosenthal  Method, 

24.  There  goes  the  bell.  I am  sure  it  is  he,  for  it  is 
just  striking  eleven.  (Literally : Already  rings  (toca) 
the  bell  (la  campanilla);  of  sure  (de  seguro)  that 
is  he,  because  precisely  it  strikes  eleven  (dan  las 
once). 

25.  Ah  my  dear  friend!  Always  punctual,  never  late! 
( = never  fail  you) . 

26.  We  were  just  talking  of  you. 

27.  “Speak  of  angels!”.  . . . (Literally:  To  speak  of 
the  wolf  (lobo)  and  immediately  (luego)  he  ap- 
pears). 

28.  Pray,  don’t  joke.  I don’t  feel  like  joking.  (Lit- 
erally: Come!  (vamos^),  don’t  joke  (juegue^).  Not 
I am  for  that  (para  ello),  nor  is  (it)  amusing  (di- 
vertido). 

29.  What  is  the  matter?  (Literally:  What  passes). 

30.  I took  a violent  cold  and  my  throat  pains  fright- 
fully. (Literally:  I took  a violent  (fuerte)  cold 
and  me  aches  very  much  (muchísimo)  the  throat). 

31.  Then  consult  Dr.  Reyes.  You  can’t  find  a bet- 
ter physician  in  all  Mexico. 

32.  I shall  do  so,  and  would  like  you  to  accompany 
me  to  his  house.  (Literally:  Thus  it  (I)  shall  do 
and  would  like  (that)  might  go  you  (fuera  V.)  v/ith 
me  to  his  house). 


^ Dar  is  used  idiomatically 
following  examples: 

¿Qué  hora  es? — Las  tres  están 
para  dar  {or  Pronto  darán 
las  tres), 

¿Sabe  V.  qué  hora  es? — Han 
dado  las  cinco, 


in  this  connection.  Compare  the 

What  time  is  it? — It  is  just  going 
to  strike  three. 

Do  you  know  what  0^ clock  it  is? 
— It  has  struck  jive. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


The  Spanish  Language. 


331 


24.  Ya  toca  la  campanilla;  de  seguro  que  es  él,  por- 
que precisamente  dan^  las  once,  (kám-pá-nél'-yá). 

25.  ¿ Qué  hay,  mi  amigo?  Siempre  puntual;  nunca 
falta  Vd. 

26.  Hablando  de  V.  estábamos. 

27.  ‘^Hablar  del  lobo  y luego  aparece.’’ 

28.  Vamos,2  no  juegue.^  No  estoy  para  ello,  ni  es 
divertido,  (dé-vérr-te'-do) . 

29.  ¿ Qué  pasa? 

30.  Tomé  un  fuerte  resfriado  y me  duele  muchísimo 
la  garganta. 

31.  Pues  vea  al  Doctor  Reyes.  No  hay  otro  mejor  en 
Méjico,  (vá'-á  má-^horr'). 

32.  Así  lo  haré  y quisiera  fuera  V.  conmigo  a su  casa, 
(á-rá'  fóó-á'-rá). 


I Qué  hora  podrá  ser? — Acaban 
de  dar  las  tres, 

¿Qué  hora  está  dando? — Las 
seis, 

¿ No  ha  oido  V.  dar  la  hora? 
Aquí  no  se  oye  ningún  reloj. 
No  he  oido  dar  la  hora. 


What  o'clock  may  it  he? — It  has 
just  struck  three. 

What  time  is  it  striking  there? 
— Six. 

Didn't  you  hear  the  clock  strike? 
One  never  hears  any  clock  here. 
I did  not  hear  the  clock  strike. 


2 Vamos  is  frequently  used  as  an  interjection.  Compare  Part  X. 

3 Jugar,  to  playy  to  gamhlOy  to  joke^  follows  the  irregularities  of 
verbs  whose  stem- vowel  is  o and  changes  u into  ue  in  the  singular 
and  third  person  plural  of  the  present  indicative  and  subjunctive 
and  the  same  persons  in  the  imperative.  The  euphonic  changes 
of  g have  been  explained  before. 

Pres.  Ind:  juego,  (juegas),  juega,  jugamos,  (jugáis),  juegan. 
Pres.  Sub:  juegue,  (juegues),  juegue,  juguemos,  (juguéis),  jueguen. 
Imp:  (juega),  juegue,  juguemos, .(jugad),  jueguen» 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


332 


The  Rosenthal  Method, 


33.  With  pleasure.  But  you  must  put  a muffler  around 
your  throat  and  button  up  your  overcoat  for  the 
wind  is  blowing  again  and  it  has  grown  quite 
cold.  (Literally:  With  the  greatest  pleasure,  only 
that  you  must  cover  yourself  (taparse)  well  the 
neck  (el  cuello)  with  a muffler  (con  una  bufanda) 
and  button  yourself  (abotonarse)  the  overcoat 
(el  sobretodo)  because  (it)  blows  (sopla)  again  (de 
nuevo)  the  wind  and  is  growing  cold  (va  enfriando) 
the  weather). 

34.  Then  it  has  stopped  raining?  (Literally:  Stopped  it 
(paró)  already  from  raining  (Hover)  ? 


1 Llover,  lloviendo,  llovido,  to  rain,  is  of  course  an  impersonal 
verb  and  is  conjugated: 


Modo  indicativo.  Modo  subjuntivo. 


llueve, 

it  rains. 

llueva. 

it  may  rain. 

llovía, 

it  was  raining. 

lloviera. 

it  might  rain. 

llovió. 

it  rained. 

lloviese. 

it  might  rain. 

lloverá. 

it  will  rain. 

lloviere. 

it  should  rain. 

llovería, 

it  would  rain. 

lloviera. 

(if)  it  rained. 

Nevar, 

nevando,  nevado,  to  snow,  is  conjugated  similarly: 

Modo  indicativo. 

Modo  subjuntivo. 

nieva. 

it  snows. 

nieve. 

it  may  snow. 

nevaba. 

it  was  snowing. 

nevara, 

it  might  snow. 

nevó. 

it  snowed. 

nevase. 

it  might  snow. 

nevará. 

it  will  snow. 

nevare, 

it  should  snow. 

nevaría. 

it  would  snow. 

nevara, 

(if)  it  snowed. 

á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


The  Spanish  Language, 


333 


33.  Con  el  mayor  gusto,  solo  que  V.  debe  taparse  bien 
el  cuello  con  una  bufanda  y abotonarse  el  sobretodo 
porque  sopla  de  nuevo  el  viento  y va  enfriando  el 
tiempo,  (má-yorr'  kwél'-yó  én-fré-án'-do). 


34.  I Paró  ya  de  llover?^  (lyo-vérr). 


The  following  are  the  most  commonly  used 

Impersonal  Verbs: 


Infinitivo.  Indicat.  Presente.  Participio. 


amanecer, 

to  dawn. 

amanece. 

amanecido. 

anochecer, 

to  grow  dark. 

anochese. 

anochecido. 

oscurecer. 

to  grow  dark. 

oscurece. 

oscurecido. 

granizar. 

to  hail. 

graniza. 

granizado. 

helar, 

to  freeze. 

hiela. 

helado. 

deshelar. 

to  thaw. 

deshiela. 

deshelado. 

llover, 

to  rain. 

llueve. 

llovido. 

lloviznar, 

to  drizzle. 

llovizna. 

lloviznado. 

nevar, 

to  snow. 

nieva. 

nevado. 

relampaguear. 

to  lighten. 

relampaguea. 

relampagueado. 

tronar. 

to  thunder. 

truena. 

tronado. 

ventiscar. 

to  storm. 

ventisca. 

ventiscado. 

á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  ó note;  00  room. 


334 


The  Rosenthal  Method, 


35.  An  hour  ago.  Now  tie  this  muffler  around  and. 
button  your  overcoat  up  tightly  so  as  not  to  take  a 
fresh  cold.  (Literally:  It  makes  already  one  hour. 
Protect  yourself  (abrigúese)  with  this  muffler  and 
close  (cierre)  well  the  overcoat  in  order  not  to  cold 
yourself  again). 

36.  Be  assured  I will  take  care  of  myself.  (Literally: 
You  I assure  that  me  I shall  care). 

37.  Be  sure  to  do  so.  Nothing  is  so  disagreeable  as 
illness  when  in  a strange  town.  (Literally:  Not 
it  forget  (olvide).  Nothing  there  is  worse  than 
a vexatious  (molesta)  illness  in  a place  unknown 
(desconocido). 

38.  Are  you  going  to  walk? — ^A  walk  might  do  me 
good.  (=  The  walking  (el  caminar)  me  will  do 
good). 

39.  What  are  you  thinking  of?  A walk  with  your 
cold  would  be  the  greatest  indiscretion.  No,  no, 
we  are  going  to  ride.  (Literally:  In  what  think 
you?  It  would  be  unpardonable  (imperdonable) 
to  go  afoot  with  the  cold  of  you.  No,  no,  we  shall 
take  cab). 

40.  You  are  a cautious  man,  but  you  are  quite  right. 
It  would  be  most  disagreeable  if  I were  laid  up 
here.  (Literally:  Are  you  careful  (precavido)  and 
do  (you)  well  in  being  so.  It  would  be  the  most 
bad  (lo  peor)  that  I had  to  keep  (que  tuviera  que 
guardar)  bed). 

41.  Let  us  take  a cab. 

42.  There  is  one.  Hail  it. 

1 Cerrar,  cerrando,  cerrado,  to  shut,  to  close,  is  conjugated: 

Pres.  Ind:  cierro,  (cierras),  cierra,  cerramos,  (cerráis), 

cierran.  \ 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  0 note;  óó  room. 


The  Spanish  Language. 


335 


35.  Hace  ya  una  hora.  Abrigúese  con  esta  bufanda 
y cierre^  bien  el  sobretodo  para  no  resfriarse  de  nuevo, 
(á-bré'-ga-sá  the^érr'-ré). 

36.  Le  aseguro  que  me  cuidaré. 

37.  No  lo  olvide.  Nada  hay  peor  que  tma  molesta 
enfermedad  en  un  lugar  desconocido. 

38.  ¿ Va  Vd.  a pie? — El  caminar  me  hará  bien,  (pé"^ 

a'). 

39.  I En  qué  piensa^  V.?  Sería  imperdonable  ir  a pie 
con  el  resfriado  de  V.  No,  no,  tomaremos  coche. 

40.  Es  Vd.  precavido  y hace  bien  en  serlo.  Sería  lo 
peor’  que  tuviera  que  guardar  cama. 

41.  Tomemos  carruaje.  (kárr-róo-á'-‘hé). 

42.  Allá  va  uno.  Le  llamaré. 


Pres.  Sub:  ciérre,  (cierres),  cierre,  cerremos,  (cerréis), 

cierren. 

Imperat:  (cierra),  cierre,  cerremos,  (cerrad), 

cierren. 

Reg:  cerraba,  cerré,  cerrara,  cerrase,  cerrare,  cerraré,  cerraría. 

2 Pensar,  pensando,  pensado,  to  think,  belongs  to  the  same  class 
of  irregular  verbs  so  frequently  explained  before  and  forms: 

Pres.  Ind:  pienso,  (piensas),  piensa,  pensamos,  (pensáis),  piensan. 
Pres.  Sub:  piense,  (pienses),  piense,  pensemos,  (penséis),  piensen. 
Imperat:  (piensa),  piense,  pensemos,  (penséis),  piensen. 

Reg:  pensaba,  pensé,  pensara,  pensase,  pensare,  pensaré,  pensaría. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  ó note;  00  room. 


336  The  Rosenthal  Method» 

43.  But  that  is  an  open  carriage.  That  would  expose 

me  more  than  walking.  (Literally:  (It)  is  open 

(abierto);  (it)  would  be  more  exposed  (arriesgado) 
than  to  go  afoot) . 

44.  That  is  true  enough,  but  the  driver  will  close  it. 
(Literally:  Truth  that  it  is,  but  the  driver  it  will 
close) . 

45.  Driver,  close  your  carriage  tight.  This  gentleman  is 
ill  and  must  not  be  exposed  to  any  draught.  (Liter- 
ally: Driver,  close  well  the  carriage.  The  gentle- 
man not  himself  finds  well  and  not  ought  to  give 
himself  the  draught  (el  aire). 

46.  All  right,  sir!  Just  wait  a moment  before  getting 
in.  (Literally:  Is  well,  sir.  In  a moment  (you) 
will  be  able  to  enter). 

47.  There  you  are,  gentlemen;  everything  is  all  right; 
please  get  in.  Where  to?  (Literally:  Ready;  al- 
ready (it)  is  to  your  liking;  enter.  Whither  go  (you)  ? 

48.  Drive  as  quickly  as  you  can  to  No.  42  San  Fran- 
cisco Street. 

49.  By  the  hour,  gentlemen? — Certainly;  according  to 
my  watch  it  is  a quarter  past  eleven.  Drive  quickly! 

50.  Do  you  always  engage  a cab  by  time? — That  de- 

pends on  circumstances;  on  general  principles  it 
is  preferable.  (Literally:  Hire  you  (alquila  V.) 

always  per  hour? — ^Who  knows?  That  depends  of 
the  circumstances.  In  general  (por  lo  general) 
is  better). 


1 The  following  verbs  form 

Irregular  participles. 

Abrir,  to  open;  abierto,  opened» 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


The  Spanish  Language. 


337 


43.  Es  abierto;^  sería  más  arriesgado  que  ir  a pie.  (á- 
bé'^err'-to  árr-ré'^és-gá'-do). 

44.  Verdad  que  lo  es,  pero  el  cochero  lo  cerrará. 

45.  Cochero,  cierre  bien  el  carruaje.  El  caballero  no 
se  halla  bien  y no  debe  darle  el  aire. 

46.  ¡ Está  bien,  señor!  , En  un  momento  podrán  en- 
trar. 

47.  Listo;  ya  está  a su  gusto;  entren.  ¿ A dónde 
van? 

48.  Lo  más  aprisa  que  pueda  al  No.  42  de  la  calle  de  San 
Francisco. 

49.  I Por  hora? — Es  claro;  por  mi  reloj  son  las  once 
y cuarto . ¡ Apúrese  1 

50.  I Alquila  V.  siempre  por  hora? — ¿Quién  sabe?  Eso 
depende  de  las  circunstancias.  Por  lo  general  es 
mejor. 


Cubrir,  to  cover. 
Decir,  to  say^  to  tell. 
Escribir,  to  write. 
Hacer,  to  make,  to  do. 
Morir,  to  die. 

Poner,  to  put. 

Ver,  to  see. 

Volver,  to  return. 


cubierto,  covered. 
dicho,  said,  told. 
escrito,  written. 
hecho,  made,  done. 
muerto,  died. 
puesto,  put. 
visto,  seen. 
vuelto,  returned. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


338  The  Rosenthal  Method. 

You  will  have  to  keep  your  room  for  days  before  you 
can  continue  your  journey. 

Which  you  will  oblige 

to  keep 

bed 

for  some  time 
before  that 

you  may  be  able  to  continue 
your  journey. 


I.  I would  like  to  consult  you,  doctor.  Since  last 
evening  I have  felt  so  badly,  that  I am  afraid  I 
shall  be  seriously  ill.  (Literally:  Doctor,  I should 
like  to  consult  you.  I have  felt  so  bad  since  last 
night  (anoche)  that  (I)  fear  (it)  may  be  something 
grave  (cosa  grave). 


1 Sentir,  to  feel^  to  perceive,  belongs  to  a class  of  irregular  verbs 
of  the  third  conjugation,  which  insert  i before  the  stem-vowel  e 
throughout  the  singular  and  in  the  third  person  plural  of  the  present 
indicative  and  subjunctive,  and  in  the  same  persons  in  the  im- 
perative. 

In  the  first  and  second  persons  plural  of  the  present  subjunctive 
and  in  the  first  person  plural  of  the  imperative,  the  stem-vowel  e 
is  changed  into  i — sintamos,  sintáis. 

In  the  preterite  stem — including  the  gerund — the  stem-vowel  e 
is  changed  into  i whenever  the  inflection  contains  the  diphthongs 
ie  or  io. 

Sentir,  sintiendo,  sentido,  to  feel,  to  perceive. 

Pres.  Ind:  sient-o,  sient-es,  sient-e,  sent-imos,  sent-is,  sient-en. 

Pres.  Sub:  sient-a,  sient-as,  sieht-a,  sint-amos,  sint-áis,  sient-an. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


The  Spanish  Language, 


339 


Que  le  obligará  a guardar  cama  por  algún 

ká  la  ob-le-gá-rá'  á gwárr-dárr'  ká'-má  porr  ál-góón' 
tiempo  antes  que  pueda  continuar 
té^ém'-pó  án'-tés  ká  poo-á'-dá  kon-té-nóó-árr' 
su  viaje, 
sóó  ve'^á'-^há. 

Que  le  obligará  (ká  lá  obdé-gárr-rá') 
a guardar  (á  gwárr-dárr') 
cama  (ká'-má) 

por  algún  tiempo  (porr  ál-góon'  té"^ém'-po) 
antes  que  (án'-tés  ká) 
pueda  continuar  (poo-á'-dá  kon-té-nóo-árr') 
su  viaje  (sóó  vó"^á'-‘há). 


I.  Doctor,  quisiera  consultarle.  Me  he  sentido^  tan 
mal  desde  anoche  que  temo^  sea  cosa  grave. 


Imperat;  sient-e,  sient-a,  sint-amos,  sent-id,  sient-an. 

Imperf:  sent-ía,  — ías,  — ía,  — ^íamos,  — ^íais,  — ^ían. 

Preterite  Stem;  Sint  (before  ie  and  ió). 

Gerund:  sintiendo. 

Past  Def : sent-i,  — iste,  sintió,  sentimos,  — isteis,  sintieron. 

Imp.  Subj  sint-iera,  — ieras,  — iera,  — iéramos,  — ^ierais,  — ieran. 

Imp.  Subj  sint-iese,  — ieses,  — iese,  — iésemos,  — ^ieseis,  — iesen. 

Fut.  Subj:  sint-iere,  — ieres,  — iere,  — iéremos,  — iereis,  — ^ieren. 

Future  Stem. — Regular. 

Fut:  sentir-é,  — ás,  — á,  — emos,  — éis,  — án. 

Cond:  sentir-ía,  — ^ías,  — ^ía,  — oíamos,  — ^íais,  — ^ían. 

2 Que  is  omitted  here  before  the  subjunctive. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  ót)  room. 


340 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


2.  What  is  the  matter  with  you?^ 

3.  At  first  I fancied  I only  had  a cold.  Since  this 
morning,  however,  I feel  violent  pains  in  my  throat 
and  it  is  hard  for  me  to  get  my  breath.  (Literally: 
At  first  I imagined  (me  figuré)  that  only  was  a cold, 
but  this  morning  to  me  commenced  (=  entered)  pains 
of  throat  and  it  is  rendered  difficult  to  me  (se  me 
dificulta)  to  breathe  (respirar). 

4.  Have  you  noticed  any  other  symptoms?  (Liter- 
ally: Not  have  noted  you  some  other  symptoms)? 

5.  I feel  as  if  all  my  limbs  were  broken  and  my  feet 
seem  so  heavy  that  I can  scarcely  drag  myself  along. 
(Literally:  I feel  (me  siento)  as  if  (I)  were  broken 
(estuviera  quebrantado)  and  so  heavy  (pesados) 
the  feet  that  scarcely  (apenas)  (I)  can  lift  them). 

6.  How  is  your  head? 

7.  My  head  feels  heavy,  but  I can  not  say  that  I have 

a headache.  (Literally:  It  (I)  feel  heavy,  but 

without  pain). 

8.  And  how  is  your  appetite?  (=  Your  appetite)? 

9.  My  appetite  seems  to  have  left  me  entirely.  I 
really  had  to  force  myself  to  take  a cup  of  coffee, 
and  I have  not  eaten  anything  to-day.  (Literally: 
It  (I)  have  lost  entirely  (por  completo) . Only  exert- 
ing myself  (esforzándome)  I obtained  (logré)  to 
take  a cup  of  coffee  and  nothing  (I)  have  eaten 
to-day). 


1 Similarly  we  say: 

What  is  the  matter  with  you?  ¿Qué  tiene  V.? 


á far;  á pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


The  Spanish  Language. 


341 


2.  ¿ Qué  le  pasa?^ 


3.  Primero  me  figuré  que  solo  era  un  resfriado,  pero 
esta  mañana  me  entraron  dolores  de  garganta  y se 
me  dificulta  respirar. 

4.  ¿ No  ha  notado  V.  algunos  otros  síntomas? 


5.  Me  siento  como  si  estuviera  quebrantado  y tan  pesa- 
dos los  pies  que  apenas  puedo  levantarlos. 

6.  ¿ Como  está  su  cabeza? 

7.  La  siento  pesada,  pero  sin  dolor. 

8.  ¿Su  apetito? 

9.  Lo  he  perdido  por  completo.  Sólo  esforzándome 
logré  tomar  una  taza  de  café  y nada  he  comido  hoy. 


What  ails  you? 

Is  anything  the  matter  with  him? 


What  was  the  matter  with  him? 


I Qué  es  lo  que  tiene  V.  ? 
I Qué  le  duele  a V.  ? 
¿Tiene  él  algo? 

¿ Le  pasa  algo? 

¿ Qué  tuvo  él  ? 

¿Qué  le  pasó? 

¿ Qué  le  sucedió? 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


342 


The  Rosenthal  Method, 


lo.  Do  you  cough? — I commenced  to  cough  an  hour 
ago.  (Literally:  Have  you  cough  (tos)P — (I)  com- 
menced to  cough  makes  one  hour) . 


II.  Did  you  feel  any  pain  in  coughing?  (Literally: 
Felt  you  (sintió  V.)  pain  in  coughing  (al  toser)  ? 


12.  Yes,  especially  in  the  chest  (el  pecho)  or  rather  in 
the  bronchial  tubes  (los  tubos  bronquiales). 


13.  Please  take  a seat  here  at  the  window  so  that  I may 
have  a good  light  for  my  examination.  (Literally: 
Let  us  see,  seat  yourself  near  to  (cerca  de)  the  window 
(la  ventana)  in  order  that  I may  be  able  (pueda) 
to  see  well). 

14.  Show  me  (muéstreme^)  your  tongue.  Put  it  out 
(sáquela)  a little  farther. 


^ Mostrar,  mostrando,  mostrado,  to  show. 

Pres.  Ind:  muestro,  muestras,  muestra,  mostramos, 

mostráis,  muestran. 

Pres.  Subj:  muestre,  muestres,  muestre,  mostremos, 

mostréis,  muestren. 


á far;  á pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  óó  room. 


The  Spanish  Language,  343 

10.  I Tiene  V.  tos? — Comencé  a toser  hace  una  hora. 


11.  I Sintió  V.  dolor  al  toser? 

12.  Ya  lo  creo,  particularmente  en  el  pecho,  o mejor 
dicho  en  los  tubos  bronquiales. 


13.  Veamos,  siéntese  cerca  de  la  ventana  para  que  yo 
pueda  ver  bien. 


14.  Muéstreme^  la  lengua.  Sáquela^  im  poco  más. 
(sá'-ká-lá). 


Imperat:  muestra,  muestre, 

mostremos,  mostrad,  muestren. 

Reg,  mostraba,  mostré,  mostrara,  mostrase,  mostrare,  mostraré, 
mostraría. 

2 Sacar,  to  stretch  outy  to  pull  out.  The  change  from  c into  q has 
been  explained  before.  Compare  Part  X. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


344 


The  Rosenthal  Method, 


15.  Your  tongue  is  rather  coated.  When  did  you  catch 
cold?  (Literally:  You  have  the  tongue  somewhat 
coated  (sucia).  When  caught  you  (pilló  V.)  the 
cold)?^ 

16.  The  night  before  last,  I think.  I went  home  from 
the  theatre  without  overshoes  or  overcoat.  (Lit- 
erally: (It)  seems  to  me  night  before  last  (antea- 
noche) . I went  from  (desde)  the  theatre  home 
(a  casa)  without  overshoes  nor  overcoat). 

17.  What!  The  night  before  last  in  that  frightful  storm! 
How  could  you  be  guilty  of  such  carelessness?  (Lit- 
erally: Go  (vaya)!  Night  before  last  with  that 
great  storm!  Is  possible  such  carelessness  (tanto 
abandono)  ? 

18.  It  was  exceedingly  hot  and  sultry  in  the  theatre. 
The  house  was  packed;  not  a single  seat  was  va- 
cant. (Literally:  (It)  made  a heat  and  humidity 
(humedad)  extreme  (extremos)  ^ within  (dentro) 
the  theatre.  The  theatre  was  full  (lleno),  nor  one 
stall  (una  luneta)  remained  empty  (quedó). 


^ I have  taken  cold^ 

Last  gening  on  coming  out  of 
the  theatre^  I took  a fearful 
coldj 

1 am  very  sorry  to  hear  it;  noth- 
ing serious  I hope? 

I hope  not^ 

The  physician  attends  me  every 
day,  but  he  hopes  that  it 
will  have  no  serious  conse- 
quences, 

So  much  the  better, 

Have  you  quite  recovered  from 
your  illness? 


He  cogido  im  resfriado. 

Anoche  al  salir  del  teatro,  tome 
un  fuerte  resfriado. 

Lo  siento  mucho;  espero  que  no 
será  nada  serio. 

Espero  que  no. 

El  médico  me  visita  (atiende) 
todos  los  días,  pero  él  cree 
que  no  tendrá  serias  con- 
secuencias. 

Tanto  mejor. 

I Está  V.  enteramente  restable- 
cido de  su  enfermedad? 


á far;  a pale;  6 eve;  é there;  0 note;  00  room. 


The  Spanish  Language,  345 

15.  Tiene  V.  la  lengua  algo  sucia.  ¿ Cuándo  pilló  V. 
el  resfriado?^ 


16.  Me  parece  que  anteanoche.  Fui  desde  el  teatro  a 
casa  sin  zapatos  de  goma  ni  sobretodo. 

17.  i Vaya!  i Anteanoche  con  aquel  gran  chubasco! 
I Es  posible  tanto  abandono? 


18.  Hacía  un  calor  y humedad  extremos^  dentro  del 
teatro.  El  teatro  estaba  lleno,  ni  ima  luneta  quedó. 


Thanks,  I have  quite  recovered, 

I feel  stronger  than  ever, 

I have  not  had  the  pleasure  of 
seeing  your  wife  for  a long 
time. 

She  is  ill, 

Is  she  laid  up? — No,  hut  she 
cannot  leave  the  room. 

Give  my  regards  to  her, 


Gracias,  estoy  enteramente  res- 
tablecido. 

Me  siento  más  fuerte  que  nunca. 

Ha  tiempo  ya  que  no  tengo  el 
gusto  de  ver  a su  señora 
de  Vd. 

Está  mala. 

¿Ha  tenido  que  hacer  cama? — 
No,  pero  no  puede  dejar  el 
cuarto. 

Dígale  mil  cosas  de  mi  parte. 
Póngame  a los  pies  de  su 
señora  de  V. 


2 An  adjective  qualifying  two  or  more  nouns  of  different  genders 
is  put  in  the  masculine  plural: 

The  father  and  the  mother  are  El  padre  y la  madre  son  ricos. 
rich. 


á far;  á pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


346  The  Rosenthal  Method, 

19.  I was  glad  to  get  out  into  the  fresh  air.  I wanted  to 
cool  off  on  my  way  home.  (Literally:  Me  (it)  was 
pleasant  (grato)  to  go  out  to  the  air  free.  (I)  wanted 
to  refresh  myself  (refrescarme)  in  returning  to  home) . 

20.  That  was  a piece  of  carelessness  of  which  I really 
did  not  think  you  capable.  Why  didn’t  you  take 
a cab?  (Literally:  That  was  a carelessness  (un 
abandono)  of  which  never  (I)  believed  you  capable 
(capaz).  Why  not  took  you  a cab)  ? 

21.  I wanted  to  cool  off  as  I have  just  told  you. 

22.  That  was  imprudent.  Now  please  lay  aside  your 
coat  and  vest,  I must  examine  your  lungs.  (Lit- 
erally: (It)  was  an  imprudence  (una  impruden- 
cia). Come  (vaya),  take  off  (quítese)  your  coat  (su 
saco)  and  your  vest  (chaleco).  To  you  (I)  shall  ex- 
amine the  lungs  (los  pulmones). 

23.  You  frighten  me,  doctor.  I trust  my  lungs  are  not 
affected?  (Literally:  Doctor,  me  alarm  you.  (I) 
hope  that  my  lungs  not  are  affected). 

24.  I hope  not,  but  I have  to  examine  them  carefully. 
Now  take  a deep  breath.  (Literally:  Not  it  (I) 
believe,  but  (it)  is  necessary  (preciso)  to  make  a 
careful  examination  (un  detenido  exámen).  Make 
an  inspiration  deep). 

25.  Oh!  that  pains! — ^Where?  Please  point  with  your 
finger  to  the  spot.  (Literally:  How  much  me  (it) 
pains! — In  where?  Mark  (marque^  with  the  finger 
(el  dedo)  where). 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


The  Spanish  Language. 


347 


19.  Me  fué  grato  salir  al  aire  libre.  Quise  refrescarme 
al  regresar  a casa,  (ké'-s^). 

20.  Eso  fué  un  abandono  de  que  jamás  creí  a Vd.  capaz. 
¿ Por  qué  no  tomó  Vd.  un  coche? 


21.  Quise  refrescarme,  como  le  dije. 

22.  Fué  una  imprudencia.  Vaya,  quítese  su  saco  y 
su  chaleco.  Le  examinaré  los  pulmones,  (ke'-tá- 
s^). 


23.  Doctor,  me  alarma  V.  Espero  que  mis  pulmones 
no  estén  afectados. 


24.  No  lo  creo,  pero  es  preciso  hacer  un  detenido  exa- 
men. Haga  una  inspiración  profimda. 

25.  t Cuánto  me  duele! — ¿En  dónde?  Marque^  con  el 
dedo  donde,  (márr'-ké). 


^ Marcar,  to  point  out.  The  use  of  q for  c has  been  explained 
before. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  0 note;  00  room. 


34^  The  Rosenthal  Method. 


26.  Now  take  another  breath,  but  a deep  one.  As  deep 
as  you  can.  (Literally:  Breathe  (respire)  again 
(de  nuevo)  but  deeply,  as  deeply  as  you  can). 


27.  And  now  turn  around  (dé  media  vuelta),  so  that  I 
can  examine  your  back  ( =the  back,  la  espalda). 

28.  Does  it  look  serious,  doctor?  (Literally:  Doctor,  is 
thing  serious)  ? 

29.  I will  tell  you  as  soon  as  I have  finished  my  ex- 
amination. (Literally:  You  it  (I)  shall  tell  as  soon 
as  (tan  luego  como)  I may  finish  (termine)  the 
examination) . 

30.  How  did  you  sleep  (durmió  V.^)P — Badly  and  rest- 
lessly. 

31.  Did  you  feel  thirsty? — ^Yes,  at  times  I felt  very 
thirsty  and  drank  a great  deal  of  water.  (Liter- 
ally: You  gave  (it)  to  you  thirst? — ^At  times  (a  ratos) 
much  and  (I)  took  much  water). 


^ Dormir,  durmiendo,  dormido,  to  sleep. 

Pres.  Ind:  duermo,  duermes,  duerme,  dormimos, 

dormis,  duermen. 

Pres.  Sub:  duerma,  duermas,  duerma,  durmamos, 

durmáis,  duerman. 

Imperat:  duerme,  duerma,  durmamos, 

dormid,  duerman. 

Imperf ; dorm-ía,  — ías,  — ía,  — íamos,  — íais,  — ían. 

Past!  dorm-í,  — iste,  durmió,  dorm-imos,  — isteis,  durmieron. 

Imp.  Sub  :^durm-iera,  — ieras,  — iera,  — iéramos,  — ierais,  — ieran. 

Imp.  Sub ‘.^durm-iese,  — ieses,  — iese,  — iésemos,  — ieseis,  — iesen. 

Fut.  Sub:  durm-iere,  — ieres,  — iere,  — iéremos,  — iereis,  — ieren. 

Future:  dormir-é,  — ás,  — á,  — emos,  — éis,  — án, 

Cond:  dormir-ía,  — ^ías,  — ía,  — íamos,  — íais,  — ían. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


The  Spanish  Language, 


349 


26.  Respire  de  nuevo  pero  profundamente,  tan  profun- 
damente como  pueda. 

27.  Dé  media  vuelta  para  que  le  pueda  observar  la  es- 
palda. 

28.  Doctor,  ¿ Es  cosa  seria? 

29.  Se  lo  diré  tan  luego  como  termine  el  reconocimiento. 


30.  ¿ Qué  tal  durmió  Vd.?^ — Mal  y estuve  inquieto 

31.  ¿Le  dió^  a Vd.  sed? — A ratos,  mucha,  y tomé  mucha 
agua. 


2 Dar,  dando,  dado,  to  give. 


Free.  Ind: 

doy,  das, 

da. 

damos. 

dais. 

dan. 

Pres.  Subj; 

dé,  dés. 

dé. 

demos. 

deis. 

den. 

Imperat: 

da. 

dé. 

demos. 

dad. 

den. 

Imperf: 

daba,  dabas. 

daba. 

dábamos, 

dabais. 

daban. 

Past: 

di,  diste. 

dió. 

dimos. 

disteis. 

dieron. 

Imp.  Subj*.! 

diera,  dieras. 

diera. 

diéramos. 

dierais. 

dieran. 

Imp.  Subj:2 

diese,  dieses. 

diese. 

diésemos. 

dieseis. 

diesen. 

Fut.  Subj; 

diere,  dieres. 

diere. 

diéremos. 

diereis. 

dieren. 

Future : 

dar-é,  — ás. 

— á. 

— emos. 

— éis. 

— án. 

Cond: 

dar-ía,  — ías. 

— ía. 

— íamos. 

— íais. 

-^ían. 

á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


350 


The  Rosenthal  Method, 


32.  Allow  me  to  feel  your  pulse.  Your  pulse  is  changed. 
You  are  feverish.  (Literally:  Allow  (that)  you  (I) 
may  take  the  pulse  (el  pulso).  Yoxir  pulse  is  altered. 
Are  you  with  fever  (fiebre). 


33.  Now  take  this  thermometer  for  a few  minutes  in 
your  mouth.  I must  know  how  your  temperature 
is.  (Literally:  Put  you  (póngase)  this  thermometer 
in  the  mouth  (la  boca)  for  a moment  (un  rato).  (I) 
go  to  see  how  is  (sigue)  your  temperature). 

34.  You- have  quite  an  attack  of  bronchitis.  You  must 
go  home  at  once  and  get  to  bed.  Did  you  walk 
here?  (Literally:  Have  you  the  bronchial  tubes 
(los  bronquios)  rather  affected  (afectados).  Go  you 
at  once  to  home  (a  casa)  and  lie  down  (acuéstese). 
Came  you  afoot)  ? 

35.  No,  I came  in  a cab. — Not  in  an  open  one,  I trust? 
— Oh  no,  it  was  closed  tightly.  (Literally:  (I)  came 
in  coach. — But  not  open? — No,  tightly  (bien)  closed). 


1 Venir,  viniendo,  venido,  to  come. 

Pres.  Ind:  vengo,  vienes,  viene,  venimos,  venís,  vienen. 

Pres.  Subj:  venga,  vengas,  venga,  vengamos,  vengáis,  vengan. 

Imperat:  ven,  venga,  vengamos,  venid,  vengan, 

Imperf:  ven-ía,  — ías,  — ía,  — íamos,  — íais,  — ^ían. 

Past:  vine,  viniste,  vino,  vin- irnos,  — ísteis,  — ^ieron. 

Imp.  Subj:^  vin-iera,  — ieras,  — iera,  iéramos,  — ierais,  — ieran. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  O note;  00  room. 


The  S'^anisih  Language, 


351 

32.  Permíta  le  tome  el  pulso.  Su  pulso  está  alterado. 
Esta  V.  con  fiebre,  (fe^a'-bré). 


33.  Póngase  este  termómetro  en  la  boca  por  un  rato. 
Voy  a ver  como  sigue  su  temperatura. 

34.  Tiene  V.  los  bronquios  bastante  afectados.  Váyase 
al  punto  a casa  y acuéstese.  ¿ Vino^  Vd.  a pie? 

35.  Vine  en  coche. — Pero,  ¿ no  abierto? — No;  bien 
cerrado. 


Imp.  Subj: 

2 vin-iese, 

— ^ieses, 

— ^iese, 

— ^iésemoSj 

, — ieseis, 

— ^iesen. 

Fut.  Subj: 

vin-iere, 

— ieres, 

— iere, 

— iéremoSj 

, — iereis, 

— ieren. 

Future  Stem.— 

-Vendr. 

Future: 

vendr-é, 

— ás, 

-á, 

— emos, 

— éis, 

— án, 

Cond: 

vendr-ía, 

— ías, 

— ^ía, 

— oíamos, 

— ^íais, 

— ían. 

á 

far;  a pale;  e eve; 

é there;  ó note; 

óó  room. 

352 


The  Rosenthal  Method, 


36.  That  was  sensible.  Avoid  any  draught  or  cold, 
I shall  prescribe  some  medicine  for  you.  You  have 
to  take  it  punctually  every  two  hours.  (Literally: 
(It)  was  sensible  (acertado).  Avoid  (huya)  of  the 
air  and  of  the  cold.  To  you  (I)  shall  prescribe  (rece- 
taré) something.  It  (you)  will  take  every  (cada) 
two  hours  without  fail  (sin  falta). 

37.  Do  not  stop  on  your  way,  but  drive  home  at  once. 
(Literally:  Not  stop  yourself  (se  detenga)  on  the 
way,  go  without  delay  to  your  home). 

38.  Have  I to  stay  in  bed?  (Literally:  Shall  (I)  keep 
bed)? 

39.  I told  you  already  that  you  will  have  to  go  to  bed 
at  once.  Without  any  doubt  you  will  be  obliged 
to  keep  your  room  for  some  days,  for  bronchitis 
in  our  climate  is  not  to  be  trifled  with.  (Liter- 
ally: Already  you  (I)  told  that  (you)  put  your- 
self (se  meta)  in  the  bed  on  arriving  (al  llegar). 
Without  doubt  (sin  duda)  that  not  will  go  out  you 
from  your  room  for  some  days;  in  our  climate  the 
bronchitis  not  is  thing  simple). 

40.  Then  I am  seriously  ill?  (Literally:  Am  (I)  then 
of  seriousness  (gravedad)  ? 

41.  Not  dangerously  so,  but  you  will  have  to  stay  in 
bed  for  a week  at  least.  (Literally:  Not  offers  dan- 
ger (peligro),  but  will  have  you  to  (que  tendrá  que) 
keep  bed  for  a week  at  leavSt  (al  menos). 


Huir,  huyendo,  huido,  to  flee. 
Pres.  Ind:  huyo,  huyes,  huye. 

huimos, 

huís. 

huyen. 

Pres.  Sub:  huya. 

huyas. 

huya. 

huyamos. 

huyáis, 

huyan. 

Imperat:  — 

huye. 

huya. 

huyamos, 

huid. 

huyan. 

Imp  erf : hu-ia, 

— ías, 

— ía, 

— íamos. 

— íais. 

— ían. 

Past:  hu-i, 

— iste, 

—yo, 

— irnos. 

— isteis, 

— oyeron. 

á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


The  Spanish  Language. 


353 


36.  Estuvo  acertado.  Huya^  del  aire  y del  frío.  Le 
recetaré  algo.  Lo  tomará  cada  dos  horas  sin  falta. 

37.  No  se  detenga  en  el  camino,  váyase  sin  demora  a 
su  casa. 

38.  ¿ Guardaré  cama? 

39.  Ya  le  dije  que  se  meta  en  la  cama  al  llegar.  Sin 
duda  que  no  saldrá  V.  de  su  cuarto  por  algimos 
días;  en  nuestro  clima  la  bronquitis  no  es  cosa  sencilla. 


40.  ¿ Estoy  pues  de  gravedad? 

41.  No  ofrece  peligro,  pero  tendrá  que  guardar  cama 
por  una  semana  al  menos. 


Imp.  Subj  hu-yera,  — oyeras,  — ^yera,  — oyéramos,  — oyerais,  — oyeran. 

Imp.  Subj  hu-yese,  — oyeses,  — ^yese,  — oyésemos,  — oyeseis,  — oyesen. 

Fut.  Subj:  hu-yere,  — ayeres,  — ^yere,  — oyéremos,  — oyereis,  — oyeren. 

Future:  huir-é,  — ás,  — á,  — emos,  — éis,  — án. 

Cond:  huir-ía,  — ías,  — ía,  — íamos,  — íais,  — ían. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  5 note;  6b  room. 


354 


The  Rosenthal  Method, 


42.  And  when  do  you  think  I can  continue  my  jour- 
ney? (Literally:  When  believe  you  that  I shall  be 
able  (I)  to  follow  (seguir)  my  journey)? 

43.  That  is  impossible  to  tell.  In  the  first  place  we 
must  get  rid  of  your  fever.  At  any  rate  you  must 
be  prepared  to  spend  a week  here.  (Literally:  Who 
knows ! Above  all  (antetodo)  it  is  necessary  to 
get  rid  (quitar)  the  fever.  However  it  may  be  (como 
quiera  que  sea)  prepare  yourself  (prepárese)  to 
pass  here  a week). 

44.  And  when  will  you  call  on  me?  (Literally:  When 
will  return  you  to  see  me)  ? 

45.  It  is  now  a quarter  to  twelve.  My  office  hours 
last  till  two.  After  that  I have  three  patients  to 
visit,  who  are  dangerously  ill.  (Literally:  Are  the 
twelve  less  quarter.  My  hours  of  consultation 
last  (duran)  till  the  two.  Immediately  (after)  (I) 
visit  three  patients  (clientes)  of  gravity). 

46.  You  seem  to  be  very  busy? — Unfortunately  so; 
there  is  much  sickness  in  town.  (Literally:  Have 
you  much  what  to  do  (que  hacer)?  Unfortunately 
(por  desgracia);  (we)  have  many  sicknesses). 

47.  And  when  may  I expect  you?  (Literally:  When 
come  (you)  then)? 

1 Seguir,  siguiendo,  seguido,  to  follow. 

Pres.  Ind:  sigo,  sigues,  sigue,  seguimos,  seguís,  siguen. 

Pres.  Sub : siga,  sigas,  siga,  sigamos,  sigáis,  sigan. 

Imperat:  — ^ sigue,  siga,  sigamos,  seguid,  sigan. 

Imperf:  segu-ía,  — ías,  — ía,  — íamos,  — íais,  — ían. 

Past:  segu-í,  — iste,  siguió,  segu-imos,  — ^isteis,  siguieron. 

Imp.  Sub : ^ sigu-iera,  — ieras,  — iera,  — iéramos,  — ierais,  — ieran. 

Imp.  Sub : ^ sigu-iese,  — ieses,  — iese,  — iésemos,  — ieseis,  — iesen. 

Fut.  Sub:  sigu-iere, — ieres,  — iere,  — iéremos,  — iereis,  — ieren. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


The  Spanish  Language, 


355 


42.  ¿ Cuándo  cree  V.  que  podré  seguir^  mi  viaje? 

43.  i Quién  sabe!  Antetodo  hay  que  quitar  la  fiebre. 
Como  quiera  que  sea,  prepárese  a pasar  aquí  una 
semana,  (ké-tárr') 

44.  ¿ Cuándo  volverá^  V.  a verme? 


45.  Son  las  doce  menos  cuarto.  Mis  horas  de  consulta 
duran  hasta  las  dos.  Luego  visito  a tres  clientes 
de  gravedad,  (kle-én'-tés). 

46.  ¿ Tiene  V.  muchd  que  hacer? — Por  desgracia;  tene- 
mos muchas  enfermedades,  (dés-grá'-the  T" á) . 

47.  ¿ Cuándo  viene,  pues? 


Future:  seguir-é,  — ás,  — á,  — emos,  — éis,  — án. 

Cond:  seguir-ía,  — ías,  — ía,  — íamos,  — íais,  — ían. 

Verbs  of  this  class  ending  in  guir,  lose  the  u before  a and  0. 
2 Volver,  volviendo,  vuelto,  to  return. 

Pres.  Ind:  vuelvo,  vuelves,  vuelve,  volvemos,  volvéis,  vuelven. 

Pres.  Sub : vuelva,  vuelvas,  vuelva,  volvamos,  volváis,  vuelvan. 

Imperat:  vuelve,  vuelva,  volvamos,  volved,  vuelvan. 

Reg:  volvía,  volví,  volviera,  volviese,  volviere,  volveré,  volvería. 


á fs.r;  á pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


356 

48.  I will  call  on  you  between  four  and  five  without 
fail.  In  the  meanwhile  take  the  medicine  I pre- 
scribed for  you;  a tablespoonful  every  two  hours. 
(Literally:  (I)  will  call  (volveré)  without  fail  from 
four  to  five.  In  the  meanwhile  (entretanto)  keep 
on  (siga)  with  the  medicine  prescribed  (recetada), 
a tablespoon  (una  cucharada)  every  (cada)  two 
hours). 

49.  Keep  the  proper  temperature  in  your  room.  You 
had  better  have  a fire.  (Literally:  Keep  (conserve) 
the  same  temperature  in  yotir  room.  Better  (it) 
is  to  light  (encender)  fire  (fuego). 

50.  Keep  yourself  warm  and  avoid  catching  cold.  I 
will  be  with  you  between  four  and  five.  Good- 
bye! I trust  you  soon  will  be  better.  (Literally: 
Protect  yourself  and  avoid  the  cold.  (I)  shall  return 
from  four  to  five.  That  to  you  may  go  well  and 
that  yourself  may  restore  you  soon) ! 


á far;  a pale;  6 eve;  é there;  0 note;  6b  room. 


The  Spanish  Language. 


357 


j.8.  Volveré  sin  falta  de  cuatro  a cinco.  Entretanto 
siga  con  la  medicina  recetada,  tma  cucharada  cada 
dos  horas,  (se'-gá). 

\g.  Conserve  la  misma  temperatura  en  su  cuarto.  Mejor 
es  encender  fuego. 

30.  Abrigúese  y evite  el  frío.  Volveré  de  cuatro  a cinco. 

¡Que  le  vaya  bien  y que  se  restablezca  V.  pronto! 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  ó note;  00  room. 


358 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


ANÉCDOTAS. 

Continuando  las  disputas  entre  Francisco  primero, 
rey  de  Francia,  y Enrique  octavo,  rey  de  Inglaterra,^ 
resolvió  éste^  de  enviar  al  primero  un  embajador^  por- 
tador de  palabras  fieras  y amenazas;^  para  lo  cual  hizo 
elección  del  obispo^  Bonner  en  quien  tenía  gran  con- 
fianza. Este  obispo  le  dijo  que  ponía  su  vida  en  gran 
peligro,®  si  daba  tales  recados^  a un  rey  tan  altivo^  como 
Francisco  primero.  No  temas,”®  le  dijo  el  rey.  Si 
el  rey  de  Francia  hiciese^®  tal,  yo  haría  caer  muchas 
cabezas  de  franceses  que  están  aquí.”  Pero  cuál  de 
esas  cabezas  me  vendría^^  tan  bien  sobre  los  hombros^^ 
como  ésta?  ” le  replicó  poniendo  el  dedo  a la  suya. 


^ England.  2 The  latter.  ® Ambassador.  ^ Threatening.  ^ Bishop. 
® Danger.  ^ Messages.  * Haughty.  ® Imperative  of  temer ^ to  fear. 
From  hacer.  Me  vendría^  would  become  me.  ^2  Shoulders. 


á far;  á pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


The  Spanish  Language. 


359 


Luis  doce,  rey  de  Francia,  cuando  no  era  sino  duque  ^ 
de  Orleans,  había  padecido^  muchos  agravios^  de  dos 
personas  que  habían  sido  favoritos  en  el  reinado^  prece- 
dente. Uno  de  sus  allegados^  procuraba®  inducirlo  a 
que  les  mostrase  resentimiento.  No,’’  respondió  Su 
Majestad,  que  indigno  es  de  un  rey  de  Francia  tomar 
parte  en  la  venganza  del  duque  de  Orleans.” 

La  reina  Isabel  observando  el  donaire  de  un  español 
en  un  torneo,^  le  suplicó  un  día  que  le  dijese®  el  nombre 
de  su  dama.  El  español  se  resistió  algún  tiempo.  En 
fin,  cediendo  a la  curiosidad  de  Su  Majestad,  prometió 
enviarle  el  retrato^  de  la  dama.  Al  día  siguiente  hizo 
presentar  a Su  Majestad  un  paquetillo,^®  donde  la  reina, 
no^^  hallando  sino^^  un  espejito,^^  quedo  sonrojada  al 
punto. 


1 Duke.  2 Padecer,  to  suffer.  ^ Injuries.  ^ Reign.  ® Followers. 
6 Procurar,  to  try.  ^ Tournament.  ® From  decir.  ® Picture.  Little 
package,  n * * * sino,  only.  ^2  Little  mirror. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


36o 


The  Rosenthal  Method, 


El  caballero^  Tomás  Morus,^  famoso  canciller  de  Ingla- 
terra, puesto^  en  prisión  por  Enrique^  octavo,  dejó  crecer 
sus  cabellos®  y su  barba,  y viniendo®  un  barbero  para 
cortarlos*^  y afeitarle,®  Amigo,’’  le  dijo,  el  rey  y yo 
discutimos  sobre  mi  cabeza;  y yo  no  quiero  hacer  el 
menor  gasto  en  este  pleito,®  sin  saber  antes  quien  de  los 
dos  ha^®  de  disponer  de  ella.” 

Los  cortesanos  del  rey  Felipe^^  le  aconsejaban  que 
se  vengase  de  un  hombre  que  había  hablado  mal  de  él. 
‘‘Antes  es  menester  saber,  si  yo  no  le  he  dado  razón,’' 
dijo  Felipe,  y,  habiéndose  averiguado  que  el  tal  hom- 
bre jamás  había  recibido  cosa  alguna,  le  envió  ricos 
presentes.  Supo  el  rey  poco  después  que  el  mismo  le 
llenaba  de  alabanzas.  “ Mirad  pues,”  dijo  a los  corte- 
sanos,^2  “ que  yo  sé  mejor  que  vosotros  apaciguar^® 
una  lengua  mala.” 


^ Knight  (Sir).  2 Thomas  More,  ^ From  poner,  ^ Henry.  ® Hair. 
* From  venir,  ’ Cut  them.  ® Shave  him.  ® Pleito,  law-suit,  dispute. 
Is  to.  Philip.  ^ Courtiers.  Silence. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


The  Spanish  Language, 


361 

PROVERBIOS. 

Más^  vale  tarde  que  nunca. 

El  que  calla, 2 otorga.^ 

El  que  tarde  llega,  caldo^  bebe. 

La  necesidad  carece^  de  ley. 

Lo  que  no  se  puede  remediar  se  ha  de  aguantar.® 

Más  vale  un  pajaro  en  la  mano  que  ciento  volando. 

Al  hierro  caliente,  batir^  de  repente.® 

Amor  con  amor  se  paga.® 

Cada  oveja^®  con  su  pareja.^^ 
i Donde  fuego  se  hace,  htuno  sale. 

Donde  hay  gana^^  hay  maña.^® 

De  la  mano  a la^^  boca  desaparece  la  sopa. 

I Piedra  movediza  no  coje  musgo.^® 

* Salir  de  llamas^®  y caer  en  brasas.^^ 

I No  es  todo  oro  lo  que  reluce. 

I Sobre  gustó  no  hay  disputa. 

A quien  madruga^®  Dios  ayuda. 

Donde^®  fueres,  haz^  como  vieres. 

La  caridad  bien  ordenada  empieza^^  por  uno  mismo. 

Más  vale  buen  callar  que  mal  hablar. 

Obra  de  común,^^  obra  de  ningún. 

A lo  hecho,  pecho.^ 

1 Más  valer — to  be  worth  more,  to  be  better  than.  ^ Callar — ^to 
be  silent.  ® Consents.  “First  come,  first  served.”  ® Carecer  de — 
lack.  “Necessity  knows  no  law.”  ® Aguantar — endure.  Batir ^ 

Infinitive  instead  of  Imperative.  ® At  once.  ® Is  paid.  “One 
good  turn  deserves  another.”  Oveja — ewe.  Mate.  p)esire 

. or  will.  Dexterity,  “way.”  From  hand  to  mouth.  ^ There’s 

many  a slip,  etc.”  Moss.  Flames.  Live  coals.  Madrugar 
— to  get  up  early.  Donde  fueres — wherever  you  may  be. 

' 20  Imp.  of  hacer f to  do.  “When  at  Rome,  do  as  the  Romans  do.” 
21  Empieza  por — ^begins  with.  22  Everybody.  *What  cannot  be 
cured  must  be  endured.” 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


3Ó2 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


LA  INDIA. 

/ La  India!  i Hay  en  esta  palabra  algo  de  grande  y 
de  venerable,  de  vago  y de  misterioso,  aun  después 
de  tantos  siglos!  / La  India,  la  más  antigua  porción 
civilizada  del  antiguo  mundo,  cuna  de  las  creencias^ 
religiosas  que,  en  su  unidad,  su  simplicidad  y su  gran- 
deza primitivas,  parece  ha  abrazado,  como  una  vasta 
fórmula,  todos  los  cultos  que  después  profesaron  los 
pueblos ) la  I ndia,  el  teatro  de  los  acontecimientos  his- 
tóricos más  inesperados,  más  grandes,  más  maravillo- 
sos; la  India,  que  han  visitado  a su  vez  los  dioses,  los 
héroes,  los  filósofos,  los  hombres  ávidos  de  ciencia  y 
los  especuladores^  más  atrevidos  en  todos  los  siglos; 
la  India,  cuya  conquista  han  soñado,  intentado  o llevado 
a cabo  o en  parte  Sesostris,  Darío,  Alejandro,  Gen- 
giskán,»  Timur,  Báber,  Nader-Shas,^  Napoleón!  Su 
pasado  y su  porvenir  interesan  en  el  más  alto  grado-^ 
a la  humanidad  entera,  porque  el  pasado  de  la  India 
encierra  en  sus  profimdidades  algunos  de  los  principales 
rasgos  de  la  historia  del  mundo,  y su  porvenir  se  liga 
de  una  manera  cada  vez  más  íntima  a la  suerte  de  las 
grandes  naciones  europeas. — De  Jancigny. 


‘Creencia,  belief.  = Especulador,  speculator.  ^ Jenghiz- Khan. 

^ Nadir  Shah,  ^ Grado,  degree. 


á far;  a pale;  0 eve;  é there;  ó note;  00  room. 


The  Spanish  Language,  363 

FÁBULA. 

Las  Dos  Zorras.^ 

Una  noche  entraron  dos  zorras  furtivamente  en  un 
gallinero,^  mataron  el  gallo, ^ las  gallinas,^  y los  pollos.® 
Después  de  esta  matanza,®  empezaron^  a devorar  su 
presa.^  Una  que  era  joven  y sin  reflexión,  propuso®  comer- 
los todos  de  una  vez.  La  otra,  vieja  y codiciosa^®,  quería 
ahorrar^^  para  otro  día.  ‘‘Hija,’’  dijo  la  vieja,  “la  expe- 
riencia me  hizo^^  sabia;  en  mi  tiempo  he  visto  mucho  mun- 
do. No  consumamos  a la  vez  pródigamente  todo  nuestro 
caudal;^®  tuvimos  buen  suceso,  y debemos  cuidar^^  de  no 
mal  gastarlo.”^® 

Replicó  la  joven  Estoy  resuelta  a recrearme  mien- 
tras lo  tengo  por  delante,  y saciar  mi  apetito  por  toda 
una  semana;  por  lo^®  que  toca  a venir  aquí  mañana,  es 
cuento  eso  es  exponemos.  Mañana  vendrá  aquí  el 
amo,^®  y por  vengar  la  muerte  de  sus  pollos,  nos  dará^® 
con  una  tranca^®  en  la  cabeza.” 

Después  de  esta  réplica,  cada  una  de  ellas  obre^^  como 
le  parece  más  propio.  La  joven  come  hasta  que  revienta,^^ 
sin  poder  apenas  arrastrarse^®  a su  cueva^^  antes  de  morir. 
La  vieja  que  le  pareció  mucho  más  pmdente  gobernar 
su  apetito,  y ser  fmgal,  fué  el  día  siguiente  al  gallinero, 
y la  mató  el  labrador. 

Así  cada  edad  tiene  su  vicio  favorito:  los  jóvenes 
son  fogosos^®  e insaciables  en  sus  placeres;  y los  viejos 
incorregibles  en  su  avaricia. 

^ Foxes.  2 Hen-coop.  ^ Cock.  ^ Hen.  ® Chicken.  ® Slaughter. 
^ Begun.  ® Prey.  ^ From  proponer,  Miserly.  Save.  From 

hacer.  Stock.  Take  care  to.  To  spend  it.  ^^  Por  lo  que 

toca  a venir y as  for  coming.  Nonsense.  Master.  Nos  dara 

cony  he  will  give  us.  p^r,  stick.  21  Acts.  22  Reventary  to  burst. 
23  To  drag.  24  Den.  25  Impetuous. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


3^4 


The  Rosenthal  Method, 


REFLEXIONES  MORALES. 

El  temor  de  la  justicia  divina  es  el  principio  que  hizo 
nacer  en  la  imaginación  de  varios  libertinos^  las 
horribles  ideas  filosóficas,  ya  de  negari  a Dios  la  exis- 
tencia, ya  de  despojar^  de  su  inmortalidad  al  alma.^ 
Toda  la  desdicha^  de  estos  miserables  viene  de  que, 
lejos  de  contemplar  al  Omnipotente  como  a un  padre 
cariñoso,®  sólo  se  figuran  en  él  un  juez  severo;  y para 
sacudiri  de  sí  el  temor  que  esta  calidad  les  inspira,  force- 
jan® a persuadirse,  o con  la  primera  de  estas  dos 
quimeras,^  que  no  hay  Dios  que  los  castigue,  o con  la 
segunda,  que  sólo  pueden  temer  de  él  un  castigo  leve 
y de  corta  duración,  como  lo  es  cualquiera  pena  tem- 
poral. Pero  ¿que  logran  con  esto?  Puntualmente  lo 
que  el  reo,^®  que  huyendo  de  la  justicia,  se  arroja^^  por 
un  despeñadero,^  y por  evitar  un  suplicio^®  con- 
tingente,^^ abraza^®  una  muerte  indubitable.  Por  el 
precipicio  mayor  de  todos,  que  es  el  de  la  impiedad, 
procuran  huir^®  de  la  justicia  divina.  Y aún  los  que 
niegan  a Dios  la  existencia,  no  tanto  aspiran  a huir  de 
la  justicia  divina,  como  que  la  justicia  divina  huya  de 
ellos,  pretendiendo  que  el  soberano  juez  se  desaparezca 
de  aquel  augusto  trono,  en  que  los  ha^^  de  sentenciar. 

— FeijÓo. 


^ Free-thinkers.  ^ Deny.  ® Despoil.  ^ Soul.  ® Unhappiness. 
® Affectionate.  ^ Shake  off.  ^ Try  to.  ® Fancies.  Culprit. 

Arrojarse,  to  throw  one’s  self.  Cliff.  Punishment.  Near 
at  hand.  Embrace.  Flee  from.  Is  to. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  0 note;  oo  room. 


The  Spanish  Language,  365 

REFLEXIONES  MORALES  H. 

El  ambicioso^  es  un  esclavo^  de  todo^  el  mundo;  del 
príncipe,  porque  conceda  el  empleo;^  del  valido,^ 
porque  interceda;  de  los  demás  porque  no  estorben.® 
Tiene  el  alma  y el  cuerpo  en  continuo  movimiento, 
porque  es  menesterí  no  perder  instante.  A todos 
teme,  porque  ninguno  hay  que  con  una  acusación  no 
pueda  desvanecer®  toda  su  solicitud,  i O cuánto  forceja 
con  su  semblante^  por  que  muestre^®  agrado^^  a los  mis- 
mos a quienes  profesa  mortal  odio!  Cuánto  trabajo 
le  cuesta^^  reprimir  todas  aquellas  inclinaciones  viciosas 
que  pueden  dificultar  sus  medras!^®  De  la  pasión  do-, 
minante  son  víctimas  todas  las  demás  pasiones;  y el  vicio 
de  la  ambición,  como  tirano  dueño,  sobre  atormentarle 
por  sí  mismo,  le  prohíbe  todos  aquellos  gustos  a que 
le  lleva  el  deseo.  Ve  al  que  va  a la  comedia,  al  que  logra 
el  paseo  honesto,  al  que  asiste  al  banquete,  al  que  goza 
el  sarao;  todo  lo  ve  y lo  envidia pero  los  apetitos  están 
en  él,  atmque  furiosos,  aprisionados  como  los  vientos  en 
la  cárcel^®  de  Eolo.^® 

— ^PeijÓo. 


^ Ambitious  man.  ^ Slave.  * Todo  el  mundo,  everybody.  ^ Em- 
ployment. ® Powerful  man.  ® Disturb.  ^ Necessary.  ® Undo, 
® Countenance.  From  mostrar,  Liking.  Prom  costar. 
Progress.  Envidiar,  to  envy.  Cave.  Aeolus. 


á far;  a pale;  5 eve;  é there;  o note;  00  room. 


366  The  Rosenthal  Method, 

¡EXCELSIOR! 

I Por  qué  los  corazones  miserables, 

Por  qué  las  almas^  viles, 

En  los  fieros^  combates  de  la  vida 
Ni  luchan^  ni  resisten? 

El  espíritu^  humano  es  más  constante 
Cuanto^  más  se  levanta: 

Dios  puso®  el  fango^  en  la  llanura,^  y puso® 

La  roca  en  la  montaña. 

La  blanca  nieve®  que  en  los  hondos^®  valles 
Derrítese^^  ligera, 

En  las  altivas  cumbres^^  permanece 
Inmutable  y eterna. 

— Gaspar  Nuñez  de  Arce. 


1 Alma,  soul.  2 fiero,  fierce.  ^ fuchar,  to  struggle.  * Espíritu, 
spirit.  ® Cuanto  más,  the  more.  ® Puso,  from  poner,  ^ Mud. 
® Plain.  ^ Snow.  Hondo,  deep.  Derretirse,  to  melt.  ^2  Lightly. 
Peaks. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  ó note;  00  room. 


The  Spanish  Language. 

REFLEXIONES  MORALES  III. 


367 


La  modestia  es  la  prenda^  más  amable*  de  una  don- 
•ella,®  aún  en  cotejo^  de  la  hermosura.®  Esta,  no  hay 
luda,  halaga®  y solicita^  mucho  más  la  pasión  del  hom- 
bre, pero  aquella  se  granjea  su  mayor  estimación  y 
precio.  La  pasión  nace®  de  los  atractivos  que  le 
uacen  amar  aquello  que  la  provoca:  mas®  el  aprecio  y 
stimación  que  infunde  el  decoro  de  la  modestia,  pro- 
eden  del  respeto  que  adorna  en  la  exterior  compostura 
ie  un  rostro  la  belleza  interior  del  alma,  a quien  aquella 
jetrata.“  Aquella  misma  es  también  seguro  indicio  de 
.i  dulzura^i  de  genio, y de  la  suavidad  del  carácter 
j.  quien  sirve  de  alma,  de  la  cual  espera  su  mayor  satis- 
jacción  y dicha'®  en  el  casamiento'^  el  hombre  que  pre- 
ende  poseerla.  La  hermosura  es  don'®  accidental  de  la 
laturaleza,  que  entre  pocos  la  reparte;'®  pero  la  her- 
mosura interior  del  alma,  la  de  la  virtud'^  sola,  a cual- 
uiera'®  que  desea  conseguirla. 


> Gift.  2 Lovable.  ’ Girl.  * Comparison.  ® Beauty.  * Cajoles. 
Wins  to  itself,  s jg  born  of.  » But.  to  picture,  to 

oage.  “ Sweetness.  12  Temperament.  “ Happiness.  “ Marriage. 
1 Gift.  Repartir,  to  distribute.  ” Virtue,  Before  a cualquiera, 
understand:  la  reparte. 

n 

á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  0 note;  do  room. 


368 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


LA  TUMBA  Y LA  ROSA. 

{Traducción  libre  de  Victor  Hugo). 

Dice  la  Tumba^  a la  Rosa: 

¿ Qué  haces  tú,  preciada  flor, 

Del  llanto^  que  el  alba^  hermosa 
Vierte  en  tu  cáliz^  de  amor? 

Y la  Rosa  le  responde: 

¿ Qué  haces,  di,^  Tumba  sombría, 

De  lo  que  tu  seno®  esconde"^ 

Y devora®  cada  día? 

Yo  perfumes  doy^  al  suelo^® 

Con  el  llanto  matinal. 

¡ Y yo  im  alma  mando  al  délo, 

De  cada  cuerpo  mortal! 

— Gertrudis  Gómez  de  Avellaneda. 


^ Tomb.  2 Tears.  ® Dawn.  ^ Chalice.  ® Tell  me. 
’ Esconder,  to  hide.  ® Devorar,  to  devour.  ® Obj.  of  dar. 


• Bosom. 
Ground. 


á far;  a pale;  e eve;  é there;  0 note;  oo  room. 


The  Spanish  Language.  369 

LETRILLA  QUE  LLEVABA  POR  REGISTRO^  EN  SU 
BREVIARIO. — Santa  Teresa  de  Jesús. 

Nada  te  turbe 
Nada  te  espante; 

Todo  se  pasa; 

Dios  no  se  muda,^ 

La  paciencia  todo  lo  alcanza.^ 

Quien  a Dios  tiene. 

Nada  le  falta. 

Solo  Dios  basta.^ 


^ Book-mark.  2 Turbar,  to  disturb.  * Mudarse,  to  change. 
^ Alcanzar,  to  attain.  ® Bastar,  to  suffice. 


370 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


COLLOQUIAL  EXPRESSIONS. 


¿No  puede  V.  ir  más  li- 
gero? Estoy  muy  de 
prisa. 

Deseo  guardar  esto  como 
recuerdo. 

¿Está  ocupado  este  asien- 
to? 

¿ Cómo  puedo  llegar  al 
otro  lado  sin  pasar  el 
puente? 

He  estado  otra  vez  esta 
mañana  en  la  parte 
baja  de  la  iciudad. 

Alto,  todavia  me  corres- 
ponden 20  centavos. 
Di  a V.  medio  dólar 
y V.  sólo  me  ha 
devuelto  diez  centa- 
vos. 

¿Hombre,  de  donde  viene? 

¿ Hombre,  puede  V.  de- 
cirme qué  es  esto? 


Can’t  you  go  any  faster? 
I am  in  a terrible 
hurry. 

I want  this  for  a souvenir. 

Is  this  seat  taken? 

How  can  I get  across 
without  using  (cross- 
ing) the  bridge? 

I have  been  downtown 
again  this  morning. 

Here,  there  are  20  cents 
coming  to  me  yet.  I 
gave  you  a half-dollar 
and  you  have  given 
me  only  10  cents 
back. 

vSay,  where  have  you 
been? 

Say,  can  you  tell  me  what 
this  is? 


The  Spanish  Language 


371 


VOCABULARIO 
Comiendo  y Bebiendo 

Tráigame  la  carta  (lista). 

Quiero  huevos  frescos, 
una  taza  de  café, 
mantequilla  y tosta- 
das. 

Alcánceme  la  pimienta  y 
la  mostaza. 

Tráiganos  dos  cigarros 
habanos. 

¿ Que  tiene  V.  para  cenas? 

Basta  eso;  pero  denos  V. 
buen  vino  y frutas. 

Déme  V.  un  poco  de  pan. 

Déme  cerveza  fuerte. 

Muchacho,  danos  pan 
caliente. 

Muchacho,  da  de  beber  al 
señor. 

Veamos,  ahora,  ¿ que  nos 
dará  V.  de  cenar? 

He  comido  muy  bien. 

Y yo  también. 

Probemos  el  vino. 

Destape  esa  botella. 

No  tengo  tirabuzón. 

¿ Que  quiere  Vd.  más,  una 
ala  o una  pierna? 


VOCABULARY. 

Eating  and  Drinking. 

Bring  me  the  bill  of  fare. 

I want  fresh  eggs,  a cup 
of  coffee,  butter  and 
toast. 

Reach  me  the  pepper  and 
the  mustard. 

Bring  us  two  Havana  ci- 
gars. 

What  have  you  for  sup- 
per? 

That  is  enough;  but  give 
us  some  good  wine 
and  some  fruit. 

Give  me  a little  bread. 

Give  me  some  strong 
beer. 

Boy,  give  us  new  bread. 

Boy,  give  the  gentleman 
some  drink. 

Now  let  us  see,  what  will 
you  give  us  for  sup- 
per? 

I have  dined  very  well. 

So  have  I. 

Let  us  taste  the  wine. 

Uncork  that  bottle. 

I have  no  corkscrew. 

Which  do  you  like  best,  a 
wing  or  a leg? 


372 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


Para  mi  es  todo  uno. 

El  hambre  es  la  mejor 
salsa. 

Vamos,  señor,  por  la 
salud  del  Presidente. 

Le  corresponderé  con  mucho 
gusto. 

El  vino  es  muy  exquisito. 

I Sabe  V.  trinchar? 

DEL  COMER  Y 
BEBER. 

La  comida. 

La  cena. 

El  convidado. 

El  convite. 

El  pastel. 

El  jarabe. 

La  bebida. 

El  aguardiente. 

La  cerveza. 

La  sidra. 

La  limonada. 

El  cuarto. 

¿ Tiene  V.  un  cuarto  de 
alquiler?  (ál-ke-lérr'). 

I Cuál  es  el  precio  de  este 
cuarto? 

No  quiero  un  cuarto  os- 
curo ni  húmedo. 

El  cuarto  del  frente  (frén'- 
té).  - 


It  is  all  one  to  me. 

Hunger  is  the  best  sauce. 

Come,  sir,  to  the  health  of 
the  President. 

I will  pledge  you  with  a 
great  deal  of  pleas- 
ure. 

The  wine  is  very  exquisite. 
Can  you  carve? 

OF  EATING  AND 
DRINKING. 

dinner. 

supper. 

guest. 

feast. 

pie,  pastry. 

syrup. 

drink. 

brandy. 

beer. 

cider. 

lemonade. 

The  Room. 

Have  you  a room  to  let? 

What  is  the  price  of  this 
room? 

I don’t  want  a dark  or 
damp  room. 

The  front-room. 


The, Spanish  Language. 


El  cuarto  del  fondo  (fon'- 
do). 

¿ Da  este  cuarto  al  frente 
o al  fondo? 

Este  cuarto  da  al  fondo, 
pero  puedo  darle  uno 
del  frente  si  lo  desea 

V. 

Prefiero  un  cuarto  con 
vista  al  patio  (vés'- 
tá  pá'-té"^o). 

Quiero  un  cuarto  con  vista 
a la  calle  (kál'-yé). 

El  piso  (pe'-s5). 

¿ En  qué  piso  está  este 
cuarto? 

Déme  dos  cuartos  que  se 
comuniquen. 

Déjeme  V.  ver  el  cuarto. 

Enséñeme  V.  sus  mejores 
cuartos  (má-^hó'- 
rés). 

Tomaré  este  cuarto. 

La  puerta. 

Esta  puerta  no  cierra. 

¿ A dónde  da  esta 

puerta? 

Esta  puerta  comunica  con 
la  sala. 

La  ventana. 


373 

The  rear-room. 

Does  this  room  lie  to  the 
front  or  to  the  rear? 

This  room  lies  to  the  rear, 
but  I can  give  you  a 
front-room  if  you 
wish. 

I prefer  a room  that  looks 
on  the  court. 

I want  a room  that  looks 
on  the  street. 

The  floor;  the  story. 

On  which  floor  is  this 
room  located? 

Give  me  two  adjoining 
rooms  (which  com- 
municate). 

Please  let  me  see  the 
room. 

Show  me  your  best 
rooms. 

I will  take  this  room. 

The  Doofo 

This  door  will  not  shut. 

Where  does  this  door 
lead  to? 

This  door  communicates 
with  the  sitting 
room. 

The  window. 


374 


The  Rosenthal  Method, 


Con  una  ventana;  con  dos 
ventanas. 

Déme  V.  un  cuarto  con  dos 
ventanas;  cuartos  con 
una  ventana  son  muy 
oscuros. 

El  piso,  (de  un  cuarto). 

La  alfombra. 

Un  tapete.  \ 

Una  estera.  / 

Nosotros  no  tenemos  más 
que  esteras  junto  a las 
camas. 

Es  raro  encontrar  alfom- 
bras que  cubran  todo 
el  suelo  en  Méjico, 

La  cama. 

Limpio. 

Fresco. 

La  frazada. 

El  travesero. 

Un  colchón. 

Un  colchón  de  muelle. 

Una  sábana. 

Haga  poner  sábanas  lim- 
pias. 

Las  sábanas  no  están  bien 
limpias. 

Esta  frazada  no  me  abriga, 
déme  V.  otra. 

Me  gusta  que  la  cabeza 
esté  alta;  déme  otra 
almohada. 


With  one  window;  with 
two  windows. 

Give  me  a room  with  two 
windows,  rooms  with 
one  window  are  too 
dark. 

The  floor  (of  a room). 

The  carpet. 

A bed-carpet;  a mat. 

We  have  only  mats  before 
the  beds. 

One  rarely  finds  carpets 
covering  the  whole 
room  in  Mexico. 

The  Bed. 

Clean. 

Fresh. 

The  blanket. 

The  bolster. 

A mattress. 

A spring-mattress. 

A sheet. 

Have  clean  sheets  put 
on. 

The  sheets  are  not  quite 
clean. 

This  blanket  does  not  keep 
me  warm ; give  me 
another. 

I like  my  head  to  be  high; 
give  me  another  pil- 
low. 


The  Spanish  Language, 


375 


Dormir. 

I Reposó  V.  bien?  1 

¿ Durmió  V.  bien?  J 

Generalmente  duermo  muy 
bien,  pero  anoche  dor- 
mí mal. 

Hacer  la  cama. 

Sírvase  hacer  mi  cama. 

Estoy  muy  cansado  y 
deseo  ir  a la  cama 
ahora  mismo. 

I A qué  hora  se  acostó? 

Él  se  acostó  a las  diez. 

Yo  no  he  cerrado  ojos  en 
toda  la  noche. 

Llamar. 

Llámeme  temprano,  quiero 
salir  por  el  primer 
tren. 

Quiero  descansar  toda  la 
noche.  No  permita  a 
ninguno  que  me  per- 
turbe. 

La  Mesa. 

El  mantel. 

La  silla. 

El  guardaropa. 

La  cómoda. 

El  espejo. 

El  sofa. 

La  lámpara. 


To  Sleep. 

Did  you  rest  well? 

Generally  I sleep  very 
well,  but  last  night  I 
slept  badly. 

To  make  the  bed. 

Pray  fix  my  bed. 

I am  very  tired  and  wish 
to  go  to  bed  at  once. 

At  what  time  did  he  go  to 
bed? 

He  went  to  bed  at  ten. 

I have  not  slept  a wink 
the  whole  night. 

To  Call;  To  Awaken. 

Call  me  early;  I want  to 
leave  by  the  first 
train. 

I want  to  have  a long 
night’s  rest;  don’t  al- 
low any  one  to  dis- 
turb me. 

The  Table. 

The  table-cloth. 

The  chair. 

The  wardrobe. 

The  chest  of  drawers. 

The  mirror. 

The  sofa. 

The  lamp. 


37Ó 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


No  tiene  aceite  dentro. 

La  mecha  no  está  bien 
despabilada. 

Una  pantalla  de  lámpara. 

La  chimenéa. 

El  candelero.  1 

El  candelabro.  J 

La  vela. 

El  gas. 

La  luz. 

Encender. 

Apagar. 

Encienda  el  gas. 

Apague  el  gas. 

Un  fósforo. 

Fósforos. 

Tráigame  agua  fresca  para 
beber. 

Tráigame  agua  fresca  para 
lavarme. 

Llene  la  jarra. 

I Dónde  está  la  campana? 

Cepille  esta  ropa,  mozo. 

Mi  vestido  y botas  están 
mo  j ados ; sírvase  se- 
carlos. 

Encienda  fuego. 

Tráigame  un  comisionista, 
si  es  posible,  uno  que 
hable  inglés. 

I No  hay  cartas  para  mí? 

¿ Preguntó  alguién  por 
mí? 


There  is  no  oil  in  it. 

The  wick  is  not  cut 
evenly. 

A shade  (of  a lamp). 

The  chimney. 

The  chandelier. 

The  candle. 

The  gas. 

The  light. 

To  light. 

To  put  out.  , 

Light  the  gas. 

Turn  off  the  gas. 

A match. 

Matches. 

Bring  me  fresh  water  to 
drink. 

Bring  me  fresh  water  to 
wash  with. 

Fill  the  pitcher. 

Where  is  the  bell? 

Brush  these  clothes,  waiter. 

My  clothes  and  boots  are 
wet,  please  dry  them. 

Light  a fire. 

Get  me  a messenger-boy, 
if  possible,  someone 
who  speaks  English. 

Are  there  any  letters  for 
me? 

Did  anyone  inquire  for 
me? 


The  Spanish  Language. 


377 


Si  alguien  pregunta  por 
mí,  dígale  que  espero 
volver  a las  seis. 

Si  alguien  pregunta  por 
mí,  dígale  que  me  he 
ido  a casa  del  señor 
Martínez,  donde  me  es- 
taré hasta  las  cuatro. 

Si  el  sastre  me  trajera  mi 
chaqueta,  dígale  que 
vuelva  mañana  por  la 
mañana. 

Si  algunos  paquetes  vinie- 
sen para  mí,  sírvase 
hacer  que  se  pongan 
en  mi  cuarto. 

I Podría  yo  escribir  al- 
gunas líneas  en  la 
oficina? 

Sírvase  darme  algunos 
efectos  para  escribir. 

Yo  parto  mañana  por  el 
tren  de  la  seis,  esta- 
ción del  Este.  ¿ Irá  el 
omnibus  allá? 

I Que  se  me  llame  a tiempo! 

Tráigame  un  coche  a . 
tiempo  y haga  bajar 
mi  equipaje. 

Haz  que  me  hagan  mi 
cuenta. 

Sírvase  darme  mi  cuenta. 


If  anyone  asks  for  me, 
tell  them  that  I ex- 
pect to  be  back  at  six. 

If  anyone  inquires  for  me, 
tell  them  that  I have 
gone  to  Mr.  Mar- 
tinez’s where  I can  be 
found  till  four  o’clock. 

If  the  tailor  should  bring 
me  my  coat,  tell  him 
to  call  again  to-mor- 
row morning. 

If  any  packages  should 
come  for  me,  have 
them  put  into  my 
room,  please. 

Could  I write  a few  lines 
in  the  office? 

Please  give  me  some 
writing  materials. 

I start  to-morrow  by  the 
six  o’clock  train. 
Eastern  Station.  Will 
the  ominibus  go 
there? 

Let  me  be  called  in  time! 

Get  me  a carriage  in  good 
time  and  have  my 
baggage  brought 
down. 

Have  my  bill  made  out. 

Please  give  me  my  bill. 


378 


The  Rosenthal  Method, 


Yo  no  he  tenido  esto. 

Eso  ha  sido  ya  pagado. 

Encuentro  este  precio 
muy  alto. 

Llámeme  a las  cinco 
mañana;  toque  fuerte 
a la  puerta.  Yo  sen- 
tiría mucho  perder  el 
tren. 

Vestirse. 

El  vestido. 

Un  vestido;  un  vestido 
completo. 

El  sobretodo  o gabán. 

Un  sobretodo  de  verano. 

Un  sobretodo  de  invier- 
no. 

Una  casaca;  un  vestido. 

Una  levita. 

La  chaqueta. 

El  frac. 

Una  casaca. 

Un  chaleco. 

Un  chaleco  blanco. 

Un  pantalón. 

Los  tirantes  (te-rán'-tés). 

La  bolsa.  Y 

El  bolsillo.  > 

La  faltriquera.  J 

Un  pañuelo. 

El  botón. 


I have  not  had  this. 

That  has  already  been 
paid. 

I find  this  charge  too 
high. 

Call  me  at  five  to-mor- 
row; knock  loudly  at 
my  door.  I should 
be  sorry  to  lose  the 
train. 

To  Dress. 

The  suit  of  clothes. 

A suit;  a complete  suit  of 
clothes. 

The  overcoat. 

A summer  overcoat. 

A winter  overcoat. 

A coat. 

A dress-coat. 

The  (close-fitting)  coat. 

The  frock-coat;  evening 
dress. 

A dress-coat. 

A waist-coat. 

A white  waist-coat. 

Trousers. 

Suspenders.  Braces. 

The  pocket. 

A handkerchief. 

The  button. 


The  Spanish  Language, 


379 


Un  botón  se  ha  caído  de 
aquí. 

Haga  que  se  ponga  un 
botón,  pero  bien  cosi- 
do. 

Abróchese  su  sobretodo. 

Desabróchese  su  cha- 
queta. 

El  ojal. 

El  ojal  está  descosido; 
tenga  la  bondad  de 
remendarlo. 

El  abotonador. 

La  camisa,  (ká-mé'-sá). 

La  camisa  de  dormir. 

Ponerse  una  camisa  lim- 
pia. 

El  cuello  (de  camisa). 

Abotonar. 

Un  cuello  alto. 

Un  cuello  doblado. 

Los  puños. 

La  corbata. 

Anudar;  amarrar. 

Hacer  un  nudo. 

Ropa  interior. 

El  chaleco  de  franela. 

Los  calzoncillos  (kál- 
thon-thel'-yós). 

Las  medias. 

Los  calcetines  (kál-thá-té'- 
nés). 

Las  botas. 

Un  par  de  botas. 


A button  is  off  here. 

Please  have  a button  put 
on,  but  strongly. 

Button  your  overcoat. 
Unbutton  your  coat. 

The  buttonhole. 

The  buttonhole  is  tom; 
please  mend  it. 

The  button-hook. 

The  shirt. 

The  night-shirt. 

To  put  on  a clean  shirt. 

The  (shirt)  collar. 

To  button  on. 

A stand-up  collar. 

A turn-down  collar. 

The  cuffs. 

The  neck-tie. 

To  tie. 

To  tie  a knot. 

Underwear. 

The  flannel  waist-coat. 

The  drawers. 

The  stockings. 

The  socks. 

The  boots. 

A pair  of  boots. 


The  Rosenthal  Method, 


380 

Los  zapatos. 

Un  par  de  zapatos. 
Botines. 

Tómeme  la  medida  para 
un  par  de  botas. 

Las  zapatillas  (zá-pá- 
tél'-yás). 

Las  chinelas. 

Los  pantuflos. 

Un  vestido. 

La  bata. 

Unas  enaguas. 

, El  zagalejo. 

La  basquiña. 

El  corsé. 

El  jubón.  Chóo-bón'). 

La  camiseta. 

Los  guantes. 

Un  par  de  guantes. 

Guantes  de  cabritilla  (ká- 
bré-tél'~yá). 

La  capa. 

Una  capa  de  pelo;  una 
pelisa. 

El  manguito. 

A casa  del  Sastre. 

¿ Puede  V.  recomendarme 
un  buen  sastre? 

I Es  su  trabajo  bueno? 
Enséñeme  V.  sus  mode- 
los (sus  muestras). 
Quiero  un  sobretodo. 


The  shoes. 

A pair  of  shoes. 

High  shoes. 

Measure  me  for  a pair  of 
boots. 

The  slippers;  pantofles. 

A dress. 

The  wrapper;  morning 
dress. 

The  petticoat. 

The  corset. 

The  under-waist. 

The  undershirt. 

The  gloves. 

A pair  of  gloves. 
Kid-gloves. 

The  cloak. 

The  fur  cloak. 

The  muff. 

At  a Tailor’s. 

Can  you  recommend  me  a 
good  tailor? 

Is  his  workmanship  good? 
Show  me  your  patterns 
(samples). 

I want  an  overcoat. 


The  Spanish  Language, 


Tómeme  V.  la  medida 
para  un  vestido  en- 
tero. 

A la  última  moda. 

No  muy  ajustado. 

No  muy  ancho. 

Un  poco  más  largo. 

No  tan  largo. 

Quiero  una  chaqueta  de 
una  botonadura. 

El  forro. 

I Cuándo  puedo  tener  este 
sobretodo? 

I No  antes? 

No  puedo  esperarme  tan- 
to tiempo;  debo  te- 
nerlo para  el  mártes. 

Mándemelo  con  el  recibo. 

I Puede  V.  recomendarme 
un  fabricante  de  pa- 
ños? 

Enséñeme  un  paño  claro 
(oscirro) 

I Cómo  me  cae?  1 

I Cómo  me  sienta?  / 

Está  muy  ajustado  en  la 
cintura. 

Está  muy  ajustado  en  los 
sobacos. 

¿No  están  las  mangas  muy 
largas? 

Me  gusta  el  pantalón  ajus- 
tado. 


381 

Measure  me  for  a com- 
plete suit. 

In  the  latest  fashion. 

Not  too  tight. 

Not  too  wide. 

A little  longer. 

Not  quite  so  long. 

I want  a single-breasted 
coat. 

The  lining. 

When  can  I have  this 
overcoat? 

Not  before? 

I can  not  wait  so  long;  I 
must  have  it  by 
Tuesday. 

Send  it  to  me  C.  O.  D. 
(with  the  receipt). 

Can  you  recommend  me  a 
clothier? 

Show  me  light  (dark)  goods 
(cloth). 

How  does  it  fit  me? 

It  is  too  tight  in  the  waist. 

It  is  too  tight  under  the 
arms  (in  the  arm-pits). 

Are  not  the  sleeves  too 
large? 

I like  my  trousers  to  be 
close  fitting. 


The  Rosenthal  Method, 


382 

I Toma  V.  vestidos  para 
reparar? 

El  pantalón  está  gastado 
abajo;  voltéelo  un  poco 
por  dentro. 

Póngale  cinta  a mi  sobre- 
todo. 

Póngale  botones  a mi 
chaleco. 

Quítele  esas  manchas. 

Una  Modista. 

Yo  quiero  me  haga  un 
vestido. 

Enséñeme  algunos  modelos. 

Déjeme  ver  unos  figurines 
(modelos  de  modas). 

Hágame  el  vestido  por 
este  estilo. 

Tome  mi  medida. 

El  frente. 

La  espalda. 

La  enagua. 

Yo  pondré  mis  propios 
materiales. 

I Cuántas  varas  se  nece- 
sitan? 

¿ Cuánto  costará  este  ves- 
tido completo? 

¿ Está  este  figurín  todavía 
de  moda? 

Yo  deseo  una  enagua  cor- 
ta (una  enagua  larga). 


Do  you  undertake  re- 
pairs? 

The  trousers  are  worn  at 
the  bottom;  turn  them 
in  a little. 

Rebind  my  overcoat  (put 
binding  on  my  over- 
coat) . 

Put  buttons  on  my  waist- 
coat. 

Remove  those  stains. 

A Dressmaker. 

I wish  to  have  a dress 
made. 

Show  me  some  patterns. 

Let  me  see  some  fashion- 
plates. 

Make  the  dress  from  this 
style. 

Take  rny  measure. 

The  front. 

The  back. 

The  skirt. 

I shall  supply  my  own 
materials. 

How  many  yards  will  it 
take? 

What  would  this  dress 
cost  complete? 

Is  this  pattern  still  fash- 
ionable? 

I wish  to  have  a short 
skirt  (a  long  skirt). 


The  Spanish  Language. 


3S3 


No  debe  entrar  muy  apre- 
tada; me  gusta  sen- 
tirme cómoda. 

La  guarnición  de  vestido. 

Ponga  botones  de  marfil 
en  este  vestido. 

Desearía  tener  el  vestido 
temprano  el  sábado. 

¿ Cuándo  puedo  venir  para 
probármelo? 

La  cintura.  1 

La  blusa.  / 

Póngase  la  blusa. 

Le  viene  bien  en  la  cin- ' 
tura. 

La  blusa  le  queda  muy 
bien. 

Alterar;  cambiar. 

Cambie  el  cuerpo,  no  me 
queda  bien. 

El  hombro. 

El  vestido  me  queda  mal 
en  los  hombros ; sír- 
vase cambiarlo. 

Las  mangas  están  muy 
angostas  (muy  an- 
chas, muy  largas; 
muy  cortas). 

Arrugar. 

La  manga  se  arruga  allí; 
sírvase  cambiarla. 

El  cuello  está  muy  bajo 
(kwél'-yó). 


It  must  not  fit  too 
tightly;  I like  to  feel 
comfortable. 

The  trimming. 

Put  ivory  buttons  on  this 
dress. 

I should  like  to  have  this 
dress  early  on  Satur- 
day. 

When  can  I call  to  try  it 
on? 

The  waist. 

Try  on  the  waist. 

It  fits  you  well  in  the 
waist. 

To  alter;  to  change. 

Alter  the  waist;  it  does 
not  fit. 

The  shoulder. 

The  dress  fits  badly  in  the 
shoulders;  please  alter 
it. 

The  sleeves  are  too  nar- 
row (too  wide;  too 
long;  too  short). 

To  wrinkle. 

The  sleeve  wrinkles  right 
there;  change  it,  pray. 

The  collar  is  too  low. 


The  Rosenthal  Method, 


3S4 

El  cuello  no  está  bastante 
alto. 

¿ Cuándo  estará  hecho  mi 
vestido? 

Estará  hecho  mañana  sin 
falta. 

El  Tocador. 

Vestirse. 

Él  se  está  vistiendo. 

¿ Qué  no  se  ha  vestido  V. 
todavía? 

¿ Qué  no  está  V.  listo  to- 
davía? 

Ella  se  está  cambiando  su 
vestido. 

Él  se  está  desvistiendo. 

El  gusto. 

Ella  se  viste  con  grandísi- 
mo gusto  (estilo). 

I Cree  Vd.  que  este  som- 
brero me  viene  bien? 

Este  sombrero  le  queda  a 
Vd.  muy  bien. 

El  color. 

Este  color  no  me  está  a 
mí  bien. 

La  cara. 

La  tez;  el  cutis. 

Delicado. 

Sonrosado. 

Claro. 

Pálido. 


The  collar  is  not  high 
enough. 

When  will  my  dress  be 
done? 

It  will  be  done  to-morrow 
without  fail. 

The  Toilet. 

To  dress. 

He  is  dressing. 

Aren’t  you  dressed  yet? 

Aren’t  you  ready  yet? 

She  is  changing  her  dress. 

He  is  undressing. 

The  taste. 

She  dresses  with  a great 
deal  of  taste  (of 
style). 

Do  you  think  this  hat  is 
becoming  to  me? 

This  hat  is  very  becoming 
to  you. 

The  color. 

This  color  is  not  becoming 
to  me. 

The  face. 

The  complexion. 

Delicate. 

Rosy. 

Light;  pale. 

Pale;  pallid. 


The  Spanish  Language. 


38s 


Ella  tiene  un  delicado 
color  sonrosado;  no 
puede  usar  un  color  tan 
subido. 

Este  color  está  muy  su- 
bido; este  es  el  pro- 
pio. 

Lavar. 

Quisiera  lavarme  las  ma- 
nos. 

Quisiera  lavarme  y acepi- 
llarme. 

Tráigame  agua,  jabón  y 
toallas  (tó-ál'-yás). 

I Hay  agua  en  mi  cuarto? 

Primero  que  todo  debo  la- 
varme. 

La  palangana. 

La  jarra  (^hárr'-rá). 

Una  pastilla  de  jabón. 

Una  esponja  (és-pon'- 
‘há). 

Una  toalla  (tó-ál'-yá). 

Secar. 

Me  estoy  secando  las  ma- 
nos. 

Séquese  Vd.  las  manos  con 
esta  toalla. 

Limpiarse  la  boca. 

Me  estoy  limpiando  la 
boca. 

El  diente;  los  dientes. 

Un  cepillo  de  dientes. 


She  has  a delicate,  rosy 
complexion;  she  can 
not  wear  such  a loud 
color. 

This  color  is  too  loud;  this 
is  the  right  one. 

To  Wash. 

I should  like  to  wash  my 
hands. 

I should  like  a wash  and 
brush  up. 

Bring  me  some  water, 
soap  and  towels. 

Is  there  any  water  in  my 
room? 

First  of  all  I must  have  a 
wash. 

The  wash-basin. 

The  pitcher. 

A cake  of  soap. 

A sponge. 

A towel. 

To  dry. 

I am  drying  my  hands. 

Dry  your  hands  with  this 
towel. 

To  clean  one’s  mouth. 

I am  cleaning  my  mouth. 

The  tooth;  the  teeth. 

A tooth-brush. 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


386 

Me  estoy  limpiando  los 
dientes. 

Un  cepillo  de  cabeza. 

Un  cepillo  para  las  uñas 
(óon'-yás). 

Él  está  peinándose. 

Un  peine. 

Un  batidor. 

Me  estoy  peinando  el  pelo 
{or  los  cabellos). 

La  raya. 

La  raya  está  derecha. 

La  raya  no  está  derecha. 

El  aceite. 

La  pomada. 

La  lima  (lé'-má). 

Me  estoy  limando  las 
uñas. 

El  polvo. 

El  polvo  de  tocador. 

Los  polvos  de  dientes. 

La  caja  de  polvo. 

La  mota  para  empolvarse. 
Ella  se  empolvó  la  cara. 
Bañarse;  tomar  im  baño. 

Él  está  bañándose;  él 
toma  un  baño. 
Afeitarse;  rasurarse. 
Siempre  me  rasuro  solo. 

El  Barbero. 

Sírvase  afeitarme. 

Quíteme  toda  la  barba. 


I am  brushing  my  teeth. 

A hair-brush. 

A nail-brush. 

He  is  combing  his  hair. 

A comb. 

A large  comb. 

I am  combing  my  hair. 

The  parting. 

The  parting  is  straight. 
The  parting  is  crooked. 
The  oil. 

The  pomatum. 

The  ñle. 

I am  filing  my  nails. 

The  powder. 

Toilet-powder. 

Tooth-powder. 

The  powder-box. 

The  powder-puff. 

She  powdered  her  face. 

To  bathe;  to  take  a bath 
He  is  bathing;  he  takes  a 
bath. 

To  shave. 

I always  shave  myself. 

The  Barber. 

Please  shave  me. 

Take  off  the  whole  of  my 
beard. 


The  Spanish  Language. 


387 


Las  patillas. 

La  barba. 

La  barba  entera. 

El  bigote. 

Mi  barba  es  muy  recia. 

Su  navaja  no  está  bastante 
afilada  (ná-vá'-‘há). 

No  tenemos  grandes  bar- 
berías en  Europa. 

Los  barberos  van  a los  do- 
micilios de  sus  parro- 
quianos. 

El  Peluquero. 

Quiero  que  se  me  corte 
los  cabellos  {or  el 
pelo). 

Corto  detrás,  algo  más 
largo  en  frente. 

Quite  solamente  un  poco; 
yo  estoy  perdiendo  mi 
pelo. 

Hágame  el  favor  de 
arreglarme  el  cabello. 

Parta  mi  pelo  por  en 
medio. 

Pártame  el  pelo  por  tm 
lado. 

Cepílleme  el  pelo. 

Sírvase  rizarme  el  pelo. 

Las  tijeras  (té-^ha'-rás). 

La  Ropa  Limpia. 

Sucio,  sucia. 


The  whiskers. 

The  beard. 

The  full-beard. 

The  moustache. 

My  beard  is  very  stub- 
born. 

Your  razor  is  not  sharp 
enough. 

We  haven’t  any  large  bar- 
ber-shops in  Europe. 

The  barbers  go  to  their 
customers’  houses. 

The  Hair-dresser. 

I wish  to  have  my  hair 
cut. 

Short  behind,  a little 
longer  in  front. 

Take  off  only  a little;  I 
am  losing  my  hair. 

Dress  my  hair,  please. 

Part  my  hair  in  the  mid- 
dle. 

Part  my  hair  on  the  side. 

Brush  myliair. 

Curl  my  hair,  please. 

The  scissors. 

Clean  Linen. 

Soiled. 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


388 

Mande  esta  ropa  a la 
lavandera. 

La  lista  está  ahí. 

¿ Cuándo  puede  Vd.  man- 
darla a casa? 

Debo  tener  la  ropa  para  el 
jueves. 

No  se  olvide  de  remendar 
las  camisas. 

El  almidón. 

Almidonar. 

Planchar. 

No  planche  tanto  mis 
cuellos. 

Artículos  de  Tocador 

Joyas  (‘ho'-yás). 

Diamantes  (dé-á-mán'- 
tés). 

La  perla;  las  perlas. 

El  anillo;  la  sortija. 

El  anillo  de  diamantes. 

Los  pendientes;  los  zar- 
cillos. 

Un  brazalete;  tma  pul- 
sera. 

Un  collar. 

Un  broche. 

El  reloj. 

Una  cadena. 

La  llave. 

Los  botones  de  camisa. 

Los  anteojos. 

Los  lentes. 


Send  these  clothes  to  the 
laundress. 

The  washing-list  is  there. 
When  can  you  send  it 
home? 

I must  have  the  washing 
by  Thursday. 

Do  not  forget  to  mend  the 
shirts. 

The  starch. 

To  starch. 

To  iron. 

Do  not  iron  my  collars  so 
stiff. 

Ornaments. 

Jewels. 

Diamonds. 

The  pearl;  the  pearls 
The  ring. 

The  diamond  ring. 

The  ear-rings. 

A bracelet. 

A necklace. 

A brooch. 

The  watch. 

A chain. 

The  key. 

The  studs. 

The  spectacles. 

The  eye-glasses. 


The  Spanish  Language. 


389 


El  binóculo. 

El  bastón. 

Una  sombrilla;  un  para- 
sol. 

Un  paraguas. 

El  abanico. 

El  Tiempo. 

La  hora. 

El  compás. 

Seguir  el  tiempo. 

Perder  el  tiempo. 

Tres  veces. 

Otra  vez;  otra  vuelta. 

En  ese  tiempo. 

Al  presente. 

Al  mismo  tiempo. 

Por  largo  tiempo;  por 
mucho  tiempo. 

No  le  he  visto  a Vd.  por 
mucho  tiempo. 

En  buen  tiempo. 

En  mis  tiempos. 

Por  algún  tiempo. 

De  tiempo  en  tiempo. 

Venir  a tiempo. 

Eso  viene  a buen  tiempo. 

I Llegaremos  a tiempo?  1 
¿ Estaremos  a tiempo?  / 

I A qué  hora  sale  el  tren 
para  Querétaro? 


The  opera-glasses. 

The  cañe. 

A parasol. 

An  umbrella. 

The  fan. 

The  Time. 

The  time;  the  hour. 

The  time  (in  music). 

To  keep  time. 

To  get  out  of  time. 

Three  times. 

Another  time,  again. 

At  that  time. 

At  the  present  time. 

At  the  same  time. 

For  a long  time. 

I have  not  seen  you  for  a 
long  time. 

In  good  time. 

In  my  time. 

For  some  time. 

From  time  to  time. 

To  come  in  time. 

That  comes  just  at  the 
right  time. 

Shall  we  be  in  time? 

At  what  time  does  the 
train  start  for  Quere- 
taro? 


390 


The  Rosenthal  Method, 


¿ Estamos  a tiempo  para 
el  tren? 

¿ Dónde  tendré  tiempo  de 
comer  algo? 

¿ Tenemos  tiempo  para 
ello? 

¿ Tiene  Vd.  tiempo  de 
acompañarme? 

La  Hora. 

¿ Qué  hora  es? 

¿ Puede  V.  decirme  qué 
hora  es? 

No  puedo  decirselo  exac- 
tamente. 

¿ Sabe  V.  qué  hora  es? — 
No  lo  sé. 

Es  la  una. 

Es  la  una  y cuarto. 

Es  la  una  y media. 

Son  las  dos  menos  cuarto. 

Son  las  dos  menos  veinte 
y cinco  minutos. 

Son  las  dos  en  punto. 

Son  cerca  de  las  cinco. 

Van  a dar  las  tres.  1 

Pronto  darán  las  tres.  / 

Han  dado  las  ocho. 

¿ Qué  hora  está  dando? — 
Las  once. 

¿ Qué  hora  podrá  ser? — 
Acaban  de  dar  las 
siete. 


Are  we  in  time  for  the 
train? 

Where  shall  I have  time 
to  eat  something? 

Have  we  (got)  time  for 
it? 

Have  you  time  to  accom- 
pany me? 

The  Time;  The  Hour. 

What  o’clock  is  it?  (What 
time  is  it)? 

Can  you  tell  me  what  time 
it  is? 

I cannot  tell  you  pre- 
cisely. 

Do  you  know  what  time  it 
is? — No,  I don’t. 

It  is  one  o’clock. 

It  is  a quarter  past  one. 

It  is  half  past  one. 

It  is  a quarter  to  two. 

It  is  twenty-five  minutes 
to  two. 

It  is  precisely  two  o’clock. 

It  is  about  five. 

It  is  just  going  to  strike 
three. 

It  has  struck  eight. 

What  time  is  it  striking? 
— Eleven. 

What  o’clock  may  it  be? 
— It  just  struck 


seven. 


The  Spanish  Language. 


391 


Hágame  el  favor  de  decir- 
me que  hora  es.  Creo 
que  mi  reloj  está 
atrasado  (adelanta- 
do). 

División  del  Tiempo. 

Hoy. 

Mañana. 

Pasado  mañana. 

Ayer. 

Anteayer.  "1 
Antes'de  ayer.  / 

Mañana  por  la  mañana. 
Mañana  en  la  tarde. 
Anoche. 

Esta  semana. 

La  semana  pasada. 

La  semana  que  entra. 

Por  una  semana. 

En  una  semana. 

De  mañana  en  ocho  días. 
Quince  días.  \ 

Una  quincena.  J 
Un  mes. 

Un  año. 

Un  siglo. 

El  año  pasado. 

El  año  que  viene. 

El  principio. 

El  medio. 

El  fin. 


Have  the  kindness  to  tell 
me  what  time  it  is.  I 
think  my  watch  is 
slow  (fast). 

Division  of  Time. 

To-day. 

To-morrow. 

The  day  after  to-morrow. 
Yesterday. 

The  day  before  yesterday. 

To-morrow  morning. 
To-morrow  afternoon. 

Last  night. 

This  week. 

Last  week. 

Next  week. 

For  a week. 

In  a week. 

A week  from  to-morrow. 

A fortnight. 

A month. 

A year. 

A century. 

Last  year. 

Next  year. 

The  beginning. 

The  middle. 

The  end. 


rVJAhi*:  ■ 


ROSENTHAL’S 

COMMON-SENSE  METHOD 


PRACTICAL  LINOUISTRY 

THE 

Spanish  Language 

BY 

DR.  RICHARD  S.  ROSENTHAL 

Author  of  the  Meisterschaft  System,  etc.,  etc. 


Haulenbeek  Corrected  Edition 
Revised  1917 


IN  TEN  PARTS 


NEW  YORK  : : LONDON 
The  International  College  of  Languages 


COPYRIGHT,  1905, 

BY 

FHE  INTERNATIONAL  COLLEGE  OF  LANGUAGES. 
Entered  at 

Stationers^  Hall,  London,  Eng, 


FRENCH.  GERMAN, 
SPANISHor  ITALIAN 


q To  S P E A K it,  to  under- 
stand it,  to  read  it,  to  write  it. 
there  is  but  one  best  way. 


^ You  must  hear  it  SPOKEN 
correctly,  over  and  over,  till 
your  EAR  knows  it. 


You  must  see  it  printed  cor- 
rectly till  your  eye  knows  it. 


^ You  must  T A E K it  and 
write  it. 


^ All  this  can  be  done  best  by 
the 


Language-Phone  Method 


In  connection  with  Dr.  Rosenthal’s  Common 
Sense  Method  of  Practical  Linguistry 


q With  this  method  you  buy  a native  professor  outright.  You  own  him 
He  SPEAKS  as  you  choose,  slowly  or  quickly ; when  you  choose,  night 
or  day ; for  a few  minutes  or  hours  at  a time. 

^ Any  one  can  learn  a foreign  language  who  HEARS  it  SPOKEN  often 
enough ; and  by  this  method  you  can  HEAR  it  as  often  as  you  like. 
The  method  has  been  recommended  by  well-known  members  of  the 
faculties  of  the  following  universities  and  colleges:  Yale,  Celumbia, 
Fordham,  Brown,  Harvard,  Pennsylvania,  Boston,  Princeton,  Cornell, 
Syracuse,  Manhattan,  Johns  Hopkins,  Virginia,  Colorado,  Michigan, 
Chicago,  Minnesota,  De  La  Salle,  St.  Josephs,  St.  Francis  Xavier. 

We  ask  you  to  investigate  this  marvelous  system^  and  read  what  its 
users  say.  Mail  Inquiry  Coupon  and  it  will  bring  you  booklet^ 
explanatory  literature  and  facsimile  letters  from  men  who  know. 


Please  mail  to  me  full  particulars  concerning  the  Language- 
Phone  Method  for  Acquiring  French,  German,  Spanish  or  Italian. 

NAME  

POST  OFFICE 

STATE 


THR  l^ANGUAGK  PHONE  METHOD 

223  Hess  Building,  354  Fourth  Avenue,  New  York 


iV1 

r/jb 


111:1:/,!  V . 
iirin'iM'n'M  í^íí'  '^; 


THE  SPANISH  LANGUAGE. 

X. 

THE  SPANISH  GRAMMAR. 


fe:: 

I f ' 


'■'^15 


The  Spanish  Language, 


393 


SPANISH  ALPHABET 


a,  b,  c,  ch,  d,  e,  f,  g,  h,  i,  j,  k,  1, 11,  m,  n,  ñ,  o,  p,  q,  r,  rr,  s,  t,  u,  v,  x,  y,  z 


a 

más 

more 

like  *‘a*’  in  ah 

hablar 

to  speak 

U tt  it 

b 

beber 

to  drink 

like  bv. 

escribir 

to  write 

H n 

c 

casa 

house 

hard 

carcajadas 

laugh 

decir 

to  say- 

soft 

entonces 

then 

It 

ch 

noche 

night 

always  like  “tch** 

mucho 

much 

It  tt  tt 

chico 

little 

tt  tt  It 

d 

marido 

husband 

always  soft,  sometimes  silent 

verdad 

truth 

« a 

usted 

you 

*6  tt 

e 

médico 

doctor 

long 

placer 

pleasure 

tt 

triste 

sad 

short 

f 

fábula 

fable 

as  in  English 

jefe 

chief 

tt  tt  tt 

g 

lugar 

place 

hard 

gala 

gala 

tt 

guerra 

war 

tt 

lengua 

tongue 

combined  with  ua 

antigüedad 

antiquity 

úe 

general 

general 

guttural 

gitano 

gypsy 

tt 

h 

hacer 

to  do 

silent 

hueco 

hollow 

slightly  pronounced 

i 

sí 

yes 

like  “ee” 

infirmar 

to  weaken 

tt  tt 

Copyright,  190S,  by  The  International  College  of  Languages. 
Entered  at  Stationers’  Hall,  London,  Eng. 


394 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


i 

mujer 

woman 

guttural 

hijo 

son 

14 

José 

Joseph 

U 

k 

kilo 

kilo 

as  in  English 

1 

alma 

soul 

It  it  it 

lana 

wool 

a ii  n 

U 

llamar 

to  call 

liquid  sound 

calle 

street 

ii  it 

m 

mundo 

world 

as  in  English 

mamá 

mamma 

it  ii  it 

n 

nuevo 

new 

it  it  it 

uno 

one 

it  it  it 

ñ 

mañana 

to-morrow 

as  *‘ni”  in  onion 

señora 

lady 

ii  it  it  it 

0 

otorgar 

furnish 

long 

otro 

other 

por 

for 

tt 

nación 

nation 

short 

P 

punto 

point 

as  in  English 

popular 

popular 

it  it  it 

q 

quinto 

fifth 

like  “k’" 

por  qué 

why 

ii  it 

r 

quiero 

I will 

soft;  not  rolled 

rama 

branch 

it  it  a 

error 

error 

tt  tt  tt 

s 

sesos 

brains 

sibilant 

susto 

fright 

it 

t 

tío 

uncle 

as  in  English 

virtud 

virtue 

it  it  it 

u 

único 

only 

like  English  “00” 

muñeca 

doll 

it  a it 

V 

vale 

farewell 

as  in  English 

X 

exacto 

exact 

like  English  “ks'* 

Xefxes 

Xerxes 

it  a tt 

y 

yo 

I 

consonant 

leyes 

laws 

vowel 

z 

zapatos 

shoes 

like  English  “th’* 

azúcar 

sugar 

it  it  it 

Copyright,  1905,  by  The  International  College  of  Languages. 
Entered  at  Stationers’  Hall,  London,  Eng. 


The  Spanish  Language 

COMBINATIONS 


395 


ai 

baile 

dance 

ay 

ay! 

alas! 

au 

causa 

cause 

laudatorio 

commendatory 

ea 

línea 

line 

ei 

reina 

queen 

ey 

rey 

king 

io 

idioma 

language 

eu 

Teutón 

Teuton 

ia 

noticia 

notice 

ie 

siento 

I regret 

io 

estudio 

study 

iu 

ciudad 

city 

oi 

oiga 

hear 

oy 

hoy 

to-day 

ua 

lengua 

language 

ue 

buena 

good 

ui 

cuidado 

care 

uy 

muy 

very 

uo 

antiguo 

ancient 

iai 

cambiáis 

you  changed 

eis 

cambiéis 

that  you  changed 

uay 

guay! 

Oh! 

uey 

buey 

ox 

Copyright,  1905,  by  The  International  College  of  Languages. 
Entered  at  Stationers’  Hall,  London,  Eng. 


396 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


The  Articles. 

There  are  two  articles:  the  definite  el,  the,  for  the 
masculine,  la,  the,  for  the  feminine  form,  and  the  in- 
definite un,  a,  an  (masculine),  una,  a,  an  (feminine). 
Declension  of  the  Articles. 

Masculine.  Feminine. 


Singular. 

Plural. 

Singular. 

Plural. 

Nom. 

el. 

los. 

la. 

las. 

the. 

Gen. 

del. 

de  los. 

de  la. 

de  las. 

of  the,  or  frotn  the. 

Dat. 

al. 

a los. 

a la. 

a las. 

to  the,  or  at  the. 

Acc. 

el. 

los. 

la. 

las, 

the. 

Masculine. 

Feminine. 

Nom. 

un. 

una. 

a. 

Gen. 

de  un. 

. 

de  una. 

of  a,  or  from  a. 

Dat. 

a un. 

a una 

to,  or  at  a. 

Acc. 

un. 

una. 

a. 

Remarks  on  the  Article. 


I.  There  are  three  genders  in  the  Spanish  language: 
masculine,  feminine,  and  neuter.  The  definite  article  has 
in  the  singular  a distinct  form  for  each  gender:  mascu- 
line, el;  feminine  la;  neuter,  lo. 

El  padre,  the  father.  La  madre,  the  mother.  Lo  bueno,  the  good. 

Remarks — i.  The  neuter  gender  is  applicable  only  to  adjectives 
taken  in  an  unlimited  or  indefinite  sense,  as:  lo  bueno,  the  good  or 
that  which  is  good;  lo  peor,  the  worst  or  what  is  worsts  etc. 

This  neuter  gender,  which  has  no  plural,  is  therefore  never  applied 
to  persons  or  things,  but  only  to  adjectives  taken  substantively, 
and  to  substantives  taken  adjectively:  Todo  era  grande  en  San 

Luis,  lo  rey,  lo  santo,  lo  capitán,  everything  was  great  in  St.  Luis 
{Louis  IX)y  the  king,  the  saint y the  captain. 

2.  The  neuter  article  is  not  placed  indifferently  before  all  ad- 
jectives, taken  substantively.  Thus,  in  the  following  sentences: 
El  malo  será  castigado,  the  wicked  shall  he  punished;  el  azul  de  este 
paño  es  demasiado  oscuro,  the  blue  of  this  cloth  is  too  dark; — the  neuter 
article  lo,  would  not  be  used,  because  these  adjectives  are  taken 
substantively  and  are  sufficiently  determinate.  It  is  evident  that 
in  the  first  sentence,  the  word  hombre,  man^  is  understood,  before 
malo,  wicked;  and  in  the  second  sentence,  the  word  color,  color, 
before  azul,  blue. 


The  Spanish  Language, 


397 


2.  Although  the  article  el  belongs  only  to  the  mas- 
culine gender,  it  may  be  placed,  for  the  sake  of  euphony, 
before  feminine  nouns  beginning  with  a long  a,  that  is 
to  say,  whenever  the  stress  of  voice  rests  on  that  initial 
letter:  el  agua,  the  water;  el  alma,  the  soul;  el  ala,  the 
wing;  el  águila,  the  eagle;  el  ave,  the  bird.  This  change 
of  article  is,  however,  only  allowed  in  the  singular,  and  the 
plural  is  las  aguas,  las  almas,  las  alas,  etc. 

Adjectives  accompanying  the  singular  of  such  nouns 
must  be  placed  in  the  feminine:  el  agua  está  fría,  the  water 
is  cold. 

The  same  rules  apply  to  words  beginning  with  an  h, 
as:  el  hacha  es  pesada,  the  axe  is  heavy;  las  hachas,  the 
axes,  etc. 

Nouns  like  América,  America;  alegría,  habitación, 
habitation,  etc.,  take  the  feminine  article  la,  because  the 
first  a is  not  accented:  La  América,  la  habitación,  etc. 

3.  The  indefinite  article  a,  an,  or  the  numeral  one,  is 
rendered  by  un  before  a masculine  noun  (the  o of  uno 
being  dropped  before  a noun),  and  by  una  before  a femi- 
nine noun. 

Un  hermano,  a brother,  Una  hermana,  a sister, 

Un  libro,  a book,  Una  mesa,  a table, 

4.  The  definite  article  should  always  be  repeated  before 
the  nouns  it  defines: 

El  padre  y la  madre.  The  father  and  mother. 

La  casa  y el  jardín.  The  house  and  garden, 

El  buen  lápiz  y la  buena  pluma,  The  good  pencil  and  pen, 

5.  The  definite  article  is  used  in  Spanish  in  place  of 
the  possessive  pronoun  in  English  whenever  the  sense 
of  the  sentence  indicates  who  the  possessor  is.  This  is 
especially  the  case  when  parts  of  the  body  are  mentioned: 


3Q8 


The  Rosenthal  Method, 


Tengo  algo  en  el  ojo^ 

I Qué  tiene  V.  en  la  mano? 
Deme  V.  la  mano, 

El  tiene  su  sombrero  en  la  mano, 
Este  soldado  ha  perdido  el  brazo, 


I have  something  in  my  eye. 
What  have  you  in  your  hand? 
Give  me  your  hand. 

He  has  his  hat  in  his  hand. 
This  soldier  has  lost  his  arm. 


Peculiarities  in  the  Use  of  the  Definite  Article. 

The  Definite  Article  is  very  often  used  in  Spanish: 


I.  Before  masculine  and  feminine  geographical  names: 


La  Habana  es  más  grande  que 
Veracruz, 

La  India  tiene  altas  montañas. 
El  Canada  está  al  Norte  de  los 
Estados  Unidos  de  América, 
La  Guaira  es  una  ciudad. 

Los  Alpes  y los  Pirineos  son  muy 
altos. 

El  Vesuvio  es  un  volcan. 

El  Danubio  es  un  rio  grande. 


Havana  is  larger  than  Ver  a- Cruz. 

India  has  lofty  mountains. 
Canada  is  north  of  the  United 
States  of  America. 

Guaira  is  a city. 

The  Alps  and  the  Pyrenees  are 
very  high. 

Vesuvius  is  a volcano. 

The  Danube  is  a large  river. 


2.  Before  names  of  days  and  seasons: 


El  domingo  es  un  día  de  des- 
canso. 

El  sábado  es  el  último  día  de  la 
semana. 

El  invierno  es  muy  frío  en  este 
país, 

3.  Beiore  abstract  nouns: 

La  juventud  es  imprudente, 

La  virtud  es  amable. 

La  esperanza  sostiene  al  hombre. 


Sunday  is  a day  of  rest. 

Saturday  is  the  last  day  of  the 
week. 

Winter  is  very  cold  in  this  coun- 
try. 


Youth  is  imprudent. 
Virtue  is  amiable. 
Hope  sustains  man. 


4.  Before  names  of  metals,  colors,  substances,  elements, 
dignities,  systems  of  doctrine,  arts,  and  sciences: 

El  oro  y el  plomo  son  metales.  Gold  and  lead  are  metals. 

El  bianco  y el  negro  son  colores,  White  and  black  are  colors. 


The  Spanish  Language, 


399 


El  fuego  y el  agua  son  elementos, 
La  geografía  es  la  descripción  de 
la  tierra, 

El  azúcar  es  dulce. 

La  música  y la  danza  son  her- 
manas. 

El  catolicismo  y el  protestan- 
tismo, 

5.  Before  Adjectives,  or 
substantively: 

Los  ricos  y los  pobres. 

El  comer  y el  beber. 

El  sí  y el  no. 

El  pro  y el  contra. 

El  bien  y el  mal. 


Fire  and  water  are  elements. 
Geography  is  the  description  of 
the  earth. 

Sugar  is  sweet. 

Music  and  dancing  are  sisters. 
Catholicism  and  Protestantism, 

other  parts  of  speech,  used 

The  rich  and  the  poor. 

Eating  and  drinking. 

Yes  and  no. 

Pro  and  con. 

Good  and  evil. 


6.  Before  nouns  representing  a whole  species  of  ob- 
jects, and  before  every  noun  taken  in  a general  sense: 


El  hombre  es  mortal. 

La  vida  es  corta. 

El  tiempo  es  precioso. 

Los  perros  son  fieles. 

Los  sombreros  redondos  son  de 
moda. 

Las  flores  son  el  adorno  de  la 
naturaleza. 


Man  is  mortal, 

Life  is  short. 

Time  is  precious. 

Dogs  are  faithful. 

Round  hats  are  in  fashion. 

Flowers  are  the  ornament  of  na- 
ture. 


7.  Before  titles  prefixed  to  names: 

El  emperador  Don  Pedro,  Emperor  Don  Pedro. 

El  rey  Luis  Catorce,  King  Louis  the  Fourteenth. 

El  presidente  Lincoln,  President  Lincoln. 

El  general  Washington,  General  Washington. 

El  señor  Fernández,  Mr.  Fernandez. 

8.  Before  proper  names  preceded  by  adjectives: 

El  pequeño  Juan,  Little  John. 

La  vieja  María,  Old  Mary. 

g.  Before  nouns  specifying  quantity  or  measure: 

Tres  pesos  la  libra.  Three  dollars  a pound. 

Un  peso  la  vara.  One  dollar  a yard. 

10.  Before  the  four  Cardinal  Points  of  the  compass: 


400 


The  Rosenthal  Method, 


El  Norte,  North, 

El  Sur,  sud  or  mediodía.  South, 

El  Este,  or  Oriente,  East. 

El  Oeste,  Poniente  or  Occidente,  West. 


II.  The  definite  article  may  also  be  used  before  a 
whole  sentence,  when  the  latter  serves  as  the  subject  of 
another  sentence: 


Mucho  me  alegra  el  que  venga  V.,  I am  very  glad  that  you  come. 

12.  When  several  noims  follow  each  other,  the  article 
is  placed  before  every  one  of  them,  to  give  more  expression 
to  each  one,  and  when  they  are  of  different  genders. 

Cuando  la  justicia,  la  fidelidad.  When  justice ^ fidelity  ^ honor ^ com- 

el  honor,  la  compasión,  la  passion^  modesty^  and  all 

vergüenza,  y todos  los  senti-  feelings  which  can  move  a 

mientos  que  pueden  mover  generous  hearty  etc. 

un  corazón  generoso,  etc. 

13.  It  may  happen  that  the  article  is  separated  from 
its  noun  by  several  other  words,  as  in  the  following  sen- 
tences: 


La  nunca  bastante  ponderada  The  never  sufficiently  praised  vir- 
virtud,  tue. 

El  sobrado  paseo.  Excessive  walking. 

14.  The  definite  article  is  placed  before  titles  or  other 
designations  preceding  proper  names: 

El  Exmo.  (excelentísimo)  señor  His  Excellency  the  duke  of  ,,  , 
duque  de  . . . 

If  the  word  su  precedes  the  honorific  designation,  the 
article  is  placed  before  the  title. 

15.  In  describing  the  characteristic  features  of  persons 
or  things,  the  definite  article  is  also  used: 

Carlos  tiene  los  ojos  negros.  Charles  has  black  eyes. 

Luis  tiene  la  nariz  grande,  Lewis  has  a large  nose. 


Exceptions. 

The  definite  article  (and  in  some  cases,  the  indefinite 
article)  is  omitted: 


The  Spanish  Language, 


401 


I.  When  the  name  of  the  country  figures  as  the  place 
of  origin,  or  is  preceded  by  a prepOvSition: 


He  recibido  una  carta  de  Francia, 

Mi  hermano  está  en  Alemania, 
La  reina  de  Inglaterra  es  viuda. 
Este  vino  es  de  España, 


I have  received  a letter  from 
France. 

My  brother  is  in  Germany. 

The  queen  of  England  is  a widow. 
This  wine  is  from  Spain. 


2,  Before  names  of  countries  the  capital  of  which  has 
the  same  name  as  the  country  itself: 

Nápoles,  Naples.  Méjico,  Mexico. 


. Before  a few  locutions,  as: 


Voy  a casa — a misa — a palacio, 
etc., 

Voy  a casa  de  mi  amigo, 

4.  With  a substantive  in 
substantive: 

Juan,  hermano  de  Enrique, 

Paris,  capital  de  Francia, 
Alejandro,  emperador  de  Rusia, 
Hablamos  de  Pedro,  hombre  de 
gran  talento, 


I am  going  home — to  mass — to 
the  palace^  etc. 

I am  going  to  my  friend's  house. 

apposition  with  a preceding 

JohUf  the  brother  of  Henry. 

Paris f the  capital  of  France. 
Alexander^  the  emperor  of  Russia, 
We  speak  of  Peter , a man  of  great 
talent. 


5.  Before  titles  of  books,  headings  of  chapters,  etc. 

Vida  de  Cervantes,  The  Life  of  Cervantes. 

Historia  de  Roma,  A History  of  Rome. 

Capítulo  tercero.  Third  Chapter. 

6.  For  the  use  of  the  article  with  the  relative  pronoun 
and  the  Infinitive  compare  the  respective  chapters. 


NOUNS. 

Spanish  nouns  have  two  genders, — masculine  and 
feminine. 

The  gender  of  a noun  may  be  determined  partly  by  its 
signification,  and  partly  by  its  ending. 

Nouns  ending  in  0 are  generally  masculine,  and  those 
ending  in  a,  feminine  (except  those  which  designate  males). 
Compare  the  examples  given. 


402 


The  Rosenthal  Method, 


Plural  of  Nouns. 


Nouns  ending  in  an  unaccented  vowel  form  their 


Plural  by  adding  s,  as: 

El  padre, 

the  father. 

los  padres. 

the  fathers. 

el  niño, 

the  child. 

los  niños. 

the  children. 

la  tía. 

the  aunt. 

las  tías. 

the  aunts. 

2.  Nouns  ending  in  a consonant,  or  : 

in  an  accented 

vowel  (except  e)  form  their  plural  by  adding  es,  as: 

el  general. 

the  general. 

los  generales. 

the  generals. 

la  mujer. 

the  woman. 

las  mujeres. 

the  women. 

el  pan. 

the  bread. 

los  panes. 

theloaves  of  bread. 

la  ñor. 

the  flower. 

las  flores. 

the  flowers. 

el  tisú. 

the  tissue. 

los  tisúes, 

the  tissues. 

el  rubí. 

the  ruby. 

los  rubíes. 

the  rubies. 

3.  Nouns  ending  in  s remain  unchanged,  provided  their 

last  syllable  is  short. 

If  the  last  syllable  is  long  they  add  es. 

la  crisis. 

the  crisis. 

las  crisis. 

the  crisis. 

el  jueves. 

Thursday. 

los  jueves. 

on  Thursdays.* 

el  martes. 

Tuesday. 

los  martes, 

on  Tuesdays. 

el  francés. 

the  Frenchman. 

los  franceses. 

the  Frenchmen. 

el  inglés. 

the  Englishman. 

los  ingleses. 

the  Englishmen. 

4.  Nouns  ending  in  z change  the  same 

into  c and  add 

es  in  the  plural,  as: 

el  juez, 

the  judge. 

los  jueces. 

the  judges. 

la  voz. 

- the  voice. 

las  voces. 

the  voices. 

la  paz. 

the  peace. 

las  paces,  the 

conditions  of  peace. 

la  luz. 

the  light. 

las  luces, 

the  lights 

5.  Words  ending  in  y add  es,  as: 

el  rey. 

the  king. 

los  reyes. 

the  kings. 

el  buey. 

the  ox. 

los  bueyes. 

the  oxen. 

la  ley, 

the  law. 

las  leyes. 

the  laws. 

The  Spanish  Language, 


403 


6.  Forms  of  salutation  are  used  in  the  plural  only: 

buenos  días,  good  day, 

buenas  tardes,  good  evening, 

buenas  noches,  good  night,  ^ 


The  Gender  of  Nouns. 

The  gender  of  nouns  is  generally  determined  by  their 
endings. 

1.  Nouns  ending  in  0 are  masculine. 

Except  mano,  hand;  and  nao,  vessel, 

2.  Notms  ending  in  a are  generally  feminine. 

Those  expressing  rank,  titles  and  professions,  as  papa, 
pope;  profeta,  prophet,  etc.,  and  those  ending  in  ma 
derived  from  the  Greek,  as  clima,  climate;  idioma,  idiom; 
poema,  poem;  dilema,  dilemma;  diploma,  diploma;  dogma, 
dogma,  etc.,  are,  however,  of  the  masculine  gender. 

A few  of  these  words  may  be  used  either  as  masculine 
or  as  feminine. 

3.  Nouns  ending  in  cion  or  tion  are  of  the  feminine 
gender,  as  cuestión,  question;  meditación,  meditation. 

These  words  are  the  same  in  both  languages,  except 
that  in  Spanish,  the  t of  the  termination  -tion  of  the 
English  word  is  changed  into  a c whenever  it  has  the  sound 
of  sh. 

4.  Nouns  ending  in  Spanish  in  tad  or  dad, — termi- 
nations which  correspond  to  the  Latin  tas,  and  to  the 
English  ty, — are  of  the  feminine  gender,  as  humanidad, 
humanity;  puridad,  purity;  adversidad,  adversity. 

General  Rule  for  Latin  Scholars. — Nouns  derived 
from  the  Latin  preserve  in  Spanish  the  same  gender  they 
have  in  Latin,  with  the  exception  that  those  which  are 
neuter  in  Latin  are  masculine  in  Spanish. 


404 


The  Rosenthal  Method, 


5.  Compound  nouns  take  the  gender  of  the  second 
word  if  the  same  is  in  the  singular.  Thus,  the  words 
aguamiel,  honey  and  water;  contrahaz,  wrong  side,  are 
feminine;  whilst  archilaud,  a kind  of  lute;  and  portafusil, 
gun-belt,  are  masculine. 

6.  Compound  words  of  which  the  second  word  is  in 
the  plural  are  always  masculine,  even  if  the  second  word 
is  feminine,  as:  cortaplumas,  pen-knife;  mondadientes, 
tooth-pick;  sacabotas,  boot-jack. 

Observations  on  other  Terminations. — Nouns  hav- 
ing other  terminations  are  subject  to  so  many  exceptions 
that  it  is  impossible  to  establish  satisfactory  rules  in 
regard  to  them. 

Thus,  mar,  sea,  is  of  both  genders,  but  words  com- 
potmded  with  mar  are  always  feminine,  as  bajamar, 
low-tide;  pleamar,  high-tide.  Mar,  joined  to  a proper 
noun,  should  be  in  the  masculine,  as  el  mar  Báltico, 
the  Baltic  sea. 

Augmentative  and  Diminutive  Nouns  {and  Adjectives). 

1.  The  Spanish  language  has  many  Diminutives  and 
Augmentatives. 

2.  The  Diminutives  serve  to  decrease  or  spften  the 
signification  of  the  word  from  which  they  are  derived. 

Those  most  in  use  end  in  ico,  illo,  cilio,  ito,  cito,  uelo, 
ejo,  and  zuelo,  for  the  masculine,  as:  hombrecico,  hom- 
brecillo, hombrecito,  hombrezuelo,  little  man;  and  in  ica, 
ilia,  cilia,  ita,  cita,  zuda,  eta,  eja,  for  the  feminine,  as: 
muj3rcilla,  mujercita,  mujercica,  mujerzuela,  little  wo- 
man, 

a.  Diminutives  ending  in  zuelo  always  denote  con- 
tempt or  irony. 


The  Spanish  Language, 


405 


b.  Diminutives  ending  in  cilio  and  illo  often  express 
contempt,  pity,  or  ugliness;  while  those  in  ito  generally 
express  affection,  gentleness,  or  beauty. 

Mujercilla,  Contemptible  little  woman, 

Pobrecillo,  Poor  little  fellow. 

Hijito  mío,  My  dear  little  son. 

Pobrecito,  Poor  good  little  fellow. 

c.  The  Diminutives  ito,  ita,  may  be  used  with  differ- 
ent parts  of  speech  to  give  a special  expression  to  the 
words: 

Vengo  solito,  I come  quite  alone. 

d.  Diminutives  in  eto,  ejo,  etc.,  are  comparatively 
little  used. 

3.  The  Augmentatives  serve  to  increase  the  significa- 
tion of  the  words  from  which  they  are  derived.  They  end 
in:  onj  achbn^  azo,  onazo,  or  ote  for  the  masculine;  and  in: 
ona,  azaj  onaza,  or  ota  for  the  feminine,  as: 

Hombrón,  hombrachón,  hombronazo  (from  hombre,  man)^  hig^ 
strong  man. 

Grandón,  grandote,  grandazo,  grandonazo  (from  grande,  large)^ 
very  large. 

Mujerona,  mujeraza,  mujeronaza  (from  mujer,  woman) y large, 
strong  woman. 

a.  There  are  many  words,  however,  ending  in  azo, 
which  express  an  action,  motion,  or  result,  and  are, 
therefore,  not  augmentatives: 

Pusil,  rifle,  gun.  fusilazo,  a shot  from  a rifle? 

Pistola,  pistol.  pistoletazo,  a shot  from  a pistol. 

Cañón,  gun.  cañonazo,  a shot  from  a gun. 

4.  Formation  of  Diminutives  and  Augmentatives. 
— Words  ending  in  o or  a drop  the  last  letter  and 
add  ito,  ita;  ico,  ica;  illo,  ilia;  according  to  their  gender: 
Herman-ito,  herman-ico,  herman-illo,  little  brother;  from  hermano, 

brother. 

Cas-ita,  cas-ica,  cas-illa,  little  house;  from  casa,  house. 


4o6 


The  Rosenthal  Method, 


Note. — ^Words  ending  in  go,  besides  dropping  the  o, 
insert  u after  the  g to  preserve  the  soft  sound  of  this 
letter: 

Un  amigo,  a friend.  un  amiguito,  a little  friend. 

Those  ending  in  co  change  the  c into  qu  to  preserve 
the  hard  sound  of  the  c : 

Un  barco,  a ship.  un  barquito,  a little  ship. 

A few  words  ending  in  o and  a,  after  dropping  the  last 
letter,  add,  however,  the  termination  ecico,  ecillo,  etc. 
Un  huevo,  an  egg.  un  huevecillo,  a small  egg. 

Una  mano,  a hand.  una  manecita,  a small  hand. 


5.  Monosyllables  ending  with  a consonant  form  their 
diminutive  by  adding  ecito,  ecico,  ecillo,  or  ezuelo: 


Una  flor, 
Una  cruz, 
Un  pez, 
Un  rey. 


a flower; 
a cross; 
a fish; 
a king; 


una  florecita, 
una  crucecita, 
un  pececito, 
un  reyezuelo. 


a little  flower, 
a little  cross.  , 
a little  fish, 
a king  {with  a 
small  kingdom). 


Note. — Cruz  and  pez  change  the  final  z into  c. 


6.  Words  of  two  or  more  syllables  ending  with  a con- 
sonant form  their  diminutive  by  adding  ito,  ico,  illo, 
ejo: 

Un  papel,  a paper.  un  papelito,  a small  paper. 

Un  reloj,  a watch.  un  relojito,  a small  watch. 


7.  Words  of  two  syllables  ending  with  an  e,  and 
those  of  several  syllables  ending  with  an  n or  a z,  add 
cito,  cico,  cilio,  or  zuelo: 


Un  sastre, 
Una  nube, 
Un  capitán, 
Un  autor, 

Una  mujer. 


a tailor; 
a cloud; 
a captain; 
an  author; 

a woman; 


un  sastrecillo, 
una  nubecilla, 
un  capitancillo, 
un  autorzuelo, 

una  mujercita. 


a little  tailor, 
a little  cloud, 
a little  captain, 
an  insignificant 
author. 

a little  woman. 


The  Spanish  Language, 


407 


Exceptions. — ^Juanito,  from  Juan,  John;  volcanejo, 
from  volcán,  volcano;  and  all  words  ending  in  in,  form 
an  exception  to  this  rule,  the  latter  adding  ito,  etc. 
Thus: 

Jardín,  garden,  serafín,  seraph. 

Rocín,  jade, 

form  in  the  diminutive  jardinito,  rocinito,  and  serafinito. 
Jardincito  is,  however,  often  used. 

8.  Diminutives  may  also  be  decreased  in  the  following 
way: 

From  chico,  small;  chiquillo  or  chiquito,  chiquitillo,  chiquitito, 
chiquituelo,  chiquitilluelo,  chiquitillito,  chiquirritín,  chiquirritito, 
chiquirritillo,  chiquirrituelo,  etc. 

In  English  we  should  say  very,  very  small. 

Even  augmentatives  may  be  decreased  in  the  same 
way: 

Picaron,  hig  rogue;  picaronzillo  or  picaronzuelo,  little  rogue. 

9.  Many  diminutives  as  well  as  augmentatives  drop 
or  preserve  the  letter  i in  the  diphthong  ie : 

Un  ciego,  a blind  man;  un  cieguecillo  or  ceguecillo,  a little  blind  man. 
Un  diente,  a tooth;  tm  dientecillo  or  dentecillo,  a small  tooth. 
Una  piedra,  a stone;  una  piedrezuela  or  pedrezuela,  a small  stone. 

10.  Other  words  change  the  diphthong  ue  into  o or 
remain  unchanged. 

Un  buey,  an  ox;  un  bueyecillo  or  boyecillo,  small  ox. 

Un  hueso,  a bone;  un  huesecillo  or  osecillo,  a small  bone. 

11.  There  are  words  in  Spanish  with  diminutive  and 
augmentative  terminations,  which  may  have  been  used 
formerly  as  such,  but  which  at  present  have  a determined 
signification: 

Matón,  bravo ^ cut-throat.  Islilla,  side. 

Cegato,  short-sighted.  Peluquín,  wig. 

Espadín,  sword  of  the  state ^ etc.^  etc. 


4o8 


The  Rosenthal  Method, 


General  Observations. — The  words  pequeño,  small, 
and  grande,  large,  may  be  used  at  all  times  with  the 
noun,  but  in  many  cases  they  would  not  be  according  to 
the  genius  of  the  Spanish  language,  which  requires  di- 
minutives or  augmentatives.  This  is  especially  the  case 
with  diminutives. 

The  pronunciation  of  diminutives  or  augmentatives 
is  generally  different  from  that  of  the  word  from  which 
they  are  derived,  and  the  written  accent  of  the  primitive 
word  is  left  out  in  the  derived  word,  as: 

Árbol,  tree,  arbolito,  small  tree. 

Pájaro,  bird,  pajarito,  small  bird,  etc. 


The  Auxiliary  Verb  Haber,  To  Have. 

Indicative  Mode.  Subjunctive  Mode. 


Present.  Present. 


he. 

I have. 

haya. 

I may  have. 

has. 

thou  hast. 

hayas. 

thou  mayest  have. 

ha. 

he  has. 

haya. 

he  may  have. 

hemos. 

we  have. 

hayamos, 

we  may  have. 

habéis. 

ye  have. 

hayáis. 

ye  may  have. 

han. 

they  have. 

hayan. 

they  may  have. 

Imperfect. 

Imperfect  {first  form). 

había, 

I had. 

hubiera. 

I might  have. 

habías, 

thou  hadst. 

hubieras. 

thou  mightest  have. 

había. 

he  had. 

hubiera. 

he  might  have. 

habíamos, 

we  had. 

hubiéramos. 

we  might  have. 

habíais. 

ye  had. 

hubierais. 

ye  might  have. 

habían. 

they  had. 

hubieran. 

they  might  have. 

The  Spanish  Language, 


409 

Indicative  Mode.  Subjunctive  Mode. 


Past.  Imperfect  {second  form). 


hube. 

I had. 

hubiese. 

I might  have. 

hubiste. 

thou  hadst. 

hubieses. 

thou  mightest  have, 

hubo. 

he  had. 

hubiese. 

he  might  have. 

hubimos. 

we  had. 

hubiésemos. 

we  might  have. 

hubisteis. 

ye  had. 

hubieseis, 

ye  might  have. 

hubieron. 

they  had. 

hubiesen, 

they  might  have. 

Future. 

Future. 

habré. 

I shall  have. 

hubiere, 

I should  have. 

habrás. 

thou  wilt  have. 

hubieres. 

thou  shouldst  have. 

habrá. 

he  will  have. 

hubiere. 

he  should  have. 

habremos. 

we  shall  have. 

hubiéremos. 

we  should  have. 

habréis. 

ye  will  have. 

hubiereis. 

ye  should  have. 

habrán. 

they  will  have. 

hubieren,  , 

they  should  have. 

Conditional. 

Conditional. 

habría. 

I should  have. 

hubiera. 

or  hubiese. 

habrías. 

thou  wouldst  have,  hubieras 

or  hubieses,  . 

habría. 

he  would  have. 

hubiera. 

or  hubiese. 

habríamos. 

we  should  have. 

hubiéramos. 

or  hubiésemos. 

habríais. 

ye  would  have. 

hubierais 

or  hubieseis. 

habrían. 

they  would  have. 

hubieran 

or  hubiesen. 

Infinitive.  * Gerund.  Past  Participle. 

haber,  to  have,  habiendo,  having,  habido,  had. 


COMPOUND  TENSES. 


Indicative  Mode.  Subjunctive  Mode. 

Present  Perfect.  Present  Perfect. 


he  habido,  I have  had, 
has  habido,  thou  hast  had. 
ha  habido,  he  has  had. 
hemos  habido,  we  have  had. 
habéis  habido,  ye  have  had. 
han  habido,  they  have  had. 


haya  habido,  I may  have  had. 
hayas  habido,  thou  mayst  have  had. 
haya  habido,  he  may  have  had. 
hayamos  habido,  we  may  have  had. 
hayáis  habido,  ye  may  have  had. 
hayan  habido,  they  may  have  had. 


If  I hadj  etc. 


410 


The  Rosenthal  Method, 


Indicative  Mode.  Subjunctive  Mode. 

Past  Perfect.  Past  Perfect  (first  form), 

había  habido,  I had  had  hubiera  habido,  I might  have  had, 

habías  habido,  thou  hadst  had,  hubieras  habido,  thou  mightest 
etc,  etc,  etc.  have  had,  etc. 


Past  Anterior.  Past  Perfect  (second  form). 

hube  habido,  I had  had.  hubiese  habido,  I might  have  had. 

hubiste  habido,  thou  hadst  had,  hubieses  habido,  thou  mightest  have 
etc.  etc.  etc.  had,  etc. 

Future  Perfect.  Future  Perfect. 


habré  habido,  I shall  have  had.  habiere  habido,  I shall  have  had. 
habrás  habido,  thou  wilt  have  hubieres  habido,  thou  wilt  have  had, 
etc.  had,  etc.  etc.  etc. 


Past  Conditional. 

, , ^ - { I should  have 

habna  habido,  < 

. , ^ 11.-,  Í thou  wouldst 

habrías  habido,  < , , , 

[ have  had, 

etc,  etc. 


Past  Conditional. 
hubiera  or  hubiese  / I should  have 
habido.  1 had. 

hubieras  or  hubieses  Í thou  shouldst 
habido,  \ have  had, 

etc.  etc. 


Remarks  on  Haber. 

1.  Haber  can  only  be  used  as  an  auxiliary  verb  pre- 
ceding the  past  participle,  as: 

He  recibido  una  carta,  I have  received  a letter. 

Hemos  venido  de  París,  We  have  come  from  Paris. 

I Han  llegado  V.V.  solos?  Have  you  (pi.)  arrived  alone? 

2.  In  interrogative  sentences  haber  must  always  stand 
next  to  the  principal  verb,  as: 

I Ha  venido  su  hermano?  Has  your  brother  come? 

I Ha  pagado  V.?  Have  you  paid? 


3.  Haber  de  with  the  infinitive  of  another  verb  sig- 
nifies— ^like  tener  que — duty  or  obligation,  and  must 
be  translated  by  to  have  to,  must,  to  be  to,  etc.,  as: 
He  de  hacer  la  correspondencia,  I have  to  attend  to  the  correspond- 
ence. 

Había  de  escribir  una  carta,  I had  to  write  a letter. 

I Qué  había  de  hacer  yo?  What  was  I to  do? 


The  Spanish  Language. 


411 


4.  Haber  can  be  used  impersonally,  i.  e.,  in  the  third 
person  singular.  When  followed  by  que  and  the  infinitive 
of  some  other  verb  it  expresses  necessity  or  obligation, 
and  is  rendered  by  to  be  necessary,  as: 

I Qué  hay  que  hacer?  What  is  to  he  done? 

Ha  habido  que  salir,  It  was  necessary  to  go  out. 

5.  When  used  impersonally,  haber  has  many  idio- 
matic meanings  and  corresponds: 


a.  to  the  English  there  is, 

Presente:  Hay  hombres  en  el 
jardín, 

Imperfecto : Había  fiestas  en 

la  ciudad. 

Definido:  Hubo  baile  en  pala- 
cio. 

Futuro:  ¿ Habrá  un  baile  ma- 
ñana? 

(Condicional:  Habría  paz  en 

Francia,  si.  . . . 


there  are,  as: 

There  are  some  men  in  the  garden. 
There  were  some  festivities  in  town. 
There  was  a hall  at  the  palace. 
Will  there  he  a hall  to-morrow? 

There  would  he  peace  in  France, 

if.  ..  . 


Note. — The  Present  Perfect  is  ha  habido. 


b.  Hay,  etc.,  signifies  time  and  is  frequently  trans- 


lated by  ago,  as: 

I Cuánto  tiempo  hay  que  están 
V.V.  aquí? 

Hay  muy  poco  tiempo  que  he- 
mos llegado, 

Hay  ocho  diás  que  le  he  visto,  \ 
Ocho  días  há  que  le  he  visto,  J 
Murió  hay  mucho  tiempb. 

Hay  ocho  años  que  está  malo, 

c.  Hay  expresses  distance, 
¿ Qué  distancia  hay  de  aquí  a 
Chihuahua? 

No  hay  lejos. 

Hay  treinta  millas. 


Since  when  are  you  here?  or  how 
long  have  you  been  here? 

We  arrived  a very  short  time  ago. 

I saw  him  a week  ago. 

He  died  a long  time  ago. 

He  has  been  ill  these  eight  years. 

as: 

How  far  is  it  from  here  to  Chihua- 
hua! 

It  is  not  far. 

It  is  thirty  miles. 


412 


The  Rosenthal  Method, 


Conjugation  of  the  Impersonal  Verb. 


Haber  Que,  To  he  necessary. 


Modo  Indicativo. 

Hay  que,  it  is  necessary. 

Había  que,  it  was  or  it  used  to  he 
necessary. 

Hubo  que,  it  was  necessary. 
Habrá  que,  it  will  he  necessary. 
Habría  que,  it  should  or  would  he 
necessary. 


Modo  Subjuntivo. 

Haya  que,  it  may  he  necessary. 
Hubiera  que,  it  might  he  necessary. 

Hubiese  que,  it  might  be  neces- 
sary. 

Si  hubiera,  or  si  hubiese  que,  if  it 
were  or  should  he  necessary. 


Examples. 


Hay  que  ir  al  correo,  It  is  necessary  to  go  to  the  post- 

office. 

Habrá  que  leer  los  libros.  It  will  he  necessary  to  read  the 

hooks. 

Si  hubiese  cartas  habría  que  con-  If  there  were  any  letters  it  would 
testarlas,  he  necessary  to  answer  them. 

The  compound  tenses  are  formed  in  the  same  w'ay  as 
their  corresponding  forms  with  haber  adding  que,  thus: 


Modo  Indicativo. 

Ha  habido  que.  It  has  been 
Había  habido  que,  necessary 

Hubo  habido  que,  /a,  etc. 

Habrá  habido  que. 

Habría  habido  que. 


Modo  Subjuntivo. 

Haya  habido  que.  It  may  have 
Hubiera  habido  que,  heen  neces- 
Hubiese  habido  que,  sary  to^  etc. 
Si  hubiera  or  si  hubiese 
habido  que. 


Example. 

Ha  habido  que  ir  a la  aduana,  It  has  heen  necessary  to  go  to  the 

Custom-House. 


The  Auxiliary  Verb  Tener,  To  Have. 


Infinitive. 
tener,  to  have. 


SIMPLE  TENSES. 

Gerund. 
teniendo,  having. 


Past  Participle. 
tenido,  had. 


The  Spanish  Language, 


413 


Indicative  Mode. 

Subjunctive  Mode. 

Present. 

Present. 

tengo, 

I have. 

tenga. 

I may  have. 

tienes, 

thou  hast. 

tengas. 

thou  mayst  have. 

tiene. 

he  has. 

tenga. 

he  may  have. 

tenemos, 

we  have. 

tengamos. 

we  may  have. 

tenéis. 

ye  have. 

tengáis. 

ye  may  have. 

tienen, 

they  have. 

tengan. 

they  may  have. 

Imperfect. 

Imperfect  {first  form). 

tenía. 

/ had. 

tuviera. 

I should  have. 

tenías. 

thou  hadst. 

tuvieras. 

thou  shouldst  have. 

tenía. 

he  had. 

tuviera. 

he  should  have. 

teníamos. 

we  had. 

tuviéramos. 

we  should  have. 

teníais, 

ye  hod. 

tuvierais. 

ye  should  have. 

tenían. 

they  had. 

tuvieran, 

they  should  have. 

Past. 

Imperfect  {second  form) . 

tuve. 

I had. 

tuviese. 

I might  or  should  have 

tuviste. 

thou  hadst. 

tuvieses. 

thou  mightest  have. 

tuvo. 

he  had. 

tuviese. 

he  might  have. 

tuvimos. 

we  had. 

tuviésemos. 

we  might  have. 

tuvisteis. 

we  had. 

tuvieseis. 

ye  might  have. 

tuvieron. 

they  had. 

tuviesen. 

they  might  have. 

Future. 

Future. 

tendré. 

I shall  have. 

tuviere. 

I shall  have. 

tendrás. 

thou  wilt  have. 

tuvieres. 

thou  wilt  have. 

tendrá. 

he  will  have. 

tuviere. 

he  will  have. 

tendremos. 

, we  shall  have. 

tuviéremos. 

we  shall  have. 

tendréis. 

ye  will  have. 

tuviereis. 

ye  will  have. 

tendrán. 

they  will  have. 

tuvieren, 

they  will  have. 

Conditional. 

tendría,  I should  have. 

tendrías,  thou  wouldst  have, 

tendría,  he  would  have. 

tendríamos,  we  should  have. 

tendríais,  ye  would  have. 

tendrían,  they  would  have. 


Conditional. 

tuviera,  or  tuviese, 

tuvieras,  or  tuvieses, 

tuviera,  or  tuviese, 

tuviéramos,  or  tuviésemos 

tuvierais  or  tuvieseis, 

tuvieran,  or  tuviesen. 


If  I should  have. 


414 


The  Rosenthal  Method, 


ten  (tú),  have  {thou). 

tenga  (él),  let  him  have. 

tenga  V.,  have  {you). 


tengamos,  let  us  have. 
tened,  have  {ye). 

tengan,  let  them  have. 


COMPOUND  TENSES. 


Indicative  Mode. 
Present  Perfect. 
he  tenido,  I have  had. 

Past  Perfect. 
había  tenido,  I had  had. 

Past  Anterior. 
hube  tenido,  I had  had. 

Future  Perfect. 
habré  tenido,  I shall  have  had. 

Past  Conditional. 
habría  tenido,  I should  have  had. 


Subjunctive  Mode. 
Present  Perfect. 
haya  tenido,  I may  have  had. 

Past  Perfect  {first  form). 
hubiera  tenido,  I might  have  had. 

Past  Perfect  {second  form). 
hubiese  tenido,  I shall  have  had. 

Future  Perfect. 
hubiere  tenido,  I shall  have  had. 
Past  Conditional. 


hubiera  or  hu- 
biese tenido 


I should  have  had. 


Remarks  on  Tener,  To  Have. 

I.  There  are  two  verbs  in  Spanish  corresponding  to 
our  to  have — ^haber  and  tener. 


2.  Haber  is  used  exclusively  in  the  formation  of  com- 
pound tenses,  while  tener  is  used  as  an  active  verb  indi- 
cating possession;  (in  which  case  to  have  may  generally 
be  replaced  by  to  possess  or  to  hold^  without  affecting  the 
meaning  of  the  sentence). 

Thus: 

He  comprado  un  sombrero,  I have  bought  a hat  {compound  tense) 

Tengo  un  sombrero,  I have  a hat  {i.  e.,  I possess  a hat). 

Tuvo  amigos,  He  had  {i.  e.,  he  possessed)  friends. 


The  Spanish  Language. 


415 


3.  Tener  is  used  idiomatically  with  the  following 
words: 


Tengo  hambre, 
tengo  sed, 
tengo  calor, 
tengo  frío, 
tengo  sueño, 
tengo  vergüenza, 
tengo  miedo  de . . 
tengo  razón, 
no  tengo  razón, 
tengo  gana  de  . . 


I am  hungry. 

I am  thirsty. 

I am  warm. 

I am  cold. 

I am  sleepy. 

I am  ashamed. 

I am  afraid  to 
I am  right. 

I am  wrong. 

I have  a mind  to 


{Literally ^ I have  hunger)  ^ 


I have  thirst). 

I have  warmth). 
I have  cold). 

I have  sleep). 

I have  shame). 

I have  fear  to  . 

I have  right). 

I have  not  right). 


•). 


¿Qué  tiene  V.?  What  is  the  matter  with  you?  {What  have  you)? 
No  tengo  nada.  Nothing  is  the  matter  with  me  {I  have  nothing). 
Tengo  algo.  Something  is  the  matter  with  me  {I  have  something). 
¿Tiene  V.  algo?  Is  anything  the  matter  with  you?  {Have  you 
something)? 


4.  Tener  is  used  in  statements  or  inquiries  about  the 
age  of  persons,  etc. 

¿ Qué  edad  or  1 y p How  old  are  you?  {What  age  [or^ 
I Cuántos  años  / ‘ ’ how  many  years]  have  you)  ? 

Tengo  cuarenta  y cinco  años,  I am  forty-five  years  old. 


5.  Tener  is  used  in  speaking  of  the  size  or  dimension 
of  objects,  as: 


Este  río  tiene  ochenta  pies  de  This  river  is  80  feet  broad  {has  80 
ancho.  feet  of  breadth). 

6.  Tener  que  with  the  infinitive  of  another  verb  ex- 
presses necessity  or  obligation,  as: 

Tengo  que  escribir  una  carta,  I must  write  a letter. 

Tenía  que  hacer  una  visita,  I was  obliged  to  make  a call. 
Tenemos  que  salir,  We  have  to  start. 


7.  The  verb  tener  is  also  used  in  Spanish  to  express 


4i6 


The  Rosenthal  Method, 


the  age;  and,  in  inquiring  about  the  age  of  a person, 
they  say: 

I Qué  edad  tiene  . . . . ? What  age  has 

¿ Cuántos  años  tiene  . . . . ? How  many  years  has  . . . . ? 

The  word  años,  years,  must  not  be  left  out  either  in  the 
question  or  in  the  answer,  unless  expressed  in  the  last  part 
of  the  sentence; 

I Cuántos  años  tiene  V.  ? How  old  are  you? 

Tengo  veinte  años  y mi  hermano  / am  twenty  and  my  brother  is 
diez  y ocho,  eighteen. 

Observation. — Tener  más  edad,  or  ser  de  más  edad 
is  used  for  older,  when  comparing  the  age  of  persons  who 
are  not  really  old. 

8.  Tener  ^Igo  malo  means  to  have  a pain,  a sore,  or 
ache  somewhere,  and  is  used  in  Spanish  with  the  definite 
article: 

Tengo  el  ojo  malo,  / have  a sore  eye. 

Tenemos  los  pies  malos.  We  have  sore  feet. 

El  tiene  la  rodilla  mala.  He  has  a sore  knee. 

9.  The  definite  article  is  also  used  before  verbs  express- 
ing moral  or  physical  properties: 

Tiene  los  ojos  azules.  He  has  blue  eyes. 

Tienen  los  pies  grandes,  They  have  large  feet. 

Observation. — The  same  article  is  used  in  the  singu- 
lar, when  speaking  of  several  persons,  if  the  property 
spoken  of  is  single: 

É1  tiene  la  nariz  larga.  He  has  a long  nose. 

Elios  tienen  la  nariz  larga.  They  have  long  noses, 

10.  In  speaking  of  the  dimensions  or  size  of  objects, 
the  Spanish  use  the  verb  tener,  to  have: 

Este  árbol  tiene  cien  pies  de  This  tree  is  a hundred  feet  high. 
alto. 

La  calle  tiene  cincuenta  pies  de  The  street  is  fifty  feet  wide. 
ancho, 


The  Spanish  Language, 


417 


II.  The  verb  tener  is  used  before  an  infinitive  with  the 
conjunction  que  when  obligation  or  necessity  is  expressed: 


I Qué  tiene  V.  ? — Tengo  dolor  de  cabeza. — ^Tuve  la 
satisfacción  de  verla  ayer. — Tenemos  el  honor  de  anun- 
ciarlo a V. — Tengo  que  hablar  con  V.  cuando  V.  tenga 
tiempo. — I Qué  ha  estudiado  V.  hoy? — He  estado  muy 
ocupado  escribiendo  la  correspondencia. — ¿ Ha  escrito 
V.  las  cartas  en  español? — No  señor,  yo  he  hecho  la  co- 
rrespondencia alemana,  y el  corresponsal  español  escribió 
la  española. — ¿ Hay  mucha  correspondecia  española  en 
su  casa  de  V.? — Sí,  tenemos  relaciones  comerciales  con  la 
América  del  Sur. — ¿ Quiere  V.  hacerme  efectiva  esta  letra? 
Necesito  dinero  mejicano  y no  tengo  sino  americano. — 
Con  mucho  gusto,  señor.  ¿ Cuánto  desea  V.  ? — ¿Hemos  de 
ir  al  banco  inmediatamente? — Si  señor,  hemos  de  ir  en 
seguida,  porque  los  bancos  cierran  a las  tres. — ^Tengo  que 
ir  al  correo  ahora,  pues  espero  algunas  cartas. — ¿ Espera 
V.  unas  de  Bóston? — Sí;  necesito  tener  un  poder^  de 
nuestra  casa. — El  poder  tiene  que  ser  firmado  y ates- 
tiguado^ por  un  notário  público;^  de  otra  manera^  no 
es  válido. — I Quiere  V.  venir  conmigo  a la  ciudad? — 
Con  mucho  gusto.  ¿ Qué  tiene  V.  que  hacer? — Tengo 
que  ir  a la  mercería.  Tengo  que  hacer  algimas  com- 
pras.— ¿ Qué  es  lo  que  tiene  V.  que  comprar? — De- 
seo comprar  unas  bagatelas.® — ¿ Cuándo  habrá  vapor 
correo®  para  Barcelona? — Hay  correo  para  España  los 
días  cinco,  quince  y veinticinco  de  cada  mes. 

^ A power  of  attorney.  2 Must  be  signed  and  witnessed.  ^ A 
Notary  Public.  ^ Otherwise.  ® Trifles.  ® Mail-steamer. 


Tengo  que  escribir  cartas, 
Tenemos  que  salir, 


I have  letters  to  write. 
We  have  to  go  out. 


EXERCISE, 


4i8 


The  Rosenthal  Method, 


The  Auxiliary  Verb  Ser,  To  be. 

SIMPLE  TENSES. 


Infinitive.  Gerund.  Past  Participle. 

ser,  to  he,  siendo,  being,  sido,  been. 


Indicative  Mode. 

Subjunctive  Mode. 

Present. 

Present. 

soy, 

I am. 

sea. 

I mcCy  be. 

eres, 

thou  art. 

seas. 

thou  mayst  be. 

es, 

he  is. 

sea. 

he  may  be. 

somos, 

we  are. 

seamos 

, we  may  be. 

sois, 

ye  are. 

seáis. 

ye  may  be.  ^ 

son. 

they  are. 

sean. 

they  may  be. 

Imperfect. 

Imperfect  {first  form). 

era. 

I was. 

fuera. 

I might  be. 

eras. 

thou  wast. 

fueras. 

thou  mightest  be. 

era. 

he  was. 

fuera. 

he  might  be. 

éramos. 

we  were. 

fuéramos,  we  might  be. 

erais. 

ye  were. 

fuerais. 

ye  might  be. 

eran. 

they  were. 

fueran. 

they  might  be. 

Past. 

Imperfect  {second form). 

fui. 

/ was. 

fuese. 

I might  be. 

fuiste. 

thou  wast. 

fueses. 

thou  mightest  be. 

fué. 

he  was. 

fuese. 

he  might  be. 

fuimos. 

we  were. 

fuésemos,  we  might  be. 

fuisteis. 

ye  were. 

fueseis, 

ye  might  be. 

fueron. 

they  were. 

fuesen. 

they  might  be. 

Future. 

Future. 

seré. 

I shall  be. 

fuere. 

I should  be. 

serás. 

thou  wilt  be. 

fueres. 

thou  shouldst  be. 

será. 

he  will  be. 

fuere. 

he  should  be. 

seremos. 

we  shall  be. 

fuéremos,  we  should  be. 

sereis. 

ye  will  be. 

fuereis. 

ye  should  be. 

serán. 

they  will  be. 

fueren. 

they  should  be. 

The  Spanish  Language, 


419 


Indicative  Mode. 

Subjunctive  Mode 

Conditional. 

Conditional. 

sería, 

I should  be. 

fuera 

or  fuese. 

serías, 

thou  wouldst  be. 

fueras 

or  fueses. 

sería, 

he  would  be. 

fuera 

or  fuese. 

seríamos,  we  should  be. 

fuéramos. 

or  fuésemos. 

seríais, 

ye  would  be. 

fuerais 

or  fueseis. 

serían. 

they  would  be. 

fueran 

or  fuesen. 

Imperative  Mode. 

sé. 

be  {thou). 

séamos. 

let  us  be. 

sea. 

let  him  be. 

sed. 

be  {ye). 

sea  V., 

be  {you). 

sean. 

let  them  be. 

COMPOUND  TENSES. 

Indicative  Mode.  Subjunctive  Mode. 

Present  Perfect.  Present  Perfect. 

he  sido,  I have  been,  haya  sido,  I may  have  been. 


Past  Perfect. 
había  sido,  I had  been. 

Past  Anterior. 
hube  sido,  I had  been. 

Future  Perfect. 
habré  sido,  I shall  have  been. 


Past  Perfect  {first  form). 
hubiera  sido,  I might  have  been. 
Past  Perfect  {second  form). 
hubiese  sido,  I might  have  been, 
Future  Perfect. 
hubiere  sido,  I shall  have  been. 


Past  Conditional. 
habría  sido,  I should  have  been. 


Past  Conditional. 
hubiera  or  hu-  \ I should  have 
biese  sido,  J been. 


The  Auxiliary  Verb  Estar,  To  be. 


Infinitive. 
estar,  to  be. 


SIMPLE  TENSES. 

Gerund. 
estando,  being. 


Past  Participle. 
estado,  been. 


420 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


Indicative  Mode. 


Present. 


estoy, 

/ am. 

estás. 

thou  art. 

está. 

he  is. 

estamos. 

we  are. 

estáis. 

ye  are. 

están. 

they  are. 

Imperfect. 

estaba. 

I was. 

estabas. 

thou  wast. 

estaba. 

he  was. 

estábamos. 

we  were. 

estabais. 

ye  were. 

estaban. 

they  were. 
Past. 

estuve. 

I was. 

estuviste. 

thou  wast. 

estuvo. 

he  was. 

estuvimos. 

we  were. 

estuvisteis. 

we  were. 

estuvieron. 

they  were. 
Future. 

estaré. 

I shall  he. 

estarás. 

thou  wilt  he. 

estará. 

he  will  he. 

estaremos. 

we  shall  he. 

estaréis. 

ye  will  he. 

estarán. 

they  will  he. 

Conditional. 

estaría. 

- I should  he. 

estarías. 

thou  wouldst  he. 

estaría. 

he  would  he. 

estaríamos. 

we  should  he. 

estaríais. 

ye  would  he. 

estarían. 

they  would  he. 

Subjunctive  Mode. 

Present. 

esté. 

I may  he. 

estés. 

thou  mayst  he. 

esté. 

he  may  he. 

estemos. 

we  may  he. 

estéis. 

ye  may  he. 

estén. 

they  may  he. 

Imperfect  {first form). 

estuviera. 

I might  he. 

estuvieras. 

thou  mightest  he. 

estuviera. 

he  might  he. 

estuviéramos. 

we  might  he. 

estuvierais. 

ye  might  he. 

estuvieran. 

they  might  he. 

Imperfect  {second  form). 

estuviese. 

I might  he. 

estuvieses. 

thou  mightest  he. 

estuviese. 

he  might  he. 

estuviésemos. 

we  might  he. 

estuvieseis. 

ye  might  he. 

estuviesen. 

they  might  he. 

Future. 

estuviere. 

I should  he. 

estuvieres. 

thou  shouldst  he. 

estuviere. 

he  should  he. 

estuviéremos,  we  should  he, 
estuviereis,  ye  should  he. 
estuvieren,  they  should  he. 

Conditional. 
estuviera  or  estuviese, 
estuvieras  oy  estuvieses, 
estuviera  or  estuviese, 
estuviéramos 

or  estuviésemos, 
estuvierais  or  estuvieseis, 
estuvieran  or  estuviesen, 


{if)  I had  heeUf  etc. 


The  Spanish  Language, 


421 


está, 
esté, 
esté  V., 


he  {thou), 
let  him  he, 
he  {you). 


Imperative. 

estemos,  let  us  he, 

estad,  he  {ye), 

estén,  let  them  he. 


COMPOUND  TENSES. 


Indicative  Mode. 

Present  Perfect. 

he  estado,  I have  been. 

Past  Perfect. 

había  estado,  I had  been. 

Past  Anterior. 

hube  estado,  I had  been. 

Future  Perfect. 

habré  estado,  I shall  have  been. 

Past  Conditional. 

, , ^ - (’/  should  have 

habna  estado,  •< 


Subjunctive  Mode. 

Present  Perfect. 
haya  estado,  I may  have  been. 
Past  Perfect  {first  form), 
hubiera  estado,  I might  have  been. 
Past  Perfect  {second  form), 
huviese  estado,  I might  have  been. 


Future  Perfect. 
hubiere  estado,  I should  have  been. 


Past  Conditional. 


hubiera  or  hubiesel  r-r\  n j t 
estado,  \(.rf)Ihadbeen. 


Remarks  on  Ser  and  Estar. 

There  are  two  verbs  in  Spanish  corresponding  to  our 
verb  to  be, — ser  and  estar.  Their  proper  use  presents 
great  difficulty  to  English-speaking  persons,  which-^ 
to  a certain  extent — will  be  removed  if  the  following  rules 
are  mastered: 

I.  Ser  is  used  when  the  attribute  is  natural,  inherent, 
or  essential,  that  is  to  say  when  the  person  or  thing  spoken 
of  is  likely  to  remain  where  it  is,  what  it  is,  or  as  it  is. 
It  therefore  must  always  be  employed  when  the  national- 
ity, rank,  profession,  employment,  dignity,  inherent  men- 
tal or  bodily  quality  is  described,  as: 

Este  señor  es  juez.  This  gentleman  is  a judge. 

Este  señor  es  francés.  This  gentleman  is  a Frenchman. 

Este  señor  es  librero,  This  gentleman  is  a bookseller. 


422 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


Este  señor  es  alto, 

Este  señor  es  pequeño, 
El  hierro  es  duro, 

Esta  planta  es  venenosa, 
Esta  niña  es  bonita. 


This  gentleman  is  tall. 
This  gentleman  is  small. 
Iron  is  hard. 

This  plant  is  poisonous. 
This  girl  is  pretty. 


a.  Ser  is  used  to  indicate  possession,  origin,  or  ma- 


terial,  as: 

Aquella  casa  es  mía,  y esta  es  de 
Don  Pedro, 

Esas  plumas  son  de  Juan,  y esta 
carta  es  para  V., 

El  sombrero  es  de  aquel  caba- 
llero. 

La  casa  es  de  marmol. 

El  reloj  es  de  oro. 


That  house  is  mine  and  this  is  Don 
Pedro's  {or,  this  belongs  to 
Don  Pedro). 

These  pens  belong  to  John,  and 
this  letter  is  for  you. 

The  hat  belongs  to  that  gentleman. 

The  house  is  marble  {of  marble). 
The  watch  is  gold. 


b.  Ser  is  used  when  speaking  of  the  time  of  day  or 
night  or  to  express  the  number  of  things  or  persons,  as: 


I Qué  hora  es? 

Es  la  una, 

Son  las  diez  y cuarto. 

Es  de  día. 

Es  de  noche. 

Es  tarde, 

Es  temprano. 

Eran  noventa  discípulos. 


What  timeds  it? 

It  is  one  o'clock. 

It  is  a quarter  past  ten  {=ten  and 
a quarter). 

It  is  day. 

It  is  night. 

It  is  late. 

It  is  early. 

There  were  ninety  pupils. 


2.  Estar  must  always  be  employed  when  the  attribute 
is  only  temporary  or  accidental,  that  is  to  say  when  a 
change  may  take  place  or  may,  at  least,  be  reasonably 
expected.  Thus  we  say:  Yo  estoy  aquí,  / am  here,  that 
is  to  say:  I am  here  just  now,  but  at  any  moment  it  may 
occur  to  me,  or  I may  be  obliged  to  go  somewhere  else.  But: 
I Quién  es  aquella  señora?  Who  is  this  lady?  Ser  must 
be  employed,  and  not  estar,  because  whoever  the  lady 
may  be,  she  will  remain  a female. 


The  Spanish  Language. 


423 


How  do  you  do? 

I am  well. 

Since  when  have  you  been  ill? 


a.  Estar  is  used  therefore  to  express  the  state  of  health, 
as: 

I Cómo  está  V.  ? 

Estoy  bueno, 

I Desde  cuándo  está  V.  malo? 

b.  Estar  is  used  in  connection  with  certain  adjectives 

to  express  emotions,  feelings,  or  a state  of  being,  as: 

Estoy  contento,  I am  satisfied. 

Estoy  triste,  / am  sad. 

Esta  sopa  está  caliente,  This  soup  is  hot. 

Este  pan  está  frío.  This  bread  is  cold, 

El  vino  está  agrio.  The  wine  is  sour. 

c.  Estar  is  used  to  express  temporary  existence  in  a 
certain  locality,  as : 


Está  en  el  café, 

Yo  estoy  aquí, 

Los  soldados  estarán  aquí  ma- 
ñana, 

Él  estaba  a la  puerta. 


He  is  at  the  cafe. 

I am  here. 

The  soldiers  will  be  here  to- 
morrow. 

He  was  at  the  door. 


d.  Estar  is  used  to  express  intention  or  willingness  to 
do  a thing,  as: 

Estoy  para  salir,  I intend  to  go  out. 

e.  Estar  is  used  before  adverbs  or  adverbial  expressions 
denoting  condition,  as: 

Mi  sombrero  está  de  moda.  My  hat  is  the  fashion  {in  the 

fashion). 

I Está  V.  de  prisa?  Are  you  in  a hurry? 

f.  Estar  is  used  as  auxiliary  in  the  conjugation  of  verbs 
in  the  Gerund,  as: 


Estoy  leyendo  un  libro, 

Juan  está  escribiendo  una  carta. 
Los  discípulos  estaban  estudian- 
do su  lección. 

Los  barqueros  estarán  cargan- 
do sus  navios  con  naranjas, 


I am  reading  a book. 

John  is  writing  a letter. 

The  pupils  were  studying  their 
lesson. 

The  bargemen  will  be  loading  their 
vessels  with  oranges. 


424 


The  Rosenthal  Method, 


Ser  and  Estar  Compared. 


To  make  the  difference  between  ser  and  estar  still 
clearer  we  give  the  following  examples: 

Esta  puerta  es  alta,  This  door  is  high. 

Esta  puerta  está  cerrada,  This  door  is  locked. 

We  must  say  es  alta,  because  its  height  is  an  inherent 
and  almost  unchangeable  attribute  of  the  door  in  question. 
But  we  must  use  está  cerrada,  because  its  being  locked  is 
merely  temporary. 

For  this  reason  many  adjectives  have  an  entirely  differ- 
ent meaning  when  used  with  ser  or  estar. 

Inherent  Quality.  Temporary  Stííte. 


Ser  bueno,  to  he  good;  to  he  kind- 
hearted. 

Ser  malo,  to  he  had. 

Ser  vivo,  to  he  lively. 

Ser  contento,  to  he  of  a contented 
nature. 

Esto  es  muy  alto,  this  is  very  high. 

El  vind  de  Concord  es  agrio.  Con- 
cord wine  is  sour. 


Estar  bueno,  to  he  well;  to  he  in 
good  health. 

Estar  malo,  to  he  ill. 

Estar  vivo,  to  he  alive. 

Estar  contento,  {to  happen)  to  he 
satisfied. 

Esto  está  muy  alto,  this  happens 
to  he  placed  very  high. 

Este  vino  está  agrio,  this  wine  is 
{happens  to  he)  sour. 

/ 


EXERCISE. 

¿ Cómo  está  V.,  señor? — Muy  bien,  gracias. — ¿ Es  V. 
el  maestro  de  idiomas? — Sí,  señor. — Quiero  aprender  el 
idioma  español.  Mi  hermano  me  dijo  que  V.  en- 
seña este  idioma  y yo  deseo  hablar  y comprenderlo  muy 
pronto,  porque  voy  a Méjico.  Mi  hermana  está  en 
España  con  mi  padre  y yo,  que  soy  el  hijo  menor,  he 
quedado  aquí  solo.  ¿ Qué  está  V.  haciendo  tan  tarde? 
— Estoy  escribiendo  una  carta  a mi  agente. — ¿Y  su. 
hermano  de  V.  qué  hace? — Está  estudiando  el  caste- 


The  Spanish  Language, 


425 

llano  y al  mismo  tiempo  hace  la  correspondencia  para 
nuestra  casa  en  alemán. — ¿ Quién  es  ese  hombre? — Es 
el  tenedor  de  libros  de  mi  casa. — ¿ Y qué  vende  V.? — 
Soy  fabricante  de  mesas  para  comedor. — ¿ No  está  la 
casa  del  general  López  en  la  calle  de  Madrid? — El  general 
no  tiene  casa  aquí. 

¿ Qué  edificio  es  este? — ^Es  una  posada. — Entremos. 
Denos  un  cuarto  con  dos  camas.  Estoy  muy  cansado 
y deseo  descansar.^ — ¿ Qué  es  la  gramática? — Es  el 
arte^  de  expresarnos  correctamente  por  medio^  de  pala- 
bras.— ¿ Qué  son  palabras? — Son  los  sonidos  articula- 
dos^ con  que  nos  expresamos. — ¿ De  qué  se  componen 
las  palabras? — De  sílabas. — ¿ Y las  sílabas? — De  letras. 
— ¿ En  qué  se  dividen  estas? — En  vocales  y consonantes. — 
¿ Cuáles  son  las  partes  de  la  oración? — Nombre,  adjetivo, 
artículo,  pronombre,  verbo,  adverbio,  participio,  pre- 
posición, conjunción  e^  interjección. — ¿ Qué  quiere  V. 
comprar  esta  mañana? — Lléveme  a casa  d.e  un  sastre. — 
Vamos  a casa  del  sastre  Parisiense.® — ¿ A qué  distancia 
de  aquí  está  esa  sastrería? — Como  a una  milla.  Vamos  a 
tomar  el  tranvía;  aquí  viene.  ¡Conductor,  pare  V.P — 
Sentémonos;  aquí  hay  lugar  para  los  dos. — Esta  es  la 
sastrería.  Aquí  encontrará  V.  el  surtido®  más  completo 
de  ropa  hecha^  que  hay  en  la  ciudad. 

Conjugation  of  the  Regular  Verbs. 

1.  All  verbs  in  Spanish  end  in  ar,  er,  or  ir. 

2.  Verbs  of  the  first  conjugation  end  in  ar. 

Verbs  of  the  second  conjugation  end  in  er. 

Verbs  of  ihe  third  conjugation  end  in  ir. 

^To  rest.  ^The  art.  ^By  means  of.  ^Articulated  sounds. 
® Before  words  commencing  with  i or  hi  the  conjunction  y is  changed 
into  e,  as  verano  e invierno,  summer  and  winter;  padre  e hijo,  father 
and  son.  ® Parisian.  ^ Stop.  * The  stock.  ^ Ready  made  cloth- 
ing. 


42Ó 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


3.  By  striking  off  these  endings  we  get  the  stem  of 
the  verb,  as:  am-ar,  to  love  (stem  am-);  com-er,  to  eat 
(stem  com-);  recib-ir,  to  receive  (stem  recib-). 

4.  To  the  stem  we  add  the  verb-endings  of  the  differ- 
ent tenses,  persons,  and  modes. 


Table  of  Verb-Endings. 


Infinitive. 

Gerund. 

Participle. 

1.  — 

-ar. 

-ando, 

— ado, 

2.  — er. 

-iendo, 

— ido. 

3-  - 

■b', 

-iendo, 

— ido. 

Indicative  Mode. 

Subjunctive  Mode. 

Present. 

Present. 

I. 

2. 

3- 

I. 

2. 

3* 

— 0. 

— 0. 

— 0. 

— e. 

— a. 

— a. 

— ^as. 

— es. 

— es. 

— es. 

— as. 

— as. 

— a.. 

— e. 

— e. 

— e. 

— a. 

— a. 

— amos. 

— emos. 

— ^imos. 

— emos. 

— amos. 

— amos. 

— áis. 

— éis. 

— ^is. 

— éis. 

— áis. 

— áis. 

— ^an. 

— en. 

— en. 

— en. 

— an. 

— ^an. 

Imperfect. 

Imperfect  {first  form). 

I. 

2. 

3. 

I. 

2. 

3- 

— aba. 

— ia. 

— ^ia. 

— ^ara. 

— iera. 

— iera. 

— abas. 

— ias. 

— ias. 

— ^aras. 

— ieras. 

— ieras. 

— aba. 

— ia. 

— ia. 

— ara. 

— iera. 

— iera. 

— ábamos 

. — iamos. 

— iamos, 

— áramos. 

— iéramos. 

— iéramos. 

— ^abais. 

— iais. 

— iais. 

-^arais. 

— ierais. 

— ierais. 

— aban. 

— fan. 

— ian. 

— ^aran. 

— ieran. 

— ieran. 

Past. 

Imperfect  {second  form). 

I. 

2. 

3- 

I. 

2. 

3* 

— é. 

— Í. 

— i. 

— ase. 

— iese. 

— iese. 

— aste. 

— iste. 

— iste. 

— ^ases. 

— ieses. 

— ieses. 

— Ó. 

— ió. 

— ió. 

— ase. 

— iese. 

— iese. 

— amos. 

— irnos. 

— irnos. 

— ásemos. 

— iésemos. 

— iésemos. 

— ^asteis. 

— isteis. 

— ^isteis. 

— ^aseis. 

— ieseis. 

— ieseis. 

— ^aron. 

— ieron. 

— ieron. 

— asen. 

— iesen. 

— iesen. 

The  Spanish  Language, 


427 


Future.  Future. 


I. 

2. 

3- 

I. 

2. 

3* 

—aré. 

— eré. 

— iré. 

— ^are. 

— iere. 

— iere. 

— arás. 

— erás. 

— irás. 

— ares. 

— ieres. 

— ieres. 

— ará. 

— erá. 

— irá. 

— are. 

— iere. 

— iere. 

— aremos. 

—eremos. 

— iremos. 

— áremos 

. — iéremos. 

— iéremos. 

— aréis. 

— eréis. 

— iréis. 

— ^areis. 

— iereis. 

— iereis. 

— arán. 

— erán. 

— irán. 

— aren. 

— ieren. 

— ieren. 

Conditional. 

Imperative. 

i. 

2. 

3- 

i. 

2. 

3. 

— aria. 

— eria. 

— iría. 

— a. 

— e. 

— e. 

— ^arías. 

— erias. 

— irias. 

-e  (V.). 

— a(V.).  ■ 

-a  (V.). 

— aria. 

— eria. 

— iria. 

— emos. 

— amos. 

— amos. 

— ariamos 

. — eriamos. 

— iríamos. 

— ad. 

— ed. 

— id. 

— ariais. 

— eriais. 

— iriais. 

— en(V.V.).— an(V.V.). 

— an(V.V. 

— arian 

— erian 

— irian 

First  Conjugation. 

Model  Verb — Hablar,  To  Speak. 


SIMPLE  TENSES. 

Infinitive.  Gerund.  Past  Participle. 

habl-ar,  to  speak.  habl-ando,  speaking,  habl-ado,  spoken. 


Indicative  Mode. 


Subjunctive  Mode. 


Present. 


Present. 


habl-o, 

habl-as, 

habl-a, 

habl-amos, 

habl-áis, 

habl-an, 


I speak, 
thou  speakest. 
he  speaks, 
we  speak, 
ye  speak, 
they  speak. 


habl-e, 

habl-es, 

habl-e, 

habl-emos, 

habl-éis, 

habl-en, 


I may  speak, 
thou  mayst  speak, 
he  may  speak, 
we  may  speak, 
ye  may  speak, 
they  may  speak. 


428 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


Indicative  Mode. 


Subjunctive  Mode. 


Imperfect.  Imperfect  {first form). 


habl-aba, 

I was  speaking. 

habl-ara. 

I might  speak. 

habl-abas, 

thou  wast  speaking. 

habl-aras, 

thou  mighest  speak. 

habl-aba, 

he  was  speaking. 

habl-ara. 

he  might  speak. 

habl-ábamos. 

we  were  speaking. 

habl-áramos, 

we  might  speak. 

habl-abais, 

ye  were  speaking. 

habl-arais. 

ye  might  speak. 

habl-aban, 

they  were  speaking. 

habl-aran. 

they  might  speak. 

Past. 

Imperfect 

{second  form). 

habl-é. 

I spoke. 

habl-ase, 

I might  speak. 

habl-aste, 

thou  spokest. 

habl-ases, 

thou  mightest  speak. 

habl-o. 

he  spoke. 

habl-ase. 

he  might  speak. 

habl-amos. 

we  spoke. 

habl-ásemos. 

we  might  speak. 

habl-asteis. 

ye  spoke. 

habl-aseis. 

ye  might  speak. 

habl-aron. 

they  spoke. 

habl-asen, 

they  might  speak. 

Future. 


Future. 


habl-are, 

habl-arás, 

habl-ará, 

habl-aremos, 

habl-aréis, 

habl-arán, 


I shall  speak, 
thou  wilt  speak, 
he  will  speak, 
he  shall  speak, 
ye  will  speak, 
they  will  speak. 


habl-are, 

habl-ares, 

habl-are, 

habl-áremos, 

habl-areis, 

habl-aren, 


I should  speak, 
thou  shouldst  speak, 
he  should  speak, 
we  should  speak, 
ye  should  speak, 
they  should  speak. 


Conditional.  Conditional. 


habl-aria. 

I should  speak. 

hablara 

or  hablase. 

habl-arias. 

thou  wouldst  speak. 

hablaras 

or  hablases. 

habl-aria, 

he  would  speak. 

hablara 

or  hablase. 

habl-ariamos. 

we  should  speak. 

habláramos, 

or  hablásemos, 

habl-ariais. 

ye  would  speak. 

hablarais 

or  hablaseis. 

habl-arian, 

they  would  speak. 

hablaran 

or  hablasen. 

Imperative. 

habl-a. 

speak  {thou). 

habl-emos. 

let  US  speak. 

habl-e, 

let  him  speak. 

habl-ad. 

speak  {ye). 

habl-e  V., 

speak. 

habl-en, 

let  them  speak. 

If  I spokej  etc. 


The  Spanish  Language. 


429 


COMPOUND  TENSES. 


Indicative  Mode. 
Present  Perfect. 
he  hablado,  / have  spoken. 

Past  Perfect. 

había  hablado,  I had  spoken. 

Past  Anterior. 
hube  hablado,  I had  spoken. 

Future  Perfect. 
habré  hablado,  I shall  have 
spoken. 

Past  Conditional. 
habría  hablado,  I should  have 
^ spoken. 


Subjtmctive  Mode. 

Present  Perfect. 
haya  hablado,  I may  have 
spoken. 

Past  Perfect  {first  form). 
hubiera  hablado,  I might  have 
spoken. 

Past  Perfect  {second  form). 
hubiese  hablado,  I might  have 
spoken. 

Future  Perfect. 
hubiere  hablado,  I shall  have 
spoken. 

Past  Conditional. 
hubiera  or  hubiese  hablado,  {if) 
I had  spoken. 


Second  Conjugation. 

Model  Verb  Vender,  To  Sell. 


Infinitive.  Gerund.  Past  Participle. 


vend-er,  to  sell.  vend-iendo,  selling.  vend-ido,  sold. 


Indicative  Mode. 


Subjunctive  Mode. 


Present. 

vend-o,  I sell. 

vend-es,  thou  sellest. 
vend-e,  he  sells. 

(vend-emos,  we  sell. 

vend-éis,  ye  sell. 

vend-en,  they  sell. 


Present. 


vend-a, 

vend-as, 

vend-a, 

vend-amos, 

vend-áis, 

vend-an. 


I may 
thou  mayst 
he  may 
we  may 
ye  may 
they  may 


430 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


Indicative  Mode. 
Imperfect. 


Subjunctive  Mode. 

Imperfect  {first  form). 


vend-ia, 

I was 

vend-iera, 

I might 

vend-ias, 

thou  wast 

vend-ieras, 

thou  mightest 

vend-ia, 

he  was 

% 

»•  ^ 

vend-iera, 

he  might 

vend-iamos, 

we  were 

0^ 

vend-iéramos. 

we  might 

vend-iais, 

ye  were 

vend-ierais. 

ye  might 

vend-ian, 

they  were 

vend-ieran. 

they  might 

Past. 

Imperfect 

{second  form) . 

vend-i 

/ sold. 

vend-iese. 

I might 

vend-iste, 

thou  soldest. 

vend-ieses. 

thou  mightest 

vend-io, 

he  sold. 

vend-iese. 

he  might 

vend-imos, 

we  sold. 

vend-iesemos. 

we  might 

vend-isteis, 

ye  sold. 

vend-ieseis. 

ye  might 

vend-ieron, 

they  sold. 

vend-iesen. 

they  might 

Future. 


Future. 


vend-eré. 

I shall 

vend-iere. 

I should 

vend-erás. 

thou  wilt 

vend-ieres. 

thou  shouldst 

vend-erá. 

he  will 

e 

L c 

vend-iere. 

he  should 

vend-eremos. 

we  shall 

vend-ieremos,  we  should 

vend-eréis. 

ye  wilt 

vend-iereis. 

ye  should 

vend-erán, 

they  will 

vend-ieren. 

they  should 

Conditional. 

Conditional. 

vend-ería. 

I should 

vendiera 

or  vendiese. 

vend-erías. 

thou  wouldst 

vendieras 

or  vendieses. 

vend-ería. 

he  would 

to 

► 

vendiera 

or  vendiese. 

vend-eríamos. 

we  should 

vendiéramos 

or  vendiésemos 

vend-eríais. 

ye  would 

vendierais 

or  vendieseis, 

vend-erían. 

they  would 

vendieran 

or  vendiesen, 

Imperative. 


vend-e, 
vend-a, 
vend-a  V., 


sell  {thou), 
let  him  sell, 
sell  {you). 


vend-amos, 

vend-ed, 

vend-an, 


let  us  sell, 
sell  {ye), 
let  them  sell. 


{if)  I sold,  etc. 


The  Spanish  Language, 


431 


COMPOUND  TENSES. 


Indicative  Mode. 

Present  Perfect. 
he  vendido,  I have  sold. 

Past  Perfect. 
había- vendido,  / had  sold. 

Past  Anterior. 
hube  vendido,  I had  sold. 
Future  Perfect. 
habré  vendido,  I shall  have  sold. 

Past  Conditional. 
habría  vendido,  I should  have 
sold. 


Subjunctive  Mode. 

Present  Perfect. 
haya  vendido,  I may  have  sold 
Past  Perfect  (first  form). 
hubiera  vendido,  I might  have  sold 
Past  Perfect  (second  form) . 
hubiese  vendido,  I might  have  sold 
Future  Perfect. 
hubiere  vendido,  I should  have 
sold. 

Past  Conditional. 
hubiera  or  hubiese  vendido,  (if) 
I had  sold. 


Third  Conjugation. 

Model  Verb  Vivir,  To  Live. 


SIMPLE  TENSES. 

Infinitive.  Gerund.  Past  Participle. 


viv-ir, 

to  live.  viv-iendo, 

living. 

viv-ido,  lived. 

Indicative  Mode. 

Subjunctive  Mode. 

Present. 

Present. 

viv-o. 

I live. 

yiv-a. 

I may  live. 

viv-es. 

thou  livest. 

viv-as. 

thou  mayst  live. 

viv-e. 

he  lives. 

viv-a. 

he  may  live. 

viv-imos,  we  live. 

viv-amos. 

we  may  live. 

viv-is. 

ye  live. 

viv-áis. 

ye  may  live. 

viv-en. 

they  live. 

viv-an. 

they  may  live. 

432 


The  Rosenthal  Method, 


Indicative  Mode.  Subjunctive  Mode. 


Imperfect.  Imperfect  {first  form). 


viv-ia, 

I was  living. 

viv-iera. 

I might  Uve, 

viv-ias, 

thou  wast  living. 

viv-ieras. 

thou  mightest  Uve, 

viv-ia, 

he  waSy  etc. 

viv-iera. 

he  mighty  etc. 

viv-iamos, 

we  werey  etc. 

viv-iéramos. 

y we  mighty  etc. 

viv-iais, 

ye  werey  etc. 

viv-ierais. 

ye  mighty  etc. 

viv-ian, 

they  werey 

etc. 

viv-ieran. 

they  mighty  etc. 

Past. 

Imperfect  (second  form), 

viv-i, 

/ lived. 

viv-iese. 

I might 

viv-iste, 

thou  livedst. 

viv-ieses. 

thou  mightest 

viv-ió, 

he  lived. 

viv-iese. 

he  might 

viv-imos, 

we  lived. 

viv-iésemos, 

, we  might 

< 

viv-isteis, 

ye  lived. 

viv-ieseis, 

ye  might 

viv-ieron, 

they  lived. 

viv-iesen. 

they  might 

Future. 

Future. 

viv-iré, 

I shall 

viv-iere. 

’ I should 

viv-irás, 

thou  wilt 

viv-ieres. 

thou  wouldst 

viv-irá, 

he  will 

5^ 

viv-iere. 

he  would 

viv-iremos, 

we  shall 

viv-ieremos,  we  should 

" ¡ 

viv-iréis, 

ye  will 

viv-iereis. 

ye  would 

viv-irán, 

they  will 

viv-ieren. 

they  would 

Conditional. 

Conditional. 

viv-iría, 

I should 

1 

viviera 

or  viviese. 

c 

viv-irías, 

thou  wouldst 

vivieras 

or  vivieses. 

s 

1 

viv-iría, 

he  would 

viviera 

or  viviese. 

viv-iríamos, 

, we  should 

viviéramos 

or  viviésemos. 

J 

viv-iríais,  * 

ye  would 

vivierais 

or  vivieseis. 

viv-irían, 

they  would 

vivieran 

or  viviesen, 

Imperative. 

viv-e. 

live  (thou). 

viv-amos. 

let  us  live. 

viv-a. 

let  him  live. 

viv-id. 

live  (ye). 

viv-a  V. 

live  (you). 

viv-an. 

let  them  live. 

live,  live,  (if)  I livedy  etc. 


The  Spanish  Language, 


433 


COMPOUND  TENSES. 


Indicative  Mode. 

Present  Perfect. 
he  vivido,  I have  lived. 

Past  Perfect. 
había  vivido,  I had  lived. 

Past  Anterior. 
hube  vivido,  I had  lived. 
Future  Perfect. 
habré  vivido,  I shall  have  lived. 
Past  Conditional. 
habría  vivido,  I should  have  lived. 


Subjunctive  Mode. 

Present  Perfect. 
haya  vivido,  / may  have  lived. 
Past  Perfect  {first  form). 
hubiera  vivido,  I might  have  lived. 
Past  Perfect  {second  form), 
hubiese  vivido-,  I might  have  lived. 
Future  Perfect. 
hubiere  vivido,  I should  have  lived. 
Past  Conditional. 
hubiera  or  hubiese  vivido,  {if)  1 
had  lived. 


Observations  on  Certain  Regular  Verbs. 


Certain  orthographical  changes  take  place  in  the 
following  regular  verbs: 

I.  Verbs  ending  in  gar  insert  u before  e,  as: 


Infinitive.  Subjunctive  Pres.  Past. 

pagar,  to  pay.  pague,  pagues,  pague,  etc.  pagué. 

2.  Verbs  ending  in  car  change  c into  qu  before  e,  as: 

Infinitive.  Subjunctive  Pres.  Past. 

tocar,  to  play.  toque,  toques,  toque,  etc.  toqué. 


3.  Verbs  ending  in  zar  change  z into  c before  e,  as: 


Infinitive.  Subjunctive  Pres.  Past. 

rezar,  to  pray,  rece,  reces,  rece,  etc.  recé. 

4.  Verbs  ending  in  cer  or  cir  change  c into  z before  o or  a, 
, to  preserve  the  soft  sound,  as: 


Infinitive. 
veneer,  to  vanquish. 

resarcir,  to  compensate. 


Present  Indicat. 
venzo,  etc. 


Subjunctive  Pres. 
venza,  etc. 
resarza,  etc. 


resarzo. 


434 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


5.  Verbs  ending  in  ger  or  gir  change  g into  j before 
o or  a,  as: 

Infinitive.  Ind.  Present.  Subj.  Present. 

coger,  to  take  cojo,  etc.  coja,  etc. 

erigir,  to  erect.  erijo,  etc.  erija,  etc. 

6.  Verbs  ending  in  guir  change  gu  into  g,  and  verbs 
ending  in  quir  change  qu  into  c before  o or  a,  as: 

Infinitive.  Ind.  Present.  Subj.  Present. 

distinguir,  to  distinguish  distingo,  etc.  distinga,  etc. 

delinquir,  to  offend.  delinco,  etc.  delinca,  etc. 

7.  Verbs  ending  in  cer  or  cir  preceded  by  a vowel  insert 
before  the  stem-ending  a z as  often  as  the  stem  meets 
an  a or  an  o,  as: 

conocer,  to  know. 

Indicat.  Pres,  conozco  {hut:  conoces,  conoce,  conocemos,  etc.). 
SuBjUNCT.  Pres,  conozca,  conozcas,  conozca,  conozcamos,  conoz- 
cáis, conozcan. 

Imperative.  conozca,  conozcamos,  conozcan. 

lucir,  to  shine,  to  display. 

Indicat.  Pres,  luzco  {hut:  luces,  luce,  lucimos,  etc.). 

SuBjUNCT.  Pres,  luzca,  luzcas,  luzca,  luzcamos,  luzcáis,  luzcan. 
Imperative.  luzca,  luzcamos,  luzcan. 

8.  The  following  six  regular  verbs  have  an  irregular 
past  participle: 


Infinitive.  Past  Participle. 


abrir, 

to  open. 

abierto. 

opened. 

cubrir, 

to  cover. 

cubierto. 

covered. 

descubrir, 

to  discover. 

descubierto. 

discovered. 

escribir. 

to  write. 

escrito. 

written. 

imprimir. 

to  print. 

impreso. 

printed. 

romper. 

to  break. 

roto. 

broken. 

The  Spanish  Language, 


43S 


Conjugation  of  the  Passive  Verb. 
Model  Verb,  Ser  Llamado.— To  be  called. 
SIMPLE  TENSES. 


ser 


Infinitive. 
j llamado,  a 
\ llamados,  as 

Gerund. 


to  be  called. 


siendo  | ^ called, 

[ llamados,  as  J 


Participle. 

llamado,  llamada;  llamados,  llamadas,  having  been  called. 
Indicative  Mode.  Subjunctive  Mode. 


Present. 
r am  called^  etc, 
soy  llamado,  a. 
eres  llamado,  a. 
es  llamado,  a. 
somos  llamados,  as. 
sois  llamados,  as. 
son  llamados,  as. 

Imperfect. 
r was  called^  etc, 
era  llamado,  a. 
éramos  llamados,  as. 

Past. 

r was  called^  etc, 
fui  llamado,  a. 
fuimos  llamados,  as. 

Future. 
r shall  be  called^  etc, 
seré  llamado,  a. 
seremos  llamados,  as. 


Present. 

I may  be  called^  etc, 
sea  llamado,  a. 
seas  llamado,  a. 
sea  Uamado,  a. 
seamos  llamados,  as. 
seáis  llamados,  as. 
sean  llamados,  as. 

Imperfect  (first  form), 

I might  be  called  ^ etc, 
fuera  Uamado,  a. 
fuéramos  llamados,  as. 

Imperfect  (second  form), 
I might  be  called^  etc, 
fuese  Uamado,  a. 
fuésemos  Uamados,  as. 

Future. 

I should  be  called^  etc, 
fuere  Uamado,  a. 
fuéremos  Uamados,  as. 


436 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


Indicative  Mode. 

Conditional. 

1 should  he  called^  etc, 
sería  llamado,  a. 
seríamos  llamados,  as. 

Compound 

Present  Perfect. 

I have  been  called^  etc. 
he  sido  llamada,  a. 
hemos  sido  llamados,  as. 

Past  Perfect. 

I had  been  called^  etc. 
había  sido  llamado,  a. 
habíamos  sido  llamados,  as.' 

Past  Anterior. 

I had  been  called^  etc. 
hube  sido  llamado,  a. 
hubimos  sido  llamados,  as. 

Future  Perfect. 

I shall  have  been  called^  etc. 
habré  sido  llamado,  a. 
habremos  sido  llamados,  as. 

Past  Conditional. 

I should  have  been  called^  etc. 
habría  sido  llamado,  a. 
habríamos  sido  llamados,  as. 


Subjunctive  Mode. 

Conditional. 

(If)  I were  called,  etc. 

fuera  or  fuese  llamado,  a. 
fuéramos  or  fuésemos  llama-  | 
dos,  as. 

Tenses. 

Present  Perfect. 

I may  have  been  called,  etc. 
haya  sido  llamado,  a. 
hayamos  sido  llamados,  as. 

Past  Perfect  (first form). 

I might  have  been  called,  etc. 
hubiera  sido  llamado,  a. 
hubiéramos  sido  llamados,  as. 

Past  Perfect  (second  form). 

I might  have  been  called,  etc. 
hubiese  sido  llamado,  a. 
hubiésemos  sido  llamados,  as. 

Future  Perfect. 

I should  have  been  called. 
hubiere  sido  llamado,  a. 
hubiéremos  sido  llamados,  as. 

Past  Conditional. 

(If)  I had  been  called,  etc. 

hubiera  or  hubiese  sido  llama- i 
do,  a. 

hubiéramos  or  hubiésemos 
sido  llamados,  as- 


Remarks  on  the  Passive. 

I.  The  passive  participle  must  agree  in  gender  and  num- 
ber with  the  subject  of  the  sentence,  as: 


The  Spanish  Language, 


437 


Estos  niños  son  amados,  These  children  are  loved. 

Estas  señoras  han  sido  siempre  These  ladies  have  always  been  very 
muy  estimadas,  much  esteemed. 

2.  By,  after  passive  verbs  or  participles,  is  rendered  by 
por,  except  when  the  verb  denotes  feeling  or  emotion, 
when  it  is  rendered  by  de,  as: 

Este  libro  fué  escrito  por  Cas-  Thü  hook  was  written  by  Castelar, 
telar, 

Este  cuadro  fué  pintado  por  This  picture  was  painted  by 

Murillo,  Murillo. 

Este  escritor  es  estimado  de  This  writer  is  esteemed  by  many, 

muchos, 

3.  Active  verbs  are  often  used  passively  with  the 
pronoun  se  in  the  third  person  singular  or  plural,  as: 
Estas  manzanas  se  venden  a These  apples  are  sold  at  very  high 

precios  muy  altos,  prices. 

Esta  casa  se  alquiló  hace  más  de  This  house  was  let  more  than  a 
un  mes,  month  ago. 

No  se  puede  ver  nada,  Nothing  can  he  seen. 


EXERCISE. 


I Cómo  está  V.?  Tengo  mucho  gusto  en  ver  a V. — 
Estoy  muy  bien,  gracias.  ¿Y  V.? — Para  servir  a V., 
gracias. — ¿ Viene  V.  a pasar  mucho  tiempo  en  Nueva 
York? — No,  señor,  vengo  solamente  por  algunos  días 
por  asuntos  comerciales. — ¿ Tiene  V.  relaciones  comercia- 
les con  países  españoles? — Sí,  tenemos  negocios  con  la 
América  del  Sur. — ¿ Desearía  V.  importar  algo  en  los 
Estados  Unidos? — Desearía  importar  café,  tabaco,  azúcar, 
cedro,^  lana  algunas  frutas. — ¿ Desea  V.  vender  al  con- 
tado^ o a crédito? — ^A  algunos  comerciantes  les  venderé  a 
un  corto  plazo,^  o cambiaré  mis  productos  por  efectos 


^ Cedar- wood. — ^ por  cash. — ^ Plazo  corresponds  to  our  Eng- 
lish expression  terms ^ a plazo,  on  credit;  a largo  plazo,  on  long 
credit;  a corto  plazo,  on  short  credit. — ^ A branch. — ® At  the  head 
of  which. — ® One  of  my  brothers. — A power  of  attorney. — ®To 


43S 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


americanos. — ¿ Cómo  piensa  V.  hacer  esas  importaciones? 
— Mi  idea  es  establecer  aquí  una  sucursal^  de  mi  casa  de 
Valparaíso,  a cuyo  frente^  estará  un  hermano  mío.® — Él 
necesitará  un  poder^  para  hacer  legales^  esas  transac- 
ciones.— ¿ Quién  tiene  que  firmar®  un  poder  para  que 
sea  válido? — Un  poder  para  ser  válido  tiene  que  ser 
firmado  ante  un  notario  público  y por  dos  testigos.^® 
— Tengo  que  ir  al  correo  ahora  pues  espero  algunas  car- 
tas. I No  quiere  V.  venir  conmigo? — Bien  pues,  vamos 
abajo^^  de  la  ciudad. — ¿ Cuánto  pedirá  un  cochero  por 
llevarnos^^  a la  parte  baja  de  la  ciudad?  Los  cocheros 
de  Nueva  York  piden  muy  caro;  el  tren  elevado  cuesta 
solamente  cinco  centavos. 


The  Reflexive  Conjugation. 


Reflexive  or  pronominal  verbs  are  conjugated  with 
two  personal  pronouns,  the  first  (expressed  or  under- 
stood) being  the  subject,  and  the  second  the  object, 


as: 

Yo  me  divierto  or  me  divierto,  I amuse  myself. 

É1  se  engaña  or  se  engaña,  He  deceives  himself. 

Pronouns  Accompanying  the  Reflexive  Verb. 


me, 

te, 

se. 


myself.  nos, 

thyself.  os, 

/ himself f herself. 

\ itself f yourself.  ’ 


ourselves. 

yourselves. 

{themselves, 
yourselves. 


legalize. — ^ To  sign. — Witnesses. — Abajo,  down;  arriba,  up; 
abajo  de  la  ciudad  or  a la  parte  baja  de  la  ciudad,  down  town;  arriba 
de  la  ciudad  or  a la  parte  alta  de  la  ciudad,  uptown. — For  driving 
us. 


The  Spanish  Language, 


439 


Almost  any  verb  may  be  used  reflexively  in  Spanish, 
which  sometimes  occasions  a slight  modification  in  their 
meaning,  as: 

Dormir;  dormirse,  To  sleep;  to  go  to  sleep. 

Ir;  irse,  To  go;  to  go  away. 

Caer;  caerse.  To  fall \ to  fall  down. 


Model  Verb:  Alabarse,  to  Praise  One^s  self. 
SIMPLE  TENSES. 


Infinitive. 

alabarse,  to  praise  one^s  self. 

Indicative  Mode. 

Present. 

I praise  myself,  etc. 
me  alabo, 
te  alabas, 
se  alaba, 
nos  alabamos, 
os  alabáis, 
se  alaban. 

Imperfect. 

I praised  myself,  etc. 
me  alababa, 
te  alababas, 
se  alababa,  etc. 

Past. 

I praised  myself,  etc. 
me  alabé, 
te  alabaste, 
se  alabó,  etc. 

Future. 

I shall  praise  myself,  etc. 
me  alabaré, 
te  alabarás, 
se  alabará,  etc. 


Gerund 

alabándose,  praising  one's  self. 
Subjunctive  Mode. 
Present. 

I may  praise  myself,  etc. 
me  alabe, 
te  alabes, 
se  alabe, 
nos  alabemos, 
os  alabéis, 
se  alaben. 

Imperfect  {first  form). 

I might  praise  myself,  etc. 
me  alabara, 
te  alabaras, 
se  alabara,  etc. 

Imperfect  {second  form) c 
I might  praise  myself,  etc. 
me  alabase, 
te  alabases, 
se  alabase,  etc. 

Future. 

I should  praise  myself,  etc. 
me  alabare, 
te  alabares, 
se  alabare,  etc. 


440 


The  Rosenthal  Method, 


Indicative  Mode. 

Conditional. 

I should  praise  myself  y etc, 
me  alabaría, 
te  alabarías, 
se  alabaría,  etc. 


Subjunctive  Mode. 

Conditional. 

{If)  I praised  my  self y etc, 
me  alabara  or  alabase, 
te  alabaras  or  alabases, 
se  alabara  or  alabase,  etc. 


Imperative. 


alábate,  praise  thyself, 
alábese,  let  him  praise  himself. 
alábese,  praise  yourself. 


alabémonos,  let  us  praise  our 
selves. 

alabaos,  praise  yourselves. 
alábense,  let  them  praise  them- 
selves. 


COMPOUND  TENSES. 


Indicative  Mode. 

Present  Perfect. 

I have  praised  myself,  etc. 
me  he  alabado, 
te  has  alabado, 
se  ha  alabado, 
nos  hemos  alabado, 
os  habéis  alabado, 
se  han  alabado. 

Past  Perfect. 

I had  praised  myself  y etc. 
me  había  alabado,  etc. 

Past  Anterior. 

I had  praised  myself y etc. 
me  hube  alabado,  etc. 


Subjunctive  Mode. 

Present  Perfect. 

I may  have  praised  myself  y etc. 
me  haya  alabado, 
te  hayas  alabado, 
se  haya  alabado, 
nos  hayamos  alabado, 
os  hayáis  alabado, 
se  hayan  alabado. 

Past  Perfect  {first  form). 

I might  have  praised  myself  y etc. 
me  hubiere  alabado,  etc. 

Past  Perfect  {second  form). 

I might  have  praised  myself  y etc. 
me  hubiese  alabado,  etc. 


The  Spanish  Language. 


441 


Future  Perfect. 

I shall  have  praised  myself  ^ etc. 
me  habré  alabado,  etc. 

Past  Conditional. 

I should  have  praised  myself ^ etc. 
me  habría  alabado,  etc. 


Future  Perfect. 

I should  have  praised  myself^  etc. 
me  hubiere  alabado,  etc. 

Past  Conditional. 

(//)  I had  praised  my  self ^ etc. 
me  hubiera  or  hubiese  ala- 
bado, etc. 


Observations  on  the  Reflexive  and  the  Passive  Verb. 


I.  The  pronouns  which  are  generally  placed  before 
the  verb  may  also  stand  after  it,  forming  but  one  word 


with  the  verb,  as: 
Divertimonos, 
Equivoqueme, 
Equivocóse, 

Heme  equivocado, 


We  amuse  ourselves, 

I made  a mistake. 

He  made  a mistake. 

I have  made  a mistake. 


2.  The  s of  the  first  person  plural  and  the  d of  the 
second  person  plural  are  dropped  in  the  Imperative, 
as: 

Figurémonos  {for  figurémomos).  Let  us  imagine. 

Amémonos  {for  amemomos).  Lei  us  love  each  other. 

Figuraos  {for  figurados).  Imagine  {ye)l 

3.  The  number  of  essentially  reflexive  verbs  is  small, 
but  accidentally  reflexive  verbs  may  be  formed  in  an  un- 
limited number,  as  almost  any  verb  can  be  used  reflexive- 
ly  in  Spanish. 

4.  Many  verbs  are  reflexive  in  Spanish  which  are  not 
so  in  English,  as: 

alegrarse,  to  rejoice.  equivocarse,  to  he  mistaken. 

figurarse,  to  imagine.  engañarse,  to  he  deceived.. 

disgustarse,  to  he  displeased.  burlarse,  to  laugh  at. 


442 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


5.  Permanently  reflexive  verbs  may  be  conjugated 
impersonally  with  se  (the  dative  of  the  pronoun  serving 
to  distinguish  the  person,  etc.). 

Personal  Inflection.  Impersonal  Inflection.  , 


me  figuro. 

se  me  figura. 

I imagine. 

te  figuras. 

se  te  figura. 

(/o 

thou  imaginest. 

se  figura. 

se  le  figura. 

he  imagines. 

V.  se  figura. 

Ci 
— s 

se  le  figura  a V., 

you  imagine. 

nos  figuramos. 

I ^ 
Vi 

se  nos  figura. 

we  imagine. 

os  figuráis. 

ío 

Ci 

se  os  figura. 

0 

ye  imagine. 

se  figuran. 

se  les  figura. 

they  imagine. 

V.  V.  se  figuran. 

se  les  figura  a V.  V., 

you  imagine. 

6.  The  passive  voice  is  little  used  nowadays.  It  is 
mostly  replaced  by  the  particle  se  and  the  verb  in  its 
active  form,  as: 


El  dinero  se  ganó, 

El  dinero  se  perdió, 

Las  casas  se  han  vendido. 

Eso  no  se  puede  decir. 

Aquí  se  habla  español. 

Se  hacen  cobros  y pagos. 

Se  cambia  toda  clase  de  moneda. 
Se  compran  valores  de  la  deuda 
pública. 

Se  prohibe  fijar  carteles. 


The  money  was  won. 

The  money  was  lost. 

The  houses  have  been  sold. 

That  cannot  he  said. 

Spanish  spoken  here. 

Collections  and  payments  made. 
All  kinds  of  coin  exchanged. 
Government  securities  bought. 

*‘Post  no  bills.'' 


7.  Reflexive  verbs,  when  used  with  plural  persons, 
express  sometimes  a mutual  or  reciprocal  action  in 
Spanish,  as: 

Se  han  escrito  muchas  cartas.  They  have  written  many  letters  to 

each  other. 

Todos  los  individuos  de  esta  All  the  members  of  this  family  are 
familia  se  quieren,  fond  of  one  another. 

8.  In  such  cases  uno  a otro  or  mutuamente  is  fre- 
quently added  for  distinctness’  sake,  as: 

Se  aman  el  uno  al  otro.  They  love  each  other. 

Nos  amamos  mutuamente,  We  love  each  other. 


The  Spanish  Language, 


443 


9.  The  reflexive  pronoun  is  used  in  Spanish  when 
the  object  of  the  verb  is  a part  of  the  body  or  refers 
to  articles  of  dress,  as: 


La  mesa  está  servida.  Pasemos  al  comedor. — ¿ En- 
contraremos coches  en  la  estación?— Sí,  señor;  se  ha 
establecido  un  servicio  de  ómnibus  para  todos  los  pueblos 
a cuatro  leguas  a la  redonda. — La  lengua  alemana  se 
habla  en  una  gran  parte  de  Europa.  El  idioma  español 
se  habla  en  España,  en  Méjico,  en  la  América  central  y 
del  sur,  y en  muchas  colonias  del  Asia  y del  Africa. — 
Yo  acostumbro  levantarme  temprano  y acostarme  tarde. — 
Este  paño  se  vende  en  la  tienda  del  señor  Palma. — ¿ Qué 
se  dice  en  la  ciudad?  Se  dice  que  el  azúcar  se  venderá 
muy  bien  este  año. — La  hacienda  ha  sido  vendida  después 
de  la  muerte  del  dueño.  ¿ Por  qué  no  se  sienta  V.? — No 
estoy  cansado,  prefiero  quedarme  parado. — ¿ Se  levanta 
V.  temprano? — Me  levanto  tan  pronto  como  me  despier- 
to.— I Por  qué  no  va  V.  al  jardín  a divertirse  con  las 
muchachas? — No  me  siento  bien,  quiero  ir  a acostarme. — 
I Se  acuerda  V.  de  lo  que  dijo  este  hombre? — Me  acuerdo 
de  todo  lo  que  dijo. 


Impersonal  Verbs  are  employed  in  the  third  person 
singular,  without  any  pronoun. 

Impersonal  Verbs  are  inflected  according  to  the  con- 
jugation indicated  by  their  infinitive. 


Me  pongo  el  sombrero, 
El  se  lava  la  cara, 

Me  quito  los  guantes. 


I put  on  my  hat. 

He  ivashes  his  face, 
I take  off  my  gloves. 


EXERCISE, 


Impersonal  Verbs. 


444 


The  Rosenthal  Method, 


I.  Nevar,  nevando,  nevado,  to  snow. 

Indicative  Mode.  Subjunctive  Mode. 


nieva, 
nevaba, 
nevó, 
nevará, 
nevaría, 
ha  nevado, 
había  nevado, 
hubo  nevado, 
habrá  nevado, 
habría  nevado. 


it  snows, 
it  was  snowing, 
it  snowed, 
it  will  snow, 
it  would  snow, 
it  has 
it  had 

{when)  it  had 
it  will  have 
it  would  have 


nieve, 
nevara, 
nevase, 
nevare, 
nevara, 
haya  nevado, 
hubiera  nevado, 
hubiese  nevado, 
hubiere  nevado, 
hubiera  nevado. 


it  may  snow, 
it  might  snow, 
it  might  snow, 
it  should  snow, 
{if)  it  snowed, 
it  may  ) ^ 
it  might  I § 
it  might  I i ^ 
it  should  J 
{if)  it  had  snowed. 


2.  Llover,  lloviendo,  llovido,  to  rain. 
Indicative  Mode. 


Subjunctive  Mode. 


llueve. 

it  rains. 

llueva. 

it  may  rain. 

llovía. 

it  was  raining. 

lloviera. 

it  might  rain. 

llovió. 

it  rained. 

lloviese. 

it  might  rain. 

lloverá. 

it  will  rain. 

lloviere. 

it  should  rain. 

llovería. 

it  would  rain. 

lloviera. 

{if)  it  rained. 

3.  Amanecer,  amaneciendo,  amanecido,  to  dawn. 

Indicative  Mode.  Subjunctive  Mode. 


amanece, 

amanecía, 

ameneció, 

amanecerá, 

amanecería. 


it  dawns, 
it  was  dawning, 
it  dawned. . 
it  will  dawn, 
it  would  dawn. 


amanezca, 

amaneciera, 

amaneciese, 

amaneciere, 

amaneciera. 


it  may  dawn, 
it  might  dawn, 
it  might  dawn, 
it  should  dawn, 
{if)  it  dawned. 


4.  List  of  the  most  common  Impersonal  Verbs. 

Infinitive.  Indicat.  Present.  Participle. 


amanecer. 

to  dawn. 

amanece. 

amanecido. 

anochecer. 

to  grow  dark. 

anochece. 

anochecido. 

oscurecer. 

to  grow  dark. 

oscurece. 

oscurecido. 

granizar. 

to  hail. 

graniza. 

granizado. 

helar. 

to  freeze. 

hiela. 

helado. 

deshelar. 

to  thaw. 

deshiela. 

deshelado. 

The  Spanish  Language, 


44S 


Hover, 

lloviznar, 

nevar, 

relampaguear, 

tronar, 

ventiscar. 


to  rain, 
to  drizzle, 
to  snow, 
to  lighten, 
to  thunder, 
to  storm. 


llueve. 

llovizna. 

nieva. 

relampaguea. 

truena. 

ventisca. 


Uovido. 

lloviznado. 

nevado. 

relampagueado. 

tronado. 

ventiscado. 


5.  Some  personal  verbs  are  used  impersonally,  as: 


Bastar,  to  suffice. 

Convenir,  to  agree; 
to  suit. 

Gustar,  to  please. 

Disgustar,  to  dis- 
please. 

Fastidiar,  to  vex. 

Importar,  to  he  of 
importance. 

Parecer,  to  seem. 

Placer,  to  please. 

Displacer,  to  dis- 
please. 

suceder,  to  happen. 

valer,  to  he  worth. 


Basta  que  V.  lo  diga,  it  is  sufficient  that  you 
say  so. 

Conviene  hacer  esto,  it  is  expedient  to  doit. 

Juan  me  conviene,  John  suits  me. 

Me  gusta  comer  a la  una,  I like  to  dine  at  one. 

Me  disgusta  oir  tal  cosa,  it  displeases  me  to 
hear  such  a thing. 

Me  fastidia  guardar  la  cama,  it  vexes  me  that 
I have  to  keep  ahed. 

Importa  decírselo,  it  is  important  to  tell  him  it. 

Parece  hacer  frío  hoy,  it  seems  to  he  cold  to-day. 

Me  place,  it  pleases  me;  I like  to. 

Me  displace,  it  displeases  me;  I dislike  to. 

Sucede  muchas  veces  que....,  it  happens 
often  that. . . . 

Más  vale  tarde  que  nunca,  better  late  than  never. 


6.  The  English  impersonal  expression  is’^  is  vari- 
ously rendered: 

a.  By  es  with  adjectives,  adverbs,  or  nouns,  as: 

Es  cierto;  así  es.  It  is  certain;  so  it  is. 

Es  menester;  es  preciso.  It  is  necessary. 

Es  de  día,  It  is  daylight, 

b.  By  está  to  denote  accidental  state,  as: 

Está  lloviendo.  It  is  raining. 

c.  By  hace,  it  makes,  with  reference  to  the  weather,  as: 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


44Ó 

I Qué  tiempo  hace?  What  kind  of  weather  is  it? 

Hace  buen  tiempo.  It  is  fine  weather. 

d.  By  hay  with  reference  to  a distance. 

I Cuánto  hay  de  aquí  al  banco?  How  far  is  it  from  here  to  the  hank? 

Government  of  Verbs. 

1.  The  object  of  a transitive  verb  stands  in  the  accu- 
sative (objective)  case  without  a preposition  when  it 
denotes  things. 

2.  When  persons  or  animals  are  designated,  the  prep- 
osition a is  used  before  the  object. 

Conozco  a este  hombre,  I know  this  man. 

3.  When  the  personal  object  is  preceded  by  a cardinal 
number,  a is  generally  omitted. 

He  visto  cuatro  mujeres,  I saw  four  women. 

4.  A is  also  left  out  when  the  personal  object  is  unknown 
or  indeterminate: 

He  convidado  algunos  amigos,  I have  invited  a few  friends. 

Busca  una  criada.  She  is  looking  for  a servant  girl. 

5.  After  tener  in  the  sense  of  to  have,  to  possess,  a 
is  omitted: 

Tengo  un  buen  hijo,  I have  a good  son. 

But  when  tener  is  used  in  the  sense  of  to  be,  a is  used : 
Tengo  a mi  hijo  enfermo.  My  son  is  ill. 

6.  After  the  verb  querer,  a is  used  in  the  sense  to  love, 
to  like: 

Quiero  a esta  muchacha,  I like  this  girl. 

Querer  without  a means  to  want,  to  wish : 

Quiero  un  hombre  honrado  que  I want  an  honest  man  who  speaks 
hable  inglés,  English. 

7.  A is  omitted  after  perder,  to  lose  (perder  a,  means 
to  ruin): 

He  perdido  mi  padre, 


I have  lost  my  father. 


The  Spanish  Language, 


447 


8.  Many  verbs  are  followed  in  Spanish  by  a,  de,  con, 
por,  para,  sobre,  etc.,  where  in  English  no  preposition  is 
used.  Some  of  these  verbs  may,  without  changing  their 
meaning,  govern  different  prepositions. 

9.  Most  reflective  verbs,  and  those  expressing  con- 
ditions of  the  mind,  abundance,  want,  separation,  de- 
privation, blame,  etc.,  are  generally  followed  by  the 
preposition  de.  Such  verbs  are: 


Abusar  de,  to  abuse. 
acordarse  de,  to  remember. 
admirarse  de,  to  wonder  at. 
alegrarse  de,  to  rejoice  at. 
aprovecharse  de,  to  use. 
avergonzarse  de,  to  be  ashamed  of. 
dudar  de,  to  doubt. 
fiarse  de,  to  trust. 
gozar  de,  to  enjoy. 
jactarse  de,  to  boast. 
lamentarse  de,  to  lament. 
mofarse  de,  to  scoff  at. 
necesitar  de,  to  need. 
olvidarse  de,  to  forget. 
preciarse  de,  to  boast. 
prescindir  de,  to  do  without. 


burlarse  de,  to  laugh  at. 
carecer  de,  to  want^  to  be  with- 
out. 

compadecerse  de,  to  pity. 
condolerse  de,  to  pity. 
desconfiar  de,  to  distrust. 
privarse  de,  to  deprive. 
reírse  de,  to  laugh  at. 
renegar  de,  to  abominate. 
servirse  de,  to  use. 
tener  lástima  de,  to  pity. 
tener  vergüenza  de,  to  be  ashamed 
of. 

usar  de,  to  use. 

valerse  de,  to  avail  one's  self  of. 
zafarse  de,  to  get  rid  of. 


IRREGULAR  VERBS. 

In  our  conversational  lessons  we  have  given  the  prin- 
cipal irregular  verbs.  The  Spanish  language  contains  a 
very  large  number  of  irregularly  inflected  verbs, — about 
850;  but  as  these  irregularities  occur  in  certain  modes, 
tenses  and  persons  only,  they  may  easily  be  reduced  to  a 
few  classes. 


448 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


Observe  that  in  the  following  tables  only  deviation 
from  the  three  model  regular  conjugations  are  printed  ii 
heavy  type. 

A long  mark  O has  been  placed  over  the  vov/el  c 
the  tonic  syllable. 

First  Class. 

a.  E Stems. — (First  Conjugation). 

The  characteristic  of  this  class  is  that  i is  inserted  befor 
the  stem-vowel  e=ie  throughout  the  singular  and  ii 
the  third  person  plural  of  the  present  indicative  and  sub 
junctive,  and  in  the  same  persons  in  the  imperative 
To  this  class  belong  a number  of  verbs  of  the  first  and  seci 
ond  conjugation. 

1.  Pensar,  pensando,  pensado,  to  think. 

Pres.  Ind.  piens-o,  piens-as,  piens-a,  pens-amos,  pens-áis,  piens-ai 
Pres.  5w¿>j.piens-e,  piens-es,  piens-e,  pens-emos,  pens-éis,  piens-ei 
Imperat.  piens-a,  piens-e,  pens-emos,  pens-ad,  piens-ei 

Note. — All  other  forms  are  regular: 
pensaba,  pensé,  pensara,  pensase,  pensare,  pensaré,  pensaría.^ 

2.  Acertar,  acertando,  acertado,  to  hit  the  mark. 

Pres.  Ind.  acierto,  aciertas,  acierta,  acertamos,  acertáis,  aciertai 
Pres.  Suhj.  acierte,  aciertes,  acierte,  acertemos,  acertéis,  aciertei 

Imperat.  acierta,  acierte,  acertemos,  acertad,  aciertei 

Reg.  acertaba,  acerté,  acertara,  acertase,  acertare,  acertaré,  acertaría 

3.  Alentar,  alentando,  alentado,  to  encourage^  to  cheey 
to  breathe. 

Pres.  Ind.  aliento,  alientas,  alienta,  alentamos,  alentáis,  alientai 

Pres.  Suhj.  aliente,  alientes,  aliente,  alentemos,  alentéis,  alientei 

Imperat.  alienta,  aliente,  alentemos,  alentad,  alientei 

Reg.  alentaba,  alenté,  alentara,  alentase,  alentare,  alentaré,  alentar!; 


The  Spanish  Language, 


449 


4.  Apretar,  apretando,  apretado,  to  grasp  tightly. 

Pres,  Ind.  aprieto,  aprietas,  aprieta,  apretamos,  apretáis,  aprietan. 
Pres.  Suhj.  apriete,  aprietes,  apriete,  apretemos,  apretéis,  aprieten. 

Imperat,  aprieta,  apriete,  apretemos,  apretad,  aprieten. 

i^e^.apretaba,  apreté,  apretara,  apretase,  apretare,  apretaré,  apretaría 

5.  Atestar,  atestando,  atestado,  to  crowds  to  attest. 

Pres,  Ind,  atiesto,  atiestas,  atiesta,  atestamos,  atestáis,  atiestan. 

Pres,  Suhj,  atieste,  atiestes,  atieste,  atestemos,  atestéis,  atiesten. 

Imperat,  atiesta,  atieste,  atestemos,  atestad,  atiesten. 

Reg,  atestaba,  atesté,  atestara,  atestase,  atestare,  atestaré,  atestaría. 

6.  Cerrar,  cerrando,  cerrado,  to  shut,  to  close. 

Pres,  Ind,  cierro,  cierras,  cierra,  cerramos,  cerráis,  cierran. 

Pres,  Suhj,  cierre,  cierres,  cierre,  cerremos,  cerréis,  cierren. 

Imperat,  cierra,  cierre,  cerremos,  cerrad,  cierren. 

Reg,  cerraba,  cerré,  cerrara,  cerrase,  cerrare,  cerraré,  cerraría. 

7.  Empezar,  empezando,  empezado,  to  begin, 

Pres,  Ind,  empiezo,  empiezas,  empieza,  empezamos,  empezáis, 

empiezan 

Pres,  Suhj,  empiece,  empieces,  empiece,  empecemos,  empecéis, 

empiecen 

Imperat, empieza,  empiece,  empecemos,  empezad,  empiecen 

Reg.  empezaba,  empecé,  empezara,  empezase,  etc. 

8.  Helar,  helando,  helado,  to  freeze, 

Pres.  Ind,  hielo,  hielas,  hiela,  helamos,  heláis,  hielan. 

Pres.  Suhj.  hiele,  liieles,  hiele,  helemos,  heléis,  hielen. 

Imperat.  hiela,  hiele,  helemos,  helad,  hielen. 

Reg.  helaba,  helé,  helara,  helase,  helare,  helaré,  helaría. 

9.  Negar,  negando,  negado,  to  deny, 

Pres.  Ind.  niego,  niegas,  niega,  negamos,  negáis,  niegan. 

Pres.  Suhj.  niegue,  niegues,  niegue,  neguemos,  neguéis,  nieguen. 

Imperat,  niega,  niegue,  neguemos,  negad,  nieguen. 

Reg.  negaba,  negué,  negara,  negase,  etc. 


450 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


lo.  Sembrar,  sembrando,  sembrado,  to  sow. 


Pr.  Ind. 

siembro. 

siembras. 

siembra. 

sembramos,  sembráis, 

siembran. 

Pr.  Suhj. 
Imperat. 

siembre. 

siembres, 

siembra. 

siembre, 

siembre. 

sembremos,  sembréis, 
siembren, 
sembremos,  sembrad, 

siembren. 

• 

Reg.  sembraba,  sembré,  sembrara,  sembrase,  etc. 

11.  Errar,  errando,  errado,  to  err. 

This  verb  may  be  included  in  this  class.  It  takes  y in  the  same 
tenses  and  persons  where  the  other  verbs  of  this  class  insert  i before 
the  stem- vowel. 

Pres.  Ind.  yerro,  yerras,  yerra,  erramos,  erráis,  yerran. 

Pres.  Suhj.  yerre,  yerres,  yerre,  erremos,  erréis,  yerren. 

Imperat.  yerra,  yerre,  erremos,  errad,  yerren. 

Reg.  erraba,  erré,  errara,  errase,  errare,  etc. 

b.  E Stems. — (Second  Conjugation). 

12.  Perder,  perdiendo,  perdido,  to  lose. 

Pres.  Ind.  pierdo,  pierdes,  pierde,  perdemos,  perdéis,  pierden. 
Pres.  Stthj.  pierda,  pierdas,  pierda,  perdamos,  perdáis,  pierdan. 

Imperat.  pierde,  pierda,  perdamos,  perded,  pierdan. 

Reg.  perdía,  perdí,  perdiera,  perdiese,  perdiere,  perderé,  perdería. 

13.  Entender,  entendiendo,  entendido,  to  understand. 

Pr.  Ind.  entiendo,  entiendes,  entiende,  entendemos,  entendéis, 
entienden. 

Pr.  Suhj.  entienda,  entiendas,  entienda,  entendamos,  entendáis, 
entiendan. 

Imperat.  entiende,  entienda,  entendemos,  entended, 

entiendan. 

Reg.  entendía,  entendí,  entendiera,  entendiese,  entendiere,  etc. 

c.  O Stems. — (First  Conjugation). 

The  characteristic  of  this  class  is  that  the  stem- 
vowel  o is  changed  into  ue  throughout  the  singular 


The  Spanish  Language, 


451 


and  in  the  third  person  plural  of  the  present  indicative 
and  subjunctive,  and  in  the  same  persons  in  ‘ the  im- 
perative. Many  verbs  of  the  first  and  second  conjuga- 
tion belong  to  this  class. 

14.  Acordar,  acordando,  acordado,  to  agree ^ to  remind y 
to  remember, 

Pr,  Ind.  acuerdo,  acuerdas,  acuerda,  acordamos,  acordáis, 

acuerdan. 

Pr.  Subj.  acuerde,  acuerdes,  acuerde,  acordemos,  acordéis, 

acuerden. 

Imperat,  acuerda,  acuerde,  acordemos,  acordad,  acuerden. 

Reg.  acordaba,  acordé,  acordara,  acordase,  acordare,  etc. 

15.  Contar,  contando,  contado,  to  count. 

Pres.  Ind.  cuento,  cuentas,  cuenta,  contamos,  contáis,  cuentan. 
Pres.  Subj.  cuente,  cuentes,  cuente,  contemos,  contéis,  cuenten. 

Imperat.  cuenta,  cuente,  contemos,  contad,  cuenten. 

Reg.  contaba,  conté,  contara,  contase,  contare,  contaré,  contaría. 

16.  Costar,  costando,  costado,  to  cost. 

Pres.  Ind.  cuesto,  cuestas,  cuesta,  costamos,  costáis,  cuestan. 
Pres.  Subj.  cueste,  cuestes,  cueste,  costemos,  costéis,  cuesten. 

Imperat.  cuesta,  cueste,  costemos,  costad,  cuesten. 

Reg.  costaba,  costé,  costara,  costase,  costare,  costaré,  costaría. 

17.  Hollar,  hollando,  hollado,  to  trample. 

Pres.  Ind.  huello,  huellas,  huella,  hollamos,  holláis,  huellan. 
Pres.  Subj.  huelle,  huelles,  huelle,  hollemos,  holléis,  huellen. 

Imperat.  huella,  huelle,  hollemos,  hollad,  huellen. 

Reg.  hollaba,  hollé,  hollara,  hollase,  hollare,  hollaré,  hollaría. 

18.  Probar,  probando,  probado,  to  prove. 

Pres.  Ind.  pruebo,  pruebas,  prueba,  probamos,  probáis,  prueban. 
Pres.  Subj.  pruebe,  pruebes,  pruebe,  probemos,  probéis,  prueben. 

Imperat.  prueba,  pruebe,  probemos,  probad,  prueben. 

Reg.  probaba,  probé,  probara,  probase,  probare,  probaré,  probaría. 


4S2 


The  Rosenthal  Method, 


19.  Sonar,  sonando,  sonado,  to  sound. 

Pres.  Ind.  sueno,  suenas,  suena,  sonamos,  sonáis,  suenan. 

Fres.  Subj.  suene,  suenes,  suene,  sonemos,  sonéis,  suenen. 

Imperat.  suena,  suene,  sonemos,  sonad,  suenen. 

Reg.  sonaba,  soné,  sonara,  sonase,  sonare,  sonaré,  sonaría. 

20.  Volar,  volando,  volado,  to  fly. 

Pres.  Ind.  vuelo,  vuelas,  vuela,  volamos,  voláis,  vuelan. 

Fres.  Subj.  vuele,  vueles,  vuele,  volemos,  voléis,  vuelen. 

Imperat.  vuela,  vuele,  volemos,  volad,  vuelen. 

Reg.  volaba,  volé,  volara,  volase,  volare,  volaré,  volaría. 

21.  Forzar,  forzando,  forzado,  to  force,  to  compel. 

Pres.  Ind.  fuerzo,  fuerzas,  fuerza,  forzamos,  forzáis,  fuerzan. 
PreSy  Subj.  fuerce,  fuerces,  fuerce,  forcemos,  forcéis,  fuercen. 

Imperat.  fuerza,  fuerce,  forcemos,  forzad,  fuercen. 

Reg.  forzaba,  forcé,  forzara,  forzase,  forzare,  forzaré,  forzaría. 

22.  Rogar,  rogando,  rogado,  to  request,  to  beg. 

Pres.  Ind.  ruego,  ruegas,  ruega,  rogamos,  rogáis,  ruegan. 

Fres.  Subj.  ruegue,  ruegues,  ruegue,  roguemos,  roguéis,  rueguen. 

Imperat.  ruega,  ruegue,  roguemos,  rogad,  rueguen. 

Reg.  rogaba,  rogué,  rogara,  rogase,  rogare,  rogaré,  rogaría. 

23.  Trocar,  trocando,  trocado,  to  barter. 

Pr.  Ind.  trueco,  truecas,  trueca,  .trocamos,  trocáis,  truecan. 
Pr.  Subj.  trueque,  trueques,  trueque,  troquemos,  troquéis, 

truequen. 

Imperat.  trueca,  trueque,  troquemos,  trocad,  truequen. 

Reg.  trocába,  troqué,  trocara,  trocase,  trocare,  trocaré,  trocaría. 

24.  Jugar,  jugando,  jugado,  to  play,  to  gamble. 

Pres.  Ind.  juego,  juegas,  juega,  jugamos,  jugáis,  juegan. 

Fres.  Subj.  juegue,  juegues,  juegue,  juguemos,  juguéis,  jueguen. 

Imperat.  juega,  juegue,  juguemos,  jugad,  jueguen. 

jugaba,  jugué,  jugara,  jugase,  jugare,  jugaré,  jugaría. 


The  Spanish  Language, 


453 


25.  Agorar,  agorando,  agorado,  to  divine. 

Fres,  Ind,  agüero,  agüeras,  agüera,  agoramos,  agoráis,  agüeran. 

Fres,  Subj.  agüere,  agüeres,  agüere,  agoremos,  agoréis,  agüeren. 

Imperat,  agüera,  agüere,  agoremos,  agorad,  agüeren. 

Reg.  agoraba,  agoré,  agorara,  agorase,  agorare,  agoraré,  agoraría. 

d,  O Stems. — (Second  Conjugation). 

26.  Moler,  moliendo,  molido,  to  grind. 

Fres.  Ind.  muelo,  mueles,  muele,  molemos,  moléis,  muelen. 

Fres.  Subj.  muela,  muelas,  muela,  molamos,  moláis,  muelan. 

Imperat.  muele,  muela,  molamos,  moled,  muelan. 

Reg.  molía,  molí,  moliera,  moliese,  moliere,  moleré,  molería. 

27.  Mover,  moviendo,  movido,  to  move. 

Fres.  Ind.  muevo,  mueves,  mueve,  movemos,  movéis,  mueven. 

Fres.  Subj.  mueva,  muevas,  mueva,  movamos,  mováis,  muevan. 

Imperat, mueve,  mueva,  movamos,  moved,  muevan. 

Reg.  movía,  moví,  moviera,  moviese,  moviere,  moveré,  movería. 

28.  Morder,  mordiendo,  mordido,  to  bite. 

Fr.  Ind.  muerdo,  muerdes,  muerde,  mordemos,  mordéis,  muerden. 
Pr.  Subj.  muerda,  muerdas,  muerda,  mordamos,  mordáis,  muerdan. 

Imperat.  muerde,  muerda,  mordamos,  morded,  muerdan. 

Reg.  mordía,  mordí,  mordiera,  mordiese,  mordiere,  morderé,  mor- 
dería. 

29.  Volver,  volviendo,  vuelto,  to  return. 

^res.  Ind.  vuelvo,  vuelves,  vuelve,  volvemos,  volvéis,  vuelven. 
"^res.  Subj.  vuelva,  vuelvas,  vuelva,  volvamos,  volváis,  vuelvan. 

^mperat.  vuelve,  vuelva,  volvamos,  volved,  vuelvan. 

volvía,  volví,  volviera,  volviese,  volviere,  volveré,  volvería. 

30.  Cocer,  cociendo,  cocido,  to  boil,  to  cook. 


454 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


Pres.  Ind.  cuezo,  cueces,  cuece,  cocemos,  cocéis,  cuecen. 

Pres.  Subj.  cueza,  cuezas,  cueza,  cozamos,  cozáis,  cuezan. 

Imperat.  cuece,  cueza,  cozamos,  coced,  cuezan. 

Reg.  cocía,  cocí,  cociera,  cociese,  cociere,  coceré,  cocería. 

31.  Torcer,  torciendo,  torcido,  to  twist. 

Pres.  Ind.  tuerzo,  tuerces,  tuerce,  torcemos,  torcéis,  tuercen. 
Pres.  Subj.  tuerza,  tuerzas,  tuerza,  torzamos,  torzáis,  tuerzan. 

Imperat.  tuerce,  tuerza,  torzamos,  torced,  tuerzan. 

Reg.  torcía,  torcí,  torciera,  torciese,  torciere,  torceré,  torcería. 

32.  Oler,  oliendo,  olido,  to  smelly  to  scent. 

Pres.  Ind.  huelo,  hueles,  huele,  olemos,  oléis,  huelen. 

Pres.  Subj.  huela,  huelas,  huela,  olamos,  oláis,  huelan. 

Imperat.  huele,  huela,  olamos,  oled,  huelan. 

Reg.  olía,  olí,  oliera,  oliese,  oliere,  oleré,  olería. 

Second  Class. 

This  class  contains  verbs  of  the  third  conjugation 
only  with  the  stem-vowels  e and  0. 

a.  E.  Stems. 

Verbs  of  this  class  insert  i before  the  stem-vowel  e 
throughout  the  singular  and  in  the  third  person  plural 
of  the  present  indicative  and  subjunctive,  and  in  the 
same  persons  in  the  imperative  (siento,  sientes,  etc.). 

In  the  first  and  second  persons  plural  of  the  present 
subjunctive,  and  in  the  first  person  plural  of  the  im- 
perative, the  stem-vowel  e is  changed  into  i (sintamos, 
sintáis). 

In  the  past  stem,  including  the  gerund,  the  stem- 
vowel  e is  changed  into  i whenever  the  inflection  con- 
tains the  diphthongs  ie  or  io. 


The  Spanish  Language. 


455 


33.  Sentir,  sintiendo,  sentido,  to  feel,  to  perceive. 

Pres.  Ind.  sient-o,  sient-es,  sient-e,  sent-imos,  sent-is,  sient-en. 

Pres.  Suhj.  sient-a,  sient-as,  sient-a,  sint>amos,  sint-áis,  sient-an. 

Imperat.  sient-e,  sient-a,  sint-amos,  sent-id,  sient-an. 

Imperf.  sent-ia,  -ias,  -ia,  -iamos,  -iais,  -fan. 

Past  Stem. — sint  (before  ie  or  ió). 

Gerund.  sintiendo. 

Past.  sent-i,  -iste,  -sintió,  sentimos,  -isteis,  sintieron. 

^Imp.  Suhj.  sint-iera,  -ieras,  -iéra,  -iéramos,  -ierais,  -iéran. 

^Imp.  Suhj.  sint-iése,  -iéses,  -iése,  -iésemos,  -ieseis,  -iésen. 

Fut.  Suh.  sint-iére,  -iéres,  -iére,  -iéremos,  -iereis,  -iéren. 

Future  Stem. — Regular. 

Future,  sentir-é,  -ás,  -á,  -emos,  -éis,  -án. 

Condit.  sentir-ía,  -ías,  -ía,  -íamos,  -íais,  -ían. 

34.  Advertir,  advirtiendo,  advertido,  to  observe,  to  advise. 


Pr.  Ind.  advierto,  adviertes, 

Pr.  Suhj.  advierta,  adviertas, 

Imperat.  advierte, 

Imperf.  advert-ía,  -ías. 

Gerund.  advirtiendo. 

Past,  advert-í,  -iste,  advirtió, 
^Imp.  Sj.  advirt-iéra,  -iéras, 
^Imp.  Sj.  advirt-iese,  -iéses, 

Fut.  Suh.  advirt-iere,  -isres, 
Future.  advertir-é,  -ás, 
Condit.  advertir-ía,  -ías. 


advierte,  advertimos,  advertís, 
advierten. 

advierta,  advirtamos,  advirtáis, 

adviertan. 

advierta,  advirtamos,  advertid, 
adviertan. 

-ía,  -íamos,  -íais,  -ían. 

advert-lmos,  -isteis,  -advirtieron, 
-iéra,  -iéramos,  -ierais,  -iéran. 
-iése,  -iésemos,  -ieseis,  -iésen. 

-iere,  -iéremos,  -iereis,  -iéren. 

-á,  -emos,  -éis,  -án. 

-ía,  -íamos,  -íais,  -ían. 


35.  Herir,  hiriendo,  herido,  to  wound,  to  strike. 


Pres.  Ind.  hiero. 

hieres. 

hiere, 

herimos. 

herís, 

hieren, 

Pres.  Suhj.  hiera. 

hieras. 

hiera. 

hiramos. 

hiráis. 

hieran, 

Imperat.  

hiere. 

hiera. 

hiramos. 

herid. 

hieran. 

Imperf.  her-ia. 

-ías. 

-ía. 

-íamos. 

-íais, 

-ían. 

45*5 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


Past.  her-i. 

-iste. 

hirió. 

her-imos,  -ísteis. 

hirieron, 

^Imp.  Suhj.  hir-iera. 

-ieras. 

-iera. 

-iéramos,  -ierais. 

-ieran. 

^Imp.  Subj.  hir-iese. 

-ieses. 

-iese. 

-iésemos,  -ieseis. 

-iesen. 

Fut.  Subj.  hir-iere. 

-ieres. 

-iere. 

-iéremos,  -iereis, 

-ieren. 

Future.  herir-é. 

-ás. 

-á. 

-emos,  -éis. 

-án. 

Condit.  herir-ia, 

-ías. 

-ía. 

-íamos,  -íais, 

-ían. 

36.  Hervir,  hirviendo, 

hervido,  to  boil. 

Pres.  Ind.  hiervo. 

hierves, 

, hierve, 

hervimos,  hervís. 

hierven. 

Pres.  Subj.  hierva. 

hiervas, 

, hierva. 

, hirvamos,  hirváis,  hiervan. 

Imperat.  ' 

hierve. 

hierva. 

, hirvamos,  hervid,  hiervan. 

Past.  herv-i. 

-iste. 

hirvió. 

herv-imos,  -isteis. 

hirvieron. 

^Imp.  Subj.  hirv-iera. 

“ieras. 

-iera. 

-iéramos,  -ierais. 

, -ieran. 

^Imp.  Subj.  hirv-iese. 

-ieses. 

-iese, 

-iésemos,  -ieseis. 

-iesen. 

Fut.  Subj.  hirv-iere. 

-ieres. 

-iere. 

-iéremos,  -iereis. 

-ieren. 

Future.  hervir-é. 

-ás. 

-á, 

-emos,  -éis. 

-án. 

Condit.  hervir-ia. 

-ías. 

-ía, 

-íamos,  -ías. 

-ían. 

37.  Erguir,  irguiendo,  erguido,  to  throw  back,  haughtily 
{the  head),  to  swell  with  pride. 


This  verb  is  conjugated  like  sentir.  The  stem  being  initial, 
the  vowel  i may  either  be  consonantized  or  may  replace  the  diph- 
thong in  the  present  tenses: — 

Pres.  Ind.  yergo,  yergues,  yergue, 
irgo,  irgues,  irgue. 

Fres.  Sj.  yerga,  yergas,  yerga, 
irga,  irgas,  irga, 

Imperat.  yergue,  yerga, 

irgue,  irga. 

Past.  erguí,  erguiste,  irguió,  erguimos,  erguisteis,  irguieron. 
'^Imp.  Sj.  irguiera,  irguieras,  irguiera,  irguiéramos,  irguierais, 

irguieran. 

^Imp.  Sj.  irguiese,  irguieses,  irguiese,  irguiésemos,  irguieseis, 

irguiesen. 

Fut.  Sj.  irguiere,  irguieres,  irguiere,  irguiéremos,  irguiereis, 

irguieren. 


erguimos,  erguís. 


irgamos,  irgáis. 


irgamos,  erguid. 


yerguen. 

irguen. 

yergan. 

irgan. 

yergan. 

irgan. 


Future,  erguir-é,  -ás,  -á,  -emos,  -éis,  -án. 

Condit.  erguir-ía,  -ías,  -ía,  -íamos,  -íais,  -ían. 

38.  Adquirir,  adqtiiríendo,  adquirido,  to  obtain,  to  ac- 
quire. 


The  Spanish  Language. 


457 


Verbs  in  -quirir,  which  are  derived  from  the  Latin  quaerere, 
have  the  usual  diphthong  ie  in  the  present  stem  (when  tonic), 
but  preserve  their  characteristic  i in  all  other  tenses. 

Pres.  Ind.  adquiero,  adquieres,  adquiere,  adquirimos,  adquirís, 
adquieren. 

Fres.  Subj.  adquiera,  adquieras,  adquiera,  adquiramos,  adquiráis, 
adquieran. 

ImperaL  adquiere,  adquiera,  adquiramos,  adquirid, 

adquieran. 

adquiría,  adquirí,  adquiriera,  adquiriese,  adquiriere, 
adquiriré,  etc. 


O Stems. 

The  stem-vowel  o is  changed  into  ue  in  the  singular, 
and  in  the  third  person  plural  of  the  present  indicative 
and  subjunctive,  and  also  of  the  imperative. 

Observe,  furthermore,  that  o is  changed  into  u in 
the  first  and  second  persons  plural  of  the  present  sub- 
junctive, and  in  the  first  person  plural  of  the  impera- 
tive. 


In  the  preterite  stem,  including  the  gerund,  o is 
changed  into  u as  often  as  the  ending  contains  the  diph- 
thong ie  or  io. 

39.  Dormir,  durmiendo,  dormido,  to  sleep. 


Pres.  Ind. 

duermo, 

duermes,  duerme,  dormimos, 

dormís, 

duermen. 

Pres.  Subj. 

duerm.a, 

duermas,  duerma,  durmamos. 

durmáis, 

duerman. 

Imperat. 

duerme,  duerma,  durmamos, 

dormid, 

duerman. 

Imperf. 

dorm-ía. 

-ías,  -ía, 

-íamos,  -íais, 

-ían. 

Past. 

dorm-í,  -iste,  durmió, 

dorm-lmos,  -Isteis,  durmieron. 

^Imp.  Sj. 

durm-iera, 

, -ieras,  -iera. 

-iéramos,  -ierais. 

-ieran. 

^Imp.  Sj. 

durm-iese 

, -ieses,  -iese, 

, -iésemos,  -ieseis. 

-iesen. 

Put.  Subj. 

durm-iere, 

, -ieres,  -iere. 

-iéremos,  -iereis. 

-ieren. 

Future. 

dormir-é, 

.1 

1 

-emos,  -éis. 

-án. 

Condit. 

dormir-ía. 

-ías,  -ía. 

-íamos,  -íais. 

-ían. 

40.  Morir,  muriendo,  muerto. 

, to  die. 

Pres.  Ind. 

muero,  mueres,  muere, 

morimos,  morís. 

mueren. 

Pres.  Subj. 

muera,  mueras,  muera. 

muramos,  muráis. 

mueran. 

4S8 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


Imperat.  muere, 

muera. 

muramos. 

morid, 

mueran. 

Imperf.  mor-ía,  -ías, 

-ía. 

-íamos. 

-íais. 

-ían. 

Past.  mor-í,  -iste, 

murió. 

mor-ímos. 

-ísteis. 

murieron. 

^Imp.  Sj.  mur-iera,  -ieras. 

-iera. 

-iéramos. 

-ierais. 

-ieran. 

^Imp.  Sj.  mur-iese,  -ieses. 

-iese. 

-iésemos. 

-ieseis, 

-iesen. 

Put.  5w&j.mur-iere,  -ieres. 

"iere. 

-iéremos. 

-iereis, 

-ieren. 

Future.  morir-é,  -ás. 

-á. 

-emos. 

-éis. 

-án. 

Condit.  morir-ía,  -ías. 

-ía. 

-íamos, 

-íais, 

-ían. 

Third  Class. 


Only  Verbs  of  the  third  conjugation  with  the  stem- 
vowel  e belong  to  this  class.  The  gerund  belongs  gen- 
erally to  the  preterite  stem. 

In  the  present  stem,  the  vowel  e is  changed  into  i 
throughout  the  present  indicative,  subjunctive,  and 
the  imperative,  except  the  first  and  second  persons 
plural  of  the  indicative,  and  the  second  person  plural 
of  the  imperative. 

In  the  preterite  stem,  the  vowel  e — as  in  e stems  of 
the  preceding  class — ^is  changed  into  i when  the  per- 
sonal ending  contains  a diphthong;  i.e.,  in  the  gerund, 
in  the  third  persons  singular  and  plural  of  the  past  (defi- 
nido) and.  throughout  the  derivative  tenses  (i  and  2 im- 
perfect subjunctive  and  future  subjunctive). 

41.  Pedir,  pidiendo,  pedido,  to  ask. 

Pres.  Ind.  pido,  pides,  pide,  pedimos,  pedís,  piden. 

Fres.  Subj.  pida,  pidas,  pida,  pidamos,  pidáis,  pidan. 

Imperat.  pide,  pida,  pidamos,  pedid,  pidan, 

Imperf.  ped-ía,  -ías,  -ía,  -íamos,  -íais,  -ían. 

Past.  ped-í,  -iste,  pidió,  ped-imos,  -isteis,  pidieron. 


^Imp.  Subj.  pid-iera,  -ieras,  -iera. 

-iéramos,  -ierais. 

-ieran. 

^Imp.  Subj.  pid-iese,  -ieses,  -iese. 

-iésemos,  -ieseis, 

-iesen. 

Fuf.  Subj.  pid-iere,  -ieres,  -iere. 

-iéremos,  -iereis, 

-ieren. 

Future.  pedir-é,  -ás,  -á. 

-emos. 

-éis. 

-án. 

Condit.  pedir-ía,  -ías,  -ía. 

-íamos. 

-íais. 

-ían. 

The  Spanish  Language,  459 


42.  Servir,  sirviendo,  servido,  to  serve. 


Pres.  Ind. 

sirvo, 

sirves,  sirve,  servimos,  servís. 

sirven. 

Pres.  Subj. 
Imperat. 

sirva, 

sirvas,  sirva,  sirvamos,  sirváis, 
sirve,  sirva,  sirvamos,  servid. 

sirvan. 

sirvan. 

Imperf. 

serv-ía. 

-ías,  -ía,  -íamos,  -íais. 

-ían. 

Past. 

serv-í. 

-iste,  sirvió,  serv-ímos,  -isteis, 

sirvieron. 

^Imp.  Subj. 

sirv-iera, 

-ieras,  -iera,  -iéramos,  -ierais. 

-ieran. 

^Imp.  Subj. 

sirv-iese. 

-ieses,  -iese,  -iésemos,  -ieseis. 

-iesen. 

Put.  Subj. 

sirv-iere, 

-ieres,  -iere,  -iéremos,  -iereis. 

-ieren. 

Future. 

servir-é. 

-ás,  -á,  -emos,  -éis. 

-án. 

Condit. 

servir-ía. 

-ías,  -ía,  íamos,  -íais, 

-ían. 

43.  Regir,  rigiendo,  regido,  to  rule} 

Pres.  Ind. 

rijo, 

riges,  rige,  regimos,  regís. 

rigen. 

Pres.  Subj. 
Imperat. 

rija. 

rijas,  rija,  rijamos,  rijáis, 

rige,  rija,  rijamos,  regid. 

rijan. 

rijan. 

Imperf. 

reg-ía. 

-ías,  -ía,  -íamos,  -íais. 

-ían. 

Past. 

reg-í. 

-iste,  rigió,  reg-imos,  -isteis,  ^ 

rigieron. 

^Imp.  Subj. 

rig-iera. 

-ieras,  -iera,  -iéramos,  -ierais. 

-ieran. 

^Imp.  Subj. 

rig-iese. 

-ieses,  -iese,  -iésemos,  -ieseis. 

-iesen. 

Put.  Subj. 

rig-iere. 

-ieres,  -iere,  -iéremos,  -iereis. 

-ieren. 

Future. 

regir-é. 

-ás,  -á,  -emos,  -éis. 

-án. 

Condit. 

regir-ía. 

-ías,  -ía,  -íamos,  -íais. 

-ían. 

44.  Segxxir,  siguiendo,  seguido,  to  follow} 

Pres.  Ind. 

sigo. 

sigues,  sigue,  seguimos,  seguís. 

siguen. 

Pres.  Subj. 
Imperat. 

siga. 

sigas,  siga,  sigamos,  sigáis, 
sigue,  siga,  sigamos,  seguid. 

sigan. 

sigan. 

Imperf. 

segu-ía. 

-ías,  -ía,  -íamos,  -íais. 

-ían. 

Past. 

segu-í. 

-iste,  siguió,  segu-imos,  -isteis. 

siguieron. 

^Imp.  Subj. 

sigu-iera¿ 

-ieras,  -iera,  -iéramos,  -ierais. 

-ieran. 

^Imp.  Subj. 

sigu-iese. 

-ieses,  -iese,  -iésemos,  -ieseis. 

-iesen. 

Put.  Subj. 

sigu-iere. 

-ieres,  -iere,  -iéremos,  -iereis. 

-ieren. 

Future. 

seguir-é. 

-ás,  -á,  -emos,  -éis. 

-án. 

Condit. 

seguir-ía. 

-ías,  -ía,  -íamos,  -íais. 

-ían. 

^ Verbs  of  this  class,  ending  in  gir^  must  change  g into  j before 
a or  o. 

2 Verbs  of  this  class,  ending  in  guir^  lose  the  u before  a and  0. 


The  Rosenthal  Method, 


460 


45.  Reir,  riendo,  reido,  to  laugh} 


Pres.  Ind.  río, 

ríes. 

ríe. 

reimos. 

reís, 

ríen. 

Pres.  Subj.  ría, 

rías, 

ría. 

riamos, 

riáis, 

rían. 

Imperat. 

ríe. 

ría. 

riamos, 

reíd, 

rían. 

Imperf.  re-ia, 

-ías. 

-ía. 

-íamos. 

-íais. 

-ían. 

Past.  re-i. 

-iste. 

rió, 

re-imos, 

-isteis. 

rieron. 

^Imp.  Subj.  ri-era, 

-eras. 

-era. 

, -éramos, 

-erais. 

-eran. 

^Imp.  Subj.  ri-ese. 

-eses. 

-ese. 

, -ésemos, 

-eseis. 

-esen. 

Put.  Subj.  ri-ere. 

-eres. 

-ere, 

, -éremos. 

-ereis. 

-eren. 

Future.  reir-é. 

-ás. 

-á. 

-emos. 

-éis. 

-án. 

Condit.  reir-ia. 

-ías, 

-ía. 

-íamos, 

-íais, 

-ían. 

46.  Ceñir,  ciñendo,  ceñido, 

to  gird.^ 

- 

Pres.  Ind.  ciño, 

ciñes. 

ciñe. 

ceñimos, 

ceñís, 

ciñen. 

Pres.  Subj.  ciña. 

ciñas. 

ciña. 

ciñamos. 

ciñáis. 

ciñan. 

Imperat.  

ciñe, 

ciña, 

ciñamos, 

ceñid, 

ciñan. 

Imperf.  ceñ-ía. 

-ías. 

-ía. 

-íamos. 

-íais, 

-ían. 

Past.  ceñ-í. 

-iste. 

ciñó. 

ceñ-imos, 

-isteis, 

ciñeron, 

^Imp.  Subj.  ciñ-era. 

-eras. 

-era, 

, -éramos. 

-erais. 

-eran. 

^Imp.  Subj.  ciñ-ese, 

-eses. 

-ese. 

1 -ésemos. 

-eseis. 

-esen. 

Fut.  Subj.  ciñ-ere. 

-eres, 

-ere. 

-éremos, 

-ereis. 

-eren. 

Future.  ceñir-é. 

-ás. 

-á. 

-emos. 

-éis, 

-án. 

Condit.  ceñir-ía, 

-ías. 

-ía. 

-íamos, 

-íais. 

-ían. 

Fourth  Class. 


All  verbs  ending  in  uir,  including  those  in  giiir  (but 
not  those  in  guir),  belong  to  this  class. 

The  gerund  uniformly  belongs  to  the  preterite  stem. 


1 Verbs  of  this  class,  ending  in  eir,  lose  the  i of  the  diphthongs 
ie  and  io  throughout  the  preterite  stem. 

2 Verbs  of  this  class,  ending  in  ñir,  drop  the  i of  the  diphthongs 
ie  and  io  in  the  gerund,  in  the  third  persons  singular  and  plural 
of  the  past  (definido)  and  in  the  derivative  tenses. 


The  Spanish  Language, 


461 

The  consonant  y is  inserted  throughout  the  present 
indicative,  subjunctive  and  the  imperative,  except  in 
the  first  and  second  persons  plural  of  the  indicative, 
and  in  the  second  person  plural  of  the  imperative. 

In  the  preterite  stems,  including  the  gerund,  the 
diphthongs  ie  and  io  are  consonantized  throughout  = 
ye,  yo. 

47.  Atribuir,  atribuyendo,  atribuido,  to  ascribe. 


Pres.  Ind.  atribuyo,  atribuyes,  atribuye,  atribuimos,  atribuís, 

atribuyen. 


Fres.  Sj, 

atribu-ya. 

-yas, 

-ya,  -yamos,  -yáis,  -yan. 

Imperat, 

atribu-ye,  -ya,  -yamos,  atribuid,atribuyan. 

Imperf, 

atribu-ia. 

-ías, 

-ía,  -íamos,  -íais,  -ían. 

Past. 

atribu-i. 

-iste, 

-yó,  -Irnos,  -isteis,  -yeron. 

^Imp.  Sj, 

atribu-yera,-yeras, 

-yera,-yéramos,-yerais,-yeran. 

^Imp.  Sj. 

atribu-yese,-yeses, 

-yese , -y  ésemos , -y  eseis , -yesen . 

Fut.  Sj. 

atribu-yere,-yeres, 

-y  ere , -y  éremos , -y  ereis , -y  eren . 

Future. 

atribuir-é. 

-ás. 

-á,  -emos,  -éis,  -án. 

Condit. 

atribuir-ía. 

-ías. 

-ía,  -íamos,  -íais,  -ían. 

48.  Huir,  huyendo,  huido,  to  flee. 

Pres.  Ind. 

huyo. 

huyes. 

huye,  huimos,  huís,  huyen. 

Pres.  Suhj, 

huya. 

huyas. 

huya,  huyamos,  huyáis,  huyan. 

Jmperat. 

huye. 

huya,  huyamos,  huid,  huyan. 

Imperf. 

hu-ía. 

-ías. 

-ía,  -íamos,  -íais,  -ían. 

Past. 

hu-í. 

-iste. 

-yó,  -irnos,  -isteis,  -yeron. 

^Imp.  Suhj. 

hu-yera. 

-y  eras. 

-yera,  -yéramos,  -yerais,  -yeran. 

^Imp.  Suhj. 

hu-yese. 

-yeses. 

-yese,  -yésemos,  -yeseis,  -yesen. 

Ful.  Suhj. 

hu-yére. 

-yeres. 

-yere,  -yéremos,  -yereis,  -yeren. 

Future. 

huir-é. 

-ás. 

-á,  -emos,  -éis,  -án. 

Condit. 

huir-ía. 

-ías. 

-ía,  -íamos,  -íais,  -ían. 

49.  Instituir,  instituyendo 

instituido,  to  establish. 

Pres.  Ind. 

institu-yo. 

-yes. 

-ye,  -irnos,  -ís,  institu-yen. 

Pres.  Sj. 

institu-ya. 

-yas. 

-ya,  -yamos,  -yáis,  institu-yan. 

Imperat. 

institu-ye,  -ya,  -yamos,  -id,  institu-yan. 

Imperf. 

institu-ía. 

-ías. 

-ía,  -íamos,  -íais,  -ían. 

462 

The  Rosenthal  Method. 

Past. 

institu-i,  -Iste,  -yó,  -Irnos, 

-Isteis, 

-yeron. 

^Imp.  Sj. 

institu-yera,  -yeras,  -yera,  -yéramos. 

, -yerais, 

, -yeran. 

^Imp.  Sj. 

institu-yese,  -yeses,  -yese,  -yesemos. 

, -yeseis, 

, -yesen. 

Put.  Sj. 

institu-yere,  -yeres,  -yere,  -yéremos,  -yereis, 

, -yeren. 

Future. 

instituir-é,  -ás,  -á,  -emos. 

-éis. 

-án. 

Condit. 

instituir-ía,  -ías,  -ía,  -íamos, 

-íais. 

-ían. 

50.  Argüir,  arguyendo,  argüido,  to  argue. ^ 

Pres.  Ind. 

argu-yo,  -yes,  -ye,  argü-lmos. 

■ís. 

argu-yen. 

Pres.  Sj. 

argu-ya,  -yas,  -ya,  argu-yamos,  • 

■yáis. 

argu-yan. 

Imperat 

-ye,  -ya,  argu-yámos,  argü-id. 

argu-yan. 

Imperf. 

argü-ía,  -ías,  -ía,  -íamos. 

-íais. 

-ían. 

Past. 

argü-í,  -íste,  argüyó,  argü-imos. 

-Isteis, 

argüyeron. 

^Imp.  Sj. 

argu-yera. 

-yer^s,  -yera,  -yéramos. 

-yerais. 

-yeran. 

^Imp.  Sj. 

argu-yese. 

-yeses,  -yese,  -yésemos. 

-yeseis. 

-yesen. 

Fut.  Sj. 

argu-yere. 

-yeres,  -yere,  -yéremos. 

-yereis. 

-yeren. 

Future. 

argüir-é. 

-ás,  -á,  -emos. 

-éis. 

-án. 

Condit. 

argüir-ía. 

-ías,  -ía,  . -íamos, 

-íais. 

-ían. 

Fifth  Class. 

All  verbs  belonging  to  this  class  have  irregular  pre- 
terite stems,  generally  derived  from  the  Latin.  The 
tonic  accent  is  on  the  radical  in  the  first  and  third  per- 
sons singular  of  the  past  tense. 

Their  present  and  future  stems  are  mostly  irregular. 

First  Conjugation. 

51.  Andar,  andando,  andado, 


^ Verbs  in  güir  lose  the  diaeresis  as  often  as  the  consonant  y is 
admitted. 

2 Andar  expresses  the  manner  of  going,  or  going  for  an  indefi- 
nite purpose;  ir  means  to  go  in  a specific  direction.  Andar  is  there- 
fore used  of  machines,  watches,  and  inanimate  objects,  or  animals 
generally,  while  ir  is  used  of  persons. 


The  Spanish  Language. 

463 

Present  Stem.- 

-Regular. 

Pres.  Ind. 

ando, 

andas. 

anda. 

andamos. 

andáis, 

andan. 

Pres.  Subj. 
Jmperat. 

ande. 

andes, 
- anda. 

ande, 

ande. 

andemos, 

andemos. 

andéis, 

andad. 

anden. 

anden. 

Imperf. 

and-aba,  -abas, 

-aba. 

-ábamos. 

-abais. 

-aban. 

Past  Stem. — anduv  (Irregular). 


Past.  anduve,  anduviste,  anduvo,  anduv-imos,  -ísteis,  -ieron. 


^Imp.  Suhj. 

anduv-iera. 

-eras,  -iera,  -iéramos,  -ierais. 

-ieran. 

^Imp.  Subj. 

anduv-iese. 

-ieses,  -iese,  -iésemos,  -ieseis. 

-iesen. 

Fut.  Subj. 

anduv-iere. 

-ieres,  -iere,  -iéremos,  -iereis. 

-ieren. 

Future  Stem. — Regular. 

Future. 

andar-é. 

-ás,  -á,  -emos,  -éis. 

-án. 

Condit. 

andar-ía, 

-ías,  -ía,  -íamos,  -íais, 

-ían. 

Second  Conjugation. 

52.  Caber,  cabiendo,  cabido,  to  he  contained  in  (en), 
to  hold} 


Present  Stems. — quep  (strong) ; cab  (weak). 

Pres.  Ind.  quepo,  cabes,  cabe,  cabemos,  cabéis,  caben. 

Pres.  Suhj.  quepa,  quepas,  quepa,  quepamos,  quepais,quepan. 

Imperat.  cabe,  quepa,  quepamos,  cabed,  quepan. 

Past  Stem.-^cup  (Irregular). 


Past. 

cupe. 

cupiste. 

cupo,  cup-imos. 

-isteis. 

-ieron. 

^Imp.  Subj. 

cup-iera, 

-ieras. 

-iera,  -iéramos. 

-ierais. 

-ieran. 

^Imp.  Subj. 

cup-iese, 

-ieses. 

-iese,  -iésemos, 

-ieseis. 

-iesen. 

Fut.  Subj. 

cup-iere, 

-ieres, 

-iere,  -iéremos. 

-iereis, 

-ieren. 

Future  Stem. — cabr. 

Future. 

cabr-é, 

-ás. 

-á,  -emos. 

-éis. 

-án. 

Condit. 

cabr-ía, 

-ías. 

-ía,  -íamos. 

-íais, 

-ían. 

^ Cabe  is 

used  impersonally,  in 

the  sense  of  it  is 

possible; 

si  cabe, 

if  it  is  possible^  if  it  may  he;  no  cabe  duda,  there  is  no  possible  doubt. 


464 


The  Rosenthal  Method, 


53.  Hacer,  haciendo,  hecho,  to  make,  to  do  (Latin, 
f acere). 

Present  Stems. — hag  (strong);  hac  (weak). 


Pres.  Ind. 

hago,  haces. 

hace. 

hacemos,  hacéis. 

hacen. 

Pres.  Subj. 

haga,  hagas. 

haga. 

hagamos,  hagáis. 

hagan.  ' 

Imperat. 

haz. 

haga. 

hagamos,  haced. 

hagan. 

Imperf. 

hacía,  hacías. 

hacía. 

hacíamos,  hacíais. 

hacían. 

Past  Stem. 

— hic  (Irregular). 

Past. 

hice,  hiciste. 

hizo. 

hicimos,  hicisteis  hicieron. 

^Imp.  Subj. 

hic-iera,  -ieras. 

-iera. 

-iéramos,  -ierais. 

-ieran. 

^Imp.  Subj. 

hic-iese,  -ieses. 

-iese. 

-iésemos,  -ieseis. 

-iesen. 

Fut.  Subj. 

hic-iere,  -ieres. 

-iere. 

-iéremos,  -iereis, 

-ieren. 

Future  Stem.- 

— har. 

Future. 

har-é,  -ás. 

-á, 

-emos,  -éis. 

-án. 

Condit. 

har-ía,  -ías. 

-ía. 

-íamos,  -íais. 

-ían. 

54.  Satisfacer,  satisfaciendo,  satisfecho,  to  satisfy. 


satis- 

satis- 

Pres. Ind. 

fago,  faces, 

face, 

facemos,  facéis. 

facen. 

Pres.  Subj. 

faga,  fagas, 

faga. 

fagam.os,  fagáis. 

fagan. 

Imperat. 

face  or  faz,  faga. 

fagamos,  faced. 

fagan. 

Imperf. 

fac-ía,  -ías. 

-ía. 

-íamos,  -íais. 

-ían. 

Past. 

fice,  ficiste. 

fizo. 

ficimos,  ficisteis. 

ficieron. 

^Imp.  Subj. 

fic-iera,  -ieras. 

-iera. 

-iéramos,  -ierais. 

-ieran. 

^Imp.  Subj. 

fic-iese,  -ieses. 

-iese. 

-iésemos,  -ieseis, 

-iesen. 

Fut.  Subj. 

fic-iere,  -ieres. 

-iere, 

-iéremos,  -iereis, 

-ieren. 

Fut. 

faré,  etc. 

Condit.  faría,  etc. 

55.  Poder,  pudiendo,  podido,  to  be  able. 


Present  Stems. — pued  and  pod. 


Pres.  Ind.  puedo,  puedes,  puede. 
Pres.  Stíbj.  pueda,  puedas,  pueda, 

Imperat,  

Imperf,  pod-ía,  -ías,  -ía, 


podemos,  podéis, 
podamos,  podáis, 


pueden. 

puedan. 


■íamos, 


dais, 


-lan. 


The  Spanish  Language,  465 


Past  Stem. — pud  (Irregular). 


Past 

pude,  pudiste. 

pudo. 

pud-imos. 

-isteis, 

-ieron. 

^Imp.  Subj. 

pud-iera,  -ieras. 

-iera. 

-iéramos. 

-ierais. 

-ieran. 

^Imp.  Subj. 

pud-iese,  -ieses. 

-iese. 

-iésemos. 

-ieseis. 

-iesen. 

Fut.  Subj. 

pud-iere,  -ieres. 

-iere. 

-iéremos. 

-iereis. 

-ieren. 

Future 

Stem.- 

— podr. 

Future. 

podr-é,  -ás. 

-á. 

-emos. 

-éis, 

-án. 

Condit. 

podr-ía,  -ías. 

-ía. 

-íamos, 

-íais. 

-ían. 

56.  Poner,  poniendo,  puesto. 

to  put,  to  place. 

Pres.  Ind. 

pongo,  pones. 

pone. 

ponemos. 

ponéis. 

ponen. 

Pres.  Subj. 

ponga,  pongas. 

ponga. 

pongamos,  pongáis,pongan. 

Imperat. 

pon. 

ponga. 

pongamos,  poned. 

pongan. 

Imperf. 

pon-ía,  -ías. 

-ía. 

-íamos. 

-íais, 

-ían. 

Past  Stem.- 

— pus  (Irregular). 

‘ Past 

puse,  pusiste. 

puso. 

pus-irnos. 

-isteis. 

-ieron. 

^Imp.  Subj. 

pus-iera,  -ieras. 

-iera. 

-iéramos. 

-ierais. 

-ieran. 

^^Imp.  Subj. 

pus-iese,  -ieses. 

-iese. 

-iésemos. 

-ieseis. 

-iesen. 

Fut.  Subj. 

pus-iere,  -ieres. 

-iere. 

-iéremos. 

-iereis. 

-ieren. 

Future 

Stem.- 

-pondr. 

Future. 

pondr-é,  -ás. 

-á. 

-emos. 

-éis. 

-án. 

Condit. 

pondr-ía,  -ías. 

-ía. 

-íamos. 

-íais. 

-ían. 

57.  Querer,  queriendo,  querido,  to  will,  to  wish. 

Present  Stems. — quier  and  quer. 

Pres.  Ind.  quiero,  quieres,  quiere,  queremos,  queréis,  quieren. 

Pres.  Subj.  quiera,  quieras,  quiera,  queramos,  queráis,  quieran. 

Imperat.  quiere,  quiera,  queramos,  quered,  quieran. 


Imperf.  quer-ía,  -ías,  -ía. 

-íamos. 

-íais, 

-ían. 

Past  Stem. — quis  (Irregular). 

Past  quise,  quisiste,  quiso. 

quis-imos. 

-isteis. 

-ieron. 

^Imp.  Subj.  quis-iera,  -ieras,  -iera. 

-iéramos. 

-ierais. 

-ieran. 

’^Imp.  Subj.  quis-iese,  -ieses,  -iese. 

-iésemos. 

-ieseis. 

-iesen. 

Fut.  Subj.  quis-iere,  -ieres,  -iere. 

-iéremos. 

-iereis. 

-ieren. 

466 


The  Rosenthal  Method, 


Future  Stem. — querr. 

Future,  querr-é,  -ás,  -á,  -emos,  éis,  -án. 

CondiL  querr-ía,  -ías,  -ía,  -íamos,  -íais,  -ían. 


58.  Saber,  sabiendo,  sabido,  to  know  {things). 

Present  Stems. — sep  and  sab. 


Pres.  Ind. 

sé, 

sabes, 

sabe. 

sabemos. 

sabéis. 

saben. 

Pres.  Subj. 

sepa, 

sepas. 

sepa. 

sepamos. 

sepáis. 

sepan, 

Imperat. 

sabe. 

sepa. 

sepamos. 

sabed, 

sepan. 

Imperf. 

sab-ía, 

-ías. 

-ía. 

-íamos. 

-íais, 

-ían. 

Past  Stem. 

— sup  (Irregular). 

Past 

supe, 

supiste. 

supo. 

sup-imos. 

-isteis. 

-ieron. 

^Imp.  Subj. 

sup-iera, 

-ieras. 

-iera. 

-iéramos. 

-ierais. 

-ieran. 

^Imp.  Subj. 

sup-iese, 

-ieses, 

-iese. 

-iésemos. 

-ieseis. 

-iesen. 

Fut.  Subj. 

sup-iere, 

-ieres, 

-iere. 

-iéremos. 

-iereis. 

-ieren. 

Future  Stem.- 

— sabr. 

Future. 

sabr-é, 

-ás. 

-á, 

-emos. 

-éis, 

-án. 

Condit. 

sabr-ia, 

-ías. 

-ía, 

-íamos. 

-íais, 

-ían. 

59.  Traer,  trayendo,  traído,  to  bring. 


Present  St^ms. — traig  and  tra. 


Pres.  Ind. 

traigo,  traes. 

trae,  traemos. 

traéis. 

traen. 

Pres.  Subj. 

traiga,  traigas. 

traiga,  traigamos. 

traigáis,  traigan, 

Imperat. 

trae. 

traiga,  traigamos. 

traed. 

traigan. 

Imperf. 

tra-ía,  -ías. 

-ía,  -íamos. 

-íais^ 

-ían. 

Past  Stem. — traj. 

Past 

traje,  trajiste. 

trajo,  traj-imos. 

-isteis. 

-eron. 

^Imp.  Subj. 

traj -era,  -eras. 

-era,  -éramos. 

-erais. 

-eran. 

^Imp.  Subj. 

traj -ese,  -eses. 

-ese,  -ésemos. 

-eseis. 

-esen. 

Fut.  Subj. 

traj-ere,  -eres. 

-ere,  -éremos. 

-ereis. 

-eren. 

Future  Stem. — Regular. 

Future. 

traer-é,  -ás. 

-á,  -emos. 

-éis. 

-án. 

Condit. 

traer-ía,  -ías. 

-ía,  -íamos. 

-íais. 

-ían. 

The  Spanish  Language,  467 

Third  Conjugation. 

60.  Conducir,  conduciendo,  conducido,  to  conduct. 


Present  Stems. — conduzc  and  conduc  (Irregular). 

Pres.  Ind.  conduzco,  conduces,  conduce,  conducimos,  conducís, 

conducen. 

Pres.  Sj.  conduzca,  conduzcas,  conduzca,  conduzcamos,  conduz- 
cáis, conduzcan. 

Imperat.  conduce,  conduzca,  conduzcamos,  conducid, 

conduzcan. 

Imperf.  conduc-ía,  -ías,  -ía,  -íamos,  -íais,  -ían. 
Past  Stem. — conduj  (Irregular). 

Past.  conduje,  condujiste,  condujo,  conduj -irnos,  -isteis,  -eron. 


^Imp.  Sj. 

conduj -era,  -eras. 

-era, 

-éramos. 

-erais,  -eran. 

^Imp.  Sj. 

conduj -ese,  -eses. 

-ese. 

-ésemos. 

-eseis,  -esen. 

Put.  Sj. 

conduj -ere,  -eres. 

-ere. 

-éremos. 

-ereis,  -eren. 

Future  Stem. — Regular. 

Future. 

conducir-é,  -ás. 

-á. 

-emos. 

-éis,  -án. 

Condit. 

conducir-ía,  -ías. 

-ía, 

-íamos. 

-íais,  -ían. 

61.  Decir,  diciendo,  dicho,  to  say,  to  tell. 


Present  Stems. — dig,  die  and  dec. 


Pres.  Ind. 

digo, 

dices, 

dice. 

decimos, 

decís, 

dicen. 

Pres.  Suhj. 

diga, 

digas, 

diga. 

digamos. 

digáis. 

digan. 

Imperat. 

di. 

diga. 

digamos. 

decid. 

digan. 

Imperf. 

dec-ía. 

-ías. 

-ía. 

-íamos. 

-íais. 

-ían. 

Past  Stem. 

— dij  (Irregular). 

Past. 

dije, 

dijiste. 

dijo, 

dij-imos. 

-isteis, 

-eron. 

^Imp.  Suhj. 

di  j -era. 

-eras. 

-era. 

-éramos. 

-erais. 

-eran. 

^Imp.  Suhj. 

dij-ese. 

-eses. 

-ese, 

-ésemos. 

-eseis. 

-esen. 

Ful.  Suhj. 

dij-ere. 

-eres. 

-ere. 

-éremos. 

-ereis. 

-eren. 

Future  Stem.- 

-dir. 

Future. 

dir-é. 

-ás. 

-á, 

-emos. 

-éis. 

-án. 

Condit. 

dir-ía. 

-ías. 

-ía, 

-íamos. 

-íais. 

-ían. 

468 


The  Rosenthal  Method, 


62.  Bendecir,  bendiciendo,  bendecido  (and  bendito), 
to  bless. 


ben- 

ben- 

Pres. Ind. 

digo,  dices, 

dice. 

decimos. 

decís. 

dicen. 

Pres.  Subj. 

diga,  digas. 

diga, 

digamos. 

digáis. 

digan. 

Imperat. 

dice. 

diga, 

digamos. 

decid. 

digan. 

Imperf. 

decía,  -ías, 

-ía. 

-íamos. 

-íais. 

-ían. 

Past. 

dije,  dijiste, 

dijo. 

dij-ímos. 

-isteis. 

-eron, 

^Imp.  Subj. 

dij-era,  -eras. 

-era. 

-éramos. 

-erais. 

-eran. 

^Imp.  Subj. 

dij-ese,  -eses. 

-ese. 

-ésemos. 

-eseis. 

-esen. 

Put.  Subj. 

dij-ere,  -eres. 

-ere. 

-éremos. 

-ereis. 

-eren, 

Future. 

decir-é,  -ás, 

-á. 

-emos. 

-éis. 

-án. 

Condit. 

decir-ía,  -ías, 

-ía. 

-íamos. 

-íais, 

-ían. 

63.  Venir,  viniendo,  venido,  to  come. 

Present  Stems. — vin,  vien,  and  ven. 


Pres.  Ind. 

vengo,  vienes. 

viene. 

venimos. 

venís. 

vienen. 

Pres.  Subj. 

venga,  vengas. 

venga. 

vengamos. 

vengáis,  vengan. 

Imperat. 

ven. 

venga. 

vengamos,  venid. 

vengan. 

Imperf. 

ven-ía,  -ías. 

-ía. 

-íamos. 

-íais, 

-ían. 

Past  Stem. 

— vin  (Irregular). 

Past. 

vine,  viniste. 

vino. 

vin-imos. 

-isteis 

-ieron. 

^Imp.  Subj. 

vin-iera,  -ieras. 

-iera. 

-iéramos. 

-ierais, 

-ieran. 

^Imp.  Subj. 

vin-iese,  -ieses. 

-iese. 

-iésemos. 

-ieseis. 

-iesen. 

Fut.  Subj. 

vin-iere,  -ieres, 

-iere. 

-iéremos, 

-iereis, 

-ieren. 

Future 

Stem.- 

-vendr. 

Future. 

vendr-é,  -ás. 

-á. 

-emos. 

-éis. 

-án. 

Condit. 

vendr-ía,  -ías. 

-ía. 

-íamos. 

-íais. 

-ían. 

Sixth  Class. 


This  class  contains  a few  verbs  not  reducible  to  any 
of  the  foregoing. 


The  Spanish  Language,  469 

First  Conjugation. 


64.  Dar,  dando,  dado,  to  give. 


Present  Stem.— 

-Regular. 

1 Pres.  Ind. 

doy, 

das. 

da. 

damos. 

dáis. 

dan. 

1 Pres.  Subj. 

dé, 

des, 

dé. 

demos. 

deis. 

den. 

Imperat. 

- da. 

dé. 

demos. 

dad. 

den. 

Imperf. 

daba. 

dalias. 

daba. 

dábamos, 

, dabais. 

daban. 

Past  Stem. — Second  Conjugation.— 

-Irregular. 

Past. 

di. 

diste. 

dio. 

dimos. 

disteis. 

dieron. 

^Imp.  Subj. 

diera. 

dieras. 

diera. 

diéramos, 

dierais. 

dieran. 

^Imp.  Subj.  diese,  dieses,  diese,  diésemos,  dieseis,  diesen. 


Fut,  Subj. 

diere. 

dieres. 

diere,  diéremos. 

diereis. 

dieren. 

Future 

Stem. — Regular. 

Future. 

dar-é. 

“ás. 

-á,  -emos. 

-éis. 

-án. 

Condit. 

dar-ía. 

-ías. 

-ía,  -íamos, 

-íais, 

-ían. 

Second  Conjugation. 

65.  Caer,  cayendo,  caído,  to  fall. 

Present  Stems. — caig  and  ca. 


Pres.  Ind. 

caigo. 

caes. 

cae. 

caemos,  caéis. 

caen. 

Pres.  Subj. 
Imperat. 

caiga. 

caigas, 

cae. 

caiga, 

caiga. 

caigamos,  caigáis, 
caigamos,  caed. 

caigan 

caigan. 

Imperf. 

ca-ía. 

-ías. 

-ía. 

-íamos,  -íais. 

-ían. 

Past  Stem. — Regular. 

Past 

caí. 

caíste. 

cayó. 

ca-ímos,  -ísteis. 

-yeron, 

^Imp.  Subj. 

ca-yera, 

, -yeras, 

-yera. 

-yéramos,  -yerais, 

-y  eran. 

’^Imp.  Subj. 

ca-yese. 

-yeses. 

-yese, 

-yésemos,  -yeseis. 

-yesen. 

Fut.  Subj. 

ca-yere. 

-yeres. 

-yere. 

-yéremos,  -yereis. 

-y  eren. 

Future 

Stem.— 

-Regular. 

Future. 

caer-é. 

-ás. 

-á, 

-emos,  -éis. 

-án. 

Condit. 

caer-ía. 

-ías, 

-ía. 

-íamos,  -íais. 

-ían. 

470 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


66.  Valer,  valiendo,  valido,  to  be  worth. 


Present  Stems. — valg  and  val. 


Pres.  Ind. 

valgo,  vales, 

vale, 

, valemos, 

valéis. 

valen. 

Pres.  Suhj. 

valga,  valgas. 

valga,  valgamos, 

valgáis,  valgan. 

Imperat. 

val  and  vale,  valga,  valgamos. 

valed. 

valgan. 

Imperf. 

val-ía,  -ías. 

-ía, 

-íamos. 

-íais. 

-ían. 

Past  Stem. — Regular. 

Past 

val-í,  -iste. 

-ió. 

-Irnos, 

-isteis. 

-ieron. 

^Imp.  Suhj. 

val-iera,  -ieras. 

-iera. 

-iéramos. 

-ierais. 

-ieran. 

^Imp.  Suhj. 

val-iese,  -ieses. 

-iese. 

-iésemos, 

-ieseis. 

-iesen. 

Put.  Suhj. 

val-iere,  -ieres. 

-iere. 

-iéremos, 

-iereis. 

-ieren. 

Future  Stem.- 

— valdr. 

Future. 

valdr-é,  -ás. 

-á. 

-emos, 

-éis. 

-án. 

Condit. 

valdr-ía,  -ías. 

-ía. 

-íamos, 

-íais. 

-ían. 

67.  Vet; 

, viendo,  visto, 

to  see. 

Present  Stems.— 

-ve  and  v. 

Pres.  Ind. 

veo,  ves. 

ve. 

vemos. 

veis. 

ven. 

Pres.  Suhj. 

vea,  veas. 

vea. 

veamos. 

veáis. 

vean. 

Imperat. 

ve. 

vea. 

veamos. 

ved, 

vean. 

Imperf. 

ve-ía,  -ías. 

-ía, 

-íamos, 

-íais. 

-ían. 

Past  Stem. — Irregular. 


Past  vi. 

viste. 

vió. 

Vimos, 

visteis. 

vieron. 

^Imp.  Suhj.  viera. 

vieras. 

viera. 

viéramos. 

vierais. 

vieran. 

^Imp.  Suhj.  viese. 

vieses. 

viese, 

viésemos. 

vieseis, 

viesen. 

Fut.  Suhj.  viere. 

vieres. 

viere. 

viéremos. 

viereis. 

vieren. 

Future  Stem.- 

-Regular. 

Future.  ver-é. 

-ás. 

-á, 

-emos. 

-éis. 

-án. 

Condit.  ver-ía, 

-ías, 

-ía, 

-íamos. 

-íais. 

-ían. 

The  Spanish  Language.  471 

68.  Proveer,  proveyendo,  proveído  or  provisto,  to 
provide. 


Pres.  Ind. 
Pres.  Suhj. 
Imperat. 
Imperf. 
Past. 

^Imp,  Suhj. 
^Imp.  Suhj. 
Put.  Suhj. 
Future. 
Condit. 


proveo,  provees,  provee,  proveemos,  proveéis,  proveen, 
provea,  proveas,  provea,  proveamos,  proveáis,  provean. 
provee,  provea,  proveamos,  proveed,  provean. 


prove-ía,  -ías. 

-ía. 

-íamos. 

-íais. 

-ían. 

prove-í,  -iste. 

-yó, 

-irnos. 

-Tsteis, 

-yeron. 

prove-yera,  -yeras. 

-yera, 

-yéramos. 

-yerais. 

-y  eran. 

prove-yese,  -yeses. 

-yese. 

-yésemos. 

-yeseis. 

-yesen. 

prove-yere,  -yeres. 

-yere. 

. -yéremos. 

-yereis. 

-yeren. 

proveer-é,  -as. 

-á. 

-emos, 

-éis. 

-án. 

proveer-ía,  -ías, 

-ía. 

-íamos, 

-íais. 

-ían. 

69.  Creer,  creyendo,  creído,  to  believe. 


Pres.  Ind. 

creo. 

crees. 

cree. 

creemos. 

creéis. 

creen. 

Pres.  Suhj. 

crea. 

creas. 

crea. 

creamos. 

creáis. 

crean. 

Imperat. 

cree. 

crea. 

creamos. 

creed. 

crean. 

Imperf. 

cre-ía. 

-ías. 

-ía. 

-íamos. 

-íais, 

-ían. 

Past. 

cre-í. 

-iste. 

-yó. 

-irnos. 

-isteis. 

-yeron. 

'^Imp.  Suhj. 

cre-yera, 

, -yeras. 

-yera. 

-yéramos. 

-yerais. 

-y  eran. 

^Imp.  Suhj. 

cre-yese. 

-yeses. 

-yese. 

-yésemos. 

-yeseis. 

-yesen. 

Fut.  Suhj. 

cre-yere. 

-yeres. 

-yere. 

-yéremos. 

-yereis. 

-yeren. 

Future. 

creer-é,  etc. 

Condit.  creer-ía,  etc. 

70.  Poseer,  poseyendo,  poseído,  to  possess. 


Pres.  Ind. 
Pres.  Suhj. 
Imperat. 

poseo, 

posea. 

posees, 

poseas, 

posee. 

posee, 

posea, 

posea. 

poseemos, 

poseamos, 

poseamos. 

poseéis,  poseen, 
poseáis,  posean, 
poseed,  posean. 

Imperf. 

pose-ía. 

-ías. 

-ía. 

-íamos. 

-íais,  -ían. 

Past. 

pose-í. 

-iste. 

-yó. 

-irnos. 

-isteis,  -yeron. 

^Imp.  Suhj. 

pose-yera, 

, -yeras. 

-yera. 

-yéramos. 

-yerais,  -yeran. 

^Imp.  Suhj. 

pose-yese. 

-yeses. 

-yese. 

-yésemos. 

-yeseis,  -yesen. 

Fut.  Suhj. 

pose-yere. 

-yeres. 

-yere, 

-yéremos. 

-yereis,  -yeren. 

Future. 

poseer-é,  etc. 

Condit.  poseer-ía,  etc. 

472 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


71.  Yacer,  yaciendo,  yacido,  to  he  situated,  to  lie  in  the 


grave. 


yazco, 

Pres.  Ind.  i yazgo,  yaces,  yace, 

I yago, 

¡yazca,  yazcas,  yazca, 
yazga,  yazgas,  yazga, 
yaga,  yagas,  yaga. 


yacemos,  yacéis,  yacen. 

yazcamos,  yazcáis,  yazcan, 
yazgamos,  yazgáis,  yazgan, 
yagamos,  yagáis,  yagan. 


Imperat.  yace  or  yaz,  yaced. 

yacía,  yací,  yaciera,  yaciese,  yaciere,  yaceré,  yacería. 


Third  Conjugation. 

72.  Asir,  asiendo,  asido,  to  lay  hold  of. 

Present  Stems. — asg  and  as. 

Pres.  Ind.  . asgo,  ases,  ase,  asimos,  asís. 

Pres.  Subj.  asga,  asgas,  asga,  asgamos,  asgáis, 

Imperat.  ase,  asga,  asgamos,  asid, 

asía,  así,  asiera,  asiese,  asiere,  asiré,  asiría. 


73.  Ir,  yendo,  ido,  to  go  {for  a definite  purpose). 


Pres.  Ind. 

voy. 

vas. 

va. 

vamos, 

vais. 

van. 

Pres.  Subj. 

vaya. 

vayas. 

vaya. 

vayamos,  vayáis. 

vayan. 

Imperat. 

Imperf. 

iba. 

ve, 

ibas. 

vaya, 

iba. 

vayamos^  id, 
íbamos,  ibais. 

vayan. 

iban. 

Past. 

fui. 

fuiste. 

fué. 

fuimos. 

fuisteis. 

fueron. 

'^Imp.  Subj. 

fuera. 

fueras. 

fuera. 

fuéramos,  fuerais. 

fueran. 

^Imp.  Subj. 

fuese. 

fueses. 

fuese. 

fuésemos,  fueseis. 

fuesen. 

Put.  Subj. 

fuere. 

fueres. 

fuere. 

fuéremos,  fuereis. 

fueren. 

Future. 

ir-é. 

-ás. 

-á. 

-emos. 

-éis. 

-án. 

Condit. 

ir-ía. 

-ías. 

-ía, 

-íamos. 

-íais. 

-ían. 

74.  Oir,  oyendo,  oido,  to  hear. 


Present  Stems. — oig,  oy,  and  o. 


Pres.  Ind. 

oigo. 

oyes. 

Oye, 

oimos. 

oís. 

oyen. 

Pres.  Subj. 

oiga. 

oigas. 

Oiga, 

oigamos. 

oigáis. 

oigan. 

Imperat. 

■ oye. 

Oiga, 

oigamos. 

oid. 

Oigan. 

Imperf. 

o-ía. 

-ías. 

-ía, 

-íamos. 

-íais. 

-ían. 

asen. 

asgan. 

asgan. 


I 


The  Spanish  Language, 


473 


Past  Stem. — o (Diphthongs  ie  and  ió  consonan tized.) 


Past. 

OÍ, 

oíste. 

oyó, 

olmos. 

oísteis. 

oyeron. 

Subj. 

oyera, 

oyeras. 

oyera. 

oyéramos. 

oyerais. 

oyeran. 

Subj. 

oyese, 

oyeses. 

oyese. 

oyésemos. 

oyeseis, 

oyesen. 

Put.  Subj. 

oyere. 

oyeres. 

oyere. 

oyéremos. 

oyereis, 

oyeren. 

Future  Stem.— 

-Ps^egular. 

Future. 

oir-é. 

-ás. 

-a. 

-emos. 

-éis, 

-án. 

Condit. 

oir-ía. 

-ías. 

-ía. 

-íamos, 

-íais, 

-ían. 

75.  Salir,  saliendo,  salido,  to  go  out 


Present  Stems. — salg  and  sal. 


Fres.  Ind. 

salgo,  sales. 

sale, 

salimos,  salís. 

salen. 

Fres.  Subj. 

salga,  salgas. 

salga. 

salgamos,  salgáis. 

salgan. 

Imperat. 

sal. 

salga. 

salgamos,  salid. 

salgan. 

Imperf. 

sal-ía,  -ías. 

-ía. 

-íamos,  -íais. 

-ían. 

Past  Stem. — Regular. 

Past. 

sal-í,  -Iste, 

-ió. 

-Irnos,  -isteis. 

-ieron. 

^Imp.  Subj. 

sal-iera,  -ieras. 

-iera. 

-iéramos,  -ierais. 

-ieran. 

^Imp.  Subj. 

sal-iese,  -ieses. 

-iese. 

-iésemos,  -ieseis. 

-iesen. 

Put.  Subj, 

sal-iere,  -ieres. 

-iere. 

-iéremos,  -iereis, 

-ieren. 

Future  Stem. — saldr. 

Future. 

saldr-é,  -ás. 

-á. 

-emos,  -éis. 

-án. 

Condit. 

saldr-ía,  -ías. 

-ía. 

-íamos,  -íais. 

-ían. 

474 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


The  Use  of  the  Tenses. 

INDICATIVE  MODE. 

Present  Tense. 

1.  The  Present  of  the  Indicative  Mode  expresses  an 
action  occurring  or  a state  existing  at  the  present  time: 

Yo  escribo  y ella  dibuja,  I write  and  she  draws. 

Estoy  escribiendo  una  carta,  I am  writing  a letter. 

¿ Qué  está  V.  haciendo?  What  are  you  doing? 

2.  It  sometimes  replaces  the  Past  Tense,  especially 
in  lively  narration: 

Apenas  dada  la  orden,  se  avan-  Hardly  was  the  order  given ^ 
za  la  caballería,  ataca  al  when  the  cavalry  advanced, 
enemigo,  que  presto  queda  attacked  the  enemy,  who 
completamente  derrotado.  soon  was  completely  routed. 

3.  It  sometimes  replaces  the  future,  especially  after 
the  conjunction  si: 

Voy  al  instante,  I will  go  at  once. 

¿ Me  hace  V.  el  favor?  Will  you  do  me  the  favor? 

4.  It  is  used  after  hace,  it  is,  when  expressing  time: 

I Cuánto  tiempo  hace  que  está  How  long  have  you  been  in 
V.  en  Méjico?  Mexico? 

Hace  mucho  tiempo  que  no  le  It  is  a long  time  since  I saw 
veo,  him. 

Imperfect  Tense. 

1.  The  Imperfect  of  the  Indicative  Mode  is  employed 
to  express  an  action  or  event  which  was  going  on  or 
existing,  when  another  past  action  took  place: 

Yo  estaba  escribiendo  cuando  I was  writing  when  my  friend 
mi  amigo  Carlos  entró,  Charles  came  in. 

2.  It  denotes  customary  or  habitual  action,  and  may 
in  such  cases  be  translated  by  ‘‘used  to”: 


The  Spanish  Language, 


475 


Cuando  era  joven  me  alegraba  When  I was  youngs  I used  to 
de  cosas  que  no  me  gustan  take  pleasure  in  things 

aliora,  which  do  not  please  me 

now. 

Past  Tense. 

1.  The  Past  Tense  of  the  Indicative  Mode  denotes 
what  occurred  within  a period  of  time  wholly  elapsed. 
It  may  have  happened  yesterday,  a few  weeks  before  or 
ages  ago: 

Fui  á verle  ayer,  I went  to  see  him  yesterday. 

Murió  hace  dos  meses,  He  died  two  months  ago, 

Cervantes  nació  a mediados  Cervantes  was  horn  in  the  mid- 
del  siglo  dieciseis,  y murió  die  of  the  sixteenth  century, 

en  Madrid  a principios  del  and  died  at  Madrid  in  the  he- 

siglo  diecisiete,  ginning  of  the  seventeenth  cen- 

tury. 

2.  It  is  therefore  called  the  historical  tense,  and  is 
used  especially  in  narration: 

Entregaron  la  ciudad  a los  They  delivered  the  town  to  the 
enemigos,  pero  estos  no  se  enemies,  hut  they  at  first  did 
atrevieron  al  principio  a not  venture  to  enter  it, 
entrar  en  ella, 

Present  Perfect  Tense. 

1.  The  Indicative  of  the  Present  Perfect  Tense  denotes 
what  is  past  without  stating  a specific  period: 

He  comprado  un  caballo,  I have  bought  a horse. 

2.  It  denotes  an  action  in  the  past  belonging  to  a 
period  of  time  (day,  week,  month,  year,  etc.),  not  en- 
tirely elapsed: 


476 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


He  estado  aquí  dos  horas,  I have  been  here  for  two  hours, 

Muchas  cosas  nuevas  han  sido  Many  new  things  have  been 
inventadas  en  el  siglo  invented  during  the  present 
presente,  century. 

Past  Perfect  Tense. 

The  Past  Perfect  Tense  denotes  an  action  which  is 
not  only  past  in  itself,  but  also  past  with  reference  to 
some  other  past  action  expressed  or  implied: 

Habia  acabado  de  almorzar  I had  breakfasted  before  he 
antes  que  él  viniese,  came. 

Past  Anterior. 

The  Past  Anterior  is  used  in  the  same  manner  as 
the  Past  Perfect,  but  is  always  preceded  by  a conjtmction 
of  time,  as  cuando,  when;  despues  que,  after;  luego  que, 
así  que,  tan  pronto  como,  as  soon  as;  no  bien,  no  sooner; 
apenas,  hardly,  scarcely,  etc.: 

Como  hube  leído  el  libro  le  When  I had  read  the  book,  I 
volví,  returned  it. 

Future  Tense. 

1.  The  Future  denotes  future  time: 

El  será  elegido  mañana.  He  will  be  elected  to-morrow. 

2.  It  is  frequently  used  in  questions,  especially  when 
the  interrogator  is  convinced  that  his  query  cannot  be 
denied: 

I Habrá  desgracia  mayor  que  Can  there  be  a greater  misfortune 
la  mía?  than  mim? 

¿ Se  habrá  visto  cosa  más  Has  ever  anything  more  beautiful 
primorosa?  been  seen? 


The  Spanish  Language.  477 

Future  Perfect. 

! This  tense  is  used  in  the  same  manner  as  the  corre- 
sponding English  form: 

7a  habré  terminado  la  tarea  I shall  have  finished  my  task 
cuando  llegue  el  invierno,  when  the  winter  comes, 

; Conditional. 

• I.  The  Conditional  is  used  chiefly  in  conditional  sen- 
tences of  which  it  forms  the  conclusions,  while  the  clause 
j vvith  si,  if,  forms  the  condition: 

(¡Compraría  libros  si  tuviese  I should  buy  hooks  if  I had 
{or  tuviera)  dinero,  money. 

j 2.  In  the  conditional  clauses  with  si,  the  forms  in 

i]-se  and  -ra  are  interchangeable: 

!' 

Habríamos  ido  a ver  los  fue-  We  should  have  gone  to  see  the 
j gos  artificiales,  si  hubiése-  fire-works  if  we  had  known 

’ mos  {or  hubiéramos)  sa-  that  there  were  any. 

bido  que  los  había, 

3.  The  conditional  is  used  to  express  a wish  or  modest 
I request: 

j Desearía  que  mis  hijos  apren-  I would  desire  my  children  to  learn 
! diesen  {or  aprendieran)  al-  some  languages. 

gunas  lenguas. 

i 

i 4.  It  denotes  an  uncertain  and  approximate  statement 
; in  narrations: 

i Las  once  y media  serían  cuan-  It  may  have  been  {it  was 

I do  nos  acostamos  anoche,  about)  half-past  eleven  when 

we  went  to  bed  last  night. 

\ 5.  It  expresses  possibility  or  fitness: 

j I Sería  verdad  eso?  Could  that  be  true? 

É1  podría  venir.  He  might  come. 


47& 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


The  Use  of  the  Subjunctive  Mode. 


1.  The  Subjunctive  Mode  expresses  possibility,  doubt, 
apprehension,  prohibition,  entreaty,  surprise,  neces- 
sity,  advice,  etc.  It  is  chiefly  used  in  dependent 
clauses  connected  with  the  principal  sentence  by  the 
conjunction  que,  that, 

2.  The  tense  of  the  subjunctive  mode,  being  subordi- 
nate to  the  preceding  verb,  is  regulated  by  it. 

3.  The  subjunctive  mode  is  used  in  principal  sen- 
tences to  supply  the  negative  form  of  the  imperative 
which  can  never  be  employed  in  Spanish. 

It  also  supplies  the  affirmative  form  of  the  impera- 
tive in  the  first  and  third  persons: 


Sea  yo,  let  me  he.  No  sea  yo,  let  me  not  he. 

Sea  él,  let  him  he.  No  sea  él,  let  him  not  he.  ; 

No  me  lo  diga,  do  not  tell  it  No  se  vaya  V.,  do  not  go  away.  j 
me!  I 

4.  The  Subjunctive  Mode  must  be  used  after  verbs  ex-  | 
pressive  of  wish,  desire,  entreaty,  command,  permission,  | 
expectation,  hope,  doubt,  fear,  apprehension,  joy,  grief,  ^ 


vexation,  and  surprise: 

Temo  que  no  vengan  a tiempo, 
para  ir  al  teatro, 

Quiere  que  lo  haga  yo. 

Todos  desean  que  vuelva  hoy. 

Me  alegro  que  lo  sepa. 

Espero  que  llegue  mi  hermano. 
Me  alegro  que  llueva. 

Le  mandaron  que  fuese  a Chi- 
huahua, 

Permítame  V.  que  le  haga  una 
pregunta. 

Siento  que  no  hayamos  po- 
dido venir. 


I am  afraid  they  will  not  ar- 
rive in  time  to  go  to  the 
theatre. 

He  wants  me  to  do  this. 

Every  one  desires  him  to  return 
to-day. 

I am  glad  you  know  it. 

I hope  my  brother  will  arrive. 

I am  glad  it  rains. 

They  ordered  him  to  go  to 
Chihuahua. 

Allow  me  to  ask  you  a ques- 
tion. 

I regret  we  could  not  come. 


The  Spanish  Language. 


479 


I 5.  The  subjiinctive  mode  is  employed  after  imper- 
sonal expressions,  unless  they  denote  positive  cer- 
tainty: 

Conviene  que  lo  sepa,  It  is  proper  for  him  to  know 

iL 

Es  justo  que  sea  V.  premiado  It  is  right  you  should  he  re^ 
por  su  obra,  warded  for  your  work. 

Es  lástima  que  no  venga.  It  is  a pity  that  he  does  not 

come, 

Es  menester  que  vaya  V.  a You  must  go  for  the  physi- 
buscar  al  medico,  dan. 

6.  The  subjunctive  mode  is  used  in  relative  sen- 
itences  when  the  relative  refers  to  persons,  objects,  of 
ideas  which  are  mentioned  in  an  uncertain  or  indefinite 
sense: 

¡ \^enga  lo  que  viniere,  Come  what  will. 

2uien  quiera  que  sea.  Whoever  he  may  he. 

Haga  V.  lo  que  más  le  gus-  Do  what  you  like  {best)  I 
I tare! 

7.  The  subjunctive  is  also  used  when  a futiure,  pos- 
sible, or  contingent  effect  is  expressed: 

Lo  compraré  cuando  tenga  I will  huy  it  when  I have 
dinero,  money. 

8.  After  verbs  of  saying,  thinking,  believing,  etc., 
the  subjunctive  mode  is  used  in  negative  or  interrogative 
sentences: 

N^o  crea  V.  que  mi  amigo  haya  Do  not  believe  that  my  friend  did 
hecho  esto,  this! 

¿ Piensa  V.  que  ella  salga  hoy  ? Do  you  think  she  will  go  out 

to-day? 

a.  In  affirmative  sentences,  however  the  indicative 
mode  must  be  used  after  these  verbs: 


La  criada  dice  que  la  sopa  The  maid  says  that  the  soup  is  on 
está  en  la  mesa,  the  table. 


48o 


The  Rosenthal  Method, 


Correspondence  of  Tenses. 

1.  The  Present  of  the  Subjunctive  Mode  is  generally 
employed  when  the  preceding  verb  stands  in  the  Present, 
Present  Perfect,  Future  Indicative,  or  in  the  Imperative: 

Me  alegro  que  el  tiempo  fa-  I am  glad  the  weather  is  favorable 
vorezca  la  fiesta,  to  the  festival. 

2.  The  Imperfect  of  the  Subjunctive  in  either  form 
is  employed  after  verbs  in  any  past  tense  in  the  Indica- 
tive : 

Quise  que  viniese  {or  viniera),  I wished  him  to  come. 

3.  The  Present  Perfect  of  the  Subjunctive  is  used  after 
verbs  in  the  Present  or  the  Future  Indicative: 

No  volveré  hasta  que  me  haya  I shall  not  return  till  I am 
restablecido,  well. 

4.  The  Past  Perfect  Subjunctive  in  either  form  is  used 
after  verbs  of  any  past  tense  in  the  indicative: 

Creíamos  que  ya  hubiera  {or  We  thought  he  had  already 
hubiese)  dado  este  libro  a given  this  hook  to  little 
Juanita,  Jane. 

5.  The  Future  and  Future  Perfect  of  the  Subjunctive 
is  used  after  si,  if;  cuando,  when;  mientras,  while;  or  after 
a relative  pronoun  or  adverb  in  sentences  denoting  future 
contingency : 

Si  él  tuviere  dinero,  compraría  If  he  had  money  he  would  buy 
libros,  books. 

Yo  traeré  a V.  los  libros  que  me  I will  bring  you  the  books  they 
dieren,  may  give  me. 

Note  that,  instead  of  this  tense,  the  present  or  Past 
Perfect  Subjunctive  may  be  used: 

Yo  traeré  a V.  los  libros  que  me  I will  bring  you  the  books  they 
den,  may  give  me. 


481 


The  Spanish  Language. 

The  Use  of  the  Infinitive. 

1.  The  Infinitive  may  be  used,  and  consequently  in- 
flected, like  a noun: 

Hablar  mucho  es  un  vicio,  To  talk  much  is  a bad  habit. 

The  definite  article  is  generally,  but  not  necessarily, 
employed  with  the  Infinitive. 

2.  The  Infinitive  stands  after  all  prepositions: 

Despues  de  oir  a ambas  par-  After  hearing  both  parties,  one  is 
tes,  es  como  se  puede  juz-  able  to  judge. 

i 

( Para  aprender  algo  es  preciso  In  order  to  learn  anything,  one 
estudiar,  must  study. 

3.  The  Infinitive  with  a or  al  (dative  case)  is  em- 
ployed in  place  of  English  sentences  beginning  with 
when,  after,  as,  or  if: 


Al  salir  de  casa  me  encontré  con  When  I left  the  house  I met  my 
mi  agente,  agent. 

A saber  yo  que  había  venido,  no  If  I had  known  he  had  come, 
hubiera  salido,  I should  not  have  gone  out. 

4.  The  Infinitive  without  any  preposition  is  used 
after  verbs  denoting  fear,  doubt,  wish,  desire,  need, 
duty,  thought,  etc.,  when  both  verbs  have  the  same 
subject. 

After  verbs  of  command,  or  forbidding,  causing,  pre- 
venting, etc.  either  the  infinitive  or  subjunctive  may 
follow. 


482  The  Rosenthal  Method, 

Verbs  requiring  no  Preposition  before  the  following  Infinitive* 


Aconsejar,  to  advise, 
acostumbrar,  to  accustom, 
afirmar,  to  affirm, 
agradar,  to  he  agreeable, 
concebir,  to  conceive, 
confesar,  to  confess, 
contar,  to  relate, 
conviene,  it  is  convenient  to, 
creer,  to  believe, 
deber,  to  owe^  must, 
declarar,  to  declare, 
dejar,  to  let^  to  leave, 
desear,  to  desire, 
determinar,  to  resolve  to, 
esperar,  to  hope^  to  expect  to, 
gustar,  to  like  to, 
hacer,  to  make^  to  cause  to, 
imaginar,  to  imagine, 
impedir,  to  prevent  from, 
intentar,  to  intend, 
mandar,  to  order, 
manifestar,  to  manifest. 


más  vale,  it  is  better  to, 
necesitar,  to  want  to, 
negar,  to  deny, 
oir,  to  hear, 

osar,  to  dare^  to  venture  to, 
parecer,  to  appear. 
pensar,  to  thinks  to  intend, 
poder,  to  be  able, 
preferir,  to  prefer, 
presumir,  to  presume, 
pretender,  to  pretend^  to  claim, 
procurar,  to  try  to, 
prohibir,  to  forbid  to, 
prometer,  to  promise, 
proponer,  to  propose, 
protestar,  to  protest, 
querer,  to  wish, 

saber,  to  know  hoWy  to  be  able, 
sentir,  to  feely  to  regret, 
soler,  to  be  accustomed  to, 
temer,  to  fear  to, 
ver,  to  see. 


Decir,  to  say,  to  tell,  according  to  the  Grammar  of 
the  Spanish  Academy,  must  never  be  followed  by  an 
Infinitive.  This  rule,  however,  is  frequently  disre- 
garded. 

5.  Verbs  of  motion,  destination,  encouragement,  in- 
clination, habit,  or  reflexive  verbs  expressive  of  strong 
moral  decision  or  effort,  require  the  preposition  a before 
the  infinitive  of  the  verb  they  govern. 

Verbs  requiring  a before  the  Infinitive. 


Animar  a,  to  encourage  to, 
aprender  a,  to  learn  to, 
aspirar  a,  to  aspire  to. 


enviar  a,  to  send  to, 
esforzarse  a,  to  try  to, 
habituar  a,  to  accustom  to. 


The  Spanish  Language, 


483 


lutorizar  a,  to  authorize  to, 

it  reverse  a,  to  dare  to, 

lyndar  a,  to  help  to. 

x>inenzar  a,  to  commence  to, 

condenar  a,  to  condemn  to. 

ponsentir  a,  to  consent  to. 

convidar  a,  to  invite  to. 

iar  a,  to  give  to. 

decidirse  a,  to  resolve  to. 

echar  a,  1,7-, 

> to  begin  to, 
empezar  a,  j 

enseñar  a,  to  teach  to. 


inclinar  a,  to  incline  to. 
invitar  a,  to  invite  to 
ir  a,  to  go  to. 
negarse  a,  to  refuse  to. 
obligar  a,  to  compel  to. 
pasar  a,  to  go  to^  to  come  to. 
ponerse  a,  to  begin  to. 
resistirse  a,  to  resist. 
salir  a,  to  start  for. 
tender  a,  to  aim  at. 
venir  a,  to  come  to. 
volver  a,  to  return  to^  to 
again. 


^ 6.  The  Preposition  a before  the  Infinitive  is  used  in 

|3,  number  of  elliptical  phrases,  as: 

'¡A.  decir  la  verdad,  to  speak  truly. 

^ saber,  namely. 

1 7.  The  Preposition  de  is  used  before  the  Infinitive 
after  nouns  and  adjectives: 


Hágame  V.  el  favor  de  venir  Do  me  the  favor  to  come  with 
conmigo,  me. 

No  tengo  el  gusto  de  conocer  I have  not  the  pleasure  of  knowing 
a V.,  you. 

j Es  difícil  de  aprender.  It  is  difficult  to  learn. 


I 

8.  Verbs  requiring  de 

! Aicabar  de,  to  have  just. 
acordarse  de,  to  be  glad  to. 
alegrarse  de,  to  be  glad  to. 
arrepentirse  de,  to  repent  of. 
pesar  de,  to  cease  to. 
iejar  de,  to  fail  to^  to  leave  off. 
iesistir  de,  to  cease  from. 
iisuadir  de,  to  dissuade  from. 


before  the  Infinitive. 

encargar  de,  to  commission  to. 
excusar  de,  to  excuse  from. 

. eximir  de,  to  free  from. 
haber  de,  to  be  about  to. 
ocuparse  de,  to  busy  one's  self 
with. 

olvidarse  de,  to  forget  to. 
tratar  de,  to  try  to. 


484 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


9.  De  must  be  used  after  ser,  to  be,  when  used  im- 
personally: 

Es  de  esperar,  It  is  to  he  hoped. 

Es  de  desear  que  no  venga,  It  is  desirable  he  should  not 

come. 

10.  The  Preposition  en  is  required  before  the  Infinitive 
after  verbs  denoting  occupation  or  insistence: 

Se  ocupa  en  leer,  en  escribir,  He  occupies  himself  with  reading, 

with  writing. 

11.  The  Preposition  con  is  required  before  the  In- 
finitive after  verbs  which  signify  diversion  or  amuse- 
ment: 

Le  entretengo  con  leerle  algo  I entertain  him  by  reading  some 
gracioso,  merry  piece  to  him. 

The  Gerund  is  generally  used  in  such  cases : 

Divierto  a mi  hermana  tocán-  I entertain  my  sister  by  play- 
dole  algunas  arias  al  ing  some  airs  on  the  piano , 
piano,  to  her. 

The  Gerund. 

1.  The  Gerund  is  invariable  in  gender  and  number. j 
It  is  used  in  connection  with  the  verb  estar,  similar  to 
the  progressive  conjugation  in  English,  and  expresses 
the  action  of  the  verb  as  continuing  or  unfinished: 

Estoy  comiendo,  I am  eating. 

Estaba  leyendo.  He  was  reading. 

Estará  escribiendo.  He  will  be  writing. 

Observe  that  estar  cannot  be  used  with  the  Gerund 
of  ser,  to  be;  ir,  to  go;  and  venir,  to  come.  Thus  we  say 
voy,  I am  going;  vengo,  I am  coming. 

2.  The  Gerund  is  used  when  it  denotes  the  state  of 
the  subject: 

Habla  durmiendo,  He  speaks  in  his  sleep  {while  he  is 

asleep). 

' 


The  Spanish  Language. 


485 


3.  The  Gerund  is  frequently  used  for  the  sake  of 
uphony  or  brevity  where  we  have  to  employ  while, 
whilst,  as,  since,  if,  although,  or  by: 

listando  escribiendo  una  carta  Whilst  writing  a letter  to  my  agents 
a mi  agente,  entró  él  mismo  he  entered  himself  into  my 
en  mi  cuarto,  room. 

?eniendo  malo  el  pie  no  puede  He  cannot  rise  as  he  has  a sore 
levantarse,  foot. 

t 

4.  The  Gerund  is  also  used  with  the  preposition  en. 
• t is  to  be  observed  that  the  Gerund  with  or  without  en 
nay  have  an  indefinite  personal  subject: 

in  diciendo  esto,  se  marchó,  Having  said  so  y he  went  away. 
in  llegando  a Veracruz,  es-  As  soon  as  I arrive  in  Vera  CruZy 
cribiré,  I shall  write. 

Í 

I 

■ 5.  The  Gerund  naturally  partakes  of  the  nature  of 
|he  verb  from  which  it  is  derived,  and  governs  the  same 
ases: 

rozando  de  buena  salud.  Enjoying  good  health. 

)lvidándose  de  lo  pasado.  Forgetting  the  past. 

3 

' The  Past  Participle. 

I.  The  Past  Participle  of  all  verbs  joined  to  the  aux- 
liary  haber  is  invariable: 

lemos  visto  dos  señoritas.  We  have  seen  two  young  ladies. 

'/as  señoritas  que  hemos  visto  The  young  ladies  we  saw  are  ver^ 
^ son  muy  lindas,  pretty. 

' 2.  Llevar  or  tener,  when  used  as  substitutes  of  haber, 
equire  the  past  participles  accompanying  them  to  agree 
!n  number  and  gender  with  their  object: 


486 


The  Rosenthal  Method, 


Tengo  escrita  una  carta,  I have  written  a letter. 

Llevan  escritas  dos  cartas,  They  have  written  two  letters, 

3.  In  the  tenses  of  the  passive  voice  the  past  participle 
is  inflected  and  agrees  in  gender  and  number  with  its 
subject.  It  is  also  inflected  when  joined  to  the  verbs 
ser  or  estar,  to  be: 

Estos  hombres  están'  cansados,  These  men  are  tired. 

Estas  mui  eres  están  cansadas.  These  women  are  tired, 

4.  Separated  from  the  auxiliary,  the  past  participle 
is  inflected  like  any  adjective,  agreeing  in  gender  and 
number  with  the  noun  qualified: 

Una  mujer  casada,  A married  woman, 

Un  hombre  perdido,  A lost  man. 

Se  vieron  vencidos  del  enmigo,  They  saw  themselves  defeated  by 

the  enemy. 

5.  The  Past  Participle  may  be  used  absolutely: 

Muerta  la  reina,  su  hijo  tomó  el  The  queen  having  died,  her  son 
titulo  de  rey,  took  the  title  of  king. 

Concluido  este  negocio,  se  The  business  concluded,  he  took 
despidió,  leave. 


The  Imperative. 

1.  There  are  only  two  forms  in  the  Imperative,  viz.,| 
the  second  person  singular  and  plural.  AU  the  others 
are  simply  taken  from  the  Subjunctive  Mode: 

habla,  speak  {thou).  hablad,  speak  {ye). 

2.  The  Impera  ive  proper  can  never  be  used  nega- 

tively. In  its  place  the  corresponding  subjunctive  forms 
must  be  employed:  ' 

No  hable,  let  him  not  speak.  No  hable  V.,  do  not  speak.  , 

No  hablemos,  let  us  not  speak.  No  hablen  V.  V.,  do  not  speak.  j 


The  Spanish  Language. 

THE  ADJECTIVE. 


487 


I.  Adjectives  agree  in  number  and  gender  with  the 
aoun  they  qualify,  as: 


^E1  libro  nuevo,  the  new  hook. 
Libros  nuevos,  new  hooks. 


Una  casa  nueva,  a new  house. 
Casas  nuevas,  new  houses. 


I 

2.  The  plural  of  adjectives  is  formed  like  the  plural 
noims,  viz.,  by  adding  s to  vowel-endings,  and  es  to 
'X)nsonant  or  accented  vowel-endings,  always  changing  z 
\nto  c before  es,  as: 


Singular. 


resco, 

:‘eliz. 


fresca 

feliz, 


frescos, 

felices. 


Plural. 

frescas, 

felices. 


fresh. 

happy. 


Formation  of  the  Feminine. 


j I.  The  feminine  of  adjectives  is  generally  formed  by 
changing  the  final  o into  a,  or  by  adding  a to  the  con- 
^sonant  terminations  an,  on,  and  or,  as: 


Bueno,  buena,  good. 


Holgazán,  holgazana,  lazy. 


Mayor,  greater,  menor,  smaller,  and  anterior,  anterior, 
\brm  an  exception  to  this  rule;  they  don’t  vary. 

" 2.  Adjectives  referring  to  nationahty  and  ending  in 
i consonant  add  a for  the  feminine,  as: 


francés,  francesa,  French. 


Inglés,  inglesa,  English. 


3.  Adjectives  ending  in  any  other  letter  remain  un- 
hanged in  the  feminine,  as: 


I Jn  hombre  cortés, 
[7na  mujer  cortés. 


A polite  man. 

A polite  woman. 


488 


The  Rosenthal  Method, 


4.  When  an  adjective  refers  to  two  or  more  nouns 
in  the  singular,  it  must  be  placed  in  the  plural,  and 
in  the  masculine  plural  when  the  nouns  are  of  different 
genders,  as: 

El  padre  y su  hijo  son  buenos,  The  father  and  his  son  are  ] 

good.  I 

El  padre  y la  madre  son  hue-  The  father  and  the  mother  are 
nos,  good. 


Peculiarities  of  some  Adjectives. 

I.  The  following  adjectives  lose  the  final  o when 
standing  before  a masculine  noun  singular,  as: 


Bueno,  good. 

Malo,  had. 

Postrero,  latter^  last. 
Primero,  first. 


Tercero,  third. 

Uno,  one. 

Alguno,  some^  any. 
Ninguno,  none^  not  any. 


Examples. 


Un  buen  hombre,  a good  man.  El  tercer  día,  the  third  day. 

Un  mal  caballo,  a bad  horse.  Un  perro,  one  dog. 

2.  Grande,  great,  large,  santo,  holy,  and  ciento,  a hun- 
dred, lose  the  last  syllable: 

Un  gran^  peligro,  a great  peril.  San  Pedro,  St.  Peter. 

Una  gran  casa,  a great  house.  Cien  soldados,  a hundred  sol- 
diers. 

Note. — Santo  is  not  abbreviated  before  the  following 
four  names  of  Saints: 

Santo  Domingo,  St.  Domin-  Santo  Toribio,  St.  Torihius. 
igue. 

Santo  Tomé,  St.  Timothy.  Santo  Tomás,  St.  Thomas. 


1 Grande  loses  the  final  syllable  before  any  noun  beginning  with  a 
consonant. 


The  Spanish  Language. 

Position  of  the  Adjective. 


489 


I.  The  adjective  stands  generally  after  the  noun 
qualified,  as: 

hombre  prudente,  The  prudent  man. 

planta  venenosa,  The  poisonous  plant. 


I 2.  There  are  many  cases  when  the  adjectives  are 
Solaced  before  the  norms,  though  a satisfactory  reason 
I :annot  always  be  adduced  for  them.  It  is  almost  en- 
:irely  a matter  of  style. 

The  following  rules  will  be  found  useful: 
a.  Numeral  adjectives  are  generally  placed  before  the 


lotm: 

jLa  tercera  casa,  The  third  house. 

<S1  primer  tomo.  The  first  volume. 


I h.  Adjectives  which  are  used  in  a figurative  sense, 
or  when  used  in  an  explanatory  manner  are  usually 
placed  before  the  noun,  as: 

Un  delicioso  viaje,  A delightful  journey. 

. Admirable  acción!  Admirable  action! 


3.  All  adjectives  denoting  color,  nationality,  taste. 
Dr  shape,  and  all  participles  used  adjectively  are  placed 
after  the  noun,  as: 


31  músico  alemán,  The  German  musician. 

.Jna  madre  amada,  A beloved  mother. 

’Jna  posición  perdida,  A lost  position. 

4.  Some  adjectives  have  different  significations  ac- 
cording to  their  position,  as: 

Jna  buena  noche,  a good  night.  Noche  buena,  Christinas. 

Jn  malo  joven,  a sick  young  man.  Un  joven  malo,  a wicked  youth. 
Negra  acción,  dark  deed.  Un  vestido  negro,  a black  dress. 

"/arios  papeles,  various  papers.  Papeles  varios,  miscellaneous 

papers. 


490 


The  Rosenthal  Method, 


Pobre  autor,  a miserable  Autor  pobre,  a poor  author, 
writer. 

Cierta  época,  a certain  period.  Noticia  cierta,  reliable  news. 

These  rules  may  serve  merely  to  guide  the  student. 
By  placing  the  adjectives  before  the  nouns  more  weight 
and  emphasis  is  given. 


Comparison  of  Adjectives. 

1.  The  Comparative  is  formed  by  placing  más,  morey 
or  menos,  less,  before  the  positive,  as: 

caro,  dear;  más  caro,  dearer;  menos  caro,  less  dear. 

2.  The  Superlative  is  formed,  either  by  placing  el,  lo, 
la  más  or  menos  before  the  positive,  or  by  adding  isimo, 
isima  to  the  positive  with  the  elision  of  its  last  vowel, 
as: 

Caro,  dear;  el  más  caro,  the  dearest; 
muy  caro  or  carísimo,  very  dear. 

The  former  is  called  the  relative  superlative,  and  the 
latter  the  absolute  superlative. 

The  superlative  is  also  formed  by  placing  before  the 
adjective  the  adverbs  muy,  grandemente,  enormemente, 
sumamente,  etc.,  and  in  a few  cases  by  using  the  prefix 
archi,  as: 

muy  grande,  very  large.  enormemente  rico,  enormously  rich. 

archimillonario,  many  times  millionaire. 


Positive. 


docto,  doctos,  1 , , 

- ^ ^ r learned. 

docta,  doctas,  J 


Comparative. 


más  docto,  más  doctos, 
más  docta,  más  doctas. 


I more  learned. 


Relative  Superlative.  Absolute  Superlative. 


el  or  lo  más  docto, 
la  más  docta, 
los  más  doctos, 
las  más  doctas. 


doctísimo, 
the  most  doctísima, 
learned,  doctísimos, 
doctísimas, 


very  learned. 


3.  The  comparative  is  followed  by  que,  than,  as: 
Tengo  menos  libros  que  V.,  / have  fewer  books  than  you. 


The  Spanish  Language, 


491 


Note. — After  más  and  menos,  than,  is  rendered  by  de 
/hen  a numeral  follows,  as: 

'uve  más  de  cien  duros,  I had  more  than  a hundred  doU 

I lars, 

I 4.  If  the  sentence  which  contains  the  comparison  is 
ollowed  by  a verb,  de  lo  que  must  be  employed  in  place 
l>f  que,  as: 

i )on  Felipe  es  mayor  de  lo  que  Don  Philip  is  older  than  he 
parece.  seems, 

£ste  comerciante  tiene  menos  This  merchant  has  less  money  than 
\ dinero  de  lo  que  V.  cree,  you  think, 

5.  The  Comparative  of  equality — as — as — is  given 
>y  tan — como  with  adjectives  or  adverbs,  and  by  tanto 
[tantos,  tanta,  tantas) — como  with  nouns  (or  tanto — 
nanto  when  a verb  follows),  as: 

I El  es  tan  instruido  como  V.,  He  is  as  educated  as  you, 

6.  Four  adjectives  have,  besides  their  regular  com- 
)aratives  and  superlatives,  a Latin  or  irregular  form. 
They  are: 


Positive. 

meno,  a,  good, 
aalo,  a,  had^  poor, 
;rande,  greaty  large. 


Comparative. 

mejor  {rarely  más  bueno),  better, 
peor  {rarely  más  malo),  worse  y poorer, 
mayor  or  más  grande,  greater y larger. 


>equeño,  a,  smally  little,  menor  or  más  pequeño,  smaller  y less. 


Relative  Superlative. 


mejor; 


6 

oT 


<D 


peor; 

to 

fiS 

mayor;  w 


menor; 


mejores,  {rarely  el,  la,  lo  más,  bueno,  a,)  the 
best, 

peores,  {rarely  el,  la,  lo  más  malo,  a,)  the  worsts 
poorest, 

mayores,  or,  el,  la,  lo  más  grande,  the  greatest, 
los,  las  más  grandes,  largest  y oldest, 
menores,  or  y el,  la,  lo  más  pequeño,  a,  the  smallest,. 
los,  las  más  pequeños,  as,  leasty  youngest. 


492 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


Absolute  Superlative. 

bonísimo,  a,  or  muy  bueno,  a,  {rarely  óptimo,  a,)  very  good. 
malísimo,  a,  or  muy  malo,  a,  {rarely  pésimo,  a,)  very  bad,  poor. 
grandísimo,  a,  or  muy  grande,  {rarely  máximo,  a,)  very  large, 
great. 

pequeñísimo,  a,  muy  pequeño,  a,  {rarely  minimo,  a,)  very  small, 
little. 

The  Absolute  Superlative. 

Observe  that 

1.  Adjectives  ending  in  co  or  go  form  their  superlative 
in  quisimo  and  guisimo  to  preserve  their  original  sotmds 
of  c and  g,  as: 

rico,  rich;  riquísimo,  very  rich. 
vago,  vague;  vaguísimo,  very  vague. 

2.  Adjectives  ending  in  z change  z into  c,  as: 

feliz,  happy;  felicísimo,  very  happy. 

3.  Adjectives  ending  in  io  drop  these  letters,  so  that 
the  repetition  of  i may  be  avoided  in  the  superlative, 
as: 

limpio,  clean;  limpísimo,  very  clean. 
necesario,  necessary;  necesarísimo,  very  necessary. 

Exceptions  are: 

agrio,  sour;  agriisimo,  very  sour. 
frío,  cold;  friísimo,  very  cold. 
pio,  pious;  piísimo,  very  pious. 

4.  Adjectives  ending  in  ble  change  it  into  bilisimOj 
as: 

afable,  affable;  afabilísimo,  very  affable. 
noble,  noble;  nobilísimo,  very  noble. 

5.  Adjectives  which  have  ie  in  the  syllable  before  the 
last  elide  the  i,  as: 


The  Spanish  Language. 


493 


cierto,  certain;  certísimo,  very  certain. 
tierno,  tender;  ternísimo,  very  tender. 


6.  A few  superlatives  in 
derivation,  as: 

acre,  acrimonious;  acérrimo, 
áspero,  harsh;  aspérrimo. 
célebre,  celebrated;  celebérrimo, 
libre,  free;  libérrimo, 
pobre,  poor;  paupérrimo, 
salubre,  healthful;  salubérrimo, 
fuerte,  strong;  tortísimo, 
nuevo,  new;  novísimo. 

> devoted;  pientísimo. 
piadoso,  J 


érrimo  and  ísimo  are  of  Latin 


antiguo,  ancient;  antiquísimo, 
benévolo,  benevolent;  benevolent- 
ísimo. 

fiel,  faithful;  fidelísimo, 
magnífico,  magnificent;  magnifi- 
centísimo. 

bueno,  good;  bonísimo, 
sabio,  wise;  sapientísimo. 

> sacred;  sacratísimo, 
sagrado,  J 


7.  The  superlative  in  ísimo  is  always  stronger  and 
more  emphatic  than  that  formed  with  muy.  If  the 
superlative  is  preceded  by  the  indefinite  article,  the 
form  in  ísimo  is  employed  for  elegance’  sake,  as:  es  un 
valentísimo  hombre,  he  is  a very  brave  man  (not:  es  un 
hombre  muy  valiente). 


THE  PRONOUNS. 

I.  Personal  Pronouns. 

There  are  two  classes  of  personal  pronouns,  viz.:  pro- 
nombres absolutos  or  absolute  pronoims  and  pronombres 
subjuntivos  or  conjunctive  pronouns.  The  latter  are 
used  in  the  dative  and  accusative  only. 


494 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


Singular,  Plural. 

First  Person. 


ABSOLUTOS. 

CONJUNTIVOS. 

ABSOLUTOS. 

conjuntivos. 

Nom.  yo. 

— I. 

nosotros, 

as, 

, — we. 

Gen.  de  mi. 

— of  me. 

de  nosotros. 

a 

— of  us. 

Dat.  a mi. 

me,  to  me. 

a nosotros. 

u 

nos,  to  us. 

Acc.  — 

me,  me. 

— 

— 

nos,  us. 

Second  Person. 

Nom.  tú. 

— thou. 

vosotros. 

as, 

, — ye. 

Gen.  de  ti, 

— of  thee. 

de  vosotros. 

u 

— of  ye. 

Dat.  a ti, 

te,  to  thee. 

a vosotros. 

u 

os,  to  ye. 

Acc.  — 

te,  thee. 

— 

— 

os,  ye. 

Third  Person  {masculine). 

Nom.  él. 

— he^  it. 

ellos. 

— they. 

Gen.  de  él, 

— of  himy  of  it. 

de  ellos. 

— of  them. 

Dat.  a él, 

le,  to  himy  to  it. 

a ellos. 

les,  to  them. 

Acc.  — 

le,  lo,  hiniy  it. 

— 

los,  them. 

Third  Person  {feminine). 

Nom.  ella. 

— shCy  it. 

ellas. 

— they. 

Gen.  de  ella, 

— of  hery  of  it. 

de  ellas. 

— of  them. 

Dat.  a ella. 

le,  to  hery  to  it. 

a ellas. 

les,  to  them. 

Acc.  — 

la,  hery  it. 

— 

las,  them. 

Second  Person  {address). 

{When  there 

is  not  familiarity  between  the  person 

who  speaks  and 

the  one  spoken  to.Y 

Nom.  V. 

— you. 

V.  V. 

— you. 

Gen.  de  V., 

— of  you. 

de  V.  V. 

— of  you. 

Dat.  a V., 

le,  to  you. 

a V.  V. 

les,  to  you. 

Acc.  — 

le,  la,  you. 

— 

los,  las,  you. 

THIRD  PERSON  {neuter). 

REFLEX.  SUB. 

OF  THIRD  PERSON. 

Nom.  ello. 

lo,  it.  se, 

one^s  self  y — 

ihemselvesy  itself. 

Gen.  de  ello. 

— of  it.  de  si. 

« 

of  himself  y herself. 

Dat.  a ella. 

le,  to  it.  a si. 

" se,  to  himself  y herself. 

Acc.  — 

lo,  it.  — 

se. 

himself y etc. 

1 The  word  usted  (abbreviated  Vd.,  or  V.)  derives  from  the  re- 
spectful expression  vuestra  merced,  your  mercy,  your  worship, 
which,  of  course,  governed  the  third  person  singular;  afterwards 
that  expression  was  contracted  first  in  usarsed  arid,  at  last,  in  usted; 
hence  comes  the  peculiarity  of  the  Spanish  language  in  using  the 
third  person  of  the  verbs  with  a word  that  refers  to  the  second. 


The  Spanish  Language. 

Remarks  on  the  Personal  Pronouns. 


495 


I.  The  nominative  of  the  personal  pronouns  yo,  tu, 
él,  ella,  etc.,  is  generally  suppressed. 

; It  must  be  expressed  in  questions,  in  cases  of  am- 
biguity and  on  account  of  emphasis  or  contrast,  as: 

I Pago  yo  o paga  él?  Do  I pay^  or  he? 

¿ qué  he  de  hacer  yo?  what  have  I to  do? 

' él  estudia  y ella  escribe.  he  studies  and  she  writes. 


2.  The  absolute  personal  pronouns  must  be  used 
when  governed  by  a preposition  or  when  standing  alone 
jm  answer  to  questions,  as: 


■ I Quién  manda  aquí  ? 

¿ él,  ella,  V.,  o quién? 
i I a quién  llama  V.  ? 

^ ¿ a mí,  a él,  a nosotros? 


Who  commands  here? 
he,  she,  you,  or  who? 
whom  are  you  calling? 
me,  him,  us? 


3.  The  conjunctive  forms  me,  te,  le,  la,  lo,  se  and 
their  plurals  nos,  os,  les,  las,  los,  are  placed  before  the 
verb  in  Spanish,  except  in  affirmative  imperative  sen- 
tences, or  if  the  verb  stands  in  the  infinitive  or  in  the 
present  participle  (gerund),  or  at  the  beginning  of  the 
sentence. 

In  the  latter  four  cases  the  pronouns  are  placed  after 
the  verb,  and  merged  into  one  word  with  it. 


! Ella  me  paga, 

1 él  nos  dió  la  noticia, 
i yo  le  he  escrito  la  carta, 
■ voy  a darle  la  carta, 
enséñeme  V.  el  libro, 

' preguntaránme  a caso. 


She  pays  me. 
he  gave  us  the  news. 

I have  written  the  letter  to  him. 

I am  going  to  give  him  the  letter, 

show  me  the  hook. 

they  perhaps  will  ask  me. 


4.  The  English  expressions  it  is  /,  it  is  he^  etc.,  are 
given  by  soy  yo,  es  él,  etc. 


" Soy  yo  que  V.  vió  ayer, 
¿ Quién  llama?  Soy  yo, 


It  is  I whom  you  saw  yesterday. 
Who  is  knocking?  It  is  I. 


4q6 


The  Rosenthal  Method, 


5.  When  mi,  ti,  si  are  governed  by  the  preposition 
con,  with,  they  form  conmigo,  with  me;  contigo,  with  thee; 
consigo,  with  himself,  itself,  them. 


1,  To  give  emphasis,  or  to  amplify  the  phrase,  the 
conjimctive  and  disjunctive  pronouns  are  used  together. 
The  disjunctive  forms  are  placed  first  to  give  greater 
intensity  to  the  meaning,  as: 


yo  le  escribí  a él  con  pre-  I preferred  to  write  to  him, 
ferencia, 

2.  Any  substantive  may  replace  the  disjunctive  pro-  | 
noun  while  the  pleonastic  construction  with  the  con-  ! 
junctive  pronoim  remains  unchanged,  as:  i 

A nosotros  españoles  nos  gusta  We  Spaniards  like  to  gossipy  | 
charlar,  or,  it  pleases  us  Spaniards  to 


Inflection  and  Use  of  “Usted.^^ 

1.  Usted  is  inflected  like  any  notm. 

2.  The  datives  and  accusatives  of  él  and  ella,  to- 
gether with  the  reflexive  pronoun  of  the  third  person, 
are  frequently  substituted  for  usted.  This  is  done  to 
avoid  repetition,  as: 

Oigo  a V.  mas  no  le  veo,  I hear  you,  hut  I do  not  see 


Pleonastic  Construction, 


me  pagan  a mi, 
a mi  me  pagan, 

¿ a mi  qué  me  importa? 


what  do  I care? 


le  aseguro  al  comerciante. 


gossip, 

I assure  the  merchant. 


you, 

I come  to  see  you  and  to  tell 
you. 


vengo  a ver  a V.  y a decirle, 


The  Spanish  Language. 


497 


Singular. 

Nom.  usted,  you. 

Gen.  de  usted,  of  you. 

Dat.  a usted,  le  (subst.)  to  you. 

Acc.  (a)  usted,  le,  la,  you. 

I Nom. 

Gen.  de  si,  of  yourself . 

Dat.  se,  a si,  to  yourself. 

Acc.  se,  a si,  yourself. 


Plural. 

ustedes,  you. 

de  ustedes,  of  you. 

a ustedes,  les  (subst.),  to  you. 

(a)  ustedes,  los,  las,  {les),  you. 

de  si,  of  yourselves. 

se,  a si,  to  yourselves. 

se,  a si,  yourselves.^ 


3.  The  substitutes  of  usted  follow  the  general  rules  of 
position  laid  down  for  conjunctive  pronouns: 


Le  digo, 
les  digo, 
j voy  a decirles, 
yo  se  lo  ruego. 


I tell  you  (singular). 

I tell  you  (plural). 

I am  going  to  tell  you. 
I beg  you  for  it. 


4.  Usted  and  its  substitutes  are  used  in  the  pleonastic 
I construction,  as: 

. Le  diré  a V.,  I shall  tell  you. 

I ¿ qué  le  pasa  a V. ? what  is  the  matter  with  you?  (sin- 

I guiar). 

I qué  les  pasa  a V.  V.?  what  is  the  matter  with  you?  (plu- 

ral). 

I puedo  pedirle  a V.  un  favor?  may  I ask  a favor  of  you? 

I le  parece  a V.  que  yo  deba  ir  do  you  think  that  I must  go  to  the 
al  Banco?  hank? 

5.  The  genitive  and  dative  of  usted  may  take  the  place 
of  the  possessive  adjective: 

A los  pies  de  V.,  señora.  At  your  feet,  lady.^ 

beso  a V.  la  mano,  caballero,  I kiss  your  hand,  sir.^ 

6.  Usted,  as  subject,  may  stand  before  or  after  the  verb: 

1 Properly  speaking,  the  inñexions  de  si,  se,  a si,  etc.,  mean  of 
himself,  to  himself,  himself,  of  yourselves,  to  yourselves,  and  your- 
selves. They,  however,  may  be  used  in  connection  with  usted  as 

i explained  in  note,  page  494. 

2 These  are  formal,  but  very  frequently  used,  modes  of  salu- 
' tation. 


498 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


V.  no  sabe,  no  sabe  V.,  you  do  not  know, 

¿ ha  recibido  V.  la  carta?  have  you  received  the  letter? 

The  Reflexive  Pronoun. 


I.  The  pronouns  of  the  first  and  second  persons  have, 
as  we  have  seen  in  the  reflexive  conjugation,  a reflexive 
meaning  when  they  refer  to  the  same  person  as  the 
subject: 


Nos  preguntamos,  we  ask  ourselves, 

me  hallo  ocupado,  I find  myself  ( = J am)  busy, 

2.  Pronouns  of  the  third  person,  including  usted, 
refer,  in  the  oblique  cases,  to  a different  person  (or  thing) 
from  the  subject.  Each  gender  employs  the  regular 
substitute  se  to  express  reflexive  or  reciprocal  action 
on  the  subject: 


Le  engaña, 
se  engaña, 

V.  la  engaña, 
V.  se  engaña. 


he  deceives  him, 
he  deceives  himself, 
you  deceive  her. 
you  deceive  yourself. 


3.  The  translation  of  se 
fluous  in  English: 

Lléveselo, 
se  propone, 
se  rompe, 
se  abre, 
se  cierra, 


is  generally  omitted  as  super- 

take  it, 
he  proposes, 
it  breaks, 
ii  opens, 
it  shuts. 


Two  Objective  Pronouns. 

I.  When  a verb  governs  two  objective  pronouns, 
the  dative  must  precede  the  accusative,  with  the  ex- 
ception of  the  reflexive  pronoun  se,  which  always  stands 
first,  whatever  may  be  its  case,  as: 


The  Spanish  Language. 


499 


V.  me  lo  dará, 
él  nos  lo  ha  dado, 

I me  lo  dará  V.  ? 

se  lo  escribiré  esta  tarde, 


you  will  give  it  to  me. 
he  has  given  it  to  us. 
will  you  give  it  to  me? 

I will  write  him  so  this  after- 
noon. 


2:  For  euphony’s  sake,  the  Spaniards  never  say  le  lo, 
le  le,  le  la,  le  les,  le  los,  le  las,  les  lo,  les  le,  les  la,  etc., 
but  change  it  into  se  lo,  se  le,  se  la,  etc. 

There  are,  therefore,  the  following: 


Le  le  and  les  le  become  se  le. 


le  la 

u 

les  la 

u 

se  la. 

le  lo 

u 

les  lo 

u 

se  lo. 

le  les 

u 

les  les 

a 

se  les. 

le  los 

u 

les  los 

u 

se  los. 

le  las 

u 

les  las 

u 

se  las. 

3.  The  pleonastic  construction  is  the  same  for  two 
objectives  as  for  one: 


Se  lo  doy  a V., 

Se  lo  doy  a V.  V., 

A mi  me  lo  han  escrito, 

Él  se  lo  habia  dicho  a mi  her- 
mana, 

A mi  hermana  se  lo  había 
dicho. 


1 I give  it  to  you  (sing,  and  plu- 
J ral). 

They  wrote  me  so. 

' He  had  said  so  to  my  sister. 


Possessive  Adjectives  and  Pronouns. 

1.  Possessive  adjectives  are  either  conjunctive  or  ab- 
solute. The  conjunctive  forms  stand  before  the  noun 
they  qualify,  while  the  absolute  adjectives  stand  after 
it.  They  are  inflected  like  adjectives. 

2.  They  are  varied  as  follows: 


The  Rosenthal  Method, 


500 


Singular.  Plural. 


CONJUNCT. 

ABSOLUTE. 

CONJUNCT. 

ABSOLUTE. 

mi, 

mío,  mía. 

mis. 

míos,  mías. 

my. 

tu. 

tuyo,  tuya. 

tus. 

tuyos,  tuyas. 

thy. 

her, 

his. 

su, 

suyo,  suya. 

sus. 

suyos,  suyas,  * 

its, 

your. 

nuestro, -a,  nuestro,  nuestra,  nuestros,-as,  nuestros,  nuestras,  our, 
vuestro,-a,  vuestro,  vuestra,  vuestros,-as,  vuestros,  vuestras,  your, 

( their. 

su,  suyo,  suya,  sus,  suyos,  suyas,  < 


3.  Since  su,  sus  can  mean  his,  her,  its,  their,  and  your 
and  may  therefore  be  dubious  as  regards  its  meaning, 
the  genitive  case  of  the  appropriate  personal  pronoun 
is  frequently  added.  Instead  of  su  or  sus,  el,  la,  los, 
or  las  may  be  used,  as: 

Su  libro  de  él. 

Su  libro  de  ella. 

El  libro  de  él,  de  ella. 

Su  libro  de  ellos,  de  ellas. 

El  libro  de  ellos,  de  ellas, 

4.  Your  is  expressed  by  su,  sus  when  the  sense  of 
the  sentence  sufficiently  indicates  to  what  person  su 
refers.  It  can  also  be  expressed  pleonastically  by  su 
(sus)  de  V.  or  de  V.  V.,  as: 

I / have  your  hook. 

Have  you  your  hook? 


Tengo  su  libro  de  V., 
Tengo  el  libro  de  V., 
I Tiene  V.  su  libro? 


His  hook. 

Her  hook, 

His  hookf  her  hook, 
I their  hook. 


5.  When  parts  of  the  body  or  articles  of  dress  are 
mentioned,  the  definite  article  is  employed  instead  of 
the  possessive  adjective,  as: 


The  Spanish  Language, 


I Qué  tiene  V.  en  la  mano? 
Me  duele  la  cabeza, 

Se  quita  los  zapatos, 


SOI 


What  have  you  in  your  hand? 
My  head  aches. 

He  takes  his  shoes  off. 


6.  The  absolute  forms  mío,  tuyo,  suyo,  etc.,  stand  al- 
ways after  the  noun.  They  are  used  to  express  greater 
intensity  or  rhetorical  effect,  as: 

Es  culpa  suya  y no  mía,  It  is  his  faulty  and  not  mine, 

Es  costumbre  suya  de  pagar  al  It  is  a habit  of  his  to  pay  cash, 
contado. 


7.  The  absolute  forms  are  used  in  the  address  and 
when  used  with  nouns  in  an  indeterminate  sense  (with 
a,  an,  or  some,  of  mine,  of  thine,  etc.),  as: 


i Padre  mío! 
i Madre  mía! 
i Pobre  muchacho  mío! 
¡ Querido  amigo  mío! 
Carlos  es  amigo  mío, 


My  father! 

My  mother! 

My  poor  hoy! 

My  dear  friend! 

Charles  is  a friend  of  mine. 


8.  It  is  mine,  thine,  etc.,  or  it  belongs  to  me,  to  thee, 
etc.,  are  expressed  by  ser,  to  be,  with  the  possessive 
pronoun,  as: 

Esta  casa  es  mía,  This  house  is  mine;  belongs  to 

me. 

Este  cuadro  es  suyo.  This  picture  belongs  to  him. 

Estos  papeles  son  mios^y  no  These  papers  are  mine  and  not 
de  V.,  yours. 


The  Demonstrative  Pronouns. 

I.  The  demonstrative  pronouns  or  adjectives  agree 
in  gender  and  number  with  the  noun  they  limit,  except 
the  neuter  forms,  as: 


502 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


Singular. 

Plural. 

MASC.  FEM. 

NEUT. 

MASC. 

FEM. 

este,  esta. 

esto. 

this. 

estos. 

estas. 

these. 

ese,  esa. 

eso. 

that. 

esos. 

esas, 

those. 

aquel,  aquella,  aquello,  that  yonder,  aquellos,  aquellas,  those  yonder. 

2.  Este,  esta,  designates  the  person  or  object  nearest 
to  the  speaker;  ese,  esa,  that  which  is  near  the  person 
addressed;  aquel,  aquella,  that  which  is  remote  from 
both: 

Este  libro  que  estoy  leyendo....  This  hook  which  I am  read- 
ing.... 

Ese  tratado  que  tiene  V.  en  That  treatise  which  you  have 
la  mano....  in  your  hand....  ' 

Aquel  folleto  que  está  sobre  la  That  pamphlet  which  lies  upon 
mesa....  the  table.... 

3.  The  demonstratives  must  be  repeated  before  every  | 

noun,  as:  | 

I 

Este  hombre,  esta  mujer,  y This  man^  this  woman^  and  this  1 
este  muchacho  están  ma-  child  are  ill. 
los,  I 

4.  Although  the  demonstratives  naturally  precede  the 

nouns,  they  are  placed  after  them  to  express  sarcasm  1 
and  contempt,  as:  1 

I 

El  hombre  este,  This  man  here.  \ 

, 5.  The  words  ciudad,  city,  and  plaza,  market,  are 
usually  committed  with  esta  and  esa  after  the  preposi- 
tion en,  in.  En  esta  means,  therefore,  here,  and  en  esa, 
there : 

En  esta  no  hay  novedad.  There  is  nothing  new  here  {vnth  j 

us).  \ 

I Cómo  van  los  negocios  en  How  is  business  there  {with  \ 

esa?  you)?  \ 


The  Spanish  Language. 


503 


6.  In  reference  to  time,  este  denotes  the  present; 
ese,  a past  period  within  our  recollection;  aquel,  the 
past  generally: 

Este  es  el  siglo  de  la  ilustra-  This  is  the  age  of  progress. 
ción, 

Me  acuerdo  bien  de  ese  día,  I re)nemher  that  day  well. 

Aquellos  eran  tiempos  de  mucho  Those  were  days  of  great  bar^ 
barbarismo,  harism. 

7.  The  neuter  forms  are  esto,  this  (what  is  near  to  the 
person  who  speaks) ; eso,  that  (what  is  nearer  to  the  person 
to  whom  one  speaks  than  to  the  one  who  speaks) ; aquello, 
that  (what  is  remote  either  from  the  one  who  speaks  and 
from  the  one  spoken  to),  as: 

Esto  es  verdad,  This  is  the  truth. 

Eso  es  increible,  That  is  incredible. 

Aquello  fué  una  lástima,  That  was  a pity. 

8.  The  definite  article  is  often  used  as  a demonstrative 
pronoun,  assuming  the  gender  and  number  of  the  noun 
it  replaces: 

Este  caballo  y el  de  mi  amigo.  This  horse  and  that  of  my  friend. 

Esta  casa  y la  de  mi  vecino.  This  house  and  that  of  my  neigh- 

bor. 

Relative  Pronouns. 

The  relative  pronouns  are: 

Que,  whOf  whoMy  whichy  thaty  what. 

quien  (sing.);  quienes  (plur.),  who;  whom;  whoever;  whomsoever. 
el  cual;  la  cual;  los  cuales;  las  cuales, 
el  que;  la  que;  los  que;  las  que, 
lo  cual  or  lo  que,  that;  which;  what. 
cuyo;  cuya;  cuyos;  cuyas,  whose  y of  which;  which. 
aquel  que;  aquella  que,  the  one  who;  the  one  which. 
aquellos  que;  aquellas  que,  the  ones  who;  those  who. 

Que. 

I.  Que  refers  to  persons  or  things  in  the  nominative 
and  accusative  only;  in  the  other  cases  it  can  refer  to 
things  only: 


I who;  which. 


504 


The  Rosenthal  Method, 


El  hombre  que  viene  es  mi  tío,  The  man  who  comes  is  my 

uncle. 

Es  una  mujer  que  sabe  mucho,  She  is  a woman  who  knows  many 

things. 

Los  libros  que  leemos  son  The  books  we  are  reading  are 
buenos,  good. 

2.  Que  relating  to  an  accusative  does  not  require 
the  prepositión  a,  even  when  referring  to  a person.  Ob- 
serve that  the  relative  must  always  be  expressed  in 
Spanish,  as: 

He  visto  al  niño  que  V.  es-  I have  seen  the  hoy  {whom)  you 
pera,  expect. 

Quien. 

1.  Quien,  quienes — for  both  genders — ^refers  only  to 
persons: 

Los  señores  con  quienes  hablé  The  gentlemen  with  whom  I talked 
han  partido,  have  left. 

Las  señoras  a quienes  vimos  The  ladies  whom  we  saw  are 
son  inglesas,  English. 

2,  If  the  noun  is  immediately  followed  by  the  rela- 
tive pronoun,  it  is  preferable  to  use  que  even  of  per- 
sons, as: 

Este  es  el  hombre  que  me  dió  This  is  the  man  who  gave  ine  the 
el  libro,  hook. 

El  cual,  el  que. 

I.  El  cual,  la  cual,  lo  cual,  los  cuales,  and  las  cuales; 
el  que,  la  que,  lo  que,  los  que  and  las  que,  are  substi- 
tutes for  quien  and  que,  and  relate,  therefore,  both  to 
persons  and  things.  They  are  employed  to  avoid  am- 
biguity. Observe  that  they  take  the  preposition  a when 
they  refer  to  persons: 

La  hija  de  nuestro  vecino,  la  que  Our  neighbor's  daughter , who  spoke 
{or,  la  cual)  nos  habló  ayer,  to  us  yesterday,  died  to-day. 

ha  muerto  hoy. 


The  Spanish  Language. 


505 


Este  es  el  criado  de  Doña  This  is  Doña  Janeas  servant^  of 
Juana  del  cual  (or,  del  whom  we  have  heard  very  had 
que)  hemos  oído  cosas  things. 
muy  malas, 

2.  The  article  is  omitted,  in  cual,  cuales: 

a.  When  the  relative  is  separated  from  the  noun  by 
a verb: 

Nunca  hemos  sabido  cual  era  We  have  never  known  what  the 
la  verdadera  causa  de  su  real  cause  of  his  misfortune 
desgracia,  was. 

b.  When  it  introduces  an  indirect  question: 

Es  difícil  saber  cual  de  los  It  is  difficult  to  know  who  of  the 
dos  ha  ganado  más,  two  has  gained  most. 

c.  To  express  a comparison: 

Estas  frutas  son  tales  cuales  These  fruits  are  such  as  we 
esperábamos,  expected. 

d.  In  exclamations: 

I Cuál  sería  mi  alegría!  What  would  he  my  joy! 

Lo  que. 

Lo  que,  that  which,  what,  and  todo  lo  que,  all  that, 
relates  to  an  idea,  not  to  a word: 

Lo  que  él  dice  no  es  lo  que  V.  What  he  says  is  not  what  you 
piensa,  think. 

No  creo  nada  de  todo  lo  que  I do  not  helieve  anything  of  all 
Pedro  nos  ha  dicho,  that  Peter  has  told  us. 

Cuyo,  cuya. 

Cuyo,  cuya,  whose,  of  whose,  which,  refers  to  both 
persons  and  things,  and  takes  the  gender  and  the  num- 
ber of  the  noun  which  it  precedes: 


5o6  The  Rosenthal  Method, 

El  hombre  de  cuyas  desgracias  The  man,  of  whose  misfortunes 
V.  habló,  es  amigo  mío,  you  spoke,  is  a friend  of 

mine. 

La  señora  N.  es  mujer  de  cuya  Mrs.  N.  is  a woman  whose  no- 
nobleza  hay  mucho  que  hility  of  spirit  may  he  strongly 
dudar,  doubted. 

Interrogative  Pronouns. 

1.  The  interrogative  pronouns  are  distinguished  from 
the  relatives  by  being  written  with  an  acute  accent. 
They  are  applied  in  direct  and  indirect  questions.  They 
are: 

Quién,  pi.  quiénes,  who? 
cuyo,  cúya,  | 

cuyos,  cúyas,  > whose? 

de  quién;  de  quiénes,  J 

2.  Quién,  quiénes,  who?  is  used  only  in  connection 
with  persons: 

I Quién  llama  a la  puerta?  Who  is  knocking  at  the  door? 

I De  quién  habla  V.?  Of  whom  are  you  speaking? 

3.  Cuál,  which j is  used  where  one  or  several  objects 
are  referred  to.  It  is  more  definite  than  que: 

¿ Cuál  es  mi  sombrero?  Which  {one)  is  my  hat? 

No  sé  cuál  es  el  mío,  I do  not  know  which  one  is 

mine, 

4.  Whose,  used  interrogatively,  is  expressed  by  cuya, 
or  by  de  quién: 

I Cúyo  es  este  libro  ? 

¿ Cúyo  libro  es  este? 

I De  quién  es  este  libro  ? 

I Cúyos  zapatos  son  estos? — De  Whose  shoes  are  these? — My 
mi  padre.  father's. 

5.  Qué,  what?  can  refer  to  persons  or  things  and  can 
be  used  with  or  without  a noun: 


1T0  whom  does  this  hooi. 
belong? 


qué,  what? 
cuál 
cuáles, 


1,  1 

■les,  J 


which?  what? 


The  Spanish  Langv.age, 


507 


I Qué  hombre  es  este?  What  kind  of  a man  is  this? 

I A qué  mujer  ha  visto  V.?  Which  woman  have  you  seen? 

I Qué  hay  de  nuevo?  What  is  the  news? 

Note. — Qué  is  also  used  in  exclamations: 

¡ Qué  de  burlas!  What  fun! 

¡ Qué  bella  vista!  What  a beautiful  view! 

The  Indefinite  Pronouns. 

The  indefinite  pronouns  are  in  fact  adjectives.  When 
used  as  pronouns  they  stand  without  nouns  and  are  in- 
flected by  de  and  a.  They  are: 

1.  Ajeno,  ajena,  another^ of  other^s^  other  people^ s. 
The  neuter,  lo  ajeno,  signifies  other  people^s  property: 

Debemos  respetar  lo  ajeno,  We  must  respect  other  people^ s 

property. 

Ajeno  de  signifies  foreign  to,  as: 

Esto  es  ajeno  de  mi  carácter,  This  is  foreign  to  my  character, 

2.  Alguien,  some  one,  any  one,  somebody,  anybody,  can 
be  used  of  persons  only,  as: 

Alguien  ha  estado  aquí,  Some  one  has  been  here. 

Alguien  preguntó  por  V.,  Some  one  inquired  for  you, 

I Lo  ha  visto  alguien?  Has  any  one  seen  it? 

3.  Alguno,  alguna,  as  relating  to  persons,  means 
somebody,  some  one,  anybody,  any  one,  some,  any,  a 
few: 

Alguno  ha  estado  aquí.  Some  one  has  been  here. 

Algunos  han  venido,  los  otros  Some  (a  few)  came^  but  not  the 
no,  others. 


So8 


The  Rosenthal  Method, 


Alguno,  as  relating  to  things,  signifies  some^  any^  a 
few: 

Necesito  algún  dinero  y algunas  I need  some  money  and  some  hills 
letras  de  cambio,  of  exchange. 

Observe  that  the  final  o in  alguno  is  dropped  before 
masculine  nouns. 

4.  Algo  or  alguna  cosa,  something,  anything. 

Tengo  algo  {or  alguna  cosa)  que  I have  something  to  tell  you. 
decide, 

¿ Le  falta  a V.  algo? — Sí,  me  Do  you  want  anything? — Yes,  I 
falta  algo,  want  something. 

Algo  is  frequently  employed  as  an  adverb  and  signifies 
somewhat,  rather: 

Esta  carne  es  algo  cara.  This  meat  is  rather  dear. 

5.  Ambos,  ambas,  both,  is  used  either  as  a substantive 
or  as  an  adjective.  It  refers  to  persons  or  things,  and 
can  be  replaced  by  los  dos,  las  dos: 

Es  menester  oir  ambas  partes,  One  must  hear  both  parties. 

Entrambos,  entrambas,  are  used  in  the  same  sense: 
Xos  VÍ  a entrambos,  I saw  both  {of  them). 

6.  Cada,  each,  every,  is  only  employed  in  the  singular 
and  is  an  invariable  adjective: 

Cada  país  tiene  sus  costum-  Every  country  has  its  habits. 
bres. 

Cada  hombre;  cada  mujer,  Every  man;  every  woman, 

a.  Cada  may  be  used  before  plural  nouns  when  ac- 
companied by  numerals: 

Cada  dos  días.  Every  two  days. 

Cada  tres  años.  Every  three  years, 

b.  Cada  is  often  accompanied  by  uno  or  cual,  forming 
cada  uno,  (cada  una),  cada  cual: 


The  Spanish  Language, 


509 


Cada  uno  tiene  sus  quehaceres,  Every  one  has  his  occupations. 
Cada  una  de  estas  señoritas  es  Each  of  these  young  ladies  is  very 
muy  rica  y muy  amable,  rich  and  very  amiable. 

Cada  cual  sabe  lo  que  le  duele.  Every  one  knows  what  ails  him. 


c.  Every  may  also  be  expressed  by  todos  los  (fern, 
todas  las)  agreeing  with  a plural  noun,  referring  to  a 
period  of  time,  as: 


Todos  los  años. 
Todos  los  días. 
Todas  las  semanas, 
Todas  las  veces, 


Every  year. 
Every  day. 
Every  week. 
Every  time. 


7.  Cierto,  cierta,  a certain,  ciertos,  ciertas,  certain,  is 
used  with  nouns  without  article,  as: 

Cierto  hombre,  A certain  man. 

Cierta  señora,  A certain  lady. 

Bajo  ciertas  condiciones,  Under  certain  conditions. 

a.  Cierto,  if  standing  after  a noun,  means  sure,  au- 
thentic, certain. 

Noticias  ciertas.  Authentic  news. 

La  noticia  es  cierta.  The  intelligence  is  certain  {true). 


8.  Cosa  is  used  meaning  something,  anything;  and 
with  a negative,  nothing. 

Es  cosa  muy  de  ver.  It  is  something  well  worth  seeing. 

No  quiero  otra  cosa,  I do  not  want  anything  else. 

Esta  es  otra  cosa.  That  is  something  quite  different. 

g.  Fulano,  fulana,  means  so  and  so,  such  a one.  It 
is  also  used  of  persons  whose  names  we  do  not  know, 
remember,  or  care  to  give.  If  used  alone,  it  commonly 
takes  the  form,  of  fulano  de  tal;  of  two  persons,  fulano 
y mengano;  of  three,  fulano,  mengano  y zutano  = '‘Tom, 
Dick  and  Harry/’  as: 

¿ Quién  lo  dijo?  ¿ Qué  sé  yo?  Who  said  so?  How  do  I know? 
Fulano  de  tal.  So  and  so. 


The  Rosenthal  Method, 


Sio 


V.  dijo  que  fulano  y zutano  ya  You  said  that  so  and  so  knew  it 
lo  sabían,  already. 


9.  Mismo,  standing  before  a noun,  means  the  same.  It 
is  accompanied  either  by  the  definite  or  indefinite  article, 
or  by  a demonstrative  or  possessive  pronoun;  after  a 
noun,  however,  it  serves  to  emphasize  some  idea: 


El  mismo  día, 

La  misma  noche. 

Mis  mismos  enemigos, 
Hoy  mismo. 

Aquí  mismo. 

But: 

Yo  mismo, 

V.  mismo. 

El  rey  mismo  lo  ordenó. 


The  same  day. 

The  same  night. 

My  very  enemies. 

This  very  day. 

In  this  very  place. 

I myself. 

You  yourself. 

It  was  ordered  hy  the  king  himself. 


10.  Nada,  nothing,  not  anything,  stands  either  before 
the  verb  without  a negative,  or  after  the  verb,  with 

no: 

Nada  tengo  or  no  tengo  nada.  Nothing  is  the  matter  with  me. 

Nada  vale  or  no  vale  nada.  It  is  worth  nothing  or  it  is  not 

worth  anything. 


a.  Instead  of  nada,  the  forms  ninguna  cosa  or  cosa 
alguna  are  frequently  used.  Only  ninguna  cosa  can 
be  used  with  an  adjective,  while  cosa  alguna  must  always 
be  employed  in  connection  with  a negative  verb: 
Ninguna  cosa  tengo,  1 

No  tengo  ninguna  cosa,  [ I have  not  anything. 

No  tengo  cosa  alguna,  j 


II.  Nadie,  no  one,  fiobody,  is  the  negative  of  alguien. 
It  is  an  invariable  substantive,  referring  to  persons  only. 
It  requires  the  negative  no  when  standing  after  the  verb: 


Nadie  ha  venido  todavía, 

No  ha  venido  nadie  todavía, 
Nadie  lo  sabe, 


I Nobody  has  come  as  yet. 
No  one  knows  it. 


a.  Nadie,  after  a verb  and  without  no,  may  be  used 
in  the  meaning  of  anybody: 


The  Spanish  Language, 


Sii 

i Salió  sin  que  nadie  le  viese,  He  went  out  without  anybody 

seeing  him, 

12.  Ninguno,  ninguna,  nobody,  no  one,  none,  no,  is 
used  of  persons  and  things  and  may  be  employed  as  a 

I substantive  or  an  adjective.  Unlike  nadie,  it  may  be 
followed  by  de.  It  requires  an  additional  negative  when 
^ standing  after  the  verb.  The  final  o is  dropped  before 
masculine  nouns: 

Ninguna  mujer  es  más  her-  No  woman  is  handsomer, 
mosa, 

No  lo  he  dicho  a ninguno,  I have  told  it  to  no  one, 

j Ninguno  de  los  que  V.  conoce,  None  of  those  whom  you  know  is 

I está  aquí,  here. 

13.  The  unemphatic  no,  not  any,  is  simply  expressed 
i by  a verb  made  negative  by  no,  and  followed  by  a noun 
* without  an  article: 

No  tengo  tiempo,  I have  no  time. 

I No  tengo  dinero  conmigo,  I have  no  money  with  me. 

14.  Otro,  otra,  another,  other  (plur.  others),  is  used 
of  persons  and  things,  and  may  be  employed  as  a sub- 
stantive or  as  an  adjective.  It  does  not  admit  of  the 
indefinite  article  as  in  English,  but  requires  the  defi- 
nite article  whenever  a distinct  person  or  thing  is  to  be 
specified: 

Déme  V.  otro  libro.  Give  me  another  hook. 

a.  Otro  signifies  frequently  a second,  more,  addi- 
tional : 

Es  otro  Don  Juan,  He  is  a second  Don  Juan, 

b.  Observe  the  following  expressions: 

El  otro  día,  The  other  day. 

A1  otro  día.  The  next  day. 

Otro  día,  Another  day. 

Una  vez  y otra.  Every  other  time. 


512 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


Una  y otra  vez,  Repeatedly, 

Yo  haría  otro  tanto,  I should  do  the  same  thing. 

He  ganado  otro  tanto,  I have  made  {gained)  as  much. 

c,  Ni  uno,  ni  otro,  neither  one: 

Ni  lino  ni  otro  me  gusta.  Neither  pleases  me, 

15.  Propio,  propia,  self,  own,  is  used  like  mismo: 

Este  dinero  es  suyo  propio.  This  money  is  his  own, 

16.  Quienquiera,  whoever,  any  one  whatever,  relates 
only  to  persons,  and  in  an  absolute  sense: 

Puede  hablar  con  quienquiera  You  may  speak  with  whomsoever 
que  V.  guste,  you  please, 

17.  Cualquiera,  plur.  cualesquiera,  any  {whatever), 
any  {you  please),  is  used  both  as  an  adjective  or  as  a 
substantive,  relating  to  persons  or  things: 

Cualquiera  lo  creería,  Any  one  would  believe  it, 

a.  Cualquiera  followed  by  que,  requires  the  verb  in  the 
subjunctive: 

Cualquier  cosa  que  V.  diga.  Whatever  you  may  say, 

b.  Whatever  may  also  be  expressed  by  sea  el  que, 
plur.  sean  los  que,  las  que,  with  a noun  and  the  verb 
in  the  subjunctive: 

Sea  el  que  quiera  el  motivo  que  Whatever  reason  may  he  as- 
se  presente,  signed, 

c.  Whatever,  as  a neutral  substantive,  is  rendered  by 
todo  lo  que  or  por  más  que  with  the  subjunctive: 

Por  más  que- diga,  no  lo  creo.  Whatever  he  may  say^  I do  not 

believe  it, 

18.  Tal,  plur.  tales,  such,  such  a,  is  used  both  as  a 
substantive  and  an  adjective  of  persons  and  things: 

Tal  hombre,  Such  a man. 

Tal  mujer,  Such  a woman. 

No  creo  tal,  I do  not  believe  such  a thing. 


The  Spanish  Language,  513 

a,  Un  tal,  una  tal  means  a certain  {indefinite)  person: 

Un  tal  me  lo  ha  dicho,  A certain  person  told  me  so. 

Una  tal  me  lo  ha  contado,  A certain  female  related  it  to 

me. 

b.  Con  tal  or  a tal  means  on  condition: 

Lo  haré  con  tal  que  V.  no  lo  I will  do  it  on  condition  that  you 
diga  a mi  hermano,  do  not  tell  my  brother. 

19.  Todo,  toda,  all,  whole,  every,  anything,  is  used 
either  as  an  adjective,  a substantive,  or  an  indefinite 
pronoun:  as  an  adjective  it  is  followed  by  the  definite 
article,  but  in  the  sense  of  every  or  all  in  the  plural,  it 
is  accompanied  by  the  noun  directly: 

Todo  el  día.  The  whole  day;  all  day. 

Toda  la  noche.  The  whole  night;  all  night. 

Todos  los  hombres,  All  men. 

In  the  singular  it  means  all,  everything: 

% 

Todo  tiene  su  fin.  Everything  has  its  end. 

20.  Uno,  una,  is  an  adjective,  a substantive,  and  a 
pronoim,  signifying  in  the  singular  a,  one,  each  other; 
and  in  the  plural,  some,  each  other,  one  another: 

Si  V.  quiere  una  pluma,  puedo  If  you  want  a pen,  I can  give  you  1 
darle  una,  one. 

a.  Uno  a otro,  uno  u otro,  uno  y otro,  each  other: 

Se  aman  uno  a otro,  They  love  each  other. 

b.  Uno,  one;  se,  they,  you;  gente,  people,  are  used 
in  the  vague  sense  of  some  one,  any  one;  or  the  verb 
may  be  placed  in  the  third  person  plural: 

I Qué  pudo  uno  hacer  en  tal  What  could  one  do  in  such  a 
caso?  case? 

Llama  gente,  Somebody  knocks. 

No  se  habe  qué  hacer.  One  does  not  know  what  to  do. 


5U 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


The  Adverb. 


I.  The  adverbs  are  divided  into  primitives  and  de- 
rivatives. 


2.  Primitive  adverbs  are  expressed  by  an  originally 
single  word,  as:  bien,  más,  menos,  mal. 

a.  Observe  that  many  primitive  adverbs  are  really 
neuter  adjectives  used  adverbially,  as:  alto,  aloud;  bajo, 
low;  solo,  only;  poco,  little;  mucho,  much. 

3.  Derivative  adverbs  are  formed  by  adding  -mente 
to  the  feminine  form  of  the  adjective: 


antiguo,  old. 
franco,  frank. 
común,  common ^ 
constante,  constant. 
fácil,  easy. 
fuerte,  strong. 
feliz,  happy. 
mayor,  greater. 


antiguamente,  in  olden  times. 
francamente,  frankly. 
comúnmente,  commonly. 
constantemente,  constantly. 
fácilmente,  easily. 
fuertemente,  vehemently. 
felizmente,  happily. 
mayormente,  for  the  greater  part. 


4.  Some  neuter  adjectives  are  used  adverbially,  their 
derivative  adverbs  in  -mente  being  employed  in  a dif- 
ferent sense,  as: 


Adjetivos. 
alto,  high. 
bajo,  low. 
bastante,  com- 
petent. 
bueno,  good. 
caro,  dear. 
claro,  clear.  ' 
cierto,  certain. 
demasiado, 
holdj  exces- 
sive. 

derecho,  right. 
fuerte,  strong. 
malo,  hady  ill. 


Adverbios. 
alto,  loud. 
bajo,  softly. 
bastante,  rather. 

bien,  well. 
caro,  dearly. 
claro,  clearly. 
cierto,  certainly. 
demasiado,  ex- 
cessively. 

derecho,  rightly. 
fuerte,  strongly. 
malo,  badly. 


Derivados. 
altamente,  proudly. 
bajamente,  meanly. 
bastantemente,  sufficiently. 

buenamente,  spontaneously,  freely. 
caramente,  exceedingly. 
claramente,  openly,  conspicuously. 
ciertamente,  surely,  forsooth. 
demasiadamente,  too. 


derechamente,  directly,  expressly. 
fuertemente,  vehemently. 
malamente,  wickedly. 


The  Spanish  Language.  515 


primero,  ^nmeroy  firstly,  primeramente,  in  the  first  place, 

[mainly. 

pronto,  quick,  pronto,  soon.  prontamente,  promptly,  nimbly. 
recio,  strong,  recio,  power-  reciamente,  stoutly,  forcibly, 
fully. 


5.  Compound  adverbs,  or  rather  adverbial  expressions, 
are  formed  in  the  following  manner: 


a.  With  the  article: 
a la  verdad,  truly. 
al  contado,  cash,  in  cash, 
al  momento,  instantly. 
al  punto,  immediately. 
por  lo  más,  at  most. 


a la  derecha,  to  the  right. 
a la  izquierda,  to  the  left, 
al  vivo,  to  the  life. 
en  el  acto,  instantly. 
por  lo  menos,  at  least. 


b.  Without  the  article: 
a caballo,  on  horseback. 
a escape,  in  haste. 
a pie,  on  foot. 
a una,  together. 
con  todo,  notwithstanding. 
de  continuo,  continually. 
de  día,  by  day. 
de  golpe,  suddenly. 
de  hecho,  truly,  de  facto. 

Comparison 


de  lance,  at  a bargain. 
de  noche,  by  night. 
de  nuevo,  anew. 
de  prisa,  in  haste. 
de  pronto,  quickly. 
de  propósito,  purposely. 
de  seguro,  surely. 
de  suyo,  of  one's  own  accord. 
de  todo  punto,  wholly. 

of  Adverbs. 


I.  Adverbs  have  three  degrees  of  comparison  (but 
without  variation  for  gender  and  number): 
lejos,  far  off;  más  lejos,  further  off;  (lo)  más  lejos,  the  furthest  off; 
lejisimo,  very  far  off. 


2.  Four  adverbs  have  an  irregular  comparison: 

Positive  Comparative.  Superl.  (relative), 

mucho,  much.  más,  m.ore. 

poco,  little.  menos,  less. 

bien,  well.  mejor,  better. 

mal,  badly.  peor,  worse. 


(lo)  más,  the  most. 
(lo)  menos,  the  least. 
(lo)  mejor,  the  best. 
(lo)  peor,  the  worst. 


Superl.  (absolute). 


muchísimo,  very  much. 
poquísimo,  very  little. 


malísimo,  very  badly. 


The  Rosenthal  Method 


Si6 


Adverbs  of  Affirmation  and  Negation, 

1.  After  verbs  of  saying,  believing,  declaring,  sus- 
pecting, etc.,  yes  and  no  are  expressed  by  que  sí,  que 
no,  as: 

Yo  digo  que  sí,  él  dice  que  no,  I say  yes^  he  says  no, 

2.  No,  not,  stands  always  before  the  verb: 

No  lo  tengo. — V.  no  la  ama. 


I have  it  not- 
her. 


You  do  not  love 


I do  not  want  anything. 
Nobody  knows  it, 

I have  never  seen  it, 

I have  neither  pen  nor  paper. 


3.  The  Spaniards  use  a double  negative  to  render 
the  negation  stronger: 

No  quiero  nada. 

No  lo  sabe  nadie. 

No  lo  he  visto  jamás, 

No  tengo  ni  pluma,  ni  papel, 

The  negation  no  is  omitted  when  these  negative  ad- 
verbs stand  at  the  beginning  of  the  sentence: 

Nada  quiero,  I do  not  want  anything. 

Nadie  lo  sabe.  Nobody  knows  it. 

Jamás  lo  he  visto,  I have  never  seen  it, 

Ni  pluma,  ni  papel  tengo,  I have  neither  pen  nor  paper, 

4.  Jamás  and  nunca  have  the  same  meaning,  and  are 
generally  placed  at  the  beginning  of  sentences: 


Jamás 

Nunca 


vi  tal  cosa. 


I never  saw  such  a thing. 


5.  Jamás,  in  connection  with  por  siempre  or  para 
siempre,  means  forever: 

Me  acordaré  de  él  por  siempre  I shall  remember  him  forever, 
jamás,  (or  para  siempre 
jamás), 

6.  Jamás,  when  not  accompanied  by  no  and  not,  at 
the  beginning  of  sentences,  means  ever: 

I Ha  visto  V.  jamás  tal  pro-  Did  you  ever  see  such  behavior? 
ceder? 


The  Spanish  Language, 


517 


7.  No  is  sometimes  used  after  comparatives,  losing 
thereby  its  negative  quality: 

Mejor  es  el  trabajo  que  no  la  Work  is  better  than  idleness. 
ociosidad, 


8.  Ya,  already,  now,  signifies,  with  a negative,  no 
longer,  not  any  more,  not  now: 

Lo  sabía  ya,  I knew  it  already. 

I Me  entiende  V.  ya?  Do  you  understand  me  now? 

Si,  ya  le  entiendo,  YeSy  I understand  you  now. 

PREPOSITIONS. 

I.  The  simple  prepositions  are: 


a,  to,  at. 

ante,  beforOy  in  presence  of. 

bajo,  under. 

con,  with. 

contra,  against. 

fie,  ofy  from. 

desde,  from,  since. 

durante,  during. 

en,  iny  aty  on. 

entre,  betweeny  among. 

excepto,  except. 

hacia,  towards. 


hasta,  tilly  untily  up  tOy  to. 
mediante,  throughy  by  means  of. 
menos,  excepty  but. 
no  obstante,  notwithstanding. 
para,  /or,  tOy  in  order  to. 
por,  byy  throughy  for. 
según,  according  to,  as. 
sin,  without. 
so,  under. 

sobre,  0»,  upony  abouty  above. 
tras,  after y behindy  besides. 


2.  The  complex  prepositions  requiring  de  after  them 
are: 


acerca  de,  concerning,  about. 
además  de,  beside. 
alrededor  de,  around. 
antes  de,  before  {time  or 
order). 

cerca  de,  near,  about. 
debajo  de,  under  {place). 
delante  de,  before  {place). 


dentro  de,  within,  in,  into. 
después  de,  after  {time  or 
order). 

detrás  de,  behind  {place). 
encima  de,  on,  over. 
fuera  de,  outside,  beyond. 
lejos  de,  far  from. 


5i8 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


3.  Complex  prepositions 

conforme  a,  according  to. 
contrario  a,  contrary  to. 
frente  a,  opposite^  in  front  of. 


requiring  a after  them  are: 

junto  a,  wear,  close  by. 
con  respecto  a,  with  respect  to, 
tocante  a,  touching. 


4.  Prepositional  expressions  followed  by  de  are: 


a casa  de,  to  the  house  of. 
a causa  de,  on  account  of. 
a excepción  de,  with  the  ex- 
ception  of. 

a fuerza  de,  by  dint  of. 
a la  vista  de,  within  sight  of, 
al  cabo  de,  at  the  expiration  of, 
al  lado  de,  at  the  side  of. 
en  medio  de,  in  the  midst  of. 
en  vez  de,  instead  of. 
en  virtud  de,  by  virtue  of, 
en  vista  de,  in  view  of, 
ma.s  allá  de,  beyond. 


en  casa  de,  at  the  house  of. 
en  frente  de,  opposite. 
en  lugar  de,  instead  of. 
al  través  de,  across^  through. 
a pesar  de,  in  spite  of. 
a razón  de,  at  the  rate  of. 
de  casa  de,  from  the  house  of. 
de  parte  de,  on  the  part  of. 
por  causa  de,  on  account  of. 
por  el  lado  de,  on  the  side  of. 
por  razón  de,  by  reason  of. 
sin  embargo  de,  notwithstanding. 


5.  Prepositional  expressions  followed  by  a are: 

en  cuanto  a,  with  respect  to.  en  orden  a,  with  respect  to. 


Use  of  Certain  Prepositions. 

1.  A is  used  after  transitive  verbs  to  mark  the  per- 
sonal object,  as: 

‘Amo  a Juan,  I like  John. 

2.  A signifies  motion  toward  a given  locality,  while 
en  refers  to  rest  in  a given  place: 

Voy  a Inglatera,  / am  going  to  England. 

Está  en  casa.  He  is  at  home. 

3.  A is  used  in  reference  to  time,  price,  or  rate: 

Vendrá  a la  noche,  He  will  come  in  the  eveningi 

A veinte  centavos  la  vara.  At  twenty  cents  a yard. 


The  Spanish  Language.  519 

4.  A is  used  after  certain  verbs  to  show  the  purpose 
or  aim: 

Voy  a leer,  I am  going  to  read. 

5.  A signifies  distance  off  or  from,  or  temporary  sit- 
uation: 

Le  cogieron  a la  puerta,  They  caught  him  at  the  door. 

He  venido  de  Cádiz  a Madrid,  I came  from  Cadiz  to  Madrid. 

6.  A between  two  infinitives  signifies  the  difference  of 
their  results: 

Va  mucho  de  decir  a hacer,  de  There  is  a great  difference  he-- 
prometer  a cumplir  ¿ no  es  tween  saying  and  doings 
verdad?  between  promising  and  ful- 

filling f is  there  not? 

Ante. 

1.  Ante  signifies  in  the  presence  of: 

Compareció  ante  el  juez,  He  appeared  before  the  fudge. 

2.  Ante  is  used  in  regard  to  order  or  preference: 

Nuestro  deber  es  ante  todo.  Our  duty  comes  first  of  all. 

3.  Instead  of  ante,  the  Spaniards  frequently  use  antes 
de  (denoting  priority  of  order,  rank,  or  time): 

Antes  de  los  condes  van  los  Marquises  go  before  counts. 
marqueses, 

Antes  de  la  comida,  Before  dinner. 

Bajo. 

Bajo,  under ^ below,  underneath,  beneath,  denotes  situa- 
tion; figuratively  it  signifies  guarantee,  protection,  or 
subordination: 


La  puerta  está  bajo  la  ventana,  The  door  is  under  the  window. 
Estoy  bajo  sus  órdenes,  I am  under  his  orders. 


520 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


Con. 

1.  Con,  with,  denotes  accompaniment  or  means: 

Salió  con  su  padre,  He  went  out  with  his  father, 

Le  hirió  con  una  espada,  He  wounded  him  with  a sword. 

2.  Con,  in  connection  with  dar,  forms  idiomatic  mean- 
ings: 

Dió  con  ella  en  la  calle.  He  met  her  in  the  street, 

Le  dió  con  la  puerta  en  la  He  shut  the  door  in  his  face. 

cara, 

3.  Con,  with  the  infinitive,  means  by  or  although: 

Con  enseñar  se  aprende,  One  learns  by  teaching. 


De. 

1.  De  signifies  of  or  from: 

Lo  he  recibido  de  él,  I received  it  from  him. 

2.  It  often  connects  words  which  in  English  are  given 
by  compoimd  expressions: 

Un  buzón  de  correos,  A letter-box, 

Un  reloj  de  oro,  A gold  watch, 

El  tren  del  norte.  The  northern  train, 

3.  De  denotes  cause — ^for,  with,  from: 

No  podia  moverme  de  frío,  / could  not  move  on  account  of 

the  cold. 


4.  De  IS  used  especially  after  a number  of  adjectives 
and  participles  to  express  physical  or  moral  peculiarity, 
the  way  of  dressing,  or  abundance  and  scarcity: 


Está  ciego  de  furor. 

Estaba  vestido  de  luto. 
Este  país  es  pobre  de  agua. 
Es  sordo  de  un  oído. 

La  niña  de  los  ojos  negros. 


He  is  blind  with  fury. 

He  was  dressed  in  mourning. 
This  country  is  poor  in  water. 
He  is  deaf  in  one  ear. 

The  girl  with  the  black  eyes. 


The  Spanish  Language, 


521 


5.  De  must  be  used  with  the  passive  instead  of  por 
* when  a feeling  or  mental  action  is  referred  to: 

Es  amado  de  sus  amigos  y He  is  beloved  by  his  friends  and 
odiado  de  sus  enemigos,  hated  by  his  enemies, 

I. 

6.  De  is  used  in  exclama'^ions: 

: ¡ Infeliz  de  mí!  0/t,  l unhappy  man! 

7.  De  is  used  before  infinitives,  especially  after  haber, 
^ acabar,  etc.: 

! Ha  de  venir,  He  must  come. 

Acabo  de  llegar,  / just  arrived. 

' Es  de  esperar.  It  is  to  be  hoped, 

j 

8.  De  signifies  office  or  profession: 

Papá  es  médico  de  profesión.  My  father  is  a physician  by  pro- 
I fession. 

[ Está  de  embajador  de  Suiza  en  He  is  ambassador  of  Switzerland 
Paris,  in  Paris, 

^ Desde. 

Desde  signifies  from  as  a starting-point  of  either  place 
or  time: 

Me  acompañó  desde  su  casa  He  accompanied  me  from  his 
hasta  el  teatro,  house  to  the  theatre. 


En. 

1.  En  signifies  rest  in,  at,  on;  or  relates  to  place  or 
time: 

El  señor  Don  Julio  vive  en  Mr.  Julius  lives  in  Barcelona. 
Barcelona, 

Llegaré  de  hoy  en  ocho  días,  I shall  arrive  a week  from  to- 
day. 

I Salimos  en  el  mes  de  julio,  y We  start  in  the  month  of  July^ 
volveremos  en  octubre,  aíid  shall  return  in  October, 

2,  En  refers  to  occupation; 


522 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


Don  Julio  trabaja  en  relojes,  Don  Julio  works  in  watches. 


3.  En  is  used  idiomatically: 


De  día  en  día, 

De  año  en  año, 

De  tiempo  en  tiempo. 
De  hoy  en  quince  días. 
De  cuando  en  cuando. 
En  general, 

En  particular. 


From  day  to  day. 

From  year  to  year. 

From  time  to  time, 

A fortnight  from  to-day. 
Sometimes,  Every  now  and  then. 
Generally, 

Especially, 


Hacia. 

Hacia,  towards,  denotes  direction  in  the  material  and 
moral  sense: 

Voy  hacia  casa,  I am  going  homewards. 

Hacia  mediodía,  Towards  noon. 

Hasta. 

Hasta,  tül,  until,  up  to,  as  far  as,  denotes  time,  place, 
or  degree: 

Till  to-morrow. 

I go  as  far  as  Madrid, 

Au  revoir,  till  I see  you  again, 

Para. 

1.  Para,  for,  to,  denotes  direction  or  destination: 

Esta  carta  es  para  Don  Carlos,  This  letter  is  for  Don  Carlos, 

Pienso  partir  para  Italia,  I think  of  starting  for  Italy, 

Es  hombre  para  mucho.  He  is  a clever  man. 

No  es  hombre  para  nada.  He  is  good  for  nothing, 

2.  Para  denotes  aim  or  purpose: 

I study  in  order  to  learn. 


Hasta  mañana. 
Voy  hasta  Madrid, 
Hasta  la  vista. 
Hasta  luego, 


Estudio  para  aprender, 


The  Spanish  Language. 


523 


3.  Para  con  is  used  in  comparisons: 

I Qtté  soy  yo  para  con  su  her-  What  am  I in  comparison  with 
mano?  your  brother? 

4.  Para,  in  connection  with  estar,  denotes  to  be  on 
the  point  of. 

Estoy  para  partir,  I am  on  the  point  of  leaving. 

Estaba  para  decirle  que  callase,  I was  on  the  point  of  telling  him 

to  be  silent. 


Por. 

1.  Por,  for,  by,  is  used — like  par  in  French — ^with 
passive  verbs,  denoting  bodily,  and  not  mental,  ac- 
tions: 

Este  cuadro  fué  pintado  por  This  picture  was  painted  by 
Murillo,  Murillo. 

Mental  actions  are  expressed  by  de.  Compare  re- 
marks on  de. 

2.  Por  denotes  the  motive,  aim,  or  manner  of  an 
action: 

Lo  hace  por  temor.  He  does  it  from  fear. 

3.  Por  refers  to  local  descriptions: 

Fuimos  por  Cádiz  a Madrid,  Madrid  by  way  of 

Cadiz. 

Perdí  mi  sortija  por  la  calle,  I lost  my  ring  in  the  street. 

4.  Por  denotes  price,  exchange,  buying,  selling, 
equality,  etc.: 

Prestan  dinero  a cinco  o a seis  They  loan  money  at  five  or  six 
por  ciento,  per  cent. 

5.  Por,  in  connection  with  estar,  denotes  an  action 
which  is  or  ought  to  be  done: 

Este  cuarto  está  por  alquilar.  This  room  is  {still)  to  be  let. 


524 


The  Rosenthal  Method, 


6.  Por,  in  connection  with  an  adjective  and  que  gov- 
erns the  subjunctive  mood  and  signifies  although^ 
though: 

Por  rico  que  sea,  no  le  puedo  Rich  though  Qiowever  rich)  he  may 
estimar,  he,  I cannot  esteem  him, 

7.  Observe  the  peculiar  expressions: 

Enviar  por  el  médico.  To  send  for  the  physician. 

Mandar  por  vino,  To  send  for  wine. 

Venir  por  algo,  por  alguien.  To  call  for  someone. 

Conjunctions. 

Spanish  grammarians  divide  the  conjunctions  into  the 
following  nine  classes: 

1.  Conjunciones  Copulativas. 

Y,  and,  que,  that, 

ni,  noty  not  even,  también,  alsOy  too, 

ni — ni,  neither — nor,  tampoco,  neither,  not  either, 

2,  Conjunciones  Disjuntivas. 

o,  or,  ya — ya,  now — now, 

o — o,  either — or,  sea  que,  whether,  while. 

ya,  already,  si  quiera,  at  least,  although, 

though. 


3.  Conjunciones  Adversativas. 


pero,  hut, 
mas,  hut. 

sólo  que,  only  that, 
sólo  si  que,  only  that. 


sino,  hut. 
no  sino,  hut. 
aunque,  although. 
bienque,  though,  although. 


como,  as. 
así  como, 
tal  como. 


4.  Conjunciones  Comparativas. 

tanto — como,  as  well — as. 
que,  as. 

según,  as,  according  to. 


as. 


525 


The  Spanish  Language. 


5.  Conjunciones  Ilativas. 


pues,  aSf  since^  therefore. 
por  lo  mismo,  therefore. 
por  lo  tanto,  therefore. 
con  que,  so,  therefore. 
luego,  then,  furthermore. 


de  or  por  consiguiente,  conse^ 
quently. 

de  modo  que,  1 therefore. 
de  manera  que,  / consequently. 


6.  Conjunciones  Continuativas. 

así  que,  so  that,  so.  entre  tanto  que,  while. 

a más  de,  besides,  except.  mientras  que,  while. 

además  de,  moreover.  mientras  tanto,  as  long  as. 

7,  Conjunciones  Condicionales. 
como,  if. 

con  tal  que,  provided  that. 

8.  Conjunciones  Causales. 

que,  for.  puesto  que,  since,  supposed  that. 

porque,  because,  as.  supuesto  que,  provided  that. 

pues,  because,  as,  for.  ya  que,  as  therefore,  since. 


si,  if,  whether. 
cuando,  when. 


9.  Conjunciones  Finales. 


que,  that,  in  order  that.  a fin  de  que,  in  order  that. 

para  que,  in  order  that.  con  que,  so  then. 


It  will  be  seen  that  one  and  the  same  conjunction 
may  belong  to  different  classes,  and  that  most  of  the 
conjunctions  are,  in  fact,  prepositions  or  adverbs  (with 
or  without  que). 


Principal  Conjunctions  formed  with  que. 


A fin  de  que,  in  order  that. 

a no  ser  que,  \ , 

^ > unless. 

a menos  que,  J 

antes  que,  before. 

así  que,  so  that,  so. 


En  vez  de  que,  instead  of. 
entre  tanto  que,  while. 
excepto  que,  excepting. 
hasta  que,  urUil. 
luego  que,  as  soon  as. 


526 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


aunque,  1 although. 

bien  que,  J 

caso  que,  in  case  that. 

como  quiera  que,  however. 

con  que,  so,  therefore. 

con  motivo  que,  so  that. 

con  tal  que,  provided  that. 

cuanto  más  que,  the  more  since. 

dado  que,  in  case  that. 

dado  caso  que,  supposing  that. 

de  manera  que,  1 

de  modo  que,  so  that. 

de  suerte  que,  j 

desde  que,  since. 


mientras  que,  while. 

no  obstante  que,  notwithstanding. 

para  que,  in  order  that. 

por — que,  however. 

porque,  because,  in  order  that. 

por  más  que,  however  much. 

por  ménos  que,  1 , , 

> however  httle. 

por  poco  que, 
puesto  que, 
pues  que, 

sea  que,  whether,  while. 
siempre  que,  wherever. 
sin  que,  without. 
supuesto  que,  since. 


Remarks  on  Certain  Conjunctions. 

1.  Y,  and^  is  changed  into  e when  followed  by  a word 
beginning  with  the  vowel  i or  the  syllable  hi: 

Es  hábil  e ingenioso,  He  is  clever  and  inventive. 

Padres  e hijos.  Parents  and  children. 

2.  Pero  and  mas  are  placed  at  the  beginning  of  ad- 
versative sentences,  while  sino  can  be  employed  only 
when  preceded  by  a negative  clause: 

No  es  bianco  sino  pardo,  It  is  not  white,  hut  gray. 

Me  dijo  que  lo  sabiá,  pero  {pr  He  told  me  he  knew  it,  hut  it  does 
mas),  parece  que  no  es  not  seem  to  he  true, 
verdad, 

3.  After  the  following  conjunctions, 


The  Subjunctive  Mood 

is  used  when  uncertainty,  doubt,  possibility,  or  an  in- 
definite future  time  is  expressed: 

Antes  que,  before.  en  caso  de  que,  in  case  that. 

a menos  que,  unless.  hasta  que,  until. 

a fin  de  que,  to  the  end  that.  hasta  donde,  as  far  as. 

aunque,  although.  luego  que,  as  soon  as. 


The  Spanish  Language. 


527 


bien  que,  although. 
como,  wherif  as. 


como  quiera  que,  notwithstand- 
ing. 

con  tal  que,  provided  that. 

cuando,  when. 

dado  que,  granted  that. 


mientras,  while. 
no  sea  que,  lest. 
ojalá,  would  that. 
para  que,  in  order  that. 
por — que,  however. 

siempre  que,  whenever. 
sin  que,  without. 
supuesto  que,  supposing  that. 


Examples. 

Aunque  me  lo  haya  dicho  el  Although  he  may  have  told  me 
otro  día,  no  me  acuerdo  ya  so  the  other  day^  I do  not  re- 
de  ello,  member  it. 

No  volveré  hasta  que  me  ha-  I shall  not  return  till  they  have 
yan  entregado  el  dinero,  handed  me  the  money. 

Cuando  sea  tiempo  le  daré  a V.  When  the  time  comes  I shall  gm 
los  géneros,  you  the  goods. 

Iré  aimque  llueva,  I shall  go^  though  it  may  rain. 

INTERJECTIONS. 

Of  Joy. 


I Ah,  Ah!  Ah^  Ah! 
¡^.quéaleg^-l  ^ 
i Ay  qué  gozo!  J 
¡ Bueno!  Good! 


I Gracias  a Dios!  Thank  God! 
¡ Bendito  sea  Dios!  1 God  he 
I Alabado  sea  Dios!  J praised! 

¡ Vaya,  vaya!  WeU  now! 


Of  Sadness. 


¡ Ah,  ay!  Ah^  ay! 

¡ Ay  qué  pena!  What  a pain! 
¡ Ay  de  mi!  Woe  to  me! 

¡ Ay  de  mi!  Poor  me! 


\ Dios  mío!  Good  heavens! 

I Válgame  Dios!  May  . God  help 
me! 

i Virgen  santísima!  Holy  Virgin! 
¡ Ave  María!  God  forbid! 


528 


The  Rosenlhal  Method. 


Of  Approbation  and  Surprise. 


i Muy  bien!  Very  well! 

¡ Bien  hecho!  Well  done! 
i Me  alegro  mucho!  I am  very 
glad! 

¡ Grandemente!  Splendid! 
i Excelente!  Excellent! 

¡Esun  pasmo! 

. ^ *11  I r Beauhful! 

i Es  una  maravilla!  J 

¡ Está  muy  bien!  It  is  very  well! 

¡ Es  milagro!  Wonderful! 
i Bravo!  Magnificent! 

¡ Viva,  viva!  Hurrah,  hurrah! 

¡ Otra  vez!  Another  time!  En- 
core! 


Zounds! 


i Cáspita! 

¡ Chispas! 

¡ Cáscaras! 

¡ Caracoles! 
i Fuego! 

I Ascuas! 
i Bravo!  Bravo! 

i Oiga!  i calle!  You  don't  say  so! 
i Hola!  Hallo! 

¡ Mire  V. ! Do  you  see! 

¡ Caramba!  Plague! 

¡ Toma!  Indeed!  {Ironically), 


Of  Contempt,  Blame,  and  Disgust. 

¡ Dios  mío!  Good  heavens!  i Guapa  cosa!  A fine  thing! 

I Eso  no  vale  nada!  That  is  I Qué  vergüenza!  What  a shame! 
good  for  nothing! 

¡ Eso  es  bueno!  That  is  good  ¡ Quita  allá!  Get  away! 

indeed!  i Oxte!  Shame! 

i Vaya,  vaya!  Well,  now!  I Calle,  qué  es  1 That  is 

i Que  asco!  How  disgusting!  bueno!  \ very  fine! 

I Grande  hazaña!  A great  feat!  ¡ Vaya  en  gracia!  J {Iron,) 


Of  Anger. 

i Voto  a!  I si  me  enfado!  Don't  i Diantre!  Hang  it! 
make  me  mad! 

j Voto  a chápiro!  I tell  you,  sir!  i Vaya  V.  a pasear!  1 Get 
i Por  diez!  1 The  plague  take  i Anda  enhoramala!  / away! 
I Caramba!  J you!  i Ascuas!  That's  too  bad! 

Of  Exhortation  and  Encouragement. 


i Vaya,  vaya!  Bravely! 

¡ Vamos,  vamos!  Come  on! 


i Guarda,  guarda!  Look  out! 
¡ A un  ladito!  Step  aside! 


The  Spanish  Language, 


529 


i Alerta!  Wide  awake! 

¡ Ea,  venga  alguien!  Somebody 
here! 

i Ea  pues!  Well  now! 
i Ea,  ánimo!  Courage! 
i Basta,  basta!  Enough! 

¡ Quedo,  quedo!  Gently! 


\ Cuidado!  Take  care! 

¡ Fuera,  fuera!  Out  with  him! 

¡ Fuego,  fuego!  Fire! 

¡ Ay,  que  me  matan!  Murder! 
¡ Cógele,  cógele!  Hold  him! 

¡ Acabóse!  It  is  all  over! 


Of  Silence. 


¡ Que  callen!  Quiet! 
i Calla,  calla!  Be  silent! 


¡ Silencio!  Silence! 

¡ Chito,  chitón!  Hush! 


530 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


INDEX. 

The  references  are  to  pages, 
a,  pronunciation  of,  47. 

a,  see  prepositions;  verbs  followed  by  a,  482;  a and  al  with  the 
infinitive,  175,  481. 

Accent,  56,  58. 

Adjectives,  487;  formation  of  the  feminine,  487;  peculiarities  of 
some  adjectives,  488;  position,  489;  comparison,  490;  absolute 
superlative,  492;  possessive  adjectives  and  pronouns,  499; 
demonstrative  adjectives,  501;  adjectives  followed  by  de,  231. 
Adverbs,  514;  comparison,  515;  adverbs  of  affirmation  and  negation, 
516;  adverbial  expressions,  281. 

Age,  mode  of  expression  of,  244,  415. 
ai,  pronunciation  of,  51. 

Alphabet,  46,  393,  a,  b,  c. 

Article,  396;  definite  article  used  in  place  of  our  possessive  pronoun, 
247,  397;  omission  of  article,  400. 
au,  pronunciation  of,  51. 

Augmentative  nouns  and  adjectives,  404. 

Auxiliary  verbs,  408. 
ay,  pronunciation  of,  51. 

B,  pronunciation  of,  51. 

C,  pronunciation  of,  51;  c before  vowels,  49. 

Cardinal  numbers,  100. 

fee,  pronunciation  of,  52. 

ch,  pronunciation  of,  52;  ch  considered  a single  consonant,  59. 

Colors,  151. 

Comparative  of  adjectives,  490;  of  adverbs,  515. 

Compound  forms  of  the  verbs  with  auxiliaries,  see  auxiliary  verbs. 
Con,  see  prepositions  and  infinitive. 

Conditional,  477. 

Conjugation,  see  verbs,  425. 

Conjxmctions,  524;  conjunctions  requiring  the  subjunctive  mood, 
526. 

Conmigo,  see  personal  pronouns,  150,  496. 

Conocer  and  saber,  208. 

Consigo,  see  personal  pronouns,  150,  496. 

Contigo,  see  personal  pronouns,  150,  496. 

Consonants,  51-56. 


The  Spanish  Language, 


S3I 

D,  pronunciation  of,  52;  when  suppressed  in  reflective  verbs,  441. 
Days  of  the  week,  236. 

De,  see  prepositions;  de  used  with  haber,  410;  de  used  before  the 
infinitive,  483;  de  employed  after  ser,  484;  de  as  complement  of 
an  adjective,  231;  de  used  after  a partitive  noun,  401. 

Definite  article,  see  article. 

Demonstrative  adjectives  or  pronouns,  see  pronotms. 

Diminutive  nouns  and  adjectives,  see  nouns. 

Diphthongs,  50. 

Division  of  words,  58. 

Divisions  of  time,  391. 

Don,  329. 

Doña,  329. 

Double  letters,  59. 

E,  pronunciation  of,  47. 

E and  y,  526. 

El  used  by  euphony  instead  of  la,  397;  el,  de  el  (de  ella,  de  ellos,  de 
ellas). 

En,  see  prepositions  and  infinitive;  en  donde,  201. 

Estar,  see  auxiliary  verbs. 

Feminine  gender,  see  nouns. 

Future  perfect,  477. 

Future  tense,  108;  120;  239;  476. 

G,  pronunciation  of,  52,  53. 

Genders,  see  nouns. 

Gerund,  187;  304;  484. 

Government  of  verbs,  446. 

H,  pronunciation  of,  53. 

Haber,  see  auxiliary  verbs,  408. 

Hacer,  180;  214;  the  present  tense  used  after  hace,  278;  hacer,  to 
cause,  to  let,  292. 

Hasta,  1 12;  see  prepositions. 

Hay,  243-245;  41 1. 

Hé  and  he,  132. 

I,  pronunciation  of,  48. 

Imperative  Mood,  486. 

Imperfect  tense,  188;  474;  imperfect  of  the  subjimctive  (ist  and  2nd 
form),  480. 

Indefinite  pronouns,  507. 

Indefinite  article,  see  article,  396. 


532 


The  Rosenthal  Method. 


Indicative  mood,  474. 

Infinitive  mood,  298;  481. 

Interjections,  527. 

Interrogative  pronouns,  506. 

Irregular  verbs,  447. 

J,  pronunciation  of,  53. 

L,  pronunciation  of,  54. 

LI,  pronunciation  of,  54,  59. 

Mandar,  to  send,  292. 

Mas,  184. 

Masculine  gender,  see  nouns. 

May  and  can,  280. 

Months  of  the  year,  236. 

Moods,  see  Indicative,  Subjunctive,  Imperative  and  Infinitive. 
Mucho  and  muy,  159. 

Narrative  tense,  160;  475. 

Negative,  516. 

Neuter  article,  396. 

Neuter  gender,  396. 

No,  66;  118;  516. 

Nouns,  401;  plural,  402;  gender,  403;  augmentative  and  diminutive 
nouns,  404. 

Numbers,  cardinal,  100;  ordinal  numbers,  138. 

Ñ,  pronunciation  of,  54. 

O,  pronunciation  of,  48. 

Ordinal  numbers,  138. 

Otro,  185. 

Para,  122;  522. 

Parecer,  155;  318. 

Participle,  148;  485. 

Passive  verbs,  435. 

Past  Anterior,  476. 

Past  or  '‘Definido,*’  160;  475. 

Pero,  184. 

Personal  verbs  used  impersonally,  296. 

Personal  pronoims,  64;  493;  pleonastic  construction,  496;  use  of 
usted  and  its  substitutes,  496;  reflexive  pronouns,  498;  objective 
pronouns,  498. 

Plural  of  nouns  and  adjectives,  see  nouns  and  adjectives. 

Por,  see  prepositions,  122. 


The  Spanish  Language, 


533 


Porque  and  por  qué,  72. 

Possessive  pronouns,  see  pronouns. 

Prepositions,  517. 

Present  indicative,  120;  278;  470. 

Present  participle,  see  Gerund. 

Present  subjunctive,  see  Subjunctive. 

Pronotms,  personal,  64;  493;  possessive  pronouns,  499;  demonstra- 
tive pronouns,  501;  relative  pronouns,  503;  interrogative  pro- 
nouns, 506;  indefinite  pronouns,  507. 

Pronunciation,  46-59. 

Punctuation,  59. 

Q,  pronunciation  of,  54. 

Que,  see  pronouns  and  conjunctions. 

R,  pronimciation  of,  54. 

Reflexive  pronouns,  see  pronouns. 

Reflexive  verbs,  see  verbs. 

Regular  verbs,  see  verbs. 

Relative  pronouns,  see  pronouns. 

Rr,  59. 

S,  pronimciation  of,  55;  when  suppressed  in  reflexive  verbs,  441. 
Saber  and  conocer,  208. 

Seasons,  182. 

Ser,  see  auxiliary  veros,  97,  408. 

Si  and  si,  91. 

Sino,  184. 

Subjunctive  mood,  134-137;  474,  526. 

Superlative,  see  adjectives  and  adverbs. 

Syllables,  58. 

Tener,  228;  see  auxiliary  verbs,  408. 

Time  of  the  day,  268. 

Triphthongs,  50. 

U,  pronunciation  of,  48. 

Usted,  62;  72;  86;  148;  166. 

Verbs,  regular,  425;  verb-endings,  426;  ist  conjugation,  427;  2nd 
conjugation,  429;  3d  conjugation,  431;  passive  verbs,  435;  use 
of  passive  verbs,  439;  reflexive  verbs,  438;  use  of  reflexive  verbs, 
441;  impersonal  verbs,  442;  irregular  verbs,  447. 

Vez,  veces,  146. 

Y,  pronunciation  of,  55.  See  conjunctions,  524. 

Z,  pronunciation  of,  56. 


1 / )¡  i'  I 


